P632 EN M R-a5-B 312 660 Volume 1 PDF

Easergy MiCOM P632
Transformer Differential Protection Device
P632/EN M/R-a5-B
Version P632 -312 -413/414 -660
Technical Manual
Volume 1 of 2
IMPORTANT INFORMATION
NOTICE: Read these instructions carefully, and look at the equipment to become familiar
with the device before trying to install, operate, or maintain it. The following
special messages may appear throughout this documentation or on the equipment
to warn of potential hazards or to call attention to information that clarifies or
simplifies a procedure.
The addition of this symbol to a Danger or Warning safety label indicates that an
electrical hazard exists, which will result in death or serious injury if the
instructions are not followed.
This is the safety alert symbol. It is used to alert you to a potential personal injury
hazard. Obey all safety messages that follow this symbol to avoid possible injury or
death.
DANGER
DANGER indicates an imminently hazardous situation which, if not avoided,
will result in death or serious injury.
WARNING
WARNING indicates a potentially hazardous situation which, if not avoided,
can result in death or serious injury.
CAUTION
CAUTION indicates a potentially hazardous situation which, if not avoided,
can result in minor or moderate injury with or without equipment damage.
NOTICE
NOTICE, used without safety alert symbol, indicates a potentially hazardous
situation which, if not avoided, can result in equipment damage.
When electrical equipment is in operation, dangerous voltage will be present in

certain parts of the equipment.
DANGER
HAZARD OF ELECTRIC SHOCK, EXPLOSION, OR ARC FLASH
⚫ Only qualified personnel, trained, authorized and familiar with the device
and all the safety instructions in the general Safety Guide (SFTY/5LM/L11
or later version) and appropriate Chapter 5, Chapter 10, Chapter 11,
Chapter 12 and Chapter 13 of this manual, shall work on installation,
connection, commissioning, maintenance or servicing of this device.
Failure to follow these instructions will result in death or serious
injury.
DANGER
⚫ Switch off the auxiliary power supply before any work in the terminal strip
area.
⚫ Switch off all the power supplies in connection to the equipment before
any work in the terminal strip area to isolate the device.
⚫ Do not touch the terminal strip area when equipment is in operation.
⚫ Do not remove or add wires in the terminal strip area when equipment is
in operation.
⚫ Short-circuit the system current transformers before disconnecting wires
to the transformer board (valid only for pin terminals, not required for ring
terminals which have a shortening block).
⚫ A protective conductor (ground/earth) of at least 1.5 mm2 must be
connected to the protective conductor terminal on the power supply board
and on the main relay case.
⚫ Do never remove the protective conductor connection to the device casing
as long as other wires are connected to it.
⚫ Where stranded conductors are used, insulated crimped wire end ferrules
must be employed.
injury.
Note: Regarding the appropriate wiring connections of the equipment refer to the
document Px3x_Grounding_Application_Guide_EN_h.pdf.
The signals MAI N: Bl ocke d/f aul ty and SFMON: War ning (LED) are
permanently assigned to the LEDs labeled OUT OF SERVICE and ALARM and can
be assigned to output relays to indicate the health of the device.
It is recommended that the signals MA IN: Blocke d/faulty and
SFMON : Wa rning ( LED) are communicated to the substation automation
system for alarm purposes, using hardwiring via output relays or the
communication interface.
WARNING
HAZARD OF UNSAFE OPERATION
⚫ Proper and safe operation of this device depends on appropriate shipping
and handling, proper storage, installation and commissioning, and on
careful operation, maintenance and servicing. For this reason only
qualified personnel shall work on or operate this device.
⚫ Any modifications to this device must be in accordance with the manual. If
any other modification is made without the express permission of
Schneider Electric, it will invalidate the warranty, and may render the
product unsafe.
Failure to follow these instructions can result in unintended
equipment operation.
DANGER
In case of usage of the equipment with DHMI*:

⚫ A protective conductor (ground/earth) of at least 1.5 mm2 (US: AWG14 or
thicker) must be connected to the DHMI protective conductor terminal to
link the DHMI and the main relay case; these must be located within the
same substation.
⚫ The DHMI communication cable must not be in contact with hazardous live
parts.
⚫ The DHMI communication cable must not be routed or placed alongside
high-voltage cables or connections. Currents can be induced in the cable
which may result in electromagnetic interference.
⚫ We recommend to use only cables of category CAT6 (or better), which has
been tested up to a length of 10 m.
injury.
* DHMI = Detachable Human Machine Interface

Changes after going to press
P632
Table of Contents
1 Application and Scope ........................................................................................ 1-1

1.1 Overview - P632 ..........................................................................................................1-1
1.2 Including Function Groups in the Configuration .......................................................... 1-4
1.3 Overview of Function Groups - Part 1 ......................................................................... 1-5
1.4 Overview of Function Groups - Part 2 ......................................................................... 1-7
1.5 Control Functions ........................................................................................................ 1-9
1.6 Design .......................................................................................................................1-10
1.7 Configurable Function Keys ...................................................................................... 1-11
1.8 Inputs and Outputs ................................................................................................... 1-12
1.9 Control and Display ...................................................................................................1-13
1.10 Information Interfaces ...............................................................................................1-14
2 Technical Data .................................................................................................... 2-1

2.1 Conformity .................................................................................................................. 2-1
2.2 General Data ...............................................................................................................2-2
2.2.1 General Device Data ..................................................................................................................................... 2-2
2.3 Tests ........................................................................................................................... 2-4
2.3.1 Type Tests ..................................................................................................................................................... 2-4
2.4 Environmental Conditions ........................................................................................... 2-8
2.5 Inputs and Outputs ..................................................................................................... 2-9
2.5.1 Measuring Inputs ........................................................................................................................................... 2-9
2.5.2 Binary Signal Inputs .....................................................................................................................................2-10
2.5.3 IRIG‑B Interface ........................................................................................................................................... 2-11
2.5.4 Direct Current Input .....................................................................................................................................2-11
2.5.5 Resistance Thermometer ............................................................................................................................ 2-11
2.5.6 Direct Current Output ..................................................................................................................................2-11
2.5.7 Output Relays ..............................................................................................................................................2-12
2.5.8 BCD Measured Data Output ........................................................................................................................ 2-12
2.6 Interfaces ..................................................................................................................2-13
2.6.1 Local Control Panel ......................................................................................................................................2-13
2.6.2 PC Interface ................................................................................................................................................. 2-13
2.6.3 Serial Communication Interface .................................................................................................................. 2-13
2.6.4 Ethernet Communication Interface ..............................................................................................................2-14
2.6.5 IRIG‑B Interface ........................................................................................................................................... 2-14
2.7 Information Output ................................................................................................... 2-15
2.8 Settings – Typical Characteristic Data .......................................................................2-16
2.8.1 Main Function .............................................................................................................................................. 2-16
2.8.2 Differential Protection ..................................................................................................................................2-16
2.8.3 Definite-Time and Inverse-Time Overcurrent Protection ............................................................................. 2-16
2.8.4 Time-Voltage Protection .............................................................................................................................. 2-16
2.8.5 Overfluxing Protection .................................................................................................................................2-16
2.9 Deviations ................................................................................................................. 2-17
2.9.1 Deviations of the Operate Values ................................................................................................................ 2-17
2.9.2 Deviations of the Timer Stages ................................................................................................................... 2-19
2.9.3 Deviations of Measured Data Acquisition .................................................................................................... 2-19
2.10 Resolution of the Fault Data Acquisition ................................................................... 2-20
2.10.1 Time Resolution ...........................................................................................................................................2-20
2.10.2 Currents .......................................................................................................................................................2-20
2.10.3 Voltage ........................................................................................................................................................ 2-20
P632/EN M/R-a5-B // P632‑312‑660 1

P632 Table of Contents
2.11 Recording Functions ................................................................................................. 2-21

2.11.1 Organization of the Recording Memories .................................................................................................... 2-21
2.12 Power Supply ............................................................................................................ 2-23
2.13 Current Transformer Specifications .......................................................................... 2-24
2.13.1 Symbols .......................................................................................................................................................2-24
2.13.2 General Equations ....................................................................................................................................... 2-25
2.13.3 Transformer Differential Protection ............................................................................................................. 2-26
3 Operation ............................................................................................................3-1
3.1 Modular Structure ....................................................................................................... 3-1
3.2 Operator-Machine Communication ............................................................................. 3-3
3.3 Cyber Security (Function Group CS) ............................................................................3-4
3.3.1 Users, Roles and Rights for Easergy MiCOM P30 ........................................................................................... 3-4
3.3.2 Cyber Security Implementation ..................................................................................................................... 3-5
3.4 Configuration of the Local Control Panel (Function Group LOC) ..................................3-7
3.4.1 Bay Panel .......................................................................................................................................................3-7
3.4.2 Operation Panel .............................................................................................................................................3-9
3.4.3 Fault Panel ...................................................................................................................................................3-10
3.4.4 Overload Panel ............................................................................................................................................ 3-11
3.4.5 Selection of the Control Point ...................................................................................................................... 3-12
3.4.6 Configurable Clear Key ................................................................................................................................ 3-12
3.5 Communication Interfaces ........................................................................................ 3-13
3.5.1 PC Interface (Function Group PC) ................................................................................................................ 3-14
3.5.2 Communication Interface 1 (Function Group COMM1) ................................................................................ 3-15
3.5.3 Communication Interface 2 (Function Group COMM2) ................................................................................ 3-24
3.5.4 Communication Interface IEC 61850 (Function Groups IEC and GOOSE) .................................................... 3-26
3.5.5 Ethernet Board ............................................................................................................................................ 3-41
3.6 IRIG-B Clock Synchronization (Function Group IRIGB) ...............................................3-45
3.7 Configurable Function Keys (Function Group F_KEY) ................................................ 3-46
3.8 Configuration and Operating Mode of the Binary Inputs (Function Group INP) ......... 3-48
3.9 Measured Data Input (Function Group MEASI) .......................................................... 3-50
3.9.1 Direct Current Input on the Analog (I/O) Module Y ...................................................................................... 3-51
3.9.2 Input for Connection of a Resistance Thermometer .................................................................................... 3-54
3.10 Configuration, Operating Mode, and Blocking of the Output Relays (Function Group
OUTP) ........................................................................................................................3-56
3.10.1 Configuration of the Output Relays ............................................................................................................. 3-56
3.10.2 Operating Mode of the Output Relays ......................................................................................................... 3-56
3.10.3 Blocking the Output Relays ......................................................................................................................... 3-57
3.10.4 Testing the Output Relays ........................................................................................................................... 3-58
3.11 Measured Data Output (Function Group MEASO) ......................................................3-59
3.11.1 General Settings ..........................................................................................................................................3-59
3.11.2 BCD Measured Data Output ........................................................................................................................ 3-61
3.11.3 Analog Measured Data Output .................................................................................................................... 3-64
3.11.4 Output of “External” Measured Data ........................................................................................................... 3-70
3.12 Configuration and Operating Mode of the LED Indicators (Function Group LED) ...... 3-71
3.12.1 Configuring the LED Indicators .................................................................................................................... 3-71
3.12.2 Layout of the LED Indicators ........................................................................................................................3-71
3.12.3 Operating Mode of the LED Indicators ......................................................................................................... 3-72
3.13 Main Functions of the P632 (Function Group MAIN) .................................................. 3-74
3.13.1 Conditioning of the Measured Values .......................................................................................................... 3-74
3.13.2 Phase Reversal Function ..............................................................................................................................3-77
3.13.3 Selection of the Residual Current to be Monitored ...................................................................................... 3-78
2 P632/EN M/R-a5-B // P632‑312‑660

Table of Contents P632
3.13.4 Operating Data Measurement ..................................................................................................................... 3-80

3.13.5 Configuring and Enabling the Device Functions .......................................................................................... 3-89
3.13.6 Activation of “Dynamic Parameters” ........................................................................................................... 3-91
3.13.7 Function Blockings .......................................................................................................................................3-91
3.13.8 Multiple Blocking ......................................................................................................................................... 3-93
3.13.9 Blocked/Faulty ............................................................................................................................................. 3-94
3.13.10 Coupling between Control and Protection for the CB Signals ...................................................................... 3-94
3.13.11 Multiple Signaling ........................................................................................................................................ 3-96
3.13.12 Multiple Signaling of the Measuring Circuit Monitoring Function ................................................................. 3-97
3.13.13 Starting Signals and Tripping Logic ............................................................................................................. 3-97
3.13.14 Communication Error .................................................................................................................................3-100
3.13.15 Time Tagging and Clock Synchronization .................................................................................................. 3-101
3.13.16 Resetting Actions .......................................................................................................................................3-102
3.13.17 Assigning Communications Interfaces to Physical Communications Channels .......................................... 3-104
3.13.18 Test Mode ..................................................................................................................................................3-105
3.14 Parameter Subset Selection (Function Group PSS) ................................................. 3-106
3.15 Self-Monitoring (Function Group SFMON) ................................................................3-108
3.15.1 Tests During Start-up ................................................................................................................................ 3-108
3.15.2 Cyclic Tests ................................................................................................................................................3-108
3.15.3 Signals .......................................................................................................................................................3-108
3.15.4 Device Response ....................................................................................................................................... 3-109
3.15.5 Monitoring Signal Memory .........................................................................................................................3-110
3.15.6 Monitoring Signal Memory Time Tag ......................................................................................................... 3-110
3.16 Operating Data Recording (Function Group OP_RC) ............................................... 3-111
3.17 Monitoring Signal Recording (Function Group MT_RC) ............................................ 3-112
3.18 Overload Data Acquisition (Function Group OL_DA) ............................................... 3-113
3.18.1 Overload Duration ..................................................................................................................................... 3-113
3.18.2 Acquiring Measured Overload Data from the Thermal Overload Protection .............................................. 3-114
3.19 Overload Recording (Function Group OL_RC) ..........................................................3-115
3.19.1 Start of Overload Recording ...................................................................................................................... 3-115
3.19.2 Counting Overload Events ......................................................................................................................... 3-115
3.19.3 Time Tagging .............................................................................................................................................3-115
3.19.4 Overload Logging ...................................................................................................................................... 3-116
3.20 Fault Data Acquisition (Function Group FT_DA) ...................................................... 3-117
3.20.1 Running Time and Fault Duration .............................................................................................................. 3-118
3.20.2 Fault Data Acquisition Time .......................................................................................................................3-118
3.20.3 Acquisition of the Fault Currents ............................................................................................................... 3-120
3.20.4 Acquisition of the Differential and Restraining Currents ............................................................................3-121
3.20.5 Fault Data Reset ........................................................................................................................................3-123
3.21 Fault Recording (Function Group FT_RC) ................................................................ 3-124
3.21.1 Start of Fault Recording .............................................................................................................................3-124
3.21.2 Fault Counting ........................................................................................................................................... 3-125
3.21.3 Time Tagging .............................................................................................................................................3-125
3.21.4 Fault Recordings ........................................................................................................................................3-126
3.21.5 Fault Value Recording ............................................................................................................................... 3-127
3.22 Differential Protection (Function Group DIFF) ......................................................... 3-129
3.22.1 Enabling or Disabling Differential Protection ............................................................................................. 3-129
3.22.2 Amplitude Matching ...................................................................................................................................3-130
3.22.3 Vector Group Matching ..............................................................................................................................3-133
3.22.4 Zero-sequence Current Filtering ................................................................................................................3-133
3.22.5 Tripping Characteristics .............................................................................................................................3-135
3.22.6 Rapid (high-set) Differential Protection ..................................................................................................... 3-137
3.22.7 Inrush Stabilization (Harmonic Restraint) .................................................................................................. 3-139
3.22.8 Overfluxing Stabilization ........................................................................................................................... 3-140
P632/EN M/R-a5-B // P632‑312‑660 3

3.22.9 Saturation Discriminator ............................................................................................................................3-142

3.22.10 Measured Operating Data of Differential Protection ..................................................................................3-142
3.23 Ground Differential Protection (Function Groups REF_1 and REF_2) ....................... 3-144
3.23.1 Enabling or Disabling Ground Differential Protection ................................................................................ 3-144
3.23.2 Blocking ground differential protection ..................................................................................................... 3-144
3.23.3 Amplitude Matching ...................................................................................................................................3-145
3.23.4 Operating Modes ....................................................................................................................................... 3-147
3.23.5 Idiff>>> Threshold ....................................................................................................................................3-151
3.23.6 Applying Current Transformer Supervision ................................................................................................3-151
3.23.7 Measured Operating Data of Ground Differential Protection ..................................................................... 3-151
3.23.8 Protection of Autotransformers ................................................................................................................. 3-152
3.24 Definite-Time Overcurrent Protection (Function Groups DTOC1 and DTOC2) ......... 3-155
3.24.1 Enabling or Disabling DTOC Protection ......................................................................................................3-155
3.24.2 Phase Current Stages ................................................................................................................................ 3-157
3.24.3 Negative-Sequence Current Stages ...........................................................................................................3-159
3.24.4 Residual Current Stages ............................................................................................................................ 3-160
3.24.5 General Starting ........................................................................................................................................ 3-162
3.24.6 Counters of the DTOC Protection Function ................................................................................................ 3-162
3.25 Inverse-time Overcurrent Protection (Function Groups IDMT1 and IDMT2) ............ 3-163
3.25.1 Enabling or Disabling IDMT Protection .......................................................................................................3-163
3.25.2 Time-Dependent Characteristics ............................................................................................................... 3-165
3.25.3 Phase Current Stage ..................................................................................................................................3-169
3.25.4 Negative-Sequence Current Stage ............................................................................................................ 3-170
3.25.5 Residual Current Stage ..............................................................................................................................3-172
3.25.6 Hold Time .................................................................................................................................................. 3-173
3.25.7 General Starting ........................................................................................................................................ 3-174
3.25.8 Counters of the IDMT Protection Function ................................................................................................. 3-175
3.26 Thermal Overload Protection (Function Group THRM1) .......................................... 3-176
3.26.1 Enabling or Disabling Thermal Overload Protection .................................................................................. 3-176
3.26.2 Readiness of Thermal Overload Protection ................................................................................................3-177
3.26.3 Selection of Current ...................................................................................................................................3-177
3.26.4 Tripping Characteristics .............................................................................................................................3-178
3.26.5 Coolant Temperature Acquisition .............................................................................................................. 3-179
3.26.6 Warning Signal .......................................................................................................................................... 3-181
3.27 Time-Voltage Protection (Function Group V<>) ..................................................... 3-183
3.27.1 Disabling and Enabling V<> Protection .....................................................................................................3-183
3.27.2 V<> Protection Readiness .........................................................................................................................3-183
3.27.3 Voltage Monitoring .................................................................................................................................... 3-183
3.28 Over-/Underfrequency Protection (Function Group f<>) ........................................ 3-186
3.28.1 Disabling or Enabling Over‑/Underfrequency Protection ............................................................................3-186
3.28.2 Undervoltage Blocking and Evaluation Time ............................................................................................. 3-187
3.28.3 Operating Modes of Over-/Underfrequency Protection .............................................................................. 3-187
3.28.4 Frequency Monitoring ................................................................................................................................3-187
3.28.5 Frequency Monitoring Combined with Differential Frequency Gradient Monitoring (df/dt) ........................3-187
3.28.6 Frequency Monitoring Combined with Mean Frequency Gradient Monitoring (Δf/Δt) ................................ 3-188
3.28.7 fmin/fmax Measurement ...............................................................................................................................3-190
3.29 Overfluxing Protection (Function Group V/f) ........................................................... 3-191

3.29.1 Enabling or Disabling Overfluxing Protection ............................................................................................ 3-191
3.29.2 Conditioning the Measured Value ..............................................................................................................3-191
3.29.3 Fixed-time Warning Stage ......................................................................................................................... 3-192
3.29.4 Fixed-time Tripping Stage ......................................................................................................................... 3-192
3.29.5 Variable-time Tripping Stage ..................................................................................................................... 3-192
3.30 Current Transformer Supervision (Function Group CTS) ......................................... 3-197
3.30.1 Enabling or Disabling the CTS Function .....................................................................................................3-197
4 P632/EN M/R-a5-B // P632‑312‑660

3.30.2 Blocking CTS ..............................................................................................................................................3-197

3.30.3 Monitoring Condition ................................................................................................................................. 3-198
3.30.4 Signaling and Indication ............................................................................................................................ 3-199
3.30.5 Reset ......................................................................................................................................................... 3-200
3.30.6 Multiple Signaling from the CTS Function .................................................................................................. 3-201
3.31 Measuring-Circuit Monitoring (Function Groups MCM_1 and MCM_2) ..................... 3-202
3.31.1 Enabling or Disabling Measuring-Circuit Monitoring .................................................................................. 3-202
3.31.2 Measuring-Circuit Monitoring .....................................................................................................................3-202
3.31.3 Multiple Signaling from the Measuring-Circuit Monitoring Function .......................................................... 3-203
3.32 Circuit Breaker Failure Protection (Function Groups CBF_1 and CBF_2) ..................3-204
3.32.1 Assigning Transformer Ends ...................................................................................................................... 3-204
3.32.2 Assigning Circuit Breakers .........................................................................................................................3-204
3.32.3 Assigning the Trip Command .....................................................................................................................3-204
3.32.4 Enabling or Disabling the CBF Function .....................................................................................................3-204
3.32.5 Readiness of Circuit Breaker Protection .................................................................................................... 3-205
3.32.6 Detecting a CB Tripping .............................................................................................................................3-206
3.32.7 Current flow monitoring .............................................................................................................................3-206
3.32.8 Evaluation of CB Status Signals .................................................................................................................3-207
3.32.9 Startup Criteria ..........................................................................................................................................3-209
3.32.10 Trip Commands ......................................................................................................................................... 3-212
3.32.11 Starting Trigger ......................................................................................................................................... 3-212
3.32.12 Fault Behind CB Protection ........................................................................................................................ 3-213
3.32.13 CB Synchronization Supervision ................................................................................................................ 3-213
3.33 Limit Value Monitoring (Function Group LIMIT) ....................................................... 3-215
3.33.1 Enabling or Disabling the Limit Value Monitoring Function ....................................................................... 3-215
3.33.2 Monitoring the Linearized Measured DC Values ........................................................................................ 3-215
3.33.3 Monitoring the Measured Temperature Value ........................................................................................... 3-216
3.34 Limit Value Monitoring (Function Groups LIM_1 and LIM_2) .................................... 3-218
3.34.1 Monitoring Minimum and Maximum Phase Currents ................................................................................. 3-218
3.35 Transformer Monitoring (Function Group TRMON) .................................................. 3-220
3.36 Programmable Logic (Function Groups LOGIC and LOG_2) ..................................... 3-221
3.37 Control and Monitoring of Switchgear Units (Function Groups DEV01 to DEV03) ... 3-229
3.37.1 Bay Type Selection .................................................................................................................................... 3-229
3.37.2 Enable for Switch Commands Issued by the Control Functions ................................................................. 3-231
3.37.3 Designation of External Devices ................................................................................................................3-233
3.37.4 Defining a Bay Panel Type .........................................................................................................................3-234
3.37.5 Processing Status Signals from Manually Operated Switchgear Units ....................................................... 3-235
3.37.6 Functional Sequence for Controllable Switchgear Units ............................................................................ 3-236
3.38 Interlocking Logic (Function Group ILOCK) ..............................................................3-249
3.38.1 IEC 61850 Reporting ..................................................................................................................................3-250
3.39 Single-Pole Commands (Function Group CMD_1) ....................................................3-252
3.40 Single-Pole Signals (Function Group SIG_1) ............................................................ 3-253
3.40.1 Acquisition of Binary Signals for Control ....................................................................................................3-254
3.41 Binary Counts (Function Group COUNT) ..................................................................3-259
3.41.1 Enable/Disable the Counting Function .......................................................................................................3-259
3.41.2 Debouncing ............................................................................................................................................... 3-259
3.41.3 Counting Function ..................................................................................................................................... 3-259
3.41.4 Transmitting the Counter Values via Communications Interface ...............................................................3-259
3.41.5 Counter Values Reset ................................................................................................................................ 3-260
4 Design .................................................................................................................4-1
4.1 Designs ....................................................................................................................... 4-2
4.2 Dimensional Drawings ................................................................................................ 4-4
P632/EN M/R-a5-B // P632‑312‑660 5

4.2.1 Dimensional Drawings for the 40 TE Case .....................................................................................................4-4

4.2.2 Dimensional Drawings for the 84 TE Case .....................................................................................................4-6
4.2.3 Detachable HMI ............................................................................................................................................. 4-7
4.3 Hardware Modules ...................................................................................................... 4-9
5 Installation and Connection ................................................................................ 5-1

5.1 Unpacking and Packing ...............................................................................................5-4
5.2 Checking Nominal Data and Design Type ................................................................... 5-5
5.3 Location Requirements ............................................................................................... 5-6
5.3.1 Environmental Conditions ..............................................................................................................................5-6
5.3.2 Mechanical Conditions ...................................................................................................................................5-6
5.3.3 Electrical Conditions for Auxiliary Voltage of the Power Supply .................................................................... 5-6
5.3.4 Electromagnetic Conditions ...........................................................................................................................5-6
5.4 Installation .................................................................................................................. 5-7
5.5 Protective and Operational Grounding ......................................................................5-14
5.6 Connection ................................................................................................................5-16
5.6.1 Connecting Measuring and Auxiliary Circuits .............................................................................................. 5-16
5.6.2 Connecting the IRIG‑B Interface .................................................................................................................. 5-21
5.6.3 Connecting the Communication Interfaces ..................................................................................................5-21
5.7 Location and Connection Diagrams .......................................................................... 5-26
5.7.1 Location Diagrams P632‑413/414 ................................................................................................................5-26
5.7.2 Terminal Connection Diagrams P632‑413/414 ............................................................................................ 5-26
6 Local Control (HMI) ............................................................................................. 6-1

6.1 Local Control Panel (HMI) ............................................................................................6-1
6.2 Display and Keypad .................................................................................................... 6-2
6.2.1 Text Display ...................................................................................................................................................6-2
6.2.2 Display Illumination ....................................................................................................................................... 6-2
6.2.3 Contrast of the Display .................................................................................................................................. 6-2
6.2.4 Short Description of Keys .............................................................................................................................. 6-3
6.3 Display Levels ............................................................................................................. 6-5
6.4 Availability of the Bay Panel ....................................................................................... 6-6
6.5 Display Panels .............................................................................................................6-7
6.6 Menu Tree and Data Points ......................................................................................... 6-8
6.7 List Data Points ........................................................................................................... 6-9
6.8 Note Concerning the Step-by-Step Descriptions ....................................................... 6-10
6.9 Configurable Function Keys ...................................................................................... 6-11
6.9.1 Configuration of the Function Keys F1 to Fx ................................................................................................ 6-11
6.9.2 Function Keys F1 to Fx as Control Keys ....................................................................................................... 6-13
6.10 Changing Between Display Levels ............................................................................ 6-14
6.11 How to use Cyber Security Features ......................................................................... 6-15
6.11.1 Usage .......................................................................................................................................................... 6-15
6.12 Control at Panel Level ............................................................................................... 6-17
6.12.1 Bay Panel .....................................................................................................................................................6-17
6.13 Control at the Menu Tree Level .................................................................................6-21
6.13.1 Navigation in the Menu Tree ....................................................................................................................... 6-21
6.13.2 Switching Between Address Mode and Plain Text Mode .............................................................................. 6-22
6.13.3 Change-Enabling Function ...........................................................................................................................6-23
6.13.4 Changing Parameters .................................................................................................................................. 6-26
6.13.5 List Parameters ........................................................................................................................................... 6-27
6.13.6 Memory Readout ......................................................................................................................................... 6-30
6 P632/EN M/R-a5-B // P632‑312‑660

6.13.7 Resetting ..................................................................................................................................................... 6-33

6.13.8 Password-Protected Control Actions ............................................................................................................ 6-34
6.13.9 Changing the Password ............................................................................................................................... 6-36
7 Settings ...............................................................................................................7-1
7.1 Paramete rs .............................................................................................................. 7-1
7.1.1 D e v i c e I d e n t i f i c a t i o n ............................................................................................................................. 7-4
7.1.2 C o n f i g u r a t i o n P a r a m e t e r s .................................................................................................................. 7-13
7.1.3 F u n c t i o n P a r a m e t e r s ............................................................................................................................ 7-84
8 Information and Control Functions ......................................................................8-1

8.1 Operation ................................................................................................................. 8-1
8.1.1 C y c l i c V a l u e s ............................................................................................................................................ 8-2
8.1.2 C o n t r o l a n d T e s t i n g ............................................................................................................................8-149
8.1.3 O p e r a t i n g D a t a R e c o r d i n g ................................................................................................................8-157
8.2 Ev en ts ................................................................................................................... 8-159
8.2.1 E v e n t C o u n t e r s .................................................................................................................................... 8-159
8.2.2 M e a s u r e d E v e n t D a t a .........................................................................................................................8-162
8.2.3 E v e n t R e c o r d i n g .................................................................................................................................. 8-167
9 IEC 61850 Settings via IED Configurator .............................................................9-1

9.1 Manage IED .................................................................................................................9-2
9.2 IED Details .................................................................................................................. 9-3
9.3 Communications ......................................................................................................... 9-4
9.4 SNTP ........................................................................................................................... 9-5
9.4.1 General Config ...............................................................................................................................................9-5
9.4.2 External Server 1 ...........................................................................................................................................9-5
9.4.3 External Server 2 ...........................................................................................................................................9-5
9.5 Dataset Definitions ..................................................................................................... 9-6
9.6 GOOSE Publishing ....................................................................................................... 9-7
9.6.1 System/LLN0 ................................................................................................................................................. 9-7
9.7 GOOSE Subscribing .....................................................................................................9-9
9.7.1 Mapped Inputs ...............................................................................................................................................9-9
9.8 Report Control Blocks ............................................................................................... 9-12
9.8.1 System/LLN0 ............................................................................................................................................... 9-12
9.9 Controls .....................................................................................................................9-13
9.9.1 Control Objects ............................................................................................................................................9-13
9.9.2 Uniqueness of Control ................................................................................................................................. 9-13
9.10 Measurements .......................................................................................................... 9-15
9.11 Configurable Data Attributes .................................................................................... 9-16
9.11.1 System/LLN0 ............................................................................................................................................... 9-16
10 Commissioning ................................................................................................. 10-1

10.1 Safety Instructions .................................................................................................... 10-1
10.2 Commissioning Tests ................................................................................................ 10-5
10.2.1 Preparation ..................................................................................................................................................10-5
10.2.2 Cyber Security Commission .........................................................................................................................10-7
10.2.3 Testing .........................................................................................................................................................10-9
10.2.4 Checking the Binary Signal Inputs ............................................................................................................... 10-9
10.2.5 Checking the Output Relays ...................................................................................................................... 10-10
10.2.6 Checking the Protection Function ..............................................................................................................10-10
10.2.7 Checking Control Functions ....................................................................................................................... 10-13
P632/EN M/R-a5-B // P632‑312‑660 7

10.2.8 Completing Commissioning ....................................................................................................................... 10-14
11 Troubleshooting ................................................................................................ 11-1
12 Maintenance ..................................................................................................... 12-1

12.1 Maintenance Procedures in the Power Supply Area .................................................. 12-2
12.2 Routine Functional Testing ....................................................................................... 12-4
12.3 Analog Input Circuits .................................................................................................12-5
12.4 Binary Opto Inputs .................................................................................................... 12-6
12.5 Binary Outputs .......................................................................................................... 12-7
12.6 Serial Interfaces ........................................................................................................ 12-8
13 Storage ............................................................................................................. 13-1
14 Accessories and Spare Parts ............................................................................. 14-1
15 Order Information ............................................................................................. 15-1
A1 Function Groups ............................................................................................... A1-1
A2 Internal Signals .................................................................................................A2-1
A3 Glossary ............................................................................................................A3-1
Modules ...................................................................................................................................... A3-1
Symbols ...................................................................................................................................... A3-1
Examples of Signal Names ......................................................................................................... A3-7
Symbols Used ............................................................................................................................. A3-8
A4 Telecontrol Interfaces ....................................................................................... A4-1

A4.1 Telecontrol Interface per EN 60870-5-101 or IEC 870-5-101 (Companion Standard)
.................................................................................................................................. A4-1
A4.1.1 Interoperability ............................................................................................................................................A4-1
A4.2 Communication Interface per IEC 60870-5-103 ........................................................ A4-9
A4.2.1 Interoperability ............................................................................................................................................A4-9
A5 List of Bay Types .............................................................................................. A5-1

A5.1 Key to the List of Bay Types ..................................................................................... A5-1
A5.2 Predefined Bay Types ............................................................................................... A5-4
A5.2.1 Feeder Bays ................................................................................................................................................ A5-4
A5.2.2 Bus Sectionalizer Bays ............................................................................................................................ A5-188
A5.2.3 Bus Coupler Bays .................................................................................................................................... A5-270
A5.2.4 Bus Coupler and Sectionalizer Bays ........................................................................................................ A5-316
A5.2.5 Busbar Measurement Bays ......................................................................................................................A5-320
A5.2.6 Busbar Grounding Bays ........................................................................................................................... A5-358
A5.2.7 Other Bay Types ......................................................................................................................................A5-362
A6 P632 Version History ........................................................................................ A6-1
8 P632/EN M/R-a5-B // P632‑312‑660

P632
1 Application and Scope
1.1 Overview - P632

The P632 differential protection device is intended for the fast and selective
short-circuit protection of transformers, motors, generators and other
installations with 2 windings.
Fig. 1-1: P632 in an 84 TE sized case.
Fig. 1-2: P632 in a 40 TE sized case.
The P632 provides high-speed three-system differential protection using a triple-

slope characteristic and two high-set differential elements in combination with
transformer inrush restraint, overfluxing restraint and through-stabilization.
Amplitude and vector group matching is done just by entering the nominal values
of transformer windings and associated current transformers. An (optional)
overreaching current measuring circuit monitoring function will prevent
unwanted tripping by differential protection for faults in the CT's secondary
circuit.
P632/EN M/R-a5-B // P632‑312‑660 1-1

P632 1 Application and Scope
Phase swapping allows motor / generator protection applications with enlarged

protection zones.
In addition many supplementary protective functions are incorporated in the
devices. These can be individually configured and cancelled.
The relevant protection parameters can be stored in four independent parameter
subsets in order to adapt the protection device to different operating and power
system management conditions.
The control functions are designed for the control of up to three electrically
operated switchgear units (available if 6I6O fitted, only one elsewhere) equipped
with plant status signaling and located in the bay of a medium-voltage substation
(or a high-voltage station with basic topology). The P632 has almost 300
predefined Bay Types stored for selection and it is also possible to load user-
defined bay templates.
The number of external auxiliary devices required is largely minimized by the
integration of binary signal inputs operating from any auxiliary voltage, and
versatile relay output contacts, by the direct connection option for current and
voltage transformers, and by the comprehensive interlocking capabilities. This
simplifies the handling of switch bay protection and control technology from
planning to commission.
During operation, the user-friendly interface makes it easy to set the device
parameters and allows safe operation of the substation by preventing non-
permissible switching operations.
These features give the user the means to adapt the P632 to the protection and
control capacity required in a specific application.
The powerful programmable logic provided by the protection device also makes
it possible to accommodate special applications.
1-2 P632/EN M/R-a5-B // P632‑312‑660

1 Application and Scope P632
Control and Communication 16S 16S 16E CLK Recording and

Monitoring COMM2 IEC Self Monitoring Data Acquisition
COMM1 IRIGB
of up to 3
to SCADA / substation control / RTU / modem ... Overload rec.
switchgear units
via RS485 or Fiber optics
using IEC 60870-5-101, -103, Modbus, DNP3, Courier
52 LGC
resp. CS LIMIT Metering
DEV ILOCK Fault rec.
via RJ45 or Fiber optics using IEC 61850
IP,a
LIM_2 LIM_1
IY,a 27/59 81 24
V<> f<> V/f
IY,b
87G 50 51 50/62BF
REF_2 DTOC2 IDMT2 CBF_2
87 87G 50 51 49 50/62BF
CTS
DIFF REF_1 DTOC1 IDMT1 THRM1 CBF_1
∑ ∑ ∑
IP,b
LGC
LOGIC / LOG2 MCM_1 MCM_2
Optional Always available

26
TRMON SIG_1 CMD_1 MEASI MEASO Transformer Differential Protection
P632
Fig. 1-3: Function diagram.
For a list of all available function groups see the Appendix.
P632/EN M/R-a5-B // P632‑312‑660 1-3

1.2 Including Function Groups in the Configuration

Functions listed in the tables in Section 1.3, (p. 1-5) are self-contained
function groups and can be individually configured or de-configured according to
the specific application requirements by using the Easergy Studio operating
program. Unused or cancelled function groups are hidden to the user, thus
simplifying the menu of the Easergy Studio.
This concept provides a large choice of functions and makes wide-ranging
application of the protection device possible, with just one model version. On the
other hand, simple and clear parameter settings can be made.
In this way the protection and control functions can be included in or excluded
from the configuration.
Example
For example, the current transformer supervision (function group CTS)
● can be included in the configuration by setting
C TS: Function gr oup CTS to With
● can be excluded from the configuration by setting
C TS: Fun ction grou p C TS to Without
1-4 P632/EN M/R-a5-B // P632‑312‑660

1.3 Overview of Function Groups - Part 1

The following tables list the function groups that can be included in or excluded
from the configuration of the P632.
✓ = Standard; (✓) = Ordering option.
Protection functions
ANSI IEC 61850 Function group P632
Abbrev. Description
87T PhsPDIF1 DIFF Differential protection, phase selective 2 wind.
PHAR1 Inrush stabilization (functionality that is part of the ✓

DIFF function group)
87N REF_x Restricted earth-fault protection 2
50TD DtpPhs- / DTOCx Definite-time overcurrent protection, 3 stages, 2

P/ Q/ N DtpEft- / phase-, negative-sequence-, residual/starpoint-
DtpNgsPTCO overcurrent
x
51 P/ ItpPhs- / IDMTx Inverse-time overcurrent protection, one stage, 2

Q/ N ItpEft- / phase-, negative-sequence-, residual/starpoint-
ItpNgsPTCOx overcurrent
49 ThmPTTR1 THRM1 Thermal overload protection 1
27/ 59 VtpPhs- / V<> Time-voltage Protection 1

P/ Q/ N VtpNgs- /
VtpPss- /
VtpRefPTyVx
81 FrqPTyFx f<> Over / Underfrequency protection 1
24 V/f Overfluxing protection 1
50 BF RBRFx CBF_x Circuit breaker failure protection 2
CTS Current transformer supervision 1
30/ 74 AlmGGIO1 MCM_x Measuring-circuit monitoring 2
LIMIT Limit value monitoring 2

LIM_x
TRMON Transformer monitoring ✓
LGC PloGGIOx LOGIC / Programmable logic ✓

LOG_2
P632/EN M/R-a5-B // P632‑312‑660 1-5

Control functions
Abbrev. Description
52 XCBRx / DEV01 to Control and monitoring of up to three switchgear (3)

XSWIx / DEV03 units
CSWIx
CtlGGIO2 CMD_1 Single-pole commands (12)
CtlGGIO1 SIG_1 Single-pole signals (12)
LGC ILOCK Interlocking logic (✓)
Communication functions
Abbrev. Description
16S COMM1, 2 communication interfaces serial, RS 422 / 485 or (✓)

COMM2 fiber optic
CLK IRIGB Time synchronization IRIG-B (✓)
16E IEC Communication interface Ethernet (✓)
16E GosGGIO1 GOOSE IEC 61850 (✓)
CS Cyber Security (✓)
Measured value functions
Abbrev. Description
26 RtdGGIO1 MEASI Analog inputs and outputs (✓)

IdcGGIO1 MEASO ● RTD input (✓)
● 1× Measuring data input 20 mA (✓)
● 2× Measuring data output 20 mA (✓)
1-6 P632/EN M/R-a5-B // P632‑312‑660

1.4 Overview of Function Groups - Part 2

The following tables list the function groups that are generally available for the
P632, and which cannot be excluded from the configuration.
✓ = Standard; (✓) = Ordering option.
Inputs and outputs

P632
ANSI IEC 61850 Function group
Abbrev. Description 40 TE and 84 TE
Measuring inputs
● Phase currents ● 2×3
● Residual current or star-point current ● 2
● Voltage ● 1
Binary inputs and outputs

● INP ● Optical coupler inputs ● 4 … 40
● OUTP ● Output relays ● 8 … 22
P632/EN M/R-a5-B // P632‑312‑660 1-7

General functions
Abbrev. Description
DVICE Device ✓
LOC Local control panel ✓
PC PC link ✓
F_KEY 6 configurable function keys ✓
LED LED indicators ✓
MAIN Main function ✓
LLN0.SGCB PSS Parameter subset selection ✓
SFMON Comprehensive self-monitoring ✓
OP_RC Operating data recording (time-tagged event ✓

logging)
MT_RC Monitoring Signal Recording ✓
OL_DA Overload Data Acquisition ✓
OL_RC Overload recording (time-tagged event logging) ✓
FT_DA Fault data acquisition for a particular, settable point ✓

in time during a fault
PTRCx / FT_RC Fault recording (time-tagged event logging together ✓

RDRE1 with fault value recording of the phase and residual
currents as well as the voltage)
1-8 P632/EN M/R-a5-B // P632‑312‑660

1.5 Control Functions

Control functions are designed for the control of up to 3 electrically operated
switchgear units equipped with electrical check-back signaling.
For the control of switchgear units either the binary inputs or the optional
communication interface or the function keys of the local control panel can be
used.
Up to 12 operation signals can be acquired though binary signal inputs and they
are processed according to their primary significance (e.g. CB readiness). Each
binary signal input for signals from switchgear and single-pole operations can
have the debouncing and chatter suppression from three groups assigned, for
which the debouncing and chatter time can be individually set.
For the acquisition of binary counters, up to four binary inputs may be
configured. The contents of these counters are transmitted cyclically via the
serial link. The counter values are stored so that they are not lost if the supply
voltage should fail. Counting continues from the stored value as the initial value
when the P632 restarts.
The P632 sends control signals only after it has checked the readiness and
validity to carry out such commands, and it then monitors the operating time of
the switchgear units. If the protection device detects that a switchgear unit has
failed, it will signal this information (e.g. by configuration to a LED indicator).
Before a switching command is issued the interlocking logic on the P632 checks
if this new switchgear status corresponds with the bay and station topology. The
interlocking logic is stored in form of bay interlocking, with and without station
interlocking, for each Bay Panel in the default setting. The interlocking conditions
can be adapted to the actual bay and station topology. Interlocking display and
operation correspond to the programmable logic.
When the P632 is included in a station control system the local interlocking can
easily be integrated with the overall system interlocking.
When the P632 is not included in a station control system then bay interlocking is
applied without station interlocking.
If the bay and station topology are found to be valid the switching command is
issued. If a non-permissible status would result from the switching action then
the issuing of such a switching command is refused and an alarm is issued.
If not all binary outputs are required by the bay type then these vacant binary
outputs can be freely utilized for other purposes.
Besides issuing switching commands binary outputs may also be triggered by
persistent commands.
P632/EN M/R-a5-B // P632‑312‑660 1-9

1.6 Design
The P632 is modular in design. The plug-in modules are housed in a robust
aluminum case and electrically interconnected via one analog p/c board and one
digital p/c board.
1-10 P632/EN M/R-a5-B // P632‑312‑660

1.7 Configurable Function Keys

To the right of the text display, there are six freely configurable function keys
available. These may be used for easy control operation access.
P632/EN M/R-a5-B // P632‑312‑660 1-11

1.8 Inputs and Outputs

If at least one binary module X(6I 6O) is fitted, 3 switchgear units can be
controlled by using pre-defined standard bay-types.
The nominal current and voltage values of the measuring inputs on the P632 can
be set with the function parameters.
The nominal voltage range of the optical coupler inputs is 24 to 250 V DC. As an
option binary signal input modules with a higher operate threshold are available.
The auxiliary voltage input for the power supply is also designed for an extended
range. The nominal voltage ranges are 60 to 250 V DC and 100 to 230 V AC. A 24
to 60 V DC version is also available.
All output relays can be utilized for signaling and command purposes.
The optional PT 100 input is lead-compensated, balanced and linearized for
PT 100 resistance thermometers as per IEC 751 / DIN EN 60751.
The optional 0 to 20 mA input provides open-circuit and overload monitoring,
zero suppression defined by a setting, plus the option of linearizing the input
variable via 20 adjustable interpolation points.
Two selectable measured values (cyclically updated measured operating data
and stored measured fault data) can be output as a burden-independent direct
current via the two optional 0 to 20 mA outputs. The characteristics are defined
via 3 adjustable interpolation points allowing a minimum output current (4 mA,
for example) for slave-side open-circuit monitoring, knee-point definition for fine
scaling, and a limitation to lower nominal currents (10 mA, for example). Where
sufficient output relays are available, a selectable measured value can be output
in BCD-coded form by contacts.
1-12 P632/EN M/R-a5-B // P632‑312‑660

1.9 Control and Display

● Local control panel with an LC display containing 4 × 20 alphanumeric
characters.
● 23 LED indicators, 18 of which allow freely configurable function
assignment for the colors red and green. Furthermore there are various
operating modes and flashing functions available.
● PC interface.
● One or two communication interface(s) for connection to a substation
control system (optional).
P632/EN M/R-a5-B // P632‑312‑660 1-13

1.10 Information Interfaces

Information is exchanged through the local control panel, the PC interface, or two
optional communication interfaces (channel 1 and channel 2).
Using the first channel of the communication interfaces (COMM1), the P632 can
be wired either to the substation control system or to a telecontrol system. This
channel is optionally available with a switchable protocol (per IEC 60870‑5‑103,
IEC 870‑5‑101, DNP 3.0, MODBUS or Courier).
The second communication interface (COMM2, communication protocol per
IEC 60870‑5‑103 only) is designed for remote control.
The Ethernet interface for IEC 61850 Edition 1 or Edition 2 is available for
channel 1 as an order informaiton. The Ethernet board module provides Single IP
Ethernet Board or Redundant IP Ethernet Board with RJ45 connection or fiber
optic interface where an Ethernet network can be connected.
External clock synchronization can be accomplished via one of the
communication protocols or by using the optional IRIG‑B input.
1-14 P632/EN M/R-a5-B // P632‑312‑660

P632
2 Technical Data
2.1 Conformity
Notice
Applicable to P632, version -312 -413/414 -660.
Declaration of Conformity
The product designated “P632 Transformer Differential Protection Device” has
been designed and manufactured in conformance with the European standards
EN 60255‑26 and EN 60255‑27 and with the “EMC Directive” and the “Low
Voltage Directive” issued by the Council of the European Community.
P632/EN M/R-a5-B // P632‑312‑660 2-1

P632 2 Technical Data
2.2 General Data
2.2.1 General Device Data
Design
● Surface-mounted case suitable for wall installation, or
● Flush-mounted case for 19″ cabinets and for control panels.
Installation Position
● Vertical ± 30°.
Degree of Protection
Per DIN VDE 0470 and IEC 60529.
● IP 52 for the front panel.
● Flush-mounted case:
o IP 50 for the case (excluding the rear connection area)
o IP 20 for the rear connection area, pin-terminal connection
o IP 10 for the rear connection area, ring-terminal connection
● Surface-mounted case:
o IP 50 for the case
o IP 50 for the fully enclosed connection area with the supplied rubber
grommets fitted
Weight
● 40 TE case: Approx. 7 kg
● 84 TE case: Approx. 11 kg
Dimensions and Connections

See dimensional drawings (Section 4.2, (p. 4-4)), and the location and
terminal connection diagrams (Section 5.7, (p. 5-26)).
Terminals
PC interface (X6)
● EIA RS232 (DIN 41652) connector, type D-Sub, 9-pin
Communication interfaces COMM1, COMM2

● Fiber (X7, X8)
o F-SMA optical fiber connection per IEC 60874‑2 (for plastic fibers), or
o optical fiber connection BFOC-ST® connector 2.5 per IEC 60874‑10‑1 (for
glass fibers).
(ST® is a registered trademark of AT&T Lightguide Cable Connectors.)
● Wire leads (X9, X10)
o M2 threaded terminal ends for wire cross-sections up to 1.5 mm² (US:
AWG16).
2-2 P632/EN M/R-a5-B // P632‑312‑660

2 Technical Data P632
Communication interface IEC 61850

● Fiber (X13, X14)
o Industry Standard Small Form Pluggable (SFP) package, LC duplex
connector optical interface.
● Wire leads (X15)
o RJ45 connector.
● IRIG-B Interface (X11)
o 3 pin terminal block.
Current measuring inputs (conventional inputs)

● Threaded terminal ends, pin-type cable lugs: M5, self-centering with cage
clamp to protect conductor cross-sections ≤ 4 mm² (US: AWG12), or
● Threaded terminal, ring-terminal connection: M4.
Other inputs and outputs

● Threaded terminal ends, pin-type cable lugs: M3, self-centering with cage
clamp to protect conductor cross-sections 0.2 to 2.5 mm² (US: AWG25 to
AWG14), or
● Threaded terminal ends, ring-type cable lugs: M4.
Creepage Distances and Clearances

● Per IEC 60255-27.
● Pollution degree 3, working voltage 250 V,
● overvoltage category III, impulse test voltage 5 kV.
P632/EN M/R-a5-B // P632‑312‑660 2-3

2.3 Tests
2.3.1 Type Tests
2.3.1.1 Electromagnetic Compatibility (EMC)
Conducted Emission
Per IEC 60255-26 and CISPR 22 Class A.
● 0.15 - 0.5 MHz, 79 dBμV (quasi peak) 66 dBμV (average).
● 0.5 - 30 MHz, 73 dBμV (quasi peak) 60 dBμV (average).
Radiated Emission
Per IEC 60255-26 and CISPR 11 Class A.
● 30 - 230 MHz, 40 dBμV / m at 10 m measurement distance.
● 230 - 1 GHz, 47 dBμV / m at 10 m measurement distance.
100 kHz and 1 MHz Damped Oscillatory Test

Per IEC 60255-26 and IEC 61000-4-18. level 3.
● Frequency: 100 kHz and 1 MHz.
● Common mode test level: ±2.5 kV.
● Differential mode test level : ±1 kV.
Immunity to Electrostatic Discharge

Per IEC 60255-26 and IEC 61000-4-2, severity level 4.
● 15 kV discharge in air to user interface, display, to all communication ports
(outer earthed shell).
● 8 kV contact discharge to any metal part of the front of the product.
Immunity to Radiated Electromagnetic Field

● 10 V / m, 80 MHz to 1 GHz and 1.4 GHz to 2.7 GHz with 1 kHz 80 % AM.
● Spot tests at 80 MHz, 160 MHz, 380 MHz, 450 MHz, 900 MHz, 1850 MHz,
and 2150 MHz.
Electrical Fast Transient or Burst Test

Per IEC 60255-26, Zone A.
● ±4 kV, 5 kHz applied directly to auxiliary supply, CTs, VTs, opto inputs,
output relays.
● ±2 kV, 5 kHz applied to communication ports.
Per IEC 61000-4-4, Severity level 4.
● ±4.0 kV, 5 kHz applied to all power supply and earth port.
● ±2.0 kV, 5 kHz applied to all other ports.
EFT/Burst waveform parameter.
● Rise time of one pulse: 5 ns.
● Impulse duration (50 % value): 50 ns.
● Burst duration: 15 ms.
● Burst cycle: 300 ms.
● Source impedance: 50 Ω.
2-4 P632/EN M/R-a5-B // P632‑312‑660

Power Frequency Immunity

Per IEC 60255-26, severity Zone A.
Phase-to-phase
● RMS value 150 V.
● Coupling resistance 100 Ω.
● Coupling capacitor 0.1 μF, for 10 s.
Phase-to-ground
● RMS value 300 V.
● Coupling resistance 220 Ω.
● Coupling capacitor 0.47 μF, for 10 s.
To comply with this standard, it is suggested to set the parameter (010 220)
IN P: F il ter to 6 [steps].
Surge Immunity Test

Per IEC 60255-26 and IEC 61000-4-5, severity Zone A or level 4.
● ±4 kV line to earth and ±2 kV line to line for power supply, CTs, VTs, opto
inputs and output contacts.
● ±4 kV cable shielded layer to ground for communication ports.
Surge waveform parameter.
● Open-circuit voltage front time / time to half-value: 1.2 / 50 μs.
● Short-circuit current front time / time to half-value: 8 / 20 μs.
CDN parameter.
● 12 Ω / 9 uF (line to earth) and 2 Ω / 18 uF (line to line) for power supply
port.
● 42 Ω / 0.5 uF (line to earth) and 42 Ω / 0.5 uF (line to line) for IO ports.
● 2 Ω cable shielding layer to ground for shielding communication ports.
Conducted Immunity Test

● Test level: 10 V.
● Test frequency range: 150 kHz - 80 MHz.
● Modulation: 1 kHz sine wave, 80 % AM modulated.
● Spot test frequency: 27 MHz, 68 MHz.
Power Frequency Magnetic Field Immunity

Per IEC 61000-4-8, severity level 4.
● Test frequency: 50 Hz
● Test level: 30 A / m applied continuously, 300 A / m applied for 3 s.
Alternating Component (Ripple) in DC Auxiliary Energizing Quantity

Per IEC 60255-26 and IEC 61000-4-17.
● Test level: 15 % of rated DC value.
2.3.1.2 Insulation
Insulation Resistance
Per IEC 60255-27.
Insulation resistance > 100 MΩ at 500 Vdc.
P632/EN M/R-a5-B // P632‑312‑660 2-5

Creepage Distances and Clearances

Per IEC 60255-27.
Pollution degree 3, Overvoltage category III.
High Voltage Withstand (Dielectric) Test

Per IEC 60255-27.
● 1 kV rms AC for 1 minute between RJ45 ports and the case earth (ground).
● 2 kV rms AC for 1 minute between all other terminals connected together
and the case earth. Between all terminals of independent circuits.
● 1 kV rms AC for 1 minute, across open watchdog contacts.
● 1 kV rms AC for 1 minute, across open contacts of output relays.
Impulse Voltage Withstand Test

Per IEC 60255-27.
● Front time: 1.2 μs, Time to half-value: 50 μs.
Peak value: 1.5 kV, 0.5 J.
Between RJ45 ports and the case earth (ground).
● Front time: 1.2 μs, Time to half-value: 50 μs,
Peak value: 5 kV, 0.5 J.
Between all other independent circuits and the case earth, also between all
terminals of independent circuits.
2.3.1.3 Environmental test
Ambient Temperature Range Test

Per IEC 60068-2-1 & IEC 60068-2-2.
● Operating temperature range: -25°C to +55°C (or -13°F to +131°F).
● Storage and transit: -25°C to +70°C (or -13°F to +158°F).
Ambient Humidity Range Test

Per IEC 60068-2-78.
● 21 days at 93 % relative humidity and +40°C.
Per IEC 60068-2-14.
● 5 cycles, -25°C to +55 °C, 1°C / min rate of change.
Per IEC 60068-2-30.
● Damp heat cyclic, six cycles(12 hours + 12 hours), 93 % RH, +25°C to
+55°C.
Corrosive Environment Test

Per IEC 60068-2-60: 1995, Part 2, Test Ke, Method (class) 3
Industrial corrosive environment/ poor environmental control, mixed gas flow
test.
● 21 days at 75 % relative humidity and 30°C (86°F) with exposure to
elevated concentrations of H2S, NO2, Cl2 and SO2.
2.3.1.4 Mechanical Test

Applicable to the following case variants:
● Surface-mounted 40 TE or 84 TE case
● Flush-mounted 40 TE or 84 TE case
2-6 P632/EN M/R-a5-B // P632‑312‑660

Vibration Test
Per IEC 60255‑21-1, test severity class 1.
Frequency range in operation

● 10 to 60 Hz, 0.035 mm, and
● 60 to 150 Hz, 0.5 g
Frequency range during transport

● 10 to 150 Hz, 1 g
Shock Response and Withstand Test, Bump Test

Per IEC 60255-21-2.
Acceleration and pulse duration:
● Shock Response tests are carried out to verify full operability (during
operation), test severity class 1:
5 g for 11 ms.
● Shock Withstand tests are carried out to verify the endurance (during
transport), test severity class 1:
15 g for 11 ms.
● Shock bump tests are carried out to verify permanent shock (during
transport), test severity class 1:
10 g for 16 ms.
Seismic Test
Per IEC 60255‑21‑3, test procedure A, class 1.
Frequency range
● Horizontal axes of vibration: 1 Hz to 8 Hz with 3.5 mm peak displacement, 8
to 35 Hz with 10 m / s² peak acceleration. 2 x 1 cycle.
● Vertical axis of vibration: 1 Hz to 8 Hz with 1.5 mm peak displacement, 8 to
35 Hz with 5 m / s² peak acceleration. 1 x 1 cycle.
P632/EN M/R-a5-B // P632‑312‑660 2-7

2.4 Environmental Conditions
Temperatures
Per IEC 60255-1 & IEC 60068-2-1
Recommended temperature range

● -5°C to +55°C [+23°F to +131°F].
Limit temperature range

● Operation: -25°C to +55°C [-13°F to +131°F].
● Storage and transport: -25°C to +70°C [-13°F to +158°F].
Ambient Humidity Range

● ≤ 75 % relative humidity (annual mean).
● 21 days at ≤ 95 % relative humidity and 40°C [104°F].
● Condensation not permitted.
Solar Radiation
Direct solar radiation on the front of the device must be avoided.
2-8 P632/EN M/R-a5-B // P632‑312‑660

2.5 Inputs and Outputs
2.5.1 Measuring Inputs
Current Measuring Inputs

● Nominal current Inom: 1 and 5 A AC (adjustable).
● Nominal consumption per phase:
o 1 A CT burden: < 0.1 VA
o 5 A CT burden: < 0.3 VA
● Load rating:
o continuous: 4·Inom,
o for 10 s: 30·Inom,
o for 1 s: 100·Inom.
● Nominal surge current: 250·Inom.
Voltage Measuring Inputs

● Nominal voltage Vnom: 50 to 130 V AC (adjustable).
● Nominal consumption per phase: < 0.3 VA at Vnom = 130 V AC.
● Load rating:
o continuous: 150 V AC
o for 10 s: 300 V AC
Frequency
● Nominal frequency fnom: 50 Hz and 60 Hz (adjustable).
● Operating range: 0.95 to 1.05 fnom.
● Frequency protection: 40 to 70 Hz.
P632/EN M/R-a5-B // P632‑312‑660 2-9

2.5.2 Binary Signal Inputs

Threshold pickup and drop-off points as per ordering option
● Standard variant with switching threshold at 65% of 24 V DC (VA,min)
Special variants with switching thresholds from 58% to 72% of the nominal input
voltage (i.e. definitively “low” for VA < 58% of the nominal supply voltage,
definitively “high” for VA > 72% of the nominal supply voltage).
● Special variant with switching threshold at 65% of 110 V DC (VA,nom).
Power consumption per input

● 18 V standard variant:
VA = 19 to 110 V DC : 0.5 W ± 30%,
VA > 110 V DC: VA ·5 mA ± 30%.
● Special variants:
VA > switching threshold: VA ·5 mA ± 30%.
The standard variant of binary signal inputs (opto couplers) is recommended in

most applications, as these inputs operate with any voltage from 19 V. Special
versions with higher pick-up/drop-off thresholds are provided for applications where
a higher switching threshold is expressly required.
The maximum voltage permitted for all binary signal inputs is 300 V DC.
2-10 P632/EN M/R-a5-B // P632‑312‑660

2.5.3 IRIG‑B Interface

● Minimum / maximum input voltage level
Demodulated: 2 Vpp / 6 Vpp (peak-peak)
Modulated: a few hundred mVpp / 10 Vpp
● Electrical isolation: 2 kVrms
2.5.4 Direct Current Input

● Input current: 0 to 26 mA
● Value range: 0.00 to 1.20 IDC,nom (IDC,nom = 20 mA)
● Maximum continuous input current permitted: 50 mA
● Maximum input voltage permitted: 17 V DC
● Input load: 100 Ω
● Open-circuit monitoring: 0 to 10 mA (adjustable)
● Overload monitoring: > 24.8 mA
● Zero suppression: 0.000 to 0.200 IDC,nom (adjustable).
2.5.5 Resistance Thermometer

Only PT 100 permitted for analog (I/O) module, mapping curve per IEC 75.1.
PT 100, Ni 100 or Ni 120 permitted for temperature p/c board (the RTD module).
● Value range: ‑40.0°C to +215.0°C (‑40°F to +419°F).
● 3-wire configuration: max. 20 Ω per conductor.
● Open and short-circuited input permitted.
● Open-circuit monitoring: Θ > +215°C and Θ < -40°C (Θ > +419°F and
Θ < -40°F).
2.5.6 Direct Current Output

● Output current: 0 to 20 mA
● Maximum permissible load: 500 Ω
● Maximum output voltage: 15 V
P632/EN M/R-a5-B // P632‑312‑660 2-11

2.5.7 Output Relays
Binary I/O Module X(6I 6O) Binary I/O Module X(4H) All other modules
for switchgear control. with high-break contacts,
applicable to DC circuits
only.
Rated 250 V DC 250 V DC 250 V DC, 250 V AC.

voltage: 250 V AC
Continuous 8A 10 A 5A
current:
Short- ● 30 A for 0.5 s ● 250 A for 0.03 s, 30 A for 0.5 s.

duration ● 30 A for 3 s
current:
Making 1000 W (VA) at 30 A 1000 W (VA) at

capacity: L/R = 40 ms. L/R = 40 ms.
Breaking ● 0.2 A at 220 V DC and ● 7500 W resistive or ● 0.2 A at 220 V DC and

capacity: L/R = 40 ms, 30 A at 250 V DC, L/R = 40 ms,
● 4 A at 230 V AC and Maximum values: 30 A ● 4 A at 230 V AC and
cos φ = 0.4. and 300 V DC. cos φ = 0.4.
● 2500 W inductive
(L/R = 40 ms) or 10 A
at 250 V DC,
Maximum values: 10 A
and 300 V DC.
Operating less than 5 ms less than 0.2 ms less than 5 ms

time:
Reset time: less than 5 ms less than 8 ms less than 5 ms
2.5.8 BCD Measured Data Output

Maximum numerical value that can be displayed: 399
2-12 P632/EN M/R-a5-B // P632‑312‑660

2.6 Interfaces
2.6.1 Local Control Panel

Input or output
● With 7 keys and a 4 ×20 character liquid crystal display (LCD).
● With 6 additional function keys.
State and fault signals

● 23 LED indicators (18 freely configurable with function assignments for
three colors: red, yellow and green).
2.6.2 PC Interface
● Transmission rate: 300 to 115,200 baud (adjustable)
2.6.3 Serial Communication Interface

The communication module can be provided with up to two communication
channels, depending on the module variant. Channel 1 may either be equipped
to connect wire leads or optical fibers and channel 2 is only available to connect
wire leads.
For communication interface 1, communication protocols based on
IEC 870-5‑103, IEC 60870‑5‑101, MODBUS, DNP 3.0, or Courier can be set.
● Transmission rate: 300 to 64000 baud (adjustable).
Communication interface 2 can only be operated with the interface protocol
based on IEC 60870-5-103.
● Transmission rate: 300 or 57600 baud (adjustable).
Wire Leads
● Per RS 485 or RS 422, 2 kV isolation
● Distance to be bridged
o Point-to-point connection: max. 1200 m
o Multipoint connection: max. 100 m
Plastic Fiber Connection

● Optical wavelength: typically 660 nm
● Optical output: min. -7.5 dBm
● Optical sensitivity: min. -20 dBm
● Optical input: max. -5 dBm
● Distance to be bridged: max. 45 m
(Distance to be bridged given for identical optical outputs and inputs at
both ends, a system reserve of 3 dB, and typical fiber attenuation)
P632/EN M/R-a5-B // P632‑312‑660 2-13

Glass Fiber Connection G 50/125

● Optical output: min. -19.8 dBm
Glass Fiber Connection G 62.5/125

● Optical output: min. -16 dBm
● Distance to be bridged: max. 1,400 m
2.6.4 Ethernet Communication Interface

100 Base-TX Interface (in accordance with IEEE 802.3 and IEC 61850)
Optical Fiber (-X13, -X14)

● Industry Standard Small Form Pluggable (SFP) package, LC duplex
connector optical interface
● Glass fiber connection G 50/125:
o Optical central wavelength: typ. 1308 nm
o Optical output: min. −23.5 dBm
o Loss of signal - de-asserted: max. −32 dBm
o Loss of signal - asserted: min. −45 dBm
o Optical input: max. −14 dBm
● Glass fiber connection G 62.5/125:
o Optical central wavelength: typ. 1308 nm
o Optical output: min. −20 dBm
o Loss of signal - de-asserted: max. −32 dBm
o Loss of signal - asserted: min. −45 dBm
o Optical input: max. −14 dBm
Wire Leads (-X15)

● RJ45, 1.5 kV isolation
● Transmission rate: 100 Mbit/s
2.6.5 IRIG‑B Interface

● Modulated signal (B122 format)
● Demodulated signal (B000 format)
● Carrier frequency: 1 kHz
● BCD- coded variable data (daily)
● 2kVrms Dielectric withstand
2-14 P632/EN M/R-a5-B // P632‑312‑660

2.7 Information Output

Counters, measured data, and indications: see chapter “Information and Control
Functions”.
P632/EN M/R-a5-B // P632‑312‑660 2-15

2.8 Settings – Typical Characteristic Data
2.8.1 Main Function

● Minimum output pulse for trip command: 0.1 to 10 s (adjustable)
● Minimum output pulse for close command: 0.1 to 10 s (adjustable)
2.8.2 Differential Protection

● Operate time including output relay:
o ≤ 16 ms without inrush stabilization or operation of Idiff>>, Idiff>>>
o ≤ 32 ms with inrush stabilization
● Reset time (measured variable from fault infeed to 0): ≤ 30 ms, approx.
25 ms
2.8.3 Definite-Time and Inverse-Time Overcurrent Protection

● Operate time including output relay (measured variable from 0 to 2-fold
operate value): ≤ 40 ms, approx. 30 ms
● Reset time (measured variable from 2-fold operate value to 0): ≤ 40 ms,
approx. 30 ms
● Starting resetting ratio: approx. 0.95
2.8.4 Time-Voltage Protection

● Operate time including output relay (measured variable from nominal value
to 1.2-fold operate value or measured variable from nominal value to 0.8-
fold operate value):
o ≤ 40 ms, approx. 30 ms
● Reset time (measured variable from 1.2-fold operate value to nominal
value or measured variable from 0.8-fold operate value to nominal value):
o ≤ 45 ms, approx. 30 ms
● Resetting ratio for V<>:
o 1% to 10% (adjustable)
2.8.5 Overfluxing Protection

Starting resetting ratio: approx. 0.95
2-16 P632/EN M/R-a5-B // P632‑312‑660

2.9 Deviations
2.9.1 Deviations of the Operate Values
2.9.1.1 Definitions
Reference Conditions
● Quasi-stationary sinusoidal signals at nominal frequency fnom (frequency
protection excepted), total harmonic distortion ≤ 2 %, ambient
temperature 20°C (68°F), and nominal auxiliary voltage VA,nom.
Deviation
● Deviation relative to the setting under reference conditions.
2.9.1.2 Differential Protection

Measuring system with default value 1 for the amplitude matching
factors (D I FF: Matching f act. kam, x = 1, x=a, b):
● at Idiff < 0.2·Iref: ± 10%
● at Idiff >= 0.2·Iref: ± 5%
P632/EN M/R-a5-B // P632‑312‑660 2-17

Inrush Stabilization (2nd harmonic)

● Deviation: ± 10%
Overflux Blocking (5th harmonic)

● Deviation: +0/–20%
2.9.1.3 Restricted Earth-Fault Protection

Measuring system with default value for the amplitude matching
factors = 1:
● at Id = 0.2·Iref: ± 5%
2.9.1.4 Overcurrent-Time Protection
Operate values
2.9.1.5 Thermal Overload Protection
Operate value Θ
● Deviation: ± 5% of the setting or ± 1% of the nominal value
2.9.1.6 Time-Voltage Protection
Operate values
● V<>: ± 1% (in the range 0.6 to 1.4 Vnom)
2.9.1.7 Frequency Protection
Operate values f<>

● ± 5 mHz
Operate values df/dt

● ± 100 mHz/s
2.9.1.8 Overexcitation Protection

● Operate values: ± 3%
2.9.1.9 Direct Current Input

● Deviation: ± 1 %
2.9.1.10 Resistance Thermometer

● Deviation: ± 2°C (in the range −40°C ... 120°C)
2.9.1.11 Analog Measured Data Output

● Deviation: ± 1 %
● Output residual ripple with max. load: ± 1 %
2-18 P632/EN M/R-a5-B // P632‑312‑660

2.9.2 Deviations of the Timer Stages
2.9.2.1 Definitions
Reference conditions
● Sinusoidal signals at nominal frequency fnom, total harmonic distortion
≤ 2 %, ambient temperature 20°C (68°F), and nominal auxiliary voltage
VA,nom.
Deviation
2.9.2.2 Definite-time stages

● Deviation: ± 1% + 20 ms to 40 ms
2.9.2.3 Inverse-time stages

● Deviation when I ≥ 2 Iref: ± 5% + 10 to 25 ms
● For “extremely inverse” IEC characteristics and for thermal overload
characteristics: ± 7.5% + 10 to 20 ms
2.9.3 Deviations of Measured Data Acquisition
2.9.3.1 Definitions
Reference conditions
● Sinusoidal signals at nominal frequency fnom, total harmonic distortion ≤
2%, ambient temperature 20°C (68°F), and nominal auxiliary voltage
VA,nom.
Deviation
2.9.3.2 Operating Data Measurement

● Currents (measuring inputs): ± 1%
● Voltages (measuring input): ± 0.5%
● Currents (internally calculated): ± 2%
● Voltages (internally calculated): ± 2%
● Frequency: ± 10 mHz
2.9.3.3 Fault Data
Short-circuit, differential and restraining currents

2.9.3.4 Internal Clock
With free running internal clock

● Deviation: < 1 min/month
With external synchronization (with a synchronization interval ≤ 1 min)

● Deviation: < 10 ms
With synchronization via IRIG-B interface

● ± 1 ms
P632/EN M/R-a5-B // P632‑312‑660 2-19

2.10 Resolution of the Fault Data Acquisition
2.10.1 Time Resolution

● 20 sampled values per period
2.10.2 Currents
Dynamic range
● 33·Inom
Amplitude resolution
● at Inom = 1 A: 2.0 mArms
● at Inom = 5 A: 10.1 mArms
2.10.3 Voltage
● Dynamic range: 150 V
● Amplitude resolution: 9.2 mVrms
2-20 P632/EN M/R-a5-B // P632‑312‑660

2.11 Recording Functions
2.11.1 Organization of the Recording Memories
Operating Data Memory
Scope for signals

● All signals relating to normal operation; from a total of up to 2048 different
logic state signals.
Depth for signals

● The 1000 most recent signals.
Monitoring Signal Memory
Scope for signals

● All self-monitoring logic state signals.
Depth for signals

● Up to 30 signals.
Overload Memory
Number
● The 8 most recent overload events
Scope for signals

● All signals relevant for an overload event from a total of up to
2048 different logic state signals.
Depth for signals

● 200 entries per overload event.
Ground Fault Memory
Number
● The 8 most recent ground fault events
Scope for signals

● All signals relevant for a ground fault event from a total of up to
2048 different logic state signals.
Depth for signals

● 200 entries per ground fault event.
Fault Memory
Number
● The 8 most recent faults.
Scope for signals and fault values

● All fault-relevant signals from a total of up to 2048 different logic state
signals.
● Sampled values for all measured currents and voltages
P632/EN M/R-a5-B // P632‑312‑660 2-21

Depth for signals and fault values

● 200 entries per fault event
● max. number of cycles per fault can be set by user;
820 periods in total for all faults, that is 16.4 s (for fnom = 50 Hz) or 13.7 s
(for fnom = 60 Hz).
Resolution of the Recorded Data

● As per Section 2.10, (p. 2-20).
2-22 P632/EN M/R-a5-B // P632‑312‑660

2.12 Power Supply

Nominal auxiliary voltage VA,nom
● 24 to 60 V DC or 60 to 250 V DC and 100 to 230 V AC (ordering option).
Operating range for direct voltage

● 0.8 to 1.1 VA,nom with a residual ripple of up to 15 % VA,nom.
Operating range for alternating voltage

● 0.9 to 1.1 VA,nom.
Nominal burden
● … where VA = 220 V DC and with maximum module configuration
o 40 TE case, relays de-energized/energized: approx. 12.6 W / 34.1 W
o 84 TE case, relays de-energized/energized): approx. 14.5 W / 42.3 W
Start-up peak current

● < 3 A for duration of 0.25 ms
Stored energy time

● ≥ 50 ms for interruption of VA ≥ 220 V DC (upper range supply)
● ≥ 50 ms for interruption of VA ≥ 60 V DC (lower range supply)
P632/EN M/R-a5-B // P632‑312‑660 2-23

2.13 Current Transformer Specifications
2.13.1 Symbols
The following symbols are used in accordance with IEC 61869 standards:
Ipn Rated primary current (nominal primary current) of the CT

Isn Rated secondary current (nominal secondary current) of the CT
Ipsc Rated primary (symmetrical) short-circuit current
KsscRated symmetrical short-circuit current factor:
I psc
K ssc = I pn
Iref Reference current of IDMT protection element

Rbn Rated resistive burden (secondary connected) of the CT
Pbn Equivalent power over the rated resistive burden of the CT for rated
secondary current:
2
Pbn = Rbn · I sn
Rb Actual resistive burden (secondary connected) of the CT

Pb Equivalent power over the actual resistive burden of the CT for rated
secondary current:
2
Pb = Rb · I sn
Rct Secondary winding resistance of the CT

Pct Equivalent power over the secondary winding resistance of the CT for
secondary rated current:
2
Pct = Rct · I sn
Vsal Secondary accuracy limiting voltage (e.m.f.) of the CT

Vk Rated knee point voltage (e.m.f.) of the CT
nn Rated accuracy limit factor of the CT
nb Actual accuracy limit factor of the CT:
Rct + Rbn Pct + Pbn
nb = nn · Rct + Rb = nn · Pct + Pb
2-24 P632/EN M/R-a5-B // P632‑312‑660

Rl One-way lead resistance from CT to relay

Rrel Resistive burden of relay’s CT input
Tp Primary time constant (primary system time constant)
ω (System) angular frequency
Xp/Rp Primary impedance ratio (system impedance ratio):
Xp
Rp = ω · Tp
Kd Dimensioning factor for the CT

Kemp Relay specific, empirically determined dimensioning factor for the CT
2.13.2 General Equations

The current transformer can be dimensioned
● either for the minimum required secondary accuracy limiting voltage acc.
to IEC 61869, 3.4.209:
V sal ≥ K d · K ssc · I sn · (Rct + Rb)
● or for the minimum required rated accuracy limit factor acc. to IEC 61869,
3.4.208, as follows:
Rct + Rb Pct + Pb
nn ≥ K d · K ssc · Rct + Rbn = K d · K ssc · Pct + Pbn
The relation between both methods is given as follows:

Pbn
V sal = nn · ( I sn + I sn · Rct )
The actual secondary connected burden Rb is given as follows:

● For phase-to-ground faults: Rb = 2 · Rl + Rrel
● For phase-to-phase faults: Rb = Rl + Rrel
The wire lead burden is calculated as:
l
Rl = ρ ⋅ A
● ρ = specific conductor resistance

(e.g. for copper 0.021 Ω mm²/m = 2.1⋅10-8 Ω m, at 75°C)
● l = wire length
● A = wire cross section
For devices out of the platform Easergy MiCOM 30, the input CT burden Rrel is
less than 20 mΩ, independent of the set nominal current (1 A or 5 A). Usually this
relay burden can be neglected.
The rated knee point voltage Vk according to IEC 61869, 3.4.217 is lower than
the secondary accuracy limiting voltage Vsal according to IEC 61869, 3.4.209. It is
not possible to give a general relation between Vk and Vsal, but for standard core
material the following relations applies:
● VK≈0.85⋅Vsal for class 5P CTs, and
● VK≈0.75⋅Vsal for class 10P CTs, respectively.
Theoretically, the specifications of the current transformer could be calculated to
avoid saturation by inserting its maximum value, instead of the required over-
dimensioning factor Kd:
P632/EN M/R-a5-B // P632‑312‑660 2-25

Xp
K d = K max ≈ 1 + Rp = 1 + ω · Tp
However, this is not necessary. Instead, it is sufficient to consider an empirically

determined dimensioning factor Kd=Kemp such that the appropriate operation of
the protection function is ensured under the given conditions. This factor
depends on application and relay type, as outlined in the following.
2.13.3 Transformer Differential Protection

For Transformer Differential Protection Devices the empirical dimensioning factor
Kd = Kemp for the CTs considering external faults (assuming maximum through-
flowing currents) can be taken from the following diagram:
5.0
4.5
4.0
3.5
3.0
2.5
K emp
2.0
1.5
1.0
0.5
0 10 20 30 40 50 60 70 80
Xp / R p
This CT dimensioning assures through fault stability of the differential element.

Due to the inbuilt saturation discriminator the CT requirement is independent of
the current sensitivity given by the set basic threshold of the tripping
characteristic.
The empirical dimensioning factor Kemp (shown in the diagram above) has been
determined by investigations using 3-shot auto-reclosing sequences with 450 ms
of fault current feed (starting at worst case point on wave) for each shot and
300 ms dead time between shots. In most practical cases faults would be cleared
in 100 to 200 ms for external protection operation and the dead time between
auto-reclose shots would be longer than 300 ms. This would reduce the flux
build-up in the core. Therefore the above shown empirical dimensioning factor
Kemp can be considered as being based on a conservative approach.
For internal fault steady-state saturation is permissible with maximum fault
currents up to 4 times the steady-state accuracy limit current of the CT. This
corresponds to a dimensioning factor of Kd = 0.25 for internal faults.
It is recommended to use CTs of accuracy class 5P (or equivalent).
2-26 P632/EN M/R-a5-B // P632‑312‑660

P632
3 Operation
3.1 Modular Structure

The P632 is a numerical device out of Schneider Electric's family of devices
named “Easergy MiCOM 30”. The device types included in this family are built
from identical uniform hardware modules. The figure below shows the basic
hardware structure of the P632.
Communication
PC interface interface(s)
Local control module

L F1
F2
F3
F4
F5
A A
F6
P μP
Processor module
Analog
Digital busbus module
module
B Analog bus module
T X Y V
Transformer module
Binary I/O module
Analog I/O module
Power supply module
Voltages Currents Signals Commands Signals Measured data Signals Commands Auxiliary voltage
Commands Signals Commands Commands Signals
Fig. 3-1: Basic hardware structure.
External analog quantities and binary quantities – electrically isolated – are

converted to the internal processing levels by the peripheral modules T, Y, and X.
The optional binary I/O modules X are equipped with optical couplers for binary
signal input as well as output relays for the output of signals and commands or
combinations of these.
The external auxiliary voltage is applied to the power supply module V, which
supplies the auxiliary voltages that are required internally.
Analog data is transferred from the transformer module T via the analog bus
module B to the processor module P. The processor module contains all the
elements necessary for the conversion of measured analog variables, including
multiplexers and analog/digital converters. The analog data conditioned by the
analog I/O module Y is transferred to the processor module P via the digital bus
module.
The processor handles the processing of digitized analog variables and of binary
signals, generates the protective trip and signals, and transfers them to the
binary I/O modules X via the digital bus module. The processor module also
handles overall device communication.
P632/EN M/R-a5-B // P632‑312‑660 3-1

P632 3 Operation
The optional communication modules provide one or two serial communication

interfaces for the integration of the protection and control unit into a substation
control system.
The local control module L is located behind the front panel and connected to the
processor module via a ribbon cable. It encompasses all control and display
elements as well as a PC interface for running the operating program Easergy
Studio.
3-2 P632/EN M/R-a5-B // P632‑312‑660

3 Operation P632
3.2 Operator-Machine Communication

The following interfaces are available for the exchange of information between
the user and the P632:
● Integrated user interface (LOC: local control panel)
● PC interface
● Communication interface
All settings and signals as well as all measurements and control functions are
arranged within the branches of the menu tree following a scheme that is
uniform throughout the device family. The main branches are:
“Parameters” Branch
All settings are contained in this branch. This branch carries all settings,
including the identification data of the P632, the configuration parameters for
adapting the P632 interfaces to the system, and the function parameters for
adapting the device functions to the process. All values in this group are stored
in non-volatile memory, which means that the values will be preserved even if
the power supply fails.
“Operation” Branch
This branch includes all information relevant for operation such as measured
operating data and binary signal states. This information is updated periodically
and consequently is not stored. In addition, various controls are grouped here,
for example those for resetting counters, memories and displays.
“Events” Branch
The third branch is reserved for the recording of events. All information in this
group is therefore stored. In particular, the start/end signals during a fault, the
measured fault data, and the sampled fault waveforms are stored here and can
be read out when required.
Display of Settings and Signals

Settings and signals are displayed either in plain text or as addresses, in
accordance with the user’s choice. All settings and signals of the P632 are
documented in a separate collection of documents, the so-called
“DataModelExplorer”. The “Addresses” document (being part of the
“DataModelExplorer”) is complete in the sense that it contains all settings,
signals and measured variables that are relevant for the user of the P632.
The configuration of the local control panel also permits the installation of
Measured Value “Panels” on the LCD display. Different Panels are automatically
displayed for specific system operating conditions. Priority increases from normal
operation to operation under overload conditions and finally to operation
following a short circuit in the system. Thus the P632 provides the measured
data relevant for the prevailing conditions.
P632/EN M/R-a5-B // P632‑312‑660 3-3

P632 3 Operation
3.3 Cyber Security (Function Group CS)

This product contains a Cyber Security function, which manages the encryption
of the data exchanged through some of the communication channels. The aim is
to protect the data (configuration and process data) from any corruption, malice,
attack. Subsequently, this product might be subject to control from customs
authorities, and it might be necessary to request special authorization from these
customs authorities before any export/import operation. For any technical
question relating to the characteristics of this encryption please contact your
Customer Care Centre - http://www.schneider-electric.com/CCC.
For devices of the Easergy MiCOM 30 platform, Cyber Security is available as of

software version ‑660.
Please refer to separately available "Cyber Security" Technical Manual for all
details.
Cyber Security is based on the model of Role Based Access Control (RBAC) which
is a method to restrict resource access to authorized users. One role can have
one and more access rights, one user (subject) can have several roles. A user
(subject) is based on a session. This session controls for example the activity of
the user. If the user is inactive for 15 minutes (default setting) the user will be
locked out automatically.
Static separation
of duty
Subject Right
assignment assignment
Subject Role Operation Object

1..n 1..n 1 1..n
1 1..n Right
Dynamic
1..n 1 separation of duty
Session
Fig. 3-2: RBAC model.
3.3.1 Users, Roles and Rights for Easergy MiCOM P30
User accounts
When the user tries to access an IED, they need to login using their own
username and their own password. The username/ password combination is then
checked against the records stored on the IED. It is the role that defines their
access to the relevant parts of the system.
The default user accounts for Easergy MiCOM P30 is as below:
3-4 P632/EN M/R-a5-B // P632‑312‑660

3 Operation P632
User Accounts Roles
ENGINEER OPERATOR VIEWER SECADM
EngineerLevel x x x
OperatorLevel x x
ViewerLevel x
SecurityAdmin x
DefaultUser x
Tab. 3-1: Default user accounts for Easergy MiCOM P30.
Roles
Different named roles are associated with different access rights. Roles and
Rights are setup in a pre-defined arrangement, according to the IEC 62351
standard, but customized to the Easergy MiCOM P30 equipment.
The default roles for Easergy MiCOM P30 is as below:
Role Description
VIEWER Can View what objects are present within a Logical-Device by presenting the
type ID of those objects.
OPERATOR An Operator can view what objects and values are present within a Logical-
Device by presenting the type ID of those objects as well as perform control
actions.
ENGINEER An Engineer can view what objects and values are present within a Logical-
Device by presenting the type ID of those objects. Moreover, an engineer has
full access to Datasets and Files and can configure the server locally or
remotely.
SECADM Security Administrator can change subject-to-role assignments (outside the

device) and role-to-right assignment (inside the device) and security policy
setting; change security setting such as certificates for subject authentication
and access token verification.
Tab. 3-2: Default roles summary for Easergy MiCOM P30.
Rights
In a similar way in which a set of pre-defined Roles have been created, a
predefined set of Rights have been created.
The reason why these are described as Default, is that it is possible to change the
definitions of Roles and Rights, by using the SAT software. Depending on the work
done by the system administrator, it is possible that your own situation may vary
from these initial recommendations.
3.3.2 Cyber Security Implementation

The P632 Transformer Differential Protection Device can be ordered with or
without Cyber Security compatibility. (See Chapter 15, (p. 15-1) for the exact
order information.)
P632/EN M/R-a5-B // P632‑312‑660 3-5

P632 3 Operation
With Cyber Security Compatibility

For Easergy MiCOM 30 Series support CS, which means the IED supports
advanced user account right management. The Security Administration Tool
(SAT) is required for RBAC configuration.
At the IED level, these Cyber Security features have been implemented:
● Passwords management (via the SAT)
● RBAC Management (via the SAT)
● User Locking
● Inactivity Timer
● RBAC recovery
● Port Disablement (via Easergy Studio or the front panel)
● Simple Network Management Protocol (SNMP)
● Security Logs
Without Cyber Security Compatibility

For Easergy MiCOM 30 Series without CS, no need to use Security Administration
Tool (SAT) software in order to change and validate the password. If the SAT is
connected to device, it has to be blocked in order to avoid password
management and modification. Password shall be managed and modified
through HMI and Easergy Studio only, as previous password management. No
security logs is available.
3-6 P632/EN M/R-a5-B // P632‑312‑660

3 Operation P632
3.4 Configuration of the Local Control Panel (Function Group

LOC)
The configuration of the Local Control Panel includes the configuration of the Bay
Panel and of the Measured Value Panels, and the selection of the control point.
On the text display, the Bay Panel will display switching state signals from
external devices (closed, open, intermediate position) and the active control site
(local or remote).
In addition the P632 offers Measured Value Panels, which display the measured
values relevant at a given time.
During normal power system operation; the Bay Panel or – if activated – the
Operation Panel is displayed. If the Operation Panel is activated as an event
occurs, the display switches to the appropriate Event Panel – provided that
measured values have been selected for the Event Panels. In the event of
overload or ground fault events, the display will automatically switch to the
Operation Panel at the end of the event. In the event of a fault, the Fault Panel
remains active until the LED indicators or the fault memories are reset.
If the change enabling command has been issued (L OC: Param. change
e nab l.) it will be cancelled after the time period, defined by setting L OC: Hold-
time for Pan el s has elapsed and the Bay Panel will be called up.
3.4.1 Bay Panel
Fig. 3-3: Example of a Bay Panel (with text display).
The P632 offers a selection from pre-defined bay types. If the required bay type
is not included in the standard selection, the user can contact the manufacturer
of the P632 to request the definition of a customized bay type to download into
the P632. By applying the bay editor from the PC Access Software MiCOM S1 the
user can also define new bay types.
The activation of the Bay Panel display is described in Chapter 6, (p. 6-1).
Each external device represented in the Bay Panel is identified by an external
device designation (see Section 3.37.3, (p. 3-233)).
The display of external device designations can be disabled (at LOC : Display
L /R). The display of the control point (local or remote control) and interlocking
can also be disabled (at L OC: Dis pl. int e rl . st at.).
The switchgear unit to be controlled needs to be selected first. The selection is
cancelled if the return time for illumination (LO C: Re t urn t ime illu min.) or the
return time for selection (LOC: R etu rn ti me se l ect.) has elapsed.
P632/EN M/R-a5-B // P632‑312‑660 3-7

P632 3 Operation
LOC:
DEV01: Display L/R
Designat. ext. dev. [ 221 070 ]
[ 210 000 ]
LOC:
Displ. interl. stat.
[ 221 071 ]
LOC:
Return time select.
[ 221 030 ]
LOC:
Return time illumin.
[ 003 023 ]
Q0
Remote Locked
LOC:
Return t.select. trg
305 551
45Z8003A
Fig. 3-4: Bay panel (text display).
3-8 P632/EN M/R-a5-B // P632‑312‑660

3 Operation P632
3.4.2 Operation Panel

The Operation Panel is displayed after the set return time has elapsed, provided
that at least one measured value has been configured.
The user can select which of the measured operating values will be displayed on
the Operation Panel by means of an “m out of n” parameter. When more
measured operating values are selected for display than the LC display can
accommodate, then the display will either switch to the next set of measured
operating values at intervals defined by the setting for LOC: Hold-time for
Pa nels or when the appropriate key on the local control panel is pressed.
LOC:
Fct. Operation Panel
[ 053 007 ]
Measured value 1 m out of n

Measured value 2
Measured value 3 LOC:

Autom. return time LOC:
[ 003 014 ] Autom. return time
Measured value N
LOC:
Selected meas. val. Hold-time for Panels LOC:
[ 031 075 ] Hold-time for Panels
FT_RC:
Record. in progress S1 1 ≥1 C
[ 035 000 ]
R1
OL_RC:
Record. in progress
[ 035 003 ] Operation Panel
MAIN:
General reset USER
[ 003 002 ]
1: execute ≥1
MAIN:
General reset EXT
[ 005 255 ]
FT_RC:
Reset record. USER
[ 003 006 ]
1: execute
FT_RC:
Reset record. EXT
[ 005 243 ]
MAIN:
Reset LED
306 020
63Z80CXA
Fig. 3-5: Operation Panel.
P632/EN M/R-a5-B // P632‑312‑660 3-9

P632 3 Operation
3.4.3 Fault Panel

The Fault Panel is displayed in place of another data panel when there is a fault,
provided that at least one measured value has been configured. The Fault Panel
remains on display until the LED indicators or the fault memories are cleared.
The user can select the measured fault values that will be displayed on the Fault
Panel by setting an “m out of n” parameter. When more measured fault values
are selected for display than the LC display can accommodate, then the display
will either switch to the next set of measured fault values at intervals defined by
the setting for LOC : Hold-time for P ane ls or when the appropriate key on the
local control panel is pressed.
LOC:
Fct. Fault Panel
[ 053 003 ]

Measured value 2
Measured value 3
Measured value N
Selected meas. val.
LOC:
Hold-time for Panels
[ 031 075 ]
R
MAIN:
General reset USER
[ 003 002 ]
1: execute ≥1 Fault Panel
MAIN:
General reset EXT
[ 005 255 ]
FT_RC:
Reset record. USER
[ 003 006 ]
1: execute
FT_RC:
Reset record. EXT
[ 005 243 ]
MAIN:
Reset LED
306 020
50Z01EJA
Fig. 3-6: Fault panel.
3-10 P632/EN M/R-a5-B // P632‑312‑660

3 Operation P632
3.4.4 Overload Panel

The Overload Panel is automatically displayed in place of another data panel
when there is an overload, provided that at least one measured value has been
configured. The Overload Panel remains on display until the overload ends,
unless a fault occurs. In this case the display switches to the Fault Panel.
The user can select the measured values that will be displayed on the Overload
Panel by setting a “m out of n” parameter. When more measured fault values are
selected for display than the LC display can accommodate, then the display will
either switch to the next set of measured fault values at intervals defined by the
setting for LOC : Hol d-time for P ane ls or when the appropriate key on the
local control panel is pressed.
LOC:
Fct. Overload Panel
[ 053 005 ]

Measured value 2
Measured value 3
Measured value n
Select. meas. values

LOC:
Hold-time for Panels
[ 031 075 ]
R
MAIN:
General reset USER
[ 003 002 ]
1: execute ≥1 Overload Panel
MAIN:
General reset EXT
[ 005 255 ]
OL_RC:
Reset record. USER
[ 100 003 ]
1: execute
OL_RC:
Reset record. EXT
[ 005 241 ]
MAIN:
Reset LED
306 020
50Z0140A
Fig. 3-7: Overload Panel.
P632/EN M/R-a5-B // P632‑312‑660 3-11

P632 3 Operation
3.4.5 Selection of the Control Point
LOC:
F_KEY: Fct. assign. L/R key
Fct. assignm. F1 [ 225 208 ]
[ 080 112 ]
1: R <-> L
MAIN: 2: R & L <-> L
Local/Remote key
[ 006 004 ]
1)
& S1 1 & 1
& R1 0 & 2, 3 LOC:

Rem.acc.block.active
& [ 221 004 ]
Local 1
& LOC:
Remote Loc.acc.block.active
2
[ 221 005 ]
&
Remote & Local 3 LOC:
Remote&local control
305 560
MAIN:
Inp.asg. L/R key sw.
[ 221 008 ]
Signal 1
Signal 2 m out of n
Signal 3
Signal n
Without function
Selected signal
1) Keys, local control

12Z6261A
Fig. 3-8: Selection of the control point.
Switchgear units can be controlled from a remote location or locally. Switching

between local and remote control is achieved by an appropriately configured
function key or an external key switch. The position of this external key switch is
checked by an appropriately configured binary signal input (configuration at
MAI N: Inp.asg. L/R key sw.).
For more information on the use of a function key as a switch to change over
from local and remote control see Section 3.7, (p. 3-46) and Section 6.9.2,
(p. 6-13).
The setting LOC : F ct . assi gn. L/R key determines whether the switching
using either the function key or the key switch is between local and remote
control (L↔R) or between local+remote and local control (R&L↔L).
If only remote control is enabled then there will be a local access blocking. If only
local control is enabled then there will be a remote access blocking.
3.4.6 Configurable Clear Key

The P632 has a Clear key – –, to which one or more reset functions can be
assigned by selecting the required functions at LOC : Fct. re set key. Details on
the functions' resetting features are given in Section 3.13.16, (p. 3-102).
3-12 P632/EN M/R-a5-B // P632‑312‑660

3 Operation P632
3.5 Communication Interfaces

The P632 has a PC interface as a standard component. Communication module A
is optional and can be provided with one or two communication channels –
depending on the design version. Communication between the P632 and the
control station’s computer is through the communication module A. Setting and
interrogation is possible through all the P632's interfaces.
If the communication module A with two communication channels is installed,
settings for two communication interfaces will be available. The setting of
communication interface 1 (COMM1) may be assigned to the physical
communication channels 1 or 2 (see Section 3.13.17, (p. 3-104)). If the COMM1
settings have been assigned to communication channel 2, then the settings of
communication interface 2 (COMM2) will automatically be active for
communication channel 1.
COMM2 can only be used to transmit data to and from the P632 if its PC interface
has been de-activated. As soon as the PC interface is used to transmit data,
COMM2 becomes “dead”. It will only be enabled again when the “time-out”
period for the PC interface has elapsed.
If tests are run on the P632, the user is advised to activate the test mode. In this
way the PC or the control system will recognize all incoming test signals
accordingly (see Section 3.13.18, (p. 3-105)).
P632/EN M/R-a5-B // P632‑312‑660 3-13

P632 3 Operation
3.5.1 PC Interface (Function Group PC)

Communication between the P632 and a PC is through the PC interface. In order
for data transfer between the P632 and the PC to function, several settings must
be made in the P632.
There is support software available as an accessory for P632 control.
PC:
Bay address
[ 003 068 ]
PC:
Device address
[ 003 069 ]
PC:
Baud rate
[ 003 081 ]
PC:
Parity bit
[ 003 181 ]
PC:
Spontan. sig. enable
[ 003 187 ]
PC:
Select. spontan.sig.
[ 003 189 ]
PC:
Transm.enab.cycl.dat
[ 003 084 ]
PC:
Cycl. data ILS tel.
[ 003 185 ]
PC:
Delta V
[ 003 055 ]
PC:
Sig./meas.val.block. PC:
[ 003 086 ] Delta I
[ 003 056 ]
0 PC:
Delta f
1 [ 003 057 ]
0: No PC:
Delta meas.v.ILS tel
1: Yes [ 003 155 ]
PC:
Delta t
MAIN: [ 003 058 ]
Prot. ext. disabled
[ 038 046 ]
PC:
Time-out
PC: [ 003 188 ]
Command blocking
[ 003 182 ]
0: No
1: Yes
PC interface
MAIN:
Test mode
[ 037 071 ]
64Z51ECA
Fig. 3-9: PC interface settings
3-14 P632/EN M/R-a5-B // P632‑312‑660

3 Operation P632
3.5.2 Communication Interface 1 (Function Group COMM1)

There are several different interface protocols available at the communication
interface 1. The following user-selected interface protocols are available for use
with the P632:
● IEC 60870‑5‑103, "Transmission protocols - Companion standard for the
informative interface of protection equipment, first edition, 1997-12
(corresponds to VDEW / ZVEI Recommendation, "Protection communication
companion standard 1, compatibility level 2", February 1995 edition) with
additions covering control and monitoring
● IEC 870‑5‑101, "Telecontrol equipment and systems ‑ Part 5: Transmission
protocols ‑ Section 101 Companion standard for basic telecontrol tasks,"
first edition 1995‑11
● ILS‑C, proprietary protocol of Schneider Electric
● MODBUS
● DNP 3.0
● COURIER
In order for data transfer to function properly, several settings must be made in
the P632.
Communication interface 1 can be blocked through a binary signal input. In
addition, a signal or measured-data block can also be imposed through a binary
signal input.
P632/EN M/R-a5-B // P632‑312‑660 3-15

P632 3 Operation
COMM1:
Command block. USER
[ 003 172 ]
0: No COMM1:
Command blocking
[ 003 174 ]
1: Yes
COMM1:
Command block. EXT
[ 003 173 ]
COMM1:
Basic IEC870-5 enabl
[ 003 215 ] COMM1:
Communicat. protocol
[ 003 167 ]
0
1
0: No
1: Yes
COMM1:
Addit. -101 enable
[ 003 216 ]
COMM1:
0 Selected protocol Selected protocol
304 415
1
0: No
1: Yes
COMM1:
Addit. ILS enable
[ 003 217 ]
0: No
1: Yes
COMM1:
MODBUS enable
[ 003 220 ]
0: No
1: Yes
COMM1:
DNP3 enable
[ 003 231 ]
0: No
1: Yes
COMM1:
COURIER enable
[ 103 040 ]
0: No
1: Yes
64Z51FEA
Fig. 3-10: Communication interface 1, selecting the interface protocol.
3-16 P632/EN M/R-a5-B // P632‑312‑660

3 Operation P632
COMM1: COMM1:
-103 prot. variant Spontan. sig. enable
[ 003 178 ] [ 003 177 ]
COMM1: COMM1:
Line idle state Select. spontan.sig.
[ 003 165 ] [ 003 179 ]
COMM1: COMM1:
Baud rate Transm.enab.cycl.dat
[ 003 071 ] [ 003 074 ]
COMM1: COMM1:
Parity bit Cycl. data ILS tel.
[ 003 171 ] [ 003 175 ]
COMM1: COMM1:
Dead time monitoring Delta V
[ 003 176 ] [ 003 050 ]
COMM1: COMM1:
Mon. time polling Delta I
[ 003 202 ] [ 003 051 ]
COMM1: COMM1:
Octet comm. address Delta f
[ 003 072 ] [ 003 052 ]
COMM1:
Selected protocol COMM1: COMM1:
304 415 Test monitor on Delta meas.v.ILS tel
COMM1: [ 003 166 ] [ 003 150 ]
IEC 870-5-103
[ 003 219 ] COMM1:
Name of manufacturer COMM1:
Delta t
[ 003 161 ] [ 003 053 ]
COMM1:
General enable USER COMM1: COMM1:
Octet address ASDU Contin. general scan
[ 003 170 ]
[ 003 073 ] [ 003 077 ]
0
C
1
0: No
C
1: Yes
COMM1:
Command blocking C
[ 003 174 ]
MAIN:
Test mode Commun. interface
[ 037 071 ]
COMM1:
Sig./meas.block.USER
[ 003 076 ]
0: No COMM1:
Sig./meas.val.block.
1: Yes
[ 037 075 ]
COMM1:
Sig./meas. block EXT
[ 037 074 ]
MAIN:
Prot. ext. disabled
[ 038 046 ]
64Z70FFA
Fig. 3-11: Communication interface 1, settings for the IEC 60870‑5-103 interface protocol.
P632/EN M/R-a5-B // P632‑312‑660 3-17

P632 3 Operation
COMM1: COMM1:
Line idle state Delta t
[ 003 165 ] [ 003 053 ]
COMM1: COMM1:
Baud rate Contin. general scan
[ 003 071 ] [ 003 077 ]
COMM1: COMM1:
Parity bit Comm. address length
[ 003 171 ] [ 003 201 ]
COMM1: COMM1:
Dead time monitoring Octet 2 comm. addr.
[ 003 176 ] [ 003 200 ]
COMM1: COMM1:
Mon. time polling Cause transm. length
[ 003 202 ] [ 003 192 ]
COMM1: COMM1:
Octet comm. address Address length ASDU
[ 003 072 ] [ 003 193 ]
COMM1: COMM1:
Test monitor on Octet 2 addr. ASDU
[ 003 166 ] [ 003 194 ]
COMM1: COMM1:
Name of manufacturer Addr.length inf.obj.
[ 003 161 ] [ 003 196 ]
COMM1: COMM1:
Octet address ASDU Oct.3 addr. inf.obj.
[ 003 073 ] [ 003 197 ]
COMM1: COMM1:
Spontan. sig. enable Inf.No.<->funct.type
[ 003 177 ] [ 003 195 ]
COMM1: COMM1:
Select. spontan.sig. Time tag length
[ 003 179 ] [ 003 198 ]
COMM1: COMM1:
Transm.enab.cycl.dat ASDU1 / ASDU20 conv.
[ 003 074 ] [ 003 190 ]
COMM1: COMM1:
Cycl. data ILS tel. ASDU2 conversion
[ 003 175 ] [ 003 191 ]
COMM1:
Selected protocol COMM1: COMM1:
304 415
Delta V Initializ. signal
[ 003 050 ] [ 003 199 ]
COMM1:
IEC 870-5-101
COMM1: COMM1:
[ 003 218 ] Delta I Balanced operation
[ 003 051 ] [ 003 226 ]
COMM1: COMM1:
COMM1: Delta f Direction bit
General enable USER [ 003 052 ] [ 003 227 ]
[ 003 170 ]
COMM1: COMM1:
Delta meas.v.ILS tel Time-out interval
0 [ 003 150 ] [ 003 228 ]
0: No
1: Yes
COMM1:
Command blocking
[ 003 174 ]
MAIN:
Test mode
[ 037 071 ] COMM1:
[ 003 076 ]
0
Commun. interface
1
0: No COMM1:
1: Yes
[ 037 075 ]
COMM1:
[ 037 074 ]
MAIN:
Prot. ext. disabled
[ 038 046 ]
64Z51FGA
Fig. 3-12: Communication interface 1, settings for the IEC 870-5-101 interface protocol.
3-18 P632/EN M/R-a5-B // P632‑312‑660

3 Operation P632
COMM1: COMM1:
Line idle state Spontan. sig. enable
[ 003 165 ] [ 003 177 ]
COMM1: COMM1:
Baud rate Select. spontan.sig.
[ 003 071 ] [ 003 179 ]
COMM1: COMM1:
Parity bit Transm.enab.cycl.dat
[ 003 171 ] [ 003 074 ]
COMM1: COMM1:
Dead time monitoring Cycl. data ILS tel.
[ 003 176 ] [ 003 175 ]
COMM1: COMM1:
Mon. time polling Delta V
[ 003 202 ] [ 003 050 ]
COMM1: COMM1:
Octet comm. address Delta I
[ 003 072 ] [ 003 051 ]
COMM1: COMM1:
COMM1: Test monitor on Delta f
Selected protocol [ 003 166 ] [ 003 052 ]
304 415
COMM1: COMM1: COMM1:

IEC 870-5,ILS Name of manufacturer Delta meas.v.ILS tel
[ 003 221 ] [ 003 161 ] [ 003 150 ]
COMM1: COMM1:
Octet address ASDU Delta t
[ 003 073 ] [ 003 053 ]
COMM1:
General enable USER COMM1:
[ 003 170 ] Contin. general scan
[ 003 077 ]
0: No
1: Yes
COMM1:
Command blocking
[ 003 174 ]
MAIN: Commun. interface

Test mode
[ 037 071 ]
COMM1:
[ 003 076 ]
0: No COMM1:
1: Yes
[ 037 075 ]
COMM1:
[ 037 074 ]
MAIN:
Prot. ext. disabled
[ 038 046 ]
64Z51FHA
Fig. 3-13: Communication interface 1, settings for the ILS-C interface protocol.
P632/EN M/R-a5-B // P632‑312‑660 3-19

P632 3 Operation
COMM1: COMM1:
MODBUS prot. variant Test monitor on
[ 003 214 ] [ 003 166 ]
COMM1: COMM1:
Line idle state Reg.asg. selec. cmds
[ 003 165 ] [ 003 210 ]
COMM1: COMM1:
Baud rate Reg.asg. selec. sig.
[ 003 071 ] [ 003 211 ]
COMM1: COMM1:
Parity bit Reg.asg. sel. m.val.
[ 003 171 ] [ 003 212 ]
COMM1: COMM1:
Dead time monitoring Reg.asg. sel. param.
[ 003 176 ] [ 003 213 ]
COMM1: COMM1:
Mon. time polling Delta t (MODBUS)
[ 003 202 ] [ 003 152 ]
COMM1: COMM1:
Octet comm. address Autom.event confirm.
[ 003 072 ] [ 003 249 ]
COMM1:
Selected protocol
304 415
COMM1:
MODBUS
[ 003 223 ]
COMM1:
General enable USER
[ 003 170 ]
1: Yes
COMM1:
Commun. interface Communication error
304 422
COMM1:
Command blocking
[ 003 174 ]
MAIN:
Test mode
[ 037 071 ]
19Z50FJB
Fig. 3-14: Communication interface 1, settings for the MODBUS protocol.
3-20 P632/EN M/R-a5-B // P632‑312‑660

3 Operation P632
COMM1: COMM1:
Line idle state Link Confirm.Timeout
[ 003 165 ] [ 003 244 ]
COMM1: COMM1:
Baud rate Link Max. Retries
[ 003 071 ] [ 003 245 ]
COMM1: COMM1:
Parity bit Appl.Confirm.Timeout
[ 003 171 ] [ 003 246 ]
COMM1: COMM1:
Dead time monitoring Appl. Need Time Del.
[ 003 176 ] [ 003 247 ]
COMM1: COMM1:
Mon. time polling Ind./cl. bin. inputs
[ 003 202 ] [ 003 232 ]
COMM1: COMM1:
Octet comm. address Ind./cl. bin.outputs
[ 003 072 ] [ 003 233 ]
COMM1:
Oct.2 comm.addr.DNP3 COMM1:
[ 003 240 ] Ind./cl. analog inp.
[ 003 235 ]
COMM1: COMM1:
Test monitor on Ind./cl. analog outp
[ 003 166 ] [ 003 236 ]
COMM1: COMM1:
Phys. Charact. Delay Delta meas.v. (DNP3)
[ 003 241 ] [ 003 250 ]
COMM1: COMM1:
COMM1: Phys. Char. Timeout Delta t (DNP3)
304 415
COMM1: COMM1:
DNP3 Link Confirm. Mode
[ 003 230 ] [ 003 243 ]
COMM1:
General enable USER
[ 003 170 ]
1: Yes
COMM1:
Command blocking
[ 003 174 ]
MAIN:
Test mode Commun. interface
[ 037 071 ]
64Z50AZA
Fig. 3-15: Communication interface 1, settings for the DNP 3.0 protocol.
P632/EN M/R-a5-B // P632‑312‑660 3-21

P632 3 Operation
COMM1: COMM1:
Line idle state Test monitor on
[ 003 165 ] [ 003 166 ]
COMM1: COMM1:
Baud rate Command selection
[ 003 071 ] [ 103 042 ]
COMM1: COMM1:
COMM1: Parity bit Signal selection
304 415
COMM1: COMM1: COMM1:

COURIER Dead time monitoring Meas. val. selection
[ 103 041 ]
[ 003 176 ] [ 103 044 ]
COMM1: COMM1:
Mon. time polling Parameter selection
[ 003 202 ] [ 103 045 ]
COMM1:
General enable USER COMM1: COMM1:
[ 003 170 ] Octet comm. address Delta t (COURIER)
[ 003 072 ] [ 103 046 ]
0: No
1: Yes
COMM1:
Command blocking
[ 003 174 ]
MAIN: COMM1:
Test mode Commun. interface Communication error
[ 037 071 ] 304 422
19Z51BAA
Fig. 3-16: Communication interface 1, settings for the COURIER protocol.
3-22 P632/EN M/R-a5-B // P632‑312‑660

3 Operation P632
3.5.2.1 COMM1 – Checking Spontaneous Signals

For interface protocols based on IEC 60870‑5‑103, IEC 870‑5‑101, or ILS-C it is
possible to select a signal for test purposes. The transmission of this signal to the
control station as ‘sig. start‘ or ‘sig. end‘ can then be triggered using setting
parameters.
COMM1:
Sel.spontan.sig.test
[ 003 180 ]
Signal 1
Signal 2
Signal 3
Signal n
Selected signals
COMM1:
Test spont.sig.start
[ 003 184 ]
COMM1:
Spontan. sig. start
0 [ --- --- ]
0: don't execute
1: execute
COMM1:
Test spont.sig. end
[ 003 186 ]
COMM1:
Spontan. sig. end
0 [ --- --- ]
0: don't execute
1: execute
48Z50FKA
Fig. 3-17: COMM1 – Checking spontaneous signals.
3.5.2.2 Checking Switchgear Contact Positions and Signals

When checking during test operations with the interface protocols based on
IEC 60870‑5‑103 it is possible to trigger signals (SIG) and contact positions (DEV)
from the control part.
The following parameters are available:
● (221 105) C O MM1: Se l. pos. de v.te st
Selection possibilities:
o Not assigned
o DEV01 ... DEV03
● (221 106) C OMM1 : Te st posi tion de v.
o don't execute
o execute open
o execute close
o execute intermed.
P632/EN M/R-a5-B // P632‑312‑660 3-23

P632 3 Operation
3.5.3 Communication Interface 2 (Function Group COMM2)

Communication interface 2 supports the IEC 60870‑5‑103 interface protocol.
In order for data transfer to function properly, several settings must be made in
the P632.
COMM2:
Line idle state
[ 103 165 ]
COMM2:
Baud rate
[ 103 071 ]
COMM2:
Parity bit
[ 103 171 ]
COMM2:
Dead time monitoring
[ 103 176 ]
COMM2:
Mon. time polling
[ 103 202 ]
COMM2:
Octet comm. address
[ 103 072 ]
COMM2:
Name of manufacturer
[ 103 161]
COMM2:
Octet address ASDU
[ 103 073 ]
COMM2: COMM2:
General enable USER Spontan. sig. enable
[ 103 170 ] [ 103 177 ]
COMM2:
0 Select. spontan.sig.
[ 103 179 ]
1
COMM2:
Transm.enab.cycl.dat
0: No
[ 103 074 ]
1: Yes
COMM2:
Cycl. data ILS tel.
[ 103 175 ]
COMM2:
Delta V
[ 103 050 ]
COMM2:
Sig./meas.block.USER COMM2:
Delta I
[ 103 076 ]
[ 103 051 ]
0 COMM2:
Delta f
1 [ 103 052 ]
0: No COMM2:
Delta meas.v.ILS tel
1: Yes [ 103 150 ]
COMM2:
MAIN: Delta t
Prot. ext. disabled
[ 103 053 ]
[ 038 046 ]
COMM2:
Command block. USER
[ 103 172 ]
0: No
1: Yes
Commun. interface
MAIN:
Test mode
[ 037 071 ]
64Z5189A
Fig. 3-18: Settings for communication interface 2.
3-24 P632/EN M/R-a5-B // P632‑312‑660

3 Operation P632
3.5.3.1 COMM2 – Checking Spontaneous Signals

It is possible to select a signal for test purposes. The transmission of this signal to
the control station as ‘sig. start‘ or ‘sig. end‘ can then be triggered via the local
control panel.
COMM2:
[ 103 180 ]
Signal 1
Signal 2
Signal 3
Signal n
Selected signals
COMM2:
[ 103 184 ]
COMM2:
Spontan. sig. start
0 [ --- --- ]
0: don't execute
1: execute
COMM2:
Test spont.sig. end
[ 103 186 ]
COMM2:
Spontan. sig. end
0 [ --- --- ]
0: don't execute
1: execute
48Z50FLA
Fig. 3-19: COMM2 – Checking spontaneous signals.
P632/EN M/R-a5-B // P632‑312‑660 3-25

P632 3 Operation
3.5.4 Communication Interface IEC 61850 (Function Groups IEC and

GOOSE)
The IEC 61850 communication protocol is implemented by these function groups
and the Ethernet module.
From the software version -660, the Single IP Ethernet Board and Redundant IP
Ethernet Board are available for the devices of the Easergy MiCOM 30 Series.
Function group IEC is only available when Ethernet board is used (hardware
ordering option!).
3.5.4.1 Communication Interface IEC 61850 (Function Group IEC)

As an order option, the P632 supports communication according to IEC 61850
Edition 1 or Edition 2 by selection with the Ethernet board.
3.5.4.1.1 IEC 61850

IEC 61850 was created jointly by users and manufacturers as an international
standard. The main target of IEC 61850 is interoperability of devices. This
includes the capability of two or more intelligent electronic devices (IED),
manufactured by the same company or different companies, to exchange data
for combined operation.
This communication standard IEC 61850 has now created an open and common
basis for communication from the process control level down to the network
control level, for the exchange of signals, data, measured values and commands.
For a standardized description of all information and services available in a field
device a data model, which lists all visible functions, is created. Such a data
model, specifically created for each device, is used as a basis for an exchange of
data between the devices and all process control installations interested in such
information. In order to facilitate engineering at the process control level a
standardized description file of the device, based on XML, is created with the
help of the data model. This file can be imported and processed further by the
relevant configuration program used by the process control device. This makes
possible an automated creation of process variables, substations and signal
images.
Available is the following documentation providing the description of the
IEC 61850 data model which is used with the P632:
● ICD file based on XML in the SCL (Substation Configuration Description
Language) with a description of data, properties and services, available
from the P632, that are to be imported into the configuration tool “IED
Configurator” or into a system configurator.
● PICS_MICS_ADL file with the following contents:
o PICS (Protocol Implementation Conformance Statement) with an
overview of available services.
o MICS (Model Implementation Conformance Statement) with an overview
of available object types.
o ADL (Address Assignment List) with an overview of the assignment of
parameter addresses (signals, measuring values, commands, etc.) used
by the P632 with the device data model as per IEC 61850.
3.5.4.1.2 Ethernet Module

There are four Ethernet modules to be optional available for ordering, two Single
IP Ethernet Boards (SEB) and two Redundant IP Ethernet Boards (REB) where an
Ethernet network can be connected.
3-26 P632/EN M/R-a5-B // P632‑312‑660

3 Operation P632
The SEB module of the communication board provides a fiber-optic interface (LC
connector) or a wire RJ45 interface. While REB module supports two fiber-optic
interfaces (each with LC connector) or two wire RJ45 interfaces, to assure
redundancy at IED level (PRP/HSR/RSTP switchable). See Section 3.5.5, (p. 3-
41) for more information, and the separately available “PRP/HSR - Redundancy
Protocols” Technical Manual for all details.
With SEB or REB Ethernet modules, the P632 provides IEC 61850 Edition 1 or
Edition 2 by selection. Cyber Security is available as an order option for both
Ethernet modules. Please refer to Section 3.3, (p. 3-4) or Technical Manual
“Cyber Security” for more details.
Further more, flexible Product Naming is offered to get the IEC modelling
modified to reflect the hierarchy of a user-defined virtual IED. Please refer to
Technical Manual “Flexible Product Naming” for all details.
The Ethernet board modules additionally provide modulated or demoduated
IRIG‑B signal.
3.5.4.1.3 Configuration and Enabling

The IEC function group can be included in the configuration by setting the
parameter IEC : Function group IEC. This parameter is only visible if the
optional Ethernet communication module is fitted to the P632. After activation of
IEC, all data points associated with this function group (setting parameters, IEC
prot.variant etc.) become visible.
The function can then be enabled or disabled by setting IE C : Gen er al enable
U SER. IEC 61850 Ed1 and ED2 can be selected by setting IE C: I EC prot.
variant. When Redundant IP Ethernet Board is used, the redundancy protocols
HSR/PRP can be switched via IEC: ETH CO MM Mode. Port A/B and service port
C can be blocked with IEC: Bl ock P ort A /B and IE C: Block Port C.
P632/EN M/R-a5-B // P632‑312‑660 3-27

P632 3 Operation
IEC:
IEC prot. variant
[ 104 079 ]
IEC:
ETH COMM Mode
[ 104 080 ]
IEC:
Block Port A/B
[ 104 073 ]
IEC:
Block Port C
[ 104 074 ]
IEC:
Switch Config. Bank
[ 104 043 ]
IEC:
SigGGIO1 selection
[ 104 064 ]
IEC:
Diff. local time
[ 104 206]
IEC:
Diff. dayl.sav. time
[ 104 207 ]
IEC:
Switch.dayl.sav.time
[ 104 219 ]
IEC:
Dayl.sav.time start
[ 104 220 ]
IEC:
Dayl.sav.time st. d
[ 104 221 ]
IEC:
Dayl.sav.time st. m
[ 104 222 ]
IEC:
General enable USER IEC:
Dayl.sav.t.st.0:00 +
[ 104 000 ]
[ 104 223 ]
0 IEC:
Dayl.sav.time end
1 [ 104 225 ]
0: No IEC:
Dayl.sav.time end d
1: Yes [ 104 226 ]
IEC:
Dayl.sav.time end m
[ 104 227 ]
IEC:
Dayl.sav.t.end 0:00+
IEC: [ 104 228 ]
Ctrl blocked user
[ 221 125 ]
0: No
1: Yes
Commun. interface IEC:
Comm. link faulty
[ 105 180 ]
MAIN:
Test mode
[ 037 071 ] IEC:
Control blocked
[ 221 126 ]
49Z9001A
Fig. 3-20: Settings for communication interface IEC 61850.
The setting parameters from the IEC function group as well as the related GOOSE
function group are not automatically active in the P632. The P632 features two
memory “banks” one of which includes the active setting parameters. The other
memory bank is used with the configuration procedure for parameters from the
IED Configurator and the operating system. Specific project-related extensions of
the IEC 61850 parameters from the IED Configurator are loaded into the P632 by
downloading a .MCL file (Ed1) or .CID file (Ed2). The inactive communication
parameters are activated by executing the command IEC : Switch C onfig.
Bank. This command may also be issued from the IED Configurator.
3-28 P632/EN M/R-a5-B // P632‑312‑660

3 Operation P632
System configurator
PACiS SCE
.iid
.scd
.icd
IED Configurator IED Configurator
Operating program
.mcl (Ed1)
.cid (Ed2) .x3v
F1
F2
F3
F4
F5
F6
P632
12Z9002A
Fig. 3-21: Configuration according to IEC 61850-6.
P632/EN M/R-a5-B // P632‑312‑660 3-29

P632 3 Operation
IEC 61850 parameters separate from protection device parameters!
IED
Control PC
Processor module
Operating program
Device
parameters
Parameter
switch
Parameter download
IED Ethernet module
Configurator Parameter upload IEC 61850 IEC 61850

parameter parameter
Bank 1 Bank 2
Bank switching to enable the

device parameters
New approach to IED parameter management

19Z7002B
Fig. 3-22: Saving configuration parameters.
3.5.4.1.3.1 IEC – Checking Spontaneous Signals

It is possible to select a signal for test purposes. The transmission of this signal to
the control station as ‘sig. start‘ or ‘sig. end‘ can then be triggered via the local
control panel.
3-30 P632/EN M/R-a5-B // P632‑312‑660

3 Operation P632
IEC:
[ 104 245 ]
Signal 1
Signal 2
Signal 3
Signal n
Selected signals
IEC:
[ 104 246 ]
IEC:
Spontan. sig. start
0 [ --- --- ]
0: don't execute
1: execute
IEC:
Test spont.sig. end
[ 104 247 ]
IEC:
Spontan. sig. end
0 [ --- --- ]
0: don't execute
1: execute
49Z9002A
Fig. 3-23: IEC – Checking spontaneous signals.
3.5.4.1.3.2 Checking Switchgear Contact Positions and Signals

When checking during test operations with the interface protocols based on
IEC 61850 it is possible to trigger signals (SIG) and contact positions (DEV) from
the control part.
The following parameters are available:
● (104 248) IEC : Se l. pos . DEV te st
o Not assigned
o DEV01 ... DEVxx
● (104 249) I EC: Te st pos iti on DE V
o don't execute
o execute open
o execute close
o execute intermed.
3.5.4.1.4 Client Log-on

Communication in Ethernet no longer occurs in a restrictive master slave system,
as is common with other protocols. Instead, server or client functionalities, as
defined in the “Abstract Communication Service Interface” (ACSI, IEC 61870‑7‑2),
are assigned to the devices. A “server” is always that device which provides
information to other devices. A client may log on to this server in order to receive
P632/EN M/R-a5-B // P632‑312‑660 3-31

P632 3 Operation
information, for instance “reports”. In its function as server the P632 can supply
up to 16 clients, linked into the network, with spontaneous or cyclic information.
3.5.4.1.5 Clock Synchronization

With IEC 61850 clock synchronization is effected via the SNTP protocol, defined
as standard for Ethernet. Here the P632 functions as an SNTP client.
For clock synchronization one can choose between the operating modes Anycast
from SNTP Server or Request from Server. With the first operating mode
synchronization occurs by a broadcast message sent from the SNTP server to all
devices in the network, and in the second operating mode the P632 requests a
device-specific time signal during a settable cycle.
Two SNTP servers may be set. In this case, clock synchronization is preferably
performed by the first server. The second server is only reverted to if no signal is
received from the first server.
When looking at the source priority for clock synchronization, which is set at the
MAIN function then, by selecting COMM1/IEC, synchronization per IEC 61850 is
automatically active but only if this communication protocol is applied.
3.5.4.1.6 Generating Datasets, Reporting

The specific project related feature of the P632’s communications behavior is
determined by the configuration of datasets, reports and high priority
transmission methods. A piece of information must be included in a dataset so as
to be transmitted as a signal. A dataset is a list to transmit certain data objects.
The selection of data objects and the resulting length of the dataset is
determined by the application; merely the GOOSE capacity, i.e. the maximum
size of a dataset to be transmitted by GOOSE, is limited to 1500 bytes.
It is not possible to read the IEC configuration back from the P632 if the “Dataset”
sizes exceed the GOOSE size limit significantly. Therefore it is recommended to
limit the “Dataset” size(s) to 100% of the GOOSE capacity. Too large a dataset can
spoil IEC 61850 communication. Hence, the dataset size limit of 100% of the
GOOSE capacity should not be exceeded, neither for GOOSE nor for reports.
Data objects provided by the P632 are available for selection with a structure as
specified by IEC 61850. Within the quality descriptor for each piece of
information the invalid bit and the test bit are served according to the P632’s
state; the other attributes are not set. Any number of datasets may be created
with the IED Configurator. Saving datasets at System\LLN0 is compulsory. The
knowledge of dataset content is imperative for decoding and evaluating received
signals. Configuration files possess a listing of all datasets with a description of
all data objects included.
Next to their use with high priority transmission methods (see Section 3.5.4.1.12,
(p. 3-38)) datasets are used mainly for reporting. The P632 provides up to 16
unbuffered reports and 8 buffered reports independent of the number of clients
logged-on. Management is arranged into 16 Unbuffered Report Control Blocks
(urcbA to urcbP) and 8 Buffered Report Control Blocks (brcbA to brcbH). Whereas
with unbuffered reporting pieces of information may be lost during a
communications failure, the buffered report control blocks support a buffered
transmission which is required for the uninterrupted writing of events. A pre-
defined dataset may be assigned to each report which will then determine which
data object will be transmitted with the relevant report. Assigning datasets is not
limited; the same dataset may be referenced in various reports or even in
GOOSEs.
The P632 can serve up to 16 clients. Each client can log-on to any number of
available reports. One unbuffered report can be allocated to max. 8 clients, and
3-32 P632/EN M/R-a5-B // P632‑312‑660

3 Operation P632
one buffered report can be allocated to max. 4 clients. A client is then able to
activate the wanted report for himself and to set the transmission behavior to his
requirements. The system concept with intended clients must be taken into
account when datasets are assigned to the reports.
Reports are not received by the P632.
3.5.4.1.7 Transmitting Modeled Signals Not Provided by the IEC 61850 Data Model
In addition to the information included in the IEC 61850 data model an optional
number of up to 16 signals can be selected from all the signals available in the
P632 to be transmitted via reporting. A selection of state signals (shuttling to
communications) is made by setting IE C: SigGGIO1 select ion. The data
object indexes defined for SigGGIO1 must follow the sequence given for the ‘m
out of n’ selection for the state signals. The indexes SigGGIO1.ST.ind1 to
SigGGIO1.ST.ind16 may then be included in the datasets just as the other data
objects.
3.5.4.1.8 Single Commands

Single commands (e.g. short command, long command, persistent command)
are configured with the operating program. Sending commands to the P632 can
be carried out from all clients that have previously logged-on to the P632. But
only one command at a time is carried out. The operating mode Direct control
with normal security is provided for single commands.
3.5.4.1.9 Control and Monitoring of Switchgear Units

Configuration of control of switchgear devices for the IEC 61850 is only possible
with a special configuration software, the IED Configurator.
Control of switchgear units can be carried out from all clients that have
previously logged on to the P632. Only one control command is executed at a
time, i.e. further control requests issued by other clients during the execution of
such a command are rejected. The following operating modes [IC ]: ct lMode l
are available to control external devices by clients and they can be individually
set for each switchgear device:
● Status only
● Direct control with enhanced security
● SBO (Select before operate) with enhanced security
When set to the operating mode Select before operate the switchgear unit is
selected by the client before the control command is issued. Because of this
selection the switchgear unit is reserved for the client. Control requests issued by
other clients are rejected. If after a selection no control command is issued by
the client the P632 resets this selection after a settable timeout period [IC ]:
sboTimeout (default: 2 minutes) has elapsed.
If with a system application it must be ensured that only one control command at
a time is being processed system wide ("uniqueness") then interlocking of
secondary devices among themselves is setup with GOOSE. For further details
see description of function group GOOSE.
The switchgear device’s contact positions are signaled to the clients with the
reports.
Setting parameters labeled with brackets – i. e. “[ I C ] :…” – instead of a normal

function group are set with the “IED Configurator”. They cannot be modified from
the local control panel (HMI), nor with the operating program.
There is a separate Chapter “IEC 61850 Settings via IED Configurator” with a
description of all such setting parameters.
P632/EN M/R-a5-B // P632‑312‑660 3-33

P632 3 Operation
3.5.4.1.10 Originator Category

The Originator is an information type defined by IEC 61850, which is sent with
switch commands and position signals of switchgear units. This kind of data
consists of two information items:
● Originator Identification: This is text describing the originator of the switch
command. (If unknown, then an empty text string is sent.)
● Originator Category: This is the originator of the command according to a
list of standardized categories.
The range of values of the Originator Category, as listed in the following table, is
supported.
3-34 P632/EN M/R-a5-B // P632‑312‑660

3 Operation P632
Originator Originator Use Case / Comment

category Identification
1 remote-control See note [1] The control command is sent by an operator at station level.
(at the end of
this table).
2 automatic-remote See note [1]. The control command is sent by an automatic function at
station level.
3 station-control See note [1]. The control command is sent by an operator at network
level.
4 automatic-station See note [1]. The control command is sent by an automatic function at
network level.
5 bay-control Local HMI The control command is generated at the local HMI of the
Control P632.
6 bay-control Local EXT The control command is sent via binary input (see note [2])
Control by an operator at an external local control panel, using the
setting
● (221 061) MAIN: Ele ctrical contr ol = Local
and any of the following input signals:
● DEVxx: In p.asg. el. ct rl.ope n
● DEV xx: Inp.asg.e l .ctr.clos e .
7 remote-control Remote EXT The control command is sent via binary input (see note [2])
Control by an operator at an external local control panel, using the
setting
● (221 061) MA IN: E lectri cal control = Remote
and any of the following input signals:
● DEV xx: In p.asg. el. ctrl. ope n
● DEV xx: Inp.asg.e l.ctr.clos e.
8 process Spontaneous A trip or close command which is generated by a protection

Process Event function.
(See also note [2].)
9 process Spontaneous There is a spontaneous position change of the switchgear

Process Event device.
Possible causes:
● A manual switch command
● The operation of another protection and control device
Further possible causes:
● Loss of supply voltage of electrical input signals
● Faulty wiring
● Faulty switchgear device
(However, this usually results in an intermediate position 00
or 11 of the switchgear device.)
P632/EN M/R-a5-B // P632‑312‑660 3-35

P632 3 Operation
Originator Originator Use Case / Comment

category Identification
10 process IED Restart Power-up or restart of the P632, intentionally or

spontaneously. Possible causes:
● Loss of the auxiliary supply voltage of the P632
● Commissioning activities
● Operation of self-monitoring of the P632
11 maintenance Test Mode The P632 is in test mode.

Operation The test mode can be activated either by setting parameter
● (003 012) MA IN: Tes t mode USE R
or by the binary signal
● (037 070) MAI N: Tes t mode EXT
(See also note [2].)
[1]: The P632 copies the Originator Identification from the command request into
the information report.
[2]: External binary signals can be received via various interfaces:

● Opto-coupler inputs
● GOOSE substation communication
● Assignment of LOGIC outputs
The P632 does never send the Originator Category “automatic-bay”.
3-36 P632/EN M/R-a5-B // P632‑312‑660

3 Operation P632
UC 7
UC 1,2
Network
HMI
Trip/close by external
Gateway protection or control
UC 7
UC 3,4 UC 10 , 11
UC 9
Circuit
Station
breaker
HMI UC 6, 7 UC 5 UC 8
F1
F2
t
F3
F4
F5
F6 I
Binary signal
Communication link
Internal interface 12Z7312D
Fig. 3-24: Use cases in the network context. The “UC” numbers refer to Originator Categories in the table above.
P632/EN M/R-a5-B // P632‑312‑660 3-37

P632 3 Operation
3.5.4.1.11 Fault Transmission

Including fault transmission for the IEC 61850 in the configuration is only possible
with the IED Configurator.
Transmission of fault files is supported per “File Transfer”. COMTRADE fault files
in the P632 are transmitted uniformly either as ASCII or binary formatted files.
Fault transmission can be cancelled from the configuration.
3.5.4.1.12 High Priority Transmission of Information

Whereas normal server-client services are transmitted at the MMS and TCP/IP
level the high priority transmission of information is carried out directly at
Ethernet level. Furthermore messages in such a particular form can be received
by all participants in the relevant sub-network, independent of their server or
client function. They are deployed in instances where high speed transmission of
information is wanted between two or more devices. Applications, for example,
are reverse interlocking, transfer trip or decentralized substation interlock.
The standard IEC 61850 provides the Generic Object Oriented Substation Event
(GOOSE) for high priority transmission of information. The GOOSE enables
transmission of all data formats available in the data model, such as binary
information, integer values, two-pole contact position signals or analog measured
values. The P632 supports receipt and evaluation of GOOSE including binary
information and two-pole contact position signals from external devices.
3.5.4.1.13 Secure Communication with the Easergy Studio via the Ethernet Interface
The secure communication is available as of software version -660.

The communication will be done using port 4422. Ensure this port is left unblocked
on the network.
When P632 and Easergy Studio are connected via the Ethernet interface, they
will communicate securely using TLS (Transport Layer Security Protocol). The
benefits of secure communication are:
● Help in the prevention of unwanted eavesdropping between Easergy Studio
and the IED.
● Help in the prevention of modification of data between Easergy Studio and
the IED.
● Ensure integrity of data.
● Help to prevent replay of data at a later data.
Setting up a connection, as a quick guide you need to do the following:
● In Easergy Studio, click the Quick Connect... button.
● Select the relevant Device Type in the Quick Connect dialog box.
● Select Ethernet port.
● Enter the relevant data i.e. IP address of IEDn
● Click Finish.
● Easergy Studio will attempt to communicate with the device.
When attempting to connect to the IED via Ethernet, Easergy Studio will first
attempt to communicate with the IED via secure communication.
3-38 P632/EN M/R-a5-B // P632‑312‑660

3 Operation P632
3.5.4.2 Generic Object Oriented Substation Event (Function Group GOOSE)

For high priority exchange of information between individual devices (IEDs) in a
local network, the P632 provides the function group GOOSE as defined in the
standard IEC 61850. GOOSE features high-speed and secure transmission of
information for reverse interlocking, decentralized substation interlock, trip
commands, blocking, enabling, contact position signals and other signals.
GOOSE Messages are only transmitted by switches but not by routers. GOOSE
messages therefore remain in the local network to which the P632 is connected.
3.5.4.2.1 Configuration and Enabling

Function group GOOSE can be configured by setting the parameter
GOOSE: Funct ion group GOOSE This parameter is only visible if the optional
Ethernet communication module is fitted to the P632. After having configured the
GOOSE all parameters associated to this function group are then visible and
ready to be configured.
Further setting parameters from function group GOOSE are set with the
IED Configurator, but they cannot be modified from the local control panel (MMI)
or with the operating program.
The function can then be enabled or disabled by setting GO OSE: General
enable USE R.
» Device A » Device B
IEC 61850
Mapping
Easerg Studio
GOOSE: Input 1 ... 128 (SPS)

Ext. Dev 1 ... 128 (DPS)
IED Configurator
System/LLN0/Dataset x
IED Configurator MCL (Ed1) IED Configurator System/GosGGIO1

or
System/LLN0/gcb01 ... 08 Ind1.stVal ... Ind128.stVal
CID (Ed2)
19Z8203C
Fig. 3-25: GOOSE configuration.
3.5.4.2.2 Sending GOOSE

The GOOSE can send up to 8 different GOOSE messages which are managed in 8
GOOSE Control Blocks (gcb01 to gcb08). Information content depends on the
respective dataset assigned to GOOSE. The maximum size of a dataset to be
sent by GOOSE is limited to 1500 bytes. A control display is shown by the IED
Configurator to check this limit.
P632/EN M/R-a5-B // P632‑312‑660 3-39

P632 3 Operation
It is not possible to read the IEC configuration back from the P632 if the “Dataset”
sizes exceed the GOOSE size limit significantly. Therefore it is recommended to
limit the “Dataset” size(s) to 100% of the GOOSE capacity. Too large a dataset can
spoil IEC 61850 communication. Hence, the dataset size limit of 100% of the
When defining the datasets for GOOSE it is advised to select the individual data
attributes and not the overlapping data objects. By this the amount of data is
kept within a limit and decoding is guaranteed on the receiving end.
When a state change occurs with a selected state signal or a measured value
changes which is greater than the dead band set for the relevant data point then
the complete GOOSE is sent. There will be multiple send repetitions at ascending
time periods. The first send repetition occurs at the given cycle time set with the
parameter [IC]: Minimum Cycle Time. The cycles for the following send
repetitions result from a conditional equation with the increment set with the
parameter [IC ] : I ncreme nt. Should no further state changes occur up to the
time when the maximum cycle time has elapsed [ IC]: Maximum Cycle Time,
then GOOSE will be sent cyclically at intervals as set for the maximum cycle
time.
In order to have unambiguous identification of a GOOSE sent, characteristics
such as [IC ]: Mult icast MAC Addres s, [ IC]: Application ID (hex),
[I C]: VLA N I dent ifie r (h ex), [IC] : V LA N P r iority and
[I C]: GOOSE I de nt if ie r must be entered in the IED Configurator settings.
Further characteristics are [ IC ]: Datase t R ef e rence and
[IC]: Config urat ion Revis ion.
Each GOOSE is given the state change index and the number of send repetitions.
3.5.4.2.3 Receiving GOOSE

With GOOSE up to 128 logic binary state signals as well as 128 two-pole contact
position signals from external devices (Ext.Devxx) can be received. For each
state signal or contact position signal to be received a specific GOOSE message
is to be selected, which will contain the information wanted, by setting
[IC ]: Mu lt icast MA C Addres s, [IC] : A ppl ication ID (hex),
[IC]: Source Pat h, [IC] : GOOSE Iden ti f ie r and [IC]: DataSet Refere nce.
With the further setting of [ IC]: Data Obj I nde x / Type, which corresponds to
the GOOSE position index and the information structure of the sending device,
the required information from the chosen GOOSE will be selected. The
identification features "VLAN identifier" and [IC] : Configuration Re vision
that are also included in the GOOSE received will not be evaluated.
These parameters characterizing the information may be taken either from
device or project planning documentation of the sending device or from a
configuration file which is conform to IEC 61850. The IED Configurator will
support the import of .IID, .SCD, .MCL (Ed1) and .CID (Ed2) files when the
"browse function" (virtual key) is applied. The selection and acceptance of
parameters from an existing project planning is distinguished by a simplified and
very reliable data input.
Each GOOSE includes time information on the duration of validity of its
information. This corresponds to the double time period to the next GOOSE
repetition. If the duration of validity has elapsed without having received this
GOOSE again (i.e. because of a fault in communications), the signals received
will automatically be set to their respective default value
[IC ]: De fault Input V alu e. Which of the possible state values will set the
wanted security grade is dependent on the relevant application.
3-40 P632/EN M/R-a5-B // P632‑312‑660

3 Operation P632
The following configuration (shuttling to the device functions) of the logic state
signals received from the logic node GosGGIO1 (GOOSE: In put 1 fct. assig.
(or Input 2, …, Input 128)) is made on the basis of the selection table of the
binary signal inputs (opto‑coupler inputs).
The virtual key "Unmap" may be used to remove the link of a binary signal input
to an external data point. In such a case all entries for this binary signal input are
deleted.
3.5.4.2.4 Uniqueness of Control within a System
» Device A » Device B
IED Configurator S1 Studio
Control/LLN0.ST.OrdRun.stVal
IED Configurator
System/LLN0/Dataset
x
IED Configurator MCL (Ed1) IED Configurator System/OrdRunGGIO1

or
System/LLN0/gcb01 ... 08 CID (Ed2) Ind1.stVal ... Ind32.stVal
19Z7004C
Fig. 3-26: Uniqueness of Control.
If with a system application it must be ensured that only one control command at
a time is being processed system wide (“uniqueness”) then interlocking of
secondary devices among themselves is setup with GOOSE. The P632 sets the
status information Control/LLN0.ST.OrdRun.stVal. when it has received a control
command. This information – stored in a dataset – is distributed in the system by
GOOSE and is therefore available to all other devices as an interlocking
condition. The state information is reset and accordingly signaled after
termination of the command sequence.
The P632 is capable to monitor the command status of up to 32 further devices.
With the IED Configurator OrdRunGGIO1.ind1.stVal to OrdRunGGIO1.ind32.stVal
are configured in a similar way to the other GOOSE inputs. A shuttling to the
interlocking equations is not necessary as their consideration within command
checking is automatically enabled when the first binary signal input is configured.
During a signaling receipt phase command effecting will be rejected.
3.5.5 Ethernet Board
From the software version -660, the Single IP Ethernet Board and Redundant IP
Ethernet Board are available for the devices of the Easergy MiCOM 30 Series. To
get information of the former Ethernet board, please refer to the manuals before
-660.
The P632 Transformer Differential Protection Device can be fitted with new
communication module, the Single IP Ethernet Board or Redundant IP Ethernet
P632/EN M/R-a5-B // P632‑312‑660 3-41

P632 3 Operation
Board. (See Chapter 15, (p. 15-1) for the exact order information and
Section 5.7, (p. 5-26) for the location and connection diagrams.)
The Ethernet boards are developed to support HSR/PRP redundancy protocol,
conformance of IEC 61850 edition 1 and 2, Cyber Security (CS) and Flexible
Product Naming (fPN).
3.5.5.1 Hardware Modules

Four boards are available for Ethernet communication, two Single IP Ethernet
Boards (SEB) and two Redundant IP Ethernet Boards (REB). Easergy MiCOM 30
Series are constructed from standard hardware modules.
The Ethernet board is fitted into Slot 2 of the P632. For REB, each board has
three MAC addresses, one for the managed embedded switch and two for the
P632. The following table lists the item numbers of the Ethernet board variants:
Type Item number Description Width
A 9652159 REB copper: 3 * RJ45 + 1 * IRIG-B 4 TE
A 9652160 REB fiber: 1 * RJ45 + 2 * SFP-LC + 1 * IRIG-B 4 TE

Tab. 3-3: Redundant IP Ethernet Board variants.
Type Item number Description Width
A 9652161 SEB copper: 1 * RJ45 + 1 * IRIG-B 4 TE
A 9652162 SEB fiber: 1 * RJ45 + 1 * SFP-LC + 1 * IRIG-B 4 TE

Tab. 3-4: Single IP Ethernet Board variants.
The Single IP Ethernet Board variants are for information, only Redundant IP
Ethernet Board can support PRP/HSR protocol.
If the IP or MAC address will be changed, the MiCOM Px30 Series Loader can be
used to configure these values.
3-42 P632/EN M/R-a5-B // P632‑312‑660

3 Operation P632
3.5.5.2 Redundancy Protocols

The following list shows Schneider Electric’s implementation of Ethernet
redundancy, which has two variants with embedded IEC 61850, plus PRP and
HSR redundancy protocols.
Parallel Redundancy Protocol (PRP IEC 62439‑3 (2012))

● The PRP uses two independent Ethernet networks that operate in parallel.
The PRP is a “redundancy in the devices” method that provides bumpless
switchover in case of failure or reintegration. Furthermore, it provides the
shortest Ethernet network reconfiguration time as network reconfiguration
is seamless.
High-availability Seamless Redundancy Protocol (HSR

IEC 62439‑3 (2012))
● HSR method is independent of any industrial Ethernet protocol and typically
used in a ring topology. Nodes within the ring are restricted to be HSR-
capable bridging nodes, thus avoiding the use of dedicated bridges. A
simple HSR network consists of doubly attached bridging nodes, each
having two ring ports, interconnected by full-duplex links.
3.5.5.3 Generic Functions for All Redundant Ethernet Boards

The following apply to all redundant Ethernet protocols (PRP and HSR).
P632/EN M/R-a5-B // P632‑312‑660 3-43

P632 3 Operation
Ethernet 100Base Fx/Tx

The fiber optic ports are full duplex 100 Mbps LC connectors or wire RJ45
supports 100 Mbps.
Forwarding
The devices from the families Easergy MiCOM 30, 40, the C264 and the MiCOM H
switches support store and forward mode. The MiCOM switch forwards messages
with known addresses to the appropriate port. The messages with unknown
addresses, the broadcast messages and the multicast messages are forwarded
out to all ports except the source port. MiCOM switches do not forward error
packets, 802.3x pause frames or local packets.
Priority Tagging
802.1p priority is enabled on all ports.
Simple Network Management Protocol – SNMP

Simple Network Management Protocol (SNMP) is the network protocol developed
to manage devices in an IP network. SNMP relies on a Management Information
Base (MIB) that contains information about parameters to supervise. The MIB
format is a tree structure, with each node in the tree identified by a numerical
Object IDentifier (OID). Each OID identifies a variable that can be read or set
using SNMP with the appropriate software. The information in the MIBs is
standardized.
Various SNMP client software tools can be used with the Series 30, 40, C264 and
Hx5x range. Schneider Electric recommends using an SNMP MIB browser which
can perform the basic SNMP operations such as GET, GETNEXT, RESPONSE. To
access the network using SNMP, use the IP address of the embedded switch in
the Redundant IP Ethernet board.
Simple Network Time Protocol – SNTP

Simple Network Time Protocol is supported by both the P632 and the Redundant
Ethernet switch. SNTP is used to synchronize the clocks of computer systems
over packet-switched, variable-latency data networks. A jitter buffer is used to
reduce the effects of variable latency introduced by queuing in packet switched
networks, ensuring a continuous data stream over the network.
The P632 receives the synchronization from the SNTP server. This is done using
the IP address of the SNTP server entered into the P632 from the IED
Configurator software.
3-44 P632/EN M/R-a5-B // P632‑312‑660

3 Operation P632
3.6 IRIG-B Clock Synchronization (Function Group IRIGB)

If, for example, a GPS receiver with IRIG-B connection is available, the internal
clock of the P632 can be synchronized to run on GPS time using the optional
IRIG-B interface. It should be noted that the IRIG-B signal holds information on
the day only (day of the current year). Using this information and the year set at
the P632, the P632 calculates the current date (DD.MM.YY).
Disabling and Enabling the IRIG-B Interface

The IRIG‑B interface can be disabled or enabled using a setting parameter.
Synchronization Readiness
If the IRIG-B interface is enabled and receiving a signal, the P632 checks the
received signal for plausibility. Implausible signals are rejected by the P632. If
the P632 does not receive a correct signal in the long run, synchronization will
not be ready any longer.
IRIGB:
General enable USER
[ 023 200 ]
IRIGB:
Enabled
[ 023 201 ]
IRIGB:
Synchron. ready
[ 023 202 ]
IRIGB:
EBR Synchron. ready
[ 023 203 ]
19Z9001A
Fig. 3-27: IRIG‑B interface.
P632/EN M/R-a5-B // P632‑312‑660 3-45

P632 3 Operation
3.7 Configurable Function Keys (Function Group F_KEY)

The P632 provides six freely configurable function keys. A password may be
configured for each function key (e.g. for F1 at F _KEY: Password funct .k ey
1), and if a password has been configured then the respective function key will
only be enabled when the configured password is entered.
As an example the operation of function key F1 is shown in Fig. 3-28, (p. 3-47).
After the password has been entered the function key will remain active for the
time period set at F_KEY: Re tur n time fct.ke ys. Thereafter, the function key
is disabled until the password is entered again. The same is valid for function
keys F2 to F6. Exception: If a function key is configured as a control key a
password request is only issued when the function “Local/Remote switching” has
been assigned to this function key.
Configuration of function keys with a single function

One function may be assigned to each function key (e.g. for F1) at F_KEY: Fct .
assig nm. F1 by selecting a logic state signal (except LO C: Tr ig. menu jmp 1
EX T and L OC : Tri g. men u jmp 2 EXT). The assigned function is triggered by
pressing the respective function key on the P632.
Configuration of function keys with menu jump lists

Instead of a single function each function key may have one of the two menu
jump lists assigned (e.g. for F1) at F _KE Y: Fct. as signm. F1 by selecting the
listing at L OC: Trig. me n u jmp 1 EXT or LOC: Trig. m enu jmp 2 EXT. The
functions of the selected menu jump list are triggered in sequence by repeated
pressing of the assigned function key.
Both menu jump lists are assembled at L OC: Fct. menu jmp list 1 or
LOC : Fct . menu jm p li st 2. Up to 16 functions such as setting parameters,
event counters and/or event logs may be selected.
LED indicators including the six positioned directly next to the function keys are
configured independently and in this respect there is no relationship to the
respective function key configuration.
Configuration of the READ key

As with L OC: Fct . m en u jmp l is t 1 or L OC: Fct. menu jmp list 2 up to 16
functions may also be selected from the same menu jump list at LOC : F ct .
rea d k ey. They are triggered in sequence by repeated pressing of the “READ”
key.
Configuring function keys as control keys

Each function key may be configured as a control key by selecting one of the
functions at (e.g. for F1) F_KEY: Fct. as s ignm. F1:
● MA IN : Local /Remote ke y (060 004)
● MA IN : De vi ce s ele ction ke y (060 001)
● MA IN : D ev ice O PEN ke y (060 002)
● MAI N: De vice C LOSE ke y (060 003)
These control functions may only be used sensibly if all four of the above
commands have been configured thus engaging four of the available six function
keys.
3-46 P632/EN M/R-a5-B // P632‑312‑660

3 Operation P632
Operating mode of the function keys

For each function key the operating mode may be selected (e.g. for F1) at
F_KEY: O pe rat ing mode F1. Here it is possible to select whether the function
key operates as a key or as a switch. In the Key operating mode the selected
function is active while the function key is pressed. In the Switch operating mode
the selected function is switched on or off every time the function key is pressed.
The state of the function keys can be displayed.
Exception: For function keys configured as control keys the operating mode is
irrelevant and it is therefore ignored.
Handling keys
If backlighting for the LC display is switched off it will automatically light up when
a function key or the "READ" key is pressed. The assigned function will only be
triggered when the respective key is pressed a second time. This is also valid for
the other keys.
F_KEY:
Fct. assignm. F1
[ 080 112 ]
Function 1 EXT
Function 2 EXT
Function 3 EXT
Function n EXT
Selected function & Activate function
F_KEY:
Operating mode F1
[ 080 132 ]
1 & F_KEY:
State F1
2 [ 080 122 ]
1: Key
2: Switch
& & S1 1
& R1 0
1)
1) Keys, local control

40Z5003A
Fig. 3-28: Configuration and operating mode of function keys. The assigned function is either a single function or a
menu jump list.
P632/EN M/R-a5-B // P632‑312‑660 3-47

P632 3 Operation
3.8 Configuration and Operating Mode of the Binary Inputs

(Function Group INP)
The P632 has opto coupler inputs for processing binary signals from the
substation. The functions that will be activated in the P632 by triggering these
binary signal inputs are defined by the configuration of the binary signal inputs.
In order to ensure that during normal operation the P632 will recognize an input
signal, the input signal must persist for at least 8 ms plus the set filter time
(provided that Active "high", filt. or Active "low", filt. has been selected for
IN P: Ope r. mode U xxx).
Configuring the Binary Inputs

One function can be assigned to each binary signal input by configuration. The
same function can be assigned to several signal inputs. Thus one function can be
activated from several control points having different signal voltages.
It should be noted that time-critical applications such as time synchronization
commands should not be mapped to the binary signal inputs of the analog I/O
module as these have an increased reaction time due to internal processing.
In this technical manual, it is assumed that the required functions (marked “EXT”
in the address description) have been assigned to binary signal inputs by
configuration.
Operating Mode of the Binary Inputs

The operating mode for each binary signal input can be defined. The user can
specify whether the presence (Active "high" mode) or absence (Active "low"
mode) of a voltage shall be interpreted as the logic ‘1’ signal. The display of the
state of a binary signal input – "low" or "high" – is independent of the setting for
the operating mode of the signal input.
Filter Function
An additional filter function may be enabled in order to suppress transient
interference peaks at the logic signal inputs (operating modes Active "high", filt.
or Active "low", filt.). With this function enabled a status change at the binary
logic input is only signaled when the input signal remains at a steady signal level
during a set number of sampling steps (sampling step size = period / 20). The
number of sampling steps is set at parameter INP : Filt er.
3-48 P632/EN M/R-a5-B // P632‑312‑660

3 Operation P632
INP:
Fct. assignm. U xxx
[ XXX XXX ]
Function 1 EXT
Function 2 EXT
Function 3 EXT
Function n EXT
Selected function & Activate function
INP:
Oper. mode U xxx
[ YYY XXX ]
0: Active "low"
1: Active "high"
2: Active "low", filt.
3: Active "high", filt.
-Uxxx
&
Input signal
&
INP: &
Filter
[ 010 220 ]
&
INP:
State U xxx
&
[ ZZZ ZZZ ]
&
12Z6213A
Fig. 3-29: Configuration and operating mode of the binary signal inputs.
P632/EN M/R-a5-B // P632‑312‑660 3-49

P632 3 Operation
3.9 Measured Data Input (Function Group MEASI)

When the P632 is equipped with the analog (I/O) module Y it has two analog
inputs available for measured data input. Direct current is fed to the P632
through the 20 mA analog input (input channel 1). The other input is designed for
connection of a PT 100 resistance thermometer.
The input current IDC present at the analog (I/O) module Y is displayed as a
measured operating value. The current that is conditioned for monitoring
purposes (IDC,lin) is also displayed as a measured operating value. In addition, it is
monitored by the Limit Value Monitoring function to detect whether it exceeds or
falls below set thresholds (see Section 3.33, (p. 3-215)).
The measured temperature is also displayed as measured operating value and
monitored by the Limit Value Monitoring function to determine whether it
exceeds or falls below set threshold (see Section 3.33, (p. 3-215)).
All measured variables are also forwarded to the Thermal Overload Protection
function. With this protection it is possible to set whether the PT 100 resistance
thermometer or the 20 mA analog input is to be used for the thermal replica (see
Section 3.26.1, (p. 3-176)).
Disabling or Enabling the Measured Data Input Function

The Measured Data Input function can be disabled or enabled via setting
parameters.
MEASI:
General enable USER
[ 011 100 ]
0
MEASI:
1 Enabled
[ 035 008 ]
0: No
1: Yes
S8Z52H1A
Fig. 3-30: Disabling or enabling the measured data input function.
3-50 P632/EN M/R-a5-B // P632‑312‑660

3 Operation P632
3.9.1 Direct Current Input on the Analog (I/O) Module Y

External measuring transducers normally supply an output current of 0 to 20 mA
that is directly proportional to the physical quantity being measured – the
temperature, for example.
If the output current of the measuring transducer is directly proportional to the
measured quantity only in certain ranges, linearization can be arranged,
provided that the measured data input is set accordingly. Furthermore, for
certain applications it may be necessary to limit the range being monitored or to
monitor certain parts of the range with a higher or lower sensitivity.
By setting the value pair MEA SI: ID C 1 and MEA SI: ID C,lin 1, the user
specifies which input current IDC will correspond to the current that is monitored
by the Limit Value Monitoring function, i.e. IDC,lin. (These two setting parameters
refer to value pair number 1; setting parameters for value pairs 2 to 20 are
available, too.)
The resulting points, called “interpolation points”, are connected by straight lines
in an IDC‑IDC,lin diagram. In order to implement a simple characteristic, it is
sufficient to specify two interpolation points, which are also used as limiting
values (see Fig. 3-31, (p. 3-51)). Up to 20 interpolation points are available to
implement a complex characteristic.
When setting the characteristic the user must remember that only a rising/rising
or falling/falling curve sense is allowed (no peak or vee-shapes). If the setting
differs, the signal SFMON: In vali d s calin g IDC will be generated.
I DC,lin / I DC,nom
1.2
1.1
I DC,lin20 1
0.9
0.8
0.7
0.6
0.5
0.4
0.3
0.2
0.1
I DC,lin1 0
0 0.1 0.2 0.25 0.3 0.35 0.4 0.45 0.5 0.6 I DC / I DC,nom
I DC1 I DC20
19Z5266A_EN
Fig. 3-31: Example of the conversion of 4 to 10 mA input current to 0 to 20 mA monitored current, IDC,lin.
P632/EN M/R-a5-B // P632‑312‑660 3-51

P632 3 Operation
IDC,lin / IDC,nom
0.8
Interpolation points
IDC,lin20 0.7
0.6
IDC,lin4 0.5
0.4
IDC,lin3 0.3
IDC,lin2 0.2
IDC,lin1 0.1
0
0 0.1 0.2 0.3 0.4 0.5 0.6 0.7 0.8 0.9 1 1.1 1.2
IDC1 IDC2 IDC3 IDC4 IDC20 IDC / IDC,nom
Enable IDC p.u.

D5Z52KEC_EN
Fig. 3-32: Example of a characteristic with five interpolation points (characteristic with zero suppression setting of
0.1 IDC,nom is shown as a broken line).
3-52 P632/EN M/R-a5-B // P632‑312‑660

3 Operation P632
MEASI: MEASI: MEASI:

IDC 1 IDC 8 IDC 15
[ 037 150 ] [ 037 164 ] [ 037 178 ]

IDC,lin 1 IDC,lin 8 IDC,lin 15
[037 151 ] [037 165 ] [037 179 ]

IDC 2 IDC 9 IDC 16
[ 037 152 ] [ 037 166 ] [ 037 180 ]

[ 037 153 ] [ 037 167 ] [ 037 181 ]

IDC 3 IDC 10 IDC 17
[ 037 154 ] [ 037 168 ] [ 037 182 ]

[ 037 155 ] [ 037 169 ] [ 037 183 ]

IDC 4 IDC 11 IDC 18
[ 037 156 ] [ 037 170 ] [ 037 184 ]

[ 037 157 ] [ 037 171 ] [ 037 185 ]

IDC 5 IDC 12 IDC 19
[ 037 158 ] [ 037 172 ] [ 037 186 ]

[ 037 159 ] [ 037 173 ] [ 037 187 ]

IDC 6 IDC 13 IDC 20
[ 037 160 ] [ 037 174 ] [ 037 188 ]

[ 037 161 ] [ 037 175 ] [ 037 189 ]

IDC 7 IDC 14 Enable IDC p.u.
[ 037 162 ] [ 037 176 ] [ 037 190 ]

IDC,lin 7 IDC,lin 14 IDC< open circuit
[ 037 163 ] [ 037 177 ] [ 037 191 ]
MEASI:
Enabled
[ 035 008 ]
SFMON:
Invalid scaling IDC
[ 093 116 ]
MEASI:
Overload 20mA input
[ 040 191 ]
Input channel 1(I-1) SFMON:
Overload 20 mA input
[ 098 025 ]
MEASI:
Open circ. 20mA inp.
[ 040 192 ]
SFMON:
[ 098 026 ]
MEASI:
Curr. IDC,lin. p.u.
[ 004 136 ]
MEASI:
Current IDC p.u.
[ 004 135 ]
MEASI:
Current IDC
[ 004 134 ]
S8Z52H2A
Fig. 3-33: Analog direct current input.
Beyond the linearization described above, the user has the option of scaling the
linearized values. Thereby negative values, for example, can be displayed as well
and are available for further processing by protection functions.
P632/EN M/R-a5-B // P632‑312‑660 3-53

P632 3 Operation
MEASI:
Scaled val. IDC,lin1
[ 037 192 ]
MEASI:
Scaled val.IDC,lin20
[ 037 193 ]
MEASI: MEASI:
Curr. IDC,lin. p.u. Scaled value IDC,lin
[ 004 136 ] [ 004 180 ]
Q9Z5029A
Fig. 3-34: Scaling of the linearized measured value.
3.9.1.1 Zero Suppression

Zero suppression is defined by setting MEASI: Ena ble IDC p.u. If the direct
current does not exceed the set threshold, the per-unit input current IDC p.u. and
the current IDC,lin will be displayed as having a value of “0”.
3.9.1.2 Open-Circuit and Overload Monitoring

The P632 is equipped with an open-circuit monitoring function. If current IDC falls
below the set threshold MEASI: IDC < open ci rcuit, the signal MEA SI: Open
circ. 20mA i np . is issued.
The input current is monitored in order to protect the 20 mA analog input against
overloading. If it exceeds the set threshold of 24.8 mA, the signal
MEAS I: Ov erload 20m A inpu t is issued.
3.9.2 Input for Connection of a Resistance Thermometer

This input is designed to connect a PT 100 resistance thermometer. The mapping
curve, R = f(T), of PT 100 resistance thermometers is defined in the IEC 751
standard. If the PT 100 resistance thermometer is connected using the 3-wire
method, then no further calibration is required.
Open-Circuit Monitoring
If there is an open measuring circuit due to a broken wire, the signal
SFMON: PT10 0 open ci rcui t is issued.
Maximum Temperature Value Since the Last Reset

The result of a temperature measurement cannot only be read out as a direct
measured value (temperature T) or as a normalized value (temperature norm. T),
but also as the maximum value since the last reset (temperature Tmax).
For this the following menu points are available:
● MEASI : Temperature Tmax (maximum temperature value)
● MEASI : R ese t Tm ax E XT (reset via a binary signal)
● MEASI : Re set Tmax U SER (manual reset)
3-54 P632/EN M/R-a5-B // P632‑312‑660

3 Operation P632
MEASI:
Enabled C
[ 035 008 ]
+
MEASI:
Measur. input PT100 - PT100 faulty
[ 040 190 ]
SFMON:
PT100 open circuit
[ 098 024 ]
MEASI:
Temperature
[ 004 133 ]
MEASI:
Temperature p.u.
[ 004 221 ]
MEASI:
Temperature Tmax
[ 004 233 ]
64Z70H3A
Fig. 3-35: Temperature measurement with a resistance thermometer
P632/EN M/R-a5-B // P632‑312‑660 3-55

P632 3 Operation
3.10 Configuration, Operating Mode, and Blocking of the Output

Relays (Function Group OUTP)
The P632 has output relays for the output of binary signals. The binary signal
assignment is freely configurable by the user.
3.10.1 Configuration of the Output Relays

One binary signal can be assigned to each output relay. The same binary signal
can be assigned to several output relays by configuration.
3.10.2 Operating Mode of the Output Relays

The user can set an operating mode for each output relay that determines
whether the output relay operates in a normally open arrangement (NO) or
normally closed arrangement (NC) and whether it operates in latching mode.
Depending on the selected operating mode, latching can be disabled, either
manually using a setting parameter or by an appropriately configured binary
signal input at the start of a new fault, signalized by the onset of a general
starting, or of a new system disturbance.
3-56 P632/EN M/R-a5-B // P632‑312‑660

3 Operation P632
3.10.3 Blocking the Output Relays
OUTP:
Outp.rel.block USER
[ 021 014 ]
0
OUTP:
1 Outp. relays blocked
≥1 [ 021 015 ]
0: No
1: Yes
OUTP:
Block outp.rel. EXT
[ 040 014 ] ≥1
MAIN:
Prot. ext. disabled
[ 038 046 ]
SFMON:
Hardware fault
304 950
OUTP:
Test in progress
402 107
OUTP:
Oper. mode K xxx
[ xxx xxx ]
1 ≥1
2
3 -K xxx
4
≥1
5
6
≥1 =1
1: ES updating
2: ES manual reset
3: ES reset (fault) ≥1
4: ES reset (syst.dist)
5: NE updating
6: NE manual reset
& ≥1
&
&
& ≥1 OUTP:
State K xxx
[ zzz zzz ]
OUTP:
Fct.assignment K xxx & S1 1
[ yyy xxx ]
R1
Signal 1
Signal 2
Signal 3 m out of n
Signal n
≥1 & ≥1
Selected signal
&
FT_RC:
Record. in progress OUTP:
1 Latching reset
[ 035 000 ] & [ 040 088 ]
FT_RC:
System disturb. runn
[ 035 004 ]
MAIN:
General reset USER
[ 003 002 ]
1: execute
MAIN:
General reset EXT
[ 005 255 ]
OUTP:
Reset latch. USER
[ 021 009 ]
1 1
100 ms
0: don't execute
1: execute
OUTP:
Reset latch. EXT
[ 040 015 ]
64Z8838B
Fig. 3-36: Configuration, setting the operating mode, and blocking the output relays.
The P632 offers the option of blocking all output relays via setting parameters or
by way of an appropriately configured binary signal input. The output relays are
likewise blocked if the P632 is disabled via appropriately configured binary inputs
or if self-monitoring detects a hardware fault. Any output relay configured for
MAIN : Bl ocke d/fa ulty will not be included in the blocking signals.
P632/EN M/R-a5-B // P632‑312‑660 3-57

P632 3 Operation
If the self-monitoring detects a serious hardware fault (see those error messages
in Chapter 11, (p. 11-1), which lead to a blocking of the protection), all output
relays are reset regardless of the set operating mode or signal configuration.
3.10.4 Testing the Output Relays
OUTP:
Relay assign. f.test
[ 003 042 ]
OUTP:
Fct.assignment K xx1
[ AAA AAA ]
OUTP:
[ BBB BBB ]
OUTP:
[ CCC CCC ]
OUTP:
Fct.assignment K xxx
[ ZZZ ZZZ ]
MAIN: OUTP:
Device on-line
Selected relay & Test in progress
[ 003 030 ] 402 107
0: No (= off)
OUTP:
OUTP: Hold-time for test
Relay test [ 003 044 ]
[ 003 043 ]
0 &
0: don't execute
1: execute
19Z8739A
Fig. 3-37: Testing the output relays.
For testing purposes, the user can select an output relay and trigger it via setting
parameters. At the time when the test is triggered the P632 must be switched to
“off-line”. Triggering persists for the duration of the set hold time.
3-58 P632/EN M/R-a5-B // P632‑312‑660

3 Operation P632
3.11 Measured Data Output (Function Group MEASO)

Measurands made available by the P632 can be provided in BCD (binary coded
decimal) form through output relays or in analog form as direct current output.
Output as direct current can only occur if the P632 is equipped with analog
module Y. BCD output is always possible, whether the P632 is equipped with
analog module Y or not.
3.11.1 General Settings
3.11.1.1 Disabling or Enabling the Measured Data Output Function

The Measured Data Output function can be disabled or enabled via setting
parameters.
MEASI:
General enable USER
[ 011 100 ]
0
MEASI:
1 Enabled
[ 035 008 ]
0: No
1: Yes
S8Z52H1A
Fig. 3-38: Disabling or enabling the measured data output function.
3.11.1.2 Enabling Measured Data Output

The measured data output can be enabled through a binary signal input,
provided that the function MEA SO: Ou tp. en abled EXT has been configured.
If the function MEASO : Outp. e nabl e d EXT has not been configured to a
binary signal input, then the measured data output is always enabled.
INP:
Fct. assignm. U xxx
[ xxx xxx ]
U x1
U x2
U x3
U xx
Address 036 085 MEASO:

Enable
304 600
MEASO:
Outp. enabled EXT
[ 036 085 ]
S8Z52H5A
Fig. 3-39: Enabling measured data output.
P632/EN M/R-a5-B // P632‑312‑660 3-59

P632 3 Operation
3.11.1.3 Resetting the Measured Data Output Function

BCD or analog output of measurands is terminated for the duration of the hold
time if one of the following conditions is met:
● The measured data output is reset either via a setting parameter or via an
appropriately configured binary signal input.
● There is a general reset.
● LED indicators reset
MEASO:
Reset output USER
[ 037 116 ]
1
0: don't execute
1: execute
MEASO:
MEASO: Output reset
Reset output EXT 1
[ 037 117 ]
[ 036 087 ]
MAIN:
General reset USER
[ 003 002 ] MEASO:
1: execute Reset meas.val.outp.
304 601
MAIN:
Reset indicat. USER
[ 021 010 ]
1: Yes
S8Z52H6A
Fig. 3-40: Resetting the measured data output function.
3.11.1.4 Scaling
Scaling is used to map the physical measuring range to the P632 inherent setting
range.
Scaling of analog output is also suited for directional-signed output of some fault
measurands, in particular fault location in percent.
3-60 P632/EN M/R-a5-B // P632‑312‑660

3 Operation P632
3.11.2 BCD Measured Data Output

The user can select a measurand for output in BCD form by assigning output
relays.
The selected measurand is available in BCD-coded form for the duration of the
set hold time MEA SO: H old t ime outpu t BCD. If the selected variable was
not measured, then there is no output of a measurand value.
3.11.2.1 Output of Measured Event Values

If the measured event value is updated during the hold time, the measurand
output memory is cleared and the hold time is re-started. This leads to an
immediate availability at the output of the updated value.
3.11.2.2 Output of Measured Operating Values

The selected measured operating value is available for the duration of the set
hold time. After the hold time has elapsed, the current value is saved and the
hold time is re-started. If the hold time has been set to blocked, the measured
operating value that has been output will be stored until the measured data
output function is reset.
3.11.2.3 Scaling of BCD Output

In order to define the resolution for measured data output the measurand range
(Mx,min ... Mx,max) in scaled form (as Mx,scal,min ... Mx,scal,max) and the
associated BCD display range (BCD,min ... BCD,max) have to be set.
● MEA SO: S cale d min . val . BCD
● ME ASO: S cale d m ax. val. BCD
● MEASO: BC D-Out m in. value
● MEA SO: BC D-Ou t max. valu e
The BCD display range should be set so that the value 399 is never exceeded. If
this should occur or if the measurand is outside the acceptable measuring range,
then the value for "Overflow" (all relays triggered) is transmitted.
Measurands Range
Measurands of the variable Mx Mx,RL1 ... Mx,RL2
Associated scaled measurands 0 ... 1
Scaling is made with reference to the complete range of values for the selected
measurand (variable Mx). The complete range of values is defined by their end
values Mx,RL1 and Mx,RL2. (Mx,RL1 and Mx,RL2 are listed in the operating
program under “minimum” and “maximum”.)
P632/EN M/R-a5-B // P632‑312‑660 3-61

P632 3 Operation
Measurands to be output Range
Measurands to be output Mx,min. ... Mx,max.
Scaled measurands to be output Mx,scal,min ... Mx,scal,max

with:
Mx,scal,min = (Mx,min - Mx,RL1) / (Mx,RL2 - Mx,RL1
Mx,scal,max = (Mx,max - Mx,RL1) / (Mx,RL2 - Mx,RL1
Designation of the set values in the data "Scaled min. val. BCD" ... "Scaled max. val. BCD"
model
Measurands BCD display values
Measurands in the range "Measurands to BCD-Out min. value ... BCD-Out max. value
be output" (Valid BCD value)
Measurands: BCD-Out min. value (BCD value not valid)

Mx,RL1 = Mx = Mx,min
Measurands Mx: BCD-Out max. value (BCD value not valid)

Mx,max = Mx = Mx,RL2
Measurands Mx: BCD-Out max. value (Overflow)

Mx < Mx,RL1
or
Mx > Mx,RL2
3-62 P632/EN M/R-a5-B // P632‑312‑660

3 Operation P632
MEASO:
MEASO: Hold time output BCD
Enabled [ 010 010 ]
[ 037 102 ]
MEASO:
1-digit bit 0 (BCD)
[ 037 051 ]
MEASO:
1-digit bit 1 (BCD)
[ 037 052 ]
Setting blocked
MEASO:
1-digit bit 2 (BCD)
[ 037 053 ]
MEASO: MEASO:
Enable 1-digit bit 3 (BCD)
304 600 [ 037 054 ]
MEASO:
10-digit bit 0 (BCD)
[ 037 055 ]
MEASO:
MEASO: [ 037 056 ]
Reset meas.val.outp.
304 601 MEASO:
[ 037 057 ]
MEASO:
[ 037 058 ]
MEASO:
100-dig. bit 0 (BCD)
[ 037 059 ]
Selected
MEASO:
meas. oper. value 100-dig. bit 1 (BCD)
[ 037 060 ]
Selected
Meas. event value
being updated
MEASO:
Selected meas. val. Valid BCD value
Value not measured [ 037 050 ]
Selected meas. val.

Overflow
MEASO:
Fct. assignm. BCD Meas. value ≥ 399
[ 053 002 ]
Measured value 1
Measured value 2
Measured value 3
Measured value n c1
c2
Scaling of the
BCD output
Selected meas. val. 1
++ 2
MEASO: 1...2
Output value x
[ * ]
0 . . . 100 %
Scaling of the BCD output

++
MEASO:
MEASO: Address Scaled min. val. BCD 037 140
Output value x
MEASO:
x: 1 037 120 Scaled max. val. BCD 037 141
MEASO:
x: 2 037 121 BCD-Out min. value 037 142
x: 3 MEASO:
037 122 BCD-Out max. value 037 143
19Z5264A
Fig. 3-41: BCD measured data output
P632/EN M/R-a5-B // P632‑312‑660 3-63

P632 3 Operation
3.11.3 Analog Measured Data Output

Analog output of measured data is two-channel.
The user can select two of the measurands available in the P632 for output in the
form of load-independent direct current. Three interpolation points per channel
can be defined for specific adjustments such as adjustment to the scaling of a
measuring instrument. The direct current that is output is displayed as a
measured operating value.
The selected measurand is output as direct current for the duration of the set
hold time MEA SO: Ho ld ti me ou tpu t A -1. If the selected variable was not
measured, then there is no output of a measurand value.
3.11.3.1 Output of Measured Event Values

If the measured event value is updated during the hold time, the measurand
output memory is cleared and the hold time is re-started. This leads to an
immediate availability at the output of the updated value.
3.11.3.2 Output of Measured Operating Values

The selected measured operating value is available for the duration of the set
hold time. After the hold time has elapsed, the current value is saved and the
hold time is re-started. If the hold time has been set to blocked, the measured
operating value that has been output will be stored until the measured data
output function is reset.
3.11.3.3 Configuration of Output Relays Assigned to the Output Channels

The user must keep in mind that direct current output only occurs when the
output relays assigned to the output channels are configured for MEA SO: Value
A-1 outp ut, since the output channels would otherwise remain short-circuited
(see the terminal connection diagrams, Section 5.7, (p. 5-26)).
3.11.3.4 Scaling the Analog Display

In order to define the resolution for measured data output the measurand range
in scaled form and the associated display range have to be set. One additional
value for the knee point must also be defined. In this way the user can obtain an
analog output characteristic similar to the characteristic shown in Fig. 3-42, (p. 3-
68).
3.11.3.5 Measurand Range to be Output

The measurand range to be output is (Mx,min ... Mx,knee ... Mx,max), with:
● Mx,min: minimum value to be output
● Mx,knee: Knee-point value for the measurand range to be output
● Mx,max: maximum value to be output
This measurand range to be output is defined by setting the following
parameters:
● MEA SO: S cale d min . val . A-1 or ME ASO: Scaled min. val. A- 2,
resp.
● MEASO : Scal ed k ne e val. A -1 or MEASO: Scaled knee val. A -2,
resp.
● MEASO: Scal ed max. val. A-1 or ME ASO: Scaled max. val. A- 2,
resp.
Scaling is made with reference to the complete range of values for the selected
measurand (variable Mx). The complete range of values is defined by their end
3-64 P632/EN M/R-a5-B // P632‑312‑660

3 Operation P632
values Mx,RL1 and Mx,RL2. (Mx,RL1 and Mx,RL2 are listed in the operating
program – Easergy Studio – under “minimum” and “maximum”.)
Measurands Range
Measurands of the variable Mx Mx,RL1 ... Mx,RL2
Measurands with knee-point to be output Mx,min ... Mx,knee ... Mx,max
Scaled measurands with a scaled knee-point to be Mx,scal,min ... Mx,scal,knee ... Mx,scal,max
output with:
Mx,scal,min = (Mx,min - Mx,RL1) / (Mx,RL2 -
Mx,RL1
Mx,scal,knee = (Mx,knee - Mx,RL1) / (Mx,RL2 -
Mx,RL1)
Mx,scal,max = (Mx,max - Mx,RL1) / (Mx,RL2 -
Mx,RL1
Designation of the set values in the data model "Scal. min. value Ax" ...
... "Scal. knee-point Ax"
... "Scaled max. val. Ax"
3.11.3.6 Associated Display Range

The associated display range is defined by setting the following parameters:
● ME ASO: A nOu t min . val. A -1 or MEASO: AnOut min. val. A-2, resp.
● ME AS O: An Out kne e point A -1 or MEA SO : AnOut knee point A -2,
resp.
● MEA SO: A nOu t max. val . A-1 or ME ASO: AnOut max. val. A-2,
resp.
Measurands Analog display values
Measurands in the range "Measurands to be "AnOut min. val. A-x" ...

output" ... "AnOut knee point A-x" ...
... "AnOut max. val." (Value A-x valid)
Measurands: "AnOut min. val." (Value A-x not valid)

Mx,RL1 = Mx = Mx,min
Measurands Mx: "AnOut max. val." (Value A-x not valid)

Mx,max = Mx = Mx,RL2
Measurands Mx: "AnOut max. val." (Overflow)

Mx < Mx,RL1
or
Mx > Mx,RL2
P632/EN M/R-a5-B // P632‑312‑660 3-65

P632 3 Operation
3.11.3.7 Example for Scaling of Analog Display Ranges

Voltage A-B is selected as the measurand to be transmitted by channel A-1.
The measuring range is from 0 to 1.5 Vnom with Vnom = 100 V.
The range to be transmitted is from 0.02 to 1 Vnom with the associated display
range from 4 mA to 18 mA.
The knee-point of the characteristic is 0.1 Vnom with an associated display of
16 mA.
Measurands Range
Measurands of the variable Mx 0 V ... 150 V
Measurands with knee-point to be output 2 V ...10 V... 100 V
Associated scaled measurands 0.013 ... 0.067 ... 0.67

with:
Mx,scal,min = (2 V - 0 V ) / (150 V - 0 V ) = 0.013
Mx,scal,knee = (10 V - 0 V ) / (150 V - 0 V ) =
0.067
Mx,scal,max = (100 V - 0 V ) / (150 V - 0 V ) =
0.67
Measurands Analog display values
Measurands in the range "Measurands to be 4 mA ... 16 mA ... 18 mA

output"
0.02 ... 0.1 Vnom ... 1 Vnom
In this example the following P632 settings are selected in the menu branch
Parameter/Config. parameters:
3-66 P632/EN M/R-a5-B // P632‑312‑660

3 Operation P632
Address Description Current value
056 020 MEASO : F uncti on group MEA SO With
031 074 MEASO : Ge ne ral ena bl e USER Yes
053 000 MEASO : F ct. assignm. A -1 MAIN: Volta ge V p. u.
010 114 MEASO : Hold time outpu t A-1 1.00 s
037 104 MEASO : Sca le d m in . val. A-1 0.013 (corresponds with 0.02 Vnom)
037 105 MEASO : S cale d k ne e val. A -1 0.067 (corresponds with 0.10 Vnom)
037 106 ME ASO : S caled m ax . val. A -1 0.667 (corresponds with 1.00 Vnom)
037 107 ME ASO : A nOu t mi n. val. A -1 4 mA
037 108 ME ASO : AnOut knee poi nt A -1 16 mA
037 109 MEASO : AnOut max. val . A-1 18 mA
By setting MEASO: A nOut m in . val. A-1, the user can specify the output
current that will be output when values are smaller than or equal to the set
minimum measured value to be transmitted. The setting at MEASO: AnO ut
max . va l. A-1 defines the output current that is output for the maximum
measured value to be transmitted. By defining the knee-point, the user can
obtain two characteristic curve sections with different slopes. When entering this
setting the user must keep in mind that only a rising/rising or falling/falling curve
sense is permitted (peaky or vee shapes not allowed). If the setting was not
properly entered, the signal SFMON: In val i d s caling A -1 will be issued.
A check of the set characteristic and its acceptance by the P632, if the setting was
properly entered, will only occur after the P632 is switched on-line again (with the
setting M A I N : D e v i c e o n - l i n e).
P632/EN M/R-a5-B // P632‑312‑660 3-67

P632 3 Operation
Ia / mA
20
Max. 18
output value
Knee point 16
output value
14
12
10
Min. 4
output value
2
0
0 0.02 0.1 1 1.2 1.3 1.4 1.5 Vnom
0.013 0.067 0.667 1.0 Mx,scal
19Z5265A
Fig. 3-42: Example of a characteristic curve for analog measured data output . In this example the range starting
value is = 0; also possible is directional-signed output (see corresponding example in section BCD Measured Data
Output).
3-68 P632/EN M/R-a5-B // P632‑312‑660

3 Operation P632
MEASO:
Value A-1 output
[ 037 118 ]
MEASO:
MEASO: Hold time output A-1
Enabled [ 010 114 ]
[ 037 102 ]
Setting(s) blocked c
MEASO:
Enable
304 600
An. outp. ch.1 (A-1)
[ --- --- ]
MEASO: R
Reset meas.val.outp.
304 601
Selected
meas. oper. value
OUTP: Selected
Fct.assignment K xxx Meas. event value
[ xxx xxx ] being updated
c
K x1
K x2 MEASO:
Scaled min. val. A-1
K x3 [ 037 104 ]
K xx MEASO:
Scaled knee val. A-1
[ 037 105 ]
c
MEASO:
Value A-1 output MEASO:
[ 037 118 ] Scaled max. val. A-1
[ 037 106 ]
MEASO:
AnOut min. val. A-1
[ 037 107 ]
MEASO:
Fct. assignm. A-1
MEASO:
[ 053 000 ] AnOut knee point A-1
[ 037 108 ]
Measured value 1
MEASO:
AnOut max. val. A-1
Measured value 2 [ 037 109 ]
Measured value 3
Measured value n
SFMON:
Selected meas. val. Invalid scaling A-1
[ 093 114 ]
Value in AnOut range MEASO:

Value A-1 valid
and in scaled range [ 069 014 ]
MEASO:
Output value x
[ * ] Value in AnOut range
but above scaled
range
c1
0 . . . 100 % Value < AnOut range c2
c3
MEASO: Address AnOut value 1

Output value x
2
X: 1 037 120
AnOut min. value 3
X: 2 037 121
1 . . . 3 MEASO:
X: 3 037 122 Current A-1
AnOut max. value [ 005 100 ]
Selected meas. val.

Value not measured
Selected meas. val.

Value measured
Selected meas. val.

Overflow
S8Z52H8B
Fig. 3-43: Analog measured data output
P632/EN M/R-a5-B // P632‑312‑660 3-69

P632 3 Operation
3.11.4 Output of “External” Measured Data

Measured data from external devices, which must be scaled to 0 ... 100%, can be
written to the following parameters of the P632 via the communications
interface.
● MEASO : Out put valu e 1
● MEASO: Out put valu e 1
● ME AS O: Out put valu e 1
These “external” measured values are output by the P632 either in BCD data
form or as load-independent direct current, provided that the BCD measured
data output function or the channels of the analog measured data output
function are configured accordingly.
3-70 P632/EN M/R-a5-B // P632‑312‑660

3 Operation P632
3.12 Configuration and Operating Mode of the LED Indicators

(Function Group LED)
The P632 has 23 LED indicators for the indication of binary signals. Some of the
LED indicators are permanently assigned to fixed functions. The other LED
indicators are freely configurable. These freely configurable LEDs will emit either
red or green or amber light (amber is made up of red and green light and may
not be configured independently).
3.12.1 Configuring the LED Indicators

One binary signal can be assigned to each of the red and green LED color
indications. The same binary signal can be assigned to several LED indicators (or
colors), if required.
LED indicator Label Configuration
H 4 (red) TRIP With the P632 this LED indicator is customarily configured with
function MAI N: Ge n. tri p s ignal, but the configuration may
be modified.
H 4 (green) ― Function assignment to this green LED indicator is freely

configurable.
H 3 (amber) ALARM Permanently configured with function SFMON: Warning

(LED).
H 2 (amber) OUT OF SERVICE Permanently configured with function MA IN: B locked/fault y.
H 1 (green) HEALTHY Not configurable. H 1 indicates the operational readiness of the

P632 (supply voltage is present).
H 17 (red) EDIT MODE Not configurable. H 17 indicates the input (edit) mode. Only
when the P632 is in this mode, can parameter settings be
changed by pressing the “Up” and “Down” keys. (See
Section 6.2, (p. 6-2))
H 5 to H 16 ― For each of these LED indicators both colors (red & green) may
H 18 to H 23 be configured freely and independently.
3.12.2 Layout of the LED Indicators

The following figure illustrates the layout of LED indicators situated on the local
control panel.
P632/EN M/R-a5-B // P632‑312‑660 3-71

P632 3 Operation
TRIP
H18
ALARM
OUT OF SERVICE
HEALTHY
H19
EDIT MODE
H20
H21
H22
H23
Fig. 3-44: Layout of the LED indicators.
3.12.3 Operating Mode of the LED Indicators

For each of the freely configurable LED indicators, the operating mode can be
selected separately. This setting will determine whether the LED indicator will
operate either in energize-on-signal (ES) or normally-energized (NE) mode,
whether it will be flashing and whether it will be in latching mode. Latching is
disabled either manually via setting parameters or by an appropriately
configured binary signal input (see Section 3.13, (p. 3-74)) at the onset of a
new fault, signalized by the onset of a general starting, or of a new system
disturbance, depending on the selected operating mode.
Therefore the operating modes turn out to be the 2³=8 possible combinations of
the following components:
● flashing / continuous,
● energize-on-signal (ES) / normally-energized (NE),
● updating / latching with manual reset,
in addition to these there are the following 4 operating modes:
● energize-on-signal (ES) with reset after new fault (flashing / continuous)
and
● energize-on-signal (ES) with reset after new system disturbance (flashing /
continuous),
so that there are 12 possible operating modes in total.
3-72 P632/EN M/R-a5-B // P632‑312‑660

3 Operation P632
LED:
Oper. mode H xx
[ xxx xxx ]
10
11
12 -Hxx (red)
!G!
1: ES updating
2: ES manual reset
3: ES reset (fault)
≥1
4: ES reset (syst.dist)
5: NE updating
6: NE manual reset
7: ES updating bl
8: ES manual reset bl
9: ES reset (fault) bl
LED:
10: ES rst (syst.dst) bl & State Hxx red
[ zzz zzz ]
11: NE updating bl
&
12: NE manual reset bl &
& S1 1
R1
LED:
Fct.assig. Hxx red
[ yyy yyy ]
Signal 1
Signal 2
Signal 3 m out of n LED:
& State Hxx green
Signal n [ zzz zzz ]
&
&
Selected signals
& S1 1
R1
LED:
Fct.assig. Hxx green
[ yyy yyy ]
Signal 1
Signal 2 -Hxx (green)
Signal 3 m out of n
Signal n
Selected signals &
&
FT_RC:
Record. in progress
[ 035 000 ]
&
FT_RC:
System disturb. runn
[ 035 004 ]
MAIN:
General reset EXT
[ 005 255 ]
MAIN:
General reset USER
[ 003 002 ]
1: execute
MAIN:
Reset LED
306 020
45Z8000A
Fig. 3-45: Configuration and Operating Mode of the LED Indicators.
P632/EN M/R-a5-B // P632‑312‑660 3-73

P632 3 Operation
3.13 Main Functions of the P632 (Function Group MAIN)
3.13.1 Conditioning of the Measured Values

The secondary phase currents of the system transformers are fed to the P632.
Furthermore, there is the option of connecting a measuring voltage. The
measured values are – electrically isolated – converted to normalized electronics
levels. The analog quantities are digitized and are thus available for further
processing.
The P632 has the following measuring inputs:
● Current inputs (three phases) for the processing of measured values for 2
winding ends of the transformer.
● Two current inputs for the measurement of the residual currents (see
Fig. 3-47, (p. 3-76), Fig., (p. 3-76)) or, alternatively, for looping into
ground connections of the phase current transformers or for connection to
a Holmgreen group.
● One voltage input.
3-74 P632/EN M/R-a5-B // P632‑312‑660

3 Operation P632
A
B MAIN:
Vnom V.T. sec.
C [ 010 009 ]
1U
V̲
2U
1IA
MAIN: MAIN:
Conn.meas.circ. IP,a Inom device, end a
[ 010 140 ] [ 010 024 ]
1IB
I̲A,a
1IC I̲B,a
I̲C,a
1IN
MAIN: MAIN:
Conn.meas.circ. IY,a IY,nom device, end a
[ 010 141 ] [ 010 142 ]
I̲Y,a
1: Standard (Y = 1)
a 2: Opposite (Y = -1)
b
MAIN: MAIN:
Conn.meas.circ. IP,b Inom device, end b
[ 010 150 ] [ 010 025 ]
I̲A,b
I̲B,b
2IA I̲C,b
MAIN: MAIN:
2IB Conn.meas.circ. IY,b IY,nom device, end b
[ 010 151 ] [ 010 143 ]
2IC I̲Y,b
1: Standard (Y = 1)
2IN 2: Opposite (Y = -1)
P632
A B C
62Z8001B
Fig. 3-46: Connection of the measured values to the P632, connection of the fourth current transformer set to the
transformers of the neutral-point-to-ground connections
P632/EN M/R-a5-B // P632‑312‑660 3-75

P632 3 Operation
A
B
C
1IA
MAIN: MAIN:
Conn.meas.circ. IP,a Inom device, end a
[ 010 140 ] [ 010 024 ]
1IB
I̲A,a
I̲B,a
1IC
I̲C,a
1IN
MAIN: MAIN:
Conn.meas.circ. IY,a IY,nom device, end a
[ 010 141 ] [ 010 142 ]
ΣI̲P,a
1: Standard (Y = 1)
2: Opposite (Y = -1)
2IA
MAIN: MAIN:
Conn.meas.circ. IP,b Inom device, end b
[ 010 150 ] [ 010 025 ]
2IB
I̲A,b
2IC I̲B,b
I̲C,b
2IN
MAIN: MAIN:
Conn.meas.circ. IY,b IY,nom device, end b
[ 010 151 ] [ 010 143 ]
ΣI̲P,b
1: Standard (Y = 1)
2: Opposite (Y = -1)
A B C P632
62Z9011A
Fig. 3-47: Connection of the measured values to the P632, looping of the fourth current transformer set into the
ground connections of the phase current transformers.
3-76 P632/EN M/R-a5-B // P632‑312‑660

3 Operation P632
3.13.2 Phase Reversal Function

The phase reversal function is intended to protect machines in pumped storage
power stations that are operated either as motors or as generators, depending
on the demand. In such applications it is common practice to swap two phases in
order to facilitate the pumping operation. Because of this, the P632 phase
reversal function can maintain correct operation of all protection functions even
if phase reversal is carried out within the protected zone.
The processing is done right after A/D conversion, such that the link between
physical transformer input and internal numerical signal will be swapped,
depending on the setting. (The measured values stored in the respective
measured value memories are swapped.) Thus all further processing of
measured values and protection functions remains unchanged.
Phase reversal can be set independently for each transformer end and in each
parameter subset. The parameters are included in function group MAIN because
phase reversal affects not only the differential protection function (DIFF), but also
the negative sequence elements of Inverse and Definite Time Overcurrent
protection functions (IDMTx, DTOCx) as well as Current Transformer Supervision
(CTS) and Measuring- Circuit Monitoring (MCM_x) functions.
PS1 PS2 PS3 PS4 Description Range of Values
010 200 010 201 010 202 010 203 MAIN: Pha se re versal a P Sx ● No swap (default)
● A-B swapped
010 204 010 205 010 206 010 207 MAI N: P has e revers al b PSx ● B-C swapped
● C-A swapped
Using parameter subsets readily allows phase reversal to be activated via any
control interface (LOC, PC, COMMx) or via appropriately configured binary signal
inputs.
Since the currently active parameter subset is shown on the LC-display and may
be recalled from the recordings, phase reversal information is accessible. There
are however applications where an additional display of a phase reversal may be
useful. Such would be the case when recordings by a P632 are to be compared
with those by other devices not featuring phase reversal (e.g. Backup
overcurrent-time protection device) and without knowledge of the P632 setting
file. For this the following display is used:
Description Range of Values
036 220 MAIN: P hase re ve rsal activ ● No (default)

● Yes
Phase reversal is active (Yes) when at least one of the setting parameters in the
active parameter subset has a value other than No swap.
The setting file must be viewed to determine which phases are swapped.
P632/EN M/R-a5-B // P632‑312‑660 3-77

P632 3 Operation
[ *1 ]
1 MAIN:
≥1 Phase reversal activ
[ 036 220 ]
2
0: No swap
1: A-B swapped
2: B-C swapped
3: C-A swapped
[ *2 ]
2
Parameter MAIN:
3 *1 Phase reversal a PSx
set 1 010 200
0: No swap
set 2 010 201
1: A-B swapped set 3 010 202
2: B-C swapped set 4 010 203
3: C-A swapped
Parameter MAIN:
*2 Phase reversal b PSx
set 1 010 204
set 2 010 205
set 3 010 206
set 4 010 207
62Z8002A
Fig. 3-48: Phase reversal function of the P632
3.13.3 Selection of the Residual Current to be Monitored

For protection functions of the P632 monitoring the residual current, the user can
select whether the device is to use the current derived from the three phase
currents or the current measured at the fourth current transformer; see also
Fig. 3-46, (p. 3-75).
3-78 P632/EN M/R-a5-B // P632‑312‑660

3 Operation P632
MAIN:
Evaluation IN, end a
[ 016 096 ]
2
1: Calculated
c1
2: Measured
c2
I̲A,a
I̲B,a 1
I̲C,a
ΣI̲P,a 2
I̲Y,a
1 2 I̲N,a
MAIN:
Evaluation IN, end b
[ 016 097 ]
2
1: Calculated
c1
2: Measured
c2
I̲A,b
I̲B,b 1
I̲C,b
ΣI̲P,b 2
I̲Y,b
1 2 I̲N,b
64Z8022A
Fig. 3-49: Evaluation of residual current
P632/EN M/R-a5-B // P632‑312‑660 3-79

P632 3 Operation
3.13.4 Operating Data Measurement

The P632 has an operating data measurement function for the display of currents
and voltages measured as well as quantities derived from these measured
values. For the display of measured values, set lower thresholds need to be
exceeded, to avoid fluctuating small values from noise. If these lower thresholds
are not exceeded, the value Not measured is displayed. The following measured
variables are displayed:
● Phase currents of all three phases of both ends of the transformer
● Maximum phase current of each end of the transformer
● Minimum phase current of each end of the transformer
● Delayed and stored maximum phase current of each end of the transformer
● Positive- and negative-sequence current measured values of each end of
the transformer
● Current IN derived by the P632 from the sum of the phase currents for each
end of the transformer
● Current IY measured by the P632 at transformer -Tx4 (x: 1, 2)
● Voltage
● Frequency
● Angle between the phase currents for a given end of the transformer
● Angle between the currents of the same phase between two ends of the
transformer
● Angle between derived IN and the current measured at transformer -Tx4 (x:
1, 2)
The measured data are updated at approximately 1 s intervals. Updating is
interrupted if a general starting state occurs or if the self-monitoring function
detects a hardware fault.
3-80 P632/EN M/R-a5-B // P632‑312‑660

3 Operation P632
3.13.4.1 Measured Current Values

The measured current values are displayed both as per-unit quantities referred
to the nominal quantities of the P632 and as primary quantities. To allow display
in primary values, the primary nominal current of the system current transformer
should be set in the P632.
3.13.4.2 Display of Delayed and Stored Maximum Phase Currents
Delayed Maximum Phase Current

The P632 offers the option of a delayed display of the maximum value of the
three phase currents (thermal ammeter function). The delayed maximum phase
current display is an exponential function of the maximum phase current IP,max
(see upper curve in Fig. 3-50, (p. 3-82)). The time after which the delayed
maximum phase current display will have reached 95 % of maximum phase
current IP,max is set at MAIN: Se ttl. t. I P,max,de l.
Stored Maximum Phase Current

The stored maximum phase current follows the delayed maximum phase current.
If the value of the delayed maximum phase current is declining, then the highest
value of the delayed maximum phase current remains stored. The display
remains constant until the actual delayed maximum phase current exceeds the
value of the stored maximum phase current (see middle curve in Fig. 3-50, (p. 3-
82)). The stored maximum phase current is set to the actual value of the
delayed maximum phase current at MAIN: I P,max p.u. ,s tored a, using end a
as an example (see lower curve in Fig. 3-50, (p. 3-82)).
P632/EN M/R-a5-B // P632‑312‑660 3-81

P632 3 Operation
MAIN:
Curr. IP,max,a p.u.
[ 005 111 ]
MAIN:
IP,max p.u.,delay a
[ 005 163 ]
MAIN: MAIN:
Settl. t. IP,max,del Settl. t. IP,max,del
[ 010 113 ] [ 010 113 ]
MAIN:
Curr. IP,max,a p.u.
[ 005 111 ]
MAIN:
IP,max p.u.,stored a
[ 005 160 ]
MAIN: MAIN:
[ 010 113 ] [ 010 113 ]
MAIN:
Curr. IP,max,a p.u.
[ 005 111 ]
MAIN:
[ 005 160 ]
MAIN: MAIN:
[ 010 113 ] [ 010 113 ]
MAIN:
Reset IP,max,st.USER
[ 003 033 ]
End a End b
MAIN: MAIN:
Curr. IP,max,a p.u. Curr. IP,max,b p.u.
005 111 005 112
MAIN: MAIN:
IP,max p.u.,stored a IP,max p.u.,stored b
005 160 006 160
MAIN: MAIN:
IP,max p.u.,delay a IP,max p.u.,delay b
005 163 006 163
62Z8082A
Fig. 3-50: Operation of delayed and stored maximum phase current display, shown here for end a
3.13.4.2.1 Measured Operating Data for the Phase Currents

The following diagram shows the measured operating data for the phase
currents, using the transformer end a as an example.
The parameters given apply to transformer end a. The corresponding parameters
of the other transformer ends are given in Chapter 7, (p. 7-1) and Chapter 8,
(p. 8-1).
3-82 P632/EN M/R-a5-B // P632‑312‑660

3 Operation P632
MAIN: MAIN:
Meas. value rel. IP Current IA,a p.u.
MAIN:
General starting [ 011 030 ]
MAIN:
[ 036 000 ] Current IB,a p.u.
MAIN:
Hardware fault MAIN:
c1
306 018 Current IC,a p.u.
I̲A,z c2
MAIN:
I̲B,z c3 Curr. IP,max,a p.u.
I̲C,z c4 MAIN:
c5
MAIN:
IP,max p.u.,delay a
1 MAIN:
Curr. IP,min,a p.u.
2 MAIN:
Inom C.T.prim.,end a MAIN:
Inom C.T.prim.,end a
3
MAIN:
Current IA,a prim.
4
MAIN:
COMP Current IB,a prim.
5
MAIN:
Current IC,a prim.
I̲max,z
MAIN: MAIN:
I̲min,z Settl. t. IP,max,del Curr. IP,max,a prim.
[ 010 113 ]
MAIN: MAIN:
Reset IP,max,st.USER IP,max prim.,delay a
[ 003 033 ]
MAIN:
0 IP,max prim.stored a
1
MAIN:
MAIN: 0: don't execute Curr. IP,min,a prim.
General reset USER
[ 003 002 ] 1: execute R
1: execute
64Z8046A
Fig. 3-51: Measured operating data for the phase currents, shown here for end a
3.13.4.2.2 Measured Operating Data for the Residual Currents

The following diagram shows the measured operating data for the residual
currents.
The parameters given apply to transformer end a. The corresponding parameters
of transformer end b are given in Chapter 7, (p. 7-1) and Chapter 8, (p. 8-
1).
P632/EN M/R-a5-B // P632‑312‑660 3-83

P632 3 Operation
MAIN: MAIN:
General starting Meas. value rel. IN
[ 036 000 ] [ 011 031 ]
MAIN:
Hardware fault
306 018
c
I̲A,a
I̲B,a c
I̲C,a
MAIN:
Current IN,a p.u.
[ 005 141 ]
MAIN:
[ 019 020 ]
MAIN:
Meas. value rel. IY
[ 011 036 ] MAIN:
Current IN,a prim.
[ 005 121 ]
c
I̲Y,a c
MAIN:
Current IY,a p.u.
[ 005 151 ]
MAIN:
Inom C.T.Yprim,end a
[ 019 027 ]
MAIN:
Current IY,a prim.
[ 005 131 ]
64Z8047A
Fig. 3-52: Measured operating data for the residual currents, shown here for end a
3.13.4.3 Positive- and negative-sequence currents

The positive- and negative-sequence current measured values of all ends
(primary and per unit values) are determined continuously and displayed as
measured operating data:
End a End b
MAIN : C urren t I ne g a pri m. MA IN: Curren t Ine g b pri m.

(005 125) (005 129)
M AIN: Current Ipos a prim. MA IN: Cu rre nt Ipos b pri m.
(005 127) (005 134)
MAIN : Cu rre nt In eg a p.u. M AIN: Cu rre nt In eg b p. u.
(005 126) (005 130)
MAI N: C urrent Ipos a p.u. MA IN: Cu rre nt Ipos b p.u.
(005 128) (005 135)
When the CB's contacts are open, it is also possible to force to zero the setting of
small positive- and negative-sequence current measured values if such
measured values are below additionally created settable thresholds.
Measured value relating to positive- MA IN: Me as.valu e rel . Ipos

sequence current (011 058)
Measured value relating to negative- MAIN: Me as .valu e rel . Ine g
sequence current (011 048)
3-84 P632/EN M/R-a5-B // P632‑312‑660

3 Operation P632
3.13.4.4 Measured Voltage Values

The measured voltage values are displayed both as per-unit quantities referred
to the nominal quantities of the P632 and as primary quantities. To allow a
display in primary values, the primary nominal voltage of the system transformer
needs to be set in the P632.
MAIN:
MAIN: Meas. value rel. V
General starting [ 011 032 ]
[ 036 000 ]
MAIN: c
Hardware fault MAIN:
306 018 Vnom V.T. sec.
[ 010 009 ]
V̲ c
MAIN:
Voltage V p.u.
[ 005 019 ]
MAIN:
Vnom V.T. prim.
[ 010 002 ]
MAIN:
Voltage V prim.
[ 005 018 ]
64Z8003A
Fig. 3-53: Measured voltage value
3.13.4.5 Frequency
The P632 determines the frequency from the voltage. This voltage needs to
exceed a minimum threshold of 0.65 Vnom in order for frequency to be
determined.
MAIN: >0.65⋅Vnom
General starting
[ 036 000 ]
MAIN: c
Hardware fault
306 018
V̲ c
f MAIN:
Frequency f
[ 004 040 ]
64Z8027A
Fig. 3-54: Frequency measurement.
P632/EN M/R-a5-B // P632‑312‑660 3-85

P632 3 Operation
3.13.4.6 Angle Determination

The P632 determines the angle between the following currents if the associated
currents exceed the minimum threshold of 0.033 Inom:
● Angle between the phase currents for each end of the transformer
● Angle between the currents of the same phase between two ends of the
transformer
● Angle between the derived residual current and the current measured at
the transformer -Tx4 (see Section 5.7, (p. 5-26)) for each end of the
transformer
MAIN:
General starting
[ 036 000 ]
MAIN:
Hardware fault
306 018
I̲A,z > 0.033⋅Inom
I̲B,z > 0.033⋅Inom
I̲C,z > 0.033⋅Inom
MAIN:
Angle phi AB, end a
[ 005 089 ]
MAIN:
Angle phi BC, end a
[ 006 089 ]
MAIN:
Angle phi CA, end a
[ 007 089 ]
End a End b
MAIN: MAIN:
Angle phi AB, end a Angle phi AB, end b
[ 005 089 ] [ 005 092 ]
MAIN: MAIN:
Angle phi BC, end a Angle phi BC, end b
[ 006 089 ] [ 006 092 ]
MAIN: MAIN:
Angle phi CA, end a Angle phi CA, end b
[ 007 089 ] [ 007 092 ]
62Z8049A
Fig. 3-55: Determination of the angle between the phase currents, shown here for end a
3-86 P632/EN M/R-a5-B // P632‑312‑660

3 Operation P632
MAIN:
General starting
[ 036 000 ]
MAIN:
Hardware fault
306 018
I̲A,a > 0.033⋅Inom
I̲B,a > 0.033⋅Inom
I̲C,a > 0.033⋅Inom
I̲A,b
> 0.033⋅Inom
I̲B,b > 0.033⋅Inom
I̲C,b > 0.033⋅Inom
MAIN:
Angle phi A, end a-b
[ 005 090 ]
MAIN:
Angle phi B, end a-b
[ 006 090 ]
MAIN:
Angle phi C, end a-b
[ 007 090 ]
62Z8050A
Fig. 3-56: Determination of the angle between the phase currents of the transformer ends
P632/EN M/R-a5-B // P632‑312‑660 3-87

P632 3 Operation
MAIN:
General starting
[ 036 000 ]
MAIN:
Hardware fault
306 018
I̲A,a
I̲B,a
> 0.033⋅Inom
I̲C,a
I̲Y,a
> 0.033⋅Inom
ΣI̲P,a
MAIN:
Angle phi NY, end a
[ 005 077 ]
I̲A,b
I̲B,b
> 0.033⋅Inom
I̲C,b
I̲Y,b
> 0.033⋅Inom
ΣI̲P,b
MAIN:
Angle phi NY, end b
[ 005 078 ]
62Z8051A
Fig. 3-57: Determination of the angle between the derived residual current and the current measured at
transformer -Tx4
3-88 P632/EN M/R-a5-B // P632‑312‑660

3 Operation P632
3.13.5 Configuring and Enabling the Device Functions

The P632 can be adapted to the requirements of a specific high-voltage system
by configuring the available function range. By including the desired P632
functions in the configuration and canceling all other, the user creates an
individually configured device appropriate to the specific application. Parameters,
signals and measured values of cancelled device functions are not displayed on
the local control panel. Functions of general applicability such as operating data
recording (OP_RC) or main functions (MAIN) cannot be cancelled.
3.13.5.1 Canceling a Device Function

The following conditions must be met before a P632 function can be cancelled or
removed:
● The P632 function must be disabled.
● None of the functions of the P632 function to be cancelled can be assigned
to a binary input.
● None of the signals of the P632 function can be assigned to a binary output
or an LED indicator.
● None of the functions of the P632 function to be cancelled may be selected
in a list parameter setting.
If the above conditions are met, proceed through the “Configuration” branch of
the menu tree to access the setting relevant for the P632 function to be
cancelled. If, for example, the “LIMIT” function group is to be cancelled, the
setting of LI MI T: Function gr ou p L IMI T is set to Without. To re-include the
“LIMIT” function in the P632 configuration, the same setting is accessed and its
value is changed to With.
The P632 function to which a setting, a signal, or a measured value belongs is
defined by the function group designation (example: “LIMIT”). In the following
description of the P632 functions, it is presumed that the corresponding P632
function is included in the configuration.
P632/EN M/R-a5-B // P632‑312‑660 3-89

P632 3 Operation
3.13.5.2 Enabling or Disabling a Device Function
MAIN:
Device on-line
[ 003 030 ]
0 0: No (= off)
1 MAIN:
Protection active
306 001
0: No (= off)
1: Yes (= on)
INP:
Fct. assignm. U xxx
[ 152 xxx ]
U x1
U x2
U x3
U xx
Address 003 027 MAIN:

Prot. ext. enabled
Address 003 026 [ 003 028 ]
MAIN:
Enable protect. EXT
[ 003 027 ]
MAIN:
Prot. ext. disabled
MAIN: [ 038 046 ]
Disable protect. EXT
[ 003 026 ]
D5Z5004A
Fig. 3-58: Enabling or disabling a device function.
Besides cancelling P632 functions from the configuration, it is also possible to

disable protection via a function parameter or binary signal inputs. Protection
can only be disabled or enabled through binary signal inputs if the
MAIN : D isabl e p rote ct. E XT and MA IN: En able prote ct. EXT functions are
both configured. When neither or only one of the two functions is configured, the
condition is interpreted as “Protection externally enabled”. If the triggering
signals of the binary signal inputs are implausible – i.e. both are at logic level =
“1” – then the last plausible state remains stored in memory.
If the protection is disabled via a binary signal input that is configured for
M A I N : D i s a b l e p r o t e c t . E X T, the signal M A I N : B l o c k e d / f a u l t y is not issued.
3-90 P632/EN M/R-a5-B // P632‑312‑660

3 Operation P632
3.13.6 Activation of “Dynamic Parameters”

For several of the protection functions, it is possible for the duration of the set
hold time to switch over to other settings – the “dynamic parameters” – via an
appropriately configured binary signal input. If the hold time is set to 0 s,
switching is effective as long as the binary signal input is being triggered.
MAIN:
Hold time dyn.param.
[ 018 009 ]
MAIN: MAIN:
Switch dyn.param.EXT 1 Dynam. param. active
[ 036 033 ] [ 040 090 ]
t1 = 0 s &
64Z8005A
Fig. 3-59: Activation of “Dynamic Parameters”.
3.13.7 Function Blockings

By including function blockings in the bay interlock conditions, switching
operations can be prevented independent of the switching status at the time, for
example, by an external signal “CB drive not ready” or by the trip command from
an external protection device.
Binary input signals conditioned by debouncing and chatter suppression or
output signals from the programmable logic function can be assigned to the
function blockings 1 and 2 by setting a ‘1 out of n’ parameter. The input signal
from the function blockings starts a timer stage and after it has elapsed, the
signal MAIN : Fct . bl ock. 1 active or MAI N: F ct. block . 2 act ive is issued.
P632/EN M/R-a5-B // P632‑312‑660 3-91

P632 3 Operation
MAIN:
Inp.asg. fct.block.1
[ 221 014 ]
Signal 1
Signal 2 MAIN:
Op. delay fct. block
Signal 3 [ 221 029 ]
Signal n
MAIN:
Selected signal Fct. block. 1 active
[ 221 015 ]
MAIN:
Fct. block. 2 active
[ 221 023 ]
MAIN:
Inp.asg. fct.block.2
[ 221 022 ]
Selected signal
F0Z5016A
Fig. 3-60: Function blockings
3-92 P632/EN M/R-a5-B // P632‑312‑660

3 Operation P632
3.13.8 Multiple Blocking

Four multiple blocking conditions can be defined via “m out of n” parameters.
The functions defined by selection may be blocked via an appropriately
configured binary signal input.
MAIN:
Fct.assign. block. 1
[ 021 021 ]
Function 1
m out of n
Function 2
Function n
Selected functions MAIN:

Blck.1 sel.functions
306 022
MAIN:
Blocking 1 EXT
[ 040 060 ]
MAIN:
[ 021 022 ]
Function 1
m out of n
Function 2
Function n

306 023
MAIN:
Blocking 2 EXT
[ 040 061 ]
MAIN:
[ 021 048 ]
Function 1
m out of n
Function 2
Function n

306 046
MAIN:
Blocking 3 EXT
[ 040 116 ]
MAIN:
[ 021 049 ]
Function 1
m out of n
Function 2
Function n
MAIN:
Selected functions Blck.4 sel.functions
306 047
MAIN:
Blocking 4 EXT
[ 040 117 ]
64Z8041A
Fig. 3-61: Multiple blocking.
P632/EN M/R-a5-B // P632‑312‑660 3-93

P632 3 Operation
3.13.9 Blocked/Faulty
If the protective functions are blocked, the condition is signaled by continuous
illumination of the amber LED indicator H 2 on the local control panel and by a
signal from an output relay configured MA IN: B locked/fault y. In addition
functions can be selected that will issue the MA IN: Blocked/faulty signal by
setting a “m out of n” parameter.
MAIN:
Device on-line
[ 003 030 ]
0: No (= off) MAIN:
Protect. not ready
[ 004 060 ]
MAIN:
SFMON: Blocked/faulty
Blocking [ 004 065 ]
304 951
MAIN:
Trip cmd. blocked
[ 021 013 ]
MAIN:
Fct. assign. fault
[ 021 031 ]
Signal 1
m out of n
Signal 2
Signal 3
Signal n
Selected signals
D5Z50EHA
Fig. 3-62: “Blocked/Faulty” signal.
3.13.10 Coupling between Control and Protection for the CB Signals

Bay type selection defines the external device (DEV01 or DEV02 or ...) that
represents the circuit breaker. For the P632, 2 circuit breakers are available. CB1
is used as an example in the following description.
Coupling between control and protection for the “Closed” position signal is made
by the setting at MAI N: Si g. asg. CB1 cl ose d. In the same way coupling
between control and protection for the “Open” position signal is made by the
setting at MAI N: S ig . as g. CB1 open. As a result, the CB status signal needs
to be assigned to a binary signal input only if this coupling is implemented.
3-94 P632/EN M/R-a5-B // P632‑312‑660

3 Operation P632
MAIN:
Sig. asg. CB1 closed
[ 021 020 ]
DEV01:
Closed signal EXT
[ 210 031 ]
DEV02:
Closed signal EXT
[ 210 081 ]
DEV03:
Closed signal EXT
[ 210 131 ]
MAIN:
Selected signal CB1 closed 3p EXT
[ 036 051 ]
MAIN:
CB1 closed 3p EXT
[ 036 051 ]
64Z7032A
Fig. 3-63: Coupling between control and protection for the CB closed signal
MAIN:
Sig. asg. CB1 open
[ 021 017 ]
DEV01:
Open signal EXT
[ 210 030 ]
DEV02:
Open signal EXT
[ 210 080 ]
DEV03:
Open signal EXT
[ 210 130 ]
MAIN:
Selected signal CB1 open 3p EXT
[ 031 028 ]
MAIN:
CB1 open 3p EXT
[ 031 028 ]
64Z7035A
Fig. 3-64: Coupling between control and protection for the CB open signal
P632/EN M/R-a5-B // P632‑312‑660 3-95

P632 3 Operation
3.13.11 Multiple Signaling
MAIN:
Inp.asg. mult.sig. 1
[ 221 051 ]
Signal 1
Signal 2
Signal 3
Signal n
Selected signal MAIN:

Mult. sig. 1 active
[ 221 017 ]
MAIN:
Mult. sig. 1 stored
MAIN: S 11
[ 221 054 ]
Inp.asg. mult.sig. 2
[ 221 052 ] R1
Selected signal MAIN:

Mult. sig. 2 active
[ 221 053 ]
COMM1:
Reset mult. sig. 1 MAIN:
[ --- --- ] Mult. sig. 2 stored
S 11 [ 221 055 ]
COMM1:
Reset mult. sig. 2 R1
[ --- --- ]
MAIN:
General reset USER
[ 003 002 ]
1: execute
MAIN:
General reset EXT
[ 005 255 ]
OUTP:
Reset latching
402 102
MAIN:
Reset LED
306 020
12Z62FMA
Fig. 3-65: Multiple signaling.
The multiple signals 1 and 2 are formed by the programmable logic function
using OR operators. The programmable logic output to be interpreted as multiple
signaling is defined by the configuration of the binary signal input assignment
with the corresponding multiple signaling. Both an updated and a stored signal
are generated. The stored signal is reset by the following actions:
● General reset
● Latching reset
● LED indicators reset
● A command received through the communication interface
If the multiple signaling is still present at the time of a reset, the stored signal
will follow the updated signal.
3-96 P632/EN M/R-a5-B // P632‑312‑660

3 Operation P632
3.13.12 Multiple Signaling of the Measuring Circuit Monitoring Function

Signals issued by the measuring circuit monitoring (MCMON) function are
combined to one signal in function group MAIN.
MCM_1: MAIN:
Meas. circ. I faulty Meas. circ.I faulty
[ 036 198 ] [ 036 155 ]
MCM_2:
Meas. circ. I faulty SFMON:
Meas. circ. I faulty
[ 036 199 ]
[ 091 018 ]
62Z5185A
Fig. 3-66: Signals issued by measuring circuit monitoring
3.13.13 Starting Signals and Tripping Logic
3.13.13.1 Tripping Signals for Autotransformers

The following tripping signals are available for applications with
autotransformers:
M AI N: Trip sig.R EF 1 & RE F2 036 174

M AI N: Trip sig.R EF 2 & R EF3 036 175
M AI N: Trip sig.R EF 1 & R EF3 036 176
3.13.13.2 Starting Signals

The trip signals of differential protection and ground differential protection plus
the general starting signals of the definite-time and inverse-time overcurrent
protection functions are combined into one common general starting signal.
DTOC1: MAIN:
General starting General starting
[ 035 128 ]
[ 036 000 ]
DTOC2:
General starting
[ 035 234 ]
IDMT1:
General starting
[ 038 115 ]
IDMT2:
General starting
[ 038 135 ]
DIFF:
Starting
[ 041 106 ]
REF_1:
Trip signal
[ 041 005 ]
REF_2:
Trip signal
[ 041 016 ]
62Z6002A
Fig. 3-67: General starting of the P632
3.13.13.3 Counter of Starting Signals

The general starting signals are counted. The counter can be reset individually.
P632/EN M/R-a5-B // P632‑312‑660 3-97

P632 3 Operation
MAIN: MAIN:
General starting No. general start.
[ 036 000 ] [ 004 000 ]
MAIN: R
General reset USER
[ 003 002 ]
1: execute
Q6Z0143A
Fig. 3-68: Counter for general starting signals
3.13.13.4 Trip Command

The P632 has four trip commands. The functions to effect a trip can be selected
by setting an ‘m out of n’ parameter independently for each of the four trip
commands. The minimum trip command time may be set. The trip signals are
present only as long as the conditions for the signal are met.
The following diagram shows the configuration of the trip commands, using the
trip command 1 as an example. The parameters given apply to trip command 1.
The corresponding parameters of the other trip commands are given in
Chapter 7, (p. 7-1) and Chapter 8, (p. 8-1).
3-98 P632/EN M/R-a5-B // P632‑312‑660

3 Operation P632
MAIN:
Trip cmd.block. USER
[ 021 012 ]
0
MAIN:
1 Trip cmd. blocked
0: No [ 021 013 ]
1: Yes
MAIN:
Trip cmd. block. EXT
[ 036 045 ] MAIN:
Man. trip cmd. USER
[ 003 040 ]
0
MAIN:
1 Manual trip signal
0: don't execute [ 034 017 ]
1: execute
MAIN:
Man. trip cmd. EXT
[ 037 018 ]
MAIN:
Fct.assig.trip cmd.1
[ 021 001 ]
m out of n
Signal 1
Signal 2
Signal 3 MAIN:
Gen. trip signal
Signal n [ 036 251 ]
MAIN:
Selected signals Gen. trip signal 1
[ 036 005 ]
MAIN: MAIN:
Latching trip cmd. 1 Gen. trip command 1
[ 021 023 ] [ 036 071 ]
MAIN:
Min.dur. trip cmd. 1
0 [ 021 003 ]
0: No
1: Yes
MAIN:
Rset.latch.trip USER
[ 021 005 ]
1 MAIN:
Latch. trip c. reset
0: don't execute [ 040 139 ]
1: execute
MAIN:
Reset latch.trip EXT
[ 040 138 ]
64Z5044A
Fig. 3-69: Forming the trip commands
3.13.13.5 Manual Trip Command

A manual trip command may be issued via a parameter or a binary signal input
configured accordingly, but it is not executed unless the manual trip is included
in the selection of possible functions to cause a trip.
3.13.13.6 Latching of the Trip Commands

For each of the four trip commands, the user can specify by way of the
appropriate setting whether it will operate in latching mode. The trip command,
set to latch mode, will remain active until reset by parameters or reset through
an appropriately configured binary signal input.
P632/EN M/R-a5-B // P632‑312‑660 3-99

P632 3 Operation
3.13.13.7 Blocking of the Trip Commands

The trip commands can be blocked via parameters or an appropriately
configured binary signal input. This blocking is then effective for all four trip
commands. The trip signals are not affected by this blocking. If the trip
commands are blocked, it is indicated by the continuously illuminated amber LED
indicator H 2 on the local control panel and by a signal from an output relay
configured to “Blocked/Faulty”. (To identify H 2, see the dimensional drawings in
the Chapter 4, (p. 4-1).)
3.13.13.8 Counter of Trip Commands

The number of trip commands is counted. The counters can be reset either
individually or as a group.
MAIN: MAIN:
Gen. trip command 1 No. gen.trip cmds. 1
[ 036 071 ] [ 004 006 ]
R
MAIN: MAIN:
[ 036 022 ] [ 009 050 ]
R
MAIN: MAIN:
[ 036 113 ] [ 009 056 ]
R
MAIN: MAIN:
[ 036 114 ] [ 009 057 ]
MAIN:
Reset c. cl/tr.cUSER
[ 003 007 ]
1
0: don't execute
MAIN: 1: execute
General reset USER
[ 003 002 ]
1: execute
Q6Z0145A
Fig. 3-70: Counter of trip commands
3.13.14 Communication Error
COMM1: MAIN:
Communication error ≥1 Communication error
[ 221 019 ]
304 422
DVICE:
Module A not fitted
307 140
19Z5070A
Fig. 3-71: Communication Error.
If a link to the control station cannot be established or if the link is interrupted,

the signal “Communication error” will be issued. This signal will also be issued if
communication module A is not fitted.
3-100 P632/EN M/R-a5-B // P632‑312‑660

3 Operation P632
3.13.15 Time Tagging and Clock Synchronization
MAIN:
Date
[ 003 090 ]
MAIN:
Time of day
[ 003 091 ]
MAIN:
Time switching
[ 003 095 ]
MAIN:
Min-pulse clock EXT
[ 060 060 ]
MAIN:
Time tag
306 021
MAIN:
Time switching
Setting 0: Standard time

1: Daylight saving time
Q6Z0152B
Fig. 3-72: Date/time setting and clock synchronization with minute pulses presented at a binary signal input.
Switching from standard to daylight saving time or back requires correct time
setting frames from the time synchronization master (according the applied
communication protocol).
The data stored in the operating data memory, the monitoring signal memory
and the event memories are date- and time-tagged. For correct tagging, the date
and time need to be set in the P632.
The time of different devices may be synchronized by a pulse given to an
appropriately configured binary signal input. The P632 evaluates the rising edge.
This will set the clock to the nearest full minute, rounding either up or down. If
several start/end signals occur (bouncing of a relay contact), only the last edge is
evaluated.
3.13.15.1 Priority Control of Time Synchronization

The protection device provides several ways of synchronizing the internal clock:
● Telegram with the time of day via the communication interface COMM1/IEC
(full time)
● Telegram with the time of day via the communication interface COMM2/PC
(full time)
● IRIG-B Signal (IRIGB; time of day only)
● Impulse every minute via a binary signal input (MAIN), see Fig. 3-72, (p. 3-
101) and the preceding section.
A primary and a backup source for time of day synchronization may be set,
where both provide the four options listed above.
MAIN: Pri m.Source Ti me Syn c
MAIN: BackupS ourceTi me Sync
With this feature synchronization occurs continuously from the primary source as
long as time synchronization telegrams are received within a time-out period set
at MAIN: Time sync. time-ou t.
When selecting the time telegram via IEC as the primary source the device will
expect time synchronization telegrams from server SNTP 2 after server SNTP 1
has become defective, before it will switch over to the backup source.
Time synchronization occurs solely from the primary source when the time-out
stage is blocked.
P632/EN M/R-a5-B // P632‑312‑660 3-101

P632 3 Operation
3.13.16 Resetting Actions

Stored data such as event logs, measured fault data etc, can be cleared in
several ways. The following types of resetting actions are possible:
● Automatic resetting of the event signals provided by LED indicators (given
that the LED operating mode has been set accordingly) and of the display
of measured event data on the local control panel LCD whenever a new
event occurs. In this case only the displays on the local control panel LCD
are cleared but not the internal memories such as the fault memory.
● Resetting of LED indicators and measured event data displayed on the local
control panel LCD by pressing the “Clear” key located on the local
control panel. By selecting the required function at L OC: Fct. reset k ey
further memories may be assigned which will then also be cleared when
the “Clear” key is pressed.
● Selective resetting of a particular memory type (e.g. only the fault memory)
via setting parameters. (For this example: Navigate to menu point
FT_R C: R ese t re cord. USER and set to execute, see also the exact step-
by-step description in Section 6.13.7, (p. 6-33).)
● Selective resetting of a particular memory type (e.g. only the fault memory)
through appropriately configured binary signal inputs. (For this example:
Assign parameter FT_RC: Re se t re cord. EXT to the relevant binary
signal input e.g. INP: Fct. assignm. U xxx .)
● Group resetting by setting parameters, by navigating to menu point
MAIN : Group re se t 1 USER (or MAI N: Group rese t 2 USER) and
setting it to execute. For this the relevant memories (i.e. those to be reset)
must be assigned to parameter MAI N: Fct. assign. reset 1 (or
MAI N: Fct .assign . res et 2, resp.)
● Group resetting through appropriately configured binary signal inputs.
(That is assign parameter MAI N: Grou p r es et 1 EXT (or MA IN: Gr oup
rese t 2 EXT) to the relevant binary signal input, e.g. INP: Fct. assignm. U
xxx after memories to be reset have been assigned to parameter
MAI N: Fct .assi gn . res et 1 (or MA IN: Fct.assign. reset 2).
● General resetting by setting parameters (menu point MAIN: Genera l
reset USER). All memories, counters, events etc. are reset without any
special configuration options.
● General resetting through appropriately configured binary signal inputs.
(MAI N: General re se t EXT is assigned to the relevant binary signal
input.) All memories, counters, events etc. are reset without any special
configuration options.
Should several resetting actions have been configured for one particular memory
then they all have equal priority.
In the event of a cold restart or simultaneous failure of both internal battery and
substation auxiliary supply, all stored counter values will be lost.
3-102 P632/EN M/R-a5-B // P632‑312‑660

3 Operation P632
MAIN:
General reset USER
[ 003 002 ]
1 1: execute
0: don't execute
1: execute
MAIN:
Reset indicat. USER
[ 021 010 ]
0: No
1: Yes MAIN:
≥1 Reset LED
306 020
MAIN:
Reset indicat. EXT
[ 065 001 ]
12Z6115A
Fig. 3-73: General reset, LED reset and measured event data reset from the local control panel
LOC: OP_RC:
Reset key active & ≥1 Reset record. EXT
310 024 [ 005 213 ]
LOC:
Fct. reset key
[ 005 251 ]
m out of n
OP_RC:
Reset record. EXT
[005 213]
MAIN: MAIN:
Group reset 1 USER Group reset 2 USER
[ * ] [ * ]
0 0
1 ≥1 & 1 ≥1 &
0: don't execute 0: don't execute
MAIN: 1: execute 1: execute

Group reset 1 EXT
[ * ]
MAIN:
Group reset 2 EXT
MAIN: MAIN:
[ * ] Fct.assign. reset 1 Fct.assign. reset 2
[ * ] [ * ]
m out of n m out of n
OP_RC: OP_RC:
Reset record. EXT Reset record. EXT
[005 213] [005 213]
12Z61RMB
Fig. 3-74: “CLEAR” key on the local control panel and, as an example, group resetting of the operating data
recording (e.g. as an example for the reset signal O P _ R C : R e s e t r e c o r d . E X T.
A complete list of all resetting parameters that can be used in the way shown in
Fig. 3-74, (p. 3-103) can be obtained from the separately available
DataModelExplorer: Look up the setting parameter MA IN: Fct. ass ign. reset 1
in the file P632‑660_en_Addresses.pdf, and there follow the link to the referenced
config. table.
P632/EN M/R-a5-B // P632‑312‑660 3-103

P632 3 Operation
3.13.16.1 Resetting Actions through Keys on the Local Control Panel

Further resetting possibilities are basically not distinct resetting actions but make
access especially easy to one of the resetting actions described above i.e. by
configuring them to a configurable key.
● One can include the relevant resetting action in the configuration of the
“READ” ( ) key (through LOC: Fct. re ad k ey).
3.13.17 Assigning Communications Interfaces to Physical

Communications Channels
MAIN:
Chann.assign.COMM1/2
[ 003 169 ]
1: COMM1->chann.1,(2-2)
2: COMM1->chann.2,(2-1)
"Logical"
Communic. interface
COMM1
Comm. interface
Channel 1
"Logical"
Communic. interface
COMM2
Comm. interface
Channel 2
45Z5171A
Fig. 3-75: Assignment of communication interfaces to physical communication channels.
Depending on the design version of the communications module A there are up

to two communications channels available (see “Technical Data”, Chapter 2,
(p. 2-1)). These physical communications channels may be assigned to
communications interfaces COMM1 and COMM2.
If communications interface COMM1 is assigned to communications channel 2,
then the settings of communications interface COMM2 are automatically
assigned to communications channel 1.
COMM2 can only be used to transmit data to and from the P632 if its PC interface
has been de-activated. As soon as the PC interface is used to transmit data,
COMM2 becomes “dead”. It will only be enabled again when the “time-out”
period for the PC interface has elapsed.
3-104 P632/EN M/R-a5-B // P632‑312‑660

3 Operation P632
3.13.18 Test Mode
MAIN:
Test mode USER
[ 003 012 ]
0
MAIN:
1 ≥1 Test mode
[ 037 071 ]
0: No
1: Yes
MAIN:
Test mode EXT
[ 037 070 ]
D5Z50EBB
Fig. 3-76: Setting the test mode.
If tests are run on the P632, the user is advised to activate the test mode so that
all incoming signals via the serial interfaces will be identified accordingly.
P632/EN M/R-a5-B // P632‑312‑660 3-105

P632 3 Operation
3.14 Parameter Subset Selection (Function Group PSS)

With the P632, four independent parameter subsets may be pre-set. The user
may switch between parameter subsets during operation without interrupting the
protection function.
Selecting the Parameter Subset

The control path determining the active parameter subset (function setting or
binary signal input) may be selected via the function setting PSS: C ontrol via
USER or via the external signal PSS: Control via user EXT. Correspondingly,
the parameter subset is selected either in accordance with the pre-set function
setting PSS: Par am.su bs. se l. USE R or in accordance with external signals.
Which parameter subset is actually active at a particular time may be
determined by scanning the logic state signals PSS: Actual param . subset or
PSS : PS 1 act iv e.
Selecting the Parameter Subset via Binary Inputs

If the binary signal inputs are to be used for parameter subset selection, then the
P632 first checks to determine whether at least two binary inputs are configured
for parameter subset selection. If this is not the case, then the parameter subset
selected via the function setting will be active. The P632 also checks whether the
signals present at the binary signal inputs allow an unambiguous parameter
subset selection. This is only true when only one binary signal input is set to a
logic level of “1”. If more than one signal input is set to a logic level of “1”, then
the parameter subset previously selected remains active. Should a dead interval
occur while switching between parameter subsets (this is the case if all binary
signal inputs have a logic level of “0”), then the stored hold time is started. While
this timer stage is running, the previously selected parameter subset remains
active. As soon as a signal input has a logic level of “1”, the associated
parameter subset becomes active. If, after the stored time has elapsed, there is
still no signal input with a logic level of “1”, the parameter subset selected via
the function parameter becomes active.
If, after the supply voltage is turned on, no logic level of “1” is present at any of
the binary signal inputs selected for the parameter subset selection, then the
parameter subset selected via the function parameter will become active once
the stored time has elapsed. The previous parameter subset remains active while
the stored hold timer stage is running.
Parameter subset selection may also occur during a starting condition. When
subset selection is handled via binary signal inputs, a maximum inherent delay of
approximately 100 ms must be taken into account.
Settings for which only one address is given in the following sections are equally
effective for all four parameter subsets.
3-106 P632/EN M/R-a5-B // P632‑312‑660

3 Operation P632
PSS:
Control via USER
[ 003 100 ]
0: No
1: Yes PSS:
Control via user
PSS: [ 036 102 ]
Control via user EXT
[ 036 101 ] PSS:
Param.subs.sel. USER
INP: [ 003 060 ]
Fct. assignm. U xxx
[ 152 xxx ]
1
2
U x1
3
U x2
4
U x3
1: Parameter subset 1
U xx
2: Parameter subset 2
Address 065 002
Address 065 003 3: Parameter subset 3

1
Address 065 004 4: Parameter subset 4 2
Address 065 005 3
PSS:
1 4 Actual param. subset
[ 003 062 ]
PSS:
PS 1 active
[ 036 090 ]
PSS:
Activate PS 1 EXT PSS:
[ 065 002 ] PS 2 active
[ 036 091 ]
PSS: PSS:
Activate PS 2 EXT PS 3 active
[ 065 003 ] [ 036 092 ]
PSS: PSS:
Activate PS 3 EXT PS 4 active
[ 065 004 ] [ 036 093 ]
PSS:
Activate PS 4 EXT
[ 065 005 ]
1 4
PSS:
Keep time
[ 003 063 ]
1
PSS:
0 4 Ext.sel.param.subset
[ 003 061 ]
PSS:
PS 1 activated ext.
[ 036 094 ]
PSS:
PS 2 activated ext.
[ 036 095 ]
PSS:
PS 3 activated ext.
[ 036 096 ]
PSS:
PS 4 activated ext.
[ 036 097 ]
D5Z5002A
Fig. 3-77: Activating the parameter subsets.
P632/EN M/R-a5-B // P632‑312‑660 3-107

P632 3 Operation
3.15 Self-Monitoring (Function Group SFMON)

Comprehensive monitoring routines in the P632 ensure that internal faults are
detected and do not lead to malfunctions. The selection of function assignments
to the alarm signal includes, among others, self-monitoring signals from the
communications monitor, measuring-circuit monitoring, open-circuit monitoring
and the logic outputs.
3.15.1 Tests During Start-up

After the supply voltage has been turned on, various tests are carried out to
verify full operability of the P632. If the P632 detects a fault in one of the tests,
then start-up is terminated. The display shows which test was running when
termination occurred. No control actions may be carried out. A new attempt to
start up the P632 can only be initiated by turning the supply voltage off and then
on again.
3.15.2 Cyclic Tests

After start-up has been successfully completed, cyclic self-monitoring tests will
be run during operation. In the event of a positive test result, a specified
monitoring signal will be issued and stored in a non-volatile(NV) memory – the
monitoring signal memory – along with the assigned date and time (see
Section 3.17, (p. 3-112)).
The self-monitoring function monitors the built-in battery for any drop below the
minimum acceptable voltage level. If the associated monitoring signal is
displayed, then the power supply module should be replaced within a month,
since otherwise there is the danger of data loss if the supply voltage should fail.
Section 12.1, (p. 12-2) gives further information on maintenance procedures.
3.15.3 Signals
SFMON:
Fct. assign. warning
[ 021 030 ]
Signal 1
m out of n
Signal 2
Signal 3
Signal n
SFMON:
Selected monit. sig. ≥1 Warning (LED)
[ 036 070 ]
SFMON:
SFMON: Warning (relay)
Hardware fault [ 036 100 ]
304 950
Q6Z0154B
Fig. 3-78: Monitoring signals.
The monitoring signals are also signaled via the output relay configured
SFMON : Warnin g ( rel ay). The output relay operates as long as an internal
fault is detected.
3-108 P632/EN M/R-a5-B // P632‑312‑660

3 Operation P632
3.15.4 Device Response

The response of the P632 is dependent on the type of monitoring signal. The
following responses are possible:
● Signaling Only
If there is no malfunction associated with the monitoring signal, then only a
signal is issued, and there are no further consequences. This situation
exists, for example, when internal data acquisition memories overflow.
● Selective Blocking
If a fault is diagnosed solely in an area that does not affect the protective
functions, then only the affected area is blocked. This would apply, for
example, to the detection of a fault on the communication module or in the
area of the PC interface.
● Warm Restart
If the self-monitoring function detects a fault that might be eliminated by a
system restart – such as a fault caused by excessive electro-magnetic
interference –, then a procedure called a warm restart is automatically
initiated. During this procedure, as with any start-up, the computer system
is reset to a defined state. A warm restart is characterized by the fact that
no stored data and, in particular, no setting parameters are affected by the
procedure. A warm restart can also be triggered manually by control action.
During a warm restart sequence the protective functions and the
communication through serial interfaces will be blocked.
If the same fault is detected after a warm restart has been triggered by the
self-monitoring system within the set SF MO N: Mon .s ig. rete nt ion, then
the protective functions remain blocked but communication through the
serial interfaces will usually be possible again.
If a corrupted setting is diagnosed during the checksum test, which is part
of the self-monitoring procedure, settings are restored from an internal
back-up memory. Nevertheless, in order to get the device back to well
defined operation conditions a warm restart is executed.
For any warm restart initiated by self-monitoring, the root cause (alarm
event) is logged in the monitoring buffer.
● Cold Restart
In case the recovery of corrupted settings failed (e.g. because of an
electrical defect of the memory chip), then a cold restart is carried out. This
is necessary because the P632 cannot identify which parameter in the
subset is corrupted. A cold restart causes all internal memories to be reset
to a defined state. This means that all the protection device settings are
also erased after a cold restart. In order to establish a safe initial state, the
default values have been selected so that the protective functions are
blocked. Both the monitoring signal that triggered the cold restart and the
value indicating parameter loss are entered in the monitoring signal
memory.
A cold restart can also be triggered manually by control action (to
intentionally erase all memories and reset the device to default settings).
P632/EN M/R-a5-B // P632‑312‑660 3-109

P632 3 Operation
3.15.5 Monitoring Signal Memory

Depending on the type of internal fault detected the P632 will respond by trying
to eliminate the problem with a warm restart. (See above; for further details read
also about P632 behavior with problems in Chapter 11, (p. 11-1).) Whether or
not this measure will suffice can only be determined if the monitoring signal has
not already been stored in the monitoring signal memory because of a previous
fault. If it was already stored and a second fault is detected then, depending on
the type of fault detected, the P632 will be blocked after the second warm
restart.
In order to better monitor this behavior the parameter at SFMON: Mon.sig.
re t ent ion is applied. This parameter may either be set to ‘Blocked’ or to a time
duration (in hours). (It is, however, discouraged to set it to 0, because in this
case, there would be no blocking at all, so that there would be the danger of
maloperation in case of a permanent failure.)
The default for this timer stage is Blocked, i.e. blocking of the protection device
with two identical faults occurs independently of the time elapsed since the first
fault monitoring signal was issued.
The behavior caused by sporadic faults could lead to an unwanted blocking of the
P632 if the monitoring signal memory had not been reset in the interim, for
example, because the substation is difficult to reach in wintertime or reading-out
and clearing of the monitoring signal memory via the communication interfaces
was not enabled. To defuse this problem it is suggested to set the function
parameter to a specific time period so that blocking will only occur if the same
fault occurs again within this time period. Otherwise, the P632 will continue to
operate normally after a warm restart.
3.15.6 Monitoring Signal Memory Time Tag

The time when the device fault occurred last is recorded.
3-110 P632/EN M/R-a5-B // P632‑312‑660

3 Operation P632
3.16 Operating Data Recording (Function Group OP_RC)

For the continuous recording of processes in system operation as well as of
events, a non-volatile memory is provided (cyclic buffer). The “operationally
relevant” signals, each fully tagged with date and time at signal start and signal
end, are entered in chronological order. The signals relevant for operation
include control actions such as function disabling and enabling and triggers for
testing and resetting. The start and end of system events that represent a
deviation from normal operation such as overloads, ground faults or short-circuits
are also recorded. The operating data memory can be cleared/reset.
Counter for Signals Relevant to System Operation

The signals stored in the operating data memory are counted.
OP_RC:
Operat. data record.
[ 003 024 ]
Operating memory
MAIN:
Oper.-relev. signal
306 024
MAIN: OP_RC:
General reset USER No. oper. data sig.
[ 003 002 ] +
[ 100 002 ]
1: execute R
MAIN:
General reset EXT
[ 005 255 ]
OP_RC:
Reset record. EXT
[ 005 213 ]
OP_RC:
Reset record. USER
[ 100 001 ]
0: don't execute
1: execute
12Z61CMA
Fig. 3-79: Operating data recording and counter for signals relevant to system operation.
P632/EN M/R-a5-B // P632‑312‑660 3-111

P632 3 Operation
3.17 Monitoring Signal Recording (Function Group MT_RC)

The monitoring signals generated by the self-monitoring function are recorded in
the monitoring signal memory. The memory buffer allows for a maximum of
30 entries. If more than 29 monitoring signals occur without interim memory
clearance, the SFMON: O ve rf low MT_RC signal is entered as the last entry.
Monitoring signals prompted by a hardware fault in the unit are always entered
in the monitoring signal memory. Monitoring signals prompted by a peripheral
fault can be entered into the monitoring signal memory, if desired. The user can
select this option by setting an “m out of n” parameter (see Section 3.15, (p. 3-
108)).
If at least one entry is stored in the monitoring signal memory, this fact is
signaled by the red LED indicator H 3 on the local control panel. Each new entry
causes the LED to flash (on/off/on....).
The monitoring signal memory can only be cleared manually by a control action.
Entries in the monitoring signal memory are not cleared automatically, even if
the corresponding test in a new test cycle now shows the P632 to be healthy.
The contents of the monitoring signal memory can be read from the local control
panel or through the PC or communication interface. The time and date
information assigned to the individual entries can be read out through the PC or
communication interface or from the local control panel.
Monitoring Signal Counter

The number of entries stored in the monitoring signal memory is displayed on
the monitoring signal counter (MT_RC : N o. mon it. signals).
MT_RC:
Mon. signal record.
[ 003 001 ]
MAIN:
Time tag
306 021
SFMON:
Hardware fault
304 950
Selected monit. sig.
MT_RC:
Reset record. USER
[ 003 008 ]
CT30 SFMON:
≥1 Overflow MT_RC
[ 090 012 ]
0
MT_RC:
1 ≥1 No. monit. signals
[ 004 019 ]
0: don't execute
1: execute
MT_RC:
Reset record. EXT
[ 005 240 ]
12Z6155A
Fig. 3-80: Monitoring signal recording and the monitoring signal counter.
3-112 P632/EN M/R-a5-B // P632‑312‑660

3 Operation P632
3.18 Overload Data Acquisition (Function Group OL_DA)

In the event of an overload, the P632 determines the following measured
overload data.
● Overload duration
● Measured overload data derived from the measured operating data of the
thermal overload protection function (THRM1; see also Section 3.26, (p. 3-
176)). The following values are determined:
o Status of the thermal replica
o Load current
o Object temperature
o Coolant temperature
o Time remaining before tripping
o Offset of the thermal replica
3.18.1 Overload Duration

In the event of an overload, the P632 determines the overload duration. The
overload duration is defined as the time between the start and end of the
OL _RC: Record . in progr e ss signal.
OL_RC: OL_DA:
Record. in progress + Overload duration
[ 035 003 ] [ 004 102 ]
R
MAIN: ≥1
General reset USER
[ 003 002 ]
1: execute
MAIN:
General reset EXT
[ 005 255 ]
OL_RC:
Reset record. EXT
[ 005 241 ]
OL_RC:
Reset record. USER
[ 100 003 ]
1: execute
50Z0137A
Fig. 3-81: Overload duration.
P632/EN M/R-a5-B // P632‑312‑660 3-113

P632 3 Operation
3.18.2 Acquiring Measured Overload Data from the Thermal Overload

Protection
Measured overload values are derived from the thermal overload protection’s
measured operating data. They are stored at the end of an overload event.
OL_RC:
Record. in progress
[ 035 003 ]
THRM1: OL_DA:
Status replica, TH1 Status THRM1 replica
[ 004 150 ] [ 004 155 ]
THRM1: OL_DA:
I Load current THRM1
305 220 [ 004 159 ]
THRM1: OL_DA:
Object temperat.,TH1 Object temp. THRM1
[ 004 151 ] [ 004 156 ]
THRM1: OL_DA:
Coolant temp. TH1 Coolant temp.THRM1
[ 004 154 ] [ 004 157 ]
THRM1: OL_DA:
Pre-trip t. left,TH1 Pre-trip t.leftTHRM1
[ 004 153 ] [ 004 158 ]
THRM1: OL_DA:
Temp. offset repl. 1 Offset THRM1 replica
[ 004 170 ] [ 004 191 ]
MAIN:
General reset USER
[ 003 002 ]
1: execute
OL_RC:
Reset record. USER
[ 100 003 ]
1: execute
64Z5038A
Fig. 3-82: Measured overload values from the thermal overload protection
3-114 P632/EN M/R-a5-B // P632‑312‑660

3 Operation P632
3.19 Overload Recording (Function Group OL_RC)
3.19.1 Start of Overload Recording

An overload exists – and consequently overload recording begins – if at least the
signal THRM 1: St arti ng k*I re f> is issued.
3.19.2 Counting Overload Events

Overload events are counted and identified by sequential numbers.
OL_RC:
Record. in progress
[ 035 003 ]
THRM1:
Starting k*Iref>
[ 039 151 ] +
R OL_RC:
No. overload
[ 004 101 ]
MAIN:
General reset USER
[ 003 002 ]
1: execute
MAIN:
General reset EXT
[ 005 255 ]
OL_RC:
Reset record. EXT
[ 005 241 ]
OL_RC:
Reset record. USER
[ 100 003 ]
1: execute
64Z80C3A
Fig. 3-83: Counting overload events.
3.19.3 Time Tagging

The date of each overload event is stored. The overload start or end signals are
likewise time-tagged by the internal clock. The date and time assigned to an
overload event when the event begins can be read out from the overload
memory on the local control panel or through the PC and communication
interfaces. The time information (relative to the onset of the overload) can be
retrieved from the overload memory or through the PC or one of the
communication interfaces.
P632/EN M/R-a5-B // P632‑312‑660 3-115

P632 3 Operation
3.19.4 Overload Logging

Protection signals during an overload event are logged in chronological order
with reference to the specific event. A total of eight overload events, each
involving a maximum of 200 start or end signals, can be stored in the non-
volatile overload memories. After eight overload events have been logged, the
oldest overload log will be overwritten, unless memories have been cleared in
the interim. If more than 199 start or end signals have occurred during a single
overload event, then OL_RC: Ove rl. mem. ove rflow will be entered as the
last signal.
In addition to the signals, the measured overload data will also be entered in the
overload memory.
The overload logs can be read from the local control panel or through the PC or
OL_RC: C
Record. in progress
[ 035 003 ]
Signal 1 + CT200 OL_RC:

1 ≥1 Overl. mem. overflow
Signal 2 1 R [ 035 007 ]
Signal 3 1
Signal n 1 OL_RC:
Overload recording 1
[ * ]
OL_RC:
n Overload recording 1
Measured value 1
1 033 020
Measured value 2
2 033 021
Measured value 3
3 033 022
Measured value N
4 033 023
MAIN:
Time tag
306 021 5 033 024
FT_RC: & 6 033 025

Record. in progress
[ 035 000 ] 7 033 026
R
8 033 027
OL_RC:
Reset record. USER
[ 100 003 ]
MAIN:
1 ≥1
General reset USER 0: don't execute
[ 003 002 ]
1: execute
1: execute
MAIN:
General reset EXT
[ 005 255 ]
OL_RC:
Reset record. EXT
[ 005 241 ]
12Z6117A
Fig. 3-84: Overload memory.
3-116 P632/EN M/R-a5-B // P632‑312‑660

3 Operation P632
3.20 Fault Data Acquisition (Function Group FT_DA)

When there is a primary system fault, the P632 collects the following measured
fault data:
Fault duration:
(008 010) FT_DA: Faul t du ration
Running time:
(004 021) FT_DA : Runn ing ti me
Type of fault:
(004 198) FT_DA : Faul t deter m. wi th
Fault data acquisition time:

(004 199) FT_DA : Ru n time to meas .
Fault currents:
(010 199) FT_DA : Fault curr. P,A prim
(013 175) FT _D A: Faul t curr. P ,B pri m
(010 216) FT_DA : Fault curr. N, A prim
(013 176) FT _D A: Faul t curr. N,B prim
(025 086) FT _D A: Faul t curr. IP,a p.u .
(026 086) FT_DA: Faul t cu rr.I P,b p.u .
(025 087) FT_ DA: Faul t curr. IN, a p.u.
(026 087) FT_DA: Faul t curr.IN,b p.u .
(025 088) FT _D A: Faul t curr. IY,a p.u.
(026 088) FT_DA: Faul t cu rr.I Y,b p. u.
Differential current of all measuring systems:

(005 082) FT_DA : D iff . curren t 1
Second and fifth harmonic of the differential current:

(005 084) FT_DA : D iff .curren t 1( 2*f 0)
(005 085) FT_DA : Dif f.curren t 1( 5*f0)
(006 084) FT _DA : Dif f .cu rre nt 2( 2*f 0)
(006 085) FT _D A: Diff .curren t 2( 5*f0)
(007 084) FT_DA : D iff .curren t 3( 2*f 0)
(007 085) FT_DA: Diff .cu rre nt 3( 5*f 0)
P632/EN M/R-a5-B // P632‑312‑660 3-117

P632 3 Operation
Restraining current of all measuring systems:

(005 083) FT_DA: Re strai n. cu rre nt 1
(006 083) FT_DA : R estrain . cu rren t 2
(007 083) FT_D A: Re strain . cu rren t 3
Differential currents of ground differential protection:

(025 082) FT_D A: Dif f. curre nt R EF_1
(026 082) FT_D A: Di ff. cu rre nt REF_2
Restraining currents of ground differential protection:

(025 083) FT_D A: R es train .curr. RE F_1
(026 083) FT_D A: Restrai n.curr. R EF_2
3.20.1 Running Time and Fault Duration

The running time is defined as the time between the start and end of the general
starting signal, and the fault duration is defined as the time between the start
and end of the F T_R C : R ecord. in progres s signal.
! G ! FT_DA:
MAIN: Running time
General starting +
[ 004 021 ]
[ 036 000 ]
R
≥1
FT_RC: ! G ! FT_DA:

Record. in progress + Fault duration
[ 035 000 ] [ 008 010 ]
R
MAIN: ≥1
General reset USER
[ 003 002 ]
1: execute ≥1
MAIN:
General reset EXT
[ 005 255 ]
MAIN:
Reset LED
306 020
49Z64DMA
Fig. 3-85: Running time and fault duration.
3.20.2 Fault Data Acquisition Time

The P632 determines the measured fault data for a particular point in time
during a fault. Depending on the protection function that recognizes a fault, the
criterion for the determination of the recording start time is selected by the P632.
If, for example, the differential protection function detects a fault then the P632
determines the measured fault data at the time during the fault when the
maximum differential current was measured. The measured fault data are
displayed at the end of the fault. If several protection functions detect a fault
then the criterion is selected on the basis of the priorities given in the table
below. The selected criterion is displayed at the P632.
3-118 P632/EN M/R-a5-B // P632‑312‑660

3 Operation P632
Priority Function Recognizing the Fault Acquisition Time Criterion
1 Differential protection function Maximum differential current
2 Ground differential protection, end a (Br: Restricted Maximum differential current

earth fault protection, end a) (REF_1)
3 Ground differential protection, end b (Br: Restricted Maximum differential current

earth fault protection, end b) (REF_2)
4 Definite-time overcurrent protection or inverse-time Maximum restraining current

overcurrent protection
5 Functions according to the selection through m out of n End of fault

parameters
The difference in time between the start of the fault and the fault data
acquisition time is determined by the P632 and displayed.
P632/EN M/R-a5-B // P632‑312‑660 3-119

P632 3 Operation
FT_RC:
Record. in progress
[ 035 000 ]
DIFF:
Trip signal
[ 041 075 ]
REF_1:
Trip signal
[ 041 005 ]
REF_2:
Trip signal
[ 041 016 ]
DTOC1:
General starting
[ 035 128 ]
DTOC2:
General starting
[ 035 234 ]
IDMT1:
General starting
[ 038 115 ]
IDMT2: FT_DA:
General starting Fault determ. with
[ 038 135 ] [ 004 198 ]
c1
c2
c3
c4
c5
DIFF:
Id,1
303 303 1: Max. diff. current
DIFF:
Id,2
303 304
DIFF: 1
Id,3
303 307
2: Max. Idiff, REF_1
REF_1:
Id,N,a
402 550
2
REF_2: 3: Max. Idiff, REF_2

Id,N,b
402 558 3
DIFF:
IR,1
303 305 5: Max. restrain. curr.
DIFF:
IR,2
303 306
DIFF: 4
IR,3
303 308
6: Other trigger
1 5 FT_DA:
Save measured values
305 052
G
FT_DA:
MAIN: Run time to meas.
General reset USER
[ 004 199 ]
[ 003 002 ]
1: execute R
MAIN:
Reset LED
306 020
62Z8056A
Fig. 3-86: Determination of the fault data acquisition time
3.20.3 Acquisition of the Fault Currents

The P632 stores the fault currents data determined at the acquisition time.
The following fault currents are stored:
● The maximum phase currents for each end of the transformer
● The residual current calculated from the phase currents
● The current measured by the P632 at transformer -Tx4 (x: 1, 2) The fault
currents are displayed as per-unit quantities referred to Inom.
3-120 P632/EN M/R-a5-B // P632‑312‑660

3 Operation P632
FT_RC:
Record. in progress
[ 035 000 ]
FT_DA:
305 052
I̲A,a
I̲B,a FT_DA:
I̲max,a Fault curr.IP,a p.u.
I̲C,a [ 025 086 ]
FT_DA:
Fault curr.IN,a p.u.
[ 025 087 ]
I̲A,b
I̲B,b I̲max,b FT_DA:

Fault curr.IP,b p.u.
I̲C,b [ 026 086 ]
FT_DA:
Fault curr.IN,b p.u.
[ 026 087 ]
I̲Y,a FT_DA:
ΣI̲P,a Fault curr.IY,a p.u.
[ 025 088 ]
I̲Y,b FT_DA:
ΣI̲P,b Fault curr.IY,b p.u.
[ 026 088 ]
MAIN:
General reset USER
[ 003 002 ]
1: execute
MAIN:
Reset LED
306 020
62Z5057A
Fig. 3-87: Acquisition of the fault currents
3.20.4 Acquisition of the Differential and Restraining Currents

The P632 stores the differential and restraining current data determined at the
acquisition time by the differential protection and ground differential protection
functions. Moreover, the values for the second and fifth harmonics of the
differential current are stored.
Differential and restraining currents are stored as per-unit quantities referred to
Iref.
P632/EN M/R-a5-B // P632‑312‑660 3-121

P632 3 Operation
FT_RC:
Record. in progress
[ 035 000 ]
FT_DA: c c
305 052
DIFF: FT_DA:
Id,1 Diff. current 1
303 303
R [ 005 082 ]
DIFF: FT_DA:
I(2⋅f0),1 Diff.current 1(2*f0)
303 301 [ 005 084 ]
R
DIFF: FT_DA:
303 311
R [ 005 085 ]
DIFF: FT_DA:
IR,1 Restrain. current 1
303 305
R [ 005 083 ]
DIFF: FT_DA:
303 304
R [ 006 082 ]
DIFF: FT_DA:
303 302 [ 006 084 ]
R
DIFF: FT_DA:
303 312
R [ 006 085 ]
DIFF: FT_DA:
303 306
R [ 006 083 ]
DIFF: FT_DA:
303 307
R [ 007 082 ]
DIFF: FT_DA:
303 309 [ 007 084 ]
R
DIFF: FT_DA:
303 313
R [ 007 085 ]
DIFF: FT_DA:
303 308
R [ 007 083 ]
MAIN:
General reset USER
[ 003 002 ]
1: execute
MAIN:
Reset LED
306 020
Q6Z0158A
Fig. 3-88: Acquisition of the differential and restraining currents of differential protection
3-122 P632/EN M/R-a5-B // P632‑312‑660

3 Operation P632
FT_RC:
Record. in progress
[ 035 000 ]
FT_DA: c c
305 052
REF_1: FT_DA:
Id,N,a Diff. current REF_1
402 550
R [ 025 082 ]
REF_1: FT_DA:
IR,N,a Restrain.curr. REF_1
402 551 [ 025 083 ]
R
REF_2: FT_DA:
Id,N,b Diff. current REF_2
402 558
R [ 026 082 ]
REF_2: FT_DA:
IR,N,b Restrain.curr. REF_2
402 559
R [ 026 083 ]
MAIN:
General reset USER
[ 003 002 ]
1: execute
MAIN:
Reset LED
306 020
62Z8059A
Fig. 3-89: Acquisition of the differential and restraining currents of ground differential protection
3.20.5 Fault Data Reset

After pressing the clear key on the local control panel, the fault data value is
displayed as Not measured. However, the values are not erased and can still be
read out through the PC and communication interfaces.
P632/EN M/R-a5-B // P632‑312‑660 3-123

P632 3 Operation
3.21 Fault Recording (Function Group FT_RC)
3.21.1 Start of Fault Recording

A fault exists and fault recording begins if at least one of the following signals is
present:
● FT_R C: Trig ge r
● FT_R C: I d> tr iggere d
● FT_RC : IR> t rigge red
In addition fault recording may also be started manually using setting
parameters or externally through an appropriately configured binary signal input.
3-124 P632/EN M/R-a5-B // P632‑312‑660

3 Operation P632
3.21.2 Fault Counting

Faults are counted and identified by sequential numbers.
FT_RC:
Fct. assig. trigger
[ 003 085 ]
Signal 1
Signal 2
m out of n
Signal 3
Signal n
Selected signals
FT_RC: FT_RC:
Trigger
Trigger EXT ≥1
[ 036 089 ] [ 037 076 ]
FT_RC:
Trigger USER
[ 003 041 ]
0 0 1 min FT_RC:
≥1 Record. in progress
1 [ 035 000 ]
0: don't execute
1: execute
FT_RC:
MAIN: + No. of faults
General reset USER [ 004 020 ]
[ 003 002 ]
≥1 R
1: execute
MAIN:
General reset EXT FT_RC:
[ 005 255 ] + No. system disturb.
[ 004 010 ]
FT_RC:
Reset record. USER R
[ 003 006 ]
1: execute
FT_RC:
FT_RC: System disturb. runn
Reset record. EXT [ 035 004 ]
[ 005 243 ]
64Z9001A
Fig. 3-90: Start of fault recording and fault counter.
3.21.3 Time Tagging

The date that is assigned to each fault by the internal clock is stored. A fault’s
individual start or end signals are likewise time-tagged. The date and time
assigned to a fault when the fault begins can be read out from the fault memory
on the local control panel or through the PC and communication interfaces. The
time information (relative to the onset of the fault) that is assigned to the signals
can be retrieved from the fault memory or through the PC or communication
interfaces.
P632/EN M/R-a5-B // P632‑312‑660 3-125

P632 3 Operation
3.21.4 Fault Recordings
FT_RC: C
Record. in progress
[ 035 000 ]
FT_RC:
Signal 1 + CT200 Fault mem. overflow
1 ≥1 [ 035 001 ]
Signal 2 1 R
Signal 3 1
Signal n 1 FT_RC:
Fault recording n
[ * ]
1
FT_RC:
Pre-fault time
[ 003 078 ]
FT_RC:
Post-fault time
[ 003 079 ]
FT_RC:
n Fault recording n
Fault memory n
1 003 000
2 033 001
3 033 002
Measured value 1 4 033 003
Measured value N 7 033 006
MAIN: 8 033 007

Time tag
306 021
MAIN:
General reset USER &
[ 003 002 ]
1: execute R
≥1
MAIN:
General reset EXT
[ 005 255 ]
FT_RC:
Reset record. EXT
[ 005 243 ]
FT_RC:
Reset record. USER
[ 003 006 ]
1 1: execute
0: don't execute
1: execute
12Z6161B
Fig. 3-91: Fault memory.
Protection signals, including the signals during the settable pre-fault and post-
fault times, are logged in chronological order with reference to the specific fault.
A total of eight faults, each involving a maximum of 200 start or end signals, can
be stored in the non-volatile fault memories. After eight faults have been
recorded, the oldest fault recording will be overwritten, unless memories have
been cleared in the interim. If more than 199 start or end signals have occurred
during a single fault, then FT_RC: Fault m e m. over flow will be entered as the
last signal. If the time and date are changed during the pre-fault time, the signal
FT_R C: Fault y t ime tag is generated.
In addition to the fault signals, the measured fault data will also be entered in the
fault memory.
The fault recordings can be read from the local control panel or through the PC or
3-126 P632/EN M/R-a5-B // P632‑312‑660

3 Operation P632
3.21.5 Fault Value Recording

The following analog signals are recorded:
● Phase currents of both ends of the transformer
● Residual current measured by the P632 at the T 4 transformer
● Voltage
The signals are recorded before, during and after a fault. The window length for
oscillography recording before and after the fault can be set. A maximum time
period of 16.4 s (for 50 Hz) or 13.7 s (for 60 Hz) is available for recording. This
period can be divided among a maximum of eight faults. The maximum
recording time per fault can be set. If a fault, including the set pre-fault and post-
fault times, lasts longer than the set maximum recording time, then recording
will terminate when the set maximum recording time is reached.
The pre-fault time is exactly adhered to if it is shorter than the set maximum
recording time. Otherwise the pre-fault time is set to the maximum recording
time minus a sampling increment, and the post-fault time is set to zero.
If the maximum recording time is exceeded, the analog values for the oldest fault
are overwritten, but not the binary values. If more than eight faults have
occurred since the last reset, then all data for the oldest fault are overwritten.
The analog oscillography data of the fault record can only be read out through
the PC or communication interfaces.
When the supply voltage is interrupted or after a warm restart, the values of all
faults remain stored.
P632/EN M/R-a5-B // P632‑312‑660 3-127

P632 3 Operation
FT_RC:
Record. in progress
[ 035 000 ]
FT_RC:
Max. recording time
[ 003 075 ]
FT_RC:
Pre-fault time
[ 003 078 ]
FT_RC:
Post-fault time
[ 003 079 ]
I̲A,a Analog channel 1

R
I̲B,a Analog channel 2

R
I̲C,a Analog channel 3

R
I̲Y,a
Analog channel 4
ΣI̲P,a R
I̲A,b Analog channel 5

R
I̲B,b Analog channel 6

R
I̲C,b Analog channel 7

R
I̲Y,b
Analog channel 8
ΣI̲P,b R
V̲ Analog channel 9
R
I̲A,c Analog channel 10

R
MAIN:
General reset USER
[ 003 002 ]
1: execute
FT_RC:
Reset record. USER
[ 003 006 ]
1: execute
62Z5062A
Fig. 3-92: Fault value recording
3-128 P632/EN M/R-a5-B // P632‑312‑660

3 Operation P632
3.22 Differential Protection (Function Group DIFF)

The P632 is designed for the protection of transformers as well as for the
protection of motors and generators and of other two-winding arrangements.
For application of the device as transformer differential protection, amplitude
matching is required. This is achieved simply by setting of the reference power ‑
generally the nominal power of the transformer ‑ and of the primary nominal
voltages for all windings of the transformer.
Vector group matching is achieved by the straightforward input of the relevant
vector group identification number. For special applications, zero-sequence
current filtering may be deactivated. For conditions where it is possible to load
the transformer with a voltage in excess of the nominal voltage, the overfluxing
restraint prevents inappropriate tripping.
For application as differential protection device for motors or generators, the
harmonic restraint (inrush compensation) can be deactivated. The start-up of
directly switched asynchronous motors represents a problem in differential
protection due to transient transformer saturation caused by a displacement of
the start-up current for relatively high primary time constants. Even under these
unfavorable measurement conditions, the P632 exhibits an excellent stable
performance due to the application of a saturation discriminator.
All observations below are based on the assumption that the system current
transformers are connected to the P632 in standard configuration (see
Section 3.13.1, (p. 3-74)). In particular, the application as transformer differential
protection device presupposes that winding ‘a’ corresponds to the high voltage
side of the transformer. For a non-standard connection, the appropriate settings
must be selected (see Chapter 7, (p. 7-1)).
3.22.1 Enabling or Disabling Differential Protection

Differential protection can be enabled or disabled from the local control panel.
Moreover, enabling can be done separately for each parameter subset.
P632/EN M/R-a5-B // P632‑312‑660 3-129

P632 3 Operation
DIFF:
General enable USER
[ 019 080 ]
0
DIFF:
1 Enabled
[ 041 210 ]
0: No
1: Yes
DIFF:
Ready
303 299
DIFF:
Enable PSx
[ * ]
0: No
1: Yes
DIFF:
Blocking EXT
[ 003 163 ]
Parameter DIFF:
Enable PSx
set 1 072 152
set 2 073 152
set 3 074 152
set 4 075 152
Q6Z0102B
Fig. 3-93: Enabling or disabling differential protection
3.22.2 Amplitude Matching

In order to set the amplitude matching for the protected object, a reference
power - identical for all windings - needs to be defined. For two-winding
arrangements, the nominal power will usually be the reference power. The
individual reference currents for each winding of the protected object are then
calculated by the P632 on the basis of the set reference power and the set
primary nominal voltages of the transformer.
Sref
I ref ,a =
3 ⋅ V nom,a
Sref
I ref ,b =
3 ⋅ V nom,b
Sref : reference power

I ref ,a, I ref ,b: reference current of winding a or b, respectively
V nom,a, V nom,b: nominal voltage of winding a or b, respectively
The P632 calculates the matching factors on the basis of the reference currents
and the set primary nominal currents of the system transformers.
I nom,a
kam,a =
I ref ,a
I nom,b
kam,b =
I ref ,b
with
kam,a, kam,b: amplitude matching factor of end a or b, respectively
I nom,a, I nom,b: primary nominal currents of the system transformers
Reference currents and matching factors are displayed at the P632.
3-130 P632/EN M/R-a5-B // P632‑312‑660

3 Operation P632
The P632 checks that the reference currents and matching factors are within
their permissible ranges. The matching factors must satisfy the following
conditions:
● The matching factors must always be ≤ 16.
● The value for the second highest matching factor (kam,mid) must always be
≥ 0.5.
Should the P632 calculate reference currents or matching factors not satisfying
the above conditions then an alarm will be issued and the P632 will be blocked
automatically.
The measured values of the phase currents of the windings of the protected
object are multiplied by the relevant matching factors and are then available for
further processing. Consequently, all threshold values and measured values
always refer back to the relevant reference currents rather than to the
transformer nominal currents or the nominal currents of the device.
DIFF:
Ref. curr. Iref,a
MAIN: [ 019 023 ]
Vnom prim. end a PSx DIFF:
[ 019 017 ] Ref. curr. Iref,b
[ 019 024 ]
MAIN:
Vnom prim. end b PSx
[ 019 018 ] SFMON:
Iref, a inval. range
DIFF: [ 091 007 ]
Reference power Sref
[ 019 016 ]
SFMON:
Iref, b inval. range
[ 091 008 ]
Iref,a=Sref/Vnom,a/√3 Monit. range limits
Iref,b=Sref/Vnom,b/√3 Monit. range limits
DIFF:
Matching fact. kam,a
MAIN: [ 004 105 ]
Inom C.T.prim.,end a DIFF:
[ 019 020 ] Matching fact. kam,b
[ 004 106 ]
MAIN:
Inom C.T.prim.,end b
[ 019 021 ] SFMON:
kam,a > 16 Matching fail. end a
[ 091 000 ]
SFMON:
kam,b > 16 Matching fail. end b
[ 091 001 ]
kam,a = Inom,a/Iref,a
kam,b = Inom,b/Iref,b
COMP
kam,pos
SFMON:
kam,pos < 0.5 2nd match.fact. inv.
[ 091 006 ]
DIFF:
Sound match
303 310
62Z8013A
Fig. 3-94: Calculating and checking the matching factors
P632/EN M/R-a5-B // P632‑312‑660 3-131

P632 3 Operation
MAIN:
Protection active
306 001
DIFF:
Sound match
303 310
DIFF:
Matching fact. kam,a
[ 004 105 ] kam,a⋅I̲A,a I̲am,A,a
I̲A,a
kam,a⋅I̲B,a I̲am,B,a
I̲B,a
kam,a⋅I̲C,a I̲am,C,a
I̲C,a
DIFF:
Matching fact. kam,b
[ 004 106 ] kam,b⋅I̲A,b I̲am,A,b
I̲A,b
kam,b⋅I̲B,b I̲am,B,b
I̲B,b
kam,b⋅I̲C,b I̲am,C,b
I̲C,b
62Z8004A
Fig. 3-95: Amplitude matching
3-132 P632/EN M/R-a5-B // P632‑312‑660

3 Operation P632
3.22.3 Vector Group Matching

Vector group matching means that the low voltage-side currents are rotated with
respect to the high voltage-side currents according to the vector group of the
transformer to be protected. Thereby, phase coincidence with the high voltage-
side currents is restored. With the P632, this is achieved by calculating the
relevant vector difference or where appropriate, by sign inversion for the low
voltage-side phase currents (end b). Care must be taken to avoid distortion of
the amplitude matching by this operation. For all odd vector groups, this is
achieved by means of the factor 1/√3. Using vector diagrams, it can be shown
that the operations listed in the following table will lead to phase coincidence of
the high and low voltage-side currents while maintaining the amplitude
matching. In Fig. 3-96, (p. 3-133), such a vector diagram is depicted for a
transformer having the vector group Yd5 as an example. By subtraction of each
phase current from the cyclically leading phase current and subsequent
multiplication by the factor 1/√3, the desired matching is achieved.
-I̲am,B,b
√3⋅I̲s,2,b
I̲s,2,a I̲am,A,b
I̲am,C,b
I̲s,3,a
I̲s,1,a
-I̲am,A,b √3⋅I̲s,3,b
I̲am,B,b
√3⋅I̲s,1,b -I̲am,C,b
Q6Z0105A
Fig. 3-96: Vector diagram for vector group matching with a transformer having the vector group Yd5
3.22.4 Zero-sequence Current Filtering

Table 3-5, (p. 3-134) shows that the zero-sequence current is subtracted from
the phase currents of winding a and, for all even vector groups, from the phase
currents of winding b. According to the theory of symmetric components, the
zero-sequence current is calculated as follows:
1
I̲am,0,z = . I̲ + I̲am,B,z + I̲am,C ,z
3 am,A,z
z: end a or b
I̲am: amplitude-matched current
Zero-sequence filtering may be disabled separately for each end.
In general this disabling of zero-sequence filtering is intended for even-numbered
vector groups. Should the side considered here require the setting of an odd-
numbered vector group while at the same time no operational system star point
grounding is provided within the protected area, then, in view of increased
sensitivity with single-pole internal faults, it is recommended that the respective
zero-sequence current is fed to the individual measuring systems again.
P632/EN M/R-a5-B // P632‑312‑660 3-133

P632 3 Operation
Zero-sequence filtering for the transformer ends a or b is enabled using the

setting parameters:
● DI FF: 0-seq. fi lt.a e n.PSx
● DIFF: 0-seq . fil t.b e n.PSx
Table 3-5, (p. 3-134) lists the required operations for all vector groups that may
occur. The indices in the equations have the following meanings:
am: amplitude-matched
x: phase A, B or C
x+1: cyclically trailing phase
x-1: cyclically leading phase
End ID of the Setting: Setting:

vector With zero-sequence filtering Without zero-sequence filtering
group
a I̲am,x,a − I̲am,0,a I̲am,x,a
b 0=12 I̲am,x,b − I̲am,0,b I̲am,x,b
1 1 1
I̲am,x,b − I̲am,x+1,b ⋅ I̲am,x,b − I̲am,x+1,b ⋅ + I̲am,0,b
3 3
2 I̲am,0,b − I̲am,x+1,b I̲am,x+1,b
3 1 1
I̲am,x−1,b − I̲am,x+1,b ⋅ I̲am,x−1,b − I̲am,x+1,b ⋅ + I̲am,0,b
3 3
4 I̲am,x−1,b − I̲am,0,b I̲am,x−1,b
5 1 1
I̲am,x−1,b − I̲am,x,b ⋅ I̲am,x−1,b − I̲am,x,b ⋅ + I̲am,0,b
3 3
6 I̲am,0,b − I̲am,x,b I̲am,x,b
7 1 1
I̲am,x+1,b − I̲am,x,b ⋅ I̲am,x+1,b − I̲am,x,b ⋅ + I̲am,0,b
3 3
8 I̲am,x+1,b − I̲am,0,b I̲am,x+1,b
9 1 1
I̲am,x+1,b − I̲am,x−1,b ⋅ I̲am,x+1,b − I̲am,x−1,b ⋅ + I̲am,0,b
3 3
10 I̲am,0,b − I̲am,x−1,b I̲am,x−1,b
11 1 1
I̲am,x,b − I̲am,x−1,b ⋅ I̲am,x,b − I̲am,x−1,b ⋅ + I̲am,0,b
3 3
Tab. 3-5: Required operations for vector groups with or without zero-sequence current filtering
Vector group matching is via a straight-forward input of the vector group

identification number provided that the phase currents of the high and low
voltage side(s) are connected in standard configuration (see section
Section 3.13.1, (p. 3-74)). For other configurations, special considerations apply
(see Chapter 7, (p. 7-1)). A reverse phase rotation (A-C-B) needs to be taken
into account by making the appropriate setting at the P632. The P632 will then
3-134 P632/EN M/R-a5-B // P632‑312‑660

3 Operation P632
automatically form the complementary value of the set vector group ID to the
number 12 (vector group ID = 12 – set ID).
I̲s,1,a
I̲s,y,a
I̲s,2,a
I̲s,3,a
DIFF:
0-seq. filt.a en.PSx
[ * ]
Parameter DIFF:
0-seq. filt.a en.PSx
set 1 072 155
set 2 073 155
0: No set 3 074 155
1: Yes set 4 075 155
DIFF: Parameter DIFF: DIFF:

DIFF: 0-seq. filt.b en.PSx Vec.gr. ends a-b PSx
0-seq. filt.b en.PSx Vec.gr. ends a-b PSx
[ * ]
[ * ] set 1 072 156 019 010
set 2 073 156 019 040
set 3 074 156 019 041
0
set 4 075 156 019 042
1
0: No
1: Yes 0
I̲am,A,a 8
I̲am,B,a I̲am,0,a 10
I̲am,C,a 12
I̲am,A,b 1
I̲am,B,b I̲am,0,b 3
I̲am,C,b 5
11
I̲s,1,b
I̲s,y,b I̲s,2,b
I̲s,3,b
MAIN:
Phase sequence
[ 010 049 ]
62Z8010A
Fig. 3-97: Vector group matching and zero-sequence filtering
3.22.5 Tripping Characteristics

The differential and restraining current values for each measurement system are
calculated from the current values after amplitude and vector group matching.
The following equations are valid for uniformly defined current arrows relative to
the protected equipment, e.g. all the current arrows of all windings point either
towards the protected object or away from it.
Calculation of differential and restraining currents:
I d ,y = | I s,y,a + I s,y,b |
I R,y = 0.5 ⋅ | I s,y,a − I s, y,b |
The tripping characteristic of the P632 line differential protection device has two
knee points. The first knee-point depends on the setting at D IFF: Idiff> PSx
and is on the intersection with the tripping characteristic for single-side feed.
If the current transformer supervision (CTS) function is used, the basic pick-up
sensitivity D I FF: Id iff> PSx can be increased to a set value
(DI FF: I diff>(CTS) PSx) when a CT fault is detected. See details given in the
section describing the CTS function group.
P632/EN M/R-a5-B // P632‑312‑660 3-135

P632 3 Operation
The second knee of the tripping characteristic is defined by the setting at

DI FF: I diff> P Sx.
The characteristic equations for the three different ranges are given below.
Fig. 3-98, (p. 3-136) shows the tripping characteristic.
Characteristics equation for the range 0 ≤ I R ≤ 0.5I diff >:
Id I diff >
=
I ref I ref
Characteristics equation for the range 0.5I diff > < I R ≤ I R,m :
2
Id IR I diff >
= m1 ⋅ + ⋅ (1 − 0.5 ⋅ m1)
I ref I ref I ref
Characteristics equation for the range I R,m < I R :

2
Id IR I diff > I R,m

2
= m2 ⋅ + ⋅ (1 − 0.5 ⋅ m1) + ⋅ (m1 − m2)
I ref I ref I ref I ref
Iref: reference current

m1: gradient of the characteristic in range 0.5I diff > < I R ≤ I R,m
2
m2: gradient of characteristic in range I R,m < I R
2
Id
Iref
6 Tripping area
4
ic t
ris
.7
ed cte
=0
e ara
m2
IR,m2
sid ch
fe
= 4.0
e- nt
2 Iref
in rre
Blocking area
r s cu
gl
0.3
fo ult
m1 =
Fa
Id> Hysteresis active

= 0.2
Iref
Id>
* 0.9
Iref 2 4 6 8
IR
Iref
I II III
64Z9003A
Fig. 3-98: Tripping characteristic of differential protection
Differential protection can optionally be set to trip with a definite time delay
(setting 010 162 D IFF: Op. de l.,tr ip si g.PSx), used for selectivity between
overlapping differential protection zones. For such applications, also the
hysteresis of the tripping characteristic should be enabled (setting 072 006
DIFF: Hy st. effecti ve PSx = Yes), to avoid chattering operation for faults/test
3-136 P632/EN M/R-a5-B // P632‑312‑660

3 Operation P632
conditions close to the trip characteristic. Upon differential starting

DI FF: Start in g, the hysteresis gets activated, i.e. the basic threshold Idiff> (or
Idiff>(CTS) respectively) is reduced to 90% of the set value. All other
characteristic settings are unchanged. Thus the characteristic is "vertically"
moved towards lower differential current values.
Along with this settable operate delay a starting signal was introduced for
logging purposes. DIFF: Star ting is signaled if a valid differential protection trip
condition is determined, i.e. at least one measuring system has triggered (=
measures Idiff/IR within tripping area) and is not blocked from inrush or overflux
blocking, saturation discriminator or external binary input.
If differential protection is set to operate without operate delay, this starting
signal is raised together with the tripping signal.
If the current transformer supervision (CTS) function is used, the basic pick-up
sensitivity D I FF: Id iff> PSx can be increased to a value set at
D IFF: Id iff>(CTS) PSx.
I diff Fault current characteristic

for single side infeed
m2
Idiff>(CTS)
1
m1
I diff>
0 1 2 3 I R,m2 IR
64Z9004A
Fig. 3-99: Changing the characteristic if C T S : I d i f f > ( C T S ) a c t i v e= Yes
3.22.6 Rapid (high-set) Differential Protection

Above the adjustable threshold DIFF : Idiff >> PSx of the differential current,
the P632 will trip without taking into account either the harmonic restraint or the
overfluxing stabilization. If the differential current exceeds the adjustable
threshold D IFF: Id iff >>> PSx, the restraining current and the saturation
discriminator are no longer taken into account either, that is the P632 will trip
regardless of the restraining value and the saturation discriminator.
P632/EN M/R-a5-B // P632‑312‑660 3-137

P632 3 Operation
Id,1 = f(I̲s,1,z) DIFF:

Id,1
303 303
I̲s,1,a IR,1 = f(I̲s,1,z) DIFF:

I̲s,1,b IR,1
303 305

Id,2
303 304
I̲s,2,a DIFF:
IR,2 = f(I̲s,2,z)
I̲s,2,b IR,2
303 306

Id,3
303 307
I̲s,3,a DIFF:
I̲s,3,b IR,3 = f(I̲s,3,z) IR,3
303 308
z: End a, b
62Z5071A
Fig. 3-100: Forming the differential and restraining currents for the three measuring systems
3-138 P632/EN M/R-a5-B // P632‑312‑660

3 Operation P632
DIFF:
Sat.discr. 1 trigg.
[ 041 115 ]
DIFF:
Sat.discr. 2 trigg.
[ 041 116 ]
DIFF:
Sat.discr. 3 trigg.
[ 041 117 ]
DIFF:
Op.mode rush rst.PSx
[ * ]
DIFF:
Harm.block 1 trigg.
[ 041 118 ] 0
DIFF:
Harm.block 2 trigg.
[ 041 119 ]
1
DIFF:
Harm.block 3 trigg.
[ 041 120 ]
2
0: Without
1: Not phase-selective
2: Phase-selective
DIFF: DIFF:
Idiff> PSx Op.del.,trip sig.PSx
DIFF: [ * ]
Overflux.bl.1 trigg. [ * ]
[ 041 121 ]
DIFF:
DIFF: m1 PSx
Overflux.bl.2 trigg.
[ 041 122 ] [ * ] DIFF:
Trip signal
DIFF: [ 041 075 ]
Overflux.bl.3 trigg. DIFF:
m2 PSx
[ 041 123 ]
[ * ]
DIFF: DIFF:
Enabled IR,m2 PSx
[ 041 210 ]
[ * ]
DIFF:
Blocking EXT
[ 003 163 ]
MAIN:
Protection active
306 001
DIFF:
DIFF: Trip signal 1
Id,1 [ 041 002 ]
303 303
DIFF: DIFF:
IR,1 Trip signal 2
303 305 [ 041 003 ]
DIFF:
Id,2 DIFF:
303 304 Trip signal 3
DIFF: [ 041 004 ]
IR,2
303 306
DIFF:
Id,3
303 307 DIFF:
Idiff>> PSx
DIFF:
IR,3 [ * ]
303 308
DIFF:
Id>> triggered
[ 041 221 ]
DIFF:
Idiff>>> PSx DIFF:
Meas.system 1 trigg.
[ * ] [ 041 124 ]
or DIFF:
Idiff>(CTS) PSx DIFF:
if CTS: [ 041 125 ]
Idiff>(CTS)active
= yes [ 036 203 ] DIFF:
[ 041 126 ]
DIFF:
Id>>> triggered
Parameter DIFF: DIFF: DIFF: [ 041 222 ]
Op.mode rush rst.PSx Idiff> PSx Idiff>(CTS) PSx
set 1 072 148 072 142 080 000
set 2 073 148 073 142 081 000
set 3 074 148 074 142 082 000
set 4 075 148 075 142 083 000
Parameter DIFF: DIFF: DIFF: DIFF: DIFF: DIFF:

m1 PSx m2 PSx IR,m2 PSx Idiff>> PSx Idiff>>> PSx Op.del.,trip sig.PSx
set 1 072 145 072 146 072 147 072 143 072 144 010 162
set 2 073 145 073 146 073 147 073 143 073 144 010 163
set 3 074 145 074 146 074 147 074 143 074 144 010 164
set 4 075 145 075 146 075 147 075 143 075 144 010 165
64Z8012B
Fig. 3-101: Measuring system of the P632
3.22.7 Inrush Stabilization (Harmonic Restraint)

When an unloaded transformer is connected, the inrush current at unfavorable
switching instants such as for voltage zero, may have values that exceed the
P632/EN M/R-a5-B // P632‑312‑660 3-139

P632 3 Operation
transformer nominal current several times over. It takes some time for the
current to assume its small stationary value. Since the high inrush current flows
on the connected side only, the tripping characteristic of the P632 differential
protection may give rise to a trip unless stabilizing action is taken. The fact that
the inrush current has a high proportion of harmonics having twice the system
frequency offers a possibility of stabilization against tripping by the inrush
current.
The P632 filters the differential current. The fundamental wave I ( f 0) and second
harmonic components I (2 ⋅ f 0) of the differential current are determined. If the
I (2 ⋅ f 0)
ratio exceeds a specific adjustable value in at least one measuring
I ( f 0)
system, tripping is blocked optionally in one of the following modes:
● across all three measuring systems
● selectively for one measuring system (see Fig. 3-102, (p. 3-140)).
There will be no blocking if the differential current exceeds the set threshold
DI FF: I diff>> PSx.
DIFF:
Trip signal
[ 041 075 ]
DIFF:
[ 041 124 ]
DIFF:
[ 041 125 ]
DIFF:
[ 041 126 ]
DIFF:
RushI(2f0)/I(f0) PSx
[ * ]
f0 I(f0) 0 30ms
DIFF: & & DIFF:
Id,1 Harm.block 1 trigg.
I(2⋅f0)/I(f0)
303 303
2⋅f0 I(2⋅f0) [ 041 118 ]
f0 I(f0) 0 30ms
DIFF: & & DIFF:
I(2⋅f0)/I(f0)
303 304
2⋅f0 I(2⋅f0) [ 041 119 ]
f0 I(f0) 0 30ms
DIFF: & & DIFF:
I(2⋅f0)/I(f0)
303 307
2⋅f0 I(2⋅f0) [ 041 120 ]
DIFF:
I(2⋅f0),1
303 301
Parameter DIFF: DIFF:

RushI(2f0)/I(f0) PSx I(2⋅f0),2
303 302
set 1 072 159
DIFF:
set 2 073 159 I(2⋅f0),3
set 3 074 159 303 309
set 4 075 159

Q6Z0110C
Fig. 3-102: Inrush stabilization (harmonic restraint)
3.22.8 Overfluxing Stabilization

If the transformer is loaded with a voltage in excess of the nominal voltage,
saturation effects occur. Without stabilization, these could lead to differential
protection tripping. The fact that the current of the protected object under
saturation conditions has a high proportion of harmonics having five times the
system frequency serves as the basis of stabilization.
The P632 filters the differential current. The fundamental wave I ( f 0) and fifth
harmonic components I (5 ⋅ f 0) of the differential current are determined. If the
I (5 ⋅ f 0)
ratio exceeds the set value DIFF: Ov. I ( 5f0)/I(f0) PSx in at least one
I ( f 0)
3-140 P632/EN M/R-a5-B // P632‑312‑660

3 Operation P632
measuring system, and if the differential current is smaller than 4·Iref, then
tripping is blocked selectively for one measuring system.
DI FF : Idiff>> PSx.
DIFF:
[ 041 124 ]
DIFF:
[ 041 125 ]
DIFF:
[ 041 126 ]
DIFF:
Overflux.bl. en. PSx
[ * ]
0: No
1: Yes
f0
DIFF:
Id,1 I(f0)
303 303
5⋅f0
I(5⋅f0) I(5⋅f0)/I(f0)
f0
DIFF:
DIFF: Ov. I(5f0)/I(f0) PSx
Id,2 I(f0)
[ * ]
303 304
DIFF:
5⋅f0 Overflux.bl.1 trigg.
[ 041 121 ]
I(5⋅f0) I(5⋅f0)/I(f0)
DIFF:
f0 Overflux.bl.2 trigg.
DIFF: [ 041 122 ]
Id,3 I(f0)
303 307
5⋅f0 DIFF:
Overflux.bl.3 trigg.
[ 041 123 ]
I(5⋅f0) I(5⋅f0)/I(f0)
DIFF:
I(5⋅f0),1
303 311
DIFF:
I(5⋅f0),2
303 312
DIFF:
I(5⋅f0),3
303 313
<4⋅Iref
Parameter DIFF: DIFF:

Overflux.bl. en. PSx Ov. I(5f0)/I(f0) PSx
set 1 072 158 072 160
set 2 073 158 073 160
set 3 074 158 074 160
set 4 075 158 075 160
Q6Z0112A
Fig. 3-103: Overfluxing stabilization
P632/EN M/R-a5-B // P632‑312‑660 3-141

P632 3 Operation
3.22.9 Saturation Discriminator

Up to a certain limit, stability in the event of external faults is ensured by means
of the bias. Due to the triple-slope tripping characteristic, the stabilization is
particularly pronounced for high currents. However, as an additional safeguard
for through-currents with transformer saturation, the P632 is provided with a
saturation discriminator.
After each zero crossing of the restraining current, the saturation discriminator
monitors the occurrence of the differential current over time. For internal faults,
the differential current appears after a zero crossing together with the restraining
current. In the case of passing currents with transformer saturation, however, a
differential current will not appear until transformer saturation begins.
Accordingly, a locking signal is generated on the basis of level monitoring of the
differential current as compared to the restraining current, and thus the desired
through-stabilization is achieved. Locking is restricted to the measuring system
where an external fault was detected.
D IFF : I diff>> PSx.
DIFF:
[ 041 124 ]
DIFF:
[ 041 125 ]
DIFF:
[ 041 126 ]
DIFF: DIFF:
Id,1 Sat.discr. 1 trigg.
303 303 [ 041 115 ]
DIFF:
IR,1
303 305
DIFF: DIFF:
303 304 [ 041 116 ]
DIFF:
IR,2
303 306
DIFF: DIFF:
303 307 [ 041 117 ]
DIFF:
IR,3
303 308
Q6Z0111A
Fig. 3-104: Saturation discriminator
3.22.10 Measured Operating Data of Differential Protection

The differential and restraining currents are displayed as measured operating
data provided that the set thresholds are exceeded.
3-142 P632/EN M/R-a5-B // P632‑312‑660

3 Operation P632
DIFF:
Meas. value rel. Id
[ 011 037 ]
DIFF:
Id,1
303 303
c1
DIFF:
Id,2
303 304
c2
DIFF: c3
Id,3
303 307
1 DIFF:
Diff. current 1
[ 005 080 ]
2 DIFF:
Diff. current 2
[ 006 080 ]
3 DIFF:
Diff. current 3
[ 007 080 ]
DIFF:
Meas. value rel. IR
[ 011 038 ]
DIFF:
IR,1
303 305
c1
DIFF:
IR,2
303 306
c2
DIFF: c3
IR,3
303 308
DIFF:
1 Restrain. current 1
[ 005 081 ]
2 DIFF:
Restrain. current 2
[ 006 081 ]
3 DIFF:
Restrain. current 3
[ 007 081 ]
Q6Z0109A
Fig. 3-105: Measured operating data of differential and restraining currents
P632/EN M/R-a5-B // P632‑312‑660 3-143

P632 3 Operation
3.23 Ground Differential Protection (Function Groups REF_1 and

REF_2)
The ground differential protection function (Br.: restricted earth fault protection)
can be applied to transformer windings with grounded neutral point where the
neutral-point-to-ground connection is fitted with a current transformer.
One ground differential protection function is available per transformer winding.
The P632 display shows the winding end associated with a particular ground
differential protection function. Connection for and operation of the ground
differential protection function will now be presented with end a as an example.
Equivalent considerations apply to end b.
Ground differential protection may be applied to transformer ends with a
grounded neutral-point, but in this case the neutral-point-to-ground connection
must be fitted with a CT.
Ground differential protection is based on comparing the vector sum I̲N of the
phase currents of the relevant transformer end to the neutral-point current I̲Y.
The P632 calculates the vector sum of the phase currents. For the connection,
see Section 3.13.1, (p. 3-74).
3.23.1 Enabling or Disabling Ground Differential Protection

Ground differential protection can be enabled or disabled from the local control
panel; see also Fig. 3-106, (p. 3-145). Moreover, enabling can be done
separately for each parameter subset.
3.23.2 Blocking ground differential protection

Blocking of the ground differential protection functions when the DIFF protection
was triggered may be enabled or disabled using setting parameters.
Furthermore, binary signal input functions (REF_1: Blocking EXT, for example)
are available to allow for a more flexible application of the functions. Since
operational readiness is no longer solely dependent on the device setting, the
readiness of ground differential protection is also indicated (by means of the
REF_1: R eady state, for example).
3-144 P632/EN M/R-a5-B // P632‑312‑660

3 Operation P632
REF_1:
General enable USER
[ 019 050 ]
0
REF_1:
1 Enabled
[ 041 132 ]
0: No
1: Yes
REF_1:
Enable PSx
[ * ]
0: No
1: Yes
PSU:
PS y active
[ ** ]
REF_1:
Bl.f.DIFF trigg. PSx
[ * ]
0: No
1: Yes REF_1:
≥1 Ready
DIFF: [ 019 054 ]
Meas.system 1 trigg. ≥1
[ 041 124 ]
DIFF:
[ 041 125 ]
DIFF:
[ 041 126 ]
REF_1:
Blocking EXT
[ 019 051 ]
PSU: Parameter REF_1: REF_1:

** y PS y active * Enable PSx Bl.f.DIFF trigg. PSx
1 036 090 set 1 072 141 080 006
2 036 091 set 2 073 141 081 006
3 036 092 set 3 074 141 082 006
4 036 093 set 3 075 141 083 006
64Z5300C
Fig. 3-106: Enabling, disabling and readiness of ground differential protection
3.23.3 Amplitude Matching

For amplitude matching, the nominal power of the transformer end should first
be set as the reference power. The reference current is then calculated by the
P632 on the basis of the set reference power and the set primary nominal
voltage of the transformer end.
Sref
I ref ,N ,a =
3 ⋅ V nom,a
Sref : reference power

I ref ,N ,a: reference current of the ground differential protection function, end a
V nom,a: nominal voltage, end a
The P632 calculates the matching factors on the basis of the reference currents
and the set primary nominal currents of the system transformers.
P632/EN M/R-a5-B // P632‑312‑660 3-145

P632 3 Operation
I nom,a
kam,N ,a =
I ref ,N ,a
I nom,Y ,a
kam,Y ,a =
I ref ,N ,a
with
am: amplitude-matched
I nom,a: primary nominal current of the main current transformer
I nom,Y ,a: primary nominal current of current transformer in the neutral-point-to-
ground connection
Reference currents and matching factors are displayed at the P632.
The P632 checks that the reference current and matching factor are within their
permissible ranges. The acceptable range for the reference current can be read
out from the operating program. The following applies to the matching factors:
● The matching factor must always be ≤ 16.
● The value for the smaller matching factor (kam,min) must always be ≥ 0.5.
Should the P632 calculate a reference current or matching factors not meeting
the above conditions then an alarm will be issued and the P632 will be blocked
automatically.
The measured values are multiplied by the relevant matching factors and are
then available for further processing. Consequently, all threshold values and
measured values always refer back to the relevant reference current rather than
to the transformer nominal current or the nominal current of the device.
3-146 P632/EN M/R-a5-B // P632‑312‑660

3 Operation P632
REF_1:
Reference power Sref
[ 019 031 ]
MAIN:
Vnom prim. end a PSx
[ 019 017 ]
REF_1:
Iref,N,a=Sref/Vnom/√3 Ref. curr. Iref
[ 019 034 ]
Monit. range limits SFMON:

Inv.range Iref REF_1
[ 091 105 ]
MAIN:
[ 019 020 ]
MAIN:
Inom C.T.Yprim,end a
[ 019 027 ]
kam,N,a =
REF_1:
Inom,a/Iref,N,a Match. fact. kam,N,a
[ 004 160 ]
kam,Y,a = REF_1:
Matching fact. kam,Y
Inom,Y,a/Iref,N,a [ 004 163 ]
kam,N,a ≥ 16 SFMON:
Match.f. kam,N REF_1
[ 091 101 ]
SFMON:
kam,Y,a ≥ 16 Match.f. kam,Y REF_1
[ 091 102 ]
COMP
kam,min
SFMON:
kam,min < 0.5 Min.mtch.f.inv.REF_1
[ 091 104 ]
64Z6020A
Fig. 3-107: Calculating and monitoring the matching factors
3.23.4 Operating Modes

The user can choose among three operating modes.
P632/EN M/R-a5-B // P632‑312‑660 3-147

P632 3 Operation
Address Description Range of Values
PS1 PS2 PS3 PS4
072 149 073 149 074 149 075 149 REF_1: Ope rati ng mode Low imped. / sum(IP)
PSx (default)
Low imped. / IP,max
High impedance
072 169 073 169 074 169 075 169 REF_2: Ope rati ng mode Low imped. / sum(IP)
PSx (default)
Low imped. / IP,max
High impedance
3.23.4.1 “Low imped. / sum(IP)” Operating Mode

From the amplitude-matched resultant currents I̲am,N,a and I̲am,Y,a, the differential
and restraining currents are calculated as follows:
Id,N,a = |I̲am,N,a + I̲am,Y,a|
IR,N,a = |I̲am,N,a|
Again, the equation for the differential current applies under the condition of
uniformly defined current arrows relative to the protected object. Both current
arrows point either towards the protected object or away from it.
Fig. 3-108, (p. 3-149) shows the tripping characteristic of the ground differential
protection function. The characteristic equation is as follows:
I d ,N ,a I diff >,N ,a I R,N ,a
= + 1.005 ⋅
I ref I ref ,N ,a I ref ,N ,a
with
Idiff>,N,a: setting at R EF_1: Idi f f> P Sx
3-148 P632/EN M/R-a5-B // P632‑312‑660

3 Operation P632
Id,N Tripping area s

er
Iref rm
fo
6 ns
tra
nt
re
c ur
n
ai
m
e
th
of
n
4 tio
ra
5 tu
00 sa
1. ie
n t
= ns
m tra
for
tic
2 ter
is Blocking area
r ac
ha
ntc
rre
t cu
ul
Fa
Id,N>
= 0.2
Iref
0 2 4 6 8
IR,N
Iref
64Z8018
Fig. 3-108: Tripping characteristic of ground differential protection with the “Low imped. / sum(IP)” operating mode
3.23.4.2 “Low imped. / IP,max” Operating Mode

Using this operating mode differential current Id and restraining current IR are
defined as follows:
Id = | kam,P ⋅ ∑ {I̲ A, I̲ B, I̲C } + kam,Y ⋅ I̲Y |
1
2 ( am,P
IR = ⋅ k ⋅ max{ | I̲ A | , | I̲ B | , | I̲C | } + kam,Y ⋅ | I̲Y | )
When compared to the “Low imped. / sum(IP)” operating mode, a double slope
tripping characteristic can be used here because of the definition of the
restraining current (see Fig. 3-109, (p. 3-150)). In particular, this tripping
characteristic permits a tripping test under load current by shorting a phase
current (to simulate residual current) without the need of star point current IY.
Besides the Idiff> parameter, already available to set the basic pick-up sensitivity,
the following parameters are also provided with the “Low imped. / IP,max”
operating mode to set the tripping characteristic; in this case IR,m2 is equivalent
to Iref.
P632/EN M/R-a5-B // P632‑312‑660 3-149

P632 3 Operation
Address Description Range of Values *
PS1 PS2 PS3 PS4
072 162 073 162 074 162 075 162 REF_1: m1 P Sx 0.00 … {0.20} … 1.00
072 163 073 163 074 163 075 163 REF_1: m2 P Sx 0.15 … {1.50}
072 164 073 164 074 164 075 164 REF_1: IR,m 2 PSx 0.10 … {1.00} … 1.50
072 172 073 172 074 172 075 172 REF_2: m1 P Sx 0.00 … {0.20} … 1.00
072 165 073 165 074 165 075 165 REF_2: m2 P Sx 0.15 … {1.50}
072 166 073 166 074 166 075 166 REF_2: IR,m 2 PSx 0.10 … {1.00} … 1.50
* Default setting in curly braces {}
Id/Iref
m2
m1
Idiff> IR,m2
1 2 IR/Iref
64Z6021A_EN
Fig. 3-109: Tripping characteristic of the ground differential protection with the “Low imped. / IP,max” operating
mode
3.23.4.3 “High impedance” Operating Mode

This operating mode is provided for application with the high impedance current
measuring approach. The pick-up sensitivity is set via the Idiff> parameter which
is already available.
3-150 P632/EN M/R-a5-B // P632‑312‑660

3 Operation P632
3.23.5 Idiff>>> Threshold

The restraining quantity is no longer taken into account when the differential
current value exceeds the threshold set at R EF_1: Idiff>>> PSx. Therefore
the P632 will issue a trip signal independently of the restraining quantity.
3.23.6 Applying Current Transformer Supervision

When applying current transformer supervision (CTS), the ground differential
protection function may be blocked for the relevant end where a CT fault is
detected. See details given in Section 3.30, (p. 3-197).
When a CTS alarm signal is issued for one of the transformer ends (for example
CTS: Ala rm end a), the associated ground differential protection function is
then blocked, if it has been set accordingly (for example by assigning REF_1 to
end a: R EF_1 : C TS eff e ct ive PSx = Yes).
CTS: REF_1:
Alarm end a Idiff> PSx
[ 036 205 ] [ * ]
1: Yes
REF_1: REF_1:
CTS effective PSx m1 PSx
[ 080 003 ] [ * ]
1: Yes
REF_1:
m2 PSx
[ * ]
REF_1:
IR,m2 PSx
REF_1: [ * ]
Enabled
[ 041 132 ]
MAIN:
Protection active
306 001
I̲A,a
I̲N,a kam,N,a⋅I̲N,a Id,N,a
I̲B,a
REF_1:
I̲C,a Trip signal
kam,Y,a⋅I̲Y,a IR,N,a [ 041 005 ]
I̲Y,a
REF_1:
Idiff>>> PSx
[ * ]
REF_1:
IR,N,a
402 551
REF_1:
Id,N,a
402 550
Parameter REF_1: REF_1: REF_1: REF_1: REF_1:
Idiff> PSx m1 PSx m2 PSx IR,m2 PSx Idiff>>> PSx
set 1 072 150 072 162 072 163 072 164 072 151
set 2 073 150 073 162 073 163 073 164 073 151
set 3 074 150 074 162 074 163 074 164 074 151
set 4 075 150 075 162 075 163 075 164 075 151
64Z6022A
Fig. 3-110: Measuring system of the P632, shown here for REF_1
3.23.7 Measured Operating Data of Ground Differential Protection

The differential and restraining currents are displayed as measured operating
data provided that the set thresholds are exceeded.
P632/EN M/R-a5-B // P632‑312‑660 3-151

P632 3 Operation
REF_1:
Meas. value rel. Id
[ 011 039 ]
REF_1:
Id,N,a
402 550
c REF_1:
Diff. current, REF_1
[ 008 080 ]
REF_1:
Meas. value rel. IR
[ 011 040 ]
REF_1: c
IR,N,a
402 551
REF_1:
Restrain.curr.,REF_1
[ 008 081 ]
Q6Z0116A
Fig. 3-111: Measured operating data of differential and restraining currents
3.23.8 Protection of Autotransformers

Function group REF_1 provides a protection function, stabilized by a
characteristic, for autotransformers; a typical example is displayed in the next
figure. In this case, the phase currents in ends a and b as well as the neutral-
point current must be taken into account.
Σ(I̲x,a) = I̲N,a
I̲A,a
I̲B,a
I̲C,a
Σ(I̲x,b) = I̲N,b
I̲A,b
I̲B,b
I̲C,b
I̲Y,a
64Z7199B
Fig. 3-112: Currents with an autotransformer
For such applications with REF_1, the transformer end b may be selected, and
end a is permanently included in the protection function.
(019 120) RE F_1: A dd.m eas .i np. en d b = Yes / No (default setting is “No”)
The neutral-point current is permanently assigned to the measuring input for end
a (T14).
3-152 P632/EN M/R-a5-B // P632‑312‑660

3 Operation P632
A further amplitude matching factor is calculated and displayed by the P632 for
each end added. All currents involved must be referred to a common reference
value as this application entails protection of an electric node in a zero-sequence
system. This common reference current value is calculated based on the settable
reference power and the nominal voltage for end a. The amplitude matching
factors then result from the ratio of the primary transformer current values for
the relevant end and the common reference current value.
Sref , prim
Reference current: I ref =
3 ⋅ V nom, prim,a
I nom,CT , prim,x
Amplitude matching factor: kamp,x =
I ref
for x = End a, b
with
Sref, prim = (019 031) REF_1: Ref e r en ce pow er Sref
Vnom, prim a = (019 017) MA IN: Vn om pri m. e nd a PSx
Inom, CT, prim a = (019 020) MAI N: Inom C.T.prim. ,en d a
Inom, CT, prim b = (019 021) MA IN: In om C.T.pri m., end b
The reference current and matching factors for the transformer ends are
displayed at the P632.
As before, the P632 checks that the reference current and matching factors
remain within the permitted ranges. The permitted range for the reference
current can be looked up in the operating system. The following rule applies to
the matching factors:
● The larger of both matching factors must be ≤ 16.
● The smaller of both matching factors must come to ≥ 0.5.
Should the P632 calculate a common reference current value or matching factors
not satisfying the above conditions then an alarm will be issued and the P632 will
automatically be blocked.
The measured values are multiplied by the matching factors and they are then
available for further processing. Consequently, all threshold values and
measured values always refer back to the relevant reference current
rather than to the transformer nominal current or the nominal current
of the device.
As shown below, the differential current is formed from the sum of all phase
currents involved and the neutral-point current:
Idiff,N = |kam,a ·I̲N,a + kam,b·I̲N,b + kam,Y·I̲a,Y|
= |kam,a·∑{I̲A,a,I̲B,a,I̲C,a} + kam,b·∑{I̲A,b,I̲B,b,I̲C,b} + kam,Y·I̲a,Y|
The calculation of the restraining current depends on the set operating mode.
If the operating mode is set to “Low imped. / sum(IP)”, the restraining current is
calculated from the sum of all ends involved:
IR,N = |kam,a ·I̲N,a + kam,b·I̲N,b|
= |kam,a·∑{I̲A,a,I̲B,a,I̲C,a} + kam,b·∑{I̲A,b,I̲B,b,I̲C,b}|
If the operating mode is set to “Low imped. / IP,max”, the formula to calculate
the restraining current remains unchanged from the application for a single end.
But now the highest phase current is calculated from the amplitude-matched
sum of the currents on the relevant phase of all ends involved.
IR,N = 0.5·(max{|I̲A|,|I̲B|,|I̲C|} + kam,Y·|I̲a,Y|) (unchanged)
with I̲x = kam,a·I̲x,a + kam,b·I̲x,b for x = A, B or C
P632/EN M/R-a5-B // P632‑312‑660 3-153

P632 3 Operation
The value pairs ( Id,N / IR,N ) calculated with the above formula are then compared
with the already identified tripping characteristics of the ground differential
3-154 P632/EN M/R-a5-B // P632‑312‑660

3 Operation P632
3.24 Definite-Time Overcurrent Protection (Function Groups

DTOC1 and DTOC2)
In the P632, a three-stage definite-time overcurrent protection function (DTOC
protection) is available. The measured values to be monitored by the respective
DTOC functions are selected using a setting parameter.
Phase current values as well as negative-sequence and residual current
measured values are monitored.
The function group DTOC1 will serve as an example to illustrate the operation of
the DTOC protection functions. The same will apply to function group DTOC2.
DTOC1:
Select. meas. input
[ 019 103 ]
I̲A,a
I̲B,a
0
I̲C,a
I̲N,a
I̲A,b
I̲B,b
I̲C,b 1
I̲N,b
I̲A,y
I̲B,y
0,1 I̲C,y
I̲N,y
0: End a
1: End b
62Z5070A
Fig. 3-113: Selection of measured values for DTOC protection
3.24.1 Enabling or Disabling DTOC Protection

DTOC protection can be enabled or disabled using setting parameters. Moreover,
enabling can be carried out separately for each parameter set.
P632/EN M/R-a5-B // P632‑312‑660 3-155

P632 3 Operation
DTOC1:
General enable USER
[ 031 135 ]
1 DTOC1:
Enabled
[ 035 102 ]
0: No
1: Yes
DTOC1:
Enable PSx
[ * ]
0: No
1: Yes
Parameter DTOC1:
Enable PSx
set 1 076 050
set 2 077 050
set 3 078 050
set 4 079 050
Q6Z0118A
Fig. 3-114: Enabling or disabling DTOC protection
3-156 P632/EN M/R-a5-B // P632‑312‑660

3 Operation P632
3.24.2 Phase Current Stages
DTOC1:
DTOC1: Meas.value I/IN> PSx
Enabled & [ * ]
[ 035 102 ]
DTOC1:
MAIN: & c I> PSx
Protection active
[ * ]
MAIN:
Dynam. param. active DTOC1:
[ 040 090 ] & c I> dynamic PSx
[ * ]
I̲A,y DTOC:
I> Starting A
I̲B,y DTOC:
I> Starting B
I̲C,y DTOC:
I> Starting C
DTOC1:
Meas.val. I/IN>> PSx
[ * ]
DTOC1:
& c I>> PSx
[ * ]
DTOC1:
& c I>> dynamic PSx
[ * ]
DTOC:
I>> Starting A
DTOC:
I>> Starting B
DTOC:
I>> Starting C
DTOC1:
Meas.val.I/IN>>> PSx
[ * ]
DTOC1:
& c I>>> PSx
[ * ]
DTOC1:
& c I>>> dynamic PSx
[ * ]
DTOC:
I>>> Starting A
DTOC:
I>>> Starting B
DTOC:
I>>> Starting C
DTOC1: DTOC1: DTOC1: DTOC1: DTOC1: DTOC1:

Parameter Meas.value I/IN> PSx I> PSx I> dynamic PSx Meas.val. I/IN>> PSx I>> PSx I>> dynamic PSx
set 1 060 002 076 051 076 151 060 006 076 052 076 152
set 2 060 003 077 051 077 151 060 007 077 052 077 152
set 3 060 004 078 051 078 151 060 008 078 052 078 152
set 4 060 005 079 051 079 151 060 009 079 052 079 152
DTOC1: DTOC1: DTOC1:

Parameter Meas.val.I/IN>>> PSx I>>> PSx I>>> dynamic PSx
set 1 060 010 076 053 076 153

set 2 060 011 077 053 077 153
set 3 060 012 078 053 078 153
set 4 060 013 079 053 079 153 64Z8919A
Fig. 3-115: Phase current stages, internal overcurrent startings.
The three phase currents are monitored by the P632 with three-stage functions
to detect when they exceed the set thresholds. One of two different threshold
types can be active. The “dynamic” thresholds are active for the set hold time for
the “dynamic parameters” (see Section 3.13.6, (p. 3-91)) and the “normal”
thresholds are active when no hold time is running.
There is also a separate setting for each overcurrent stage whether the starting
decision shall be based on the fundamental or on the r.m.s. value.
P632/EN M/R-a5-B // P632‑312‑660 3-157

P632 3 Operation
DTOC1:
Rush restr.enabl PSx
[ * ]
1 &
0: No
1: Yes
DIFF: ≥1
Harm.block 1 trigg.
[ 041 118 ]
DIFF:
Harm.block 2 trigg.
[ 041 119 ]
DIFF: DTOC1:
Harm.block 3 trigg. c tI> PSx
[ 041 120 ] [ * ]
DTOC1: 0 t
Block. tI> EXT DTOC1:
Trip signal tI>
[ 035 120 ]
[ 035 114 ]
DTOC: ≥1 DTOC1:
I> Starting A & Starting I>
DTOC: [ 035 108 ]
I> Starting B &
DTOC: &
I> Starting C
DTOC1:
DTOC1: c tI>> PSx
Block. tI>> EXT [ * ]
[ 035 121 ]
0 t
DTOC1:
Trip signal tI>>
[ 035 115 ]
DTOC: ≥1 DTOC1:
I>> Starting A Starting I>>
DTOC: [ 035 109 ]
I>> Starting B
DTOC:
I>> Starting C
DTOC1:
DTOC1: c tI>>> PSx
Block. tI>>> EXT [ * ]
[ 035 122 ]
0 t
DTOC1:
Trip signal tI>>>
[ 035 116 ]
DTOC: ≥1 DTOC1:
I>>> Starting A Starting I>>>
DTOC: [ 035 110 ]
I>>> Starting B
DTOC:
I>>> Starting C
≥1 DTOC1:
Starting A
[ 035 104 ]
≥1 DTOC1:
Starting B
[ 035 105 ]
≥1 DTOC1:
Starting C
[ 035 106 ]
DTOC1: DTOC1: DTOC1: DTOC1:

Parameter Rush restr.enabl PSx tI> PSx tI>> PSx tI>>> PSx
set 1 076 063 076 057 076 058 076 059

set 2 077 063 077 057 077 058 077 059
set 3 078 063 078 057 078 058 078 059
set 4 079 063 079 057 079 058 079 059 64Z8920A
Fig. 3-116: Phase current stages, starting signals.
The first stage of the DTOC protection function can optionally be blocked by the
inrush stabilization function of differential protection.
If the current exceeds the set thresholds in one phase, timer stages are started.
Once the time delays have elapsed, a trip signal is issued. The timer stages can
be blocked by appropriately configured binary signal inputs.
3-158 P632/EN M/R-a5-B // P632‑312‑660

3 Operation P632
3.24.3 Negative-Sequence Current Stages
DTOC1:
Gen.starting modePSx
[ * ]
1: With start. IN/Ineg
DTOC1:
Block. tIneg> EXT
[ 036 141 ]
DTOC1:
Rush restr.enabl PSx
[ * ]
1: Yes
DIFF:
Harm.block 1 trigg.
[ 041 118 ]
DIFF:
Harm.block 2 trigg.
[ 041 119 ]
DIFF:
Harm.block 3 trigg.
[ 041 120 ]
MAIN:
Protection active
306 001
DTOC1:
Enabled
[ 035 102 ]
DTOC1:
MAIN: Ineg> PSx
Dynam. param. active [ * ]
[ 040 090 ]
DTOC1: DTOC1:
MAIN: Ineg> dynamic PSx tIneg> PSx
Phase sequence [ * ]
[ 010 049 ] [ * ]
DTOC1:
Trip signal tIneg>
I̲A,y [ 036 151 ]
DTOC1:
I̲B,y I̲neg,y tIneg> elapsed
[ 036 148 ]
I̲C,y
DTOC1: DTOC1:
Block. tIneg>> EXT Starting Ineg>
[ 036 142 ] [ 036 145 ]
DTOC1:
Ineg>> PSx
[ * ]
DTOC1: DTOC1:
Ineg>> dynamic PSx tIneg>> PSx
[ * ] [ * ]
DTOC1:
Trip signal tIneg>>
[ 036 152 ]
DTOC1:
tIneg>> elapsed
[ 036 149 ]
DTOC1: DTOC1:
Block. tIneg>>> EXT Starting Ineg>>
[ 036 143 ] [ 036 146 ]
DTOC1:
Ineg>>> PSx
[ * ]
DTOC1:
tIneg>>> PSx
[ * ] [ * ] DTOC1:
Trip signal tIneg>>>
[ 036 153 ]
DTOC1:
tIneg>>> elapsed
[ 036 150]
DTOC1:
Starting Ineg>>>
[ 036 147 ]
DTOC1:
Starting Ineg
[ 036 144 ]
Parameter DTOC1: DTOC1: DTOC1: DTOC1: DTOC1:

Ineg> PSx Ineg> dynamic PSx Ineg>> PSx Ineg>> dynamic PSx Rush restr.enabl PSx
set 1 076 197 076 200 076 198 076 201 076 063
set 2 077 197 077 200 077 198 077 201 077 063
set 3 078 197 078 200 078 198 078 201 078 063
set 4 079 197 079 200 079 198 079 201 079 063
Parameter DTOC1: DTOC1: DTOC1: DTOC1: DTOC1: DTOC1:

Ineg>>> PSx Ineg>>> dynamic PSx tIneg> PSx tIneg>> PSx tIneg>>> PSx Gen.starting modePSx
set 1 076 199 076 202 076 203 076 204 076 205 076 066
set 2 077 199 077 202 077 203 077 204 077 205 077 066
set 3 078 199 078 202 078 203 078 204 078 205 078 066
set 4 079 199 079 202 079 203 079 204 079 205 079 066
64Z5074C
Fig. 3-117: Negative-sequence current stages
P632/EN M/R-a5-B // P632‑312‑660 3-159

P632 3 Operation
The P632 calculates the negative-sequence current from the three phase current
values according to this equation. This is based on the setting at MAIN: Phase
sequence.
Phase sequence A-B-C:
1
I̲neg =
3
⋅ | (I̲ A + a̲2I̲ B + a̲I̲C ) |
Phase sequence A-C-B:
1
I̲neg =
3
⋅ | (I̲ A + a̲I̲ B + a̲2I̲C ) |
j120°
a̲ = e
a̲2 = e j240°
The negative-sequence current is monitored by the P632 with three-stage

functions to detect when it exceeds the set thresholds. One of two different
threshold types can be active. The “dynamic” thresholds are active for the set
hold time for the “dynamic parameters” (see Section 3.13.6, (p. 3-91)) and the
“normal” thresholds are active when no hold time is running. If the current
exceeds the set thresholds in one phase, timer stages are started. Once the time
delays have elapsed, a trip signal is issued. The timer stages can be blocked by
appropriately configured binary signal inputs.
The first stage of the negative-sequence current protection function can
optionally be blocked by the inrush stabilization function of differential
protection.
3.24.4 Residual Current Stages

The residual current is monitored by the P632 with three-stage functions to
detect when it exceeds the set thresholds. One of two different threshold types
can be active. The “dynamic” thresholds are active for the set hold time for the
“dynamic parameters” (see Section 3.13.6, (p. 3-91)) and the “normal”
thresholds are active when no hold time is running.
If the residual current exceeds the set thresholds, timer stages are started. Once
the time delays have elapsed, a signal is issued. If the operating mode of the
general starting decision is set to With start. IN/Ineg, a trip signal is issued as
well.
There is also a separate setting for each residual current stage whether the
starting decision shall be based on the fundamental or on the r.m.s. value.
The timer stages can be blocked by appropriately configured binary signal
inputs. In addition these timer stages can also be automatically blocked by
single-pole or multipole starting (depending on the setting).
3-160 P632/EN M/R-a5-B // P632‑312‑660

3 Operation P632
DTOC1: DTOC1: DTOC1:

Parameter Block tim.st. IN PSx Gen.starting modePSx
Block tim.st. IN PSx
[ * ] set 1 076 067 076 066
set 2 077 067 077 066
0
set 3 078 067 078 066
1 set 4 079 067 079 066
0: Without
1: For single-ph. start & ≥1
2: For multi-ph. start.
DTOC1: =1
Starting A
&
[ 035 104 ]
DTOC1:
Starting B
[ 035 105 ]
DTOC1:
Starting C
[ 035 106 ] ≥2
DTOC1:
[ * ]
↗ 1: With start. IN/Ineg
DTOC1:
Block. tIN> EXT & DTOC1:
DTOC1: Trip signal tIN>
[ 035 123 ] ≥1 c tIN> PSx
DTOC1: [ 035 126 ]
DTOC1: Meas.value I/IN> PSx [ * ]
Enabled & [ * ]
[ 035 102 ] 0 t
DTOC1:
DTOC1: tIN> elapsed
MAIN: & c IN> PSx
Protection active [ 035 117 ]
[ * ]
MAIN:
Dynam. param. active DTOC1:
[ 040 090 ] & c IN> dynamic PSx
[ * ]
I̲N,y DTOC1:
Starting IN>
[ 035 111 ]
& DTOC1:
DTOC1: Trip signal tIN>>
≥1 c tIN>> PSx
DTOC1: [ 035 130 ]
[ * ]
Block. tIN>> EXT
[ 035 124 ] DTOC1:
Meas.val. I/IN>> PSx 0 t
DTOC1:
[ * ] tIN>> elapsed
[ 035 118 ]
DTOC1:
& c IN>> PSx
[ * ]
DTOC1:
& c IN>> dynamic PSx
[ * ]
DTOC1:
Starting IN>>
[ 035 112 ]
& DTOC1:
DTOC1: Trip signal tIN>>>
≥1 c tIN>>> PSx
[ 035 131 ]
DTOC1: [ * ]
Block. tIN>>> EXT
[ 035 125 ] 0 t
DTOC1: DTOC1:
Meas.val.I/IN>>> PSx tIN>>> elapsed
[ * ] [ 035 119 ]
DTOC1:
& c IN>>> PSx
[ * ] ≥1 DTOC1:
Starting N
DTOC1: [ 035 107 ]
& cIN>>> dynamic PSx
64Z8924B
[ * ]
DTOC1:
Starting IN>>>
[ 035 113 ]

Parameter IN>>> PSx IN>>> dynamic PSx tIN> PSx Meas.value I/IN> PSx IN> PSx IN> dynamic PSx
set 1 076 056 076 156 076 060 060 002 076 054 076 154
set 2 077 056 077 156 077 060 060 003 077 054 077 154
set 3 078 056 078 156 078 060 060 004 078 054 078 154
set 4 079 056 079 156 079 060 060 005 079 054 079 154

Parameter tIN>> PSx Meas.val. I/IN>> PSx IN>> PSx IN>> dynamic PSx tIN>>> PSx Meas.val.I/IN>>> PSx
set 1 076 061 060 006 076 055 076 155 076 062 060 010
set 2 077 061 060 007 077 055 077 155 077 062 060 011
set 3 078 061 060 008 078 055 078 155 078 062 060 012
set 4 079 061 060 009 079 055 079 155 079 062 060 013
Fig. 3-118: Residual current stages.
P632/EN M/R-a5-B // P632‑312‑660 3-161

P632 3 Operation
3.24.5 General Starting

If the current exceeds one of the set thresholds of the phase current stages, a
general starting decision is issued. The user can select whether the starting of
the negative-sequence and residual current stages should be taken into account
in the general starting decision. The general starting triggers a timer stage. A
signal is issued when the time delay of this stage has elapsed.
DTOC1:
[ * ]
0 DTOC1:
tGS PSx
1 [ * ]
0: W/o start. IN/Ineg
DTOC1:
1: With start. IN/Ineg tGS elapsed
[ 035 129 ]
DTOC1:
Starting Ineg>
[ 036 145 ] DTOC1:
DTOC1: General starting
Starting Ineg>>
[ 035 128 ]
[ 036 146 ]
DTOC1:
Starting Ineg>>>
[ 036 147 ]
DTOC1:
Starting N
[ 035 107 ]
DTOC1:
Starting I>
[ 035 108 ]
DTOC1:
Starting I>>
[ 035 109 ]
DTOC1:
Starting I>>>
[ 035 110 ]
Parameter DTOC1: DTOC1:

Gen.starting modePSx tGS PSx
set 1 076 066 076 065
set 2 077 066 077 065
set 3 078 066 078 065
set 4 079 066 079 065
64Z5025A
Fig. 3-119: General starting
3.24.6 Counters of the DTOC Protection Function

The number of general starts is counted. The counter can be reset individually.
DTOC1: DTOC1:
[ 035 128 ] [ 009 150 ]
MAIN: R
General reset USER
[ 003 002 ]
1: execute
Q6Z0134A
Fig. 3-120: Counters of the DTOC protection function
3-162 P632/EN M/R-a5-B // P632‑312‑660

3 Operation P632
3.25 Inverse-time Overcurrent Protection (Function Groups

IDMT1 and IDMT2)
The P632 features an inverse-time overcurrent protection function (IDMT
protection). The measured variables to be monitored by the respective IDMT
function are selected by a setting parameter.
Phase current values as well as negative-sequence and residual current
measured values are monitored.
The function group IDMT1 will serve as an example to illustrate the operation of
the IDMT protection functions. The same will apply to function group IDMT2.
IDMT1:
Select. meas. input
[ 019 106 ]
I̲A,a
I̲B,a
I̲C,a 0
I̲N,a
I̲A,b
I̲B,b
I̲C,b
I̲N,b 1
I̲A,y
I̲B,y
0,1 I̲C,y
I̲N,y
0: End a
1: End b
62Z5027A
Fig. 3-121: Selection of measured variables for IDMT protection
3.25.1 Enabling or Disabling IDMT Protection

IDMT protection can be enabled or disabled via setting parameters. Moreover,
enabling can be carried out separately for each parameter subset.
P632/EN M/R-a5-B // P632‑312‑660 3-163

P632 3 Operation
IDMT1:
General enable USER
[ 031 141 ]
0
IDMT1:
1 Enabled
[ 038 125 ]
0: No
1: Yes
IDMT1:
Enable PSx
[ * ]
0: No
1: Yes
Parameter IDMT1:
Enable PSx
set 1 081 050
set 2 082 050
set 3 083 050
set 4 084 050
Q6Z0128A
Fig. 3-122: Enabling or disabling IDMT protection
3-164 P632/EN M/R-a5-B // P632‑312‑660

3 Operation P632
3.25.2 Time-Dependent Characteristics

The measuring systems for phase currents, residual current and negative-
sequence current operate independently of each other and can be set
separately. The user can select from a large number of characteristics (see table
below). The measured variable is the maximum phase current, the negative-
sequence current, or the residual current, depending on the measuring system.
The tripping characteristics available for selection are shown in the following
figures (Fig. 3-123, (p. 3-166) to Fig. 3-126, (p. 3-168)).
No. Tripping Formula for the Constants Formula for the

Characteristic Tripping Reset
Characteristic Characteristic
Characteristic a b c R
settable factor:
k = 0.05 ... 10.00
0 Definite Time t =k
a
Per IEC 255–3 t =k · I b
(I ) -1
ref
1 Standard Inverse 0.14 0.02
2 Very Inverse 13.50 1.00
3 Extremely Inverse 80.00 2.00
4 Long Time Inverse 120.00 1.00
a k ·R
Per IEEE C37.112 t = k ·( I + c) tr = I 2
(I )b - 1 (I ) -1
ref ref
5 Moderately Inverse 0.0515 0.0200 0.1140 4.85
6 Very Inverse 19.6100 2.0000 0.4910 21.60
7 Extremely Inverse 28.2000 2.0000 0.1217 29.10
a k ·R
Per ANSI t = k ·( I + c) tr = I 2
b
(I ) -1 (I ) -1
ref ref
8 Normally Inverse 8.9341 2.0938 0.17966 9.00
9 Short Time Inverse 0.2663 1.2969 0.03393 0.50
10 Long Time Inverse 5.6143 1.0000 2.18592 15.75
1
11 RI-Type Inverse t =k · 0.236
0.339 - I
(I )
ref
I
12 RXIDG-Type Inverse t = k · (5.8 - 1.35 · ln I )
ref
Once a ratio I/Iref greater than 20 is reached, the tripping time is bounded on the
lower end.
P632/EN M/R-a5-B // P632‑312‑660 3-165

P632 3 Operation
IDMT Tripping Characteristics per IEC 255–3
Characteristic 1: IEC 255–3, Standard Inverse Characteristic 2: IEC 255–3, Very Inverse
1000 1000
100 100
k=10
10 10
k=10
t/s k=1
t/s
1 1
k=1
k=0.1
0.1 k=0.05 0.1
k=0.1
k=0.05
0.01 0.01
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21
I/Iref I/Iref
Characteristic 3: IEC 255–3, Extremely Inverse Characteristic 4: IEC 255–3, Long Time Inverse
1000 1000
100 100
k=10
10 10
k=1
t/s t/s
k=10
1 1
k=0.1
k=0.05
k=1
0.1 0.1
k=0.1
0.01 k=0.05 0.01
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21
I/Iref I/Iref
Fig. 3-123: Tripping characteristics as per IEC 255-3.
3-166 P632/EN M/R-a5-B // P632‑312‑660

3 Operation P632
IDMT Tripping Characteristics per IEEE C37.112
Characteristic 5: IEEE C37.112, Moderately Inverse Characteristic 6: IEEE C37.112, Very Inverse
1000 1000
100 100
10 k=10 10
k=10
t/s t/s
1 k=1 1
k=1
0.1 k=0.1 0.1

k=0.05 k=0.1
k=0.05
0.01 0.01
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21
I/Iref I/Iref
Characteristic 7: IEEE C37.112, Extremely Inverse
1000
100
10
t/s
k=10
1
k=1
0.1
k=0.1
0.01 k=0.05
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21
I/Iref
Fig. 3-124: Tripping characteristics as per IEEE C37.112.
P632/EN M/R-a5-B // P632‑312‑660 3-167

P632 3 Operation
IDMT Tripping Characteristics per ANSI
Characteristic 8: ANSI, Normally Inverse Characteristic 9: ANSI, Short Time Inverse
1000 1000
100 100
10 10
t/s t/s
k=10
1 1
k=10
k=1
0.1 0.1
k=1
k=0.1
0.01 k=0.05 0.01
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 k=0.1
k=0.05
I/Iref I/Iref
Characteristic 10: ANSI, Long Time Inverse
1000
100
k=10
10
t/s k=1
1
k=0.1
0.1 k=0.05
0.01
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21
I/Iref
Fig. 3-125: Tripping characteristics as per ANSI.
IDMT Tripping Characteristics, RI-Type Inverse and RXIDG-Type Inverse
Characteristic 11: RI-Type Inverse Characteristic 12: RXIDG-Type Inverse

1000 1000
100 100
k=10
k=10
10 10
t/s k=1 t/s

k=1
1 1
k=0.1
k=0.05 k=0.1
0.1 0.1 k=0.05
0.01 0.01
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21
I/Iref I/Iref
Fig. 3-126: RI-type inverse and RXIDG‑type inverse tripping characteristics.
3-168 P632/EN M/R-a5-B // P632‑312‑660

3 Operation P632
3.25.3 Phase Current Stage
DIFF:
Harm.block 1 trigg.
[ 041 118 ]
DIFF: IDMT1:
Harm.block 2 trigg. Rush restr.enabl PSx
[ 041 119 ] [ * ]
DIFF:
Harm.block 3 trigg.
[ 041 120 ] 0
1
0: No
1: Yes
IDMT1:
Enabled
[ 038 125 ]
MAIN: IDMT1:
Protection active Iref,P PSx
306 001
[ * ]
MAIN:
Dynam. param. active IDMT1:
[ 040 090 ] Iref,P dynamic PSx
[ * ]
1.05 Iref IDMT1:

Starting Iref,A>
[ 038 117 ]
IDMT1:
Starting Iref,B>
[ 038 118 ]
IDMT1:
Meas.value I/IN PSx IDMT1:
Starting Iref,C>
[ * ]
[ 038 119 ]
IDMT1:
Starting Iref,P>
I̲A,y
[ 038 110 ]
I̲B,y
I̲C,y
Setting
IDMT1:
Characteristic P PSx IDMT1:
Characteristic P PSx
[ * ]
IDMT1: 0: Definite Time

Factor kt,P PSx
1: IEC Standard Inverse
[ * ]
2: IEC Very Inverse
IDMT1:
Min. trip t. P PSx 3: IEC Extr. Inverse
[ * ]
Setting 4: IEC Long Time Inv.
IDMT1: IDMT1:
Release P PSx Hold time P PSx 5: IEEE Moderately Inv.
[ * ] 6: IEEE Very Inverse
1: Without delay IDMT1: 7: IEEE Extremely Inv.
Release P PSx
2: Delayed as per char.
[ * ] 8: ANSI Normally Inv.
9: ANSI Short Time Inv.

IDMT1:
Block. tIref,P> EXT 10: ANSI Long Time Inv.
[ 038 114 ]
11: RI-Type Inverse
12: RXIDG-Type Inverse

IDMT1:
tIref,P> elapsed
[ 038 111 ]
I̲P,max/Iref,P IDMT1:
Hold time P running
[ 038 112 ]
IDMT1:
Memory P clear
[ 038 113 ]
Parameter IDMT1: IDMT1: IDMT1: IDMT1: IDMT1:

Rush restr.enabl PSx Iref,P PSx Iref,P dynamic PSx Characteristic P PSx Meas.value I/IN PSx
set 1 081 060 081 051 081 052 081 053 013 192
set 2 082 060 082 051 082 052 082 053 013 193
set 3 083 060 083 051 083 052 083 053 013 194
set 4 084 060 084 051 084 052 084 053 013 195
Parameter IDMT1: IDMT1: IDMT1: IDMT1:

Factor kt,P PSx Min. trip t. P PSx Hold time P PSx Release P PSx
set 1 081 054 081 057 081 055 081 056
set 2 082 054 082 057 082 055 082 056
set 3 083 054 083 057 083 055 083 056
set 4 084 054 084 057 084 055 084 056 64Z8975A
Fig. 3-127: Phase current stage.
The three phase currents are monitored by the P632 to detect when they exceed
the set thresholds. Alternatively, two different thresholds can be active. The
“dynamic” threshold is active for the set hold time of the “dynamic parameters”
(see Section 3.13.6, (p. 3-91)); the “normal” threshold is active when no hold
time is running.
P632/EN M/R-a5-B // P632‑312‑660 3-169

P632 3 Operation
It is also possible to select whether the starting decision shall be based on the
fundamental or on the r.m.s. value.
The IDMT protection function will be triggered when the 1.05-fold of the set
reference current value is exceeded in one phase. The P632 will then determine
the maximum current flowing in the three phases and this value is used for
further processing.
Depending on the characteristic selected and the current magnitude, the P632
will determine the tripping time. Furthermore, a minimum tripping time can be
set; the tripping time will not fall below this minimum independently of the
magnitude of the current.
The IDMT protection function can optionally be blocked by the inrush stabilization
function of differential protection.
3.25.4 Negative-Sequence Current Stage

The P632 calculates the negative-sequence current from the three phase current
values according to this equation. This is based on the setting at MAIN: Phase
seque n ce.
Phase sequence A-B-C:
1
I̲neg =
3
⋅ | (I̲ A + a̲2I̲ B + a̲I̲C ) |
Phase sequence A-C-B:
1
I̲neg =
3
⋅ | (I̲ A + a̲I̲ B + a̲2I̲C ) |
j120°
a̲ = e
a̲2 = e j240°
The negative-sequence current is monitored by the P632 to detect when it

exceeds the set thresholds. Alternatively, two different thresholds can be active.
The “dynamic” thresholds are active for the set hold time for the “dynamic
parameters” (see Section 3.13.6, (p. 3-91)) and the “normal” thresholds are
active when no hold time is running. The IDMT protection will trigger when the
1.05-fold of the set reference current value is exceeded. Dependent on the
characteristic selected and the negative-sequence current magnitude the P632
will determine the tripping time. Furthermore, a minimum tripping time can be
set; the tripping time will not fall below this minimum independent of the
magnitude of the current.
The negative-sequence current stage of the IDMT protection function can
optionally be blocked by the inrush stabilization function of differential
protection.
3-170 P632/EN M/R-a5-B // P632‑312‑660

3 Operation P632
DIFF:
Harm.block 1 trigg.
[ 041 118 ]
DIFF: IDMT1:
Harm.block 2 trigg. Rush restr.enabl PSx
[ 041 119 ] [ * ]
DIFF:
Harm.block 3 trigg.
[ 041 120 ] 0
0: No
1: Yes
IDMT1:
Enabled
[ 038 125 ]
MAIN:
Protection active IDMT1:
306 001 Iref,neg PSx
MAIN: [ * ]
Dynam. param. active
[ 040 090 ]
IDMT1:
Iref,neg dynamic PSx
[ * ]
1.05 Iref
IDMT1:
Starting Iref,neg>
[ 038 173 ]
MAIN:
Phase sequence
[ 010 049 ]
I̲A,y
I̲B,y I̲neg IDMT1: Setting
Character. neg. PSx IDMT1:
I̲C,y Character. neg. PSx
[ * ]
IDMT1: 1: IEC Standard Inverse

Factor kt,neg PSx
[ * ] 2: IEC Very Inverse
IDMT1: 3: IEC Extr. Inverse

Min. trip t. neg PSx
Setting [ * ] 4: IEC Long Time Inv.
IDMT1:
Release neg PSx
IDMT1: 5: IEEE Moderately Inv.
Hold time neg PSx
1: Without delay [ * ] 6: IEEE Very Inverse
2: Delayed as per char. 7: IEEE Extremely Inv.

IDMT1:
Release neg PSx
IDMT1:
Block.tIref,neg> EXT 9: ANSI Short Time Inv.
[ 038 178 ]
10: ANSI Long Time Inv.
11: RI-Type Inverse

IDMT1:
tIref,neg> elapsed
[ 038 174 ]
I̲neg/Iref,neg IDMT1:
Hold time neg runn.
[ 038 175 ]
IDMT1:
Memory 'neg' clear
IDMT1: [ 038 176 ]
[ * ] IDMT1:
1: With start. IN/Ineg Trip sig. tIref,neg>
[ 038 177 ]
Parameter IDMT1: IDMT1: IDMT1: IDMT1:

Rush restr.enabl PSx Iref,neg PSx Iref,neg dynamic PSx Character. neg. PSx
set 1 081 060 081 111 081 112 081 113
set 2 082 060 082 111 082 112 082 113
set 3 083 060 083 111 083 112 083 113
set 4 084 060 084 111 084 112 084 113

Factor kt,neg PSx Min. trip t. neg PSx Hold time neg PSx Release neg PSx Gen.starting modePSx
set 1 081 114 081 117 081 115 081 116 081 059
set 2 082 114 082 117 082 115 082 116 082 059
set 3 083 114 083 117 083 115 083 116 083 059
set 4 084 114 084 117 084 115 084 116 084 059
64Z5076C
Fig. 3-128: Negative-sequence current stage
P632/EN M/R-a5-B // P632‑312‑660 3-171

P632 3 Operation
3.25.5 Residual Current Stage
IDMT1:
Starting Iref,A>
[ 038 117 ]
IDMT1:
Starting Iref,B>
[ 038 118 ]
IDMT1:
Starting Iref,C>
[ 038 119 ]
IDMT1:
Block tim.st. IN PSx
[ * ]
2
0: Without
1: For single-ph. start
2: For multi-ph. start.
IDMT1:
Enabled
[ 038 125 ]
MAIN:
Protection active
IDMT1:
306 001 Iref,N PSx
MAIN: [ * ]
Dynam. param. active
[ 040 090 ] IDMT1:
Iref,N dynamic PSx
[ * ]
1.05 Iref
|I̲N|/Iref,G
IDMT1:
Starting Iref,N>
[ 038 120 ]
IDMT1:
Meas.value I/IN PSx
[ * ] Setting
IDMT1: IDMT1:
Characteristic N PSx Characteristic N PSx
I̲N,y [ * ]
IDMT1: 0: Definite Time

Factor kt,N PSx
1: IEC Standard Inverse
[ * ]
2: IEC Very Inverse
IDMT1:
Min. trip t. N PSx 3: IEC Extr. Inverse
[ * ]
4: IEC Long Time Inv.
Setting
IDMT1: IDMT1: 5: IEEE Moderately Inv.
Release N PSx Hold time N PSx
[ * ] 6: IEEE Very Inverse
1: Without delay IDMT1: 7: IEEE Extremely Inv.

Release N PSx
2: Delayed as per char.
9: ANSI Short Time Inv.
10: ANSI Long Time Inv.

IDMT1:
Block. tIref,N> EXT 11: RI-Type Inverse
[ 038 124 ]
IDMT1:
tIref,N> elapsed
[ 038 121 ]
IDMT1:
Hold time N running
[ 038 122 ]
IDMT1:
IDMT1: Memory N clear
[ 038 123 ]
[ * ] IDMT1:
1: With start. IN/Ineg Trip signal tIref,N>
[ 038 126 ]

Block tim.st. IN PSx Iref,N PSx Iref,N dynamic PSx Characteristic N PSx Meas.value I/IN PSx
set 1 081 068 081 061 081 062 081 063 013 192
set 2 082 068 082 061 082 062 082 063 013 193
set 3 083 068 083 061 083 062 083 063 013 194
set 4 084 068 084 061 084 062 084 063 013 195

Factor kt,N PSx Min. trip t. N PSx Hold time N PSx Release N PSx Gen.starting modePSx
set 1 081 064 081 067 081 065 081 066 081 059
set 2 082 064 082 067 082 065 082 066 082 059
set 3 083 064 083 067 083 065 083 066 083 059
set 4 084 064 084 067 084 065 084 066 084 059 64Z8977A
Fig. 3-129: Residual current stage.
The residual current is monitored by the P632 to detect when it exceeds the set
thresholds. Alternatively, two different thresholds can be active. The “dynamic”
3-172 P632/EN M/R-a5-B // P632‑312‑660

3 Operation P632
threshold is active for the set hold time for the “dynamic parameters” (see
Section 3.13.6, (p. 3-91)) and the “normal” threshold is active when no hold time
is running.
It is also possible to select whether the starting decision shall be based on the
fundamental or on the r.m.s. value.
The IDMT protection will trigger when the 1.05-fold of the set reference current
value is exceeded by the residual current. Dependent on the characteristic
selected and the residual current magnitude the P632 will determine the tripping
time. Moreover the tripping time will under no circumstances fall below a
settable minimum time threshold irrespective of the residual current flow
magnitude.
The inverse-time stage can be blocked by an appropriately configured binary
signal input. In addition the inverse-time stage can also be automatically blocked
by singlepole or multi-pole starting (depending on the setting).
3.25.6 Hold Time

The setting of the hold time defines the time period during which the IDMT
protection starting time is stored after the starting has dropped out. Should
starting recur during the hold time period then the time of the renewed starting
will be added to the time period stored. When the starting times sum reach the
tripping time value determined by the P632 then the corresponding signal will be
issued. Should starting not recur during the hold time period then, depending on
the setting, the memory storing the accumulated starting times value will either
be cleared without delay or according to the characteristic set. In Fig. 3-130,
(p. 3-174), the effect of the hold time is shown by the example of a phase
current stage.
P632/EN M/R-a5-B // P632‑312‑660 3-173

P632 3 Operation
Case A
IDMT1:
Starting Iref,P>
[ 038 110 ] 200 ms 200 ms
IDMT1:
Hold time P running
[ 038 112 ]
Determ. trip time
600 ms
400 ms
Per characteristic
200 ms
Non-delayed
IDMT1:
tIref,P> elapsed
[ 038 111 ]
Case B
IDMT1:
Starting Iref,P>
[ 038 110 ] 200 ms 450 ms
IDMT1:
Hold time P running
[ 038 112 ]
Determ. trip time
600 ms
Non-delayed
400 ms
Per characteristic
200 ms
IDMT1:
tIref,P> elapsed
[ 038 111 ]
Parameter IDMT1:
Hold time P PSx
set 1 081 055
set 2 082 055
set 3 083 055
set 4 084 055
Q6Z0131A
Fig. 3-130: The effect of the hold time illustrated for the phase current stage as an example
Case A: The determined tripping time is not reached.

Case B: The determined tripping time is reached.
3.25.7 General Starting

A general starting is triggered if the current in one phase exceeds the 1.05-fold
of the set reference current value. It can be selected whether the starting of the
negativesequence and residual current stages should be taken into account in
the general starting decision. The general starting triggers a timer stage. A signal
is issued when the time period of this stage has elapsed.
3-174 P632/EN M/R-a5-B // P632‑312‑660

3 Operation P632
IDMT1:
[ * ]
0
IDMT1:
1 tGS PSx
[ * ]
0: W/o start. IN/Ineg
1: With start. IN/Ineg IDMT1:

tGS elapsed
[ 038 116 ]
IDMT1:
Starting Iref,neg>
[ 038 173 ] IDMT1:
General starting
IDMT1: [ 038 115 ]
Starting Iref,N>
[ 038 120 ]
IDMT1:
Starting Iref,P>
[ 038 110 ]
Parameter IDMT1: IDMT1:

Gen.starting modePSx tGS PSx
set 1 081 059 081 058
set 2 082 059 082 058
set 3 083 059 083 058
set 4 084 059 084 058
64Z5032A
Fig. 3-131: General starting
3.25.8 Counters of the IDMT Protection Function

The number of general starts is counted. The counter can be reset individually.
IDMT1: IDMT1:
[ 038 115 ] [ 009 151 ]
MAIN: R
General reset USER
[ 003 002 ]
1: execute
Q6Z0133A
Fig. 3-132: Counters of the IDMT protection function
P632/EN M/R-a5-B // P632‑312‑660 3-175

P632 3 Operation
3.26 Thermal Overload Protection (Function Group THRM1)

The thermal overload protection function has been designed for overload
protection of transformers. The measured values to be monitored are selected
using a setting parameter.
THRM1:
Select. meas. input
I̲A,a COMP [ 019 109 ]
I̲B,a
I̲C,a
0
I̲P,max,a
I̲A,b COMP
I̲B,b
I̲C,b
1
I̲P,max,b
0,1 I̲P,max,y
0: End a
1: End b
62Z5079A
Fig. 3-133: Selection of measured values for thermal overload protection
3.26.1 Enabling or Disabling Thermal Overload Protection

Thermal overload protection may be enabled or disabled using setting
parameters. Moreover, enabling can be carried out separately for each
parameter subset.
THRM1:
General enable USER
[ 031 144 ]
0
THRM1:
1 Enabled
0: No [ 039 129 ]
1: Yes
THRM1:
Enable PSx
[ * ]
0: No
1: Yes
Parameter THRM1:
Enable PSx
set 1 081 070
set 2 082 070
set 3 083 070
set 4 084 070
64Z5017A
Fig. 3-134: Enabling or disabling thermal overload protection
3-176 P632/EN M/R-a5-B // P632‑312‑660

3 Operation P632
3.26.2 Readiness of Thermal Overload Protection

Thermal overload protection will issue the TH RM1: Not r eady signal if one of
the following conditions applies:
● Thermal overload protection is disabled.
● Thermal overload protection is blocked because of a fault in the coolant
temperature (ambient) acquisition.
● Thermal overload protection is blocked because of an incorrect setting.
● The thermal replica is blocked via an appropriately configured binary signal
input.
THRM1: THRM1:
Enabled Not ready
[ 039 129 ] [ 039 154 ]
THRM1:
Replica block EXT
[ 039 150 ]
THRM1:
Setting error,block.
[ 039 126 ]
THRM1:
Block. by CTA error
305 221
64Z5190A
Fig. 3-135: T H R M 1 : N o t r e a d y
3.26.3 Selection of Current
COMP
THRM1: THRM1:
Select current PSx Parameter Select current PSx
I̲max [ * ]
set 1 013 184
THRM1:
Select. meas. input set 2 013 185
∑
0 [ 019 109 ] set 3 013 186
I̲A,a +
set 4 013 187
1
I̲B,a +
+ 2
I̲C,a
I̲N,a
COMP 0...2 0
I̲max
∑
0
I̲A,b +
1
I̲B,b +
+ 2
I̲C,b
I̲N,b
0...2 1
0: Max. phase current

1: IN calculated
2: IN measured
0...1 AR_MV THRM1:
I
62Z8945A
Fig. 3-136: Selection of measured values for thermal overload protection.
The measured values to be monitored by the respective thermal overload

protection functions are selected using several independent setting parameters:
THRM1: Sele ct. me as. i npu t selects a particular transformer end.
Then the setting THRM1 : Se l ect curre nt P Sx specifies whether the maximum
RMS phase current (of the selected transformer end) shall be used, or the
P632/EN M/R-a5-B // P632‑312‑660 3-177

P632 3 Operation
residual current calculated from the three phase currents (of the selected
transformer end), or the residual current directly measured at the respective
current transformer.
3.26.4 Tripping Characteristics

The selected current (THRM1: I, see Section 3.26.3, (p. 3-177)) of the selected
transformer end is used to track a first-order thermal replica according to
IEC 255-8. The following parameters will govern the tripping parameters:
● The set thermal time constant (τ) of the protected object
THRM1: Tim.cons t.1,>Ibl PSx
● The tripping threshold Δϑtrip set at TH RM1: Rel. O/T trip PSx
● The accumulated thermal load Δϑ0
● The updated measured coolant temperature Θc for the protected object
● The maximum permissible coolant temperature Θc,max set at
THRM1: Max .per m. cool.tmpP Sx
● The maximum permissible object temperature Θmax set at
THRM1: Max .pe r m.obj. tmp.P Sx
● If the value of the selected current (THRM1: I) is greater than 10·Iref then
only the fixed maximum value 10·Iref is used for calculating the tripping
time.
The object temperature is calculated from the selected current (THRM1: I) and
can be displayed at THRM 1: Obje ct te mpe rat.,TH1. The coolant temperature
is either measured via the PT 100 input or via a 20 mA input, or a default
temperature value is used instead. This choice is governed by the setting at
THRM 1: S el ect C TA P Sx. The coolant temperature is displayed at
THRM 1: C oolan t te mp. TH1. The difference between the settings for the
maximum permissible temperatures of the protected object and the coolant can
be displayed at THRM1: O/T f .I ref pe rsi st 1.
The tripping characteristics are then defined by the equation:
( ) I 2
− Δϑ0
I ref
t = τ ⋅ ln
( )
I
I ref
2
− Δϑtrip ⋅ 1 −( Θc − Θc,max
Θmax − Θc,max )
The setting for the operating mode selects an “absolute” or “relative” replica. If
the setting is for “Absolute replica”, the P632 will operate with a fixed trip
threshold Δtrip of 100 %.
3-178 P632/EN M/R-a5-B // P632‑312‑660

3 Operation P632
Θ/%
10000
1000
τ / min
100
200
10 110 1000
50
t / min
1
200
110
30
50
0.1
200
110
0.01
50 1
0.001
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11
I / I ref
D5Z50BEB_EN
Fig. 3-137: Tripping characteristic of the thermal overload protection.
Tripping characteristics apply to Δϑ0 = 0 % and identical settings for the

maximum permissible coolant and the updated measurement of the object
temperature.
3.26.5 Coolant Temperature Acquisition

To permit acquisition of the coolant temperature, an analogue I/O module Y must
be fitted to the P632. If this module is not present then the setting at
THRM1: Default C TA P Sx is used in the calculation of the tripping time.
pThe setting at THRM1: Bl. f. CTA fau lt PSx defines whether the thermal
overload protection function will be blocked in the event of a fault in the coolant
temperature acquisition.
P632/EN M/R-a5-B // P632‑312‑660 3-179

P632 3 Operation
THRM1:
Select CTA PSx
[ * ]
1 THRM1:
With CTA
2 305 222
0: Default temp. value
1: From PT100
2: From 20 mA input
THRM1:
CTA error
MEASI: [ 039 127 ]
PT100 faulty
SFMON:
[ 040 190 ] CTA error THRM1
MEASI:
Overload 20mA input [ 098 036 ]
[ 040 191 ]
MEASI:
[ 040 192 ]
THRM1:
CTA error EXT
[ 039 152 ]
THRM1:
Bl. f. CTA fault PSx
[ * ]
0 THRM1:
Block. by CTA error
1 305 221
0: No
1: Yes
Parameter THRM1: THRM1:

Select CTA PSx Bl. f. CTA fault PSx
set 1 081 072 081 073
set 2 082 072 082 073
set 3 083 072 083 073
set 4 084 072 084 073
64Z5019A
Fig. 3-138: Monitoring the coolant temperature acquisition (ambient temperature input)
3-180 P632/EN M/R-a5-B // P632‑312‑660

3 Operation P632
3.26.6 Warning Signal
THRM1:
I
305 220
MAIN:
Protection active
306 001
THRM1:
Enabled
[ 039 129 ] THRM1:
Starting k*Iref>
THRM1:
Replica block EXT [ 039 151 ]
[ 039 150 ]
THRM1:
Block. by CTA error
305 221
THRM1: < 0.1⋅Iref THRM1:
Iref PSx Tim.const.1,>Ibl PSx
[ * ] [ * ]
THRM1: THRM1:
Start.fact.OL_RC PSx Tim.const.2,<Ibl PSx
[ * ] [ * ]
THRM1:
Max.perm.obj.tmp.PSx
kP⋅Iref [ * ]
THRM1:
THRM1: Max.perm.cool.tmpPSx
With CTA
[ * ]
305 222
THRM1:
Default CTA PSx
THRM1: [ * ]
Operating mode
[ 039 121 ] THRM1:
Rel. O/T warning PSx
[ * ]
1
THRM1:
Rel. O/T trip PSx
2
[ * ]
1: Absolute replica THRM1:
THRM1: Within pre-trip time
Hysteresis trip PSx
2: Relative replica [ 039 153 ]
[ * ] SFMON:
Setting error THRM1
THRM1: [ 098 038 ]
Warning pre-trip PSx
THRM1:
[ * ] Setting error,block.
[ 039 126 ]
THRM1:
Warning
[ 039 124 ]
I/Iref THRM1:
Trip signal
[ 039 123 ]
MAIN:
Gen. trip command 1
[ 036 071 ]
THRM1:
Status replica, TH1
[ 004 150 ]
THRM1:
Coolant temperature Object temperat.,TH1
[ 004 151 ]
THRM1:
THRM1: Coolant temp. TH1
Reset replica
[ 004 154 ]
[ 039 125 ] THRM1:
Pre-trip t. left,TH1
[ 004 153 ]
THRM1:
Temp. offset repl. 1
[ 004 170 ]
THRM1:
Stat. repl., p.u.TH1
[ 004 204 ]
THRM1:
Object temp. p.u. 1
[ 004 205 ]
THRM1:
Coolant temp. p.u. 1
Parameter THRM1: THRM1: THRM1: THRM1: THRM1: [ 004 206 ]
Iref PSx Start.fact.OL_RC PSx Tim.const.1,>Ibl PSx Tim.const.2,<Ibl PSx Max.perm.obj.tmp.PSx
set 1 081 074 081 075 081 082 081 083 081 077
set 2 082 074 082 075 082 082 082 083 082 077
set 3 083 074 083 075 083 082 083 083 083 077
set 4 084 074 084 075 084 082 084 083 084 077
Parameter THRM1: THRM1: THRM1: THRM1: THRM1: THRM1:

Max.perm.cool.tmpPSx Default CTA PSx Rel. O/T warning PSx Rel. O/T trip PSx Hysteresis trip PSx Warning pre-trip PSx
set 1 081 080 081 081 081 079 081 076 081 078 081 085
set 2 082 080 082 081 082 079 082 076 082 078 082 085
set 3 083 080 083 081 083 079 083 076 083 078 083 085
set 4 084 080 084 081 084 079 084 076 084 078 084 085
64Z8918A
Fig. 3-139: Thermal overload protection.
A warning signal is issued when the thermal load reaches the warning level set at
THRM1 : Rel. O/T war ni ng P Sx. Moreover, a time-to-tripping threshold (pre-
trip time) can be set. When the time left until tripping falls below the setting at
THRM1 : Warning pre -trip P Sx, a warning signal will be issued.
P632/EN M/R-a5-B // P632‑312‑660 3-181

P632 3 Operation
If the current falls below the default threshold of 0.1 Iref, the buffer is discharged
with the time constant set at THR M1 : Tim. const.2,<Ibl PSx.
The thermal replica may be reset from the local control panel or via an
appropriately configured binary signal input. Resetting is possible even when
thermal overload protection is disabled. Thermal overload protection can be
blocked via an appropriately configured binary signal input.
THRM1:
Reset replica USER
[ * ]
1 THRM1:
Reset replica
0: don't execute [ 039 125 ]
1: execute
THRM1:
Enabled
[ 039 129 ]
THRM1:
Reset replica EXT
[ 039 122 ]
64Z5020A
Fig. 3-140: Resetting the thermal replica.
3-182 P632/EN M/R-a5-B // P632‑312‑660

3 Operation P632
3.27 Time-Voltage Protection (Function Group V<>)

The two-stage time-voltage protection function provided by the P632 evaluates
the fundamental wave of the phase voltages.
3.27.1 Disabling and Enabling V<> Protection

V<> protection can be disabled or enabled using setting parameters. Moreover,
enabling can be carried out separately for each parameter subset.
3.27.2 V<> Protection Readiness

V<> protection is ready if it is enabled and no fault has been detected in the
voltage-measuring circuit by the measuring-circuit monitoring function.
V<>:
General enable USER
[ 023 030 ]
0: No
1: Yes
V<>:
Enable PSx
[ * ]
V<>:
Enabled
0 [ 040 066 ]
0: No
V<>:
1: Yes Ready
[ 042 003 ]
MAIN:
M.c.b. trip V EXT V<>:
[ 004 061 ] Not ready
[ 042 004 ]
Parameter V<>:
Enable PSx
set 1 076 000
set 2 077 000
set 3 078 000
set 4 079 000
S9Z5006A
Fig. 3-141: Enabling, disabling and readiness of V<> protection.
3.27.3 Voltage Monitoring

The P632 checks the voltage to determine whether it exceeds or falls below a set
threshold. The triggers are followed by timer stages that can be blocked via
appropriately configured binary signal inputs.
If undervoltage monitoring decisions are to be included in the trip commands,
then it is recommended that transient signals be used. Otherwise the trip
command would always be present when the system voltage was disconnected,
and it would therefore not be possible to close the circuit breaker again.
Furthermore, time-voltage protection provides a time-window for each timer
stage. The windows are defined by the setting V <>: V min> PSx as lower
threshold for both timer stages and by the set operate value V< or V<< of the
relevant timer stage and parameter subset as upper threshold. With an
appropriate setting of the successive timer stages, this provision can be used to
bridge short periods of voltage failure as encountered in switching operations.
P632/EN M/R-a5-B // P632‑312‑660 3-183

P632 3 Operation
V<>:
Blocking tV> EXT
[ 041 068 ]
V<>:
Ready c
[ 042 003 ]
MAIN: V<>: V<>:
Protection active Hyst. V<> meas. PSx tV> PSx
306 001 [ * ] [ * ]
V<>:
V> PSx c
[ * ]
V̲ t 0
V<>:
tV> elapsed
[ 041 034 ]
V<>:
Starting V>
[ 041 030 ]
V<>:
Hyst. V<> meas. PSx
[ * ]
V<>:
Blocking tV>> EXT
[ 041 069 ]
V<>:
tV>> PSx
[ * ]
V<>:
V>> PSx c
[ * ]
t 0
V<>:
tV>> elapsed
[ 041 035 ]
V<>:
Starting V>>
[ 041 096 ]
Parameter V<>: V<>: V<>: V<>: V<>:

V> PSx tV> PSx V>> PSx tV>> PSx Hyst. V<> meas. PSx
set 1 076 003 076 005 076 004 076 006 076 048
set 2 077 003 077 005 077 004 077 006 077 048
set 3 078 003 078 005 078 004 078 006 078 048
set 4 079 003 079 005 079 004 079 006 079 048
S9Z5007A
Fig. 3-142: Overvoltage monitoring
3-184 P632/EN M/R-a5-B // P632‑312‑660

3 Operation P632
V<>:
Blocking tV< EXT
[ 041 070 ]
V<>: c
Ready
[ 042 003 ]
MAIN:
Protection active
306 001
c
V<>:
Hyst. V<> meas. PSx V<>: V<>:
[ * ] V< PSx tV< PSx
[ * ] [ * ]
t 0
V̲ V<>:
tV< elapsed
[ 041 041 ]
V<>:
t 0 tV< elapsed & Vmin>
[ 041 026 ]
Setting(s) blocked
V<>:
Starting V<
V<>: [ 041 037 ]
Blocking tV<< EXT
[ 041 071 ] c V<>:
Fault V<
[ 041 110 ]
c
V<>:
tV<< PSx
[ * ]
V<>: t 0
V<< PSx V<>:
[ * ] tV<< elapsed & Vmin>
[ 041 066 ]
t 0
V<>:
tV<< elapsed
[ 041 042 ]
Setting(s) blocked
c V<>:
Starting V<<
[ 041 099 ]
V<>: V<>:
Vmin> PSx Fault V<<
[ * ] [ 041 112 ]
V<>:
tTransient PSx
[ * ]
V<>:
tV< elaps. transient
1 t [ 042 023 ]
V<>:
tV<< elapsed trans.
1 t [ 042 025 ]
V<>:
tV</<< elaps. trans.
[ 042 007 ]
Parameter V<>: V<>: V<>:

V< PSx tV< PSx Vmin> PSx
set 1 076 007 076 009 076 046
set 2 077 007 077 009 077 046
set 3 078 007 078 009 078 046
set 4 079 007 079 009 079 046
Parameter V<>: V<>: V<>: V<>:

V<< PSx tV<< PSx tTransient PSx Hyst. V<> meas. PSx
set 1 076 008 076 010 076 029 076 048
set 2 077 008 077 010 077 029 077 048
set 3 078 008 078 010 078 029 078 048
set 4 079 008 079 010 079 029 079 048
64Z8008A
Fig. 3-143: Undervoltage monitoring
P632/EN M/R-a5-B // P632‑312‑660 3-185

P632 3 Operation
3.28 Over-/Underfrequency Protection (Function Group f<>)

The P632 monitors the voltage to determine whether its frequency exceeds or
falls below set thresholds. The frequency is determined from the difference in
time between the zero crossings of the voltage (voltage zeroes). The over-/
underfrequency protection function has four stages. Subsequently, the operation
of over-/underfrequency protection will be explained using the first stage as an
example.
3.28.1 Disabling or Enabling Over‑/Underfrequency Protection
f<>:
General enable USER
[ 023 031 ]
1 f<>:
& Enabled
[ 042 100 ]
0: No
1: Yes
f<>:
Enable PSx
[ * ]
f<>:
1 Not ready
0
[ 042 140 ]
1
f<>:
0: No & Ready
1: Yes [ 042 101 ]
f<>:
Blocked by V<
[ 042 102 ]
f<>:
Parameter Enable PSx
set 1 018 196

set 2 018 197
set 3 018 198
set 4 018 199 12Z8804A
Fig. 3-144: Enabling, disabling and readiness of f<> protection.
The frequency protection can be disabled or enabled using setting parameters.

Moreover, enabling can be carried out separately for each parameter subset.
3-186 P632/EN M/R-a5-B // P632‑312‑660

3 Operation P632
3.28.2 Undervoltage Blocking and Evaluation Time

Over-/underfrequency protection requires a measuring voltage of sufficient
magnitude. Over-/underfrequency protection will be blocked instantaneously if
the measuring voltage falls below the set threshold of the undervoltage stage.
In order to avoid frequency stage starting caused by brief frequency fluctuations
or interference, the evaluation time can be set by the user. The operate
conditions must be satisfied for at least the duration of the set evaluation time in
order for a signal to be issued.
f<>:
Undervolt. block. V<
[ 018 200 ]
f<>:
f<>: Blocked by V<
V̲Meas [ 042 102 ]
305 725
f<>:
Evaluation time
[ 018 201 ]
f<>:
No. periods reached
305 701
f<>:
fMeas
305 726
47Z0151A
Fig. 3-145: Undervoltage blocking and evaluation time setting.
3.28.3 Operating Modes of Over-/Underfrequency Protection

For each stage of the over-/underfrequency protection function, the user can
choose between the following operating modes:
● Frequency monitoring
● Frequency monitoring combined with differential frequency gradient
monitoring (df/dt)
● Frequency monitoring combined with mean frequency gradient monitoring
(Δf/Δt)
3.28.4 Frequency Monitoring

Depending on the setting, the P632 monitors the frequency to determine
whether it exceeds or falls below set thresholds. If an operate threshold in excess
of the set nominal frequency is set, the P632 checks to determine whether the
frequency exceeds the operate threshold. If an operate threshold below the set
nominal frequency is set, the P632 checks to determine whether the frequency
falls below the operate threshold. If it exceeds or falls below the set threshold, a
set timer stage is started. The timer stage can be blocked by way of an
appropriately configured binary signal input.
3.28.5 Frequency Monitoring Combined with Differential Frequency

Gradient Monitoring (df/dt)
In this operating mode of the over-/ underfrequency protection function, the
frequency is also checked to determine whether the set frequency gradient is
P632/EN M/R-a5-B // P632‑312‑660 3-187

P632 3 Operation
reached (in addition to being monitored for exceeding or falling below the set
threshold). Monitoring for overfrequency is combined with monitoring for a
frequency increase; monitoring for underfrequency is combined with monitoring
for a frequency decrease. If both operate conditions are satisfied, a set timer
stage is started. The timer stage can be blocked by way of an appropriately
3.28.6 Frequency Monitoring Combined with Mean Frequency Gradient

Monitoring (Δf/Δt)
The frequency gradient can differ for system disturbances in individual
substations and may vary over time due to power swings. Therefore it makes
sense to take the mean value of the frequency gradient into account for load-
shedding systems.
In this operating mode of over-/underfrequency protection, frequency monitoring
must be set for “underfrequency monitoring”.
Monitoring the mean value of the frequency gradient is started with the starting
of frequency monitoring. If the frequency decreases by the set value Δf within
the set time Δt, then the Δt/Δf monitoring function operates instantaneously and
generates a trip signal. If a frequency change does not lead to an operate
decision of the monitoring function, then the Δt/Δf monitoring function will be
blocked until the underfrequency monitoring function drops out. The trip signal
can be blocked by way of an appropriately configured binary signal input.
f<
Δf
Δt Δt
t
Start Δt Start Δt
Function blocked
Trip Δf/Δt
F5Z0128C
Fig. 3-146: Operation of frequency monitoring combined with Δf/Δt monitoring.
3-188 P632/EN M/R-a5-B // P632‑312‑660

3 Operation P632
f<>:
Blocking f1 EXT
[ 042 103 ]
f<>:
Oper. mode f1 PSx
[ * ]
1: f
2: f with df/dt
f<>:
f1 PSx
3: f w. Delta f/Delta t [ * ]
MAIN:
Nominal frequ. fnom
[ 010 030 ]
f<>:
f<>: tf1 PSx
Ready [ * ]
[ 042 101 ]
MAIN:
Protection active
306 001
f<>:
f<>: Trip signal f1
Blocked by V< [ 042 111 ]
[ 042 102 ]
MAIN:
M.c.b. trip V EXT
[ 004 061 ]
f<>:
Starting f1
[ 042 107 ]
f<>:
df1/dt PSx
[ * ]
f<>:
No. periods reached
305 701
f<>: df/dt
fMeas
305 726
f<>:
Start. cond. met Starting f1/df1
[ 042 108 ]
SFMON:
f> Setting error f<>
f<>: [ 098 028 ]
Delta f1 PSx
[ * ]
f<>:
Delta t1 PSx
[ * ]
Δf/Δt
f<>:
Delta f1 triggered
[ 042 109 ]
Start. cond. met
f<>:
Delta t1 elapsed
[ 042 110 ]
Parameter f<>: f<>: f<>: f<>: f<>: f<>:

Oper. mode f1 PSx f1 PSx df1/dt PSx Delta f1 PSx Delta t1 PSx tf1 PSx
set 1 018 120 018 100 018 108 018 112 018 116 018 104
set 2 018 121 018 101 018 109 018 113 018 117 018 105
set 3 018 122 018 102 018 110 018 114 018 118 018 106
set 4 018 123 018 103 018 111 018 115 018 119 018 107
64Z8053A
Fig. 3-147: First stage of the over-/ underfrequency protection function
P632/EN M/R-a5-B // P632‑312‑660 3-189

P632 3 Operation
3.28.7 fmin/fmax Measurement

For the acquisition of the minimum frequency during an underfrequency
condition and for the acquisition of the maximum frequency during an
overfrequency condition, the two following measured event values are available:
● f<>: Max . frequ. f or f >
● f<>: M in . fr eq u. f or f <
Both measured event values are reset automatically at the onset of a new
overfrequency or underfrequency situation. A manual reset is also possible:
● f<>: R e set meas .val . USER
3-190 P632/EN M/R-a5-B // P632‑312‑660

3 Operation P632
3.29 Overfluxing Protection (Function Group V/f)

The overfluxing protection function will detect an inadmissibly high induction B in
the iron core of transformers which may have been caused either by a voltage
increase and/or a frequency decrease.
3.29.1 Enabling or Disabling Overfluxing Protection

The overfluxing protection function can be enabled or disabled using setting
parameters. Moreover, enabling can be carried out separately for each
parameter subset.
V/f:
General enable USER
[ 019 097 ]
1 V/f:
Enabled
0: No [ 041 229 ]
1: Yes
V/f:
Enable PSx
[ * ]
0: No
1: Yes
Parameter V/f:
Enable PSx
set 1 081 210
set 2 082 210
set 3 083 210
set 4 084 210
64Z5191A
Fig. 3-148: Enabling or disabling overfluxing protection
3.29.2 Conditioning the Measured Value

The overfluxing protection function will evaluate the voltage to frequency (V/f)
ratio referred to nominal values. This ratio is proportional to the induction in the
iron core of a transformer. The overfluxing measurement is not enabled unless
the voltage and frequency values are within limits for admissible values.
MAIN:
Nominal frequ. fnom
[ 010 030 ]
V̲
V/f:
V/f Excitation V/f p.u.
[ 004 220 ]
V/f:
> 0.5 fnom Enable meas.
460 569
< 1.5 fnom
> 0.5 Vnom

64Z5193B
Fig. 3-149: Conditioning of measured value
P632/EN M/R-a5-B // P632‑312‑660 3-191

P632 3 Operation
3.29.3 Fixed-time Warning Stage

The overfluxing value (V/f) is monitored to determine whether it exceeds a set
threshold. A timer stage is triggered when the overfluxing value exceeds this
threshold and a signal is issued when the time delay has elapsed.
V/f:
Block. tV/f> EXT
[ 035 196 ]
V/f:
Enabled
[ 041 229 ]
MAIN:
M.c.b. trip V EXT
[ 004 061 ]
MAIN:
Protection active V/f: V/f:
V/f> (alarm) PSx tV/f> PSx
306 001
[ * ] [ * ]
V/f:
Enable meas.
460 569
V/f: V/f:
Excitation V/f p.u. tV/f> elapsed
[ 004 220 ] [ 041 231 ]
V/f:
Starting V/f>
[ 041 230 ]
Parameter V/f: V/f:
V/f> (alarm) PSx tV/f> PSx
set 1 081 211 081 214
set 2 082 211 082 214
set 3 083 211 083 214
set 4 084 211 084 214
64Z5192B
Fig. 3-150: Warning stage
3.29.4 Fixed-time Tripping Stage

The overfluxing value (V/f) is monitored to determine whether it exceeds a set
threshold. A timer stage is triggered when the overfluxing value exceeds this
threshold and a signal is issued when the time delay has elapsed.
V/f:
Block. tV/f>> EXT
[ 035 199 ]
V/f:
Enabled
[ 041 229 ]
MAIN:
M.c.b. trip V EXT
[ 004 061 ]
MAIN:
Protection active V/f: V/f:
V/f>> PSx tV/f>> PSx
306 001
[ * ] [ * ]
V/f:
Enable meas.
460 569
V/f: V/f:
Excitation V/f p.u. tV/f>> elapsed
[ 004 220 ] [ 041 235 ]
V/f:
Starting V/f>>
[ 041 234 ]
Parameter V/f: V/f:

V/f>> PSx tV/f>> PSx
set 1 081 213 081 229
set 2 082 213 082 229
set 3 083 213 083 229
set 4 084 213 084 229
64Z5195B
Fig. 3-151: Fixed-time tripping stage
3.29.5 Variable-time Tripping Stage

The overfluxing value (V/f) is monitored to determine whether it exceeds the set
threshold. When the overfluxing value exceeds this threshold the P632 will
3-192 P632/EN M/R-a5-B // P632‑312‑660

3 Operation P632
determine the tripping time according to the overfluxing magnitude value and
the set characteristic.
The variable-time tripping characteristic is set by defining 12 pairs of overfluxing
values and their associated tripping time values. Intermediate values are
obtained by interpolation. The setting of the characteristic is checked for
plausibility with regard to a monotonically decreasing characteristic. With values
of V/f > 1.6 the tripping time is limited to the value set for V/f = 1.6. The tripping
characteristic with default setting values is displayed in Fig. 3-152, (p. 3-193).
100
t/s 10
1
1.00 1.10 1.20 1.30 1.40 1.50 1.60 1.70 1.80 1.90 2.00
V/f P 1852ENa
Fig. 3-152: Example of a tripping characteristic (with default settings)
After a starting, the elapsed starting time is accumulated in a buffer. When the
starting drops out, the buffer memory is discharged. The discharge gradient is
defined by the set cooling time. When the starting recurs the buffer memory is
again accumulated with starting time values. If the accumulated starting time
reaches the tripping time value determined by the P632 then the trip signal will
be issued. The buffer memory content during an interrupted starting is shown in
Fig. 3-153, (p. 3-194). In case A, the tripping time determined by the P632 is not
reached by the accumulated starting time. In case B, on the other hand, a trip
signal is issued.
P632/EN M/R-a5-B // P632‑312‑660 3-193

P632 3 Operation
Case A
V/f:
Starting V/f(t)
[ 041 232 ] 2s 2s
Determ. trip time

6s
4s
2s
V/f:
Trip signal tV/f(t)
[ 041 233 ]
Case B
V/f:
Starting V/f(t)
[ 041 232 ] 2s 5.5 s
Determ. trip time

6s
4s
2s
V/f:
Trip signal tV/f(t)
[ 041 233 ]
Parameter V/f:
Reset time PSx
set 1 081 230
set 2 082 230
set 3 083 230
set 4 084 230
64Z5197A
Fig. 3-153: Buffer memory content during a starting
3-194 P632/EN M/R-a5-B // P632‑312‑660

3 Operation P632
V/f:
Enabled
[ 041 229 ]
MAIN:
M.c.b. trip V EXT
[ 004 061 ]
MAIN:
Protection active V/f:
306 001
V/f(t)> PSx
V/f: [ * ]
Enable meas.
460 569
V/f: V/f:
Excitation V/f p.u. Starting V/f(t)
[ 004 220 ] [ 041 232 ]
V/f:
Setting(s) blocked t at V/f=1.05 PSx
[ * ]
V/f:
t at V/f=1.10 PSx
[ * ]
V/f:
t at V/f=1.15 PSx
[ * ]
V/f:
t at V/f=1.20 PSx
[ * ]
V/f:
t at V/f=1.25 PSx
[ * ]
V/f:
t at V/f=1.30 PSx
[ * ]
V/f:
t at V/f=1.35 PSx
[ * ]
V/f:
t at V/f=1.40 PSx
[ * ]
V/f:
t at V/f=1.45 PSx
[ * ]
V/f:
t at V/f=1.50 PSx
[ * ]
V/f:
t at V/f=1.55 PSx
[ * ]
V/f:
t at V/f=1.60 PSx
[ * ]
V/f:
Reset time PSx
[ * ]
V/f:
Block. replica EXT
[ 035 197 ]
V/f:
Trip signal tV/f(t)
[ 041 233 ]
V/f:
Buffer empty
[ 041 236 ]
V/f:
Reset replica
[ 035 184 ]
V/f:
Status replica in %
Parameter V/f: V/f:
V/f(t)> PSx Reset time PSx [ 004 222 ]
set 1 081 212 081 230 V/f:
Status replica p.u.
set 2 082 212 082 230
set 3 083 212 083 230 [ 004 223 ]
set 4 084 212 084 230
Parameter V/f: V/f: V/f: V/f: V/f: V/f:

t at V/f=1.05 PSx t at V/f=1.10 PSx t at V/f=1.15 PSx t at V/f=1.20 PSx t at V/f=1.25 PSx t at V/f=1.30 PSx
set 1 081 217 081 218 081 219 081 220 081 221 081 222
set 2 082 217 082 218 082 219 082 220 082 221 082 222
set 3 083 217 083 218 083 219 083 220 083 221 083 222
set 4 084 217 084 218 084 219 084 220 084 221 084 222
Parameter V/f: V/f: V/f: V/f: V/f: V/f:

t at V/f=1.35 PSx t at V/f=1.40 PSx t at V/f=1.45 PSx t at V/f=1.50 PSx t at V/f=1.55 PSx t at V/f=1.60 PSx
set 1 081 223 081 224 081 225 081 226 081 227 081 228
set 2 082 223 082 224 082 225 082 226 082 227 082 228
set 3 083 223 083 224 083 225 083 226 083 227 083 228
set 4 084 223 084 224 084 225 084 226 084 227 084 228
64Z5194B
Fig. 3-154: Variable-time tripping stage
P632/EN M/R-a5-B // P632‑312‑660 3-195

P632 3 Operation
V/f:
Reset replica USER
[ 035 183 ]
1 1 100ms V/f:
Reset replica
0: don't execute [ 035 184 ]
1: execute
V/f:
Enabled
[ 041 229 ]
V/f:
Reset replica EXT
[ 035 182 ]
MAIN:
M.c.b. trip V EXT
[ 004 061 ]
64Z5196A
Fig. 3-155: Resetting of the thermal replica
3-196 P632/EN M/R-a5-B // P632‑312‑660

3 Operation P632
3.30 Current Transformer Supervision (Function Group CTS)

The current transformer supervision function can prevent unwanted tripping by
differential protection for faults in the CT's secondary circuit.
3.30.1 Enabling or Disabling the CTS Function

The current transformer supervision function can be disabled or enabled using
setting parameters. Moreover, enabling can be carried out separately for each
parameter subset.
CTS:
General enable USER
[ 031 085 ]
CTS:
1 & Enabled
[ 036 080 ]
0: No
1: Yes
CTS:
Enable PSx
[ * ]
0: No
y PSU: Parameter CTS:
1: Yes ** PS y active * Enable PSx
1 036 090 set 1 001 118
2 036 091 set 2 001 119
3 036 092 set 3 001 120
PSU: 4 036 093 set 4 001 121
PS y active
[ ** ]
64Z5300B
Fig. 3-156: Enabling or disabling the CT Supervision
3.30.2 Blocking CTS

Current transformer supervision is blocked if one of the following conditions
applies:
● Protection is disabled (off).
● The CTS function is not enabled.
● An external blocking signal is present.
● The general trip signal is present.
● Inrush stabilization or overfluxing restraint have operated.
P632/EN M/R-a5-B // P632‑312‑660 3-197

P632 3 Operation
MAIN:
Protection active ≥1 CTS:
blocked
306 001
460 400
CTS:
Enabled
[ 036 080 ]
CTS:
Blocking EXT
[ 036 160 ]
MAIN:
Gen. trip signal
[ 036 251 ]
DIFF:
Harm.block 1 trigg.
≥1
[ 041 118 ]
DIFF:
Harm.block 2 trigg.
[ 041 119 ]
DIFF:
Harm.block 3 trigg.
[ 041 120 ]
64Z5301B
Fig. 3-157: Blocking of current transformer supervision
3.30.3 Monitoring Condition

If CTS is ready, it will monitor the positive- and negative-sequence currents from
both transformer ends (a, b).
A CT fault is detected when the following conditions are simultaneously present:
● The positive-sequence current exceeds the set threshold Ipos> in both
winding ends. This means that CTS can operate only if a minimum load
current is present in the protected object.
● The negative- to positive-sequence current ratio exceeds a high set
threshold value Ineg/Ipos>> in a single winding end.
● In the other end, the negative- to positive-sequence current ratio is smaller
than the low set threshold value Ineg/Ipos>, or no significant current is
present (i.e. the positive-sequence current is lower than the Ipos>
threshold).
In such a case, there is a fault in the secondary circuit of the CT at the
transformer end where a high negative-sequence current is present.
Because this function uses negative-sequence currents, it can only detect
unbalanced CT faults. In practice, this does not present a problem as the
occurrence of a three-pole CT fault is very unlikely.
3-198 P632/EN M/R-a5-B // P632‑312‑660

3 Operation P632
CTS:
blocked
460 400
CTS:
MAIN: Ipos> PSx
Phase sequence c
[ * ]
[ 010 049 ]
I̲A,y
I̲B,y I̲pos Ipos>,y
I̲C,y
I̲neg
CTS:
Ineg/Ipos> PSx
c
[ * ]
I̲neg/I̲pos Ineg/Ipos>,y
CTS:
Ineg/Ipos>> PSx
c
[ * ]
* Parameter CTS: CTS: CTS:
Ipos> PSx Ineg/Ipos> PSx Ineg/Ipos>> PSx
set 1 001 111 001 102 001 122
set 2 001 115 001 103 001 123
Ineg/Ipos>>,y
set 3 001 116 001 104 001 124
set 4 001 117 001 105 001 125
64Z5302A
Fig. 3-158: Current evaluation referring to the respective end
CTS: &
blocked
460 400
Ipos>,a ≥2
Ipos>,b
≥1 =(N-1)
Ineg/Ipos>,a
≥1
Ineg/Ipos>,b
Ineg/Ipos>>,a =1
Ineg/Ipos>>,b
CTS:
& End a faulty
460 471
CTS:
& End b faulty
460 472
62Z5303A
Fig. 3-159: CTS triggering condition
N represents the number of transformer ends, that is N = 2 (a, b).
3.30.4 Signaling and Indication

Triggering of the CTS function is signaled by multiple signals as well as by single
signals referring to the respective ends. Beside the updated signals latched
signals are also available in order to achieve stable signaling behavior and a
permanent differential protection characteristic with reduced sensitivity when,
for instance, intermittent faults have occurred. The updated signal as well as the
stored signal are time-delayed in order to suppress any signaling caused by a
transient event. On the other hand, instantaneous signals are used to block or
P632/EN M/R-a5-B // P632‑312‑660 3-199

P632 3 Operation
restrain the differential protection functions as fast as possible. As soon as a CTS

condition is detected (C TS: Idif f>( CTS) acti ve is present), the function will
raise the differential protection low set threshold to the DIFF : Idiff>(CTS) PS x
setting; see Fig. 3-160, (p. 3-200).
The setting for this value determines the CTS operating mode:
● Signaling only
DI FF: I di ff>( CTS) P Sx = DI FF: I di ff> PSx. Differential protection
remains unrestricted, but there is a risk of unwanted tripping occurring
under load current.
● Restricted operation
DI FF : Id iff>(C TS) PSx = maximum load current. This will permit the safe
differential protection behavior, even during CT failure. There will be no
unwanted trip under any load condition, but protection will remain
operational for internal faults with currents exceeding the load current.
● Blocking
DI FF: I diff>(CTS) PSx = D IFF: Idif f >> P Sx. In practice differential
protection is blocked for all currents under normal operating conditions.
I diff Fault current characteristic

for single side infeed
m2
Idiff>(CTS)
1
m1
I diff>
0 1 2 3 I R,m2 IR
64Z9004A
Fig. 3-160: Modification of the differential protection triggering characteristic with CTS active
When a CTS alarm signal is issued for one of the transformer ends (for example
C TS: Alarm en d a), the associated ground differential protection function is
then blocked, if it has been set accordingly (for example by assigning REF_1 to
end a: RE F_1 : C TS eff e cti ve P Sx = Yes).
3.30.5 Reset
Latched CTS signals can be reset using control parameters or through an
appropriately configured binary signal input as well as by a general reset
command.
3-200 P632/EN M/R-a5-B // P632‑312‑660

3 Operation P632
3.30.6 Multiple Signaling from the CTS Function

The signals issued by the CTS function (and/or measuring circuit monitoring, see
Section 3.31, (p. 3-202)) are combined into the MAI N: Meas . cir c.I fault y
signal. A signal is simultaneously issued by the self-monitoring function.
CTS:
t(Alarm) PSx
[ * ]
t 0
CTS: CTS:
End a faulty ≥1 Operated (updating)
460 471 [ 036 099 ]
CTS:
End b faulty
CTS:
460 472 t(Latch) PSx
[ * ]
t 0
CTS:
S 11 Operated (latched)
[ 036 202 ]
R 1
CTS:
≥1 Idiff>(CTS)active
[ 036 203 ]
CTS:
Reset latch. USER
[ 036 157 ]
1 100 ms 1 ≥1 1 500 ms CTS:

Reset
460 450
0: don't execute
1: execute
CTS: Parameter CTS: CTS:

Reset latch. EXT * t(Alarm) PSx t(Latch) PSx
[ 036 158 ] set 1 001 126 001 130
MAIN: set 2 001 127 001 131
General reset USER
[ 003 002 ] set 3 001 128 001 132
1: execute set 4 001 129 001 133
62Z5304A
Fig. 3-161: CTS overreaching signals.
CTS:
t(Alarm) PSx
[ * ]
t 0
CTS:
CTS: Alarm end a (updat.)
End a faulty
460 471
[ ** ]
CTS:
t(Latch) PSx
[ * ]
t 0
CTS:
S 11 Alarm end a (latch.)
[ ** ]
CTS: R 1
Reset CTS:
460 450
≥1 Alarm end a
[ ** ]
CTS: CTS: CTS: Parameter CTS: CTS:

** Alarm end a (updat.) Alarm end a (latch.) Alarm end a * t(Alarm) PSx t(Latch) PSx
End a 036 081 036 204 036 205 set 1 001 126 001 130
End b 036 082 036 206 036 207 set 2 001 127 001 131
End c 036 083 036 208 036 209 set 3 001 128 001 132
End d 036 084 036 210 036 211 set 4 001 129 001 133
64Z5305B
Fig. 3-162: CTS signals per end.
P632/EN M/R-a5-B // P632‑312‑660 3-201

P632 3 Operation
3.31 Measuring-Circuit Monitoring (Function Groups MCM_1 and

MCM_2)
The measuring-circuit monitoring function featured by the P632 will detect faults
in the secondary circuits of the CTs. Measuring-circuit monitoring functions
MCM_1 and MCM_2 are permanently assigned to the transformer ends monitored
by the P632.
Function group MCM_1 will serve as an example to illustrate the operation of the
measuring-circuit monitoring functions. The same will apply to function group
MCM_2.
3.31.1 Enabling or Disabling Measuring-Circuit Monitoring

The measuring-circuit monitoring function can be enabled or disabled using
setting parameters. Moreover, enabling can be carried out separately for each
parameter set.
MCM_1:
General enable USER
[ 031 146 ]
1 MCM_1:
Enabled
0: No [ 036 194 ]
1: Yes
MCM_1:
Enable PSx
[ * ]
0: No
1: Yes
Parameter MCM_1:
Enable PSx
set 1 081 038
set 2 082 038
set 3 083 038
set 4 084 038
64Z5186A
Fig. 3-163: Enabling or disabling measuring-circuit monitoring
3.31.2 Measuring-Circuit Monitoring

The negative- to positive-sequence current ratio is used as a criterion for
measuring-circuit monitoring. The measuring-circuit monitoring function is
triggered when the set ratio value, Ineg/Ipos, is exceeded and either the negative-
or the positive-sequence current exceeds 0.02 Inom. After the set operate time-
delay has elapsed, a warning is issued.
The measuring-circuit monitoring functions can be used to detect broken
conductors on the CTs' primary sides.
● The functions can now be blocked individually via input signals set at
MCM_x: Blocking EXT.
● When the triggering condition is met an instantaneous starting signal is
raised: (MCM_x: Starting).
In the following logic diagram, the measuring-circuit monitoring function is
displayed using function group MCM_1 as an example.
3-202 P632/EN M/R-a5-B // P632‑312‑660

3 Operation P632
MCM_1: c
Blocking EXT
[ 036 213 ]
MCM_1: c
Enabled
[ 036 194 ]
MAIN:
Phase sequence
[ 010 049 ]
I̲A,a ≥1
I̲A,a I̲neg >0.02 Inom
I̲A,a
I̲pos >0.02 Inom MCM_1: MCM_1:

Ineg/Ipos> PSx Operate delay PSx
c c
[ * ] [ * ]
5s 0
MCM_1:
I̲neg/I̲pos Meas. circ. I faulty
[ 036 198 ]
SFMON:
Meas. c. I faulty, a
[ 091 026 ]
Parameter MCM_1: MCM_1:
Ineg/Ipos> PSx Operate delay PSx
set 1 081 042 081 046 MCM_1:
set 2 082 042 082 046 Starting
[ 036 212 ]
set 3 083 042 083 046
set 4 084 042 084 046
64Z5187B
Fig. 3-164: Measuring-circuit monitoring for end a
3.31.3 Multiple Signaling from the Measuring-Circuit Monitoring

Function
The signals issued by the measuring-circuit monitoring function (and/or current
transformer supervision, see Section 3.30, (p. 3-197)) are grouped to form the
MAIN : Mea s. circ.I f aulty multiple signal. A signal is simultaneously issued by
the self-monitoring function.
MCM_1: MAIN:
Meas. circ. I faulty Meas. circ.I faulty
[ 036 198 ] [ 036 155 ]
MCM_2:
Meas. circ. I faulty SFMON:
Meas. circ. I faulty
[ 036 199 ]
[ 091 018 ]
62Z5185A
Fig. 3-165: Signals issued by the measuring-circuit monitoring function
P632/EN M/R-a5-B // P632‑312‑660 3-203

P632 3 Operation
3.32 Circuit Breaker Failure Protection (Function Groups CBF_1

and CBF_2)
The P632 features circuit breaker failure (CBF) protection functions. After a trip
command has been issued the CBF function checks that the circuit breaker has
actually been opened.
The CBF function group is repeatedly available so that a dedicated function may
be applied to each end on the protected object.
The following specifications apply to assigning the CBF protection functions to
the physical measured current values and the internal logical signals.
3.32.1 Assigning Transformer Ends

The currents to be monitored by the respective CBF function may be selected
using setting parameters:
Address Description Range of values
022 156 CBF_1 : Sele ct. me as. i npu t End a

022 157 CBF_2 : Sele ct. me as. i npu t End b
3.32.2 Assigning Circuit Breakers

Each CBF_x function is permanently assigned to the respective circuit breakers
CBx. This concerns monitoring of the CB contact positions in conjunction with the
MAIN function of the protection unit. There are no specifications concerning the
assignment of circuit breakers to ends on the protected object.
3.32.3 Assigning the Trip Command

Which of the trip commands is to be used as a start criterion for the respective
CBF function may be selected by setting parameters:
Address Description Range of Values
022 202 CBF_1 : F ct .ass ign. startin g MA IN: Ge n. tr ip si gnal 1

022 216 CBF_2 : Fct.assi gn . s tarti ng MAIN: Gen . tr ip si gnal 2
MA IN: Gen . tr ip signal 3
MA IN: Ge n. tr ip si gnal 4
The functional range made available by the circuit breaker failure protection
function CBF_1 is documented in the following description. Function group CBF_2
provides the same functional range.
3.32.4 Enabling or Disabling the CBF Function

The activation of the function is enabled at C BF_1: Gen eral en able U SER. If
this enabling function has been activated, CBF can be enabled or disabled via
setting parameters or through appropriately configured binary signal inputs. The
front panel HMI and the binary signal inputs have equal priority in this regard. If
only the function CBF_1 : En abl e EXT is assigned to a binary signal input, then
CBF will be enabled by a positive edge of the input signal and disabled by a
negative edge. If only the parameter CBF _1: Disable EXT has been assigned
to a binary signal input, then a signal at this input will have no effect.
3-204 P632/EN M/R-a5-B // P632‑312‑660

3 Operation P632
CBF_1:
General enable USER
[ 022 080 ]
0
CBF_1:
1 Enabled
[ 040 055 ]
0: No
1: Yes
INP:
Fct. assignm. U xxx
[ xxx xxx ]
U x1
U x2
U x3
U xx
Address 038 041
Address 038 042
CBF_1:
Ext./user enabled
[ 038 040 ]
CBF_1:
Enable EXT
[ 038 041 ]
CBF_1:
Enable USER
[ 003 016 ]
0: don't execute
1: execute
CBF_1:
Disable EXT
[ 038 042 ]
CBF_1:
Disable USER
[ 003 015 ]
0: don't execute
1: execute
64Z1101A
Fig. 3-166: Enabling or disabling circuit breaker failure protection, illustrated for CBF_1
3.32.5 Readiness of Circuit Breaker Protection

Circuit breaker failure protection will not be available should one of the following
conditions be met:
● The CBF function is not activated.
● Circuit breaker protection is being blocked by an appropriately configured
binary signal input.
● All CBF timer stages have been set to “Blocked”.
P632/EN M/R-a5-B // P632‑312‑660 3-205

P632 3 Operation
CBF_1: CBF_1:
Enabled Not ready
[ 040 055 ] [ 040 025 ]
& CBF_1:
Ready
CBF_1: [ 038 009 ]
Blocking EXT
[ 038 058 ]
CBF_1:
t1 3p
[ 022 165 ]
blocked &
CBF_1:
t2
[ 022 166 ]
blocked
CBF_1:
Delay/starting trig.
[ 022 155 ]
blocked
CBF_1:
Delay/fault beh. CB
[ 022 171 ]
blocked
CBF_1:
Delay/CB sync.superv
[ 022 172 ]
blocked
64Z1102B
Fig. 3-167: CBF readiness
3.32.6 Detecting a CB Tripping

A break in current flow is the preferred criterion to detect a successful CB
tripping. Protection functions that have triggering criteria not directly dependent
on current flow (e.g. V<>), may additionally be provided with status signals from
CB auxiliary contacts for evaluation.
3.32.7 Current flow monitoring

The current flow monitoring function is used to detect a break in current flow
safely, immediately and pole selectively. The CBF function continuously
compares sampled current values from the selected end with the set threshold
value C BF_1 : I <. As long as current flow criteria are met the phase-selective
signals C BF_1: Current fl ow A, C BF_1: Cu rre nt flow B, C BF_1: Curre nt
flow C and the multiple signal CBF_1: Cu rre nt flow Phx will be continuously
issued.
In addition to this line-associated current flow monitoring function a residual
current monitoring function is available which can be enabled/disabled.
For this either the residual current value measured directly at the CT or the value
derived from the three phase currents may be used.
Note that this choice is only possible when a measuring input for the residual
current is available.
As long as a residual current exceeding the comparator threshold is flowing, the
current flow criterion is not met and the corresponding signal (CBF_1: Curr ent
flow N) is issued. When the residual current monitoring function is disabled, no
monitoring is carried out and the C BF_1: Cu rre nt flow N = No signal is issued
continuously.
3-206 P632/EN M/R-a5-B // P632‑312‑660

3 Operation P632
CBF_1:
I<
[ 022 160 ]
I̲A CBF_1:
Current flow A
[ 038 230 ]
I̲B CBF_1:
Current flow B
[ 038 231 ]
I̲C CBF_1:
Current flow C
[ 038 232 ]
CBF_1:
Current flow Phx
[ 038 233 ]
CBF_1:
Evaluation IN
[ 022 184 ]
0: Without
1: Calculated c1
2: Measured
c2
+
+ 1
CBF_1:
+ IN<
[ 022 180 ]
I̲N 2
≥1
1 ... 2 CBF_1:
Current flow N
[ 038 235 ]
CBF:
IN
460 394
64Z1103C
Fig. 3-168: Current flow monitoring
3.32.8 Evaluation of CB Status Signals

Trip signals included in the general trip command which use status signals
provided by the CB auxiliary contacts in addition to current flow monitoring, can
be selected with the parameter CBF_1: Fct.as si gnm. CBA ux . .
Applying CB status signals depends on the type of auxiliary contacts available.
The P632 can check the following CB status signals for plausibility and evaluate
them:
● The ‘Open’ signal from the circuit breaker, MAI N: CB1 open 3p EXT
● The ‘Closed’ signal from the circuit breaker, MA IN: CB1 clos ed 3p EXT
Note that each circuit breaker CBx is permanently assigned to the respective
CBF_x function. In the following description, CB1 is used as an example.
The evaluation of the CB status signals is blocked, if the configuration of the
respective binary signal inputs or the signal levels are not plausible. This will
result in the P632 issuing the signal CBF_1 : C B pos . implaus ible. Evaluation
of current criteria is not affected by this blocking.
If only one of the two possible CB status signals has been configured, then this
configured signal will always be considered plausible by the P632.
As an alternative, the status signals from the external device may be used; see
Section 3.13.10, (p. 3-94). The assignment that is necessary for this is carried out
with the parameters MA IN: Sig. as g. CB1 ope n or MA IN: Sig. asg. CB1
closed, using CB1 as an example. Status signals from external devices are
processed similar to the CB status signals MA IN : C B1 ope n 3p E XT and
MAIN : CB1 closed 3p EXT
P632/EN M/R-a5-B // P632‑312‑660 3-207

P632 3 Operation
INP:
Fct. assignm. U xxx
[ xxx yyy ]
U x01
U x02
U x03
U xxx
Address 031 028 &

Address 036 051
CBF_1:
& CB pos. implausible
[ 038 210 ]
MAIN:
CB1 open 3p EXT &
[ 031 028 ]
MAIN:
CB1 closed 3p EXT
[ 036 051 ] &
64Z7031B
Fig. 3-169: Plausibility check of CB status signals
3-208 P632/EN M/R-a5-B // P632‑312‑660

3 Operation P632
3.32.9 Startup Criteria
CBF_1:
Fct.assignm. CBAux.
[ 022 159 ]
Startup “with no current”,
based on
Signal 1 auxiliary CB contacts.
Signal 2 m out of n
…
Signal 3
Selected signals &
CBF_1: Reset “with no current”,

CB pos. implausible ≥1 & if CB is open.
[ 038 210 ]
CBF_1: & & >S
Current flow A 11
1
[ 038 230 ] >R
CBF_1:
Current flow B
[ 038 231 ] ◄ ◄
CBF_1:
Current flow C
[ 038 232 ] & Both flip-flops
CBF_1:
Current flow N are R-dominant.
[ 038 235 ]
MAIN:
CB1 open 3p EXT ≥1
[ 031 028 ] CBF_1:
≥1 & >S Startup 3p
MAIN: 11
CB1 closed 3p EXT 1 [ 038 211 ]
>R
[ 036 051 ] Signal that all phase ≥1
currents (and optio-
CBF_1: nally IN) are 0.
Start with man. trip &
[ 022 154 ]
Reset if all phase currents below I<

0 (and optionally the res. cur. below IN<).
1
0: No
1: Yes CBF_1:
Fct.assign. starting
[ 022 202 ]
Gen.trip signal 1
Gen.trip signal 2
Gen.trip signal 3
Gen.trip signal 4
& ≥1
MAIN:
Gen. trip signal 1
[ 036 005 ] &
MAIN:
Gen. trip signal 2
[ 036 023 ] &
MAIN:
Gen. trip signal 3
[ 036 108 ] &
MAIN:
Gen. trip signal 4
[ 036 109 ] &
MAIN: & ≥1
Trip cmd. blocked
[ 021 013 ]
MAIN:
Manual trip signal
[ 034 017 ] &
INP:
Fct. assignm. U xxx
[ xxx yyy ]
U x01
U x02
U x03
U xxx & ≥1
Address 038 209 &

CBF_1:
Start enable EXT
[ 038 209 ]
CBF_1:
Start 3p EXT
[ 038 205 ] 64Z8932A
P632/EN M/R-a5-B // P632‑312‑660 3-209

P632 3 Operation
Fig. 3-170: Startup of the circuit breaker failure protection
The startup of the circuit breaker failure protection function will occur when the
CB is recognized as closed during a start criterion. The following startup criteria
are evaluated:
● Internal startup criterion:
Generating the specific general trip signal, which has been selected by
setting parameter CBF_1: Fct.as s ign. starting, is considered a startup
criterion. In addition it may be selected, by setting the parameter
C BF_1 : St art with man. trip, that a manual trip signal will also be used
as a startup criterion.
● External startup criterion:
Triggering by a protection device operating in parallel (C BF_1: Star t 3 p
E XT) may be used as a startup criterion. To be on the safe side an
additional two-pole triggering may be implemented by applying the signal
C BF_1: St art e nable EXT.
Once started, the CBF function will only drop out when a successful opening has
been detected from the current flow monitoring or, in some cases, when the CB
signals that its contacts are open.
3.32.9.1 Timers and Tripping Logic

Associated timer stages are started when a startup criterion is met.
● The signal CBF _1: Tr ip si gnal t1 will be issued if the startup criterion is
still present when the time delay, set at timer stage CBF_1 : t 1 3p, has
elapsed. The output command from this timer stage is intended for a
second CB trip coil.
● The signal CBF _1: Tr ip si gnal t2 will be issued if the startup criterion is
still present when the time delay, set at timer stage CBF_1 : t 2, has
elapsed. The output command from this timer stage is intended for a
backup circuit breaker or protection system.
These trip signals will be issued as long as the startup criteria are met.
Should a loss of gas pressure occur in the de-arcing chambers of installed type
SF6 circuit breakers then all surrounding circuit breakers must be immediately
tripped without waiting for a reaction from the damaged switch. In case of an
external CB_ 1 fault the elapsing of timer stage t2 may be interrupted by a signal
to the binary signal input appropriately configured at CBF_1 : C B faulty EXT.
3-210 P632/EN M/R-a5-B // P632‑312‑660

3 Operation P632
CBF_1:
Fct.assignm. CBAux.
[ 022 159 ]
Signal 1
m out of n
Signal 2
Signal n
Selected signals
CBF_1:
CB pos. implausible
[ 038 210 ]
CBF_1: >1 &

I<
[ 022 160 ]
&
& & & S
I̲A 1 1
R 1
I̲B
I̲C
CBF_1:
Current flow N
[ 038 235 ]
MAIN:
CB1 open 3p EXT
[ 031 028 ]
MAIN:
CB1 closed 3p EXT
[ 036 051 ]
CBF_1:
Start with man. trip
[ 022 154 ] >1 & CBF_1:
S 1 1 Startup 3p
[ 038 211 ]
R 1
0
>1
1
0: No
1: Yes
>1
CBF_1:
Fct.assign. starting
[ 022 202 ]
Gen.trip signal 1
Gen.trip signal 2
Gen.trip signal 3
Gen.trip signal 4
&
MAIN:
Gen. trip signal 1
[ 036 005 ]
&
MAIN:
Gen. trip signal 2
[ 036 023 ]
&
MAIN:
Gen. trip signal 3
[ 036 108 ]
&
MAIN:
Gen. trip signal 4
[ 036 109 ]
&
&
MAIN:
Trip cmd. blocked
[ 021 013 ]
MAIN:
Manual trip signal
[ 034 017 ]
&
INP:
Fct. assignm. U xxx
[ xxx yyy ]
U x01
U x02
U x03 &
U xxx
Address 038 209 &

CBF_1:
Start enable EXT
[ 038 209 ]
CBF_1:
Start 3p EXT
[ 038 205 ]
64Z1104D
Fig. 3-171: Startup of the circuit breaker failure protection
P632/EN M/R-a5-B // P632‑312‑660 3-211

P632 3 Operation
CBF_1:
CBF_1: t1 3p
Not ready C
[ 022 165 ]
[ 040 025 ]
CBF_1: t 0 CBF_1:
Startup 3p Trip signal t1
[ 038 211 ] [ 038 215 ]
CBF_1:
C t2
[ 022 166 ]
t 0 CBF_1:
Trip signal t2
[ 038 219 ]
MAIN:
& CB failure
CBF_1: [ 036 017 ]
CB faulty EXT
[ 038 234 ]
64Z1105B
Fig. 3-172: Timer stages of the circuit breaker failure protection
3.32.10 Trip Commands

While trip signals issued by the CB failure protection have no timer stages
available the user can set minimum time delays for trip commands.
By appropriate setting it can further be determined that trip commands, issued
by the CB failure protection, will operate in latching mode. The respective trip
command, set to latch mode, will remain active until reset by operating
parameters or through an appropriately configured binary signal input.
CBF_1:
Min.dur. trip cmd.t1
[ 022 167 ]
MAIN:
Trip cmd. blocked CBF_1:
[ 021 013 ] t 0 ≥1 Trip command t1
[ 038 220 ]
CBF_1: ≥1
Trip signal t1
[ 038 215 ]
CBF_1:
Latching trip cmd.t1
[ 022 169 ]
0 S 1 1
1 R 1
CBF_1:
0: No Min.dur. trip cmd.t2
[ 022 168 ]
1: Yes
CBF_1:
t 0 ≥1 Trip command t2
[ 038 224 ]
CBF_1: ≥1
Trip signal t2
[ 038 219 ]
CBF_1:
Latching trip cmd.t2
[ 022 170 ]
0 S 1 1
1 R 1
0: No
1: Yes
MAIN:
Latch. trip c. reset
[ 040 139 ]
64Z1106B
Fig. 3-173: Trip commands, issued by the CB failure protection
3.32.11 Starting Trigger

Should a downstream CB fail, a trip can be issued by the CB failure protection
function. In this case the dedicated general interrogation is checked as a
condition so as to guarantee increased security against overreaction.
The signal C BF_1: S tarti ng will be issued when the signal CBF _1: Start ing
t rig . EXT is presented to an appropriately configured binary signal input and a
general starting is present. The signal CBF _1: Tr ip signal will be issued after
timer stage CBF_1 : De la y/s tarti ng tr ig. has elapsed.
3-212 P632/EN M/R-a5-B // P632‑312‑660

3 Operation P632
CBF_1:
Delay/starting trig.
[ 022 155 ]
MAIN:
General starting t 0 CBF_1:
& Trip signal
[ 036 000 ]
[ 040 026 ]
CBF_1:
CBF_1: Starting
Starting trig. EXT
[ 038 021 ]
[ 038 016 ]
64Z1107B
Fig. 3-174: Starting trigger
3.32.12 Fault Behind CB Protection

A fault behind a CB (downstream) is a fault that may occur between a circuit
breaker already open and a CT, which is fed from the remote end.
Fault behind CB protection recognizes such faults through the current criterion, if
the circuit breaker does not provide a signal from its auxiliary contacts that it is
closed after the time delay set at C BF_1: De lay/fau lt beh. CB has elapsed.
When such a fault behind CB is recognized the signal C BF_1: Fau lt behind C B
is issued. In such a case the far end circuit breaker may be triggered by an
InterMiCOM teleprotection interface. This may also prevent an unwanted
triggering of the circuit breaker failure function.
CBF_1: CBF_1:
CB pos. implausible Delay/fault beh. CB
[ 038 210 ]
CBF_1: [ 022 171 ]
I<
[ 022 160 ]
t 0 CBF_1:
& Fault behind CB
[ 038 225 ]
I̲A &
I̲B
I̲C
MAIN:
CB1 open 3p EXT
[ 031 028 ]
MAIN:
CB1 closed 3p EXT
[ 036 051 ]
19Z6136D
Fig. 3-175: Fault behind CB protection
3.32.13 CB Synchronization Supervision

CB synchronization supervision recognizes states where not all circuit breaker
contacts are open or closed. This function uses both current flow monitoring and
evaluation of CB status signals to detect CB synchronization. In order to bridge
CB operate times the time delay CBF_1 : De lay/CB sy nc.su perv can be used.
When this time delay has elapsed the signal CBF_1: TripSig CBsy nc.super is
issued. Poles that are recognized as being ‘open’ will still be signaled.
P632/EN M/R-a5-B // P632‑312‑660 3-213

P632 3 Operation
CBF_1:
CB pos. implausible
[ 038 210 ]
MAIN:
CB1 open 3p EXT
CBF_1:
[ 031 028 ] Delay/CB sync.superv
MAIN: [ 022 172 ]
CB1 closed 3p EXT
[ 036 051 ]
CBF_1: t 0 CBF_1:
I< & TripSig CBsync.super
[ 022 160 ] [ 038 226 ]
I̲A &
I̲B
I̲C
<3
& CBF_1:
CBsync.superv A open
[ 038 227 ]
& CBF_1:
CBsync.superv B open
[ 038 228 ]
CBF_1:
& CBsync.superv C open
[ 038 229 ]
64Z1109C
Fig. 3-176: CB synchronization supervision
3-214 P632/EN M/R-a5-B // P632‑312‑660

3 Operation P632
3.33 Limit Value Monitoring (Function Group LIMIT)

The limit value monitoring function (LIMIT) monitors measured values which have
been obtained from the analog measured data inputs.
3.33.1 Enabling or Disabling the Limit Value Monitoring Function

The limit value monitoring function can be disabled or enabled via setting
parameters.
3.33.2 Monitoring the Linearized Measured DC Values

The direct current, linearized by the analog measured data input, is monitored by
two stages to determine if it exceeds or falls below set thresholds. If any of the
measured values exceed or fall below the thresholds then a signal is issued after
the associated time-delay has elapsed.
P632/EN M/R-a5-B // P632‑312‑660 3-215

P632 3 Operation
LIMIT:
General enable USER
[ 014 010 ]
0
LIMIT:
1 Enabled
0: No [ 040 074 ]
LIMIT:
1: Yes Starting IDC,lin>
[ 040 180 ]
LIMIT: LIMIT:
c IDC,lin> tIDC,lin>
[ 014 110 ] [ 014 112 ]
MAIN:
Protection active
306 001
MEASI: t 0 LIMIT:
Curr. IDC,lin. p.u. tIDC,lin> elapsed
[ 004 136 ] [ 040 182 ]
LIMIT:
Starting IDC,lin>>
[ 040 181 ]
LIMIT: LIMIT:
c IDC,lin>> tIDC,lin>>
[ 014 111 ] [ 014 113 ]
t 0 LIMIT:
tIDC,lin>> elapsed
[ 040 183 ]
LIMIT:
Starting IDC,lin<
[ 040 184 ]
LIMIT: LIMIT:
c IDC,lin< tIDC,lin<
[ 014 114 ] [ 014 116 ]
t 0 LIMIT:
tIDC,lin< elapsed
[ 040 186 ]
LIMIT:
Starting IDC,lin<<
[ 040 185 ]
LIMIT: LIMIT:
c IDC,lin<< tIDC,lin<<
[ 014 115 ] [ 014 117 ]
t 0 LIMIT:
tIDC,lin<< elapsed
[ 040 187 ]
Q9Z5021A
Fig. 3-177: Monitoring the linearized measured DC values
3.33.3 Monitoring the Measured Temperature Value

The temperature that is measured by the P632 using a resistance thermometer
is monitored by two stages to determine if it exceeds or falls below set
thresholds. If it exceeds or falls below the thresholds, a signal is issued once a
set time-delay has elapsed.
3-216 P632/EN M/R-a5-B // P632‑312‑660

3 Operation P632
LIMIT:
Starting T>
[ 040 170 ]
LIMIT:
Enabled LIMIT: LIMIT:
[ 040 074 ] c T> tT>
[ 014 100 ] [ 014 103 ]
MAIN:
Protection active
306 001
t 0
MEASI: LIMIT:
Temperature tT> elapsed
[ 004 133 ] [ 040 172 ]
LIMIT:
Starting T>>
[ 040 171 ]
LIMIT: LIMIT:
c T>> tT>>
[ 014 101 ] [ 014 104 ]
t 0 LIMIT:
tT>> elapsed
[ 040 173 ]
LIMIT:
Starting T<
[ 040 174 ]
LIMIT: LIMIT:
T< tT<
c [ 014 105 ] [ 014 107 ]
t 0 LIMIT:
tT< elapsed
[ 040 176 ]
LIMIT:
Starting T<<
[ 040 175 ]
LIMIT: LIMIT:
c T<< tT<<
[ 014 106 ] [ 014 108 ]
t 0 LIMIT:
tT<< elapsed
[ 040 177 ]
S8Z52G7A
Fig. 3-178: Monitoring the measured temperature value
P632/EN M/R-a5-B // P632‑312‑660 3-217

P632 3 Operation
3.34 Limit Value Monitoring (Function Groups LIM_1 and LIM_2)

Each of the limit value monitoring functions, LIM_1 and LIM_2, is designed for the
monitoring of the minimum and maximum phase currents for a user-selected
transformer end.
The limit value monitoring functions LIM_1 and LIM_2 can be enabled or disabled
using setting parameters.
3.34.1 Monitoring Minimum and Maximum Phase Currents

Two limit value monitoring functions (LIM_1 and LIM_2) are implemented and can
be assigned to both transformer ends.
For each limit value monitoring function, a setting parameter is provided for this
assignment by the user. The function will then monitor the minimum and
maximum phase currents for the selection. If a maximum phase current exceeds
the relevant set threshold or if a minimum phase current falls below the relevant
set threshold, a signal is issued once a set time has elapsed.
Function group LIM_1 will serve as an example to illustrate the operation of the
limit value monitoring functions in the following figures.
LIM_1:
Select. meas. input
[ 019 111 ]
I̲A,a
I̲B,a
I̲C,a 0
I̲N,a
I̲A,b
I̲B,b
I̲C,b 1
I̲N,b
I̲A,y
I̲B,y
0 1 I̲C,y
I̲N,y
0: End a
1: End b
62Z5080A
Fig. 3-179: Selection of measured values
3-218 P632/EN M/R-a5-B // P632‑312‑660

3 Operation P632
LIM_1:
General enable USER
[ 014 014 ]
1 LIM_1:
Enabled
0: No [ 040 123 ]
1: Yes
MAIN:
Protection active
306 001
LIM_1: LIM_1:
I̲A,y COMP I> tI>
I̲B,y [ 015 116 ] [ 015 120 ]
I̲C,y
I̲max LIM_1:
tI> elapsed
I̲min [ 040 122 ]
LIM_1: LIM_1:
I>> tI>>
[ 015 117 ] [ 015 121 ]
LIM_1:
tI>> elapsed
[ 037 201 ]
LIM_1: LIM_1:
I< tI<
[ 015 118 ] [ 015 122 ]
LIM_1:
tI< elapsed
[ 037 202 ]
LIM_1: LIM_1:
I<< tI<<
[ 015 119 ] [ 015 123 ]
LIM_1:
tI<< elapsed
[ 037 203 ]
64Z5081A
Fig. 3-180: Limit value monitoring of minimum and maximum phase current
P632/EN M/R-a5-B // P632‑312‑660 3-219

P632 3 Operation
3.35 Transformer Monitoring (Function Group TRMON)

Big transformers are usually fitted with one or more Buchholz relays.
A Buchholz relay detects gases that arise due to normal ageing processes of the
transformer insulation. After a sufficient amount of gas has accumulated, the
alarm contact is activated. This measurement principle has the effect that the
alarm is also activated if the filling level of the insulating oil sinks below the
mounting place of the Buchholz relay due to a leakage. Since in such a case the
filling level sinks quite rapidly, it is common to have a separate detection
hardware for this, which then issues an insulation alarm.
Additionally, a Buchholz relay monitors the rate of oil flow. In case of an inner
short-circuit fault gas arises from the fault location, and the gas pushes some
part of the insulating oil into the equalizing tank. The Buchholz relay reacts to
this by closing its release contact.
The number of such relays mounted at the transformer is dependent on the size
and construction details (e. g. 3-phase or three single-phase transformers, with or
without tap changers, etc.)
The P632 features dedicated input signals for determining the alarm and triping
signals of up to 3 Buchholz- / insulation monitoring relays. The P632 records
these input signals, issues them via the communication interfaces or converts
them to user-defined signals and / or trip commands.
It is recommended with respect to a safe transformer protection that a Buchholz
trip always directly opens the circuit breaker. This means that routing the
Buchholz trip to the P632 is advisable only for reporting purposes, or for
triggering a second, independent tripping system.
TRMON:
General enable USER
[ 018 040 ]
1 c
0: No
1: Yes
TRMON: TRMON:
Insul. Alarm 1 EXT Insul. Alarm 1
[ 016 241 ] [ 016 250 ]
TRMON: TRMON:
Buchholz Alarm 1 EXT Buchholz Alarm 1
[ 016 242 ] [ 016 251 ]
TRMON: TRMON:
Buchholz Trip 1 EXT Buchholz Trip 1
[ 016 243 ] [ 016 252 ]
TRMON: TRMON:
[ 016 244 ] [ 016 253 ]
TRMON: TRMON:
[ 016 245 ] [ 016 254 ]
TRMON: TRMON:
[ 016 246 ] [ 016 255 ]
TRMON: TRMON:
[ 016 247 ] [ 018 007 ]
TRMON: TRMON:
[ 016 248 ] [ 018 016 ]
TRMON: TRMON:
[ 016 249 ] [ 018 039 ]
49Z8942A
Fig. 3-181: TRMON transformer monitoring: Enabling, disabling and signals.
3-220 P632/EN M/R-a5-B // P632‑312‑660

3 Operation P632
3.36 Programmable Logic (Function Groups LOGIC and LOG_2)

Programmable (or user-configurable) logic enables the user to link binary signals
within a framework of Boolean equations.
Two function groups for programmable logic are available, that can be used
independently of each other. There are only two differences between these two
function groups:
● LOGIC offers 128 logical equations.
LOG_2 offers only 4 logical equations.
● On the other hand, LOG_2 features long-term timers.
For example for output 1:
o LOGIC : Time t1 outpu t 1 and L OGIC: Time t 2 ou tput 1: settable
from 0 to 600 s.
o L OG_2: Time t 1 ou tpu t 1 and LOG_2 : Time t 2 ou tpu t 1: settable
from 0 to 60,000 s.
The following description concentrates on the function group LOGIC. Where

applicable, any differences to LOG_2 are mentioned.
Binary signals in the P632 may be linked by logical “OR” or “AND” operations
with the option of additional NOT operations by setting L OGIC: Fct.assignm.
outp. 1 (or LOGI C : F ct.ass ignm . outp. 2 to L OGIC : Fct .as sign m.outp.
128, or LOG_2 : F ct .ass ignm. outp. 1 to L OG_2: Fct .as sign m. out p. 4).
The Boolean equations need to be defined without the use of brackets. The
following rule applies to the operators: “NOT” before “AND” before “OR”.
A maximum of 32 elements can be processed in one Boolean equation. In
addition to the signals generated by the P632, initial conditions for governing the
equations can be set using setting parameters, through binary signal inputs, or
through the serial interfaces.
Logical operations of the function group LOGIC can be controlled through the
binary signal inputs in different ways.
The binary input signals LOGIC: I npu t 01 E XT (or L OGIC: In put 0 2 EXT, …,
LOGIC: In put 4 0 EXT) have an updating function, whereas the input signals
LOGIC: Set 1 EXT (or LOGIC: Set 2 EXT, …, LOGI C: Set 8 EXT) are
latched. The logic can only be controlled from the binary signal inputs configured
for LOGI C: S et 1 EXT if the corresponding reset input L OGIC: Res et 1 EXT)
has been configured for a binary signal input. If only one or neither of the two
functions is configured, then this is interpreted as “Logic externally set”. If the
input signals of the two binary signal inputs are implausible (such as when they
both have a logic value of “1”), then the last plausible state remains stored in
memory. (For LOG_2, there are no such parameters for assigning binary input
signals.)
P632/EN M/R-a5-B // P632‑312‑660 3-221

P632 3 Operation
WARNING
HAZARD OF UNINTENDED EQUIPMENT OPERATION
⚫ When using the programmable logic, it is necessary to carry out a
functional type test to conform with the requirements of the relevant
protection/control application. In particular, it is necessary to verify that
the requirements for the implementation of logic linking (by setting) as
well as the time performance during startup of the P632, during operation
and when there is a fault (blocking of the P632) are fulfilled.
LOGIC:
Set 1 USER
[ 034 030 ]
0
LOGIC:
1 1 has been set
[ 034 067 ]
0: No
1: Yes
INP:
Fct. assignm. U xxx
[ xxx xxx ]
U x1
U x2
U x3
U xx
LOGIC:
Address 034 051 1 set externally
[ 034 075 ]
Address 034 059
LOGIC:
Set 1 EXT
[ 034 051 ]
LOGIC:
Reset 1 EXT
[ 034 059 ]
49Z9107A
Fig. 3-182: Control of logic operations via setting parameters or stored input signals. (The logic does not apply to
LOG_2.)
The L OGIC : Trigger 1 signal is a “triggering function” that causes a 100 ms

pulse to be issued.
3-222 P632/EN M/R-a5-B // P632‑312‑660

3 Operation P632
LOGIC:
General enable USER
LOGIC:
[ 031 099 ] Enabled
[ 034 046 ]
0: No
1: Yes
MAIN: LOGIC:
Protection active Fct.assignm. outp. 1
306 001
[ 030 000 ]
Signal 1
Signal 2
Signal 3
Signal n
LOGIC: LOGIC:
Input 01 EXT Op. mode t output 1
[ 034 000 ] [ 030 001 ]
0
LOGIC:
Input 16 EXT
[ 034 015 ] 1
2
3
LOGIC:
1 has been set 4
[ 034 067 ]
5
0 5
LOGIC:
8 has been set
[ 034 074 ] 0: Without timer stage
LOGIC:
Time t1 output 1
1: Oper./releas.delay
[ 030 002 ]
2: Oper.del./puls.dur.
LOGIC: LOGIC:
1 set externally Time t2 output 1
[ 034 075 ] 3: Op./rel.delay,retrig
[ 030 003 ]
4: Op.del./puls.dur.,rt
5: Minimum time
LOGIC:
8 set externally LOGIC:
[ 034 082 ] Output 01 (t)
[ 042 033 ]
LOGIC:
Set 1 USER
[ 034 030 ]
LOGIC:
Set 8 USER
[ 034 037 ]
LOGIC:
Trigger 1
[ 034 038 ]
0
LOGIC:
1 Output 01
[ 042 032 ]
0: No
1: Yes
LOGIC:
Trigger 8
[ 034 045 ]
1
0: No
1: Yes
D5Z52CDA
Fig. 3-183: Setting options for programmable logic, function group LOGIC (shown here for output 1).
P632/EN M/R-a5-B // P632‑312‑660 3-223

P632 3 Operation
LOG_2:
General enable USER
LOG_2:
[ 011 137 ] Enabled
[ 011 138 ]
0: No
1: Yes LOG_2:
Op. mode t output 1
[ 050 001 ]
MAIN: LOG_2:
Protection active Fct.assignm. outp. 1
306 001 [ 050 000 ] 0
1
Signal 1 2
3
Signal 2
4
Signal 3 5
0 5
Signal n
0: Without timer stage
LOG_2:
1: Oper./releas.delay Time t1 output 1
2: Oper.del./puls.dur. [ 050 002 ]
3: Op./rel.delay,retrig
LOG_2:
4: Op.del./puls.dur.,rt Time t2 output 1
5: Minimum time [ 050 003 ]
LOG_2:
Output 1 (t)
[ 052 033 ]
LOG_2:
Output 1
[ 052 032 ]
19Z80CDA
Fig. 3-184: Setting options for programmable logic, function group LOG_2 (shown here for output 1).
The output signal of an equation can be fed into a further, higher order, equation
as an input signal thus creating a sequence of interlinked Boolean equations. The
equations are processed in the sequence defined by the order of each equation.
It should be noted that in the case of overlapping equations, the result is
provided by the equation with the highest order.
The output signal of each equation is fed to a separate timer stage with two
timer elements and a choice of operating modes. This offers the possibility of
assigning a freely configurable time characteristic to the output signal of each
Boolean equation. In the Minimum time operating mode, the setting of timer
stage t2 has no effect. The following diagrams (Fig. 3-185, (p. 3-225) to
Fig. 3-189, (p. 3-227)) show the time characteristics for the various timer stage
operating modes.
If the P632 is switched to offline the equations are not processed and all outputs
are set to the “0” logic level.
3-224 P632/EN M/R-a5-B // P632‑312‑660

3 Operation P632
t2 = 0s
LOGIC:
Output n
LOGIC:
Output n (t)
t1 t1
t1 = 0s
LOGIC:
Output n
LOGIC:
Output n (t) t2 t2
t1, t2 > 0s
LOGIC:
Output n
LOGIC:
Output n (t)
t1 t2 t1 t2
D5Z50BYA
Fig. 3-185: Operating mode 1: Pickup/reset delay (Oper./releas.delay). (This diagram is also valid for LOG_2, if the
signal parameters are replaced by the corresponding ones from LOG_2 .)
t2 = 0s
LOGIC:
Output n
LOGIC:
Output n (t)
t1 t1
t1 = 0s
LOGIC:
Output n
LOGIC:
Output n (t) t2 t2
t1, t2 > 0s
LOGIC:
Output n
LOGIC:
Output n (t)
t1 t2 t1 t2
D5Z50BZA
Fig. 3-186: Operating mode 2: Pulse, delayed pickup (Oper.del./puls.dur.). (This diagram is also valid for LOG_2, if
the signal parameters are replaced by the corresponding ones from LOG_2 .)
P632/EN M/R-a5-B // P632‑312‑660 3-225

P632 3 Operation
t2 = 0s
LOGIC:
Output n
LOGIC:
Output n (t)
t1 t1
Retrigger pulse
t1 = 0s
LOGIC:
Output n
LOGIC:
Output n (t)
t2 t2
t2
Retrigger pulse
t1, t2 > 0s
LOGIC:
Output n
LOGIC:
Output n (t)
t1 t2 t1 t2
t2
t2
D5Z50CAA
Fig. 3-187: Operating mode 3: Pickup/reset delay, retriggerable (Op./rel.delay,retrig). (This diagram is also valid for
LOG_2, if the signal parameters are replaced by the corresponding ones from LOG_2 .)
t2 = 0s
LOGIC:
Output n
LOGIC:
Output n (t)
t1 t1
t1 = 0s
LOGIC:
Output n
LOGIC:
Output n (t)
t2 t2
Retrigger pulse
t1, t2 > 0s
LOGIC:
Output n
LOGIC:
Output n (t)
t1 t2 t1 t2
t1 t1
D5Z50CBA
Fig. 3-188: Operating mode 4: Pulse, delayed pickup, retriggerable (Op.del./puls.dur.,rt). (This diagram is also valid
for LOG_2, if the signal parameters are replaced by the corresponding ones from LOG_2 .)
3-226 P632/EN M/R-a5-B // P632‑312‑660

3 Operation P632
LOGIC:
Output n
LOGIC:
Output n (t)
t1 t1
D5Z50CCA
Fig. 3-189: Operating mode 5: Minimum time (Minimum time). (This diagram is also valid for LOG_2, if the signal
parameters are replaced by the corresponding ones from LOG_2 .)
Through appropriate configuration, it is possible to assign the function of a binary

input signal to each output of a logic operation. The output of the logic operation
then has the same effect as if the binary signal input to which this function has
been assigned were triggered.
P632/EN M/R-a5-B // P632‑312‑660 3-227

P632 3 Operation
LOGIC:
Sig.assig. outp. 1
[ 044 000 ]
Signal 1 EXT
[ AAA AAA ]
Signal 2 EXT
[ BBB BBB ]
Signal 3 EXT
[ CCC CCC ]
Signal n EXT
[ NNN NNN ]
Signal 1 EXT
Address AAA AAA
LOGIC: [ AAA AAA ]
Output 01
[ 042 032 ]
INP:
Fct. assignm. U xxx
[ xxx xxx ]
Address AAA AAA
-Uxxx
LOGIC:
Sig.assig.outp. 1(t)
[ 044 001 ]
Signal 2 EXT
Address BBB BBB
[ BBB BBB ]
LOGIC:
Output 01 (t)
[ 042 033 ]
INP:
Fct. assignm. U xxx
[ xxx xxx ]
Address BBB BBB
-Uxxx
D5Z52FBA
Fig. 3-190: Signal assignment to outputs of Boolean equations. (This diagram is also valid for LOG_2, if the
parameters from LOGIC are replaced by the corresponding ones from LOG_2 .)
3-228 P632/EN M/R-a5-B // P632‑312‑660

3 Operation P632
3.37 Control and Monitoring of Switchgear Units (Function

Groups DEV01 to DEV03)
The P632 is designed to control up to 3 switchgear units. The two-pole forcibly
guided termination contacts on the binary module X(6I 6O) are available for
these.
The P632 provides a bay panel concept to simplify the configuration of the
switchgear control functions. The bay panel type defines the layout of a bay with
its switchgear units on the HMI, an automated I/O assignment and the
system/bay interlocking equations for all required switchgear units. Vol. 2,
Chapter A5, (p. A5-1) provides a description of all bay types which are pre-
defined (generally for all Easergy MiCOM 30 devices) and therefore immediately
available. The selection of a bay type can be done with the parameter (220 000)
MAIN : Type of bay. (See Section 3.37.1, (p. 3-229) for some more
information.)
3.37.1 Bay Type Selection
MAIN:
Type of bay
[ 220 000 ]
MAIN:
Auto-assignment I/O
[ 221 065 ]
BB1
Q0
MAIN:
Direct motor control
306 029
MAIN:
DEVxx is a C.B.
306 044
19Z50AQA
Fig. 3-191: Bay type selection.
The bay type defines the layout of a bay with its switchgear units, an automated
I/O assignment and the system/bay interlocking equations for all required
switchgear units. Vol. 2, Chapter A5, (p. A5-1) provides a description of all bay
types, which are pre-defined (generally for all Easergy MiCOM 30 devices) and
therefore immediately available.
The selection of a bay type can be done with the parameter (220 000)
MAIN : T ype of b ay. If the user tries to select a non-existing ID, then the
selection will be rejected and an error message “Signal from device: Bay type not
assigned (0x8073)” will be reported in the “kommprot.txt” log file.
Once the user has selected a bay type, the P632 can automatically configure the
binary inputs and output relays with function assignments for the control of
switchgear units. This automatic assignment is defined via the parameter
MAIN : Auto-assign me nt I/O.
The assignment of inputs and outputs for an automatic configuration is shown in
the List of Bay Types (Vol. 2, Chapter A5, (p. A5-1)).
P632/EN M/R-a5-B // P632‑312‑660 3-229

P632 3 Operation
In general, the selection of a bay type (via M A I N : T y p e o f b a y) is accepted by

the P632 only if all of the following requirements are fulfilled:
● The selected ID number is known by the P632, i. e. is available as a
pre-defined standard bay type.
● A binary I/O module 6I 6O has been fitted to slot 7 (40 TE case) or 16
(84 TE case).
● The hardware (in particular the set of all binary I/O modules and
power supply) has got a sufficient number of inputs and outputs as
required by the selected bay type.
● Bay types with more than 3 switchgear devices are not supported by
the P632.
● None of the inputs/outputs required by the selected bay type has
been previously assigned to a non-control function.
In case of the setting M A I N : A u t o - a s s i g n m e n t I / O = Yes, the following two
constraints must be noted:
● The activation of a new bay type overwrites all DEVxx / SIG_1 /
CMD_1 assignments to I/O elements that have been previously made
(for the previous bay type definition).
● If the automatic I/O assignment fails because some required inputs
and outputs have been assigned to a non-control function, or because
the number of I/O elements available is not sufficient, then the
previously selected bay type remains active and an error message
“Signal from device: Hardware module not fitted (0x8063)” is
reported in the “kommprot.txt” log file.
3-230 P632/EN M/R-a5-B // P632‑312‑660

3 Operation P632
3.37.2 Enable for Switch Commands Issued by the Control Functions
MAIN:
Inp.asg. ctrl.enabl.
[ 221 057 ]
Signal 1
Signal 2
Signal 3
...
Signal n
Without function ≥1 MAIN:

Enable control
[ 221 058 ]
Selected signal
MAIN:
Inp.asg.interl.deact
[ 221 007 ]
Without function &
Selected signal
MAIN:
SI active USER
[ 221 002 ]
≥1 MAIN:
Subst. interl. act.
0 [ 221 000 ]
0: No
1: Yes
MAIN:
BI active USER
[ 221 003 ]
≥1 MAIN:
Bay interlock. act.
0 [ 221 001 ]
0: No
1: Yes
49Z88ABC
Fig. 3-192: General enable for switch commands issued by the control functions; activating or canceling the
interlocks.
Before a switching unit within the bay is closed or opened by the control
functions of the P632, the P632 first checks whether the switch command may be
executed. A switch command will be executed if the optional control enable has
been issued and the interlock conditions are met. The interlock conditions are
defined in the interlocking logic for each switching unit within the bay that is
subject to control actions and for each control direction (Open/Close). Different
conditions are defined for the bay interlock equations to operate with or without
station interlock. The check of bay or station interlock equations can be cancelled
for all electrically controllable switchgear units within a bay. If the station
interlock is active, it may be cancelled selectively for each switching unit and
each control direction.
The bay and station interlocks may be cancelled through an appropriately
configured binary signal input. This cancellation is effective for all of the
operating modes “Local”, “Remote” and “Remote & Local” (setting L OC : F ct .
assign. L /R k ey = R & L <-> L). In other words, the functionality of the binary
input for cancelling the bay and station interlocks is independent of the operating
mode of the control point for switching between local and remote control.
P632/EN M/R-a5-B // P632‑312‑660 3-231

P632 3 Operation
All station interlock functionality (e.g. the parameter M A I N : S I a c t i v e U S E R) is

active and available only if a communication module (i. e. a module of type “A”)
with 2 serial interfaces is fitted and either the IEC 60870‑5‑101 or ‑103
communication protocol is configured.
ILOCK:
Rset ILOCK violation
[ 221 123 ]
0 t
DEV01: ≥1 ≥1 MAIN:
Open cmd. rejection Interlock equ. viol.
⋮ [ 221 018 ]
DEVxx:
Open cmd. rejection
DEV01: ≥1
Close cmd. rejection
⋮
DEVxx:
19Z83ADA
Fig. 3-193: Rejection of the switching commands.
During a switch command is being executed, any further switch command is

rejected (“Double Command Lockout”). This includes interlocking of parallel
switching operations and further switch commands to the currently selected
switching unit.
3-232 P632/EN M/R-a5-B // P632‑312‑660

3 Operation P632
Control command Control command Control command

open / close open / close received open / close received
received from COMM1. from local HMI. from binary input.
Int. flag Int. flag Int. flag

OR (221 101) yes OR (221 101) yes OR (221 101) yes
OR (221 102) OR (221 102) OR (221 102)
OR (221 103) OR (221 103) OR (221 103)
set? set? set?
Command Command Command
rejected. rejected. rejected.
no no no
Internal flag set, Internal flag set, Internal flag set,

(221 101) set. (221 102) set. (221 103) set.
Cmd start:
Internal no
Command
parameter rejected.
check OK?
yes
no
Interlocking Command
check OK? rejected.
yes
Command Command received:

execution.
from COMM1: from local HMI: from binary input:
MAIN: MAIN: MAIN:

Command Cmd. fr. comm.interf Command from HMI Cmd. fr. electr.ctrl
termination.
221 101 221 102 221 103
Internal flag reset,

(221 101) reset,
(221 102) reset,
(221 103) reset.
19Z8123A
Fig. 3-194: “Double Command Lockout”.
3.37.3 Designation of External Devices

Each external device represented in the Bay Panel is identified by an external
device designation. The user can either select this designation from a list of over
70 pre-defined names (via the parameter D EV 0 1: D esign at. ex t. dev . in case
of DEV01, for example), or this parameter is set to Device Name User. With this
selection, a user-defined text for the name of the external device will be used as
the designation. This user-defined text has to be entered at DE V01: DEV-
Na me User (in case of DEV01, for example).
(The maximum length is 4 characters, as with the fixed identifiers. Longer text
entries are truncated to 4 characters internally.)
P632/EN M/R-a5-B // P632‑312‑660 3-233

P632 3 Operation
3.37.4 Defining a Bay Panel Type

With the selection of a Bay Panel type, the following definitions are made:
● Manually operated switchgear units with status signals to be processed.
● Switchgear units to be controlled and signaled by the P632.
● The bay interlock conditions for the “Open” / “Close” command control of
the switchgear units, for operation with or without the station interlock
function.
When a Bay Panel type is selected, the binary inputs for switchgear status
signals and the output relays for control commands are configured automatically
if MAIN : Aut o-assi gnme nt I/O is set to Yes. If set to No, the user will need to
carry out this configuration. The list of Bay Panel types in the Appendix shows
which binary inputs and output relays have been assigned signals or commands
for control of switchgear units in the case of automatic configuration.
Setting options for the P632 and the different possibilities to integrate a
switchgear unit into the functional sequence of the P632 (processing of status
signals only or controlling and signaling) will be explained below, using one
switchgear unit as an example. Function group DEV01 will be used throughout in
this example. If a signal is identified in the function diagrams by function group
“COMM1:” with a blank address [--- ---], it will indicate that it is a signal to or
from the communication interface and that it has not been assigned an address.
3-234 P632/EN M/R-a5-B // P632‑312‑660

3 Operation P632
3.37.5 Processing Status Signals from Manually Operated Switchgear

Units
DEV01:
Inp.asg. sw.tr. plug
[ 210 014 ]
Signal 1
Signal 2
⋮
Signal n
Without function ≥1
Selected signal
DEV01:
≥1 Switch. device open
DEV01:
Gr. assign. debounc. [ 210 036 ]
[ 210 011 ] & DEV01:
Switch.device closed
≥1 [ 210 037 ]
DEV01:
=1 1 Dev. interm./flt.pos
>S [ 210 038 ]
11 &
1
>R
Selected group >S &
11
◄ >R
1
c
◄
DEV01:
Open signal EXT Φ & >S
11
[ 210 030 ] Debouncing 1
>R
&
DEV01:
Closed signal EXT Chatter suppression DEV01:
[ 210 031 ] Op.time switch. dev.
[ 210 004 ]
t 0
&
DEV01:
Stat.ind.interm.pos.
[ 210 027 ]
& ≥1
0 5s 0 &
&
1
0: No ◄
1: Yes
0
0⋯3 DEV01:
Control state
0: Intermediate pos. [ 210 018 ]
1: Open
2: Closed
3: Faulty position 19Z50AJB
Fig. 3-195: Processing Status Signals from Manually Operated Switchgear Units.
3.37.5.1 Status Signals

The status signals “Open” and “Closed” are assigned to binary signal inputs. The
signals conditioned by debouncing and chatter suppression (see
Section 3.40.1.1, (p. 3-255)) are used for further processing. If no logic value of
“1” is present at any of the two binary signal inputs, the running time monitoring
function is started. For the duration of the set time period for running time
P632/EN M/R-a5-B // P632‑312‑660 3-235

P632 3 Operation
monitoring or until the contacts on the switchgear unit are back to a defined
position – either “Open” or “Closed” – the signal “Intermediate position” is
issued.
If DEV01: Int erm. pos . suppr. is set to Yes, the previous switchgear unit
status will continue to be signaled to the communication interfaces while the
switchgear unit is operating. Once the contacts on the switchgear unit have
reached their new position, the updated status is signaled accordingly to the
communication interfaces. This parameter has no impact to internal signals, such
as DEV01: Swit ch. device ope n, D EV 01: Switch.device closed or
D EV01: D ev. inte rm./f lt. pos.
The signal “Faulty position” is issued if the contacts on the switchgear unit have
not reached either their “Open” or “Closed” position after the set time period for
running time monitoring and the delay time set in MAIN: Delay
Man.Op .Supe rv. have elapsed. If DEV 01: Stat.ind.interm.pos. is set to
Yes, a delay time of 5 s is started. Once this time period has elapsed and there is
no status signal for the position, the state actually present at the binary inputs
will be signaled.
3.37.5.2 Switch Truck

For switchgear units mounted on switch trucks with switch truck plugs, it is
possible to configure a single-pole status signal from the switch truck plug. If
such a configuration has been assigned, the status signal for the position of the
associated switchgear unit is set to “Open” while the input has a logic value of
“1”.
3.37.6 Functional Sequence for Controllable Switchgear Units
3.37.6.1 Local or Remote Control of External Devices

Switchgear units can be controlled from a remote location or locally. The
selection of the control point is described in Section 3.4.5, (p. 3-12). Usually,
remote control is carried out via the communication interface, local control via
the keys on the local control panel. Moreover, switchgear units can be controlled
via binary inputs configured appropriately (configuration via
D EV01: Inp.asg.el.ctrl.ope n or DEV01: In p.a sg.el.ct r.close). The setting
MAIN : Electrical control determines whether the inputs function as remote or
local control points.
Dependent on the respective position of control the P632 will issue the following
logic state signals:
● MA IN : C md. fr. comm.i nt e rf, or
● MA IN : C omm and f rom H MI, or
● MA IN : Cmd. fr. ele ctr.ctrl
Additionally the following state signals are issued and entered into the operating
data memory:
● D EV01: Open cm d. recei ved
● D EV01: C lose cmd. recei ved
The operating mode of the control point is signaled as follows:
“Remote” “Local” “Remote & Local”

L OC: Rem.acc.block.active No Yes No
L OC: Loc.acc.bl ock. active Yes No No
3-236 P632/EN M/R-a5-B // P632‑312‑660

3 Operation P632
3.37.6.2 Selection of the Switchgear Unit to be Controlled and Generating a

Switching Request
LOC:
Loc.acc.block.active
[ 221 005 ]
LOC:
Return t. illum. trg
305 550
MAIN:
Interlock equ. viol.
[ 221 018 ]
MAIN: 1)
Device selection key
[ 006 001 ]
DEV01:
DEV01 Open request
307 000
MAIN: 1)
Device OPEN key DEV01:
[ 006 002 ] Close request
MAIN: 1) 307 001
Device CLOSE key

[ 006 003 ]
MAIN:
Electrical control
[ 221 061 ]
2: Local
1: Remote
LOC:
[ 221 004 ]
DEV01:
Inp.asg.el.ctrl.open
[ 210 019 ]
Signal 1
Signal 2
Signal 3
Signal n
Selected signal
DEV01:
Inp.asg.el.ctr.close
[ 210 020 ]
Selected signal
COMM1: DEV01:
Open command DEV01 Open cmd. received
[ --- --- ] [ 218 000 ]
COMM1: DEV01:
Close command DEV01 Close cmd. received
[ --- --- ]
[ 218 001 ]
DEV01: MAIN:
Latching time Cmd. fr. comm.interf
[ 210 005 ] [ 221 101 ]
DEV01:
End open command
307 002
DEV01:
End close command
307 003
MAIN:
End command
306 028 DEV01:
Latching time elaps.
307 012
DEV01:
Latching time runn.
307 011
1)Selected signal
63Z80AAA
Fig. 3-196: Generating a switching request.
P632/EN M/R-a5-B // P632‑312‑660 3-237

P632 3 Operation
The switchgear unit to be controlled is selected and the switching command is

sent to this selected switchgear unit. This can be carried out via the local control
panel using the selection key and pressing the “Open” or “Close” key to
generate the switching request.
Note that the front panel HMI on the P632 does not feature specific keys for
switching functions. If at this point mention of a “selection key” is made, then this
would be a function key to which a specific function has been assigned – in this
example M A I N : D e v i c e s e l e c t i o n k e y. See Section 6.9, (p. 6-11), particularly
Section 6.9.2, (p. 6-13).
For control via binary inputs, the appropriate control inputs need to be
configured for switchgear units selected to be controlled. For control via the
communication interface, the control commands “Open” or “Close” will also
address the switchgear unit to be controlled.
3-238 P632/EN M/R-a5-B // P632‑312‑660

3 Operation P632
3.37.6.3 Enabling Switching Commands
DEV01:
Open request
DEV01:
Close request
DEV01:
Fct.asg.BI w/o SI op
[ 210 041 ]
ILOCK:
Output 1
[ 250 032 ]
⋮
ILOCK:
Output 32
[ 250 063 ] & DEV01:
ILOCK: Enable BI open
Output 1 & ≥1
MAIN:
Bay interlock. act. &
DEV01:
[ 221 001 ] Fct.asg.BI w/o SI cl
[ 210 042 ] & ≥1 DEV01:
Open cmd. rejection
MAIN:
Subst. interl. act. ≥1
[ 221 000 ]
MAIN:
Communication error
[ 221 019 ] & DEV01:
ILOCK: Enable BI close
Output 2 & ≥1
DEV01:
Open w/o stat.interl ≥1
[ 210 025 ]
&
↗ 1: Yes & ≥1 DEV01:
DEV01:
Close w/o stat. int. ≥1
[ 210 026 ]
&
↗ 1: Yes DEV01:
Fct.assig.BIwSI open
[ 210 039 ]
ILOCK:
Output 3 &
DEV01:
Fct.assig.BIwSI clos
[ 210 040 ]
ILOCK:
Output 4 &
&
&
DEV01:
Enable SI Open
DEV01:
Enable SI Close 19Z50AEB
Fig. 3-197: Assignment of the equations of the interlocking logic to the switching commands; enabling of switching
commands by the bay interlock function.
Before a switching command is executed, the P632 checks the interlocking

conditions defined in the interlocking logic to determine whether a switching
command is permitted or not. Bay interlock conditions for operation with or
without the station interlock function can be defined. The assignment of an
output relay from the interlocking logic to a switching command determines the
interlocking conditions that define, for example, the conditions for the “Open”
command for operation without the station interlock function.
P632/EN M/R-a5-B // P632‑312‑660 3-239

P632 3 Operation
3.37.6.4 Bay Interlock for Operation with the Station Interlock Function
MAIN:
Communication error
[ 221 019 ]
DEV01:
Close request
307 001
DEV01:
Open request
307 000
MAIN:
Bay interlock. act.
[ 221 001 ]
DEV01:
Enable BI open
307 004
DEV01:
Enable BI close
307 005 COMM1:
Open request DEV01
MAIN:
[ --- --- ]
Subst. interl. act.
[ 221 000 ]
DEV01:
Open w/o stat.interl
[ 210 025 ] DEV01:
Enable SI Open
307 019
0
0: No
1: Yes
COMM1: COMM1:
Enable SI open DEV01 Close request DEV01
[ --- --- ] [ --- --- ]
DEV01:
Close w/o stat. int.
[ 210 026 ]
DEV01:
Enable SI Close
307 020
0: No
1: Yes
COMM1:
Enabl.SI close DEV01
[ --- --- ]
19Z50AFA
Fig. 3-198: Enabling of the switching commands by the station interlock.
For the station interlock function conditions to be interrogated, there needs to be

a communication link with the substation control level. If the P632 detects a
communication error or if there is no communication interface available, there
will be an automatic switch to bay interlock without the station interlock function.
If there is to be a check on the bay interlock and the station interlock function,
the bay interlock will be checked first. If bay interlocking issues a switching
enable, a switching request will be sent to the substation control level. At
substation control level, there will then be a check – taking into account the
station interlock functions – as to whether switching is permitted or not. If the
substation control level also issues an enabling command, the switching
operation is carried out provided that the enable from the bay interlock is still
present. Optionally, the “Open” or “Close” switching operation can be carried out
without checking the station interlock function conditions. In this case, the bay
interlock conditions defined for operation without station interlock functions will
be considered.
3-240 P632/EN M/R-a5-B // P632‑312‑660

3 Operation P632
3.37.6.5 Linking Protection Commands to Switching Commands

For circuit breakers, the “Open” command can be linked to the protection trip
signals.
The Bay Panel type defines which of the switchgear units are circuit breakers.
The trip (open) or close commands of the protection functions are executed
directly without a check of the interlocking conditions.
DEV01:
With gen. trip cmd.1
[ 210 021 ]
MAIN:
DEVxx is a C.B.
306 044
0
DEV01:
1 Protection trip cmd.
307 013
0: No
1: Yes
MAIN:
Gen. trip command 1
[ 036 071 ]
DEV01:
With gen. trip cmd.2
[ 210 022 ]
0: No
1: Yes
MAIN:
Gen. trip command 2
[ 036 022 ]
DEV01:
With close cmd./prot
[ 210 023 ]
1 DEV01:
Protect. close cmd.
307 014
0: No
1: Yes
63Z75FNA
Fig. 3-199: Linking to the protection commands.
P632/EN M/R-a5-B // P632‑312‑660 3-241

P632 3 Operation
3.37.6.6 Issue of Switching Commands
DEV01:
Protection trip cmd.
DEV01:
Protect. close cmd.
↗ MAIN:
Cmd. dur.long cmd.
[ 221 230 ]
↗ MAIN:
Cmd. dur. short cmd.
[ 221 231 ]
DEV01:
Oper. mode cmd.
[ 210 024 ]
1 & 1
t
2
& 1
t
3
1: Long command
2: Short command
3: Time control
& 1
t
& 1
t DEV01:
MAIN: ≥1 Open command
Device on-line [ 210 028 ]
&
[ 003 030 ]
DEV01:
↗ 0: No (= off) & ≥1 Close command
& [ 210 029 ]
MAIN:
Mon. mot. drives tr.
[ 221 056 ]
MAIN:
Enable control
[ 221 058 ]
MAIN:
Bay interlock. act. ≥1
[ 221 001 ]
&
DEV01:
Enable BI open
DEV01:
Enable SI Open
DEV01:
Open cmd blocked
DEV01:
Open request
&
≥1
&
DEV01:
Enable BI close
DEV01:
Enable SI Close
DEV01:
Close cmd blocked
DEV01:
Close request
63Z70AGB
Fig. 3-200: Issue of switching commands.
Dependent on the operating mode (set at DEV 0 1: Ope r. mode cmd.) set for
commands, switching commands are issued for the set timer durations or
according to time control.
3.37.6.7 External Termination Control

If the operating mode Time control was selected it is possible to intervene in the
control process of external switchgear units by using external termination
contacts. It will then be necessary to set the P632 at MAIN: W. ext. cmd.
ter min. to Yes and binary signal inputs must be configured so they can be
3-242 P632/EN M/R-a5-B // P632‑312‑660

3 Operation P632
connected to the external termination contacts. The input configuration has to be

done for each device separately. Be aware that an external command
termination does not make sense for a fast switch as a circuit breaker, as its
operation is edge-controlled and involves no motor being directly time-controlled
(contrast to a disconnector drive).
P632/EN M/R-a5-B // P632‑312‑660 3-243

P632 3 Operation
3.37.6.8 Switch Truck

For switchgear units mounted on switch trucks with switch truck plugs, it is
possible to configure a single-pole status signal from the switch truck plug. If
such a configuration has been assigned, the status signal for the position of the
associated switchgear unit is set to ‘Open’ while the input has a logic value of
“1”.
3-244 P632/EN M/R-a5-B // P632‑312‑660

3 Operation P632
3.37.6.9 Time Control of Switching Commands
DEV01:
Inp.asg. sw.tr. plug
[ 210 014 ]
Signal 1
Signal 2
⋮
Signal n
Without function ≥1
Selected signal
DEV01:
≥1 Switch. device open
DEV01:
Gr. assign. debounc. [ 210 036 ]
[ 210 011 ] & DEV01:
≥1 [ 210 037 ]
DEV01:
=1 1 Dev. interm./flt.pos
>S [ 210 038 ]
11 &
1
>R
Selected group >S &
11
◄ >R
1
≥1 DEV01:
End open command
c
≥1 DEV01:
◄ End close command
DEV01:
Open signal EXT Φ & >S
11
[ 210 030 ] Debouncing 1
>R
&
DEV01:
Closed signal EXT Chatter suppression DEV01:
[ 210 031 ] Op.time switch. dev.
[ 210 004 ]
◄ ◄
MAIN: t 0
Direct motor control & ≥1 ≥1
DEV01: &
Open command &
DEV01:
[ 210 028 ] Switch. device runn.
DEV01: &
Close command DEV01:
Stat.ind.interm.pos.
[ 210 029 ]
& [ 210 027 ]
DEV01:
Start runn.time mon.
& & ≥1
0 5s 0 &
&
1
0: No ◄
1: Yes
0
0⋯3 DEV01:
DEV01: Control state
StartCmdTime superv. [ 210 018 ]
0: Intermediate pos.
[ 210 007 ]
1: Open
2: Closed
19Z80AKB
t 0 3: Faulty position MAIN:

& Startcmdtime exceed.
& [ 221 112 ]
≥1
Fig. 3-201: Monitoring of switching commands.
After sending an Open / Close command, running time monitoring for the
switchgear unit is started.
The P632 expects that the switchgear unit has reached its intermediate position
within a period of time that can be configured via DE V0 1: Start C mdTime
superv. (for DEV01, respective setting parameters exist for the other DEVxx). If
P632/EN M/R-a5-B // P632‑312‑660 3-245

P632 3 Operation
the switchgear unit has not reached its intermediate position after this time has
elapsed then the command is deactivated and an exceeded timer is flagged by
the signal M AI N: Startcmdti me e xcee d.. In case of a switchgear unit for
which it is (almost) impossible to detect the intermediate position (for example a
Circuit Breaker) it is recommended to switch off this monitoring by setting the
parameter to Blocked.
Moreover, the P632 expects a status signal – “Open” or “Closed” to be issued by
the switchgear unit within the duration of running time monitoring. The status
signal for the position of the contacts on the switchgear unit is present at
appropriately configured binary inputs on the P632, which can be set to
debouncing and chatter suppression mode (see Section 3.40.1.1, (p. 3-255)). For
the duration of running time monitoring or until the contacts on the switchgear
unit are back to a defined position – either “Open” or “Closed” – the signal
“Intermediate position” is issued.
If DEV01: Inte rm. p os. s uppr. is set to Yes, the previous switchgear unit
status will continue to be signaled to the communication interfaces while the
switchgear unit is operating. Once the contacts on the switchgear unit have
reached their new position, the updated status is signaled accordingly to the
communication interfaces. This parameter has no impact to internal signals, such
as DEV01: Swit ch. device ope n, D EV 01: Switch.device closed or
D EV01: D ev. inte rm./f lt. pos.
If the contacts on the switchgear unit have not reached either their “Open” or
“Closed” position after the set time period for running time monitoring has
elapsed the signal Faulty position is issued. If DEV0 1: Stat.ind.inter m.pos. is
set to Yes, a delay time of 5 s is started. Once this time period has elapsed and
there is no status signal for the position, the state actually present at the binary
inputs will be signaled.
If the operating mode without external termination contacts was selected
(MAIN: W. e xt . cmd. termin .. is set to No) the switching command is
terminated after the set latching time has elapsed, when either the ‘Open’ or
‘Closed’ position status signal is received or the set time period for running time
monitoring has elapsed (see Fig. 3-196, (p. 3-237)).
If the operating mode with external termination contacts was selected
(MAIN: W. e xt . cmd. termin .. is set to Yes) the switching command is
terminated, after the set latching time has elapsed, when a termination
command is issued while the set time period for running time monitoring is
active.
3-246 P632/EN M/R-a5-B // P632‑312‑660

3 Operation P632
DEV01:
Close command
[ 210 029 ]
3
1
DEV01:
Switch. device open
[ 210 036 ]
DEV01:
[ 210 037 ]
1 3 4
10 ms DEV01: DEV01:
Latching time Op.time switch. dev.
[ 210 005 ] [ 210 004 ]
19Z5201B
Fig. 3-202: Sequence for time control of switching commands without external termination control, example for
switching operation “close”.
DEV01:
Close command
[ 210 029 ]
DEV01:
3
Switch. device open
[ 210 036 ]
DEV01:
[ 210 037 ]
DEV01:
Inp. asg. end Close
[ 210 016 ]
1 3
10 ms DEV01:
Latching time
[ 210 005 ]
19Z5202B
Fig. 3-203: Sequence for time control of switching commands with external termination control, example for
switching operation “close”.
P632/EN M/R-a5-B // P632‑312‑660 3-247

P632 3 Operation
3.37.6.10 Monitoring the Number of CB Operations Permitted

The maximum number of CB operations within a specific time period may be set
with parameter MAI N: CB 1 max. ope r. cap. Associated with this parameter is
the counter at MAI N: CB1 act. ope r. cap. to which the maximum number of
CB operations permitted is assigned as soon as the positive edge of an event is
present that has been selected by a “1 out of n” parameter at MAIN: CB1
read y fct .assig n.
The number of CB operations permitted, set with the counter at MAIN: CB1
act . op er. cap. are then decremented by 1 with each CB operation. Operation
of the CB is recognized from the contact position signals DEV0 1: Switch.
dev ice op en and D EV01 : Sw itch .de vice clos e d.
The counter at MAI N: CB1 act. ope r. cap. may only be decremented to a
value of 1. Reaching a value of 1 will in no way effect the protection or control
functionality, in particular there will be no blocking of CB operation! When a CB
fault has occurred (i.e. MA IN: CB1 fau lty E XT is set to Yes) the counter
MAI N: CB1 act . oper. cap. is immediately set to 1.
3-248 P632/EN M/R-a5-B // P632‑312‑660

3 Operation P632
3.38 Interlocking Logic (Function Group ILOCK)

The switching commands to the controllable switchgear units in the bay are
enabled only after interlock conditions have been checked. The interlock
conditions are defined in the form of Boolean equations in the interlocking logic
function.
The choice of the bay type automatically defines the bay interlock conditions (or
equations) for the ‘Open’ and ‘Close’ operations of the individual switchgear units
in the bay. The bay interlock equations for operation with station interlock differ
from the bay interlock equations for operation without station interlock. These
automatically defined interlock conditions – determined by the choice of bay type
– can be modified by the user at any time to fit particular station requirements.
The following signals acquired by the P632 are linked by logic operations for the
bay interlock:
● Function blocks 1 and 2
● Programmable logic outputs
● Switchgear position signals, after debouncing and chatter suppression
● Single-pole signals, after debouncing and chatter suppression
A maximum of 32 equations with 32 equation elements each are available to
define interlock conditions. The Boolean equations need to be defined without
the use of brackets. The following rule applies to the operators: “NOT” before
“AND” before “OR”. The output signal of one equation can be fed into a higher-
order equation as an input thus creating a sequence of interlinked Boolean
equations.
P632/EN M/R-a5-B // P632‑312‑660 3-249

P632 3 Operation
ILOCK:
Fct.assignm. outp.01
[ 250 000 ]
MAIN:
[ 221 015 ]
MAIN:
[ 221 023 ]
MAIN:
K200 fail. cmd. end
[ 221 108 ]
MAIN:
K200 fail. cmd.start
[ 221 109 ]
MAIN:
DEV op.time exceeded
[ 221 110 ]
LOGIC:
Output 01
[ 042 032 ]
LOGIC:
Output 01 (t)
[ 042 033 ]
DEV01:
Switch. device open
[ 210 036 ]
DEV01:
[ 210 037 ]
DEV01:
Dev. interm./flt.pos
[ 210 038 ]
SIG_1:
Logic signal S001
[ 226 005 ]
GOOSE:
Ext.Dev01 closed
[ 109 002 ]
GOOSE:
Ext.Dev01 interm.pos
[ 109 003 ]
ILOCK:
Output 1
[ 250 032 ]
& ≥1
ILOCK:
Output 1
[ 250 032 ]
49Z9112B
Fig. 3-204: Interlocking logic as illustrated for equation 1.
3.38.1 IEC 61850 Reporting

As the interlock conditions are also transmitted together with reporting in the
IEC 61850 communication protocol it is a requirement that these interlock
conditions are cyclically checked and not only with the request for a switching
operation.
Therefore the parameter (221 104) IL OCK: Cycl e t inte rl.check allows for
setting the cycle time (range from 100 ms to 10 s), after which a check of the
interlock conditions is carried out. If this parameter is set to blocked (default
value), the ILOCK signals over IEC 61850 will be updated only if a control
command gets executed. If the DEV state changes without a control command
3-250 P632/EN M/R-a5-B // P632‑312‑660

3 Operation P632
these signals remain unchanged. As additional processor capacity must be

provided for each of these checks it must be ensured that a favorable
compromise is found for the cycle time setting value. On the one hand it is
desirable to select a cycle time value which is as short as possible so that
changes in the interlock conditions are updated without any notable delays, but
on the other hand this cycle time value should not be so short that the P632
system will be under too much strain. As the P632 CPU load is dependent on the
total number of function groups having been configured it is not possible to
suggest a generally acceptable cycle time value.
P632/EN M/R-a5-B // P632‑312‑660 3-251

P632 3 Operation
3.39 Single-Pole Commands (Function Group CMD_1)

Commands may be transmitted to the P632 via the communications interface.
When the P632 receives such a command, and if the remote control mode is
enabled, an appropriately configured output relay will be triggered and a signal
issued.
The user can select the operating mode for each 1-pole command. The following
settings are possible:
● Long command
● Short command
● Persistent command
If the operating mode Long command or Short command has been selected the
output relay will be triggered for the time period set at MAIN: Cmd. dur. long
cmd. or MA IN : Cmd . dur. s h ort cmd..
The setting options and the functional sequence are shown in the example for
Command C001. This will apply accordingly to all other single-pole commands.
MAIN:
Cmd. dur.long cmd. OUTP:
[ 221 230 ] Fct.assignment K xxx
[ xxx xxx ]
MAIN:
Cmd. dur. short cmd.
[ 221 231 ]
K x1
CMD_1: CMD_1:
Command C001 config. Oper. mode cmd. C001 K x2 -K xxx
[ 200 004 ] [ 200 002 ]
K x3
K xx
0 1
1 2 Address 200 001 &
0: No 3
1: Yes
1: Long command
2: Short command
3: Persistent command
CMD_1:
& 1 ≥1 Command C001
& t [ 200 001 ]
COMM1:
Command C001
[ - - - - - - ]
LOC:
[ 221 004 ]
& 1
t
&
19Z50ALB
Fig. 3-205: Functional sequence for single-pole commands, as illustrated for Command C001.
3-252 P632/EN M/R-a5-B // P632‑312‑660

3 Operation P632
3.40 Single-Pole Signals (Function Group SIG_1)

Binary, single-pole signals issued by the system may be transmitted by the P632
via its appropriately configured binary signal inputs to the control station.
Such single-pole input signals are conditioned by debouncing and chatter
suppression (see Section 3.40.1.1, (p. 3-255)). This conditioned signal is then
presented as SI G_1: L ogi c s ign al S00 1 (to SIG_1: L ogic s ignal S012).
Signaling behavior via the communications interface is determined by selecting
the operating mode. The following settings are possible:
● Without function
● Start/end signal
● Transient signal
If setting Without function has been selected then no message is transmitted
when the signal state at the binary signal input changes. If setting Start/end
signal has been selected then a message is transmitted every time the signal
state at the binary signal input changes. A requirement for transmission of the
“Start signal” message is that the logic “1” signal is present for the set minimum
time period. If setting Transient signal has been selected then a message is
transmitted every time the signal state at the binary signal input changes form
logic “0” to logic “1”.
The following figure displays setting modes and the functional sequence with the
example for logic signal S001. This will apply accordingly to all other single-pole
signals.
P632/EN M/R-a5-B // P632‑312‑660 3-253

P632 3 Operation
SIG_1: SIG_1:
Signal S001 config. Gr.asg. debounc.S001
[ 226 007 ] [ 226 003 ]
0: No Selected group
1: Yes
Debouncing SIG_1:
Logic signal S001
SIG_1: [ 226 005 ]
Signal S001 EXT
[ 226 004 ]
Chatter suppression
SIG_1:
Min. sig. dur. S001
[ 226 002 ]
COMM1:
Signal S001,log
[ --- ---]
SIG_1:
Oper. mode sig. S001
[ 226 001 ]
0: Without function
1: Start/end signal
2: Transient signal
19Z50AMA
Fig. 3-206: Functional sequence for single-pole signals with the example for logic signal S001.
3.40.1 Acquisition of Binary Signals for Control

In the acquisition of signals for control purposes, the functions real time
acquisition (time tagging), debouncing and chatter suppression are included as
standard. Each of these signals can be assigned to one of three groups and for
each of these groups the debouncing time and chatter suppression can be set.
Matching of these two parameters achieves the suppression of multiple spurious
pickups.
3-254 P632/EN M/R-a5-B // P632‑312‑660

3 Operation P632
SIG_1:
Gr.asg. debounc.S001
[ 226 003 ]
1
MAIN:
Debounce time gr. 1
2
[ 221 200 ]
3 MAIN:
Chatt.mon. time gr.1
1: Group 1 [ 221 201 ]
2: Group 2 MAIN:
Change of state gr.1
3: Group 3 [ 221 202 ]
SIG_1:
Signal S001 EXT
[ 226 004 ]
SIG_1:
Debouncing Debounced sign. M001
310 044
and
DEV01: DEV01:
Closed signal EXT Chatter suppression Debounced cl. signal
[ 210 031 ] 310 045
Group 1
DEV01: DEV01:
Open signal EXT Debounced op. signal
[ 210 030 ] 310 046
DEV01:
Gr. assign. debounc.
[ 210 011 ]
1: Group 1
2: Group 2
3: Group 3
64Z7034A
Fig. 3-207: Group assignment and setting of debouncing and chatter suppression, illustrated for group 1
3.40.1.1 Debouncing and Chatter Suppression
3.40.1.1.1 Debouncing
Telegram with
time tag 1s 2e
Signal sequence
time tag
F0Z5011B
Fig. 3-208: Signal flow with debouncing when time tagging occurs with the 1st pulse edge (e.g. parameter
M A I N : T i m e t a g set to the value 1stEdge,OpMem unsort or 1stEdge,OpMem sorted.) Example: Set debouncing
time: 50 ms, s: start, e: end.
The first pulse edge of a signal starts a timer stage running for the duration of
the set debouncing time. Each pulse edge during the debouncing time re-triggers
the timer stage.
If the signal is stable until the set debouncing time elapses, a telegram
containing the time tag of the first pulse edge is generated. As an alternative the
time tag may be generated after debouncing by setting parameter MAIN: Tim e
t ag to the value After debounce time.
P632/EN M/R-a5-B // P632‑312‑660 3-255

P632 3 Operation
After the set debouncing time has elapsed, the state of the signal is checked. If it
is the same as prior to the occurrence of the first pulse edge, no telegram is
generated.
Time-tagged entries of the first pulse edge are only generated after debounce
time has elapsed. If these entries are saved without delay (setting of
MAIN : Time tag to the value 1stEdge,OpMem unsort) they are not necessarily
saved in chronological order in the operating data memory. If above parameter
has been set to the value 1stEdge,OpMem sorted then all entries are always
saved in chronological order in the operating data memory.
Time Tag
The following overview illustrates how the (221 098) MAIN: Time tag setting is
operating.
3-256 P632/EN M/R-a5-B // P632‑312‑660

3 Operation P632
Acquisition of binary signals for control

1) 1)
0 T1 T2
Voltage present at input terminals:

Filter function to suppress transient interferences (required number of steps with
active signal) [F]
3)
(226 004) SIG_1 : Signal S001 EXT
}
(no time tag, internal signal to start debouncing)2)
1stEdge,OpMem sorted:
(226 005) SIG_1: Logic signal S001
● on COMM1/IEC T L
(Signaling at T2 with time tag T1

T=L
● internal on operating memory
(Entry in operating memory at T2 with time tag T2
1stEdge,OpMem unsort:
● on COMM1/IEC T L

T L
After debounce time:

● on COMM1/IEC T=L
T=L
T = Time tag
L = Log of state
1) T2 = T1 (cycle time) + debounce time

2) SIG_1: Signal S00 1 EXT is not foreseen for any further transmission via communication
interface, neither for assigning to functions nor LOGIC.
3) Filter (e. g. 3 sampling steps)
P632/EN M/R-a5-B // P632‑312‑660 3-257

P632 3 Operation
3.40.1.1.2 Chatter Suppression
Telegram with
time tag 1s 2e 3s 4e
Signal sequence
20ms 200ms
20ms 200ms
20ms 200ms
200ms
time tag
Debouncing
F0Z5012A
Fig. 3-209: Signal flow for debouncing and chatter suppression. Set debouncing time: 20 ms, set chatter monitoring
time: 200 ms, number of admissible signal changes: 4, s: start, e: end.
Sending of the first telegram starts a timer stage running for the duration of the
set monitoring time. While the timer stage is elapsing, telegrams are generated
for the admissible signal changes. The number of admissible signal changes can
be set. After the first “inadmissible” signal change, no further telegrams are
generated and the timer stage is re-triggered. While the timer stage is elapsing,
it is re-triggered by each new signal change. Once the timer stage has elapsed,
each signal change triggers a telegram.
3-258 P632/EN M/R-a5-B // P632‑312‑660

3 Operation P632
3.41 Binary Counts (Function Group COUNT)

The P632 features four binary counters. Each of these can count the positive
pulse edges of a binary signal present at an appropriately configured binary
signal input. Such a binary signal can be provided with debouncing.
3.41.1 Enable/Disable the Counting Function

The counting function (COUNT) can be disabled or enabled via setting
parameters.
3.41.2 Debouncing
Count
Signal sequence
50ms
19Z50APA
Fig. 3-210: Debouncing signal flow. Set debouncing time: 50 ms.
The first positive pulse edge of the binary input signal to be counted will trigger a
timer stage which will continue to run for the set debouncing time period. Each
positive pulse edge during the debouncing time re-triggers the timer stage. The
binary input signal will be counted if it is stable during the set debouncing time
period.
The debouncing time can be set separately for each of the four counters.
After the set debouncing time has elapsed, the state of the signal is checked. If it
is the same as prior to the occurrence of the first pulse edge, it will not be
counted.
3.41.3 Counting Function

The debounced binary signal is counted by a 16 bit counter. The counters may
be set to a specific count value (preload function) by setting a parameter or via
the serial interfaces. The values of the counters can be shown on the LC-display
and read out via the PC interface or the communications interface.
For each of the four counters, there is a limit value that can be optionally set:
● COUN T: Limi t coun ter 1 (and the same way for counters 2 to 4),
● settable from 1 to 65000,
● setting “Blocked” disables the limit check. (This setting is the default
value.)
A warning signal (C OUNT: Warn in g cou nt 1 and the same way for counters 2
to 4) is issued if the associated counter value exceeds the set limit.
3.41.4 Transmitting the Counter Values via Communications Interface

The counter values are transmitted via the communications interface when a
signal is presented to an appropriately configured binary signal input, a trigger
signal is issued by a setting parameter or at cyclic intervals as set at the cycle
time stage COUNT: Cycl e t.cou nt trans m. When the counter value is
transmitted at cyclic intervals, then transmission is time synchronized if the ratio
P632/EN M/R-a5-B // P632‑312‑660 3-259

P632 3 Operation
60/(set cycle time) comes to an integer. In all other cases the counter values are
transmitted at time intervals determined by a free running internal clock.
3.41.5 Counter Values Reset
COUNT:
General enable USER
[ 217 000 ]
0
COUNT:
1 Enabled
0: No [ 217 001 ]
MAIN: 1: Yes
Device on-line COUNT:
[ 003 030 ] Count 1
1: Yes (= on) [ 217 100 ]
COUNT: COUNT:
Debounce t. count. 1 m CT=m Count 1
[ 217 160 ] [ 217 100 ]
+
COUNT: Debouncing
Set counter 1 EXT
R
[ 217 130 ]
COUNT:
Transmit counts USER
[ 217 008 ]
0
COUNT:
1 Transmit counts
[ 217 010 ]
0: don't execute
1: execute
C
COUNT:
Transmit counts EXT
[ 217 009 ]
COUNT:
Cycle t.count transm
C
[ 217 007 ] COMM1:
Count 1
[ --- --- ]
G
COUNT:
Reset USER
[ 217 003 ]
= 0 min
0
COUNT:
1 Reset
[ 217 005 ]
0: don't execute
1: execute
COUNT:
Reset EXT
[ 217 004 ]
MAIN:
General reset USER
[ 003 002 ] 1
1: execute
MAIN:
General reset EXT
[ 005 255 ]
19Z82ANA
Fig. 3-211: Binary Count. (This diagram shows counter 1 as an example. The displayed logic is also valid for
counters 2 to 4, where C O U N T : S e t c o u n t e r 1 E X T and C O U N T : C o u n t 1 have to be replaced by the
respective parameters.
The counter values may be reset – all at once – by setting parameter

C OUNT: Re se t U SER or via an appropriately configured binary signal input as
well as by the general reset action.
3-260 P632/EN M/R-a5-B // P632‑312‑660

P632
4 Design
The P632 is available in different types of cases and with different combinations
of modules.
Irrespective of the type a P632 is equipped with a detachable HMI or a fixed local
control panel. The local control panel is covered with a tough film so that the
specified degree of IP protection will be maintained. In addition to the essential
control and display elements, a parallel display consisting of multi-colored LED
indicators is also incorporated (see Section 6.2, (p. 6-2)). The meaning of the
various LED indications is shown in plain text on a label strip.
The PC interface (9-pin D-Sub female connector) is located under the hinged
cover at the bottom of the local control panel.
P632/EN M/R-a5-B // P632‑312‑660 4-1

P632 4 Design
4.1 Designs
The P632 is available in a surface-mounted and a flush-mounted case. Depending
on the connection type – pin-terminal or ring-terminal connection – the case sizes
differ. The location diagrams (Section 5.7, (p. 5-26)) show the available
combinations of case widths and connection types.
Electrical connections are made via plug-in threaded terminal blocks. The
threaded terminal blocks in the surface-mounted case are accessible from the
front of the device after unscrewing the torx head steal screws on the sides (see
Fig. 4-1, (p. 4-3), ➀) and removing the local control panel. The local control
panel can then be secured by inserting the tabs in the slots in the left side wall
(see Fig. 4-1, (p. 4-3), ➁). The flush-mounted case is connected at the back of
the case.
WARNING
HAZARD OF EQUIPMENT DAMAGE
⚫ The local control panel (or front element) is connected to processor
module P by a plug-in connecting cable. Make sure the connector position
is correct. Do not bend the connecting cable!
Failure to follow these instructions can result in equipment damage
or unintended equipment operation.
DANGER
⚫ Do not open the secondary circuit of live system current transformers! If
the secondary circuit of a live CT is opened, there is the danger that the
resulting voltages will endanger personnel and damage the insulation.
⚫ For pin-terminal connection devices, the terminal block for system current
transformer connection is not a shorting block! Therefore always short-
circuit the system current transformers before loosening the threaded
terminals.
injury.
4-2 P632/EN M/R-a5-B // P632‑312‑660

4 Design P632
Fig. 4-1: Surface-mounted case, removal of local control panel (or – in case of a detachable HMI – the case front
panel). The illustration shows the 84TE case with (fixed) local control panel.
P632/EN M/R-a5-B // P632‑312‑660 4-3

P632 4 Design
4.2 Dimensional Drawings
4.2.1 Dimensional Drawings for the 40 TE Case
147.5
177.5
184.5
‑X6
213.4 257.1
242.6
260.2
Fig. 4-2: Surface-mounted 40 TE case. (Dimensions in mm.)
4-4 P632/EN M/R-a5-B // P632‑312‑660

4 Design P632
177.5
‑X6
227.9
213.4 253.6
203.0
155.4
159.0
168.0
5.0
5.0
181.3
Fig. 4-3: Flush-mounted case 40 TE with panel opening, flush-mount method 1 (without angle brackets).
(Dimensions in mm.)
101.6
177.5
‑X6
213.4 227.9
242.6 253.6
260.2
6.4
186.5
101.6
224.5
242.6
Fig. 4-4: Flush-mounted case 40 TE with panel opening, flush-mount method 2 (with angle brackets and frame).
(Dimensions in mm.)
The device has increased mechanical robustness if flush-mount method 2 (with

angle brackets and frame) is used for the flush-mounted case.
P632/EN M/R-a5-B // P632‑312‑660 4-5

P632 4 Design
4.2.2 Dimensional Drawings for the 84 TE Case
147.5
177.5
184.5
‑X6
434.8 257.1
464.0
481.6
Fig. 4-5: Surface-mounted 84 TE case. (Dimensions in mm.)

177.5
‑X6
227.9
434.8 253.6
284.9
259.0
25.9
159.0
168.0
5.0
5.0
410.0
Fig. 4-6: Flush-mounted case 84 TE with panel opening, flush-mount method 1 (without angle brackets).
(Dimensions in mm.)
4-6 P632/EN M/R-a5-B // P632‑312‑660

4 Design P632
101.6
177.5
‑X6
434.8 227.9
253.6
464.0
481.6
6.4
186.5
101.6
445.9
464.0
Fig. 4-7: Flush-mounted case 84 TE with panel opening, flush-mount method 2 (with angle brackets and frame).
(Dimensions in mm.)
The device has increased mechanical robustness if flush-mount method 2 (with

angle brackets and frame) is used for the flush-mounted case.
4.2.3 Detachable HMI
Fig. 4-8: View of case 40 TE for connection of detachable HMI.
Fig. 4-9: View of case 84 TE for connection of detachable HMI.
P632/EN M/R-a5-B // P632‑312‑660 4-7

P632 4 Design
107.3
177.5
‑X6
20.7
206.0
46.3
197.5
192.5
148.0
168.0
3.0
181.3
Fig. 4-10: Detachable HMI with panel opening.
4-8 P632/EN M/R-a5-B // P632‑312‑660

4 Design P632
4.3 Hardware Modules

The P632 is constructed from standard hardware modules. The following table
gives an overview of the modules relevant for the P632.
Key:
● ●: standard equipment,
● ○: optional,
● ☐: depending on order,
● *: Module is not depicted in the terminal connection diagrams (Section 5.7,
(p. 5-26)).
● →xx: Module has to be fitted into slot number xx.
● 1st→xx, 2nd→yy [etc.]: If several modules of the same type may be ordered,
these must be fitted into the appropriate slots in a particular order: If only
one has been ordered it must be fitted into slot xx (i. e. slot yy is not
permitted). If two modules have been ordered these must be fitted into
slots xx and yy, etc.
P632/EN M/R-a5-B // P632‑312‑660 4-9

P632 4 Design
Type Item Index Description Width P632 P632

Number ‑413 ‑414
A(CH1 009650356 A ff Communication module 4TE ○ ○

CH2) (for RS 485 wire connection)

CH2) (for plastic fiber)

CH2) (for glass fiber, ST connector)
A(SEB LC) 009652162 A ff Single IP Ethernet Board 4TE ○ ○

(100 Mbit/s, glass fiber LC connector, 2nd
wire RJ45)
A(SEB 009652161 A ff Single IP Ethernet Board 4TE ○ ○

RJ45) (100 Mbit/s, wire RJ45)
A(REB LC) 009652160 A ff Redundant IP Ethernet Board 4TE ○ ○

(100 Mbit/s, glass fiber LC connector,
HSR/PRP switchable, 2nd wire RJ45)
A(REB 009652159 A ff Redundant IP Ethernet Board 4TE ○ ○

RJ45) (100 Mbit/s, wire RJ45, HSR/PRP switchable,
2nd wire RJ45)
B 000336187 D ff * Bus module 4TE ●

(digital, for 40 TE device)
B 000336188 C ff * Bus module 4TE ●

(digital, for 84 TE device)
B 000337870 D ff * Bus module (analog) 4TE ● ●
L 009651473 C ff * Local control module 4TE ☐ ☐

(DHMI text display, European)
L 009651474 B ff * Local control module 4TE ☐ ☐

(DHMI text display, Cyrillic)
L 009650561 D ff * DHMI Adapter Board 4TE ☐ ☐
L 009650563 F ff * Processor Unit Adapter Board 4TE ☐ ☐
P 009651571 * Processor Unit 4TE ● ●
T(4J) 009650328 A ff * Transformer module 4 x J 8TE ●

(pin connection)
T(4J) 009650329 A ff * Transformer module 4 x J 8TE ●

(ring connection)
4-10 P632/EN M/R-a5-B // P632‑312‑660

4 Design P632

Number ‑413 ‑414
T(4J 1V) 009650311 A ff * Transformer module 4 x J, 1 x V 8TE ●

(pin connection)
T(4J 1V) 009650325 A ff * Transformer module 4 x J, 1 x V 8TE ●

(ring connection)
V(4I 8O) 009651534 B ff Power supply module 24 ... 60 V DC, standard 4TE ☐ ☐
variant
(switching threshold 18 V)
V(4I 8O) 009651536 B ff Power supply module 24 ... 60 V DC, 4TE ☐ ☐

switching threshold 73 V



V(4I 8O) 009651544 B ff Power supply module 60 ... 250 V DC / 100 ... 4TE ☐ ☐
230 V AC, standard variant
230 V AC, switching threshold 73 V
X(24I) 000337612 A ff Binary I/O module 4TE ○ ○

(24 binary inputs), Standard variant with
switching threshold at 65% of 24 VDC
(VA,min)

(24 binary inputs), Special variant with
(VA,nom)

(VA,nom)
P632/EN M/R-a5-B // P632‑312‑660 4-11

P632 4 Design

Number ‑413 ‑414

(VA,nom)

(VA,nom)
X(4H) 009651493 B ff Binary module 4TE ○ ○

(4 high-break contacts)
X(6I 3O) 009651512 B ff Binary I/O module 4TE ○ ○

(6 binary inputs, 3 output relays), Standard
variant with switching threshold at 65% of 24
VDC (VA,min)

(6 binary inputs, 3 output relays), Special
variant with switching threshold at 65% of
110 VDC (VA,nom)

127 VDC (VA,nom)

220 VDC (VA,nom)

250 VDC (VA,nom)
X(6I 6O) 000337377 E ff Binary I/O module 4TE ○ ○

VDC (VA,min)
X(6I 6O) 009651305 A ff Binary I/O module 4TE ○ ○

110 VDC (VA,nom)
4-12 P632/EN M/R-a5-B // P632‑312‑660

4 Design P632

Number ‑413 ‑414

127 VDC (VA,nom)

220 VDC (VA,nom)

250 VDC (VA,nom)
X(6I 8O) 000336971 D ff Binary I/O module 4TE ○ ○

VDC (VA,min)

110 VDC (VA,nom)

127 VDC (VA,nom)

220 VDC (VA,nom)

250 VDC (VA,nom)
X(6O) 000336973 B ff Binary module (6 output relays) 4TE ○ ○
Y(4I) 000337406 D ff Analog I/O module, standard variant 4TE ○ ○

Y(4I) 009651307 A ff Analog I/O module, switching threshold 73 V 4TE ○ ○
P632/EN M/R-a5-B // P632‑312‑660 4-13

P632 4 Design
The space available for the modules measures 4 HE in height by 40 TE or 84 TE

in width (HE = 44.45 mm, TE = 5.08 mm).
The location of the individual modules and the position of the threaded terminal
blocks in the P632 are shown in the location figures and terminal connection
diagrams (Section 5.7, (p. 5-26)).
4-14 P632/EN M/R-a5-B // P632‑312‑660

P632
5 Installation and Connection
DANGER
⚫ When electrical equipment is in operation, dangerous voltage will be
present in certain parts of the equipment.
injury.
DANGER
area.
in operation.
must be employed.
injury.
P632/EN M/R-a5-B // P632‑312‑660 5-1

P632 5 Installation and Connection
WARNING
HAZARD OF UNSAFE OPERATION
⚫ The user should be familiar with the warnings in the Safety Guide
(SFTY/5LM/L11 or later version) before working on the equipment.
⚫ The user should be familiar with the safety messages in Chapter 5,
Chapter 10, Chapter 11 and Chapter 12 and with the content of Chapter 13
of this technical manual, before working on the equipment.
⚫ Any modifications to this device must be in accordance with the manual. If
any other modification is made without the express permission of
Schneider Electric, it will invalidate the warranty, and may render the
product unsafe.
The signals MAI N: Bl ocked/faulty and SFMON: War ning (LED) are
permanently assigned to the LEDs labeled OUT OF SERVICE and ALARM and can
be assigned to output relays to indicate the health of the device.
It is recommended that the signals MA IN: Blocke d/faulty and
SFMON : Wa rning ( LED) are communicated to the substation automation
system for alarm purposes, using hardwiring via output relays or the
DANGER
In case of usage of the equipment with DHMI:
⚫ A protective conductor (ground/earth) of at least 1.5 mm2 (US: AWG14 or
thicker) must be connected to the DHMI protective conductor terminal to
link the DHMI and the main relay case; these must be located within the
same substation.
⚫ The DHMI communication cable must not be in contact with hazardous live
parts.
⚫ The DHMI communication cable must not be routed or placed alongside
high-voltage cables or connections. Currents can be induced in the cable
which may result in electromagnetic interference.
⚫ We recommend to use only cables of category CAT6 (or better), which has
been tested up to a length of 10 m.
injury.
5-2 P632/EN M/R-a5-B // P632‑312‑660

5 Installation and Connection P632
WARNING
HAZARD OF EQUIPMENT DAMAGE OR LIFETIME REDUCTION
⚫ The instructions given in the Section 5.5, (p. 5-14) (“Protective and
Operational Grounding”) should be noted. In particular, check that the
protective ground connection is secured with a tooth lock washer, as per
the diagram “Installing the protective grounding conductor terminal” (Fig.
5-8. (p. 5-15)).
⚫ If a cable screen is added to this connection or removed from it, then the
protective grounding should be checked again.
Failure to follow these instructions can result in death, serious injury
or equipment damage.
WARNING
⚫ Do not sustain exposure to high humidity during storage, the value shall
not exceed 75 % relative humidity.
⚫ Once the device has been unpacked, it is recommended to energize it
within the three following months.
⚫ The device has to be energized at least once in 4 years, if it is not in
permanent operation.
⚫ Where electrical equipment is being installed, sufficient time should be
allowed for acclimatization to the ambient temperature of the environment
before energization.
Failure to follow these instructions can result in equipment damage,
unintended equipment operation or reduction of equipment lifetime.
P632/EN M/R-a5-B // P632‑312‑660 5-3

5.1 Unpacking and Packing

All P632 devices are packaged separately into dedicated cartons and shipped
with outer packaging. Use special care when opening cartons and unpacking
devices, and do not use force. In addition, make sure to remove supporting
documents and the type identification label supplied with each individual device
from the inside carton. The design revision level of each module included in the
device when shipped can be determined from the list of components (assembly
list). This list of components should be filed carefully.
After unpacking, each device should be inspected visually to confirm it is in
proper mechanical condition.
If the P632 needs to be shipped, both inner and outer packaging must be used. If
the original packaging is no longer available, make sure that packaging conforms
to DIN ISO 2248 specifications for a drop height ≤ 0.8 m.
5-4 P632/EN M/R-a5-B // P632‑312‑660

5.2 Checking Nominal Data and Design Type

The nominal data and design type of the P632 can be determined by checking
the type identification label (see below). One type identification label is located
under the upper hinged cover on the front panel and a second label can be found
on the inside of the device. Another copy of the type identification label is fixed
to the outside of the P632 packaging.
Px3x-xxxxxxxx-3xx-4xx-6xx-7xx- 48 - 250 V
9xx-8xx Vx-
100 - 230 V
SER No. 3xxxxxxx /xx/xx
In 1/5A 50 / 60Hz
E.Serial No. 3.xxxxxx.x
E.Reg No. STxxxxxxxxx Vn 50 - 130V
Fig. 5-1: Example of the type identification label of a device from the Easergy MiCOM 30 family.
The P632 design version can be determined from the order number. A
breakdown of the order number is given in Chapter “Order Information”
(Chapter 15, (p. 15-1)).
P632/EN M/R-a5-B // P632‑312‑660 5-5

5.3 Location Requirements

The P632 has been designed to conform to EN 60255-6. Therefore it is important
when choosing the installation location to make certain that it provides the
operating conditions as specified in above DIN norm sections 3.2 to 3.4. Several
of these important operating conditions are listed below.
5.3.1 Environmental Conditions
Ambient temperature: -5 °C to +55 °C [+23 °F to +131 °F]

Air pressure: 800 to 1100 hPa
Relative humidity: The relative humidity must not result in the formation of
either condensed water or ice in the P632.
Ambient air: The ambient air must not be significantly polluted by dust,
smoke, gases or vapors, or salt.
Solar Radiation: Direct solar radiation on the front of the device must be
avoided to ensure that the LC-Display remains readable.
5.3.2 Mechanical Conditions
Vibration stress: 10 to 60 Hz, 0.035 mm and 60 to 150 Hz, 0.5 g

Earth quake resistance: 5 ... 8 Hz, 3.5 mm / 1.5 mm, 8 ... 35 Hz, 5 m/s²,
3 x 1 cycle
5.3.3 Electrical Conditions for Auxiliary Voltage of the Power Supply
Operating range: 0.8 to 1.1 VA,nom with a residual ripple of up to 12 % VA,nom
5.3.4 Electromagnetic Conditions

Substation secondary system design must follow the best of modern practices,
especially with respect to grounding and EMC.
5-6 P632/EN M/R-a5-B // P632‑312‑660

5.4 Installation
The dimensions and mounting dimensions for surface-mounted cases are given
in Section 4.2, (p. 4-4). When the P632 is surface-mounted on a panel, the wiring
to the P632 is normally run along the front side of the mounting plane. If the
wiring is to be at the back, an opening can be provided above or below the
surface-mounted case. Fig. 5-2, (p. 5-7) shows such an opening.
D5Z50MBA
Fig. 5-2: Opening (cutout) for running the connecting leads to an 40 TE surface-mounted case.
The opening width for the 40 TE surface-mounted case: 213 mm (shown in this
figure), for the 84 TE surface-mounted case: 435 mm. The other dimensions are
the same for all cases.
Flush-mounted cases are designed for control panels. The dimensions and
mounting dimensions are given in Chapter “Design”. When the P632 is mounted
on a cabinet door, special sealing measures are necessary to provide the degree
of protection required for the cabinet (IP 51).
Connection of protective grounding conductor: See “Protective and Operational
Grounding” (Section 5.5, (p. 5-14))
Instructions for selecting the flush-mount method:

The P632 has increased mechanical robustness if either the surface-mounted case
or – for the flush-mounted case – flush-mount method 2 (with angle brackets and
frame) is used. In this case, test severity class 2 of the vibration test, test severity
class 2 of the shock response test on operability as well as test severity class 1 of
the shock response test on permanent shock are applied additionally.
Dimensions of the panel cutouts:

Dimensional drawings of the panel cutouts for all cases and for the detachable HMI
can be found in Section 4.2, (p. 4-4).
P632/EN M/R-a5-B // P632‑312‑660 5-7

For flush-mount method 1 (without angle brackets and frame), the procedure is
as follows:
Before the P632 can be installed into a control panel, the local control panel (or
the front element of the case for devices with detachable display) must be taken
down. The local control panel is removed as described below:
1. Remove both top and bottom hinged flaps from the device. (Lift/lower
both hinged flaps 180° up/down. Hold them in the middle and bend them
slightly. The side mountings of both hinged flaps can then be disengaged.)
2. Remove the M3.5 screws (see Fig. 5-3, (p. 5-9)).
3. Then remove the local control panel.
WARNING
Then remove the lower M4 screws and only loosen the upper M4 screws (see
Fig. 5-3, (p. 5-9)). Now insert the P632 into the panel opening from the rear so
that the upper M4 screws fit into the corresponding holes. Then tighten all the
M4 screws. After this, replace the local control panel.
NOTICE
⚫ When replacing the local control panel, take care not to tighten the screws
with too much strength! (Fastening torque 1.5 to 1.8 Newton meters).
⚫ If the control panel thickness is ≥ 2 mm, the longer screws as enclosed
within the device packing must be used.
Failure to follow these instructions can result in equipment damage.
5-8 P632/EN M/R-a5-B // P632‑312‑660

Merely loosen the For panels with a

upper screws and thickness ≥ 2 mm,
hook device on side replace the M3 bolts
plates to mount with the enclosed
longer M3 bolts
< 3 mm
M4
M3.5
Remove the lower

screws completely
prior to mounting
12Y6181B
Fig. 5-3: Installation of a case into a control panel. Flush-mount method 1 (without the angle brackets and frame ).
Example for a device with a 40 TE case.
NOTICE
⚫ The equipment provides increased mechanical robustness if either the
surface-mounted case or for the flush-mounted case flush-mount method 2
(with angle brackets and frame, see Fig. 5-5, (p. 5-10)) is used.
DANGER
⚫ Secure connection of protective grounding conductor: See Section 5.5, (p.
5-14).
injury.
For flush-mount method 2 (using the angle brackets and frame), the procedure is
as follows:
P632/EN M/R-a5-B // P632‑312‑660 5-9

1. Remove the screws as shown in Fig. 5-4, (p. 5-10), ➀ and mount the
enclosed angle brackets using these same screws.
2. Then push the device into the control panel cutout from the front.
3. Secure the device to the control panel by using the enclosed M6 screws
(see Fig. 5-5, (p. 5-10)).
4. Assemble the cover frame and snap-fasten onto the fixing screws.
45Z5058A
Fig. 5-4: Mounting the angle brackets.
Angle brackets
M6
B6
6.4
M6 x 15
Height: 204mm
for
Frame 280mm
Width:
E case
the 40T
12Y6183B
Fig. 5-5: Installation of a case into a control panel, flush-mount method 2 (with angle brackets and frame). Example
for a device in a 40 TE case.
5-10 P632/EN M/R-a5-B // P632‑312‑660

The cover frame width of the 40 TE surface-mounted case is: 280 mm, of the
84 TE case is: 486 mm. The cover frame height is for all cases: 204 mm.
NOTICE
⚫ The equipment provides increased mechanical robustness if either the
surface-mounted case or for the flush-mounted case flush-mount method 2
(with angle brackets and frame, see Fig. 5-5, (p. 5-10)) is used.
DANGER
5-14).
injury.
A rack mounting kit can be used to combine a flush-mounted 40 TE case with a

second sub-rack to form a 19″ mounting rack (see Fig. 5-6, (p. 5-12)). The
second sub-rack can be another device, for example, or an empty sub-rack with a
blank front panel. Fit the 19″ mounting rack to a cabinet as shown in Fig. 5-7,
(p. 5-13).
P632/EN M/R-a5-B // P632‑312‑660 5-11

Connection flange
Tapped bush
Bolt
61Y5077A
Fig. 5-6: Combining 40 TE flush-mounted cases to form a 19″ mounting rack.
DANGER
5-14).
injury.
5-12 P632/EN M/R-a5-B // P632‑312‑660

Covering flange
Rack frame
61Y5078A
Fig. 5-7: Installing the P632 in a cabinet with a 19″ mounting rack.
DANGER
5-14).
injury.
P632/EN M/R-a5-B // P632‑312‑660 5-13

5.5 Protective and Operational Grounding
DANGER
⚫ The device must be reliably grounded to meet protective equipment
grounding requirements.
⚫ The surface-mounted case is grounded using the bolt and nut,
appropriately marked, as the ground connection. The flush-mounted case
must be grounded in the area of the rear sidepieces at the location
provided. The bracket is marked with the protective ground symbol: .
The cross-section of the ground conductor must conform to applicable
national standards. A minimum cross section of 2.5 mm² (≤ AWG12) is
required.
⚫ In addition, a protective ground connection at the terminal contact on the
power supply module (identified by the letters “PE” on the terminal
connection diagram) is also required for proper operation of the device.
The cross-section of this ground conductor must also conform to applicable
national standards. A minimum cross section of 1.5 mm² (US: AWG14 or
thicker) is required.
⚫ If a detachable HMI is installed, a further protective conductor (ground/
earth) of at least 1.5 mm² (US: AWG14 or thicker) must be connected to
the DHMI protective conductor terminal to link the DHMI and the main
relay case; these must be located within the same substation.
⚫ All grounding connections must be low-inductance, i.e. it must be kept as
short as possible.
⚫ The protective conductor (earth) must always be connected to the
protective grounding conductor terminal in order to guarantee the safety
given by this setup.
injury.
5-14 P632/EN M/R-a5-B // P632‑312‑660

1
2 1
3
2
4
4
PE terminal PE terminal
surface-mount. case flush-mount. case
Pos. Description Pos. Description
1 Nut M4 1 Nut M4
2 Tooth lock wash.A4.3 2 Tooth lock wash.A4.3
3 Clamp bracket 3 Clamp bracket
4 Bolt M4 4 Bolt M4
19Y5220B
Fig. 5-8: Installing the protective grounding conductor terminal.
P632/EN M/R-a5-B // P632‑312‑660 5-15

5.6 Connection
The P632 Transformer Differential Protection Device must be connected in
accordance with the terminal connection diagram as indicated on the type
identification label. The relevant terminal connection diagrams that apply to the
P632 are to be found either in the supporting documents supplied with the
device, or in Section 5.7, (p. 5-26).
In general copper conductors with a cross section of 2.5 mm² (US: AWG12) are
sufficient to connect a system current transformer to a current input on the P632.
To reduce CT knee-point voltage requirements, it may be necessary to install
shorter copper conductors with a greater cross section between the system
current transformers and the current inputs on the P632. Copper conductors
having a cross section of 1.5 mm² (US: AWG14) are adequate to connect binary
signal inputs, the output relays and the power supply input.
All connections run into the system must always have a defined potential.
Connections that are pre-wired but not used should preferably be grounded when
binary inputs and output relays are isolated. When binary inputs and output
relays are connected to common potential, the pre-wired but unused connections
should be connected to the common potential of the grouped connections.
DANGER
⚫ When increased-safety machinery is located in a hazardous area the
device must always be installed outside of this hazardous area to protect
this equipment.
injury.
5.6.1 Connecting Measuring and Auxiliary Circuits
5.6.1.1 Power Supply

Before connecting the auxiliary voltage VA for the P632 power supply, it must be
ensured that the nominal value of the auxiliary device voltage corresponds with
the nominal value of the auxiliary system voltage.
DANGER
⚫ The power supply must be turned off for at least 5 s before power supply
module V is removed. Otherwise there is the danger of an electric shock.
injury.
5.6.1.2 Current-Measuring Inputs

When connecting the system transformers, it must be ensured that the
secondary nominal currents of the system and the device correspond.
5-16 P632/EN M/R-a5-B // P632‑312‑660

DANGER
terminals.
injury.
5.6.1.3 Connecting the Measuring Circuits

The system current transformers must be connected in accordance with the
standard schematic diagram shown in Fig. 5-9, (p. 5-18). It is essential that the
grounding configuration shown in the diagram be followed. If the CT or VT
connection is reversed, this can be taken into account when making settings (see
Chapter 7, (p. 7-1)).
P632/EN M/R-a5-B // P632‑312‑660 5-17

A
B
C
1U
2U
1IA
1IB
1IC
1IN
2IA
2IB
2IC
2IN
P632
A B C
62Z5084B
Fig. 5-9: Standard schematic connection diagram for the P632
5-18 P632/EN M/R-a5-B // P632‑312‑660

5.6.1.4 Connecting a Resistance Thermometer

A resistance thermometer can be connected if the device is fitted with analog
module Y. This analog I/O module input is designed to connect a PT 100
resistance thermometer. The PT 100 should be connected using the 3-wire
method (see Fig. 5-10, (p. 5-19)). No supply conductor compensation is
required in this case.
PT 100
P632
S8Z52H9A
Fig. 5-10: Connecting a PT 100 using the 3-wire method.
5.6.1.5 Connecting Binary Inputs and Output Relays

The binary inputs and output relays are freely configurable. When configuring
these components it is important to note that the contact rating of the binary I/O
modules (X) varies (see Section 2.5.7, (p. 2-12)).
Once the user has selected a bay type, the P632 can automatically configure the
binary inputs and output relays with function assignments for the control of
switchgear units. The standard configuration of binary inputs and output relays
for each bay type is given in the list of bay types to be found in the Appendix
(see Vol. 2, Chapter A5, (p. A5-1)).
The polarity for connected binary signal inputs is to be found in the terminal
connection diagrams (see supporting documents supplied with the device or in
Section 5.7, (p. 5-26)). This is to be understood as a recommendation only.
Connection to binary inputs can be made as desired.
5.6.1.6 Connecting Trip and Close Command Relays

Standard outputs of Px30 aren't supposed to open DC current flowing through
inductive CB coil. This task has to be addressed by properly applied CB auxiliary
contacts (52a/b).
P632/EN M/R-a5-B // P632‑312‑660 5-19

Kxx CB
MICOM P30 52a
49Z9005A
Fig. 5-11: Example of trip circuit wiring.
In order to ascertain that the inductive coil current is switched off from the CB
auxiliary contacts, the setting of minimum pulse duration for trip commands
(MA IN : M in .dur. t rip cm d. 1 etc.) and close command need to consider the
operating times of the circuit breaker and its auxiliary contacts. Sufficient margin
has to be applied for pulse duration. A common setting is to double operating
time of the circuit breaker, e.g. for a CB trip operation time top of 100 ms, the
minimum trip pulse time should be 0.2 s (see the following figure).
CB Closed (52a)
top
CB's operating time
tmop= 2*top
MAIN:
Min.dur. trip cmd. 1
49Z9006A
Fig. 5-12: Example of trip pulse timing.
This of course also applies to device open/close command outputs operated with
fix (short or long) command duration (e.g. DEVxx Oper. mode cmd. = Short
command).
If the Px30 output contact triggers an auxiliary relay which opens or closes the
CB consecutively, then it should be verified, that the make/continuous/break coil
currents of this auxiliary relay are within the limit values given in Section 2.5.7,
(p. 2-12).
Note: Upon testing such command outputs, the CB (or equivalent auxiliary
components) must not be mechanically locked, so that the auxiliary 52a/b
contact could operate and break the DC current. If the CB has to stay locked,
tripping or closing circuit has to be opened by terminal disconnection or test
switch.
5-20 P632/EN M/R-a5-B // P632‑312‑660

5.6.2 Connecting the IRIG‑B Interface

An IRIG‑B interface for time synchronization is available with the Ethernet board.
It is connected by a BNC connector. Demodulated and modulated signals can be
used.
5.6.3 Connecting the Communication Interfaces
5.6.3.1 PC Interface
The PC interface is provided so that personnel can operate the device from a
personal computer (PC).
DANGER
⚫ The PC interface is not designed as a permanent connection.
Consequently, the female connector does not have the extra insulation
from circuits connected to the system that is required per IEC/EN
60255-27. Therefore DO NOT leave any permanent cable connection on
the PC interface connector at the HMI front panel.
injury.
WARNING
UNEXPECTED EQUIPMENT OPERATION
⚫ Do not use a PC with active termination on any connection pin of the
RS232 interface. Wrong termination can drive the device to delay
operating actions from the HMI as long as this wrong termination is active
on the PC interface.
5.6.3.2 Communication Interfaces

The communication interfaces are provided as a permanent connection of the
device to a control system for substations or to a central substation unit.
Depending on the type, communication interface 1 on the device is connected
either by a special fiber-optic connector or an RS 485 interface with twisted pair
copper wires. Communication interface 2 is only available as an RS 485 interface.
The selection and assembly of a properly cut fiber-optic connecting cable
requires special knowledge and expertise and is therefore not covered in this
operating manual.
P632/EN M/R-a5-B // P632‑312‑660 5-21

DANGER
⚫ Do not connect or disconnect the RS 485 or fiber-optic interface when the
supply voltage for the device is under power and in operation.
injury.
An RS 485 data transmission link between a master and several slave devices
can be established by using the optional communication interface. The
communication master could be, for instance, a central control station. Devices
linked to the communication master, e.g. P632, are set-up as slave devices.
The RS 485 interface available on the P632 was designed so that data transfer in
a full duplex transmission mode is possible using a 4-wire data link between
devices. Data transfer between devices using the RS 485 interface is set up only
for a half duplex transmission mode. To connect the RS 485 communication
interface the following must be observed:
● Only twisted pair shielded cables must be used, that are common in
telecommunication installations.
● At least one symmetrical twisted pair of wires is necessary.
● Conductor insulation and shielding must only be removed from the core in
the immediate vicinity of the terminal strips and connected according to
national standards.
● All shielding must be connected to an effective protective ground surface at
both ends.
● Unused conductors must all be grounded at one end.
A 4‑wire data link as an alternative to a 2-wire communications link is also
possible. A cable with two symmetrical twisted pair wires is required for a 4-wire
data link. A 2-wire data link is shown in Fig. 5-13, (p. 5-23), and a 4-wire data
link is shown in Fig. 5-14, (p. 5-24) as an example for channel 2 on the
communication module. The same is valid if channel 1 on the communication
module is available as a RS 485 interface.
2-wire data link:
The transmitter must be bridged with the receiver on all devices equipped
electrically with a full duplex communication interface, e.g. the P632. The two
devices situated at either far end must have a 200 to 220 Ω resistor installed to
terminate the data transmission conductor. In devices from the Easergy MiCOM
30 family, and also in the P632, a 220 Ω resistor is integrated into the RS 485
interface hardware and can be connected with a wire jumper. An external
resistor is therefore not necessary.
4-wire data link:
Transmitter and receiver must be bridged in the device situated on one far end
of the data transmission conductor. The receivers of slave devices, that have an
electrically full-duplex communication interface as part of their electrical system,
e.g. the P632, are connected to the transmitter of the communication master
device, and the transmitters of slave devices are connected to the receiver of the
master device. Devices equipped electrically with only a half duplex RS 485
communication interface are connected to the transmitter of the communication
master device. The last device in line (master or slave device) on the data
transmission conductor must have the transmitter and receiver terminated with
a 200 to 220 Ω resistor each. In devices from the Easergy MiCOM 30 family, and
also in the P632, a 220 Ω resistor is integrated into the RS 485 interface
5-22 P632/EN M/R-a5-B // P632‑312‑660

hardware and can be connected with a wire jumper. An external resistor is

therefore not necessary. The second resistor must be connected externally to the
device (resistor order number see Chapter “Accessories and Spare Parts”).
-X9/-X10
200 ... 220 Ω
− 1 −
D1[T] + 2 + D2[R]
− 4 −
D2[R] + 5 + D1[T]
XXXX P632
First participant Last participant

connect. to the line connect. to the line
(e.g. the master)
-X9/-X10 1 2 3 4 5
− + − + − + − +
D2[R] D1[T] D2[R] D1[T]
P632 XXXX
Device with half-

duplex interface
19Z6480C
Fig. 5-13: 2-wire data link. (Note: the setting M A I N : C h a n n . a s s i g n . C O M M 1 / 2 decides about whether -X9
(=channel 1) or -X10 (=channel 2) is used.)
P632/EN M/R-a5-B // P632‑312‑660 5-23

-X9/-X10
200 ... 220 Ω
D1[T] D2[R]
D2[R] D1[T]
XXXX P632
First participant Last participant
connect. to the line connect. to the line
(e.g. the master)
-X9/-X10
D2[R] D1[T] D2[R] D1[T]
P632 XXXX
Device with half-

duplex interface
19Z6481B
Fig. 5-14: 4-wire data link. (Note: the setting M A I N : C h a n n . a s s i g n . C O M M 1 / 2 decides about whether -X9
(=channel 1) or -X10 (=channel 2) is used.)
For CH1/CH2 connection diagram, please refer to Section 5.7, (p. 5-26)
5-24 P632/EN M/R-a5-B // P632‑312‑660

5.6.3.3 Ethernet Board Connection

The diagram and the related tables below show the Interface arrangement of
Ethernet board, as they are the fiber/copper connectors and IRIG‑B connector.
B A ETH
ACT
LNK
A ETH
ACT
LNK
ETH A
ETH A
ETH B
ETH A
ETH B
ETH C
ETH C
ETH C
ETH C
IRIG B
IRIG B
IRIG B
IRIG B
Fig. 5-15: SEB Fiber. Fig. 5-16: SEB Fig. 5-17: REB Fiber. Fig. 5-18: REB
Copper. Copper.
Connector Connections
ETH A Fiber/Copper
ETH B Fiber/Copper
ETH C Copper
IRIG-B Demodulated (DC IRIG-B)/ Modulated (AC IRIG-B)
Tab. 5-1: Connector functionality.
LED Function On Off Flashing
Green Link Link o.k. Link broken

Yellow Activity Packets received/ emitted
Tab. 5-2: LED functionality.
P632/EN M/R-a5-B // P632‑312‑660 5-25

5.7 Location and Connection Diagrams
5.7.1 Location Diagrams P632‑413/414

Location diagram for P632 in 40 TE case
● Pin-terminal connection (P632 ‑413)
01 02 03 04 05 06 07 08 09 10
P A T T X X V X
CH1 4J 4J 6I 24I 4I 4H
CH2 1V 6O 8O
A X Y X
SEB 6I 4I 6O
LC/ 8O
RJ45
X
6I
A 3O
REB
LC/
RJ45
01 02 03 04 05 06 07 08 09 10
Location diagram for P632 in 84 TE case

● Ring-terminal connection (P632 ‑414)
01 02 03 04 05 06 07 08 09 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21
P A T T X X X V
CH1 4J 4J 24I 6I 4H 4I
CH2 1V 6O 8O
A Y X X
SEB 4I 6I 6O
LC/ 8O
RJ45
X
6I
A 3O
REB
LC/
RJ45
01 02 03 04 05 06 07 08 09 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21
Each of the numbered slots can be fitted with max. 1 module.

If a location diagram shows several modules for a particular slot, then these are
alternatives, depending on the ordering options.
5.7.2 Terminal Connection Diagrams P632‑413/414
“_” is a placeholder for the slot.

See also Section 5.5, (p. 5-14), “Protection Conductor Terminal (PCT) / Case
Grounding / Protective Earth”
5-26 P632/EN M/R-a5-B // P632‑312‑660

Transformer Type T Transformer Type T Power supply Type V Binary Type X

module 4J 1V module 4J module 4I 8O module 24I
Ring Pin Voltage measuring Ring Pin Ring Pin Signal inputs
input
X0_1 X0_1 X__1 X__1 X__1 X__1
Output relays Vin
1 1 1 1 U_01
13 1 V̲
T5 2 2 K_01 2 2
14 2
U_02
3 3 3 3
U_03
15 3 4 4 4 4
U_04
5 5 5 5
16 4 U_05
6 6 K_02 6 6
U_06
7 7 7 7
U_07
8 8 8 8
U_08
9 9 K_03 9 9
Current measuring Ring Pin Current measuring

inputs inputs X__2
X__2
X0_2 X0_1 X0_2 10 1 Vin
10 1 U_09
1 1 xI̲A 1 1 xI̲A 11 2 K_04
► Tx1 ► Tx1 12 3 K_05
11
12
2
3
U_10
2 2 2 2
13 4 K_06 U_11
xI̲B xI̲B 13 4
3 3 3 3
► Tx2 ► Tx2 14
15
5
6
K_07 14 5
U_12
U_13
4 4 4 4 15 6
xI̲C xI̲C 16 7 K_08 U_14
5 5 5 5 16 7
► Tx3 ► Tx3 17 8
17 8
U_15
6 6 6 6 U_16
Signal inputs 18 9
18 9
Vin
U_01
7 7 xI̲N 7 7 xI̲N
► ►
X__3 X__3
Tx4 Tx4 19 1 Vin
19 1 U_17
8 8 8 8
20 2 20 2
Vin U_18
21 3 U_02 21 3
22 4 U_19
22 4
Vin U_20
U_03 23 5
23 5 U_21
24 6
Vin U_22
24 6 U_04 25 7
U_23
26 8
Power supply U_24
25 7 + V 27 9
aux
26 8 −
U100
27 9
Binary Type X Binary Type X Binary Type X Binary Type X

module 4H module 6O module 6I 3O module 6I 6O
Ring Pin Ring Pin Ring Pin Ring Pin
X__1 X__1 X__1 X__1 X__1 X__1 X__1 X__1

High-break Output relays Output relays Output relays
1 1 1 1 1 1
contacts
2 2 K_01 2 2 K_01 2 2
3 3 3 3 3 3 K_01
4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4
K_01
5 5 + 5 5 5 5 5 5 K_02
6 6 6 6 6 6
7 7 7 7 7 7
8 8 K_02 8 8 K_02 8 8
9 9 9 9 9 9 K_03
X__2
X__2 X__2
X__2
10 1 10 1
10 1
11 2 11 2 K_04
11 2 11 2
K_02 12 3 12 3
12 3 + 12 3
13 4 13 4
13 4
14 5 K_03 14 5
14 5 K_03
15 6 15 6 K_05
15 6
16 7 16 7
16 7
X__3 17 8 Signal 17 8 K_06
17 8 inputs
18 9 18 9
18 9
Vin Signal inputs
U_01 X__3
Vin
19 1 X__3 X__3
19 1 U_01
K_03 Vin
20 2 + 19 1 19 1 U_02 20 2
Vin
20 2 K_04 20 2 21 3 U_02
Vin
21 3 21 3 U_03 22 4
Vin
22 4 22 4 U_03
Vin
26 8 23 5 K_05 23 5 U_04 23 5
Vin
K_04 24 6 24 6 24 6 U_04
27 9 + Vin
25 7 25 7 U_05 25 7
Vin
26 8 K_06 26 8 U_05
Vin
27 9 27 9 U_06 26 8
Vin
27 9 U_06
P632/EN M/R-a5-B // P632‑312‑660 5-27

Binary Type X Analog Type Y Communication Type A Communication Type A

module 6I 8O module 4I module CH1 / CH2 module SEB LC
Ring Pin Ring Pin Ethernet [IEC]
Measuring Per order
X__1 X__1 X__1 X__1 optical glass fiber LC
Output relays outputs
1 1 1 1 Serial [Channel 1] Port A
2 2 K_01 2 2 K_01 optical fiber link X13
RX
3 3 3 3 valid X7
1 U26
4 4 X//Y U17 X//Y
4 4 TX
5 5
5 5 ► ⋂
6 6 K_02
7 7
6 6 ◄ X8
0…20 mA 1
7 7
U_08 X//Y U18
8 8
9 9 K_03 8 8 K_02
9 9 valid
or wire link and Ethernet
service interface
X__2 X9 X//Y Port C
10 1 X__2 1 X15
11 2 10 1 2 D2[R] 1
K_04
► > X//Y U31
12 3 K_05 11 2 ⋂ 3
U19
RJ45
13 4 K_06 12 3 ◄ 4
14 5 K_07 0…20 mA
U_08 5 D1[T]
15 6
Signal and
16 7 K_08 measuring inputs
13 4 RS 422 / 485
17 8 Vin IRIG-B
14 5 U_01 Serial [Channel 2]
18 9 time synchronization
Signal 15 6
inputs wire link only
Vin X11
X__3 16 7 U_02 (DC IRIG-B)
Vin X10 X//Y 1 Demodulated
19 1 U_01 17 8 1
Vin 2 Isolated GND U21
20 2
U_03 2 D2[R] 3
Vin 18 9
21 3 U_02 Vin 3 Modulated
U_04 U20 (AC IRIG-B)
4
Vin
22 4 U_03 5 D1[T]
X__3
23 5
Vin 19 1
24 6 U_04
20 2
25 7 ► ⋂
U_05
RS 422 / 485
Vin 21 3 0…20 mA IRIG-B
U_05
22 4
◄
time synchronization
26 8
Vin ◄ ⋂
U_06
X11
27 9 U_06 23 5 PT100 1
24 6
► U21
Communication Type A Communication Type A Communication Type A

module SEB RJ45 module REB LC module REB RJ45
Ethernet [IEC] Ethernet [IEC] Ethernet [IEC]
wire link optical glass fiber LC wire link
Port C Port A Port A
X13
X15 X13
RX
1 1
> X//Y U31 U26 > X//Y U29
TX X//Y
RJ45 RJ45
Port B
Port B X14
X14 1
RX > X//Y U30
IRIG-B
time synchronization
X//Y U28 RJ45
TX
X11
(DC IRIG-B)
1 Demodulated
2 Isolated GND U21

3 and Ethernet and Ethernet
service interface service interface
Modulated Port C Port C
(AC IRIG-B)
X15 X15
1 1
> X//Y U31 > X//Y U31
RJ45 RJ45
IRIG-B IRIG-B
time synchronization time synchronization
X11 X11
(DC IRIG-B) (DC IRIG-B)
1 Demodulated 1 Demodulated
2 Isolated GND U21 2 Isolated GND U21

3 3
Modulated Modulated
(AC IRIG-B) (AC IRIG-B)
5-28 P632/EN M/R-a5-B // P632‑312‑660

P632
6 Local Control (HMI)
6.1 Local Control Panel (HMI)

Switchgear installed in the bay can be controlled from the local control panel
(HMI). All the data required for operation of the protection device is entered from
the local control panel, and the data important for system management is read
out there as well. The following tasks can be handled from the local control
panel:
● Controlling switchgear units
● Readout and modification of settings
● Readout of cyclically updated measured operating data and logic status
signals
● Readout of operating data logs and of monitoring signal logs
● Readout of event logs after overload situations, ground faults, or short
circuits in the power system
● Device resetting and triggering of additional control functions used in
testing and commissioning
Control is also possible through the PC interface. This requires a suitable PC and
a specific operating program.
P632/EN M/R-a5-B // P632‑312‑660 6-1

P632 6 Local Control (HMI)
6.2 Display and Keypad
6.2.1 Text Display

The local control panel as a text display includes an LC display containing 4 × 20
alphanumeric characters.
There are seven keys with permanently assigned functions situated below the
LCD and six additional freely configurable function keys on the right hand side of
the LCD.
Furthermore the local control panel (HMI) is provided with 23 LED indicators. 17
of these are on the left hand side of the LCD. The other six LED indicators are
situated to the right of the six freely configurable function keys. (See
Section 3.12, (p. 3-71) for the configuration of the LED indicators.)
TRIP
H18
ALARM
OUT OF SERVICE
HEALTHY
H19
EDIT MODE
H20
H21
H22
H23
Fig. 6-1: View of the local control panel and layout of the LED indicators for the text display.
6.2.2 Display Illumination

If none of the control keys are pressed, the display illumination will switch off
once the set “return time illumination” (setting in menu tree: “Par/Conf/LOC”)
has elapsed. Pressing any of the control keys will turn the display illumination on
again. In this case the control action that is normally triggered by that key will
not be executed. Reactivation of the display illumination is also possible by using
a binary input.
If continuous display illumination is required, the function “return time
illumination” (LO C : Re tu rn ti me i llu min.) is set to blocked.
6.2.3 Contrast of the Display

The contrast of the LC display can be adjusted by pressing 3 keys on the local
control panel at the same time, as follows:
6-2 P632/EN M/R-a5-B // P632‑312‑660

6 Local Control (HMI) P632
Keep the Enter key ( ) and the Clear key ( ) pressed simultaneously, then you
can press “Up” or “Down” ( , ) to raise or lower the contrast, respectively.
6.2.4 Short Description of Keys
6.2.4.1 “Up” and “Down” Keys
Panel Level: The “up”/“down” keys switch between the pages of the Measured
Value Panel.
Menu Tree Level: Press the “up” and “down” keys to navigate up and down
through the menu tree in a vertical direction. If the unit is in input mode, the
“up” and “down” keys have a different function.
Input mode: Settings can only be changed in the input mode, which is signaled
by the LED indicator labeled EDIT MODE. Press the “up” and “down” keys in this
mode to change the setting value.
● “Up” key: the next higher value is selected.
● “Down” key: the next lower value is selected.
With list settings, press the “up” and “down” key to change the logic operator of
the value element.
6.2.4.2 “Left” and “Right” Keys
Menu Tree Level: Press the “left” and “right” keys to navigate through the
menu tree in a horizontal direction. If the unit is in input mode, the “left” and
“right” keys have a different function.
Input mode: Settings can only be changed in the input mode, which is signaled
by the LED indicator labeled EDIT MODE. When the “left” and “right” keys are
pressed, the cursor positioned below one of the digits in the change-enabled
value moves one digit to the right or left.
● “Left” key: the cursor moves to the next digit on the left.
● “Right” key: the cursor moves to the next digit on the right.
In the case of a list setting, press the “left” and “right” keys to navigate through
the list of items available for selection.
6.2.4.3 ENTER Key
Panel Level: Press the ENTER key at the Panel level to go to the menu tree.
Menu Tree Level: Press the ENTER key to enter the input mode. Press the
ENTER key a second time to accept the changes as entered and exit the input
mode. The LED indicator labeled EDIT MODE signals that the input mode is
active.
P632/EN M/R-a5-B // P632‑312‑660 6-3

6.2.4.4 CLEAR Key
Press the CLEAR key to reset the LED indicators and clear all measured event
data. The records in the recording memories are not affected by this action.
Input mode: When the CLEAR key is pressed all changes entered are rejected
and the input mode is exited.
6.2.4.5 READ Key
Press the READ key to access a selected event recording from either the Panel
level or from any other point in the menu tree.
6.2.4.6 Configurable Function Keys
( … )
By pressing a function key the assigned function is triggered.
More details on assigning functions to function keys can be found in Section 3.7,
(p. 3-46).
More details on handling function keys can be found in Section 6.9, (p. 6-11).
6-4 P632/EN M/R-a5-B // P632‑312‑660

6.3 Display Levels

All data relevant for operation and all device settings are displayed on two levels.
At the Panel level, data such as measurements are displayed in Panels that
provide a quick overview of the current state of the bay. The “menu tree” level
below the panel level allows the user to select all data points (settings, signals,
measured variables, etc.) and to change them, if appropriate. To access a
selected event recording from either the panel level or from any other point in
the menu tree, press the “READ” key:
P632/EN M/R-a5-B // P632‑312‑660 6-5

6.4 Availability of the Bay Panel

The Bay Panel is only available under these conditions:
1. On the hardware side the protection unit must be fitted with the binary
module X(6I 6O) to a slot supporting this module.
2. By selecting and sending a bay type (with parameter MAIN: Type of
ba y) a bay type has been generated.
To access a selected event recording from either the panel level or from any
other point in the menu tree, press the “READ” key .
From the control and display panels (e.g. measured value panels or the bay
panel) the user can access the menu tree level by pressing the “ENTER” key.
To return to the previously selected control and display panel from the menu tree
level the user must simultaneously press the keys “Cursor up” and “RESET”. (If
previously no panel was selected, i.e. after a system restart, then the bay panel,
if available, is accessed.)
After the set LOC : Au tom. re turn time has elapsed the protection unit will
also return automatically from the menu tree level to the control and display
panel last selected.
The user can move from a bay panel to a measured value panel by pressing the
key “Cursor left” and back again by pressing the key “Cursor right”.
6-6 P632/EN M/R-a5-B // P632‑312‑660

6.5 Display Panels

The text display of the P632 can display Measured Value Panels which are called
up according to system conditions.
Selected measured values are displayed on the Measured Value Panels. The
system condition determines which Panel is called up (examples are the
Operation Panel and the Fault Panel). Only the Measured Value Panels relevant
for the particular design version of the given device and its associated range of
functions are actually available.
The Operation Panel is always provided.
Measured Value
Bay Panel Panel(s) Record View
(state-dependent)
X0 :running Voltage VAB prim. Oper/Rec/OP_RC
>Q0 :running 20.7 kV Operat. data record
Q8 :running Voltage VBC prim.
Local Remote 20.6 kV
Control and Display Panels
+
Device type
Parameters Operation Events
Device ID Cyclic measurements Event counters

Configuration parameters Control and testing Measured fault data
Function parameters Operating data recordings Event recordings
Global Measured operating data

Main functions Physical state signals
Parameter subset 1
Logical state signals
Parameter subset ...
Control Menu tree
Fig. 6-2: Display panels and menu tree.
P632/EN M/R-a5-B // P632‑312‑660 6-7

6.6 Menu Tree and Data Points

All data points (setting values, signals, measured values, etc.) are selected using
a menu tree. When navigating through the menu tree, the first two lines of the
LC-Display always show the branch of the menu tree that is active, as selected
by the user. The data points are found at the lowest level of a menu tree branch
and they are displayed either with their plain text description or in numerically
encoded form, as selected by the user. The value associated with the selected
data point, its meaning, and its unit of measurement are displayed in the line
below.
6-8 P632/EN M/R-a5-B // P632‑312‑660

6.7 List Data Points

List data points are a special category. In contrast to other data points, list data
points generally have more than one associated value element. This category
includes tripping matrices, programmable logic functions, and event logs. When
a list data point is selected, the symbol ‘↓‘ is displayed in the bottom line of the
LCD, indicating that a sub-level is situated below this displayed level. The
individual value elements of a list data point are found at this sub-level. In the
case of a list parameter, the individual value elements are linked by operators
such as “OR”.
P632/EN M/R-a5-B // P632‑312‑660 6-9

6.8 Note Concerning the Step-by-Step Descriptions

The following presentation of the individual control steps shows which displays
can be changed in each case by pressing keys. A small black square to the right
of the enter key indicates that the LED indicator labeled Edit Mode is illuminated.
The examples used here are not necessarily valid for the device type described
in this manual; they merely serve to illustrate the control principles involved.
6-10 P632/EN M/R-a5-B // P632‑312‑660

6.9 Configurable Function Keys
6.9.1 Configuration of the Function Keys F1 to Fx

Function keys [F1] to [Fx] can be assigned a password (see Section 6.13.9, (p. 6-
36)). In such a case they are effective only after that password has been
entered. By default, no password is required to use the function key.
It is assumed for the following operating example that function key [F1] is
enabled only after the password (as assigned at F_K EY: Pass word funct. ke y
1) has been entered. After the password has been entered the function key will
remain active for the duration set at F_KE Y: R etu rn time fct. key s.
Thereafter, the function key is disabled until the password is entered again.
P632/EN M/R-a5-B // P632‑312‑660 6-11

Control Step / Description Control Display

Action
Step 0 Display example. Voltage A-B prim.

20.7 kV
Voltage B-C prim.
20.6 kV
Step 1 Press function key [F1].

Eight asterisks (*) appear in the fourth line as a prompt
to enter the password if it is required. ********
(By default, i.e. no password required, this step and the
next do not exist and the function key is effective
immediately as described in Step 3.)
Step 2a If a password is set, press the keys corresponding to

the set password, for example:
“Left” *
“Down”
“Right”
“Up”
The display will change as shown in the right hand side
column. *
Now press the ENTER key. If the correct password has Voltage A-B prim.
20.7 kV
been entered, the active display will re-appear. Voltage B-C prim.
Function key [F1] is now effective for the set return 20.6 kV
time.
By default, no password is required and therefore
function key [F1] is always effective.
Each function key can be assigned its own password,
and the return time is running after correct password
entry for each individual function key!)
If an invalid password has been entered, the display
shown above in Step 1 will appear.
Step 2b This control step can be canceled at any time by Voltage A-B prim.
20.7 kV
pressing the CLEAR key before the ENTER key is Voltage B-C prim.
pressed. 20.6 kV
6-12 P632/EN M/R-a5-B // P632‑312‑660


Action
Step 3 Press [F1] again. The function configured to this Voltage A-B prim.
20.7 kV
function key is carried out. Voltage B-C prim.
20.6 kV
Step 4 When function keys are pressed during their associated Oper/CtrlTest/LOC
Param. change enabl.
return time, then the set function is carried out directly, Yes
i.e. without checking for the password again.
(By default, i.e. no password required, this step does
not exist and the function key is permanently effective.)
6.9.2 Function Keys F1 to Fx as Control Keys

As described in Section 3.7, (p. 3-46) function keys [F1] to [Fx] may be
configured as control keys (for [F1] e.g. at F _KEY: Fct. assignm. F1).
In this case different rules apply to checking the password (see Section 6.9.1,
(p. 6-11)) and the configuration to “Key/Switch” is ignored.
In case the control functionality is desired then each of the following four control
commands, should be assigned to a function key. The particular selection of the
four function keys out of the available six, however, does not matter.
● MAI N: L ocal/ Remote key
The “Local/Remote” control command is effective only in the bay panel
except where a binary signal input has been configured for this function.
Depending on the configured functionality, the “Local/Remote” command
toggles either between “Remote” and “Local” control, or between “Local/
Remote” and “Local” control. (The parameter LOC: Fct. assign. L/R ke y
may be set either to R <-> L or to R & L <-> L and will then define which of
the two switching modes is active.) If the “Local/Remote” command is
configured such that it will switch from “Remote” control to “Local” control,
then this can only occur if the password has first been entered at
LOC: Password L /R. Switching from “Local” to “Remote” control will
occur without checking the password. (See also Section 3.4.5, (p. 3-12).)
● MAIN : Devi ce s ele ction ke y
This selection command is effective only in the bay panel and only if
“Local” control is activated.
If local control has been selected, pressing the selection key selects the
switchgear unit to be controlled. This selected external device is marked on
the text display HMI with the flashing symbol “>” in front of the external
devices’ designation text.
● MA IN : D e vice OP EN key
The OPEN command is effective in the bay panel only. Pressing the key
assigned to this function controls the selected switchgear unit – taking into
account the interlock equation – to assume the “open” status.
● MAIN : D evice C LOSE ke y
The CLOSE command is effective in the bay panel only. Pressing the key
assigned to this function controls the selected switchgear unit – taking into
account the interlock equation – to assume the “closed” status.
P632/EN M/R-a5-B // P632‑312‑660 6-13

6.10 Changing Between Display Levels
Jumping from Menu Tree Level to Panel Level

After start-up of the device, the menu tree level is displayed.

Action
Step 0 From the Menu Tree Level, the user can jump to the Par/Func/Glob/MAIN
Device on-line
Panel Level from any position within the menu tree. No (=off)
Step 1 First press the “up” key and hold it down while pressing Voltage A-B prim.
20.7 kV
the CLEAR key. Voltage B-C prim.
Note: It is important to press the “up” key first and 20.6 kV
+
release it last in order to avoid unintentional resetting of
stored data.
Jumping from Panel Level to Menu Tree Level

Action
Step 0 Example of a Measured Value Panel. Voltage A-B prim.

20.7 kV
Voltage B-C prim.
20.6 kV
Step 1 Press the Enter key to go from the Panel Level to the P632
Menu Tree Level.
After the set return time has elapsed (setting in menu tree: “Par/Conf/LOC”), the
display will automatically switch to the Panel level if a Measured Value Panel has
been configured.
6-14 P632/EN M/R-a5-B // P632‑312‑660

6.11 How to use Cyber Security Features

These sections shows the most common tasks associated with Cyber Security
features.
For many of these tasks, the steps you take are the same as you have performed
previously and with the main changes being in the steps you use to login and/or
logout.
6.11.1 Usage
6.11.1.1 How to Login
6.11.1.1.1 Local Default Access

If the Local Default Access is enabled, the user can login via the front panel
without password with associated roles.
6.11.1.1.2 Login with Prompt User List

This login process will happen if authorization is required for the current
operation.
In this case, the IED will prompt the user list, and the user needs to select proper
user name and enter the password to login.
Login Step / Description Control Display

Action
Step 0 When operation needs authorization, the CS Cyber Security

insuff. rights
insufficient rights message is displayed for 2 seconds
Step 1 The user list is shown Select a user

DefaultOperator
Select proper user by pressing the 'up' or 'down' DefaultEngineer
DefaultViewer
Or
Step 2 Confirm the selection by 'Enter' key
Step 3 Password message is shown for user to enter User Password?

********
Step 4 If password is correct Cyber Security

login successful
Step 5 If password is incorrect, passord message shows again Cyber Security

login failed
(as in step 3)
Step 6 If decided not to login (by pressing the 'CLEAR' key), User not selected
Aborted with C key
the message is displayed for 2 seconds.
P632/EN M/R-a5-B // P632‑312‑660 6-15

6.11.1.2 How to Logout
6.11.1.2.1 How to Logout at the IED

For security consideration, it would be better to logout the IED once the
configuration done.
The user can be logged out with 'HMI Logout' in the menu tree: 'Par/Conf/CS'.
6.11.1.2.2 How to Logout at Easergy Studio

● Right-click on the device name and select Log Off.
● In the Log Off confirmation dialog click Yes.
6.11.1.3 How to Disable a Physical Port

It is possible to disable unused physical ports for security reason.
The physical ports can be disabled by using Easergy Studio or the front panel.
This can’t be done by the SAT. An Engineer-role is needed to perform this action.
IEC 61850 section:
● Allows to disable the physical interface A/B or A (if available).
● Allows to disable the physical interface C.
The physical ports can be disabled with 'Block Port A/B' or 'Block Port C' in the
menu tree: 'Par/Conf/IEC'.
PC section (IEC 103):
● Allows to disable commands and measurements. If both are disabled, the
complete interface is disabled.
It can be disabled with 'Command blocking' or 'Sig./meas.val.block' in the menu
tree: 'Par/Func/Glob/PC'.
6.11.1.4 How to Secure Function key

In cyber security implementation, this function has been linked to the front panel
authorization.
● When the function key pressed, if there is no user login in the front panel or
the logged- in user is not authorized, a prompt message will be raised in
the front panel to ask the user login.
Once the user logged-in, function key password is needed if function key
has a password. If the user already logged in with authorization and the
function key has no password, the command will be executed immediately.
● By default, the OPERATOR or ENGINEER Roles are able to operate the
function keys.
● If unauthorized users press Function Key during the setting change, they
need to commit the changes first then login with authorized user to operate
the function key.
6-16 P632/EN M/R-a5-B // P632‑312‑660

6.12 Control at Panel Level

The measured values that will be displayed on the Measured Value Panels can
first be selected in the menu tree under Par/Conf/LOC. The user can select
different sets of measured values for the Operation Panel (L OC : F ct .
Op erat ion P ane l), the Overload Panel (LOC: Fct . Overload Panel), and the
Fault Panel (LOC : Fct. F aul t P ane l).
Only the Measured Value Panels relevant for the particular design version of the
given device and its associated range of functions are actually available. The
selected set of values for the Operation Panel is always available. Please see
Section 6.13.5.1, (p. 6-27) for instructions regarding selection. If
“MAIN: Wit hout fu nction” has been selected for a given panel, then that
panel is disabled.
The Measured Value Panels are called up according to system conditions. If, for
example, the device detects an overload or a ground fault, then the
corresponding Measured Value Panel will be displayed as long as the overload or
ground fault situation exists. Should the device detect a fault, then the Fault
Panel is displayed and remains active until the measured fault values are reset,
by pressing the CLEAR key, for example.

Action
Step 0 Two measured values can be displayed simultaneously Voltage A-B prim.
20.7 kV
on the Panel. Voltage B-C prim.
20.6 kV
Step 1 If more than two measured values have been selected, Voltage C-A prim.
20.8 kV
they can be viewed one page at a time by pressing the Current A prim.
“up” or “down” keys. 415 A
or
The device will also show the next page of the
Measured Value Panel after the set Hold-Time for
Panels (LOC : Hold-t im e for Pan el s, located at “Par/
Conf” in the menu tree) has elapsed.
6.12.1 Bay Panel
6.12.1.1 Information Displayed on the Bay Panel

If available the Bay Panel will display switching state signals from external
devices (closed, open, intermediate position) and the active control site (local or
remote). The text display HMI will show up to 3 external devices, one per line,
where the external device selected is marked with the flashing symbol “>” in
front of the external devices’ designation text.
Fig. 6-3: Example of a bay panel.
P632/EN M/R-a5-B // P632‑312‑660 6-17

The sequence for external devices is downwards in columns according to their

numbering (DEV01, DEV02, DEV03). To designate these external devices there
are up to four characters available, and next to these, separated by a colon, their
current state is displayed (“Interm. pos.”, “Open”, “Closed” or “Faulty pos.”).
The active control unit (“Remote” or “Local”) is displayed in the fourth line, as
well as its state: “Locked” or “Unlocked”.
6.12.1.2 Controlling Switchgear Units

Switchgear units can be controlled from the local control panel, provided that the
unit has been set for “local control”.
The following example assumes that the configurable function keys are set as
follows (see also Section 6.9.2, (p. 6-13)):
● [F1]: MAI N: L ocal /Re mot e ke y – called “local/remote” key in the
following example
● [F2]: MAI N: D evice se lecti on k e y – called “select” key in the following
example
● [F3]: MA IN : Devi ce CL OSE key – called “close” key in the following
example
● [F4]: MAI N: D evice OPEN k ey – called “open” key in the following
example
If the local/remote key is set to switch between remote and local control (R↔L),
then the switch from “remote” to “local” operation requires a password.
The following example is based on the (R↔L) setting for the local/remote key and
the factory-set L/R password. If the password has been changed by the user (see
Section 6.13.9.4, (p. 6-40)) the following description will apply accordingly.
6-18 P632/EN M/R-a5-B // P632‑312‑660


Action
Step 0 Select the Bay Panel. X0 :Closed

Q0 :Closed
Q8 :Closed
Remote Locked
Step 1 Press the “local/remote” key (L/R) to switch the device to P632 10:33:22
local operation. The Bay Panel is no longer displayed.
The device type appears in the first line and eight ********
asterisks (*) appear in the fourth line as a prompt to
enter the password.
Step 2a Press the following keys in sequence: P632 10:33:22
“Left”
*
“Down” P632 10:33:22
“Right” P632 10:33:22
“Up” P632 10:33:22
The display will change as shown in the column on the

right. *
Now press the Enter key. X0 :Closed

Q0 :Closed
If the correct password has been entered, the Bay Panel Q8 :Closed
will re-appear. The fourth line will display “Local”. Local Locked
shown above in Step 1 will appear.
Step 2b This control step can be canceled at any time by pressing X0 :Closed
Q0 :Closed
the Clear key before the enter key is pressed. Q8 :Closed
Remote Locked
Step 3a Press the Selection key to select a switchgear unit. Only X0 :Closed
>Q0 :Closed
switchgear units that are electrically controllable can be Q8 :Closed
selected. The external device designation for the Local Locked
selected switchgear unit –“Q0”, for example – is marked
by a flashing “>” character.
Step 3b To cancel the selection of a switchgear unit, press the X0 :Closed

Q0 :Closed
Clear key. Press the Selection key to select a new Q8 :Closed
switchgear unit. Local Locked
P632/EN M/R-a5-B // P632‑312‑660 6-19


Action
Step 4 After selecting a switchgear unit, press the keys “Open”

or “Close” to control the switchgear unit. Before this
switching action is executed, compliance with bay
interlock conditions – if applicable – is checked. or
Step 4a If the check of bay interlock conditions determines that X0 :Closed

Q0 :Interm. pos
an operation can be carried out, then the switch Q8 :Closed
command is executed. The status “Interm[ediate] Local Locked
pos[ition]” is displayed while the switchgear unit is
operating.
Once the operating time of the switchgear unit has X0 :Closed

Q0 :Open
elapsed, the resulting switching status is displayed. Q8 :Closed
Local Locked
Step 4b If the check of interlock conditions determines that X0 :Closed

Q0 :Closed
switching is not allowed, then the selected switchgear Q8 :Closed
unit is no longer marked. Local Locked
If the LED indicators have been configured accordingly,
the LED indicator for the signal MA IN: In terl ock equ .
viol. will be illuminated.
Step 5 If no control action takes place within a set time period

after selection of a switchgear unit or if the return time
for illumination (L OC : Return t ime il lu min .) or the
return time for selection (LOC: Retu rn ti me se l ect.)
has elapsed, then the selection is canceled.
Step 6 Press the local/remote key (L/R) to switch to remote X0 :Closed

Q0 :Open
control; this is accomplished without a password prompt. Q8 :Closed
Remote Locked
6-20 P632/EN M/R-a5-B // P632‑312‑660

6.13 Control at the Menu Tree Level
6.13.1 Navigation in the Menu Tree
Folders and Function Groups

All data points are organized in different folders based on practical control
requirements.
At the root of the menu tree is the unit type; the tree branches into the three
main folders “Settings”, “Measurements & Tests” and “Fault & Event Records”,
which form the first folder level. Up to two further folder levels follow so that the
entire folder structure consists of three main branches and a maximum of three
folder levels.
At the end of each branch of folders are the various function groups in which the
individual data points (settings) are combined.
PX yyy
Unit
type
PX yyy PX yyy PX yyy

Folder Parameters Operation Events
plane 1
Oper/
Folder Cyclic measurements
plane 2
Oper/Cycl/
Folder Meas. operating data
plane 3
Oper/Cycl/Data/
Function MAIN
groups
Oper/Cycl/Data/MAIN
Data Date
01.01.16 dd.mm.yy
points
Fig. 6-4: Basic menu tree structure.
P632/EN M/R-a5-B // P632‑312‑660 6-21

6.13.2 Switching Between Address Mode and Plain Text Mode

The display on the local control panel can be switched between address mode
and plain text mode. In the address mode the display shows settings, signals,
and measured values in numerically coded form, that is, as addresses. In plain
text mode the settings, signals, and measured values are displayed in the form
of plain text descriptions. In either case, control is guided by the menu tree. The
active branch of the menu tree is displayed in plain text in both modes. In the
following examples, the display is shown in plain text mode only.

Action
Step 0 In this example, the user switches from plain text mode Par/Func/Glob/MAIN
Device online
to address mode. No (=off)
Step 1 To switch from address mode to plain text mode or vice Par/Func/Glob/MAIN
003.030
versa, press the CLEAR key and either the “left” key or 0
the “right” key simultaneously. This can be done at any
point in the menu tree. +
or
6-22 P632/EN M/R-a5-B // P632‑312‑660

6.13.3 Change-Enabling Function

Although it is possible to select any data point in the menu tree and read the
associated value by pressing the keys, it is not possible to switch directly to the
input mode. This safeguard prevents unintended changes in the settings.
There are two ways to enter the input mode.
● Global change-enabling function: To activate the global change-
enabling function, set the LOC: P aram. cha nge enabl. parameter to
Yes (menu tree: Oper/CtrlTest/LOC).
The change can only be made after the password has been entered.
Thereafter, all further changes – with the exception of specially protected
control actions (see Section 6.13.8, (p. 6-34)) – are enabled without
entering the password.
● Selective change-enabling function: Password input prior to any setting
change.
This setup is designed to prevent accidental output and applies even when
the global change-enabling function has been activated. The following
example is based on the factory-set password. If the password has been
changed by the user (see Section 6.13.9, (p. 6-36)), the following
description will apply accordingly.
P632/EN M/R-a5-B // P632‑312‑660 6-23


Action
Step 0 In the menu tree Oper/CtrlTest/LOC, select the Oper/CtrlTest/LOC

LOC: Param. change enabl. parameter. No
Step 1 Press the ENTER key. Eight asterisks (*) appear in the Oper/CtrlTest/LOC
fourth line of the display. No
********
Step 2 Press the following keys in sequence: Oper/CtrlTest/LOC

“Left” No
*
“Right” Oper/CtrlTest/LOC
No
*
“Up” Oper/CtrlTest/LOC
No
*
“Down” Oper/CtrlTest/LOC
The display will change as shown in the column on the No
right. *
Now press the enter key. The LED indicator labeled Oper/CtrlTest/LOC
EDIT MODE will light up. This indicates that the setting No
can now be changed by pressing the “up” or “down”
keys.
shown in Step 1 appears.
Step 3 Change the setting to Yes. Oper/CtrlTest/LOC

Yes
Step 4 Press the enter key again. The LED indicator will go out. Oper/CtrlTest/LOC
The unit is enabled for further setting changes. Yes
The same procedure applies to any setting change unless the global change-
enabling function has been activated. This method is recommended for a single
setting change only. If several settings are to be changed, then the global
change-enabling function is preferable. In the following examples, the global
change-enabling function has been activated.
6.13.3.1 Automatic Return

The automatic return function prevents the change-enabling function from
remaining activated after a change of settings has been completed. Once the set
return time (L O C: Aut om. re tur n time, menu tree “Par/Conf/LOC”) has
elapsed, the change-enabling function is automatically deactivated, and the
6-24 P632/EN M/R-a5-B // P632‑312‑660

display switches to a Measured Value Panel corresponding to the current system

condition. The return time is restarted when any of the control keys is pressed.
6.13.3.2 Forced Return

The return described above can be forced from the local control panel by first
pressing the “up” key and then holding it down while pressing the CLEAR key.
It is important to press the “up” key first and release it last in order to avoid
unintentional deletion of stored data.
Even when the change-enabling function is activated, not all settings can be
changed. For some settings it is also necessary to disable the protective function
(MAIN: Devi ce on-l ine, menu tree: Par/Func/Glob/MAIN). Such settings include
the configuration settings, by means of which the device interfaces can be
adapted to the system. The following entries in the “Change” column of the
“Telegram Documentation” (part of the separately available
“DataModelExplorer”) indicate whether values can be changed or not:
● “on”: The value can be changed even when the protective function is
enabled.
● “off”: The value can only be changed when the protective function is
disabled.
● “–”: The value can be read out but cannot be changed.
The device is factory-set so that the protective function is disabled.
P632/EN M/R-a5-B // P632‑312‑660 6-25

6.13.4 Changing Parameters

If all the conditions for a value change are satisfied, the desired setting can be
entered.

Action
Step 0 Example of a display. Oper/CtrlTest/LOC

In this example, the change-enabling function is Yes
activated and the protective function is disabled, if
necessary.
Step 1 Select the desired setting by pressing the keys. Par/Conf/LOC

Autom. return time
50000 s
Step 2 Press the ENTER key. The LED indicator labeled EDIT Par/Conf/LOC
Autom. return time
MODE will light up. The last digit of the value is 50000̲ s
highlighted by a cursor (underlined).
Step 3 Press the “left” or “right” keys to move the cursor to Par/Conf/LOC
Autom. return time
the left or right. 5000̲0 s
Step 4 Change the value highlighted by the cursor by pressing Par/Conf/LOC

Autom. return time
the “up” and “down” keys. In the meantime the device 5001̲0 s
will continue to operate with the old value.
Step 5 Press the ENTER key. The LED indicator labeled EDIT Par/Conf/LOC
Autom. return time
MODE will go out and the device will now operate with 50010 s
the new value. Press the keys to select another setting
for a value change.
Step 6 If you wish to reject the new setting while you are still Par/Conf/LOC
Autom. return time
entering it (LED indicator labeled EDIT MODE is on), 50000 s
press the CLEAR key. The LED indicator will go out and
the device will continue to operate with the old value.
A further setting can be selected for a value change by
pressing the keys.
6-26 P632/EN M/R-a5-B // P632‑312‑660

6.13.5 List Parameters
6.13.5.1 Setting a List Parameter

Using list settings, the user is able to select several elements from a list in order
to perform tasks such as defining a trip command or defining the measurements
that will be displayed on Measured Value Panels. As a rule, the selected elements
are linked by an “OR” operator. Other operators (NOT, OR, AND, NOT OR and
NOT AND) are available in the LOGIC function group for linking the selected list
items. In this way binary signals and binary input signals can be processed in a
Boolean equation tailored to meet user requirements. For the DNP 3.0
communication protocol, the user defines the class of a setting instead of
assigning operators. The definition of a trip command shall be used here as an
illustration.
P632/EN M/R-a5-B // P632‑312‑660 6-27


Action
Step 0 Select a list setting (in this example, the parameter Par/Func/Glob/MAIN
Fct.assign.trip cmd.
MAIN: Fct .assig.t rip cmd.1 at “Par/Func/Glob/
MAIN” in the menu tree). The down arrow (↓) indicates ↓
that a list setting has been selected.
Step 1 Press the “down” key. The first function and the first Par/Func/Glob/MAIN
selected signal will appear in the third and fourth lines, #01 DIST
respectively. The symbol “#01” in the display indicates Trip zone 1
the first item of the selection. If MAI N: Withou t
function appears for the first item, then this means
that no function assignment has yet been made.
Step 2 Scroll through the list of assigned functions by pressing Par/Func/Glob/MAIN

the “right” and “left” keys. OR #02 DIST
Trip zone 2
Once the end of the list is reached, the display shown Par/Func/Glob/MAIN
on the right will appear. #05 MAIN
?????
Step 3 Press the ENTER key at any position in the list. The LED Par/Func/Glob/MAIN
indicator labeled EDIT MODE will light up. #02 DIST
Trip zone 2
Step 4 Scroll through the assignable functions by pressing the Par/Func/Glob/MAIN

“right” and “left” keys in the input mode. #02 DIST
Trip zone 4
Step 5 Select the operator or the class using the “up” and Par/Func/Glob/MAIN
“down“ keys. In this particular case, only the “OR” OR #02 DIST
operator can be selected. There is no limitation on the Trip zone 4
selection of classes.
Step 6 Press the ENTER key. The LED indicator will go out. The Par/Func/Glob/MAIN
assignment has been made. The unit will now operate OR #02 DIST
with the new settings. Trip zone 4
If no operator has been selected, the “OR” operator is
always assigned automatically when the ENTER key is
pressed. There is no automatic assignment of classes.
Step 7 Press the “up” key to exit the list at any point in the Par/Func/Glob/MAIN
list.
↓
Step 8 If you wish to reject the new setting while you are still Par/Func/Glob/MAIN
entering it (LED indicator labeled EDIT MODE is on), OR #02 DIST
press the CLEAR key. The LED indicator labeled EDIT Trip zone 2
MODE will be extinguished.
6-28 P632/EN M/R-a5-B // P632‑312‑660

6.13.5.2 Deleting a List Parameter

If MAIN: With out fun cti on is assigned to a given item, then all the following
items are deleted. If this occurs for item #01, everything is deleted.
P632/EN M/R-a5-B // P632‑312‑660 6-29

6.13.6 Memory Readout

Memories can be read out after going to the corresponding entry point. This does
not necessitate activating the change-enabling function or even disabling the
protective functions. Inadvertent clearing of a memory at the entry point is not
possible.
The following memories are available:
● In the menu tree “Oper/Rec/OP_RC”: Operating data memory
● In the menu tree “Oper/Rec/MT_RC”: Monitoring signal memory
● Event memories
o In the menu tree “Events/Rec/FT_RC”: Fault memories 1 to 8
o In the menu tree “Events/Rec/OL_RC”: Overload memories 1 to 8
o In the menu tree “Events/Rec/GF_RC”: Ground fault memories 1 to 8
Not all of these event memories are present in each unit.
6.13.6.1 Readout of the Operating Data Memory

The operating data memory contains stored signals of actions that occur during
operation, such as the enabling or disabling of a device function. A maximum of
100 entries is possible, after which the oldest entry is overwritten.

Action
Step 0 Select the entry point for the operating data memory. Oper/Rec/OP_RC
Step 1 Press the “down” key to enter the operating data Oper/Rec/OP_RC
01.01.13 11:33 ARC
memory. The latest entry is displayed. Enabled USER
No
Step 2 Press the “left” key repeatedly to display the entries Oper/Rec/OP_RC
01.01.13 11:33 PSIG
one after the other in chronological order. Once the Enabled USER
end of the operating data memory has been reached, Yes
pressing the “left” key again will have no effect.
Step 3 Press the “right” key to display the previous entry. Oper/Rec/OP_RC
01.01.13 11:33 ARC
Enabled USER
No
Step 4 Press the “up” key at any point within the operating Oper/Rec/OP_RC
data memory to return to the entry point.
↓
6-30 P632/EN M/R-a5-B // P632‑312‑660

6.13.6.2 Readout of the Monitoring Signal Memory

If the unit detects an internal fault in the course of internal self-monitoring
routines or if it detects power system conditions that prevent flawless functioning
of the unit, then an entry is made in the monitoring signal memory. A maximum
of 30 entries is possible. After that an “overflow” signal is issued.

Action
Step 0 Select the entry point for the monitoring signal Oper/Rec/MT_RC
Mon. signal record.
memory.
↓
Step 1 Press the “down” key to enter the monitoring signal Mon. signal record.
01.01.13 13:33 SFMON
memory. The oldest entry is displayed. Checksum error param
Step 2 Press the “right” key repeatedly to display the entries Mon. signal record.
01.01.13 10:01 SFMON
one after the other in chronological order. If more than Exception oper. syst.
30 monitoring signals have been entered since the last
reset, the “overflow” signal is displayed as the last
entry.
Step 3 Press the “left” key to display the previous entry. Mon. signal record.
01.01.13 13:33 SFMON
Checksum error param
Step 4 If the “down” key is held down while a monitoring Mon. signal record.
01.01.13 13:33 SFMON
signal is being displayed, the following additional Checksum error param
information will be displayed:
● First First: 13:33:59.744

Updated: Yes
Time when the signal first occurred
Acknowledged: No
● Updated Number: 5
The fault is still being detected (Yes) or is no
longer detected (No) by the self-monitoring
function.
● Acknowledged
The fault was no longer detected by the self-
monitoring function and has been reset (Yes).
● Number
The signal occurred x times.
Step 5 Press the “up” key at any point within the monitoring Oper/Rec/MT_RC
Mon. signal record.
signal memory to return to the entry point.
↓
P632/EN M/R-a5-B // P632‑312‑660 6-31

6.13.6.3 Readout of the Event Memories (Records)

There are eight event memories for each type of event. The latest event is stored
in event memory 1, the previous one in event memory 2, and so forth.
Readout of event memories is illustrated using the fault memory as an example.

Action
Step 0 Select the entry point for the first fault memory, for Events/Rec/FT_RC
Fault recording 1
example. If the memory contains entries, the third line 01.01.13 10:00:33
of the display will show the date and time the fault ↓
began. If the third line is blank, then there are no entries
in the fault memory.
Step 1 Press the “down” key to enter the fault memory. First, Fault recording 1
FT_RC
the fault number is shown. In this example it is the 22nd Event
fault since the last reset. 22
Step 2 Press the “right” key repeatedly to see first the Fault recording 1
200 ms FT_DA
measured fault data and then the binary signals in Running time
chronological order. The time shown in the second line is 0.17 s
the time, measured from the onset of the fault, at which
the value was measured or the binary signal started or Fault recording 1
ended. 0 ms FT_RC
Record. in progress
Once the end of the fault has been reached (after the
Start
“right” key has been pressed repeatedly), pressing the
“right” key again will have no effect.
Fault recording 1
241 ms FT_RC
Record. in progress
End
Step 3 Press the “left” key to see the previous measured value Fault recording 1
0 ms FT_RC
or the previous signal. Record. in progress
Start
Step 4 Press the “up” key at any point within the fault memory Events/Rec/FT_RC
Fault recording 1
to return to the entry point. 01.01.13 10:00:33
↓
6-32 P632/EN M/R-a5-B // P632‑312‑660

6.13.7 Resetting
All information memories – including the event memories and the monitoring
signal memory – as well as the LED indicators can be reset manually. In addition,
the LED indicators are automatically cleared and initialized at the onset of a new
fault – provided that the appropriate operating mode has been selected – so that
they always indicate the latest fault.
The LED indicators can also be reset manually by pressing the CLEAR key, which
is always possible in the standard control mode. This action also triggers an LED
indicator test and an LCD display test. The event memories are not affected by
this action, so that inadvertent deletion of the records associated with the reset
signal pattern is reliably prevented.
Because of the ring structure of the event memories, the data for eight
consecutive events are updated automatically so that manual resetting should
not be necessary, in principle.
Deleting the event memories completely (e.g. after a function test), can be
accomplished by various resetting actions including the configuration of a group
resetting for several memories. An overview of all resetting actions can be found
in section “Resetting Actions” in Chapter “Operation”.
Resetting a single memory from the local control panel is described in the
following with the example of a fault memory. In this example the global change-
enabling function has already been activated.

Action
Step 0 Select the reset setting. Line 3 of the display shows the Oper/CtrlTest/FT_RC
Reset recording
number of faults since the last reset, 10 in this 10
example.
Step 1 Press the ENTER key. The LED indicator labeled EDIT Oper/CtrlTest/FT_RC
Reset recording
MODE will light up. 10
Don't execute
Step 2 Press the “Up” or “Down” keys to change the setting to Oper/CtrlTest/FT_RC
Reset recording
Execute. 10
Execute
Step 3 Press the ENTER key. The LED indicator labeled EDIT Oper/CtrlTest/FT_RC
Reset recording
MODE will be extinguished. The value in line 3 is reset 0
to 0.
Step 4 To cancel the intended clearing of the fault recordings Oper/CtrlTest/FT_RC

Reset recording
after leaving the standard control mode (the LED 10
indicator labeled EDIT MODE is on), press the CLEAR
key. The LED indicator will be extinguished, and the
fault recordings remain stored unchanged in the
protection unit’s memory. Any setting can be selected
again for a value change by pressing the keys.
P632/EN M/R-a5-B // P632‑312‑660 6-33

6.13.8 Password-Protected Control Actions

Certain actions from the local control panel such as a manual trip command for
testing purposes can only be carried out by entering a password so as to prevent
unwanted output even though the global change-enabling function has been
activated (see Section 6.13.3, (p. 6-23)).
This setup is designed to prevent accidental output and applies even when the
global change-enabling function has been activated. The password consists of a
pre-defined sequential key combination entered within a specific time interval. If
the password has been changed by the user (see Section 6.13.9, (p. 6-36)), the
following description will apply accordingly.
6-34 P632/EN M/R-a5-B // P632‑312‑660


Action
Step 0 In the menu tree “Oper/CtrlTest/MAIN”, select the Oper/CtrlTest/MAIN

Man. trip cmd. USER
parameter MAI N: Man . trip cm d. USER. Don't execute
Step 1 Press the ENTER key. Eight asterisks (*) appear in the Oper/CtrlTest/MAIN
Man. trip cmd. USER
fourth line of the display. Don't execute
********
Step 2 Press the following keys in sequence: Oper/CtrlTest/MAIN

Man. trip cmd. USER
“Left” Don't execute
*
“Right” Oper/CtrlTest/MAIN
Man. trip cmd. USER
Don't execute
*
“Up” Oper/CtrlTest/MAIN
Man. trip cmd. USER
Don't execute
*
“Down” Oper/CtrlTest/MAIN
Man. trip cmd. USER
The display will change as shown in the column on the Don't execute
right. *
Now press the enter key. The LED indicator labeled Oper/CtrlTest/MAIN
Man. trip cmd. USER
EDIT MODE will light up. This indicates that the setting Don't execute
can now be changed by pressing the “up” or “down”
keys.
Step 3 Change the setting to execute. Oper/CtrlTest/MAIN

Man. trip cmd. USER
Execute
Step 4 Press the enter key again. The LED indicator labeled Oper/CtrlTest/MAIN
Man. trip cmd. USER
EDIT MODE will go out. The unit will execute the Don't execute
command.
Step 5 As long as the LED indicator labeled EDIT MODE is on, Oper/CtrlTest/MAIN
Man. trip cmd. USER
the control action can be terminated by pressing the Don't execute
CLEAR key. The LED indicator labeled EDIT MODE will
be extinguished.
P632/EN M/R-a5-B // P632‑312‑660 6-35

6.13.9 Changing the Password
6.13.9.1 Local Control Panel with Password Protection

The password consists of a combination of keys that must be entered
sequentially within a specific time interval. The “left”, “right”, “up” and “down”
keys may be used to define the password and represent the numbers 1, 2, 3 and
4, respectively:
1 2
4
The password can be changed by the user at any time. The procedure for this
change is described below. The starting point is the factory-set password.
6-36 P632/EN M/R-a5-B // P632‑312‑660


Action
Step 0 In the menu tree “Par/Conf/LOC”, select the Par/Conf/LOC

Password
LOC: Password setting. ********
Step 1 Press the ENTER key. Eight asterisks (*) appear in the Par/Conf/LOC
Password
fourth line of the display. ********
********
Step 2 Press the “left”, “right”, “up” and “down” keys to enter Par/Conf/LOC
Password
the valid password. The display will change as shown in ********
the column on the right. *
Par/Conf/LOC
Password
********
*
Par/Conf/LOC
Password
********
*
Par/Conf/LOC
Password
********
*
Step 3 Now press the enter key. The LED indicator labeled Par/Conf/LOC
Password
EDIT MODE will light up. The third line shows an _
underscore character ( _ ) as the prompt for entering a
new password.
Step 4 Enter the new password, which in this example is done Par/Conf/LOC
Password
by pressing the “up” key followed by the “down” key. *
Par/Conf/LOC
Password
**
Step 5 Press the enter key again. Asterisks appear in the third Par/Conf/LOC
Password
line, and a cursor (underscore) in the fourth line **
prompts the user to enter the new password again. _
Step 6 Re-enter the password. Par/Conf/LOC

Password
**
*
Par/Conf/LOC
Password
**
**
P632/EN M/R-a5-B // P632‑312‑660 6-37


Action
Step 7a Press the ENTER key again. If the password has been Par/Conf/LOC
Password
re-entered correctly, the LED indicator labeled EDIT ********
MODE goes out and the display appears as shown on
the right. The new Password is now valid.
Step 7b If the password has been re-entered incorrectly, the Par/Conf/LOC

Password
LED indicator labeled EDIT MODE remains on and the **
display shown on the right appears. The password has _
to be re-entered. It is also possible to cancel the
change of the Password by pressing the CLEAR key (see
Step 8).
Step 8 The change in password can be canceled at any time Par/Conf/LOC

Password
before Step 7 by pressing the CLEAR key. If this is ********
done, the original Password continues to be valid.
6.13.9.2 Local Control Panel without Password Protection

Operation from the local control panel without password protection is also
possible. To select this option, immediately press the ENTER key a second time in
steps 4 and 6 of Table, (p. 6-37), without entering anything else. This will
configure the local control panel without password protection, and no control
actions involving changes will be possible until the global change-enabling
function has been activated (see “Change-Enabling Function”, Section 6.13.3,
(p. 6-23)).
6-38 P632/EN M/R-a5-B // P632‑312‑660

6.13.9.3 Display the Password

If the configured password has been forgotten, it can be called up on the LCD
display as described below. The procedure involves turning the device off and
then on again.

Action
Step 0 Turn off the device.
Step 1 Turn the device on again. At the very beginning of

device startup, press the four directional keys (“left”, TEST
“right”, “up” and “down”) at the same time and hold
them down.
Step 2 When this condition is detected during startup, the

password is displayed. Password
1234
Step 3 After the four keys are released, startup will continue.
TEST
P632/EN M/R-a5-B // P632‑312‑660 6-39

6.13.9.4 Changing and Displaying the L/R Password

In order to enable local control on devices fitted with the graphic display HMI
(ordering option) the L/R password has to be entered.
6-40 P632/EN M/R-a5-B // P632‑312‑660


Action
Step 0 In the menu tree “Par/Conf/LOC”, select the Par/Conf/LOC

Password L/R
LOC: Password L/R setting. ********
Step 1 Press the ENTER key. Eight asterisks (*) appear in the Par/Conf/LOC
Password L/R
fourth line of the display. ********
********
Step 2 Press the “left”, “right”, “up” and “down” keys to enter Par/Conf/LOC
Password L/R
the valid general password. The display will change as ********
shown in the column on the right. *
Par/Conf/LOC
Password L/R
********
*
Par/Conf/LOC
Password L/R
********
*
Par/Conf/LOC
Password L/R
********
*
Step 3 Now press the enter key. The red LED indicator labeled Par/Conf/LOC
Password L/R
EDIT MODE will be illuminated. The current Password 1423
L/R will appear in the third line.
Step 4 Enter the new password, which in this example is done Par/Conf/LOC
Password L/R
by pressing the “up” key followed by the “down” key. *
Par/Conf/LOC
Password L/R
**
Step 5 Press the enter key again. Asterisks appear in the third Par/Conf/LOC
Password L/R
line, and a cursor (underscore) in the fourth line **
prompts the user to enter the new Password L/R again. _
Step 6 Re-enter the new Password L/R. Par/Conf/LOC

Password L/R
**
*
P632/EN M/R-a5-B // P632‑312‑660 6-41


Action
Par/Conf/LOC
Password L/R
**
**
Step 7a Press the ENTER key again. If the new Password L/R has Par/Conf/LOC
Password L/R
been re-entered correctly, the red LED indicator labeled ********
EDIT MODE will be extinguished and the display
appears as shown on the right. The new Password L/R is
now valid.
Step 7b If the new Password L/R has been re-entered Par/Conf/LOC

Password L/R
incorrectly, the red LED indicator labeled EDIT MODE
**
remains illuminated and the display shown on the right _
hand side appears. The new Password L/R needs to be
re-entered. It is also possible to cancel the change of
the Password L/R by pressing the CLEAR key (see Step
8).
Step 8 The change of the Password L/R can be canceled at any Par/Conf/LOC
Password L/R
time before Step 7 by pressing the CLEAR key. If this is ********
done, the original Password L/R continues to be valid.
6-42 P632/EN M/R-a5-B // P632‑312‑660

P632
7 Settings
7.1 Parameters
The P632 must be adjusted to the system and to the protected equipment by
appropriate settings. This chapter gives instructions for determining the settings,
which are located in the folder titled “Parameters” in the menu tree. The
sequence in which the settings are listed and described in this chapter
corresponds to their sequence in the menu tree.
The P632 devices are supplied with a factory-set standard configuration of
settings that, in most cases, correspond to the default settings or become
apparent after a “cold restart”. The P632 is blocked in that case. All settings
must be re-entered after a cold restart.
Note
Detailed information about all parameters, including complete selection tables and
IEC 60870‑5‑103 protocol properties, are separately available as a set of interlinked
PDF files for user-friendly navigation, packed in one ZIP archive named
DataModelExplorer_P632_en_P01.zip.
In contrast to P632 versions before P632‑630, the implementation of the IEC 61850
protocol now features parameters that cannot be modified from the local control
panel (HMI) or with the operating program. Instead, these parameters are set with
a special IEC 61850 operating software, named “IED Configurator”.
Therefore these settings are not listed in this chapter or the following chapter.
These parameters are described in Chapter “IEC 61850 Settings via IED
Configurator”.
Cancelling a Protection or Control Function

The user can adapt the device to the requirements of a particular high-voltage
system by including the relevant protection or control functions in the device
configuration and cancelling all others (removing them from the device
configuration).
The following conditions must be met before cancelling a protection or control
function:
● The protection or control function in question must be disabled.
● None of the functions of the protection or control function to be cancelled
may be assigned to a binary input.
● None of the signals of the protection or control function may be assigned to
a binary output or an LED indicator.
● No functions of the device function being cancelled can be selected in a list
setting.
● None of the signals of the protection or control function may be linked to
other signals by way of an “m out of n” parameter.
The protection or control function to which a parameter, a signal, or a measured
value belongs is defined by the function group designation (example: “LIMIT:”).
General Notes on the Configuration of Function Group “Binary Input” (INP)

The P632 has optical coupler inputs for processing binary signals from the
system. The number and connection schemes for the available binary inputs are
shown in the terminal connection diagrams. The “DataModelExplorer” (available
P632/EN M/R-a5-B // P632‑312‑660 7-1

P632 7 Settings
as a separate ZIP archive file) gives information about the configuration options
for all binary inputs.
The P632 identifies the installed modules during startup. If a given binary I/O
module is not installed or has fewer binary signal inputs than the maximum
number possible at this slot, then the configuration addresses for the missing
binary signal inputs are automatically hidden in the menu tree.
When configuring binary inputs, one should keep in mind that the same function
can be assigned to several signal inputs. Thus one function can be activated from
several control points having different signal voltages.
The configuration in slots A and B and the configuration for the binary inputs
U C01 to U C08 will be changed with the selection of a new bay type. (Whether
automatic configuration occurs, is defined in the setting MA IN: Auto-
assignme nt I /O.) Depending on the connection type chosen for the P632 – pin-
type or ring-type cable socket terminals – the symbolic slots A, B and C refer to
the following slots:
Symbolic slot Pin-type cable socket terminals Ring-type cable socket terminals
A 06 12
B 07 14
C 08 16
The configuration of binary inputs for each bay type – in the case of auto-
assignment – is given in the List of Bay Types in the Appendix.
In the case of auto-assignment, the following notes apply:
Before selecting a new bay type, make sure that the binary inputs at slots A and B
as well as the binary inputs U C01 to U C08 are configured for functions from the
DEVxx function groups only. Otherwise there will be an error message, and the new
bay type will not be activated.
Before selecting a new bay type, make sure that all binary inputs specified in the
List of Bay types for the selected bay type are actually available in the device.
Otherwise there will be an error message, and the new bay type will not be
activated.
In order to ensure that the device will recognize the input signals, the triggering
signals must persist for at least 30 ms. The operating mode for each binary
signal input can be defined.
The user can specify whether the presence (active ‘high’ mode) or absence
(active ‘low’ mode) of a voltage shall be interpreted as the logic “1” signal.
General Notes on the Configuration of Function Group “Binary Output” (OUTP)

The P632 has output relays for the output of binary signals. The number and
connection schemes for the available binary output relays are shown in the
terminal connection diagrams. The “DataModelExplorer” (available as a separate
ZIP archive file) gives information about the configuration options for all binary
outputs.
The P632 identifies the installed modules during startup. If a given binary I/O
module is not installed or has fewer output relays than the maximum number
possible at this slot, then the configuration addresses for the missing output
relays are automatically hidden in the menu tree.
7-2 P632/EN M/R-a5-B // P632‑312‑660

7 Settings P632
The contact data for the all-or-nothing relays permits them to be used either as
command relays or as signal relays. It is important to note that the contact rating
of the binary I/O modules (X) varies (see Chapter “Technical Data”). One signal
can also be assigned simultaneously to several output relays for the purpose of
contact multiplication.
Selecting a new bay type can change the configuration for slots A and B.
(Whether automatic configuration occurs, is defined in the setting MA IN : Auto-
assignme nt I/O.) Depending on the connection type chosen for the P632 – pin-
type or ring-type cable socket terminals – the symbolic slots A and B correspond
to the following slots:
Symbolic slot Pin-type cable socket terminals Ring-type cable socket terminals
A 06 12
B 07 14
The configuration of output relays for each bay type – in the case of auto-
assignment – is given in the List of Bay Types in the Appendix.
In the case of auto-assignment, the following notes apply:
Before selecting a new bay type, make sure that the output relays at slots A and B
are configured for functions from the DEVxx function groups only. Otherwise there
will be an error message, and the new bay type will not be activated.
Before selecting a new bay type, make sure that all output relays specified in the
List of Bay types for the selected bay type are actually available in the device.
Otherwise there will be an error message, and the new bay type will not be
activated.
An operating mode can be defined for each output relay. Depending on the
selected operating mode, the output relay will operate in either an energize-on-
signal (ES) mode or a normally-energized (NE) mode and in either a latching or
non-latching mode. For output relays operating in latching mode, the operating
mode setting also determines when latching will be cancelled.
General Notes on the Configuration of the LED Indicators

The P632 has LED indicators for parallel display of binary signals. LED indicator
H 1 is not configurable. It is labeled “HEALTHY” and signals the operational
readiness of the protection unit (supply voltage present). LED indicators H 2 and
H 3 are not configurable either. H 2 is labeled “OUT OF SERVICE” and signals a
blocking or malfunction; H 3 is labeled “ALARM” and signals a warning alarm.
LED indicator H 17 indicates that the user is in the “EDIT MODE”. Section
“Configuration and Operating Mode of the LED Indicators (Function Group LED)”
in Chapter “Operation” describes the layout of the LED indicators and the factory
setting for LED indicator H 4.
An operating mode can be defined for each LED indicator. Depending on the set
operating mode, the LED indicator will operate in either energize-on-signal (ES)
mode (“open-circuit principle”) or normally-energized (NE) mode (“closed-circuit
principle”) and in either latching or non-latching mode. For LED indicators
operating in latching mode, the operating mode setting also determines when
latching will be cancelled.
With the multi-color LED indicators (H 4 – H 16 and H 18 - H 32) the colors red
and green can be independently assigned with functions. The third color amber
P632/EN M/R-a5-B // P632‑312‑660 7-3

P632 7 Settings
results as a mixture of red and green, i.e. when both functions assigned to the
LED indicator are simultaneously present.
7.1.1 Device Identification

The device identification settings are used to record the ordering information and
the design version of the P632. They have no effect on the device functions.
These settings should only be changed if the design version of the P632 is
modified.
7-4 P632/EN M/R-a5-B // P632‑312‑660

7 Settings P632
Parameter Address
Default Min Max Unit Logic Diagram
Device DVICE: De vice t ype 000 000
632 631 762
[spacer]
The device type is displayed. This display cannot be altered.
[spacer] DVICE: S W date 002 122
1997-01-01 1997-01 2098-11 dd.mm.yy

-01 -08
[spacer]
Date the software was created. This display cannot be altered.
Note: The centuries are not displayed. The supported dates range from January
1st, 1997, until November 7th, 2098.
[spacer] DVICE: S W ve rsion communic. 002 103
Not measured 0.00 655.35
[spacer]
Software version for the device's communication software. This display cannot
be altered.
[spacer] DVICE: DM I EC 618 50 ve rsion 002 059
Not measured 0 65535
[spacer]
Software version of the communication software based on the device's protocol
per IEC 61850. This display cannot be altered.
[spacer] DVICE: Lang uage v ersion 002 123
0.0 0.0 899.9
[spacer]
Identification of the change level of the texts of the data model. This display
cannot be altered.
[spacer] DVICE: Text vers .dat a mode l 002 121
0 0 255
[spacer]
Using the ‘text replacement tool' provided by the operating program, the user
can change the parameter descriptors (plain text designations) and load them
into the device. These customized data models contain an identifier defined by
the user while preparing the data model. This identifier is displayed at this point
in the menu tree. Standard data models have the identifier ‘0' (factory-set
default).
[spacer] DVICE: F numb er 002 124
0 0 9999
[spacer]
The F number is the serial number of the device. The display cannot be altered.
[spacer] DVICE: AFS Orde r No. 001 000
0:
[spacer] DVICE: PCS Or de r No. 001 200
0:
[spacer]
Order numbers for the device. The user cannot alter this number.
P632/EN M/R-a5-B // P632‑312‑660 7-5

P632 7 Settings
Parameter Address
[spacer] DVICE: Order ext . No. 1 000 003
0 0 999
0 0 999
0 0 999
0 0 999
0 0 999
0 0 999
0 0 999
0 0 999
0 0 999
0 0 999
0 0 999
0 0 999
0 0 999
0 0 999
0 0 999
0 0 999
0 0 999
0 0 999
0 0 999
7-6 P632/EN M/R-a5-B // P632‑312‑660

7 Settings P632
Parameter Address
0 0 999
0 0 999
0 0 999
0 0 999
0 0 999
0 0 999
0 0 999
0 0 999
[spacer]
Order extension numbers for the device.
[spacer] DVICE: M odule v ar. slot 1 086 050
65535: Not fitted
65535: Not fitted
65535: Not fitted
65535: Not fitted
65535: Not fitted
65535: Not fitted
65535: Not fitted
65535: Not fitted
65535: Not fitted
[spacer] DVICE: M odule v ar. slot 1 0 086 059
65535: Not fitted
P632/EN M/R-a5-B // P632‑312‑660 7-7

P632 7 Settings
Parameter Address
[spacer] DVICE: M odule var. slot 1 1 086 060
65535: Not fitted
65535: Not fitted
65535: Not fitted
65535: Not fitted
65535: Not fitted
65535: Not fitted
65535: Not fitted
65535: Not fitted
65535: Not fitted
65535: Not fitted
65535: Not fitted
[spacer]
Item number of the module inserted in the respective slot 1 to 21.
The display always shows the actual component configuration at any given time.
[spacer] DVICE: M odule vers . slot 1 086 193
27: Not fitted
27: Not fitted
27: Not fitted
27: Not fitted
27: Not fitted
27: Not fitted
27: Not fitted
7-8 P632/EN M/R-a5-B // P632‑312‑660

7 Settings P632
Parameter Address
[spacer] DVICE: M odule v ers . slot 8 086 200
27: Not fitted
[spacer] DVICE: M odule v ers . slot 9 086 201
27: Not fitted
[spacer] DVICE: M odule v ers . slot 1 0 086 202
27: Not fitted
27: Not fitted
27: Not fitted
27: Not fitted
27: Not fitted
27: Not fitted
27: Not fitted
27: Not fitted
27: Not fitted
27: Not fitted
27: Not fitted
27: Not fitted
[spacer]
Index letter specifying the version of the module fitted in the respective slot.
[spacer] DVICE: Variant of module A 086 047
65535: Not fitted
[spacer]
Item number of module A in this design version.
[spacer] DVICE: Vers ion of module A 086 190
27: Not fitted
[spacer]
Index letter specifying the version of module A.
P632/EN M/R-a5-B // P632‑312‑660 7-9

P632 7 Settings
Parameter Address
[spacer] DVICE: M AC add ress module A 104 061
2:
[spacer]
MAC address for the network hardware of the Ethernet module. This address is
introduced during manufacture and can only be read.
[spacer] DVICE: Variant of module L 086 048
65535: Not fitted
[spacer]
Item number of module L in this design version.
[spacer] DVICE: Vers ion of module L 086 191
27: Not fitted
[spacer]
Index letter specifying the version of module L.
[spacer] DVICE: Variant of module B 086 049
65535: Not fitted
[spacer]
Item number of module B in this design version.
[spacer] DVICE: Vers ion of module B 086 192
27: Not fitted
[spacer]
Index letter specifying the version of the digital bus module B.
[spacer] DVICE: Variant module B (a) 086 046
65535: Not fitted
[spacer]
Item number of the analog bus module B in this design version.
[spacer] DVICE: Vers ion m odul e B (a) 086 189
27: Not fitted
[spacer]
Index letter specifying the version of the digital bus module B.
[spacer] DVICE: IP addres s 111 000
2:
[spacer] DVICE: S ubnet mas k 111 001
2:
[spacer] DVICE: M AC add ress 111 003
2:
[spacer]
Display of the IP address (or subnet mask, MAC address, respectively) of the
Ethernet interface of the processor module. This can be useful for network
analysis, especially if these settings have been retrieved via DHCP.
[spacer] DVICE: Cust omer ID data 1 000 040
0.00 0.00 99.99
0.00 0.00 99.99
7-10 P632/EN M/R-a5-B // P632‑312‑660

7 Settings P632
Parameter Address
0.00 0.00 99.99
0.00 0.00 99.99
0.00 0.00 99.99
0.00 0.00 99.99
0.00 0.00 99.99
0.00 0.00 99.99
[spacer]
Set your numerically coded user data here for your records.
[spacer] DVICE: Location 001 201
0:
[spacer]
Reference input for the device's location as selected by user.
[spacer] DVICE: De vice ID 000 035
0 0 9999
[spacer]
ID code for use by the PC programs for operating and setting. Further
instructions on this setting are given in the description of the respective
operating program.
[spacer] DVICE: S ubst ation ID 000 036
0 0 9999
[spacer]
operating program.
[spacer] DVICE: Fee de r ID 000 037
0 0 9999
[spacer]
operating program.
[spacer] DVICE: De vice password 1 000 048
0 0 9999
[spacer] DVICE: De vice password 2 000 049
0 0 9999
[spacer]
ID code used by the operating program for identification purposes. See
description of the respective operating program for more detailed setting
instructions.
P632/EN M/R-a5-B // P632‑312‑660 7-11

P632 7 Settings
Parameter Address
[spacer] DVICE: S W ve rsion DHMI 002 131
[spacer] DVICE: S W ve rsion DHMI DM 002 132
1.10 0.00 655.35
[spacer] DVICE: S W ve rs.Chin.DHMI DM 008 233
2.00 0.00 655.35
[spacer] DVICE: S W ve rsion OS 002 101
[spacer] DVICE: S W ve rsion OS DM 002 111
1.01 0.00 655.35
[spacer] DVICE: S W ve rsion FP G A 010 169
[spacer]
Internal software version numbers.
Parameter Address
Local control panel LOC: Local HM I ex is ts 221 099
1: Yes
[spacer]
When set to Yes it is apparent that the device is fitted with the local control
panel (HMI).
7-12 P632/EN M/R-a5-B // P632‑312‑660

7 Settings P632
7.1.2 Configuration Parameters
Parameter Address
Cyber Security CS: Cyb erSe curi ty Ver s. 180 031
2 0 65535
[spacer]
Version of Cyber Security implementation within the device. Easergy MiCOM 30
is starting with value 2 to be compatible with other Schneider Electric devices.
[spacer] CS: Num ber of us e rs 180 002
0 0 9999
[spacer]
Actual number of users in RBAC configuration.
[spacer] CS: Comms log out 180 032
0: don't execute
[spacer]
If executed, the current logged in user at PC port or via Tunneling interface is
logged out (can be only executed by Comms).
[spacer] CS: HM I logout 180 033
0: don't execute
[spacer]
If executed, the current logged in user at HMI interface is logged out (can be
only executed by HMI).
[spacer] CS: Comms us ername 180 043
0:
[spacer]
Display of the name of the user which is logged in either at PC-port or via
Tunneling.
[spacer] CS: HM I us ername 180 034
0:
[spacer]
Display of the name of the user which is logged in at HMI.
[spacer] CS: Us e r acces s role 180 013
0:
[spacer]
Role(s) of user which is actually logged in. It will be set by the device after
successful login and will be cleared when user is logged off. Of the first 5 roles of
a user, the first 3 chars of the roles names will be displayed separated with one
blank between each.
[spacer] CS: Max log in at te mpts 180 011
0 0 9999
[spacer]
Number of possible login attempts or blocked (blocked means no limitation of
attempts).
[spacer] CS: Log in at te mpt s l eft 180 010
0 0 9999
[spacer]
Remaining login attempts.
P632/EN M/R-a5-B // P632‑312‑660 7-13

P632 7 Settings
Parameter Address
[spacer] CS: Blocking time 180 015
0 0 1800 s
[spacer]
Time how long login shall be blocked after erroneous login attempts or blocked
(blocked means it will not getting active).
[spacer] CS: Block time left 180 012
0 0 1800 s
[spacer]
Remaining blocking login time after erroneous login attempts.
[spacer] CS: Res ult E PW s ett ing 180 041
0 -5 0
[spacer]
Display of a value to informe on the result of the password setting. (EPW =
Encrypted Password)
[spacer] CS: Change p inco de 180 003
0 0 0
[spacer]
Change the PIN code using the navigation keys of the HMI. It is not necessary at
[spacer] CS: Config dis abled 180 044
1: Yes
[spacer]
Configure disabled or not.
[spacer] CS: Recovery Pass wor d 180 014
0:
[spacer]
Display of the Token and allow entry for reset to factory password.
[spacer] CS: Res et RBAC 180 045
12 1 12
[spacer]
Only on HMI. Starting reset timer and display code.
7-14 P632/EN M/R-a5-B // P632‑312‑660

7 Settings P632
Parameter Address
Local control panel LOC: Languag e 003 020
2: Reference language
[spacer]
Language in which texts will be displayed on the user interface (HMI).
[spacer] LOC: De cim al de limit er 003 021
1: Dot
[spacer]
Character to be used as decimal delimiter on the local control panel.
[spacer] LOC: Pas s word 003 035
1234 0 4444
[spacer]
The password to be used for changing settings from the local control panel can
be defined here.
[spacer] LOC: Pas s word L / R 221 040
1423 0 4444
[spacer]
The password used to change the setting from “Remote” to “Local” control can
be defined here. (Switching from “Local” to “Remote” control occurs without
checking the password.)
[spacer] LOC: Dis play L/ R 221 070
1: With Fig. 3-4, (p. 3-8)
[spacer]
This setting defines whether the control site – “Local” or “Remote” – shall be
displayed on the bay panel.
[spacer] LOC: Dis pl. inte rl. stat . 221 071
1: With Fig. 3-4, (p. 3-8)
[spacer]
This setting defines whether the “Locked” or “Unlocked” status shall be
displayed on the bay panel.
[spacer] LOC: Fct. re set ke y 005 251
060 000: MAIN: Without function Fig. 3-74, (p. 3-103)
[spacer]
Selection of counters and memories that are reset by pressing the RESET key on
the local control panel. (Resetting LED indicators and measured event values is
permanently assigned internally, so that they are always reset when the RESET
key is pressed.)
[spacer] LOC: Fct. re ad ke y 080 110
060 000: MAIN: Without function
[spacer]
Selection of up to 16 functions to be triggered when pressing the read key.
Event counters and event recordings are offered for selection. If several
functions have been selected then they will be sequentially triggered by
repeated pressing of the read key.
P632/EN M/R-a5-B // P632‑312‑660 7-15

P632 7 Settings
Parameter Address
[spacer] LOC: Fct. ass ign. L/R k e y 225 208
1: R <-> L Fig. 3-8, (p. 3-12)
[spacer]
This setting defines whether the (electric) key-operated switch switches
between remote / local control (L↔R) or between remote+local control / local
control (R&L↔L).
[spacer] LOC: Fct. m enu jmp li st 1 030 238
[spacer] LOC: Fct. m enu jmp li st 2 030 239
[spacer]
Selection of specified functions which will be sequentially displayed by repeated
reading of the menu jump list 1 (or 2).
[spacer] LOC: Fct. Operation P anel 053 007
[spacer]
Definition of the values to be displayed on the Measured Value Panel also
referred to as the Operation Panel.
[spacer] LOC: Fct. Ove r load Pane l 053 005
[spacer]
Definition of the values to be displayed on the Overload Panel.
[spacer] LOC: Fct. Fault Panel 053 003
[spacer]
Definition of the values to be displayed on the Fault Panel.
[spacer] LOC: Hold- tim e f or P anels 031 075
5 1 10 s Fig. 3-5, (p. 3-9)
[spacer]
Setting for the time period during which a panel is displayed, before switching to
the next panel. This setting is only relevant if more values are selected than can
be shown on the LC-Display.
[spacer] LOC: Autom . re t ur n t ime 003 014
60 60 60000 s Fig. 3-5, (p. 3-9)
[spacer]
If the user does not press a key on the local control panel during this set time
period, the change-enabling function is deactivated.
[spacer] LOC: Re t ur n tim e selec t. 221 030
60 60 60000 s Fig. 3-4, (p. 3-8)
[spacer]
period, then the selection of a switchgear unit is cancelled.
7-16 P632/EN M/R-a5-B // P632‑312‑660

7 Settings P632
Parameter Address
[spacer] LOC: Re t ur n time illumi n. 003 023
60 60 60000 s Fig. 3-4, (p. 3-8)
[spacer]
period, then the backlighting of the LCD display is switched off, and any
switchgear selection that might have been made is cancelled.
P632/EN M/R-a5-B // P632‑312‑660 7-17

P632 7 Settings
Parameter Address
PC link PC: Bay addre ss 003 068
1 0 254 Fig. 3-9, (p. 3-14)
[spacer] PC: De vice addr ess 003 069
1 0 255 Fig. 3-9, (p. 3-14)
[spacer]
Bay and device addresses are used to address the device in communication via
the PC interface. An identical setting must be selected for both addresses.
[spacer] PC: Baud rate 003 081
115.2: 115.2 kBaud Baud Fig. 3-9, (p. 3-14)
[spacer]
Baud rate of the PC interface.
[spacer] PC: Parit y bit 003 181
1: Even Fig. 3-9, (p. 3-14)
[spacer]
Set the same parity that is set at the interface of the PC connected to the P632.
[spacer] PC: Spontan. sig. e nable 003 187
0: None Fig. 3-9, (p. 3-14)
[spacer]
Enable for the transmission of spontaneous signals via the PC interface.
[spacer] PC: Select. s pontan. si g. 003 189
[spacer]
Selection of spontaneous signals for transmission via the PC interface.
[spacer] PC: Trans m.enab.cyc l. dat 003 084
0: Without Fig. 3-9, (p. 3-14)
[spacer]
Enable for the cyclic transmission of measured values via the PC interface.
[spacer] PC: Cycl. d ata ILS t e l. 003 185
[spacer]
Selection of the measured values that are transmitted in a user-defined
telegram via the PC interface.
[spacer] PC: De lta V 003 055
3.0 0.0 15.0 %Vnom Fig. 3-9, (p. 3-14)
[spacer]
A measured voltage value is transmitted via the PC interface if it differs by the
set delta quantity from the last measured value transmitted.
[spacer] PC: De lta I 003 056
3.0 0.0 15.0 %Inom Fig. 3-9, (p. 3-14)
[spacer]
A measured current value is transmitted via the PC interface if it differs by the
set delta quantity from the last measured value transmitted.
[spacer] PC: IP addr es s 111 004
192 0 255
7-18 P632/EN M/R-a5-B // P632‑312‑660

7 Settings P632
Parameter Address
[spacer] PC: IP addr es s 1 111 005
168 0 255
1 0 255
2 0 255
[spacer]
IP address of the Ethernet interface of the P632's processor module.
This is the Ethernet interface of the processor module and can be used for
special service activities, e.g. for uploading new firmware.
Note: In the operating program, the complete IP address is displayed at PC: IP
addr es s. The device’s front panel display only displays the IP address
distributed to these four data model addresses:
● PC : IP add re ss,
● PC: IP addr e ss 1,
● PC: IP ad dres s 2,
● PC: I P ad dres s 3.
Note: This interface can only be used if it has been configured (PC: IP
addr es s, PC: Subnet mas k, PC : IP addre ss mode) and activated via
PC: IP Enable co nf ig..
[spacer] PC: Subnet mas k 111 008
255 0 255
[spacer] PC: Subnet mas k 1 111 009
255 0 255
255 0 255
0 0 255
[spacer]
Subnet mask of the Ethernet interface of the processor module.
Note: In the operating program, the complete mask is displayed at
PC: Subnet mas k. The device’s front panel display only displays the mask
distributed to these four data model addresses:
● PC: Subnet mask,
● PC: Sub net mas k 1,
● PC: S ubnet mask 2,
● PC: S ubne t mask 3.
P632/EN M/R-a5-B // P632‑312‑660 7-19

P632 7 Settings
Parameter Address
[spacer] PC: IP addr es s mode 111 016
1: DHCP
[spacer]
Setting of the method how the IP address of the Ethernet interface of the
processor module shall be defined.
● DHCP: The IP address shall be retrieved from a DHCP server.
● Fix: The setting of P C: IP addre ss shall be used.
● Device address: The setting of PC : IP addr ess shall be used for the
first three number values of the IP address, the fourth number value of the
IP address shall be the value of PC : De v ic e addr ess.
[spacer] PC: IP Enable conf ig. 111 017
0: don't execute
[spacer]
Activating the Ethernet interface of the processor module.
[spacer] PC: De lta f 003 057
2.0 0.0 2.0 %fnom Fig. 3-9, (p. 3-14)
[spacer]
The measured frequency value is transmitted via the PC interface if it differs by
the set delta from the last measured value transmitted.
[spacer] PC: De lta meas.v.ILS te l 003 155
3.0 0.0 15.0 Fig. 3-9, (p. 3-14)
[spacer]
The telegram is transmitted if a measured value differs by the set delta quantity
from the last measured value transmitted.
[spacer] PC: De lta t 003 058
1 0 15 min Fig. 3-9, (p. 3-14)
[spacer]
All measured values are transmitted again via the PC interface after this time
period has elapsed – provided that transmission has not been triggered by the
other delta conditions.
[spacer] PC: Time-out 003 188
1 1 60 min Fig. 3-9, (p. 3-14)
[spacer]
Setting for the time to elapse after the last telegram exchange via the PC
interface before activating the second communication channel of
communication module A.
7-20 P632/EN M/R-a5-B // P632‑312‑660

7 Settings P632
Parameter Address
“Logical” COMM 1: Functio n gr oup CO MM1 056 026
communication
interface 1
0: Without
[spacer]
Cancelling function group COMM1 or including it in the configuration. If the
function group is cancelled from the configuration, then all associated settings
and signals are hidden, with the exception of this setting.
[spacer] COMM 1: General enabl e USE R 003 170
0: No Fig. 3-11, (p. 3-17)

Fig. 3-12, (p. 3-18)
Fig. 3-13, (p. 3-19)
[spacer]
Disabling or enabling communication interface 1.
[spacer] COMM 1: Basic IE C87 0-5 e nabl 003 215
0: No Fig. 3-10, (p. 3-16)
[spacer]
Common settings for enabling all protocols based on IEC 870-5-xxx.
[spacer] COMM 1: Addit . - 10 1 e nable 003 216
0: No Fig. 3-10, (p. 3-16)
[spacer]
Enabling additional settings that are relevant for the protocol based on
IEC 870-5-101.
[spacer] COMM 1: Addit . I LS e nable 003 217
0: No Fig. 3-10, (p. 3-16)
[spacer]
Enabling additional settings that are relevant for the ILS protocol.
[spacer] COMM 1: MODB US e nable 003 220
0: No Fig. 3-10, (p. 3-16)
[spacer]
Enabling settings relevant for the MODBUS protocol.
[spacer] COMM 1: DNP3 enable 003 231
0: No Fig. 3-10, (p. 3-16)
[spacer]
Enabling settings relevant for the DNP 3.0 protocol.
[spacer] COMM 1: COUR IER e nable 103 040
0: No Fig. 3-10, (p. 3-16)
[spacer]
Enabling settings relevant for the COURIER protocol.
[spacer] COMM 1: Com m unicat. prot ocol 003 167
[spacer]
Select the communication protocol that shall be used for the communication
interface.
P632/EN M/R-a5-B // P632‑312‑660 7-21

P632 7 Settings
Parameter Address
[spacer] COMM 1: -103 pr ot. var iant 003 178
1: Private Fig. 3-11, (p. 3-17)
[spacer]
The user may select between two variants of the 103 protocol.
Note: This setting is hidden unless the IEC 870-5-xxx protocol is enabled.
[spacer] COMM 1: MODB US prot . variant 003 214
1: Compatible Fig. 3-14, (p. 3-20)
[spacer]
The user may select between two variants of the MODBUS protocol.
Note: This setting is hidden unless the MODBUS protocol is enabled.
[spacer] COMM 1: Line idle stat e 003 165
1: Light on / high Fig. 3-11, (p. 3-17)

Fig. 3-12, (p. 3-18)
Fig. 3-13, (p. 3-19)
Fig. 3-14, (p. 3-20)
Fig. 3-15, (p. 3-21)
Fig. 3-16, (p. 3-22)
[spacer]
Setting for the line idle state indication.
[spacer] COMM 1: Baud rate 003 071
19.2: 19.2 kBaud Baud Fig. 3-11, (p. 3-17)

Fig. 3-12, (p. 3-18)
Fig. 3-13, (p. 3-19)
Fig. 3-14, (p. 3-20)
Fig. 3-15, (p. 3-21)
Fig. 3-16, (p. 3-22)
[spacer]
Baud rate of the communication interface.
[spacer] COMM 1: Parity bit 003 171
2: Even Fig. 3-11, (p. 3-17)

Fig. 3-12, (p. 3-18)
Fig. 3-13, (p. 3-19)
Fig. 3-14, (p. 3-20)
Fig. 3-15, (p. 3-21)
Fig. 3-16, (p. 3-22)
[spacer]
Set the same parity that is set at the interface of the control system connected
to the P632.
7-22 P632/EN M/R-a5-B // P632‑312‑660

7 Settings P632
Parameter Address
[spacer] COMM 1: Dead t ime moni toring 003 176
1: Yes Fig. 3-11, (p. 3-17)

Fig. 3-12, (p. 3-18)
Fig. 3-13, (p. 3-19)
Fig. 3-14, (p. 3-20)
Fig. 3-15, (p. 3-21)
Fig. 3-16, (p. 3-22)
[spacer]
The P632 monitors telegram transmission to make sure that no excessive pause
occurs within a telegram. This monitoring function can be disabled if it is not
required.
Note: This setting is only necessary for modem transmission.
[spacer] COMM 1: Mon. time pol ling 003 202
25 3 254 s Fig. 3-11, (p. 3-17)

Fig. 3-12, (p. 3-18)
Fig. 3-13, (p. 3-19)
Fig. 3-14, (p. 3-20)
Fig. 3-15, (p. 3-21)
Fig. 3-16, (p. 3-22)
[spacer]
The time between two polling calls from the communication master must be less
than the time set here.
[spacer] COMM 1: Octet comm. addre ss 003 072
1 0 254 Fig. 3-11, (p. 3-17)

Fig. 3-12, (p. 3-18)
Fig. 3-13, (p. 3-19)
Fig. 3-14, (p. 3-20)
Fig. 3-15, (p. 3-21)
Fig. 3-16, (p. 3-22)
[spacer]
The communication address and the ASDU address are used to identify the
device in communication via the interface. An identical setting must be selected
for both addresses.
“ASDU”: Application Service Data Unit
[spacer] COMM 1: Oct.2 comm.addr.DNP 3 003 240
0 0 255 Fig. 3-15, (p. 3-21)
[spacer]
In the DNP 3.0 protocol, a 16-bit address is used to identify devices.
The address that can be set here is the higher-order octet, whereas the address
set at COM M1: Octe t comm. addr ess is the lower-order octet of the
DNP address.
Note: This setting is hidden unless the DNP 3.0 protocol is enabled.
P632/EN M/R-a5-B // P632‑312‑660 7-23

P632 7 Settings
Parameter Address
[spacer] COMM 1: Pos. acknowle dge me nt 103 060
1: Single character E5
[spacer]
The following transmission frame formats are available (according to the
standard):
● Short message FT 1.2: short message with a fixed block length of 5
characters
● Single character E5: single control character
[spacer] COMM 1: Tes t m onit or on 003 166
0: No Fig. 3-11, (p. 3-17)

Fig. 3-12, (p. 3-18)
Fig. 3-13, (p. 3-19)
Fig. 3-14, (p. 3-20)
Fig. 3-15, (p. 3-21)
Fig. 3-16, (p. 3-22)
[spacer]
Setting specifying whether data shall be recorded for service activities.
[spacer] COMM 1: Name of manufac ture r 003 161
1: SE Fig. 3-11, (p. 3-17)

Fig. 3-12, (p. 3-18)
Fig. 3-13, (p. 3-19)
[spacer]
Setting for the name of the manufacturer.
Note:
● This setting can be changed to ensure compatibility.
● This setting is hidden unless an IEC 870-5 protocol is enabled.
[spacer] COMM 1: Octet address ASD U 003 073
1 0 255 Fig. 3-11, (p. 3-17)

Fig. 3-12, (p. 3-18)
Fig. 3-13, (p. 3-19)
[spacer]
for both addresses.
Note: This setting is hidden unless an IEC 870-5 protocol is enabled.
[spacer] COMM 1: Spontan. s ig. enabl e 003 177
65535: All Fig. 3-11, (p. 3-17)

Fig. 3-12, (p. 3-18)
Fig. 3-13, (p. 3-19)
[spacer]
Enable for the transmission of spontaneous signals via the communication
interface.
7-24 P632/EN M/R-a5-B // P632‑312‑660

7 Settings P632
Parameter Address
[spacer] COMM 1: Se le ct. s pont an.sig. 003 179

Fig. 3-12, (p. 3-18)
Fig. 3-13, (p. 3-19)
[spacer]
Selection of spontaneous signals for transmission via “logical” communication
interface 1.
[spacer] COMM 1: Transm.enab.c ycl.dat 003 074
0: Without Fig. 3-11, (p. 3-17)

Fig. 3-12, (p. 3-18)
Fig. 3-13, (p. 3-19)
[spacer]
Enabling of cyclic transmission of measured values via the communication
interface.
[spacer] COMM 1: Cycl. dat a ILS t e l. 003 175

Fig. 3-12, (p. 3-18)
Fig. 3-13, (p. 3-19)
[spacer]
Selection of the measured values that are transmitted in a user-defined
telegram via the communication interface.
[spacer] COMM 1: Delta V 003 050
3.0 0.0 15.0 %Vnom Fig. 3-11, (p. 3-17)

Fig. 3-12, (p. 3-18)
Fig. 3-13, (p. 3-19)
[spacer]
A measured voltage value is transmitted via the communication interface if it
differs by the set delta quantity from the last measured value transmitted.
[spacer] COMM 1: Delta I 003 051
3.0 0.0 15.0 %Inom Fig. 3-11, (p. 3-17)

Fig. 3-12, (p. 3-18)
Fig. 3-13, (p. 3-19)
[spacer]
A measured current value is transmitted via the communication interface if it
[spacer] COMM 1: Delta f 003 052
2.0 0.0 2.0 %fnom Fig. 3-11, (p. 3-17)

Fig. 3-12, (p. 3-18)
Fig. 3-13, (p. 3-19)
[spacer]
The measured frequency value is transmitted via the communication interface if
it differs by the set delta quantity from the last measured value transmitted.
P632/EN M/R-a5-B // P632‑312‑660 7-25

P632 7 Settings
Parameter Address
[spacer] COMM 1: Delta m e as. v.ILS t el 003 150
3.0 0.0 15.0 Fig. 3-11, (p. 3-17)

Fig. 3-12, (p. 3-18)
Fig. 3-13, (p. 3-19)
[spacer]
[spacer] COMM 1: Delta t 003 053
1 0 15 min Fig. 3-11, (p. 3-17)

Fig. 3-12, (p. 3-18)
Fig. 3-13, (p. 3-19)
[spacer]
All measured values are transmitted again via the communication interface after
this time period has elapsed – provided that transmission has not been triggered
by the other delta conditions.
[spacer] COMM 1: Cont in. ge ner al scan 003 077
Blocked 10 9000 s Fig. 3-11, (p. 3-17)

Fig. 3-12, (p. 3-18)
Fig. 3-13, (p. 3-19)
[spacer]
A continuous or background general scan means that the P632 transmits all
settings, signals, and monitoring signals through the communication interface
during slow periods when there is not much activity. This ensures that there will
be data consistency with a connected control system. The time to be set defines
the minimum time difference between two telegrams.
[spacer] COMM 1: Com m . addr ess le ngth 003 201
1 1 2 Byte Fig. 3-12, (p. 3-18)
[spacer]
Setting for the communication address length.
Note: This setting is hidden unless the IEC 870-5-101 protocol is set.
[spacer] COMM 1: Octet 2 comm. addr. 003 200
0 0 255 Fig. 3-12, (p. 3-18)
[spacer]
Setting for the length of the higher-order communication address.
[spacer] COMM 1: Caus e transm. le ngth 003 192
1: W/o source address Fig. 3-12, (p. 3-18)
[spacer]
Setting for the length of the cause of transmission.
7-26 P632/EN M/R-a5-B // P632‑312‑660

7 Settings P632
Parameter Address
[spacer] COMM 1: Address le ngt h AS DU 003 193
1 1 2 Byte Fig. 3-12, (p. 3-18)
[spacer]
Setting for the length of the common address for identification of telegram
structures.
[spacer] COMM 1: Octet 2 addr. ASD U 003 194
0 0 255 Fig. 3-12, (p. 3-18)
[spacer]
Setting for the length of the common higher-order address for identification of
telegram structures.
[spacer] COMM 1: Addr.le ngth inf. obj. 003 196
2 2 3 Byte Fig. 3-12, (p. 3-18)
[spacer]
Setting for the length of the address for information objects.
[spacer] COMM 1: Oct.3 addr. inf.obj. 003 197
0 0 255 Fig. 3-12, (p. 3-18)
[spacer]
Setting for the length of the higher-order address for information objects.
[spacer] COMM 1: Inf .No.<- >funct.t ype 003 195
0: No Fig. 3-12, (p. 3-18)
[spacer]
Setting specifying whether information numbers and function type shall be
reversed in the object address.
[spacer] COMM 1: Tim e tag length 003 198
3 3 7 Byte Fig. 3-12, (p. 3-18)
[spacer]
Setting for the time tag length.
[spacer] COMM 1: AS DU1 / ASDU20 conv . 003 190
1: Single signal Fig. 3-12, (p. 3-18)
[spacer]
Setting specifying whether telegram structure 1 or 20 shall be converted as a
single signal or double signal.
P632/EN M/R-a5-B // P632‑312‑660 7-27

P632 7 Settings
Parameter Address
[spacer] COMM 1: AS DU2 co nver si on 003 191
1: Single signal Fig. 3-12, (p. 3-18)
[spacer]
Setting specifying whether telegram structure 2 shall be converted as a single
signal or double signal.
[spacer] COMM 1: Init ializ. signal 003 199
1: Yes Fig. 3-12, (p. 3-18)
[spacer]
Setting specifying whether an initialization signal shall be issued.
[spacer] COMM 1: Balance d ope ration 003 226
0: No Fig. 3-12, (p. 3-18)
[spacer]
Setting that determines whether communication takes place on a balanced basis
(full duplex operation).
[spacer] COMM 1: Direction bit 003 227
0 0 1 Fig. 3-12, (p. 3-18)
[spacer]
Setting for the transmission direction. Normally this value will be set to '1' at
the control center and to '0' at the substation.
Note: This setting is hidden unless the IEC 870-5-101 protocol is enabled.
[spacer] COMM 1: Tim e- out int erv al 003 228
0.40 0.10 2.55 s Fig. 3-12, (p. 3-18)
[spacer]
Setting for the maximum time that will elapse until the status signal for the
acknowledgment command is issued.
[spacer] COMM 1: Reg.asg. sel ec. cmds 003 210
[spacer]
MODBUS registers in the range 00301 to 00400 are assigned to the selected
commands. Assignment is made in the order of selection. This means that the
first command is given the register no. 00301, the second the register no.
00302, etc.
[spacer] COMM 1: Reg.asg. sel ec. si g. 003 211
[spacer]
signals. Assignment is made in the order of selection. This means that the first
signal is given the register no. 10301, the second the register no. 10302, etc.
7-28 P632/EN M/R-a5-B // P632‑312‑660

7 Settings P632
Parameter Address
[spacer] COMM 1: Reg.asg. sel . m. val. 003 212
[spacer]
measured values. Assignment is made in the order of selection. This means that
the first measured value is given the register no. 30301, the second the register
no. 30302, etc.
[spacer] COMM 1: Reg.asg. sel . par am. 003 213
[spacer]
parameters. Assignment is made in the order of selection. This means that the
first parameter is given the register no. 40301, the second the register no.
40302, etc.
[spacer] COMM 1: Delta t ( MO DBUS) 003 152
5 1 120 s Fig. 3-14, (p. 3-20)
[spacer]
All MODBUS registers are transmitted again through the communication
interface after this time has elapsed.
[spacer] COMM 1: Autom .eve nt c onfirm. 003 249
0: Without Fig. 3-14, (p. 3-20)
[spacer]
Setting specifying whether an event must be confirmed by the master in order
for an event to be deleted from the 'event queue'.
[spacer] COMM 1: Phys . Char act . De lay 003 241
0 0 254 Bit Fig. 3-15, (p. 3-21)
[spacer]
Number of bits that must pass between the receipt of the 'request' and the start
of sending the 'response'.
[spacer] COMM 1: Phys . Char . Time out 003 242
40 0 254 Bit Fig. 3-15, (p. 3-21)
[spacer]
Number of bits that may be missing from the telegram before receipt is
terminated.
[spacer] COMM 1: Link Confirm. M ode 003 243
1: Multi-frame fragment Fig. 3-15, (p. 3-21)
[spacer]
Setting for the acknowledgment mode of the link layer.
P632/EN M/R-a5-B // P632‑312‑660 7-29

P632 7 Settings
Parameter Address
[spacer] COMM 1: Link Confirm.Timeout 003 244
0.10 0.05 2.54 s Fig. 3-15, (p. 3-21)
[spacer]
Setting for the time period within which the master must acknowledge at the
link layer.
[spacer] COMM 1: Link Max. Re tr ie s 003 245
2 1 10 Fig. 3-15, (p. 3-21)
[spacer]
Number of repetitions that are carried out on the link layer if errors have
occurred during transmission (such as failure to acknowledge).
[spacer] COMM 1: Appl.Con firm.T ime out 003 246
5.0 0.5 25.4 s Fig. 3-15, (p. 3-21)
[spacer]
Setting for the time period within which the master must acknowledge at the
application layer.
[spacer] COMM 1: Appl. Ne ed Time De l. 003 247
60 5 254 s Fig. 3-15, (p. 3-21)
[spacer]
Time interval within which the slave requests time synchronization cyclically
from the master.
[spacer] COMM 1: Ind ./cl. bin. input s 003 232
[spacer]
Selection of data points and data classes for object 1 – binary inputs.
Assignment of indices is made in the order of selection, beginning with 0.
[spacer] COMM 1: Ind ./cl. bin.output s 003 233
[spacer]
Selection of data points and data classes for object 10 – binary outputs.
[spacer] COMM 1: Ind ./cl. analog inp. 003 235
[spacer]
Selection of data points and data classes for object 30 – analog inputs.
7-30 P632/EN M/R-a5-B // P632‑312‑660

7 Settings P632
Parameter Address
[spacer] COMM 1: Ind ./cl. analog outp 003 236
[spacer]
Selection of data points and data classes for object 40 – analog outputs.
[spacer] COMM 1: Delta me as. v. ( DNP 3 ) 003 250
16 0 255 Fig. 3-15, (p. 3-21)
[spacer]
Initialization value of threshold values for transmission of measured values in
object 30. The threshold values can be changed separately by the master for
each measured value by writing to object 34, 'analog input reporting deadband'.
[spacer] COMM 1: Delta t ( DNP 3) 003 248
5 1 120 s Fig. 3-15, (p. 3-21)
[spacer]
Cycle time for updating DNP object 30 (analog inputs).
[spacer] COMM 1: Com m and sel ect ion 103 042
[spacer]
Selection of commands to be issued via the COURIER protocol.
Note: This setting is hidden unless the COURIER protocol is enabled.
[spacer] COMM 1: Signal se lec tion 103 043
[spacer]
Selection of signals to be transmitted via the COURIER protocol.
[spacer] COMM 1: Meas . v al. sel ect ion 103 044
[spacer]
Selection of measured values to be transmitted via the Courier protocol.
Note: This setting is hidden unless the Courier protocol is enabled.
[spacer] COMM 1: Param et er s ele ct ion 103 045
[spacer]
Selection of settings to be altered via the Courier protocol.
Note: This setting is hidden unless the Courier protocol is enabled.
[spacer] COMM 1: Delta t ( COURIE R) 103 046
5 1 120 s Fig. 3-16, (p. 3-22)
[spacer]
Cycle time at the conclusion of which the selected measured values are again
transmitted.
P632/EN M/R-a5-B // P632‑312‑660 7-31

P632 7 Settings
Parameter Address
“Logical” COMM 2: Function gr oup CO MM2 056 057
communication
interface 2
0: Without
[spacer]
Cancelling function group COMM2 or including it in the configuration. If the
[spacer] COMM 2: General enabl e USE R 103 170
0: No Fig. 3-18, (p. 3-24)
[spacer]
Disabling or enabling communication interface 2.
[spacer] COMM 2: Line idle stat e 103 165
1: Light on / high Fig. 3-18, (p. 3-24)
[spacer]
Setting for the line idle state indication.
[spacer] COMM 2: Baud rate 103 071
19.2: 19.2 kBaud Baud Fig. 3-18, (p. 3-24)
[spacer]
Baud rate of the communication interface.
[spacer] COMM 2: Parity bit 103 171
2: Even Fig. 3-18, (p. 3-24)
[spacer]
Set the same parity that is set at the interface of the control system connected
to the P632.
[spacer] COMM 2: Dead t ime moni toring 103 176
1: Yes Fig. 3-18, (p. 3-24)
[spacer]
The P632 monitors telegram transmission to make sure that no excessive pause
occurs within a telegram. This monitoring function can be disabled if it is not
required.
Note: This setting is only necessary for modem transmission.
[spacer] COMM 2: Mon. tim e pol ling 103 202
25 3 254 s Fig. 3-18, (p. 3-24)
[spacer]
The time between two polling calls from the communication master must be less
than the time set here.
[spacer] COMM 2: Posit ive ackn. faul t 103 203
0: No
[spacer]
It is possible to set whether or not faults can be acknowledged positively after
transmission (and consequently deleted from the fault overview at the
COMM2/PC interface).
7-32 P632/EN M/R-a5-B // P632‑312‑660

7 Settings P632
Parameter Address
[spacer] COMM 2: Octet comm. addre ss 103 072
1 0 254 Fig. 3-18, (p. 3-24)
[spacer]
for both addresses.
[spacer] COMM 2: Name of manufac ture r 103 161
1: SE Fig. 3-18, (p. 3-24)
[spacer]
Setting for the name of the manufacturer.
Note: This setting can be changed to ensure compatibility.
[spacer] COMM 2: Octet address ASD U 103 073
1 0 255 Fig. 3-18, (p. 3-24)
[spacer]
for both addresses.
[spacer] COMM 2: Spontan. s ig. enabl e 103 177
0: None Fig. 3-18, (p. 3-24)
[spacer]
Enable for the transmission of spontaneous signals via the communication
interface.
[spacer] COMM 2: Se le ct. s pont an.sig. 103 179
[spacer]
Selection of spontaneous signals for transmission via communication interface 2.
[spacer] COMM 2: Transm.enab.c ycl.dat 103 074
0: Without Fig. 3-18, (p. 3-24)
[spacer]
Enable for the cyclic transmission of measured values via the communication
interface.
[spacer] COMM 2: Cycl. dat a ILS t e l. 103 175
[spacer]
Selection of the measured values transmitted in a user-defined telegram via the
[spacer] COMM 2: Delta V 103 050
3.0 0.0 15.0 %Vnom Fig. 3-18, (p. 3-24)
[spacer]
A measured voltage value is transmitted via the communication interface if it
P632/EN M/R-a5-B // P632‑312‑660 7-33

P632 7 Settings
Parameter Address
[spacer] COMM 2: Delta I 103 051
3.0 0.0 15.0 %Inom Fig. 3-18, (p. 3-24)
[spacer]
A measured current value is transmitted via the communication interface if it
[spacer] COMM 2: Delta f 103 052
2.0 0.0 2.0 %fnom Fig. 3-18, (p. 3-24)
[spacer]
The measured frequency value is transmitted via the communication interface if
it differs by the set delta quantity from the last measured value transmitted.
[spacer] COMM 2: Delta m e as. v.ILS t el 103 150
3.0 0.0 15.0 Fig. 3-18, (p. 3-24)
[spacer]
[spacer] COMM 2: Delta t 103 053
1 0 15 min Fig. 3-18, (p. 3-24)
[spacer]
All measured values are transmitted again via the communication interface after
this time period has elapsed – provided that transmission has not been triggered
by the other delta conditions.
7-34 P632/EN M/R-a5-B // P632‑312‑660

7 Settings P632
Parameter Address
IEC 61850 IEC: Function gr oup IEC 056 059
Communication
0: Without
[spacer]
Cancelling function group IEC or including it in the configuration. If the function
group is cancelled from the configuration, then all associated settings and
signals are hidden.
Important notice: Some of the parameters in function group IEC are set with
the IEC 61850 configuration tool “IED Configurator”, they cannot be modified
from the local control panel (HMI) or with the operating program, and therefore
these parameters are listed separately.
[spacer] IEC: Ge neral enable US ER 104 000
0: No Fig. 3-20, (p. 3-28)
[spacer]
Enabling and disabling function group IEC.
[spacer] IEC: IEC prot. vari ant 104 079
1: IEC61850 ED2 Fig. 3-20, (p. 3-28)
[spacer]
Selection of the IEC protocol for the Ethernet board (IEC61850 ED2, IEC61850
ED1
or IEC60870-5-104).
[spacer] IEC: ET H COM M Mode 104 080
1: PRP Fig. 3-20, (p. 3-28)
[spacer]
Selection of the redundant Ethernet protocol between PRP and HSR.
[spacer] IEC: Block Port A/ B 104 073
0: No Fig. 3-20, (p. 3-28)
[spacer]
When Port A/B blocked is activated, Port A for SEB or Port A&B for REB will be
disabled.
[spacer] IEC: Block Port C 104 074
0: No Fig. 3-20, (p. 3-28)
[spacer]
When Port C blocked is activated, Port C will be disabled.
[spacer] IEC: Switch Con fig. Bank 104 043
0: don't execute Fig. 3-20, (p. 3-28)
[spacer]
This parameter can only be sent individually. Accepting the previously set
communication parameters as the active communication settings.
[spacer] IEC: Active Config. Name 104 045
2:
[spacer]
Name of the configuration bank currently valid.
Setting is carried out with the IED Configurator.
P632/EN M/R-a5-B // P632‑312‑660 7-35

P632 7 Settings
Parameter Address
[spacer] IEC: Active Conf ig. Ve r s. 104 046
2:
[spacer]
Version number of the configuration bank currently valid.
[spacer] IEC: Inact . C onfig. Name 104 047
2:
[spacer]
Name of the inactive configuration bank.
[spacer] IEC: Inact . C onfig. Ve r s . 104 048
2:
[spacer]
Version number of the inactive configuration bank.
[spacer] IEC: IED nam e 104 057
2:
[spacer]
Explicitly assigned unit name for the function in the system (IED); is part of the
Logical Device Name.
Important note: According to the IEC standard the name must consist of only
letters (A..Z, a..z), digits (0..9) and underscore characters (_), and neither a digit
nor the underscore character must be the first character. Note that a non-
standard name causes problems with the IEC 61850 communication.
[spacer] IEC: IP address 104 001
2:
[spacer]
Assigned IP address of the device for the server function in the system.
Note: This is an information parameter ('read only') and its value is set from the
"IED Configurator" with Communications: IP Address.
[spacer] IEC: Subnet m ask 104 005
2:
[spacer]
The subnet mask defines which part of the IP address is addressed by the sub-
network and which part by the device that is logged-on to the network.
"IED Configurator" with Communications: SubNet Mask.
[spacer] IEC: Gat eway add re s s 104 011
2:
[spacer]
This parameter shows the IPv4 address of the network gateway for
communication links to clients outside of the local network.
"IED Configurator" with Communications: Gateway Address.
7-36 P632/EN M/R-a5-B // P632‑312‑660

7 Settings P632
Parameter Address
[spacer] IEC: IP address 2 104 070
2:
[spacer]
Assigned IP address 2 of the device for the server function in the system.
"IED Configurator" with Communications: IP Address Interface 2 (If fitted).
[spacer] IEC: Subnet m ask 2 104 071
2:
[spacer]
The subnet mask 2 defines which part of the IP address 2 is addressed by the
sub-network and which part by the device that is logged-on to the network.
"IED Configurator" with Communications: SubNet Mask Interface 2 (If fitted).
[spacer] IEC: Gat eway addre s s 2 104 072
2:
[spacer]
This parameter shows the IPv4 address of the network gateway 2 for
"IED Configurator" with Communications: Gateway Address Interface 2 (If fitted).
[spacer] IEC: SNTP s erve r 1 IP 104 202
2:
[spacer]
IP address of the preferred server used for clock synchronization.
"IED Configurator".
[spacer] IEC: SNTP s erve r 2 IP 104 210
2:
[spacer]
IP address of the backup server used for clock synchronization.
"IED Configurator".
[spacer] IEC: SigGGI O1 sel ect ion 104 064
[spacer]
Optional signal assignment for a transmission per communication protocol
IEC 61850 based on the selection table of the binary inputs (opto coupler
inputs).
[spacer] IEC: Diff . local t ime 104 206
0 -1440 1440 min Fig. 3-20, (p. 3-28)
[spacer]
Time difference between UTC and local time at the devices' substation (IED).
[spacer] IEC: Diff . d ayl.sav. t ime 104 207
60 -1440 1440 min Fig. 3-20, (p. 3-28)
[spacer]
Time difference of the daylight saving time to standard time.
P632/EN M/R-a5-B // P632‑312‑660 7-37

P632 7 Settings
Parameter Address
[spacer] IEC: Switch.dayl.sav .ti me 104 219
1: Yes Fig. 3-20, (p. 3-28)
[spacer]
This setting defines whether an automatic switching to daylight saving time is
wanted. If it is wanted, the time switching is executed upon receiving a related
SNTP frame.
[spacer] IEC: Dayl.sav.tim e s tar t 104 220
5: Last Fig. 3-20, (p. 3-28)
[spacer] IEC: Dayl.sav.tim e s t. d 104 221
7: Sunday Fig. 3-20, (p. 3-28)
[spacer] IEC: Dayl.sav.tim e s t. m 104 222
3: March Fig. 3-20, (p. 3-28)
[spacer]
These three parameters define the date (e.g. at what day of the year) for
switching from standard time over to daylight saving time. Available for
IEC: Dayl.sav.tim e s tar t are the values First, Second, Third, Fourth, and
Last. For IEC: Dayl.sav.ti me st . d the seven weekdays are available so
that for example a setting like “on the last Sunday in March” may be used.
[spacer] IEC: Dayl.sav.t.st .0:00 + 104 223
120 0 1440 min Fig. 3-20, (p. 3-28)
[spacer]
Time period in minutes after midnight when daylight saving time is switched to
standard time. If for example the clock is advanced one hour from 2:00 AM to
3:00 AM the parameter IE C: D ayl.sav .t .st .0:00 + is set to 120 (minutes).
[spacer] IEC: Dayl.sav.tim e e nd 104 225
5: Last Fig. 3-20, (p. 3-28)
[spacer] IEC: Dayl.sav.tim e e nd d 104 226
7: Sunday Fig. 3-20, (p. 3-28)
[spacer] IEC: Dayl.sav.tim e e nd m 104 227
10: October Fig. 3-20, (p. 3-28)
[spacer] IEC: Dayl.sav.t.en d 0:00 + 104 228
180 0 1440 min Fig. 3-20, (p. 3-28)
[spacer]
This parameter defines the date and time of day for the clock changeover from
daylight saving time to standard time. The setting is similar to that for the clock
changeover to daylight saving time.
7-38 P632/EN M/R-a5-B // P632‑312‑660

7 Settings P632
Parameter Address
Generic Object GOOSE: Function group GOOS E 056 068
Orientated
Substation Events
0: Without
[spacer]
Cancelling function group GOOSE or including it in the configuration.
If the function group is cancelled from the configuration, then all associated
settings and signals are hidden.
Parameters included in this function group are only effective when function
group IEC is configured and enabled and when the parameters in this function
group have been activated by setting the parameter IEC: Switch Conf ig.
Bank.
[spacer] GOOSE: Gene ral e nable US ER 106 001
0: No
[spacer]
Enabling and disabling function group GOOSE.
[spacer] GOOSE: Input 1 fct.assig. 107 006
P632/EN M/R-a5-B // P632‑312‑660 7-39

P632 7 Settings
Parameter Address
7-40 P632/EN M/R-a5-B // P632‑312‑660

7 Settings P632
Parameter Address
P632/EN M/R-a5-B // P632‑312‑660 7-41

P632 7 Settings
Parameter Address
7-42 P632/EN M/R-a5-B // P632‑312‑660

7 Settings P632
Parameter Address
P632/EN M/R-a5-B // P632‑312‑660 7-43

P632 7 Settings
Parameter Address
[spacer] GOOSE: Input 100 fct .as si g. 112 067
7-44 P632/EN M/R-a5-B // P632‑312‑660

7 Settings P632
Parameter Address
[spacer] GOOSE: Input 10 8 fct .as si g. 112 075
P632/EN M/R-a5-B // P632‑312‑660 7-45

P632 7 Settings
Parameter Address
[spacer]
Function assignment of the virtual binary GOOSE inputs (GosGGIO1/Pos1.stVal,
GosGGIO1/Pos2.stVal, …) to a binary logical state signal on the device so that
they can be processed further by the protection, control or logic functions.
Signals configured here contain the received and pre-processed state of data
attributes configured for GOOSE receipt.
Parameter Address
IRIG‑B interface IRIGB: Function group IRIG B 056 072
0: Without
[spacer]
Cancelling function group IRIGB or including it in the configuration. If the
and signals are hidden.
[spacer] IRIGB: Gener al e nable US ER 023 200
0: No Fig. 3-27, (p. 3-45)
[spacer]
Disabling or enabling the IRIG-B interface.
7-46 P632/EN M/R-a5-B // P632‑312‑660

7 Settings P632
Parameter Address
Configurable func‐ F_KEY: Pas s wor d funct. key 1 003 036
tion keys
0 0 4444
[spacer] F_KEY: Pas s wor d funct. key 2 030 242
0 0 4444
0 0 4444
0 0 4444
0 0 4444
0 0 4444
[spacer]
Definition of the password for enabling the function keys.
[spacer] F_KEY: Fct. ass i gnm. F1 080 112
[spacer]
Assignment of functions to the function keys. Either a single function or a menu
jump list may be selected. There are two menu jump lists, which are assembled
at LOC: Fct. menu jmp lis t 1 or LO C: F ct . me nu jmp list 2,
respectively.
[spacer] F_KEY: Oper ating mode F 1 080 132
1: Key
1: Key
1: Key
1: Key
P632/EN M/R-a5-B // P632‑312‑660 7-47

P632 7 Settings
Parameter Address
1: Key
1: Key
[spacer]
Choice between operation of the function key as a key or switch.
[spacer] F_KEY: Re tur n time fct .k e ys 003 037
10 1 60000 s
[spacer]
Once the password has been entered, the function keys remain active for no
longer than this time. Thereafter, the function keys are disabled until the
password is entered again.
7-48 P632/EN M/R-a5-B // P632‑312‑660

7 Settings P632
Parameter Address
Binary input INP: Filter 010 220
0 0 20 Fig. 3-29, (p. 3-49)
[spacer]
Input filter which is activated when either the mode Active "high", filt. or Active
"low", filt. has been selected for INP: Ope r. mode U xxx. In order to
suppress transient interference peaks at the logic signal inputs it is suggested to
set this parameter to 6 [steps].
[spacer] INP: Fct. as signm. U 701 152 109
P632/EN M/R-a5-B // P632‑312‑660 7-49

P632 7 Settings
Parameter Address
[spacer] INP: Fct. as signm. U 100 1 152 163
7-50 P632/EN M/R-a5-B // P632‑312‑660

7 Settings P632
Parameter Address
P632/EN M/R-a5-B // P632‑312‑660 7-51

P632 7 Settings
Parameter Address
[spacer]
Assignment of functions to binary signal inputs.
[spacer] INP: Oper. m ode U 701 152 110
1: Active "high"
1: Active "high"
1: Active "high"
1: Active "high"
1: Active "high"
1: Active "high"
1: Active "high"
1: Active "high"
1: Active "high"
1: Active "high"
1: Active "high"
1: Active "high"
1: Active "high"
1: Active "high"
1: Active "high"
1: Active "high"
7-52 P632/EN M/R-a5-B // P632‑312‑660

7 Settings P632
Parameter Address
1: Active "high"
1: Active "high"
1: Active "high"
1: Active "high"
1: Active "high"
1: Active "high"
1: Active "high"
1: Active "high"
1: Active "high"
1: Active "high"
1: Active "high"
1: Active "high"
1: Active "high"
1: Active "high"
1: Active "high"
1: Active "high"
1: Active "high"
1: Active "high"
[spacer] INP: Oper. m ode U 100 1 152 164
1: Active "high"
P632/EN M/R-a5-B // P632‑312‑660 7-53

P632 7 Settings
Parameter Address
1: Active "high"
1: Active "high"
1: Active "high"
1: Active "high"
1: Active "high"
1: Active "high"
1: Active "high"
1: Active "high"
1: Active "high"
1: Active "high"
1: Active "high"
1: Active "high"
1: Active "high"
1: Active "high"
1: Active "high"
1: Active "high"
1: Active "high"
1: Active "high"
1: Active "high"
7-54 P632/EN M/R-a5-B // P632‑312‑660

7 Settings P632
Parameter Address
1: Active "high"
1: Active "high"
[spacer]
Selection of operating mode for binary signal inputs.
P632/EN M/R-a5-B // P632‑312‑660 7-55

P632 7 Settings
Parameter Address
Measured data input MEASI: F unction group MEAS I

056 030
0: Without
[spacer]
Cancelling function group MEASI or including it in the configuration.
[spacer] MEASI: Ge ne ral enabl e US E R 011 100
0: No Fig. 3-30, (p. 3-50)

Fig. 3-38, (p. 3-59)
[spacer]
Disabling or enabling analog measured data input.
[spacer] MEASI: E nable IDC p. u. 037 190
0.000 0.000 0.200 IDC,nom Fig. 3-33, (p. 3-53)
[spacer]
Setting for the minimum current that must flow in order for the P632 to display a
measured value > 0 (zero suppression).
[spacer] MEASI: I DC < ope n circuit 037 191
3.0 0.0 10.0 mA Fig. 3-33, (p. 3-53)
[spacer]
If the input current falls below the set threshold, the P632 will issue an “open
circuit” signal.
[spacer] MEASI: I DC 1 037 150
0.000 0.000 1.200 IDC,nom Fig. 3-33, (p. 3-53)
Blocked 0.000 1.200 IDC,nom Fig. 3-33, (p. 3-53)
7-56 P632/EN M/R-a5-B // P632‑312‑660

7 Settings P632
Parameter Address
1.200 0.000 1.200 IDC,nom Fig. 3-33, (p. 3-53)
[spacer]
Setting for the input current that will correspond to a linearized value that has
been set accordingly.
[spacer] MEASI: I DC ,lin 1 037 151
0.000 0.000 1.200 IDC,nom Fig. 3-33, (p. 3-53)
P632/EN M/R-a5-B // P632‑312‑660 7-57

P632 7 Settings
Parameter Address
1.200 0.000 1.200 IDC,nom Fig. 3-33, (p. 3-53)
[spacer]
Setting for the linearized current that will correspond to an input current that
has been set accordingly.
[spacer] MEASI: S caled val. IDC ,lin1 037 192
0 -32768 32767 Fig. 3-34, (p. 3-54)
[spacer]
Setting for the scaled value of IDC,lin1.
[spacer] MEASI: S caled val.IDC ,l in2 0 037 193
1200 -32768 32767 Fig. 3-34, (p. 3-54)
[spacer]
Setting for the scaled value of IDC,lin20.
7-58 P632/EN M/R-a5-B // P632‑312‑660

7 Settings P632
Parameter Address
Binary and analog OUTP: Fct. ass i gnm. K 7 0 1 150 145
output
[spacer] OUTP: Fct. ass i gnm. K 7 0 2 150 148
P632/EN M/R-a5-B // P632‑312‑660 7-59

P632 7 Settings
Parameter Address
[spacer] OUTP: Fct. ass ignm. K 9 0 3 150 199
7-60 P632/EN M/R-a5-B // P632‑312‑660

7 Settings P632
Parameter Address
[spacer]
Assignment of functions to output relays.
[spacer] OUTP: Oper. mode K 7 01 150 146
1: ES updating
1: ES updating
1: ES updating
P632/EN M/R-a5-B // P632‑312‑660 7-61

P632 7 Settings
Parameter Address
1: ES updating
1: ES updating
1: ES updating
1: ES updating
1: ES updating
1: ES updating
1: ES updating
1: ES updating
1: ES updating
1: ES updating
1: ES updating
1: ES updating
1: ES updating
1: ES updating
1: ES updating
1: ES updating
1: ES updating
1: ES updating
1: ES updating
7-62 P632/EN M/R-a5-B // P632‑312‑660

7 Settings P632
Parameter Address
1: ES updating
1: ES updating
1: ES updating
1: ES updating
1: ES updating
1: ES updating
1: ES updating
1: ES updating
1: ES updating
1: ES updating
1: ES updating
1: ES updating
1: ES updating
1: ES updating
1: ES updating
1: ES updating
1: ES updating
1: ES updating
1: ES updating
P632/EN M/R-a5-B // P632‑312‑660 7-63

P632 7 Settings
Parameter Address
1: ES updating
1: ES updating
1: ES updating
1: ES updating
1: ES updating
1: ES updating
1: ES updating
1: ES updating
1: ES updating
1: ES updating
1: ES updating
[spacer]
Selection of operating mode for output relays.
7-64 P632/EN M/R-a5-B // P632‑312‑660

7 Settings P632
Parameter Address
Measured data MEASO: Functio n group M EASO 056 020
output
0: Without
[spacer]
Cancelling function group MEASI or including it in the configuration.
settings and signals are hidden. If the function group is cancelled from the
configuration, then all associated settings and signals are hidden.
[spacer] MEASO: Ge ne ral e nable US ER 031 074
0: No
[spacer]
Disabling or enabling the measured data output function.
[spacer] MEASO: Fct . as s ignm. BC D 053 002
[spacer]
Selection of the measured value to be transmitted in BCD form.
[spacer] MEASO: Hold t ime output BC D 010 010
0.10 0.10 10.00 s Fig. 3-41, (p. 3-63)
[spacer]
Setting for the transmission time of the selected measured value in BCD form.
[spacer] MEASO: Scale d min. val. B C D 037 140
0.000 0.000 1.000
[spacer] MEASO: Scale d max. v al. BC D 037 141
1.000 0.000 1.000
[spacer] MEASO: BC D-Out min. value 037 142
0 0 399
P632/EN M/R-a5-B // P632‑312‑660 7-65

P632 7 Settings
Parameter Address
[spacer] MEASO: BC D-Out max. value 037 143
399 0 399
[spacer]
The variable Mx is to be issued in BCD form.
For measured values in the range “measured values to be issued” the output
value should change linearly with the measured value.
● Range of measured values for the variable Mx: Mx,RL1 ... Mx,RL2
● Range of associated scaled measured values: 0 ... 1
● Range of measured values to be issued: Mx,min ... Mx,max
● Range of scaled measured values to be issued: Mx,scal,min ... Mx,scal,max
● Designation of the set values in the data model: “Scaled min. val. BCD” ...
“Scaled max. val. BCD”
with:
Mx,scal,min = (Mx,min - Mx,RL1)/(Mx,RL2 - Mx,RL1)
Mx,scal,max = (Mx,max - Mx,RL1)/(Mx,RL2 - Mx,RL1)
BCD display values for measured values in the range “measured values to be
issued”; range: “BCD-Out min. value” ... “BCD-Out max. value”
BBCD display values for measured values ≤ Mx,min; range: “BCD-Out min.
value”
BCD display values for measured values ≥ Mx,max; range: “BCD-Out max.
value”
[spacer] MEASO: Fct . as s ignm. A- 1 053 000
[spacer] MEASO: Fct . as s ignm. A- 2 053 001
[spacer]
Selection of the measured value to be transmitted in analog form.
[spacer] MEASO: Hold t ime output A- 1 010 114
0.10 0.10 10.00 s Fig. 3-43, (p. 3-69)
[spacer] MEASO: Hold t ime output A- 2 010 115
0.10 0.10 10.00 s
[spacer]
Setting for the time delay for output of the selected measured value.
[spacer] MEASO: Scale d m in. val. A-1 037 104
0.000 0.000 1.000 Fig. 3-43, (p. 3-69)
[spacer] MEASO: Scale d kne e v al. A- 1 037 105
Blocked 0.000 1.000 Fig. 3-43, (p. 3-69)
[spacer] MEASO: Scale d m ax. v al. A- 1 037 106
1.000 0.000 1.000 Fig. 3-43, (p. 3-69)
[spacer] MEASO: Scale d m in. val. A-2 037 110
0.000 0.000 1.000
7-66 P632/EN M/R-a5-B // P632‑312‑660

7 Settings P632
Parameter Address
[spacer] MEASO: Scale d kne e v al. A- 2 037 111
Blocked 0.000 1.000
[spacer] MEASO: Scale d max. v al. A- 2 037 112
1.000 0.000 1.000
[spacer]
After conversion via a characteristic the selected measured value Ax (x = 1, 2) is
to be issued as an output current. For this purpose a range “measured values to
be issued” is defined. In this range the characteristic has two linear sections,
which are separated by a knee point.
● Range of measured values for the variable Mx: Mx,RL1 ... Mx,RL2
● Range of associated scaled measured values: 0 ... 1
● Range of measured values to be issued: Mx,min ... Mx,max
● Range of scaled measured values to be output: Mx,scal,min ... Mx,scal,max
● Designation of the set values in the data model: „Scaled min. val. Ax“ ...
„Scaled max. val. Ax“
with:
Mx,scal,min = (Mx,min - Mx,RL1)/(Mx,RL2 - Mx,RL1)
Mx,scal,max = (Mx,max - Mx,RL1)/(Mx,RL2 - Mx,RL1)
● Designation of value for knee point: Mx,knee
● Designation of scaled knee point value: Mx,scaled,knee
● Designation of this set value in the data model: „Scaled knee val. Ax“
with:
Mx,scaled,knee = (Mx,knee - Mx,RL1)/(Mx,RL2 - Mx,RL1)
[spacer] MEASO: AnOut min. v al. A- 1 037 107
0.00 0.00 20.00 mA Fig. 3-43, (p. 3-69)
[spacer] MEASO: AnOut kne e point A- 1 037 108
Blocked 0.00 20.00 mA Fig. 3-43, (p. 3-69)
[spacer] MEASO: AnOut max. v al. A- 1 037 109
20.00 0.00 20.00 mA Fig. 3-43, (p. 3-69)
[spacer] MEASO: AnOut min. v al. A- 2 037 113
0.00 0.00 20.00 mA
[spacer] MEASO: AnOut kne e point A- 2 037 114
Blocked 0.00 20.00 mA
P632/EN M/R-a5-B // P632‑312‑660 7-67

P632 7 Settings
Parameter Address
[spacer] MEASO: AnOut max. v al. A- 2 037 115
20.00 0.00 20.00 mA
[spacer]
Output current range for measured values in the range “measured values to be
issued”; designation in the data model: “An-Out min. val. Ax” ... “An-Out max.
val. Ax”
Output current to be set for measured values ≤ Mx,min; designation in the data
model: “An-Out min. val. Ax”
Output current to be set for measured values ≥ Mx,max; designation in the data
model: “An-Out max. val. Ax”
Output current to be set for measured values = Mx,knee; designation in the data
model: “AnOut knee point Ax”
with:
Mx,min ... Mx,max: measured values to be issued
[spacer] MEASO: Output value 1 037 120
0.00 0.00 100.00 %
0.00 0.00 100.00 %
0.00 0.00 100.00 %
[spacer]
Measured values of external devices, which must be scaled to 0 to 100%, can be
issued.
7-68 P632/EN M/R-a5-B // P632‑312‑660

7 Settings P632
Parameter Address
LED indicators LED: F ct.ass ig. H 1 gre e n 085 184
060 001: MAIN: Healthy
[spacer]
Display of the operational readiness of the protection device.
The function MAIN: He althy is permanently assigned.
[spacer] LED: F ct.ass ig. H 2 y ell. 085 001
004 065: MAIN: Blocked/faulty
[spacer]
Display of the function assigned to LED indicator H 2.
The function MAIN: Blocke d/ fault y is permanently assigned.
[spacer] LED: F ct.ass ig. H 3 y ell. 085 004
036 070: SFMON: Warning (LED)
[spacer]
The function SFM ON: Warning (LED ) is permanently assigned.
[spacer] LED: F ct.ass ig. H 4 red 085 007
036 251: MAIN: Gen. trip signal
[spacer] LED: F ct.ass ig. H 4 gre e n 085 057
P632/EN M/R-a5-B // P632‑312‑660 7-69

P632 7 Settings
Parameter Address
[spacer] LED: F ct.ass ig. H10 red 085 025
[spacer] LED: F ct.ass ig. H10 gre e n 085 075
7-70 P632/EN M/R-a5-B // P632‑312‑660

7 Settings P632
Parameter Address
[spacer] LED: F ct.ass ig. H2 0 gre e n 085 167
[spacer] LED: F ct.ass ig. H2 1 red 085 140
[spacer]
Assignment of functions to LED indicators.
080 111: LOC: Edit mode
[spacer]
The function LOC: Edit mode is permanently assigned.
[spacer] LED: O pe rating mode H 1 085 182
1: ES updating
[spacer]
The operating mode ES updating is permanently assigned.
1: ES updating
[spacer]
1: ES updating
[spacer]
The ES updating operating mode is permanently assigned.
3: ES reset (fault)
1: ES updating
1: ES updating
1: ES updating
P632/EN M/R-a5-B // P632‑312‑660 7-71

P632 7 Settings
Parameter Address
1: ES updating
1: ES updating
1: ES updating
1: ES updating
1: ES updating
1: ES updating
1: ES updating
1: ES updating
1: ES updating
1: ES updating
1: ES updating
1: ES updating
1: ES updating
1: ES updating
1: ES updating
[spacer]
Selection of operating mode for LED indicators.
1: ES updating
[spacer]
7-72 P632/EN M/R-a5-B // P632‑312‑660

7 Settings P632
Parameter Address
Main function MAIN: Chann.ass ign.C OMM 1/ 2 003 169
1: COMM1->chann.1,(2-2) Fig. 3-75, (p. 3-104)
[spacer]
Assignment of communication interfaces to physical communication channels.
[spacer] MAIN: Type of bay 220 000
1 1 9999 Fig. 3-191, (p. 3-229)
[spacer]
Configuration of a bay type.
[spacer] MAIN: Prim .S ource TimeS ync 103 210
0: COMM1/IEC
[spacer]
Selection of the primary source for date and time synchronization. Available are
COMM1/IEC, COMM2/PC, IRIG-B or a binary input for minute signal pulses.
[spacer] MAIN: Backup SourceT ime Sy nc 103 211
1: COMM2/PC
[spacer]
Selection of the backup source for date and time synchronization. Available are
COMM1/IEC, COMM2/PC, IRIG-B or a binary input for minute signal pulses. The
backup source is used when there is no synchronization generated by the
primary source after MAIN: Time s ync. time-out has elapsed.
[spacer] MAIN: Tim e s yn c. t ime -out 103 212
Blocked 1 60 min
[spacer]
Time-out setting for the time synchronization generated by the primary source.
[spacer] MAIN: Auto- assignme nt I/ O 221 065
1: Yes Fig. 3-191, (p. 3-229)
[spacer]
Disabling or enabling of automatic assignment of binary inputs and outputs to
the set bay type.
P632/EN M/R-a5-B // P632‑312‑660 7-73

P632 7 Settings
Parameter Address
Fault recording FT_RC: Rec. analog chann. 1 035 160
65: Current IA,a
[spacer] FT_RC: Rec. analog chann. 2 035 161
66: Current IB,a
67: Current IC,a
160: Current IY,a
69: Current IA,b
70: Current IB,b
71: Current IC,b
161: Current IY,b
232: Voltage V
[spacer]
The user specifies the channel on which each physical variable is recorded.
Parameter Address
Differential protec‐ DIFF: F unction group DIF F 056 027
tion
0: Without
[spacer]
Cancelling function group DIFF or including it in the configuration. If the function
signals are hidden.
7-74 P632/EN M/R-a5-B // P632‑312‑660

7 Settings P632
Parameter Address
Ground differential REF_1: Function gr oup REF _1 056 037
protection
0: Without
[spacer] REF_2: Function gr oup REF _2 056 038
0: Without
[spacer]
Cancelling function groups REF_x or including them in the configuration. If a
function group is cancelled, then all associated settings and signals are hidden,
with the exception of this setting.
Parameter Address
Definite-time over‐ DTOC1: Function gr oup D TOC 1 056 031
current protection
0: Without
[spacer] DTOC2: Function gr oup D TOC 2 056 032
0: Without
[spacer]
Canceling function group DTOC1 / DTOC2 or including it in the configuration.
If a function group is cancelled from the configuration, then all associated
settings and signals are hidden, with the exception of this setting.
Parameter Address
Inverse-time overcur‐ IDMT1: Function group IDMT1

056 051
rent protection
0: Without
[spacer] IDMT2: Function group IDMT2 056 061
0: Without
[spacer]
Cancelling function groups IDMT1 and IDMT2 or including them in the
configuration. If a function group is cancelled, then all associated settings and
signals are hidden, with the exception of this setting.
P632/EN M/R-a5-B // P632‑312‑660 7-75

P632 7 Settings
Parameter Address
Thermal overload THRM 1: Function gr oup T HRM1 056 054
protection
0: Without
[spacer]
Cancelling function groups THRMx or including them in the configuration. If the
Parameter Address
Time-voltage protec‐ V<>: Funct ion group V<>

056 010
tion
0: Without
[spacer]
Cancelling function group V<> or including it in the configuration. If the
Parameter Address
Over-/ f<> : Function group f<> 056 033
underfrequency pro‐
tection
0: Without
[spacer]
Canceling function group f<> or including it in the configuration. If the function
Parameter Address
Overfluxing protec‐ V/f : Function group V/ f 056 056
tion
0: Without
[spacer]
Cancelling function group V/f or including it in the configuration. If the function
7-76 P632/EN M/R-a5-B // P632‑312‑660

7 Settings P632
Parameter Address
Current transformer CTS : Function group CT S 056 077
supervision
0: Without
[spacer]
Cancelling function group CTS or including it in the configuration. If the function
signals are hidden.
Parameter Address
Measuring-circuit MCM _1: Function gr oup M CM _1 056 073
monitoring
0: Without
[spacer] MCM _2: Function gr oup M CM _2 056 074
0: Without
[spacer]
Cancelling function groups MCM_x or including them in the configuration. If a
function group is cancelled, then all associated settings and signals are hidden,
Parameter Address
Circuit breaker CBF_1: Function gr oup CB F_1 056 007
failure protection
0: Without
[spacer] CBF_2: Function gr oup CB F_2 056 082
0: Without
[spacer]
Cancelling function group CBF_x or including it in the configuration. If the
Parameter Address
Limit value LIMIT : Function group LIMI T 056 025
monitoring
0: Without
[spacer]
Cancelling function group LIMIT or including it in the configuration. If the
P632/EN M/R-a5-B // P632‑312‑660 7-77

P632 7 Settings
Parameter Address
Limit value LIM_1: Function group LIM _1 056 042
monitoring
0: Without
[spacer] LIM_2: Function group LIM _2 056 043
0: Without
[spacer]
Cancelling function groups LIM_1 to LIM_3 or including them in the
configuration. If a function group is cancelled, then all associated settings and
Parameter Address
Transformer TR MON: Function group T RM ON 056 095
monitoring
0: Without
[spacer]
Cancelling function group TRMON or including it in the configuration. If the
Parameter Address
Programmable Logic LOG_2: Function gr oup L OG _2

056 089
0: Without
[spacer]
Cancelling function group LOG_2 (“Logic 2”) or including it in the configuration.
Parameter Address
Programmable Logic LOGIC: Function group LOGIC

056 017
0: Without
[spacer]
Cancelling function group LOGIC or including it in the configuration.
7-78 P632/EN M/R-a5-B // P632‑312‑660

7 Settings P632
Parameter Address
External device DEV01: Funct ion group DEV0 1 210 047
0: Without
[spacer] DEV02: Funct ion group DEV0 2 210 097
0: Without
[spacer] DEV03: Funct ion group DEV0 3 210 147
0: Without
[spacer]
Cancelling function groups DEV01 to DEV03 or including them in the
configuration. If any function group is cancelled from the configuration, then all
associated settings and signals are hidden.
[spacer] DEV01: Funct . type, s ignal 210 034
242 1 254
242 1 254
242 1 254
[spacer]
Setting the function type of the signal.
Note: If the IEC 870-5-101 communication protocol has been set, then the 'low
address' of the information object will be defined by this setting. If the ILS-C
protocol has been set, then this setting will correspond to DN2.
[spacer] DEV01: Inform. No., signal 210 035
1 0 254
3 0 254
5 0 254
[spacer]
Setting the information number of the signal.
Note: If the IEC 870-5-101 communication protocol has been set, then the 'high
[spacer] DEV01: Funct . type, c ommand 210 032
242 1 254
242 1 254
242 1 254
[spacer]
Setting for the function type of the command.
Note: If the IEC 870-5-101 communication protocol has been set, then the “low
address” of the information object will be defined by this setting. If the ILS-
C protocol has been set, then this setting will correspond to DN2.
P632/EN M/R-a5-B // P632‑312‑660 7-79

P632 7 Settings
Parameter Address
[spacer] DEV01: Inform. No., command 210 033
65 0 254
67 0 254
69 0 254
[spacer]
Setting the information number of the command.
Note: If the IEC 870-5-101 communication protocol has been set, then the 'high
7-80 P632/EN M/R-a5-B // P632‑312‑660

7 Settings P632
Parameter Address
Single-pole signals SIG_1: Function gro up S IG_1 249 250
1: With
[spacer]
Cancelling function group SIG_1 or including it in the configuration.
[spacer] SIG_1: S ignal S 00 1 config. 226 007
0: No Fig. 3-206, (p. 3-254)
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
[spacer]
Cancelling the signal or including it in the configuration. If a signal is cancelled,
then all associated settings and signals are hidden.
[spacer] SIG_1: S IG_DC 3 config. 233 007
0: No
[spacer]
Cancelling the signal SIG_DC3 or including it in the configuration. This signal is
used to terminate a direct motor control command in combination with the
single-pole command CM D_1 : CMD_DC 3.
If this signal is cancelled, then all associated settings are hidden.
P632/EN M/R-a5-B // P632‑312‑660 7-81

P632 7 Settings
Parameter Address
Single-pole CMD_1: Function gro up C MD _1 249 252
commands
1: With
[spacer]
Cancelling function group CMD_1 or including it in the configuration.
[spacer] CMD_1: Com mand C 0 01 config. 200 004
0: No Fig. 3-205, (p. 3-252)
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
[spacer]
Cancelling the command or including it in the configuration. If the command is
cancelled, then all associated settings and signals are hidden, with the
exception of this setting.
7-82 P632/EN M/R-a5-B // P632‑312‑660

7 Settings P632
Parameter Address
[spacer] CMD_1: CMD_DC3 config. 202 014
0: No
[spacer]
Cancelling command CMD_DC3 or including it in the configuration. This
command is used for direct motor control, the operation is delayed by the set
value MAIN: DC o p. de lay t1, and it is terminated with the signal
SIG_1: Logic SIG_DC3 or – if MAIN: e xt .cmd.term. w/o PI = No –
with positive indication of the final switchgear position; in any case this reset is
delayed by the set value MAIN: DC 2 /3 re le as e delay.
If the command is cancelled, then all associated settings and signals are hidden,
Parameter Address
Interlocking logic ILOCK: Function group ILOCK 250 102
0: Without
[spacer]
Cancelling function group ILOCK or including it in the configuration. If the
Parameter Address
Binary counts COUNT : Function gr oup CO UNT 217 047
0: Without
[spacer]
Cancelling function group COUNT or including it in the configuration. If the
P632/EN M/R-a5-B // P632‑312‑660 7-83

P632 7 Settings
7.1.3 Function Parameters
7.1.3.1 Global
Parameter Address
PC link PC: Command b lock ing 003 182
0: No Fig. 3-9, (p. 3-14)
[spacer]
When command blocking is activated, commands are rejected at the PC
interface.
[spacer] PC: Sig./m eas .val.bl ock . 003 086
0: No Fig. 3-9, (p. 3-14)
[spacer]
When signal and measured value blocking is activated, no signals or measured
data are transmitted through the PC interface.
Parameter Address
“Logical” COMM 1: Com m and bloc k. US ER 003 172
communication
interface 1
1: Yes Fig. 3-10, (p. 3-16)
[spacer]
When command blocking is activated, commands are rejected at communication
interface 1.
[spacer] COMM 1: Sig./ meas.block .US E R 003 076
0: No Fig. 3-11, (p. 3-17)

Fig. 3-12, (p. 3-18)
Fig. 3-13, (p. 3-19)
[spacer]
When signal and measured value blocking user is activated, no signals or
measured data are transmitted through communication interface COMM1.
7-84 P632/EN M/R-a5-B // P632‑312‑660

7 Settings P632
Parameter Address
“Logical” COMM 2: Com m and bloc k. US ER 103 172
communication
interface 2
0: No Fig. 3-18, (p. 3-24)
[spacer]
When command blocking is activated, commands are rejected at communication
interface 2.
[spacer] COMM 2: Sig./ meas.block .US E R 103 076
0: No Fig. 3-18, (p. 3-24)
[spacer]
When signal and measured value blocking user is activated, no signals or
measured data are transmitted through communication interface COMM2.
Parameter Address
IEC 61850 IEC: Ctrl b lock e d use r 221 125
Communication
0: No Fig. 3-20, (p. 3-28)
[spacer]
When control blocking is activated, controls are rejected at IEC communication,
i.e no output data (digital by relays) will be issued to the process.
Parameter Address
Binary and analog OUTP: Outp .rel.block USER 021 014
output
0: No Fig. 3-36, (p. 3-57)
[spacer]
When this blocking is activated, all output relays are blocked.
P632/EN M/R-a5-B // P632‑312‑660 7-85

P632 7 Settings
Parameter Address
Main function MAIN: Device on-line 003 030
0: No (= off) Fig. 3-58, (p. 3-90)
[spacer]
Switching the device off-line or on-line. Some parameters can only be changed
when protection is disabled.
[spacer] MAIN: Tes t m ode USER 003 012
0: No Fig. 3-76, (p. 3-105)
[spacer]
When the test mode user is activated, signals or measured data for PC and
communication interfaces are labeled 'test mode'.
[spacer] MAIN: Nominal fr equ. fnom 010 030
50: 50 Hz
[spacer]
Setting for the nominal frequency of the protected system.
[spacer] MAIN: Phase s eque nce 010 049
1: A - B - C
[spacer]
Setting the phase sequence A-B-C or A-C-B.
(Alternative terminology: Setting for the rotary field's direction, either clockwise
or anticlockwise.)
[spacer] MAIN: Tim e tag 221 098
1: 1stEdge,OpMem sorted
[spacer]
For bay control function signals detected via binary signal inputs and
conditioned with debouncing it is now possible to select whether the time tag for
the signal is to be issued after debouncing or when the first pulse edge is
detected. Furthermore it is defined whether entries in the operating data
memory are made in chronological order or not.
[spacer] MAIN: Inom C.T.prim., end a 019 020
200 1 50000 A Fig. 3-51, (p. 3-83)
[spacer] MAIN: Inom C.T.prim., end b 019 021
200 1 50000 A
[spacer]
Setting for the primary nominal current of the main current transformer (phase
currents) of end a or b.
[spacer] MAIN: Inom C.T.Yprim,e nd a 019 027
200 1 50000 A
[spacer] MAIN: Inom C.T.Yprim,e nd b 019 028
200 1 50000 A
[spacer]
Setting for the primary nominal current of the main current transformer at the
neutral-point-to-ground connection.
7-86 P632/EN M/R-a5-B // P632‑312‑660

7 Settings P632
Parameter Address
[spacer] MAIN: Vnom V.T. prim. 010 002
100.0 0.1 1500.0 kV Fig. 3-53, (p. 3-85)
[spacer]
Setting for the primary nominal voltage of the system transformer for
measurement of phase-to-ground and phase-to-phase voltages.
[spacer] MAIN: Inom de vice, e nd a 010 024
1.0: 1.0 A Fig. 3-46, (p. 3-75)

Fig. 3-47, (p. 3-76)
[spacer] MAIN: Inom de vice, e nd b 010 025
1.0: 1.0 A Fig. 3-47, (p. 3-76)
[spacer]
Setting for the nominal current of the device for the measurement of the phase
currents of ends a or b. This also corresponds to the nominal device current.
[spacer] MAIN: IY,nom dev ice , end a 010 142
1.0: 1.0 A Fig. 3-47, (p. 3-76)
[spacer] MAIN: IY,nom dev ice , end b 010 143
1.0: 1.0 A Fig. 3-47, (p. 3-76)
[spacer] MAIN: Vnom V.T. sec. 010 009
100 50 130 V Fig. 3-46, (p. 3-75)

Fig. 3-53, (p. 3-85)
[spacer]
Setting for the secondary nominal voltage of the system transformer for voltage
measurement.
[spacer] MAIN: Conn.m eas .c ir c. IP ,a 010 140
1: Standard Fig. 3-46, (p. 3-75)

Fig. 3-47, (p. 3-76)
[spacer] MAIN: Conn.m eas .c ir c. IP ,b 010 150
1: Standard Fig. 3-47, (p. 3-76)
[spacer]
Instead of accounting for connection reversal applied to one end in the settings
for DIFF: Ve c.g r. ends a-b P Sx, it is possible to account for it in the
settings for connection of the measuring circuits. The connection of the phase
current circuits, ends a and b, is set here as Standard if in accordance with the
connection scheme shown in Chapter “Installation and Connection”, else as
Opposite.
[spacer] MAIN: Conn.m eas .c ir c. IY ,a 010 141
1: Standard Fig. 3-47, (p. 3-76)
[spacer] MAIN: Conn.m eas .c ir c. IY ,b 010 151
1: Standard Fig. 3-47, (p. 3-76)
[spacer]
If the connection is as shown in Chapter “Installation and Connection”, then the
setting must be Standard. If the connection direction is reversed then the
setting must be Opposite.
P632/EN M/R-a5-B // P632‑312‑660 7-87

P632 7 Settings
Parameter Address
[spacer] MAIN: Me as. value re l. IP 011 030
0.00 0.00 0.20 Inom Fig. 3-51, (p. 3-83)
[spacer]
Setting for the minimum current that must be exceeded so that measured
operating values of the phase currents and, if applicable, derived currents are
displayed.
[spacer] MAIN: Me as.value re l. Ine g 011 048
0.000 0.000 0.200 Inom
[spacer] MAIN: Me as.value re l. Ipos 011 058
0.000 0.000 0.200 Inom
[spacer]
Setting for a minimum current that must be exceeded in order for the P632 to
display the negative-sequence (positive-sequence) current as measured
operating data.
[spacer] MAIN: Me as. value re l. IN 011 031
0.000 0.000 0.200 Inom Fig. 3-52, (p. 3-84)
[spacer]
Setting for the minimum current that must be exceeded so that the measured
operating value of the residual current is displayed.
[spacer] MAIN: Me as. value re l. IY 011 036
0.000 0.000 0.200 IN,nom Fig. 3-52, (p. 3-84)
[spacer]
Setting for the minimum current that must be exceeded in order for the
measured operating value of the current in the neutral-point-to-ground
connection to be displayed.
[spacer] MAIN: Me as. value re l. V 011 032
0.00 0.00 0.20 Vnom Fig. 3-53, (p. 3-85)
[spacer]
Setting for the minimum voltage that must be exceeded in order for the
measured operating values of the voltage to be displayed.
[spacer] MAIN: Se tt l. t. IP,max,de l 010 113
15.0 0.1 60.0 min Fig. 3-50, (p. 3-82)

Fig. 3-51, (p. 3-83)
[spacer]
Setting for the time after which the delayed maximum current display shall
reach 95% of the maximum current IP,max.
[spacer] MAIN: Fct.as sign. res et 1 005 248
[spacer]
Assigning specific memories and counters which are to be reset jointly if
MAIN: Group res et 1 USER is enabled.
[spacer] MAIN: Fct.as sign. res et 2 005 249
[spacer]
Assigning specific memories and counters which are to be reset jointly if
MAIN: Group res et 2 USER is enabled.
7-88 P632/EN M/R-a5-B // P632‑312‑660

7 Settings P632
Parameter Address
[spacer] MAIN: Fct.as sign. bloc k. 1 021 021
[spacer]
Assignment of functions that will be blocked simultaneously when blocking
input 1 (MAIN: B lock ing 1 EX T) is activated.
[spacer]
Assignment of functions that will be blocked simultaneously when blocking
input 2 (MAIN: B lock ing 2 EX T) is activated.
[spacer]
Assignment of functions to be blocked together if blocking input 3
(MAIN: Blocking 3 EXT) is activated.
[spacer]
Assignment of functions to be blocked together if blocking input 4
(MAIN: Blocking 4 EXT) is activated.
[spacer] MAIN: Trip cm d.block . USER 021 012
0: No Fig. 3-69, (p. 3-99)
[spacer]
Blocking the trip commands from the local control panel.
[spacer] MAIN: Fct.as sig.t ri p cmd.1 021 001
[spacer]
Assignment of signals that trigger trip command 1.
[spacer]
Assignment of the signals that trigger trip command 2.
[spacer]
[spacer]
[spacer] MAIN: Min.dur . trip cmd. 1 021 003
0.25 0.10 10.00 s Fig. 3-69, (p. 3-99)

Fig. 5-12, (p. 5-20)
[spacer]
Setting for the minimum duration of trip command 1.
P632/EN M/R-a5-B // P632‑312‑660 7-89

P632 7 Settings
Parameter Address
0.25 0.10 10.00 s
[spacer]
0.25 0.10 10.00 s
[spacer]
0.25 0.10 10.00 s
[spacer]
[spacer] MAIN: Latching tr ip cmd. 1 021 023
0: No Fig. 3-69, (p. 3-99)
[spacer]
Specification as to whether trip command 1 should latch.
0: No
[spacer]
0: No
[spacer]
0: No
[spacer]
[spacer] MAIN: Fct. as s ign. fault 021 031
[spacer]
Selection of the signals to be signaled as Blocked/Faulty in addition to the
messages that always result in the message Blocked/Faulty.
[spacer] MAIN: Sig . as g. CB1 open 021 017
[spacer] MAIN: Sig . as g. CB2 open 021 061
[spacer]
Definition of the binary signal used by the P632 to evaluate the “CB open”
position signal.
[spacer] MAIN: Sig . as g. CB1 clos ed 021 020
7-90 P632/EN M/R-a5-B // P632‑312‑660

7 Settings P632
Parameter Address
[spacer] MAIN: Sig . as g. C B2 clos ed 021 060
[spacer]
Definition of the binary signal used by the P632 to evaluate the “CB closed”
position signal.
[spacer] MAIN: Deb ounce time gr . 1 221 200
0.02 0.00 2.54 s Fig. 3-207, (p. 3-255)
0.02 0.00 2.54 s
0.02 0.00 2.54 s
[spacer]
Setting for the debouncing time.
[spacer] MAIN: Chatt.m on. time gr.1 221 201
0.0 0.0 25.4 s Fig. 3-207, (p. 3-255)
0.0 0.0 25.4 s
0.0 0.0 25.4 s
[spacer]
Setting for the chatter monitoring time.
[spacer] MAIN: Change of s tate gr.1 221 202
0 0 254 Fig. 3-207, (p. 3-255)
0 0 254
0 0 254
[spacer]
Setting the number of signal changes allowed during the chatter monitoring
time before chatter suppression operates.
[spacer] MAIN: Cmd . d ur.long cmd. 221 230
20 1 254 s
[spacer]
Setting for the command duration for a long command.
[spacer] MAIN: Cmd . d ur. short cmd. 221 231
1 1 254 s
[spacer]
Setting for the command duration for a short command.
[spacer] MAIN: Oper. mode CB Trip 221 080
1: ALSTOM D
[spacer]
Definition of the operating mode of the CB trip.
P632/EN M/R-a5-B // P632‑312‑660 7-91

P632 7 Settings
Parameter Address
[spacer] MAIN: Inp.asg. ctr l.enabl. 221 057
[spacer]
Definition of the binary signal used to issue a general command output enable.
[spacer] MAIN: Inp.asg.int er l.deact 221 007
[spacer]
Definition of the binary signal used to disable interlocking of control commands
for switchgear.
[spacer] MAIN: Inp.asg. L/R key s w. 221 008
[spacer]
Definition of the binary signal used to switch from remote control to local
control.
[spacer] MAIN: Inp.assig n. t ripping 221 010
[spacer]
Definition of the binary signal used to signal the tripping of an external
protection device. This signal is used to form the CB trip signal.
[spacer] MAIN: Electrical c ontrol 221 061
1: Remote
[spacer]
This setting determines whether the binary inputs, that are configured to control
switchgear, will be active with remote control or local control.
[spacer] MAIN: Delay Man.Op.S upe r v. 221 079
3 0 255 s
[spacer]
After the delay time period, to be set in this window, has elapsed (with the
signal “Sw. dev. interm. pos.” already present and the status signal continuously
absent), the actual switchgear status signal, as obtained from the respective
binary inputs, will be issued. (See also “Processing status signals from manually
operated switchgear”.)
[spacer] MAIN: W. ex t. cmd. t ermin. 221 063
0: No
[spacer]
This setting determines if bay types, defined for direct motor control, can be
used together with external termination contacts to directly influence the control
process of motor driven switchgear.
[spacer] MAIN: Prot.t rip>CB tr ipped 221 012
0: Without function
[spacer]
Selection of the protection function trip command that will be used to form the
CB trip signal.
7-92 P632/EN M/R-a5-B // P632‑312‑660

7 Settings P632
Parameter Address
[spacer] MAIN: Inp. as g. CB t ri p 221 013
[spacer]
Definition of the binary signal used by the P632 to signal the “CB open” position
signal.
[spacer] MAIN: Inp.asg.C B tr.en. ext 221 050
[spacer]
Definition of the binary signal used to enable the CB trip signal of an external
device.
[spacer] MAIN: Inp.asg. C B t rip ex t 221 024
[spacer]
Definition of the binary signal used to carry the CB trip signal of an external
device.
[spacer] MAIN: Inp.asg. mult.sig. 1 221 051
[spacer] MAIN: Inp.asg. mult.sig. 2 221 052
[spacer]
Definition of the function that will be interpreted as a multiple signal (group
signal).
Parameter Address
Parameter subset PSS: Control via USE R 003 100
selection
0: No Fig. 3-77, (p. 3-107)
[spacer]
If parameter subset selection is to be handled from the integrated local control
panel rather than via binary signal inputs, choose the setting Yes.
[spacer] PSS: Param.subs.se l. USE R 003 060
1: Parameter subset 1 Fig. 3-77, (p. 3-107)
[spacer]
Selection of the parameter subset from the local control panel.
[spacer] PSS: Ke ep tim e 003 063
Blocked 0.000 65.000 s Fig. 3-77, (p. 3-107)
[spacer]
The setting of this timer stage is relevant only if parameter subset selection is
carried out via the binary signal inputs. Any voltage-free pause that may occur
during selection is bridged. If, after this time period has elapsed, no binary
signal input has yet been set, then the parameter subset selected from the local
control panel shall apply.
P632/EN M/R-a5-B // P632‑312‑660 7-93

P632 7 Settings
Parameter Address
Self-monitoring SFMO N: F ct . as s ign. warni ng 021 030
[spacer]
Selection of the signals whose appearance shall result in the signals “Warning
(LED)” and “Warning (relay)” and in the activation of the LED indicator labeled
“ALARM”. Signals caused by faulty hardware and leading to blocking of the
device are not configurable. They always result in the above signals and
indication.
[spacer] SFMO N: M on.s ig. re t enti on 021 018
Blocked 0 240 h
[spacer]
This setting defines the duration (in hours) for which a device-internal fault is
stored, so that a decision may be taken between an automatic warm restart and
an automatic device blocking. (Setting to Blocked may be considered the same
as unlimited storage.)
7-94 P632/EN M/R-a5-B // P632‑312‑660

7 Settings P632
Parameter Address
Fault recording FT_RC: Fct. assig. t ri gge r 003 085
[spacer]
This setting defines the signals that will trigger fault recording.
[spacer] FT_RC: Id > 016 018
Blocked 0.01 30.00 Iref
[spacer]
This setting defines the threshold value of the differential current that will
trigger disturbance recording.
[spacer] FT_RC: IR > 016 019
Blocked 0.01 30.00 Iref
[spacer]
This setting defines the threshold value of the restraining current that will
trigger fault recording.
[spacer] FT_RC: Pre- fault time 003 078
5 1 50 Periods Fig. 3-92, (p. 3-128)
[spacer]
Setting for the time during which data will be recorded before the onset of a
fault (pre-fault recording time).
[spacer] FT_RC: Post -f ault ti me 003 079
2 1 50 Periods Fig. 3-92, (p. 3-128)
[spacer]
Setting for the time during which data will be recorded after the end of a fault
(post-fault recording time).
[spacer] FT_RC: Max. re cording t ime 003 075
50 5 300 Periods Fig. 3-92, (p. 3-128)
[spacer]
Setting for the maximum recording time per fault. This includes pre-fault and
post-fault recording times.
P632/EN M/R-a5-B // P632‑312‑660 7-95

P632 7 Settings
7.1.3.2 Gene ral Functions
Parameter Address
Main function MAIN: Evaluat ion IN, e nd a 016 096
1: Calculated Fig. 3-49, (p. 3-79)
[spacer] MAIN: Evaluat ion IN, e nd b 016 097
1: Calculated Fig. 3-49, (p. 3-79)
[spacer] MAIN: Evaluat ion IN, e nd d 016 099
1: Calculated
[spacer]
This setting specifies which current will be used by the P632 as the residual
current: either the calculated residual current derived from the sum of the phase
currents or the residual current measured at the fourth transformer.
[spacer] MAIN: Hold tim e dyn.par am. 018 009
Blocked 0.00 100.00 s Fig. 3-59, (p. 3-91)
[spacer]
Setting for the hold time of the “dynamic parameters”. During this period, the
“dynamic” thresholds are active in place of the “normal” thresholds.
7-96 P632/EN M/R-a5-B // P632‑312‑660

7 Settings P632
Parameter Address
Differential protec‐ DIFF: Gene ral e nabl e US E R 019 080
tion
0: No
[spacer]
Disabling and enabling the differential protection function.
[spacer] DIFF: R e ference powe r Sr ef 019 016
38.1 0.1 5000.0 MVA Fig. 3-94, (p. 3-131)
[spacer]
Setting for the reference power, usually the nominal transformer power.
[spacer] DIFF: R e f. cur r. Ire f,a 019 023
Not measured 0.000 50.000 kA Fig. 3-94, (p. 3-131)
[spacer]
Display of the reference current calculated by the P632 for end a.
[spacer] DIFF: R e f. cur r. Ire f,b 019 024
[spacer]
Display of the reference current calculated by the P632 for end b.
[spacer] DIFF: M atching fact . kam,a 004 105
Not measured 0.000 50.000 Fig. 3-94, (p. 3-131)
[spacer]
Display of the matching factor calculated by the P632 for end a.
[spacer] DIFF: M atching fact . kam,b 004 106
[spacer]
Display of the matching factor calculated by the P632 for end b.
[spacer] DIFF: M eas . value rel. Id 011 037
0.000 0.000 0.200 Iref Fig. 3-105, (p. 3-143)
[spacer]
Setting for the minimum differential current that must be exceeded in order for
the P632 to display the differential currents as measured operating data.
[spacer] DIFF: M eas . value rel. IR 011 038
0.000 0.000 0.200 Iref Fig. 3-105, (p. 3-143)
[spacer]
Setting for the minimum restraining current that must be exceeded in order for
the P632 to display the restraining currents as measured operating data.
P632/EN M/R-a5-B // P632‑312‑660 7-97

P632 7 Settings
Parameter Address
Ground differential REF_1: General enable USER 019 050
protection
0: No Fig. 3-106, (p. 3-145)
[spacer] REF_2: General enable USER 019 150
0: No
[spacer]
Disabling or enabling the ground fault differential protection.
[spacer] REF_1: Se le ct. me as . input 019 100
0: End a
[spacer] REF_2: Se le ct. me as . input 019 101
1: End b
[spacer]
Display of the measuring input that provides the measured values evaluated by
the ground differential protection function.
[spacer] REF_1: Add .me as.inp. e nd b 019 120
0: No
[spacer]
In case of protecting an autotransformer, select whether this end shall be
considered by the REF function in addition to the phase currents in end a (T14)
and the the neutral-point current.
[spacer] REF_1: Refe rence powe r Sr ef 019 031
38.1 0.1 5000.0 MVA Fig. 3-107, (p. 3-147)
[spacer] REF_2: Refe rence powe r Sr ef 019 032
38.1 0.1 5000.0 MVA
[spacer]
Setting for the reference power, usually the nominal transformer power for the
relevant transformer end.
[spacer] REF_1: Ref. curr. I ref 019 034
[spacer] REF_2: Ref. curr. I ref 019 035
Not measured 0.000 50.000 kA
[spacer]
Display of the reference current calculated by the P632.
[spacer] REF_1: Match. fact . kam,N,a 004 160
[spacer] REF_1: Match. fact . kam,N,b 019 123
[spacer]
Display of the matching factor calculated by the P632.
[spacer] REF_1: Matching fact. k am,Y 004 163
7-98 P632/EN M/R-a5-B // P632‑312‑660

7 Settings P632
Parameter Address
[spacer] REF_2: Matching fact. k am,Y 004 164
[spacer]
Display of the matching factor calculated by the P632 for the neutral-point
current.
[spacer] REF_1: Meas . value r e l. Id 011 039
0.00 0.00 0.20 Iref Fig. 3-111, (p. 3-152)
[spacer] REF_2: Meas . value r e l. Id 011 044
0.00 0.00 0.20 Iref
[spacer]
Setting for the minimum differential current that must be exceeded in order for
the P632 to display the differential currents as measured operating data.
[spacer] REF_1: Meas . value r e l. IR 011 040
0.00 0.00 0.20 Iref Fig. 3-111, (p. 3-152)
[spacer] REF_2: Meas . value r e l. IR 011 046
0.00 0.00 0.20 Iref
[spacer]
Setting for the minimum restraining current that must be exceeded in order for
the P632 to display the restraining currents as measured operating data.
Parameter Address
Ground differential REF_2: Matching fact. k am,N 004 161
protection
[spacer]
Display of the matching factor calculated by the P632 for the vector sum of the
phase currents.
P632/EN M/R-a5-B // P632‑312‑660 7-99

P632 7 Settings
Parameter Address
Definite-time over‐ DTOC1: Gene ral e nabl e USE R 031 135
current protection
0: No Fig. 3-114, (p. 3-156)
[spacer] DTOC2: Gene ral e nabl e USE R 031 136
0: No
[spacer]
Enabling/disabling the definite-time overcurrent protection function.
[spacer] DTOC1: S ele ct. me as . input 019 103
0: End a Fig. 3-113, (p. 3-155)
[spacer] DTOC2: S ele ct. me as . input 019 104
1: End b
[spacer]
Selection of the measuring input that provides the measured values monitored
by the definite-time overcurrent protection function.
Parameter Address
Inverse-time overcur‐ IDMT1: Gener al e nable US E R

031 141
rent protection
0: No Fig. 3-122, (p. 3-164)
[spacer] IDMT2: Gener al e nable US E R 031 142
0: No
[spacer]
Disabling and enabling the inverse-time overcurrent protection function.
[spacer] IDMT1: Se le ct. me as. input 019 106
0: End a Fig. 3-121, (p. 3-163)
[spacer] IDMT2: Se le ct. me as. input 019 116
1: End b
[spacer]
Selection of the measuring input that provides the measured variables
monitored by the inverse-time overcurrent protection function.
7-100 P632/EN M/R-a5-B // P632‑312‑660

7 Settings P632
Parameter Address
Thermal overload THRM 1: Gene ral e nabl e USE R 031 144
protection
0: No Fig. 3-134, (p. 3-176)
[spacer]
Disabling and enabling the thermal overload protection function.
[spacer] THRM 1: S ele ct. me as . input 019 109
1: End b Fig. 3-133, (p. 3-176)

Fig. 3-136, (p. 3-177)
[spacer]
Selection of the measuring input that provides the measured variables relevant
for thermal overload protection.
[spacer] THRM 1: Operating mode 039 121
2: Relative replica Fig. 3-139, (p. 3-181)
[spacer]
Setting for the operating mode of thermal overload protection. Select between
Absolute replica and Relative replica.
[spacer] THRM 1: O/T f.I ref pers is t 1 004 152
Not measured -40 300 °C
[spacer]
Display of the difference between the settings for the maximum permissible
temperatures of the protected object and the coolant.
Parameter Address
Time-voltage protec‐ V<>: General enable US ER

023 030
tion
0: No Fig. 3-141, (p. 3-183)
[spacer]
Disabling or enabling time-voltage protection.
P632/EN M/R-a5-B // P632‑312‑660 7-101

P632 7 Settings
Parameter Address
Over-/ f<> : Gene ral e nable USER 023 031
tection
0: No Fig. 3-144, (p. 3-186)
[spacer]
Disabling or enabling over-/underfrequency protection.
[spacer] f<> : Evaluation ti me 018 201
5 3 6 Periods Fig. 3-145, (p. 3-187)
[spacer]
Setting for the evaluation time. The operate conditions must be met for the
duration of the set evaluation time in order for a signal to be issued.
[spacer] f<> : Undervolt. block . V< 018 200
0.90 0.20 1.00 Vnom Fig. 3-145, (p. 3-187)
[spacer]
Setting for the threshold of undervoltage blocking. If the voltage falls below this
threshold, the over-/underfrequency protection function will be blocked.
Parameter Address
Overfluxing protec‐ V/f : Gener al e nable US E R 019 097
tion
0: No Fig. 3-148, (p. 3-191)
[spacer]
Enabling or disabling the Overfluxing protection function.
Parameter Address
Current transformer CTS : Gene r al e nable USE R 031 085
supervision
0: No Fig. 3-156, (p. 3-197)
[spacer]
Enabling or disabling the current transformer supervision function.
7-102 P632/EN M/R-a5-B // P632‑312‑660

7 Settings P632
Parameter Address
Measuring-circuit MCM _1: General enabl e USE R 031 146
monitoring
0: No
[spacer] MCM _2: General enabl e USE R 031 147
0: No
[spacer]
Enabling or disabling the measuring-circuit monitoring function.
[spacer] MCM _1: Select. meas. input 031 150
0: End a
[spacer] MCM _2: Select. meas. input 031 151
1: End b
[spacer]
Assigning measuring-circuit monitoring functions to ends a and b.
P632/EN M/R-a5-B // P632‑312‑660 7-103

P632 7 Settings
Parameter Address
Circuit breaker CBF_1: General enable USE R 022 080
failure protection
0: No Fig. 3-166, (p. 3-205)
[spacer] CBF_2: General enable USE R 022 214
0: No
[spacer]
Disabling or enabling circuit breaker failure protection.
[spacer] CBF_1: Select. m e as . input 022 156
0: End a
[spacer] CBF_2: Select. m e as . input 022 157
1: End b
[spacer]
Selection of measuring input – the circuit breaker failure protection is controlled
by its current.
[spacer] CBF_1: Fct.ass ign. s tart ing 022 202

Fig. 3-171, (p. 3-211)
[spacer] CBF_2: Fct.ass ign. s tart ing 022 216
[spacer]
Select which of the trip commands is to be used as a start criterion for the CBF
function.
[spacer] CBF_1: Start with man. tr ip 022 154
0: No Fig. 3-170, (p. 3-209)

Fig. 3-171, (p. 3-211)
[spacer] CBF_2: Start with man. tr ip 022 175
0: No
[spacer]
Setting that permit a manual trip signal to also be used as a start criterion.
[spacer] CBF_1: Fct.ass ignm. CB Aux . 022 159

Fig. 3-171, (p. 3-211)
[spacer] CBF_2: Fct.ass ignm. CB Aux . 022 217
[spacer]
Selection of trip signals – assigned to Gen. trip command 1 – for which, in
addition to current flow monitoring, status signals from CB auxiliary contacts are
evaluated.
[spacer] CBF_1: I< 022 160
1.00 0.05 20.00 Inom Fig. 3-168, (p. 3-207)

Fig. 3-171, (p. 3-211)
Fig. 3-175, (p. 3-213)
Fig. 3-176, (p. 3-214)
7-104 P632/EN M/R-a5-B // P632‑312‑660

7 Settings P632
Parameter Address
[spacer] CBF_2: I< 022 215
1.00 0.05 20.00 Inom
[spacer]
Setting for the threshold to detect a break in current flow.
[spacer] CBF_1: IN< 022 180
1.00 0.05 20.00 Inom
[spacer] CBF_2: IN< 022 181
1.00 0.05 20.00 Inom
[spacer]
Setting of the comparator threshold for residual current monitoring function.
[spacer] CBF_1: Evaluat ion IN 022 184
0: Without Fig. 3-168, (p. 3-207)
[spacer] CBF_2: Evaluat ion IN 022 185
0: Without
[spacer]
Select whether the measured or the calculated residual current shall be used for
residual current monitoring function. This choice is only possible when a
measuring input for the residual current is available, otherwise the internally
derived value of the residual current is always used, regardless of the setting.
[spacer] CBF_1: t1 3p 022 165
0.15 0.00 100.00 s Fig. 3-172, (p. 3-212)
[spacer] CBF_2: t1 3p 022 221
0.15 0.00 100.00 s
[spacer]
Setting the 1st CBF timer stage to 3-pole operating mode.
[spacer] CBF_1: t2 022 166
0.25 0.00 100.00 s Fig. 3-172, (p. 3-212)
[spacer] CBF_2: t2 022 222
0.25 0.00 100.00 s
[spacer]
Setting for the 2nd CBF timer stage.
[spacer] CBF_1: Min.dur . t ri p cmd.t 1 022 167
0.25 0.10 10.00 s Fig. 3-173, (p. 3-212)
0.25 0.10 10.00 s
[spacer]
Setting the 1st timer stage for minimum duration of trip command.
0.25 0.10 10.00 s Fig. 3-173, (p. 3-212)
0.25 0.10 10.00 s
[spacer]
Setting the 2nd timer stage for minimum duration of trip command.
P632/EN M/R-a5-B // P632‑312‑660 7-105

P632 7 Settings
Parameter Address
[spacer] CBF_1: Latching t r ip cmd.t 1 022 169
0: No Fig. 3-173, (p. 3-212)
0: No
[spacer]
The 1st timer stage trip command, set to latch mode, will remain active until
reset by operating parameters or through an appropriately configured binary
signal input.
0: No Fig. 3-173, (p. 3-212)
0: No
[spacer]
The 2nd timer stage trip command, set to latch mode, will remain active until
reset by operating parameters or through an appropriately configured binary
signal input.
[spacer] CBF_1: Delay/ start ing tr ig. 022 155
0.00 0.00 100.00 s Fig. 3-174, (p. 3-213)
[spacer] CBF_2: Delay/ start ing tr ig. 022 220
0.00 0.00 100.00 s
[spacer]
The signal CB F_1: T r ip s ignal (or CBF _2 : Trip signal, . . ., resp.) is
issued when this timer stage's time duration has elapsed.
[spacer] CBF_1: Delay/ fault be h. C B 022 171
0.12 0.00 100.00 s Fig. 3-175, (p. 3-213)
[spacer] CBF_2: Delay/ fault be h. C B 022 227
0.12 0.00 100.00 s
[spacer]
If during this delay time period the circuit breaker does not provide a signal from
its auxiliary contacts that it is closed, then faults behind the CB are recognized
through the current criterion (see section “Fault behind CB protection”).
[spacer] CBF_1: Delay/ CB sync .s uper v 022 172
Blocked 0.00 100.00 s Fig. 3-176, (p. 3-214)
[spacer] CBF_2: Delay/ CB sync .s uper v 022 218
Blocked 0.00 100.00 s
[spacer]
Setting for the time delay to bridge circuit breaker operate times during CB
synchronization supervision.
7-106 P632/EN M/R-a5-B // P632‑312‑660

7 Settings P632
Parameter Address
Limit value LIMIT : Ge neral e nable US ER 014 010
monitoring
0: No Fig. 3-177, (p. 3-216)
[spacer]
Disabling or enabling limit value monitoring.
[spacer] LIMIT : IDC,lin> 014 110
[spacer]
Setting for the operate value IDC,lin> for monitoring the linearized direct
current.
[spacer] LIMIT : IDC,lin>> 014 111
[spacer]
Setting for the operate value IDC,lin>> for monitoring the linearized direct
current.
[spacer] LIMIT : tIDC,lin> 014 112
Blocked 0.00 20.00 s Fig. 3-177, (p. 3-216)
[spacer]
Setting for the operate delay of overcurrent stage IDC,lin>.
[spacer] LIMIT : tIDC,lin>> 014 113
Blocked 0.00 20.00 s Fig. 3-177, (p. 3-216)
[spacer]
Setting for the operate delay of overcurrent stage IDC,lin>>.
[spacer] LIMIT : IDC,lin< 014 114
[spacer]
Setting for the operate value IDC,lin< for monitoring the linearized direct
current.
[spacer] LIMIT : IDC,lin<< 014 115
[spacer]
Setting for the operate value IDC,lin<< for monitoring the linearized direct
current.
[spacer] LIMIT : tIDC,lin< 014 116
Blocked 0.00 20.00 s Fig. 3-177, (p. 3-216)
[spacer]
Setting for the operate delay of undercurrent stage IDC,lin<.
[spacer] LIMIT : tIDC,lin<< 014 117
Blocked 0.00 20.00 s Fig. 3-177, (p. 3-216)
[spacer]
Setting for the operate delay of undercurrent stage IDC,lin<<.
[spacer] LIMIT : T> 014 100
200 -20 200 °C Fig. 3-178, (p. 3-217)
[spacer]
Setting for the operate value of temperature monitoring T>.
P632/EN M/R-a5-B // P632‑312‑660 7-107

P632 7 Settings
Parameter Address
[spacer] LIMIT : T>> 014 101
200 -20 200 °C Fig. 3-178, (p. 3-217)
[spacer]
Setting for the operate value of temperature monitoring T>>.
[spacer] LIMIT : tT > 014 103
Blocked 0 1000 s Fig. 3-178, (p. 3-217)
[spacer]
Setting for the operate delay of temperature monitoring T>.
[spacer] LIMIT : tT >> 014 104
Blocked 0 1000 s Fig. 3-178, (p. 3-217)
[spacer]
Setting for the operate delay of temperature monitoring T>>.
[spacer] LIMIT : T< 014 105
-20 -20 200 °C Fig. 3-178, (p. 3-217)
[spacer]
Setting for the operate value of temperature monitoring T<.
[spacer] LIMIT : T<< 014 106
-20 -20 200 °C Fig. 3-178, (p. 3-217)
[spacer]
Setting for the operate value of temperature monitoring T<<.
[spacer] LIMIT : tT < 014 107
Blocked 0 1000 s Fig. 3-178, (p. 3-217)
[spacer]
Setting for the operate delay of temperature monitoring T<.
[spacer] LIMIT : tT << 014 108
Blocked 0 1000 s Fig. 3-178, (p. 3-217)
[spacer]
Setting for the operate delay of temperature monitoring T<<.
7-108 P632/EN M/R-a5-B // P632‑312‑660

7 Settings P632
Parameter Address
Limit value LIM_1: Gener al e nable USE R 014 014
monitoring
0: No Fig. 3-180, (p. 3-219)
[spacer] LIM_2: Gener al e nable USE R 014 015
0: No
[spacer]
Enabling or disabling the limit value monitoring function.
[spacer] LIM_1: Se le ct. me as. input 019 111
0: End a Fig. 3-179, (p. 3-218)
[spacer] LIM_2: Se le ct. me as. input 019 112
1: End b
[spacer]
Selecting a measuring input for limit value monitoring of the measured values.
[spacer] LIM_1: I> 015 116
1.20 0.20 4.00 Inom Fig. 3-180, (p. 3-219)
[spacer] LIM_2: I> 016 116
1.20 0.20 4.00 Inom
[spacer]
Setting for the operate value of I>.
[spacer] LIM_1: I>> 015 117
Blocked 0.20 4.00 Inom Fig. 3-180, (p. 3-219)
[spacer] LIM_2: I>> 016 117
Blocked 0.20 4.00 Inom
[spacer]
Setting for the operate value of I>>.
[spacer] LIM_1: tI > 015 120
5 0 100 s Fig. 3-180, (p. 3-219)
[spacer] LIM_2: tI > 016 120
5 0 100 s
[spacer]
Setting for the operate delay of I>.
[spacer] LIM_1: tI >> 015 121
Blocked 0 100 s Fig. 3-180, (p. 3-219)
[spacer] LIM_2: tI >> 016 121
Blocked 0 100 s
[spacer]
Setting for the operate delay of I>>.
[spacer] LIM_1: I< 015 118
0.10 0.00 4.00 Inom Fig. 3-180, (p. 3-219)
[spacer] LIM_2: I< 016 118
0.10 0.00 4.00 Inom
[spacer]
Setting for the operate value of I<.
P632/EN M/R-a5-B // P632‑312‑660 7-109

P632 7 Settings
Parameter Address
[spacer] LIM_1: I<< 015 119
[spacer] LIM_2: I<< 016 119
[spacer]
Setting for the operate value of I<<.
[spacer] LIM_1: tI < 015 122
5 0 100 s Fig. 3-180, (p. 3-219)
[spacer] LIM_2: tI < 016 122
5 0 100 s
[spacer]
Setting for the operate delay of I<.
[spacer] LIM_1: tI << 015 123
Blocked 0 100 s Fig. 3-180, (p. 3-219)
[spacer] LIM_2: tI << 016 123
Blocked 0 100 s
[spacer]
Setting for the operate delay of I<<.
Parameter Address
Transformer TR MON: Gener al e nable US ER 018 040
monitoring
0: No Fig. 3-181, (p. 3-220)
[spacer]
Disabling or enabling the transformer monitoring.
7-110 P632/EN M/R-a5-B // P632‑312‑660

7 Settings P632
Parameter Address
Programmable Logic LOG_2: General e nabl e USE R

011 137
0: No Fig. 3-184, (p. 3-224)
[spacer]
Enable/disable the function group LOG_2 (Programmable Logic 2).
[spacer] LOG_2: Fct.assignm. outp. 1 050 000
060 000: MAIN: Without function s
[spacer]
These settings assign functions to the outputs.
[spacer] LOG_2: Op . m ode t output 1 050 001
0: Without timer stage Fig. 3-184, (p. 3-224)
[spacer]
These settings define the operating modes for the output timer stages.
[spacer] LOG_2: T im e t 1 output 1 050 002
0 0 60000 s Fig. 3-184, (p. 3-224)
0 0 60000 s
0 0 60000 s
0 0 60000 s
[spacer]
Settings of timer stage t1 for the respective outputs.
0 0 60000 s Fig. 3-184, (p. 3-224)
0 0 60000 s
0 0 60000 s
P632/EN M/R-a5-B // P632‑312‑660 7-111

P632 7 Settings
Parameter Address
0 0 60000 s
[spacer]
Settings for timer stage t2 for the respective outputs.
Note: This setting has no effect in the “minimum time” operating mode.
[spacer] LOG_2: S ig.as sig. o ut p. 1 064 000
[spacer]
These settings assign the function of a binary input signal to the output of the
logic equation.
[spacer] LOG_2: S ig.as sig.out p. 1 (t ) 064 001
[spacer]
logic equation.
7-112 P632/EN M/R-a5-B // P632‑312‑660

7 Settings P632
Parameter Address
Programmable Logic LOGIC: General enable USE R

031 099
0: No Fig. 3-183, (p. 3-223)
[spacer]
Enable/disable the logic function.
[spacer] LOGIC: Se t 1 US ER 034 030
0: No Fig. 3-182, (p. 3-222)
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
[spacer]
These settings define the static input conditions for the logic function.
[spacer] LOGIC: Fct.as s ignm. outp. 1 030 000
060 000: MAIN: Without function s
P632/EN M/R-a5-B // P632‑312‑660 7-113

P632 7 Settings
Parameter Address
7-114 P632/EN M/R-a5-B // P632‑312‑660

7 Settings P632
Parameter Address
P632/EN M/R-a5-B // P632‑312‑660 7-115

P632 7 Settings
Parameter Address
7-116 P632/EN M/R-a5-B // P632‑312‑660

7 Settings P632
Parameter Address
P632/EN M/R-a5-B // P632‑312‑660 7-117

P632 7 Settings
Parameter Address
[spacer] LOGIC: Fct.as s ignm.outp.1 00 045 140
7-118 P632/EN M/R-a5-B // P632‑312‑660

7 Settings P632
Parameter Address
P632/EN M/R-a5-B // P632‑312‑660 7-119

P632 7 Settings
Parameter Address
[spacer]
These settings assign functions to the outputs.
[spacer] LOGIC: Op. m ode t output 1 030 001
0: Without timer stage Fig. 3-183, (p. 3-223)
[spacer] LOGIC: Op. m ode t output 1 0 030 037
7-120 P632/EN M/R-a5-B // P632‑312‑660

7 Settings P632
Parameter Address
P632/EN M/R-a5-B // P632‑312‑660 7-121

P632 7 Settings
Parameter Address
7-122 P632/EN M/R-a5-B // P632‑312‑660

7 Settings P632
Parameter Address
P632/EN M/R-a5-B // P632‑312‑660 7-123

P632 7 Settings
Parameter Address
7-124 P632/EN M/R-a5-B // P632‑312‑660

7 Settings P632
Parameter Address
P632/EN M/R-a5-B // P632‑312‑660 7-125

P632 7 Settings
Parameter Address
7-126 P632/EN M/R-a5-B // P632‑312‑660

7 Settings P632
Parameter Address
[spacer]
These settings define the operating modes for the output timer stages.
[spacer] LOGIC: Tim e t1 output 1 030 002
0.00 0.00 600.00 s Fig. 3-183, (p. 3-223)
0.00 0.00 600.00 s
0.00 0.00 600.00 s
0.00 0.00 600.00 s
0.00 0.00 600.00 s
0.00 0.00 600.00 s
0.00 0.00 600.00 s
0.00 0.00 600.00 s
0.00 0.00 600.00 s
0.00 0.00 600.00 s
0.00 0.00 600.00 s
0.00 0.00 600.00 s
0.00 0.00 600.00 s
0.00 0.00 600.00 s
0.00 0.00 600.00 s
0.00 0.00 600.00 s
P632/EN M/R-a5-B // P632‑312‑660 7-127

P632 7 Settings
Parameter Address
0.00 0.00 600.00 s
0.00 0.00 600.00 s
0.00 0.00 600.00 s
0.00 0.00 600.00 s
0.00 0.00 600.00 s
0.00 0.00 600.00 s
0.00 0.00 600.00 s
0.00 0.00 600.00 s
0.00 0.00 600.00 s
0.00 0.00 600.00 s
0.00 0.00 600.00 s
0.00 0.00 600.00 s
0.00 0.00 600.00 s
0.00 0.00 600.00 s
0.00 0.00 600.00 s
0.00 0.00 600.00 s
0.00 0.00 600.00 s
0.00 0.00 600.00 s
0.00 0.00 600.00 s
7-128 P632/EN M/R-a5-B // P632‑312‑660

7 Settings P632
Parameter Address
0.00 0.00 600.00 s
0.00 0.00 600.00 s
0.00 0.00 600.00 s
0.00 0.00 600.00 s
0.00 0.00 600.00 s
0.00 0.00 600.00 s
0.00 0.00 600.00 s
0.00 0.00 600.00 s
0.00 0.00 600.00 s
0.00 0.00 600.00 s
0.00 0.00 600.00 s
0.00 0.00 600.00 s
0.00 0.00 600.00 s
0.00 0.00 600.00 s
0.00 0.00 600.00 s
0.00 0.00 600.00 s
0.00 0.00 600.00 s
0.00 0.00 600.00 s
0.00 0.00 600.00 s
P632/EN M/R-a5-B // P632‑312‑660 7-129

P632 7 Settings
Parameter Address
0.00 0.00 600.00 s
0.00 0.00 600.00 s
0.00 0.00 600.00 s
0.00 0.00 600.00 s
0.00 0.00 600.00 s
0.00 0.00 600.00 s
0.00 0.00 600.00 s
0.00 0.00 600.00 s
0.00 0.00 600.00 s
0.00 0.00 600.00 s
0.00 0.00 600.00 s
0.00 0.00 600.00 s
0.00 0.00 600.00 s
0.00 0.00 600.00 s
0.00 0.00 600.00 s
0.00 0.00 600.00 s
0.00 0.00 600.00 s
0.00 0.00 600.00 s
0.00 0.00 600.00 s
7-130 P632/EN M/R-a5-B // P632‑312‑660

7 Settings P632
Parameter Address
0.00 0.00 600.00 s
0.00 0.00 600.00 s
0.00 0.00 600.00 s
0.00 0.00 600.00 s
0.00 0.00 600.00 s
0.00 0.00 600.00 s
0.00 0.00 600.00 s
0.00 0.00 600.00 s
0.00 0.00 600.00 s
0.00 0.00 600.00 s
0.00 0.00 600.00 s
0.00 0.00 600.00 s
0.00 0.00 600.00 s
0.00 0.00 600.00 s
0.00 0.00 600.00 s
0.00 0.00 600.00 s
0.00 0.00 600.00 s
0.00 0.00 600.00 s
0.00 0.00 600.00 s
P632/EN M/R-a5-B // P632‑312‑660 7-131

P632 7 Settings
Parameter Address
0.00 0.00 600.00 s
0.00 0.00 600.00 s
0.00 0.00 600.00 s
0.00 0.00 600.00 s
0.00 0.00 600.00 s
0.00 0.00 600.00 s
0.00 0.00 600.00 s
0.00 0.00 600.00 s
0.00 0.00 600.00 s
0.00 0.00 600.00 s
0.00 0.00 600.00 s
0.00 0.00 600.00 s
0.00 0.00 600.00 s
0.00 0.00 600.00 s
0.00 0.00 600.00 s
0.00 0.00 600.00 s
0.00 0.00 600.00 s
0.00 0.00 600.00 s
0.00 0.00 600.00 s
7-132 P632/EN M/R-a5-B // P632‑312‑660

7 Settings P632
Parameter Address
0.00 0.00 600.00 s
0.00 0.00 600.00 s
0.00 0.00 600.00 s
0.00 0.00 600.00 s
0.00 0.00 600.00 s
0.00 0.00 600.00 s
0.00 0.00 600.00 s
0.00 0.00 600.00 s
0.00 0.00 600.00 s
0.00 0.00 600.00 s
0.00 0.00 600.00 s
0.00 0.00 600.00 s
0.00 0.00 600.00 s
0.00 0.00 600.00 s
0.00 0.00 600.00 s
0.00 0.00 600.00 s
0.00 0.00 600.00 s
[spacer]
Settings of timer stage t1 for the respective outputs.
0.00 0.00 600.00 s Fig. 3-183, (p. 3-223)
P632/EN M/R-a5-B // P632‑312‑660 7-133

P632 7 Settings
Parameter Address
0.00 0.00 600.00 s
0.00 0.00 600.00 s
0.00 0.00 600.00 s
0.00 0.00 600.00 s
0.00 0.00 600.00 s
0.00 0.00 600.00 s
0.00 0.00 600.00 s
0.00 0.00 600.00 s
0.00 0.00 600.00 s
0.00 0.00 600.00 s
0.00 0.00 600.00 s
0.00 0.00 600.00 s
0.00 0.00 600.00 s
0.00 0.00 600.00 s
0.00 0.00 600.00 s
0.00 0.00 600.00 s
0.00 0.00 600.00 s
0.00 0.00 600.00 s
0.00 0.00 600.00 s
7-134 P632/EN M/R-a5-B // P632‑312‑660

7 Settings P632
Parameter Address
0.00 0.00 600.00 s
0.00 0.00 600.00 s
0.00 0.00 600.00 s
0.00 0.00 600.00 s
0.00 0.00 600.00 s
0.00 0.00 600.00 s
0.00 0.00 600.00 s
0.00 0.00 600.00 s
0.00 0.00 600.00 s
0.00 0.00 600.00 s
0.00 0.00 600.00 s
0.00 0.00 600.00 s
0.00 0.00 600.00 s
0.00 0.00 600.00 s
0.00 0.00 600.00 s
0.00 0.00 600.00 s
0.00 0.00 600.00 s
0.00 0.00 600.00 s
0.00 0.00 600.00 s
P632/EN M/R-a5-B // P632‑312‑660 7-135

P632 7 Settings
Parameter Address
0.00 0.00 600.00 s
0.00 0.00 600.00 s
0.00 0.00 600.00 s
0.00 0.00 600.00 s
0.00 0.00 600.00 s
0.00 0.00 600.00 s
0.00 0.00 600.00 s
0.00 0.00 600.00 s
0.00 0.00 600.00 s
0.00 0.00 600.00 s
0.00 0.00 600.00 s
0.00 0.00 600.00 s
0.00 0.00 600.00 s
0.00 0.00 600.00 s
0.00 0.00 600.00 s
0.00 0.00 600.00 s
0.00 0.00 600.00 s
0.00 0.00 600.00 s
0.00 0.00 600.00 s
7-136 P632/EN M/R-a5-B // P632‑312‑660

7 Settings P632
Parameter Address
0.00 0.00 600.00 s
0.00 0.00 600.00 s
0.00 0.00 600.00 s
0.00 0.00 600.00 s
0.00 0.00 600.00 s
0.00 0.00 600.00 s
0.00 0.00 600.00 s
0.00 0.00 600.00 s
0.00 0.00 600.00 s
0.00 0.00 600.00 s
0.00 0.00 600.00 s
0.00 0.00 600.00 s
0.00 0.00 600.00 s
0.00 0.00 600.00 s
0.00 0.00 600.00 s
0.00 0.00 600.00 s
0.00 0.00 600.00 s
0.00 0.00 600.00 s
0.00 0.00 600.00 s
P632/EN M/R-a5-B // P632‑312‑660 7-137

P632 7 Settings
Parameter Address
0.00 0.00 600.00 s
0.00 0.00 600.00 s
0.00 0.00 600.00 s
0.00 0.00 600.00 s
0.00 0.00 600.00 s
0.00 0.00 600.00 s
0.00 0.00 600.00 s
0.00 0.00 600.00 s
0.00 0.00 600.00 s
0.00 0.00 600.00 s
0.00 0.00 600.00 s
0.00 0.00 600.00 s
0.00 0.00 600.00 s
0.00 0.00 600.00 s
0.00 0.00 600.00 s
0.00 0.00 600.00 s
0.00 0.00 600.00 s
0.00 0.00 600.00 s
0.00 0.00 600.00 s
7-138 P632/EN M/R-a5-B // P632‑312‑660

7 Settings P632
Parameter Address
0.00 0.00 600.00 s
0.00 0.00 600.00 s
0.00 0.00 600.00 s
0.00 0.00 600.00 s
0.00 0.00 600.00 s
0.00 0.00 600.00 s
0.00 0.00 600.00 s
0.00 0.00 600.00 s
0.00 0.00 600.00 s
0.00 0.00 600.00 s
0.00 0.00 600.00 s
0.00 0.00 600.00 s
0.00 0.00 600.00 s
0.00 0.00 600.00 s
0.00 0.00 600.00 s
0.00 0.00 600.00 s
0.00 0.00 600.00 s
0.00 0.00 600.00 s
0.00 0.00 600.00 s
P632/EN M/R-a5-B // P632‑312‑660 7-139

P632 7 Settings
Parameter Address
0.00 0.00 600.00 s
0.00 0.00 600.00 s
0.00 0.00 600.00 s
0.00 0.00 600.00 s
0.00 0.00 600.00 s
0.00 0.00 600.00 s
0.00 0.00 600.00 s
0.00 0.00 600.00 s
0.00 0.00 600.00 s
0.00 0.00 600.00 s
0.00 0.00 600.00 s
0.00 0.00 600.00 s
0.00 0.00 600.00 s
[spacer]
Settings for timer stage t2 for the respective outputs.
Note: This setting has no effect in the “minimum time” operating mode.
[spacer] LOGIC: Sig .as sig. out p. 1 044 000
7-140 P632/EN M/R-a5-B // P632‑312‑660

7 Settings P632
Parameter Address
[spacer] LOGIC: Sig .as sig. out p. 1 0 044 018
P632/EN M/R-a5-B // P632‑312‑660 7-141

P632 7 Settings
Parameter Address
7-142 P632/EN M/R-a5-B // P632‑312‑660

7 Settings P632
Parameter Address
P632/EN M/R-a5-B // P632‑312‑660 7-143

P632 7 Settings
Parameter Address
7-144 P632/EN M/R-a5-B // P632‑312‑660

7 Settings P632
Parameter Address
[spacer] LOGIC: Sig .as sig. out p.10 0 048 070
P632/EN M/R-a5-B // P632‑312‑660 7-145

P632 7 Settings
Parameter Address
7-146 P632/EN M/R-a5-B // P632‑312‑660

7 Settings P632
Parameter Address
[spacer]
logic equation.
[spacer] LOGIC: Sig .as sig.out p. 1 (t ) 044 001
P632/EN M/R-a5-B // P632‑312‑660 7-147

P632 7 Settings
Parameter Address
[spacer] LOGIC: Sig .as sig.out p.10 (t ) 044 019
7-148 P632/EN M/R-a5-B // P632‑312‑660

7 Settings P632
Parameter Address
P632/EN M/R-a5-B // P632‑312‑660 7-149

P632 7 Settings
Parameter Address
7-150 P632/EN M/R-a5-B // P632‑312‑660

7 Settings P632
Parameter Address
P632/EN M/R-a5-B // P632‑312‑660 7-151

P632 7 Settings
Parameter Address
[spacer] LOGIC: Sig .as sig.out p1 00( t) 048 071
7-152 P632/EN M/R-a5-B // P632‑312‑660

7 Settings P632
Parameter Address
P632/EN M/R-a5-B // P632‑312‑660 7-153

P632 7 Settings
Parameter Address
[spacer]
logic equation.
7-154 P632/EN M/R-a5-B // P632‑312‑660

7 Settings P632
Parameter Address
Single-pole signals SIG_1: Des ignat . si g. S 001 226 000
1: S001
[spacer] SIG_1: Des ignat . si g. S 002 226 008
2: S002
3: S003
4: S004
5: S005
6: S006
7: S007
8: S008
9: S009
10: S010
11: S011
12: S012
[spacer] SIG_1: Des ignat . SIG _DC 3 233 000
234: SIGNAL DC3
[spacer]
Selection of the signal designation.
[spacer] SIG_1: Op er. mode s ig. S 001 226 001
1: Start/end signal Fig. 3-206, (p. 3-254)
1: Start/end signal
1: Start/end signal
1: Start/end signal
1: Start/end signal
P632/EN M/R-a5-B // P632‑312‑660 7-155

P632 7 Settings
Parameter Address
[spacer] SIG_1: Op er. mod e s ig. S 006 226 041
1: Start/end signal
1: Start/end signal
1: Start/end signal
1: Start/end signal
1: Start/end signal
1: Start/end signal
1: Start/end signal
[spacer]
Selection of the signal operating mode.
[spacer] SIG_1: Gr.as g. de bounc.S0 01 226 003
1: Group 1 Fig. 3-206, (p. 3-254)

Fig. 3-207, (p. 3-255)
1: Group 1
1: Group 1
1: Group 1
1: Group 1
1: Group 1
1: Group 1
1: Group 1
1: Group 1
1: Group 1
1: Group 1
7-156 P632/EN M/R-a5-B // P632‑312‑660

7 Settings P632
Parameter Address
1: Group 1
[spacer]
Group assignment for the debouncing time and the chatter suppression.
[spacer] SIG_1: M in. sig. dur. S0 01 226 002
0 0 254 s Fig. 3-206, (p. 3-254)
0 0 254 s
0 0 254 s
0 0 254 s
0 0 254 s
0 0 254 s
0 0 254 s
0 0 254 s
0 0 254 s
0 0 254 s
0 0 254 s
0 0 254 s
[spacer]
The logic “1” signal must be available for this minimum time setting so that a
telegram can be sent in the Start/end signal mode.
P632/EN M/R-a5-B // P632‑312‑660 7-157

P632 7 Settings
Parameter Address
Single-pole CMD_1: De sign. command C 001 200 000
commands
1: C001
[spacer] CMD_1: De sign. command C 002 200 005
2: C002
3: C003
4: C004
5: C005
6: C006
7: C007
8: C008
9: C009
10: C010
11: C011
12: C012
[spacer]
Selection of the command designation.
[spacer] CMD_1: Oper. m ode cmd. C 001 200 002
3: Persistent command Fig. 3-205, (p. 3-252)
7-158 P632/EN M/R-a5-B // P632‑312‑660

7 Settings P632
Parameter Address
[spacer] CMD_1: Oper. mode cmd. C 007 200 032
[spacer]
Selection of the command operating mode.
P632/EN M/R-a5-B // P632‑312‑660 7-159

P632 7 Settings
Parameter Address
Binary counts COUNT : General enable US ER 217 000
0: No Fig. 3-211, (p. 3-260)
[spacer]
Disabling or enabling binary counts.
[spacer] COUNT : Deb ounce t. c ount. 1 217 160
3 0 1000 ms Fig. 3-211, (p. 3-260)
3 0 1000 ms
3 0 1000 ms
3 0 1000 ms
[spacer] COUNT : Deb ounce t. c ount.17 217 176
3 0 1000 ms
3 0 1000 ms
3 0 1000 ms
3 0 1000 ms
3 0 1000 ms
3 0 1000 ms
3 0 1000 ms
3 0 1000 ms
[spacer]
Setting for the debounce time of the binary signal to be counted.
[spacer] COUNT : Limit count e r 1 217 221
Blocked 1 65000
Blocked 1 65000
Blocked 1 65000
7-160 P632/EN M/R-a5-B // P632‑312‑660

7 Settings P632
Parameter Address
Blocked 1 65000
[spacer]
Setting a limit for the counter value. A warning signal is issued if the counter
value exceeds the set limit. Setting this parameter to Blocked disables the limit
check.
[spacer] COUNT : Cycle t.count t r ans m 217 007
0: No transmission Fig. 3-211, (p. 3-260)
[spacer]
Setting the cycle time for the periodic transmission of the counts.
[spacer] COUNT : IEC61850 pulsQty 221 096
1 0 1000
[spacer]
Setting the scaling factor to transmit the counter value via IEC 61850. According
to the standard the resulting value is calculated as:
Value transmitted = actual value · pulsQty
(see IEC 61850: Value = actVal · pulsQty).
7.1.3.3 Param eter S ubs e ts
Parameter Address
Main function MAIN: Vnom p ri m. end a P Sx 019 017 019 057 019 061 019 065
110.0 0.1 1500.0 kV
[spacer]
Setting for the primary nominal voltage at end a of the transformer.
[spacer] MAIN: Vnom p ri m. end b PS x 019 018 019 058 019 062 019 066
110.0 0.1 1500.0 kV
[spacer]
Setting for the primary nominal voltage at end b of the transformer.
[spacer] MAIN: Phase re v ersal a P Sx 010 200 010 201 010 202 010 203
0: No swap
[spacer] MAIN: Phase re v ersal b P Sx 010 204 010 205 010 206 010 207
0: No swap
[spacer]
Setting for the phase reversal function (see description for function group MAIN)
for electrical machines in pumped storage power stations.
Phases to be reversed (A-B swapped, A-B swapped or A-B swapped) may be set
separately for each end.
At the same time the display MAIN: Phas e re ve rsal activ will be
triggered unless the setting is No swap.
P632/EN M/R-a5-B // P632‑312‑660 7-161

P632 7 Settings
Parameter Address
Differential protec‐ DIFF: E nable PSx 072 152 073 152 074 152 075 152
tion
0: No
[spacer]
This setting defines the parameter subset (setting group) in which differential
protection is enabled.
[spacer] DIFF: Ve c.gr. ends a-b P Sx 019 010 019 040 019 041 019 042
0 0 11 Fig. 3-97, (p. 3-135)
[spacer]
For standard connection of the P632 (see Chapter “Installation and
Connection”), the vector group ID needs to be entered. For connection reversal
applied to one individual end, this can be taken into account in setting
(MAIN: Conn.meas.cir c. I P, a or MAIN: Conn.me as.circ. IP,b).
The following algorithms apply:
Setting = ID + 6
If the addition results in a value > 12 then:
Setting = (ID + 6) – 12
If the phase currents of the low and high voltage sides are exchanged and if this
is not accounted for by the settings at MAIN: Conn.me as ,circ. IP,z
(where z is end a,b,c or d) and MAIN: C onn.meas,cir c. IY ,z (where z is
end a,b or c) then the algorithm is:
Setting = 12 – ID
If an A-C-B phase sequence (or "anti-clockwise rotating field") is present then
this should be entered as a setting at the P632. In this case, the P632 will
automatically form the complementary value of the set vector group ID to the
number 12 (vector group ID = 12 – set ID).
For application of the P632 as machine protection, the setting must be 0 or 6
depending on the current transformer connection.
[spacer] DIFF: Idiff> PS x 072 142 073 142 074 142 075 142
0.20 0.10 2.50 Iref Fig. 3-101, (p. 3-139)
[spacer]
Operate value of the differential protection function as referred to the reference
current of the relevant transformer end.
[spacer] DIFF: Idiff>> PS x 072 143 073 143 074 143 075 143
15.0 2.5 30.0 Iref Fig. 3-101, (p. 3-139)
[spacer]
Threshold value of the differential current for deactivation of the inrush
stabilization function (harmonic restraint) and of the overfluxing restraint.
Note: If the threshold is set too high, it is possible for the P632 not to trip in the
presence of internal faults with transformer saturation.
7-162 P632/EN M/R-a5-B // P632‑312‑660

7 Settings P632
Parameter Address
[spacer] DIFF: Idiff>>> PS x 072 144 073 144 074 144 075 144
30.0 2.5 30.0 Iref Fig. 3-101, (p. 3-139)
[spacer]
This setting defines the threshold value for the differential current where the
differential protection is triggered regardless of restraining quantity, inrush
stabilization and saturation discriminator.
Note: If the threshold is set too low, the P632 can trip in the presence of
external faults with transformer saturation.
[spacer] DIFF: Idiff>(CTS) PS x 080 000 081 000 082 000 083 000
0.20 0.10 30.00 Iref
[spacer]
If the Current Transformer Supervision (CTS) function has detected a CT failure,
then the basic operating threshold D IFF : Idiff> PS x can be raised to a
settable safe value DIFF : Idiff>(C TS ) P Sx. Please refer to the CTS
function section for more details.
[spacer] DIFF: m1 PS x 072 145 073 145 074 145 075 145
0.30 0.10 1.50 Fig. 3-101, (p. 3-139)
[spacer]
Gradient of the differential protection tripping characteristic for the range
0.5·Idiff> < IR ≤ IR,m1.
[spacer] DIFF: m2 PS x 072 146 073 146 074 146 075 146
0.70 0.10 1.50 Fig. 3-101, (p. 3-139)
[spacer]
Gradient of the differential protection tripping characteristic for the
range IR > IR,m2.
[spacer] DIFF: IR,m 2 PSx 072 147 073 147 074 147 075 147
4.0 1.5 10.0 Iref Fig. 3-101, (p. 3-139)
[spacer]
Knee point where the tripping characteristic continues with the setting for
gradient m2.
[spacer] DIFF: O p.mode r us h rst. PSx 072 148 073 148 074 148 075 148
1: Not phase-selective Fig. 3-101, (p. 3-139)
[spacer]
Setting for the operating mode of the inrush stabilization function.
For application of the P632 as machine protection, harmonic restraint can be
disabled by way of this setting. For application of the P632 as transformer
protection, the user can select whether the harmonic restraint should operate in
cross-blocking mode or selectively for one measuring system.
[spacer] DIFF: R us hI ( 2f0) /I (f0) P Sx 072 159 073 159 074 159 075 159
20 10 50 % Fig. 3-102, (p. 3-140)
[spacer]
Operate value of the inrush stabilization (harmonic restraint) of differential
protection as a ratio of the second harmonic with the fundamental component of
the differential current, in percent.
P632/EN M/R-a5-B // P632‑312‑660 7-163

P632 7 Settings
Parameter Address
[spacer] DIFF: 0-s e q . f ilt.a e n.P Sx 072 155 073 155 074 155 075 155
1: Yes Fig. 3-97, (p. 3-135)
[spacer]
Enabling or disabling the zero-sequence filtering of winding a.
[spacer] DIFF: 0-s e q . f ilt.b e n.P Sx 072 156 073 156 074 156 075 156
1: Yes Fig. 3-97, (p. 3-135)
[spacer]
Enabling or disabling the zero-sequence filtering of winding b.
[spacer] DIFF: O ve rflux .bl. en. P Sx 072 158 073 158 074 158 075 158
0: No Fig. 3-103, (p. 3-141)
[spacer]
Enabling or disabling the overfluxing restraint.
[spacer] DIFF: O v. I (5f0)/I( f0) PS x 072 160 073 160 074 160 075 160
20 10 80 % Fig. 3-103, (p. 3-141)
[spacer]
Operate value of the overfluxing restraint of differential protection as ratio of the
fifth harmonic component to the fundamental wave for the differential current,
in percent.
[spacer] DIFF: O p.del.,trip si g.PS x 010 162 010 163 010 164 010 165
0.00 0.00 100.00 s Fig. 3-101, (p. 3-139)
[spacer]
The time-delay of the differential protection trip signal can be set here.
[spacer] DIFF: Hyst. e ff ect ive P Sx 072 006 073 006 074 006 075 006
1: Yes
[spacer]
Enabling or disabling the hysteresis of the tripping characteristic at the rate of
10%.
7-164 P632/EN M/R-a5-B // P632‑312‑660

7 Settings P632
Parameter Address
Ground differential REF_1: Enable PSx 072 141 073 141 074 141 075 141
protection
0: No Fig. 3-106, (p. 3-145)
[spacer] REF_2: Enable PSx 072 161 073 161 074 161 075 161
0: No
[spacer]
This setting defines the parameter subset in which ground differential protection
is enabled.
[spacer] REF_1: Ope rating mode P Sx 072 149 073 149 074 149 075 149
1: Low imped. / sum(IP)
[spacer] REF_2: Ope rating mode P Sx 072 169 073 169 074 169 075 169
1: Low imped. / sum(IP)
[spacer]
Three operating modes can be selected. The Low imped. / sum(IP) operating
mode is the existing low impedance ground differential protection mode
(already existing since version P632–602). The alternative selectable modes are
Low imped. / IP,max and High impedance.
[spacer] REF_1: Bl.f .DI FF tr igg. P Sx 080 006 081 006 082 006 083 006
0: No Fig. 3-106, (p. 3-145)
[spacer] REF_2: Bl.f .DI FF tr igg. P Sx 080 007 081 007 082 007 083 007
0: No
[spacer]
This setting determines whether the ground-differential short circuit protection
is blocked in case of a starting of the differential protection.
[spacer] REF_1: CT S e ffe ct ive P Sx 080 003 081 003 082 003 083 003
0: No
[spacer] REF_2: CT S e ffe ct ive P Sx 080 004 081 004 082 004 083 004
0: No
[spacer]
This setting determines whether the ground-differential short circuit protection
associated with the corresponding CTS signal, C TS : Alarm e nd a (or
CTS : Alarm end b etc.), is blocked.
[spacer] REF_1: Id iff > PSx 072 150 073 150 074 150 075 150
0.20 0.10 1.00 Iref Fig. 3-110, (p. 3-151)
[spacer] REF_2: Id iff > PSx 072 170 073 170 074 170 075 170
0.20 0.10 1.00 Iref
[spacer]
Operate value of the ground differential protection function as referred to the
reference current of the relevant transformer end.
[spacer] REF_1: Id iff >>> PSx 072 151 073 151 074 151 075 151
10.0 2.5 30.0 Iref Fig. 3-110, (p. 3-151)
P632/EN M/R-a5-B // P632‑312‑660 7-165

P632 7 Settings
Parameter Address
[spacer] REF_2: Id iff >>> PSx 072 171 073 171 074 171 075 171
10.0 2.5 30.0 Iref
[spacer]
Threshold value of the differential current for tripping by the ground differential
protection function independently of the restraining variable.
[spacer] REF_1: m1 PSx 072 162 073 162 074 162 075 162
0.20 0.00 1.00 Fig. 3-110, (p. 3-151)
[spacer] REF_2: m1 PSx 072 172 073 172 074 172 075 172
0.20 0.00 1.00
[spacer]
Gradient of the differential protection tripping characteristic with the operating
mode 'Low imped. / sum(IP)'.
range IR < IR,m1 with the operating modes 'Low imped. / IP,max ' and 'High
impedance'.
[spacer] REF_1: m2 PSx 072 163 073 163 074 163 075 163
1.50 0.15 1.50 Fig. 3-110, (p. 3-151)
[spacer] REF_2: m2 PSx 072 165 073 165 074 165 075 165
1.50 0.15 1.50
[spacer]
range IR > IR,m2 with the operating modes 'Low imped. / IP,max ' and 'High
impedance'.
[spacer] REF_1: IR ,m 2 PS x 072 164 073 164 074 164 075 164
1.00 0.10 1.50 Iref Fig. 3-110, (p. 3-151)
[spacer] REF_2: IR ,m 2 PS x 072 166 073 166 074 166 075 166
1.00 0.10 1.50 Iref
[spacer]
Knee point from which the characteristic runs with a set gradient of m2
(operating mode 'Low imped. / IP,max').
7-166 P632/EN M/R-a5-B // P632‑312‑660

7 Settings P632
Parameter Address
Definite-time over‐ DTOC1: Enable P Sx 076 050 077 050 078 050 079 050
current protection
0: No Fig. 3-114, (p. 3-156)
[spacer] DTOC2: Enable P Sx 076 070 077 070 078 070 079 070
0: No
[spacer]
This setting specifies the parameter subset to be enabled for definite-time
overcurrent protection.
[spacer] DTOC1: Block t im.s t. IN PSx 076 067 077 067 078 067 079 067
0: Without Fig. 3-118, (p. 3-161)
[spacer] DTOC2: Block t im.s t. IN PSx 076 087 077 087 078 087 079 087
0: Without
[spacer]
This setting defines whether blocking of the residual current stages will take
place for single-pole or multi-pole phase current starting.
[spacer] DTOC1: Gen.st art ing mode PSx 076 066 077 066 078 066 079 066
1: With start. IN/Ineg Fig. 3-119, (p. 3-162)
[spacer] DTOC2: Gen.st art ing mode PSx 076 086 077 086 078 086 079 086
[spacer]
This setting defines whether starting of the residual current stages will result in
the formation of the general starting signal of DTOC protection.
[spacer] DTOC1: tGS PSx 076 065 077 065 078 065 079 065
0.00 0.00 100.00 s Fig. 3-119, (p. 3-162)
[spacer] DTOC2: tGS PSx 076 085 077 085 078 085 079 085
0.00 0.00 100.00 s
[spacer]
Setting for the operate delay of the general starting signal of DTOC protection.
[spacer] DTOC1: R ush re st r.enabl P Sx 076 063 077 063 078 063 079 063
0: No Fig. 3-116, (p. 3-158)
[spacer] DTOC2: R ush re st r.enabl P Sx 076 083 077 083 078 083 079 083
0: No
[spacer]
Setting as to whether the inrush stabilization function (harmonic restraint) of
differential protection shall be able to block the definite-time overcurrent
[spacer] DTOC1: M eas .value I/IN> PSx 060 002 060 003 060 004 060 005
0: Fundamental Fig. 3-115, (p. 3-157)

Fig. 3-118, (p. 3-161)
[spacer] DTOC1: M eas .val. I/ IN>> P Sx 060 006 060 007 060 008 060 009

Fig. 3-118, (p. 3-161)
P632/EN M/R-a5-B // P632‑312‑660 7-167

P632 7 Settings
Parameter Address
[spacer] DTOC1: M eas .val.I/IN>>> P Sx 060 010 060 011 060 012 060 013

Fig. 3-118, (p. 3-161)
[spacer] DTOC2: M eas .value I/IN> PSx 060 061 060 062 060 063 060 064
0: Fundamental
[spacer] DTOC2: M eas .val. I/ IN>> P Sx 060 065 060 066 060 067 060 068
0: Fundamental
[spacer] DTOC2: M eas .val.I/IN>>> P Sx 060 069 060 070 060 071 060 072
0: Fundamental
[spacer]
These settings allow to select for the respective overcurrent stage whether the
Remark: For the negative-sequence stages, the starting decision is always based
on the fundamental.
[spacer] DTOC1: I> PSx 076 051 077 051 078 051 079 051
1.00 0.10 30.00 Inom Fig. 3-115, (p. 3-157)
[spacer] DTOC2: I> PSx 076 071 077 071 078 071 079 071
1.00 0.10 30.00 Inom
[spacer]
Setting for operate value I>.
[spacer] DTOC1: I>> PSx 076 052 077 052 078 052 079 052
4.00 0.10 30.00 Inom Fig. 3-115, (p. 3-157)
[spacer] DTOC2: I>> PSx 076 072 077 072 078 072 079 072
4.00 0.10 30.00 Inom
[spacer]
Setting for operate value I>>.
[spacer] DTOC1: I>>> PSx 076 053 077 053 078 053 079 053
[spacer] DTOC2: I>>> PSx 076 163 077 163 078 163 079 163
[spacer]
Setting for operate value I>>>.
[spacer] DTOC1: I> dynamic PSx 076 151 077 151 078 151 079 151
1.00 0.10 30.00 Inom Fig. 3-115, (p. 3-157)
[spacer] DTOC2: I> dynamic PSx 076 161 077 161 078 161 079 161
1.00 0.10 30.00 Inom
[spacer]
Setting for operate value I> in dynamic mode. This operate value is only
effective while the hold time for dynamic parameters is elapsing.
[spacer] DTOC1: I>> dynamic PSx 076 152 077 152 078 152 079 152
1.00 0.10 30.00 Inom Fig. 3-115, (p. 3-157)
7-168 P632/EN M/R-a5-B // P632‑312‑660

7 Settings P632
Parameter Address
[spacer] DTOC2: I>> dyn amic PSx 076 162 077 162 078 162 079 162
1.00 0.10 30.00 Inom
[spacer]
Setting for operate value I>> in dynamic mode. This operate value is only
[spacer] DTOC1: I>>> dy namic PSx 076 153 077 153 078 153 079 153
1.00 0.10 30.00 Inom Fig. 3-115, (p. 3-157)
[spacer] DTOC2: I>>> dy namic PSx 076 173 077 173 078 173 079 173
1.00 0.10 30.00 Inom
[spacer]
Setting for operate value I>>> in dynamic mode. This operate value is only
[spacer] DTOC1: tI> PS x 076 057 077 057 078 057 079 057
1.00 0.00 100.00 s Fig. 3-116, (p. 3-158)
[spacer] DTOC2: tI> PS x 076 077 077 077 078 077 079 077
1.00 0.00 100.00 s
[spacer]
Setting for operate delay I>.
[spacer] DTOC1: tI>> PSx 076 058 077 058 078 058 079 058
0.50 0.00 100.00 s Fig. 3-116, (p. 3-158)
[spacer] DTOC2: tI>> PSx 076 078 077 078 078 078 079 078
0.50 0.00 100.00 s
[spacer]
Setting for operate delay I>>.
[spacer] DTOC1: tI>>> PS x 076 059 077 059 078 059 079 059
0.50 0.00 100.00 s Fig. 3-116, (p. 3-158)
[spacer] DTOC2: tI>>> PS x 076 169 077 169 078 169 079 169
0.50 0.00 100.00 s
[spacer]
Setting for the operate delay of the I>>> stage.
[spacer] DTOC1: Ineg> PSx 076 197 077 197 078 197 079 197
0.25 0.10 8.00 Inom Fig. 3-117, (p. 3-159)
[spacer] DTOC2: Ineg> PSx 076 207 077 207 078 207 079 207
0.25 0.10 8.00 Inom
[spacer]
Setting for the operate value of the Ineg> stage.
[spacer] DTOC1: Ineg>> PSx 076 198 077 198 078 198 079 198
[spacer] DTOC2: Ineg>> PSx 076 208 077 208 078 208 079 208
[spacer]
Setting for the operate value of the Ineg>> stage.
P632/EN M/R-a5-B // P632‑312‑660 7-169

P632 7 Settings
Parameter Address
[spacer] DTOC1: Ineg>>> PSx 076 199 077 199 078 199 079 199
[spacer] DTOC2: Ineg>>> PSx 076 209 077 209 078 209 079 209
[spacer]
Setting for the operate value of the Ineg>>> stage.
[spacer] DTOC1: Ineg> dynamic P Sx 076 200 077 200 078 200 079 200
1.00 0.10 8.00 Inom Fig. 3-117, (p. 3-159)
[spacer] DTOC2: Ineg> dynamic P Sx 076 210 077 210 078 210 079 210
1.00 0.10 8.00 Inom
[spacer]
Setting for operate value Ineg> dynamic. (Ineg = negative-sequence current)
This operate value is effective only while the timer stage MAIN: Hold ti m e
dyn.param. is elapsing.
[spacer] DTOC1: Ineg>> dynamic P Sx 076 201 077 201 078 201 079 201
1.00 0.10 8.00 Inom Fig. 3-117, (p. 3-159)
[spacer] DTOC2: Ineg>> dynamic P Sx 076 211 077 211 078 211 079 211
1.00 0.10 8.00 Inom
[spacer]
Setting for operate value Ineg>> dynamic. (Ineg = negative-sequence current)
[spacer] DTOC1: Ineg>>> dynamic P Sx 076 202 077 202 078 202 079 202
1.00 0.10 8.00 Inom
[spacer] DTOC2: Ineg>>> dynamic P Sx 076 212 077 212 078 212 079 212
1.00 0.10 8.00 Inom
[spacer]
Setting for operate value Ineg>>> dynamic. (Ineg = negative-sequence current)
[spacer] DTOC1: tIneg> PSx 076 203 077 203 078 203 079 203
1.00 0.00 100.00 s Fig. 3-117, (p. 3-159)
[spacer] DTOC2: tIneg> PSx 076 213 077 213 078 213 079 213
1.00 0.00 100.00 s
[spacer]
Setting for the operate delay of the Ineg> stage.
[spacer] DTOC1: tIneg>> P Sx 076 204 077 204 078 204 079 204
0.50 0.00 100.00 s Fig. 3-117, (p. 3-159)
[spacer] DTOC2: tIneg>> P Sx 076 214 077 214 078 214 079 214
0.50 0.00 100.00 s
[spacer]
Setting for the operate delay of the Ineg>> stage.
7-170 P632/EN M/R-a5-B // P632‑312‑660

7 Settings P632
Parameter Address
[spacer] DTOC1: tIneg>>> P Sx 076 205 077 205 078 205 079 205
0.50 0.00 100.00 s Fig. 3-117, (p. 3-159)
[spacer] DTOC2: tIneg>>> P Sx 076 215 077 215 078 215 079 215
0.50 0.00 100.00 s
[spacer]
Setting for the operate delay of the Ineg>>> stage.
[spacer] DTOC1: IN> PSx 076 054 077 054 078 054 079 054
0.25 0.10 8.00 Inom Fig. 3-118, (p. 3-161)
[spacer] DTOC2: IN> PSx 076 164 077 164 078 164 079 164
0.25 0.10 8.00 Inom
[spacer]
Setting for operate value IN>.
[spacer] DTOC1: IN>> PSx 076 055 077 055 078 055 079 055
[spacer] DTOC2: IN>> PSx 076 165 077 165 078 165 079 165
[spacer]
Setting for operate value IN>>.
[spacer] DTOC1: IN>>> PSx 076 056 077 056 078 056 079 056
[spacer] DTOC2: IN>>> PSx 076 166 077 166 078 166 079 166
[spacer]
Setting for operate value IN>>>.
[spacer] DTOC1: IN> dyn amic PSx 076 154 077 154 078 154 079 154
1.00 0.10 8.00 Inom Fig. 3-118, (p. 3-161)
[spacer] DTOC2: IN> dyn amic PSx 076 174 077 174 078 174 079 174
1.00 0.10 8.00 Inom
[spacer]
Setting for operate value IN> in dynamic mode. This operate value is only
[spacer] DTOC1: IN>> dy namic PSx 076 155 077 155 078 155 079 155
1.00 0.10 8.00 Inom Fig. 3-118, (p. 3-161)
[spacer] DTOC2: IN>> dy namic PSx 076 175 077 175 078 175 079 175
1.00 0.10 8.00 Inom
[spacer]
Setting for operate value IN>> in dynamic mode. This operate value is only
[spacer] DTOC1: IN>>> dy namic PS x 076 156 077 156 078 156 079 156
1.00 0.10 8.00 Inom Fig. 3-118, (p. 3-161)
P632/EN M/R-a5-B // P632‑312‑660 7-171

P632 7 Settings
Parameter Address
[spacer] DTOC2: IN>>> dy namic PS x 076 176 077 176 078 176 079 176
1.00 0.10 8.00 Inom
[spacer]
Setting for operate value IN>>> in dynamic mode. This operate value is only
[spacer] DTOC1: tIN> PS x 076 060 077 060 078 060 079 060
1.00 0.00 100.00 s Fig. 3-118, (p. 3-161)
[spacer] DTOC2: tIN> PS x 076 170 077 170 078 170 079 170
1.00 0.00 100.00 s
[spacer]
Setting for the operate delay of the IN> stage.
[spacer] DTOC1: tIN>> PS x 076 061 077 061 078 061 079 061
0.50 0.00 100.00 s Fig. 3-118, (p. 3-161)
[spacer] DTOC2: tIN>> PS x 076 171 077 171 078 171 079 171
0.50 0.00 100.00 s
[spacer]
Setting for the operate delay of the IN>> stage.
[spacer] DTOC1: tIN>>> PSx 076 062 077 062 078 062 079 062
0.50 0.00 100.00 s Fig. 3-118, (p. 3-161)
[spacer] DTOC2: tIN>>> PSx 076 172 077 172 078 172 079 172
0.50 0.00 100.00 s
[spacer]
Setting for the operate delay of the IN>>> stage.
7-172 P632/EN M/R-a5-B // P632‑312‑660

7 Settings P632
Parameter Address
Inverse-time overcur‐ IDMT1: Enable PSx

081 050 082 050 083 050 084 050
rent protection
0: No Fig. 3-122, (p. 3-164)
[spacer] IDMT2: Enable PSx 081 170 082 170 083 170 084 170
0: No
[spacer]
This setting specifies the parameter subset to be enabled for inverse-time
overcurrent protection.
[spacer] IDMT1: Block tim.st . IN PS x 081 068 082 068 083 068 084 068
0: Without
[spacer] IDMT2: Block tim.st . IN PS x 081 188 082 188 083 188 084 188
0: Without
[spacer]
This setting defines whether a blocking of the residual and negative-sequence
current stages should take place for single-pole startings or multi-pole phase
current startings.
[spacer] IDMT1: Gen.s tarti ng mode PS x 081 059 082 059 083 059 084 059
1: With start. IN/Ineg Fig. 3-131, (p. 3-175)
[spacer] IDMT2: Gen.s tarti ng mode PS x 081 179 082 179 083 179 084 179
[spacer]
This setting defines whether starting of the residual current stages will result in
the formation of the general starting signal of IDMT protection.
[spacer] IDMT1: tGS PS x 081 058 082 058 083 058 084 058
0.00 0.00 100.00 s Fig. 3-131, (p. 3-175)
[spacer] IDMT2: tGS PS x 081 178 082 178 083 178 084 178
0.00 0.00 100.00 s
[spacer]
Setting for the operate delay of the general starting signal of IDMT protection.
[spacer] IDMT1: Rush r e str .enabl PSx 081 060 082 060 083 060 084 060
0: No Fig. 3-127, (p. 3-169)

Fig. 3-128, (p. 3-171)
[spacer] IDMT2: Rush r e str .enabl PSx 081 180 082 180 083 180 084 180
0: No
[spacer]
Setting as to whether the inrush restraint of differential protection shall be able
to block the inverse-time overcurrent protection function.
[spacer] IDMT1: Me as .value I/ IN PS x 013 192 013 193 013 194 013 195

Fig. 3-129, (p. 3-172)
P632/EN M/R-a5-B // P632‑312‑660 7-173

P632 7 Settings
Parameter Address
[spacer] IDMT2: Me as .value I/ IN PS x 013 196 013 197 013 198 013 199
0: Fundamental
[spacer]
These settings allow to select for the respective overcurrent stage whether the
Remark: For the negative-sequence stage of each IDMTx, the starting decision is
always based on the fundamental.
[spacer] IDMT1: Ire f,P PS x 081 051 082 051 083 051 084 051
1.00 0.10 4.00 Inom Fig. 3-127, (p. 3-169)
[spacer] IDMT2: Ire f,P PS x 081 171 082 171 083 171 084 171
1.00 0.10 4.00 Inom
[spacer]
Setting for the reference current (phase current system).
[spacer] IDMT1: Ire f,P dyn amic PSx 081 052 082 052 083 052 084 052
1.00 0.10 4.00 Inom Fig. 3-127, (p. 3-169)
[spacer] IDMT2: Ire f,P dyn amic PSx 081 172 082 172 083 172 084 172
1.00 0.10 4.00 Inom
[spacer]
Setting for the reference current (phase current system) in dynamic mode. This
operate value is only effective while the hold time for dynamic parameters is
elapsing.
[spacer] IDMT1: Characteristi c P PS x 081 053 082 053 083 053 084 053
0: Definite Time Fig. 3-127, (p. 3-169)
[spacer] IDMT2: Characteristi c P PS x 081 173 082 173 083 173 084 173
0: Definite Time
[spacer]
Setting for the tripping characteristic (phase current system).
[spacer] IDMT1: Factor k t,P PS x 081 054 082 054 083 054 084 054
1.00 0.05 10.00 Fig. 3-127, (p. 3-169)
[spacer] IDMT2: Factor k t,P PS x 081 174 082 174 083 174 084 174
1.00 0.05 10.00
[spacer]
Setting for the factor kt,P of the starting characteristic (phase current system).
[spacer] IDMT1: Min. trip t . P P Sx 081 057 082 057 083 057 084 057
1.00 0.00 10.00 s Fig. 3-127, (p. 3-169)
[spacer] IDMT2: Min. trip t . P P Sx 081 177 082 177 083 177 084 177
1.00 0.00 10.00 s
[spacer]
Setting for the minimum trip time (phase current system).
[spacer] IDMT1: Hold tim e P PS x 081 055 082 055 083 055 084 055
0.00 0.00 600.00 s Fig. 3-127, (p. 3-169)
7-174 P632/EN M/R-a5-B // P632‑312‑660

7 Settings P632
Parameter Address
[spacer] IDMT2: Hold time P PS x 081 175 082 175 083 175 084 175
0.00 0.00 600.00 s
[spacer]
Setting for the hold time for storing the starting time once the starting has
dropped out (phase current system).
[spacer] IDMT1: Releas e P PSx 081 056 082 056 083 056 084 056
1: Without delay Fig. 3-127, (p. 3-169)
[spacer] IDMT2: Releas e P PSx 081 176 082 176 083 176 084 176
1: Without delay
[spacer]
Setting for the reset characteristic (phase current system).
[spacer] IDMT1: Ire f,neg PSx 081 111 082 111 083 111 084 111
[spacer] IDMT2: Ire f,neg PSx 081 121 082 121 083 121 084 121
[spacer]
Setting for the reference current (negative-sequence current system).
[spacer] IDMT1: Ire f,neg dynamic PS x 081 112 082 112 083 112 084 112
[spacer] IDMT2: Ire f,neg dynamic PS x 081 122 082 122 083 122 084 122
[spacer]
Setting for the reference current (negative-sequence current system).
This value is only effective while the hold time for dynamic parameters is
elapsing.
[spacer] IDMT1: Characte r. ne g. P Sx 081 113 082 113 083 113 084 113
[spacer] IDMT2: Characte r. ne g. P Sx 081 123 082 123 083 123 084 123
0: Definite Time
[spacer]
Setting for the tripping characteristic (negative-sequence current system).
[spacer] IDMT1: Factor k t,neg P Sx 081 114 082 114 083 114 084 114
1.00 0.05 10.00 Fig. 3-128, (p. 3-171)
[spacer] IDMT2: Factor k t,neg P Sx 081 124 082 124 083 124 084 124
1.00 0.05 10.00
[spacer]
Setting for the factor kt,neg of the starting characteristic (negative-sequence
current system).
[spacer] IDMT1: Min. trip t . ne g PSx 081 117 082 117 083 117 084 117
1.00 0.00 10.00 s Fig. 3-128, (p. 3-171)
P632/EN M/R-a5-B // P632‑312‑660 7-175

P632 7 Settings
Parameter Address
[spacer] IDMT2: Min. trip t . ne g PSx 081 127 082 127 083 127 084 127
1.00 0.00 10.00 s
[spacer]
Setting for the minimum trip time characteristic (negative-sequence current
system).
[spacer] IDMT1: Hold tim e neg P Sx 081 115 082 115 083 115 084 115
0.00 0.00 600.00 s Fig. 3-128, (p. 3-171)
[spacer] IDMT2: Hold tim e neg P Sx 081 125 082 125 083 125 084 125
0.00 0.00 600.00 s
[spacer]
dropped out (negative-sequence current system).
[spacer] IDMT1: Releas e neg P Sx 081 116 082 116 083 116 084 116
[spacer] IDMT2: Releas e neg P Sx 081 126 082 126 083 126 084 126
1: Without delay
[spacer]
Setting for the reset characteristic (negative-sequence current system).
[spacer] IDMT1: Ire f,N PSx 081 061 082 061 083 061 084 061
[spacer] IDMT2: Ire f,N PSx 081 181 082 181 083 181 084 181
[spacer]
Setting for the reference current (residual current system).
[spacer] IDMT1: Ire f,N dynamic P Sx 081 062 082 062 083 062 084 062
[spacer] IDMT2: Ire f,N dynamic P Sx 081 182 082 182 083 182 084 182
[spacer]
Setting for the reference current (residual current system) in dynamic mode.
This operate value is only effective while the hold time for dynamic parameters
is elapsing.
[spacer] IDMT1: Characteristi c N PSx 081 063 082 063 083 063 084 063
[spacer] IDMT2: Characteristi c N PSx 081 183 082 183 083 183 084 183
0: Definite Time
[spacer]
Setting for the tripping characteristic (residual current system).
[spacer] IDMT1: Factor k t,N P Sx 081 064 082 064 083 064 084 064
1.00 0.05 10.00 Fig. 3-129, (p. 3-172)
[spacer] IDMT2: Factor k t,N P Sx 081 184 082 184 083 184 084 184
1.00 0.05 10.00
[spacer]
Setting for the kt,N factor of the starting characteristic (residual current system).
7-176 P632/EN M/R-a5-B // P632‑312‑660

7 Settings P632
Parameter Address
[spacer] IDMT1: Min. trip t . N P Sx 081 067 082 067 083 067 084 067
1.00 0.00 10.00 s Fig. 3-129, (p. 3-172)
[spacer] IDMT2: Min. trip t . N P Sx 081 187 082 187 083 187 084 187
1.00 0.00 10.00 s
[spacer]
Setting for the minimum trip time characteristic (residual current system).
[spacer] IDMT1: Hold time N P Sx 081 065 082 065 083 065 084 065
0.00 0.00 600.00 s Fig. 3-129, (p. 3-172)
[spacer] IDMT2: Hold time N P Sx 081 185 082 185 083 185 084 185
0.00 0.00 600.00 s
[spacer]
dropped out (residual current system).
[spacer] IDMT1: Releas e N PSx 081 066 082 066 083 066 084 066
[spacer] IDMT2: Releas e N PSx 081 186 082 186 083 186 084 186
1: Without delay
[spacer]
Setting for the reset characteristic (residual current system).
P632/EN M/R-a5-B // P632‑312‑660 7-177

P632 7 Settings
Parameter Address
Thermal overload THRM 1: Enable PSx 081 070 082 070 083 070 084 070
protection
0: No Fig. 3-134, (p. 3-176)
[spacer]
This setting defines the parameter subset in which thermal overload protection
is enabled.
[spacer] THRM 1: S ele ct cur re nt PS x 013 184 013 185 013 186 013 187
0: Max. phase current Fig. 3-136, (p. 3-177)
[spacer]
Depending on this setting the thermal replica is calculated based on either the
maximum phase current, or based on the calculated residual current derived
from the sum of the phase currents (setting IN calculated), or based on the
residual current measured at the fourth transformer (setting IN measured).
[spacer] THRM 1: Iref PS x 081 074 082 074 083 074 084 074
1.00 0.05 4.00 Inom Fig. 3-139, (p. 3-181)
[spacer]
Setting for the reference current.
[spacer] THRM 1: S tart.f act.OL_RC PS x 081 075 082 075 083 075 084 075
1.15 1.05 1.50 Fig. 3-139, (p. 3-181)
[spacer]
Starting factor k must be set in accordance with the maximum permissible
continuous thermal current of the protected object:
k=Itherm,prot.object/Inom,prot.object
[spacer] THRM 1: Tim.const .1,>Ibl PSx 081 082 082 082 083 082 084 082
30.0 1.0 1000.0 min Fig. 3-139, (p. 3-181)
[spacer]
Setting for the thermal time constants of the protected object with current flow
(Ibl: base line current).
[spacer] THRM 1: Tim.const .2,<Ibl PSx 081 083 082 083 083 083 084 083
30.0 1.0 1000.0 min Fig. 3-139, (p. 3-181)
[spacer]
Setting for the thermal time constants of the protected object without current
flow (Ibl: base line current).
Note: This setting option is only relevant when machines are running. In all
other cases, time constant 2 must be set equal to time constant 1.
[spacer] THRM 1: M ax.pe rm.obj .t mp.PS x 081 077 082 077 083 077 084 077
120 0 300 °C Fig. 3-139, (p. 3-181)
[spacer]
Setting for the maximum permissible temperature of the protected object.
[spacer] THRM 1: M ax.pe rm.cool.t mpP Sx 081 080 082 080 083 080 084 080
40 0 70 °C Fig. 3-139, (p. 3-181)
[spacer]
Setting for the maximum permissible coolant temperature.
Note: This setting is active only if the coolant temperature is measured via the
PT 100 or the 20 mA input.
7-178 P632/EN M/R-a5-B // P632‑312‑660

7 Settings P632
Parameter Address
[spacer] THRM 1: S ele ct CTA P S x 081 072 082 072 083 072 084 072
0: Default temp. value Fig. 3-138, (p. 3-180)
[spacer]
Select the mode of the coolant temperature acquisition. Select from:
● No data acquisition. A default temperature value is used instead,
● data acquisition via the PT 100 input,
● data acquisition via the 20 mA input.
[spacer] THRM 1: De fault CTA PSx 081 081 082 081 083 081 084 081
40 -40 70 °C Fig. 3-139, (p. 3-181)
[spacer]
Setting for the coolant temperature to be used for calculation of the trip time if
there is no data acquisition for the coolant temperature.
[spacer] THRM 1: Bl. f. CT A faul t PSx 081 073 082 073 083 073 084 073
1: Yes Fig. 3-138, (p. 3-180)
[spacer]
This setting specifies whether the thermal overload protection function will be
blocked in the event of faulty coolant temperature acquisition.
[spacer] THRM 1: R el. O/T warning P Sx 081 079 082 079 083 079 084 079
95 50 200 % Fig. 3-139, (p. 3-181)
[spacer]
Setting for the operate value of the warning stage.
[spacer] THRM 1: R el. O/T t rip PS x 081 076 082 076 083 076 084 076
100 50 200 % Fig. 3-139, (p. 3-181)
[spacer]
Setting for the operate value of the trip stage.
Note: If the operating mode has been set to Absolute replica, the setting here
will be automatically set to 100% and this parameter will be hidden as far as the
local control panel is concerned.
[spacer] THRM 1: Hystere sis t ri p PSx 081 078 082 078 083 078 084 078
2 2 30 % Fig. 3-139, (p. 3-181)
[spacer]
Setting for the hysteresis of the trip stage.
[spacer] THRM 1: Warning pr e-t rip PS x 081 085 082 085 083 085 084 085
30.0 0.0 1000.0 min Fig. 3-139, (p. 3-181)
[spacer]
A warning will be given in advance of the trip. The time difference between the
warning time and the trip time is set here.
P632/EN M/R-a5-B // P632‑312‑660 7-179

P632 7 Settings
Parameter Address
Time-voltage protec‐ V<>: Enable PS x

076 000 077 000 078 000 079 000
tion
0: No Fig. 3-141, (p. 3-183)
[spacer]
This setting defines the setting group in which V<> protection is enabled.
[spacer] V<>: V> PSx 076 003 077 003 078 003 079 003
1.10 0.20 1.50 Vnom Fig. 3-142, (p. 3-184)
[spacer]
Setting for operate value V>.
[spacer] V<>: V> > PSx 076 004 077 004 078 004 079 004
1.10 0.20 1.50 Vnom Fig. 3-142, (p. 3-184)
[spacer]
Setting for operate value V>>.
[spacer] V<>: tV> PS x 076 005 077 005 078 005 079 005
1.00 0.00 100.00 s Fig. 3-142, (p. 3-184)
[spacer]
Setting for the operate delay of overvoltage stage V>.
[spacer] V<>: tV>> PS x 076 006 077 006 078 006 079 006
1.00 0.00 100.00 s Fig. 3-142, (p. 3-184)
[spacer]
Setting for the operate delay of overvoltage stage V>>.
[spacer] V<>: V< PSx 076 007 077 007 078 007 079 007
0.80 0.20 1.50 Vnom Fig. 3-143, (p. 3-185)
[spacer]
Setting for operate value V<.
[spacer] V<>: V< < PSx 076 008 077 008 078 008 079 008
0.80 0.20 1.50 Vnom Fig. 3-143, (p. 3-185)
[spacer]
Setting for operate value V<<.
[spacer] V<>: Vm in> PS x 076 046 077 046 078 046 079 046
0.25 0.00 0.60 Vnom Fig. 3-143, (p. 3-185)
[spacer]
Setting for the operate value Vmin>.
[spacer] V<>: tV< PS x 076 009 077 009 078 009 079 009
1.00 0.00 100.00 s Fig. 3-143, (p. 3-185)
[spacer]
Setting for the operate delay of undervoltage stage V<.
[spacer] V<>: tV<< PS x 076 010 077 010 078 010 079 010
1.00 0.00 100.00 s Fig. 3-143, (p. 3-185)
[spacer]
Setting for the operate delay of undervoltage stage V<<.
[spacer] V<>: tT rans ient P Sx 076 029 077 029 078 029 079 029
1.00 0.00 100.00 s Fig. 3-143, (p. 3-185)
[spacer]
Setting for the time limit of the signals generated by the undervoltage stages.
7-180 P632/EN M/R-a5-B // P632‑312‑660

7 Settings P632
Parameter Address
[spacer] V<>: Hyst . V<> meas. PSx 076 048 077 048 078 048 079 048
3 1 10 % Fig. 3-142, (p. 3-184)
[spacer]
Setting for the hysteresis of the trigger stages for monitoring measured
voltages.
P632/EN M/R-a5-B // P632‑312‑660 7-181

P632 7 Settings
Parameter Address
Over-/ f<> : Enable PSx 018 196 018 197 018 198 018 199
tection
0: No Fig. 3-144, (p. 3-186)
[spacer]
This setting defines the parameter subset in which over-/underfrequency
protection is enabled.
[spacer] f<> : Oper. m ode f1 PS x 018 120 018 121 018 122 018 123
1: f Fig. 3-147, (p. 3-189)
1: f
1: f
1: f
[spacer]
Setting for the operating mode of the timer stages of over-/underfrequency
protection.
[spacer] f<> : f1 PS x 018 100 018 101 018 102 018 103
49.80 40.00 70.00 Hz Fig. 3-147, (p. 3-189)
[spacer] f<> : f2 PS x 018 124 018 125 018 126 018 127
49.80 40.00 70.00 Hz
[spacer] f<> : f3 PS x 018 148 018 149 018 150 018 151
49.80 40.00 70.00 Hz
[spacer] f<> : f4 PS x 018 172 018 173 018 174 018 175
49.80 40.00 70.00 Hz
[spacer]
Setting for the frequency threshold. The over-/underfrequency protection
function will operate if one of the following two conditions applies: The
threshold is higher than the set nominal frequency and the frequency exceeds
this threshold. The threshold is lower than the set nominal frequency and the
frequency falls below this threshold. Depending on the chosen operating mode,
either a signal is issued without further monitoring, or further monitoring
mechanisms are started.
[spacer] f<> : tf1 PSx 018 104 018 105 018 106 018 107
0.00 0.00 10.00 s Fig. 3-147, (p. 3-189)
[spacer] f<> : tf2 PSx 018 128 018 129 018 130 018 131
0.00 0.00 10.00 s
[spacer] f<> : tf3 PSx 018 152 018 153 018 154 018 155
0.00 0.00 10.00 s
7-182 P632/EN M/R-a5-B // P632‑312‑660

7 Settings P632
Parameter Address
[spacer] f<> : tf4 PSx 018 176 018 177 018 178 018 179
0.00 0.00 10.00 s
[spacer]
Setting for the operate delay of over-/underfrequency protection.
[spacer] f<> : df1/dt PS x 018 108 018 109 018 110 018 111
2.0 0.1 10.0 Hz/s Fig. 3-147, (p. 3-189)
[spacer] f<> : df2/dt PS x 018 132 018 133 018 134 018 135
2.0 0.1 10.0 Hz/s
[spacer] f<> : df3/dt PS x 018 156 018 157 018 158 018 159
2.0 0.1 10.0 Hz/s
[spacer] f<> : df4/dt PS x 018 180 018 181 018 182 018 183
2.0 0.1 10.0 Hz/s
[spacer]
Setting for the frequency gradient to be monitored.
Note: This setting is ineffective unless operating mode f with df/dt has been
selected.
[spacer] f<> : De lta f1 PSx 018 112 018 113 018 114 018 115
0.30 0.01 5.00 Hz Fig. 3-147, (p. 3-189)
0.30 0.01 5.00 Hz
0.30 0.01 5.00 Hz
0.30 0.01 5.00 Hz
[spacer]
Setting for Delta f.
Note: This setting is ineffective unless operating mode f w. Delta f/Delta t has
been selected.
[spacer] f<> : De lta t1 PSx 018 116 018 117 018 118 018 119
0.30 0.04 3.00 s Fig. 3-147, (p. 3-189)
0.30 0.04 3.00 s
0.30 0.04 3.00 s
0.30 0.04 3.00 s
[spacer]
Setting for Delta t.
Note: This setting is ineffective unless operating mode f w. Delta f/Delta t has
been selected.
P632/EN M/R-a5-B // P632‑312‑660 7-183

P632 7 Settings
Parameter Address
Overfluxing protec‐ V/f : Enable PS x 081 210 082 210 083 210 084 210
tion
0: No Fig. 3-148, (p. 3-191)
[spacer]
This setting defines the parameter subset in which overfluxing protection is
enabled.
[spacer] V/f : V/f> (alarm ) PSx 081 211 082 211 083 211 084 211
1.05 1.00 1.20 Vnom/

fnom
[spacer]
Setting for the operate value of the warning stage.
[spacer] V/f : V/f( t)> PS x 081 212 082 212 083 212 084 212
1.10 1.05 1.50 Vnom/ Fig. 3-154, (p. 3-195)

fnom
[spacer]
Setting for the operate value of the time-dependent elements.
[spacer] V/f : V/f>> PS x 081 213 082 213 083 213 084 213
Blocked 1.05 1.60 Vnom/ Fig. 3-151, (p. 3-192)

fnom
[spacer]
Setting for the operate value of the time-independent elements.
[spacer] V/f : tV/f > PS x 081 214 082 214 083 214 084 214
1 0 10000 s
[spacer]
Setting for the operate delay of the warning stage.
[spacer] V/f : t at V/ f=1.05 PSx 081 217 082 217 083 217 084 217
72.8 1.0 6000.0 s Fig. 3-154, (p. 3-195)
18.8 1.0 6000.0 s Fig. 3-154, (p. 3-195)
8.8 1.0 6000.0 s Fig. 3-154, (p. 3-195)
5.3 1.0 6000.0 s Fig. 3-154, (p. 3-195)
3.7 1.0 6000.0 s Fig. 3-154, (p. 3-195)
2.8 1.0 6000.0 s Fig. 3-154, (p. 3-195)
2.3 1.0 6000.0 s Fig. 3-154, (p. 3-195)
1.9 1.0 6000.0 s Fig. 3-154, (p. 3-195)
1.7 1.0 6000.0 s Fig. 3-154, (p. 3-195)
7-184 P632/EN M/R-a5-B // P632‑312‑660

7 Settings P632
Parameter Address
1.5 1.0 6000.0 s Fig. 3-154, (p. 3-195)
1.4 1.0 6000.0 s Fig. 3-154, (p. 3-195)
1.3 1.0 6000.0 s Fig. 3-154, (p. 3-195)
[spacer]
The value pairs set here for overfluxing and trip time define the tripping
characteristic of the inverse-time trip stage for overfluxing protection.
The value set at V/f = 1.60 is also valid for V/f > 1.60.
[spacer] V/f : R e set t ime PSx 081 230 082 230 083 230 084 230
0 0 60000 s Fig. 3-154, (p. 3-195)
[spacer]
The value set here for the reset time defines the decreasing rate for the
overfluxing protection memory.
[spacer] V/f : tV/f >> PS x 081 229 082 229 083 229 084 229
Blocked 0 10000 s Fig. 3-151, (p. 3-192)
[spacer]
Setting for the operate delay of the definite-time trip stage.
P632/EN M/R-a5-B // P632‑312‑660 7-185

P632 7 Settings
Parameter Address
Current transformer CTS : Enable PSx 001 118 001 119 001 120 001 121
supervision
0: No Fig. 3-156, (p. 3-197)
[spacer]
This setting defines the parameter subset in which current transformer
supervision (CTS) is enabled.
[spacer] CTS : Ipos > PS x 001 111 001 115 001 116 001 117
0.10 0.05 4.00 Iref Fig. 3-158, (p. 3-199)
[spacer]
Setting for operate value Ipos> as a quantity normalized to Iref. (Ipos = positive-
sequence current)
[spacer] CTS : Ineg/ Ipos > PSx 001 102 001 103 001 104 001 105
0.05 0.05 1.00 Fig. 3-158, (p. 3-199)
[spacer] CTS : Ineg/ Ipos >> PS x 001 122 001 123 001 124 001 125
0.40 0.05 1.00 Fig. 3-158, (p. 3-199)
[spacer]
Setting for the operate value for the ratio Ineg/Ipos. (Ineg = negative-sequence
current, Ipos = positive-sequence current)
[spacer] CTS : t(Alarm ) PSx 001 126 001 127 001 128 001 129
1.00 0.00 10.00 s Fig. 3-161, (p. 3-201)

Fig. 3-162, (p. 3-201)
[spacer]
Setting for the operate delay.
[spacer] CTS : t(L atch) PS x 001 130 001 131 001 132 001 133
1.00 0.00 10.00 s Fig. 3-161, (p. 3-201)

Fig. 3-162, (p. 3-201)
[spacer]
Setting for the latching time-delay.
7-186 P632/EN M/R-a5-B // P632‑312‑660

7 Settings P632
Parameter Address
Measuring-circuit MCM _1: Enable PSx 081 038 082 038 083 038 084 038
monitoring
0: No
[spacer] MCM _2: Enable PSx 081 039 082 039 083 039 084 039
0: No
[spacer]
This setting defines the parameter subset in which measuring-circuit monitoring
is enabled.
[spacer] MCM _1: Ine g/ Ip os> P S x 081 042 082 042 083 042 084 042
0.30 0.20 1.00 Fig. 3-164, (p. 3-203)
[spacer] MCM _2: Ine g/ Ip os> P S x 081 043 082 043 083 043 084 043
0.30 0.20 1.00
[spacer]
Setting for the operate value for the ratio Ineg/Ipos.
(Ineg = negative-sequence current, Ipos = positive-sequence current)
[spacer] MCM _1: Ope rate de lay P Sx 081 046 082 046 083 046 084 046
5.00 0.10 100.00 s Fig. 3-164, (p. 3-203)
[spacer] MCM _2: Ope rate de lay P Sx 081 047 082 047 083 047 084 047
5.00 0.10 100.00 s
[spacer]
Setting for the operate delay.
P632/EN M/R-a5-B // P632‑312‑660 7-187

P632 7 Settings
7.1.3.4 Control
Parameter Address
Main function MAIN: BI active USE R 221 003
1: Yes Fig. 3-192, (p. 3-231)
[spacer]
Enabling the bay interlocking function from the local control panel.
[spacer] MAIN: SI active USER 221 002
0: No Fig. 3-192, (p. 3-231)
[spacer]
Enabling the station interlocking function from the local control panel.
[spacer] MAIN: Inp.asg. fct .block. 1 221 014
[spacer] MAIN: Inp.asg. fct .block. 2 221 022
[spacer]
Definition of the binary signals assigned to function block 1 and 2.
[spacer] MAIN: Op. delay fct . block 221 029
0 0 60 s Fig. 3-60, (p. 3-92)
[spacer]
Setting for the operate delay of the function blocks.
[spacer] MAIN: Pe rm.No.mot .dr iv e op 221 027
15 1 20
[spacer]
Setting for the permissible motor drive operations within the time interval
defined at M AIN: Mon.ti me mot .dr iv e s.
[spacer] MAIN: Mon.time mot. drive s 221 026
15 1 20 min
[spacer]
Setting for the monitoring time to monitor the number of motor drives.
[spacer] MAIN: Cool.t ime mot.drive s 221 028
3 0 10 min
[spacer]
Setting for the cooling time for motors in motor-operated switchgear.
[spacer] MAIN: Mon.time motor rel ay 221 060
0.10 0.01 2.00 s
[spacer]
Setting for the monitoring time for the motor relay.
[spacer] MAIN: CB1 max . ope r. c ap. 221 084
1 1 99
[spacer]
Setting for the maximum number of CB operations for an ARC cycle (or for a
limited time period).
7-188 P632/EN M/R-a5-B // P632‑312‑660

7 Settings P632
Parameter Address
[spacer] MAIN: CB1 re ady fct. ass ign 221 085
[spacer]
Selecting the event which, when present, will initialize the counter at
MAIN: CB1 act. oper . cap. with the value at MAIN: CB1 max. ope r.
cap..
[spacer] MAIN: DC op. delay t1 221 240
0.10 0.00 2.00 s
[spacer]
Setting the delay of the commands CMD_DC1, CMD_DC2 and CMD_DC3.
[spacer] MAIN: Cmd .end f.K200 fail. 221 111
1: Yes
[spacer]
In the case of direct motor control by motor relay K200, this parameter can be
set to Yes or No. If the K200 contacts should not have opened until the end of
the command to the motor when the set monitoring time-delay had expired
(monitoring via binary signal input –U 706, signal S IG_1: S ignal S012 EXT
as the standard setting) then the direction control contacts are opened if this
parameter is set to Yes.
If this parameter is set to No then respective fault signals (MAIN: K2 00 f ail.
cmd. end, M AI N: K2 0 0 fail. c md. st art, MAIN: DEV op.tim e
exceede d) are issued when the monitoring time-delay has expired and the
direction control contacts will remain closed. (Note: This behavior still bears the
danger of an undefined switch position!)
[spacer] MAIN: DC2/3 rele ase de lay 221 242
0.10 0.01 2.00 s
[spacer]
Setting the delay of the termination of the commands CMD_DC2 and CMD_DC3.
[spacer] MAIN: ex t.cm d.t erm. w/o P I 221 115
1: Yes
[spacer]
Select whether the command CMD_DC3 shall be terminated only by the signal
SIG_DC3, or with positive indication of the final switchgear position as well.
(Note that in either case, the termination of CMD_DC3 is delayed by the setting
MAIN: DC2/3 rele ase de lay.)
P632/EN M/R-a5-B // P632‑312‑660 7-189

P632 7 Settings
Parameter Address
External device DEV01: De signat. e xt. dev. 210 000
0: Not assigned
[spacer] DEV02: De signat. e xt. dev. 210 050
0: Not assigned
[spacer] DEV03: De signat. e xt. dev. 210 100
0: Not assigned
[spacer]
Setting for the designation of the respective external device. Either one of the
pre-defined designations or the term Device Name User may be selected. In the
latter case any text (max 4 characters) may be entered at DEV01: DEV-
Name Use r that will be used as the devices' designation. (The same holds for
DEV02 etc.)
[spacer] DEV01: DEV- Name Us er 218 101
0:
0:
0:
[spacer]
Any text (max. 4 characters) may be entered as the devices’ name which will
then be used as the designation, if the associated parameter
DEV01: De signat. e xt. dev. has been set to Device Name User. When
instead one of the pre-defined designations is selected at DE V01: Des ig nat.
ext. de v. it will be used and DE V01: D EV- Name User is ignored. A
designation with more than 4 characters is internally truncated. (The same holds
for DEV02 etc.)
[spacer] DEV01: Oper. m ode cmd. 210 024
3: Time control Fig. 3-200, (p. 3-242)
3: Time control
3: Time control
[spacer]
Selecting the operating mode of the command from long command, short
command or time control.
[spacer] DEV01: Latching ti me 210 005
0.00 0.00 5.00 s Fig. 3-196, (p. 3-237)

Fig. 3-202, (p. 3-247)
Fig. 3-203, (p. 3-247)
0.00 0.00 5.00 s
7-190 P632/EN M/R-a5-B // P632‑312‑660

7 Settings P632
Parameter Address
0.00 0.00 5.00 s
[spacer]
Setting for the time that a control command is sustained after a switchgear
position signal – “Open” or “Closed” – has been received.
[spacer] DEV01: Op.tim e swit ch. dev. 210 004
20 0 254 s Fig. 3-195, (p. 3-235)

Fig. 3-201, (p. 3-245)
Fig. 3-202, (p. 3-247)
20 0 254 s
20 0 254 s
[spacer]
Setting the operating time for switchgear (switching device).
[spacer] DEV01: Gr. as s ign. de bounc . 210 011
1: Group 1 Fig. 3-195, (p. 3-235)

Fig. 3-201, (p. 3-245)
Fig. 3-207, (p. 3-255)
1: Group 1
1: Group 1
[spacer]
Assigning the external device to one of eight groups for debouncing and chatter
suppression.
[spacer] DEV01: S tartCmdTi me superv . 210 007
Blocked 0.1 10.0 s Fig. 3-201, (p. 3-245)
Blocked 0.1 10.0 s
Blocked 0.1 10.0 s
[spacer]
This parameter allows for defining a monitoring timer for the begin of a switch
command.
After sending an Open / Close command, the corresponding timer starts. If the
switchgear unit has not reached its intermediate position after this time has
elapsed then the command is deactivated and MAIN: S tar tcmdtime
exceed. is signaled.
In the default setting blocked this monitoring is switched off. This is
recommended for switchgear units for which it is impossible to detect the
intermediate position.
[spacer] DEV01: Interm . pos. s uppr . 210 012
0: No
P632/EN M/R-a5-B // P632‑312‑660 7-191

P632 7 Settings
Parameter Address
[spacer] DEV02: Interm . p os. s uppr . 210 062
0: No
[spacer] DEV03: Interm . p os. s uppr . 210 112
0: No
[spacer]
This setting determines whether the “intermediate position” signal will be
suppressed or not, while the switchgear is operating.
[spacer] DEV01: S tat .ind .in ter m.pos. 210 027
0: No Fig. 3-195, (p. 3-235)

Fig. 3-201, (p. 3-245)
0: No
0: No
[spacer]
This setting determines whether the actual status will be signaled with a 5 s
delay after the “Faulty position” signal is issued.
[spacer] DEV01: Inp.asg . s w.tr . pl ug 210 014

Fig. 3-201, (p. 3-245)
[spacer]
Definition of the binary signal that is used to signal the position (“plugged-in” /
“unplugged”) of the switch truck plug.
[spacer] DEV01: With ge n. trip cmd.1 210 021
0: No Fig. 3-199, (p. 3-241)
0: No
0: No
[spacer]
This setting specifies whether the circuit breaker will be opened by “general trip
command 1” of the protection function.
Note: This setting is only visible (active) for external devices that are defined as
“circuit breakers”. This definition is included in the bay type definitions.
0: No Fig. 3-199, (p. 3-241)
0: No
7-192 P632/EN M/R-a5-B // P632‑312‑660

7 Settings P632
Parameter Address
0: No
[spacer]
This setting specifies whether the circuit breaker will be opened by “general trip
command 2” of the protection function.
[spacer] DEV01: With close c md. /pr ot 210 023
0: No Fig. 3-199, (p. 3-241)
0: No
0: No
[spacer]
This setting specifies whether the circuit breaker will be closed by the “close
command” of the protection function.
[spacer] DEV01: Inp.asg .e l.ctrl.open 210 019
[spacer]
This setting defines the binary signal that will be used as the control signal to
move the switchgear unit to the open position.
Note: Only signals that are defined in the DEVxx function groups can be
selected.
[spacer] DEV01: Inp.asg .e l.ctr.clos e 210 020
[spacer]
This setting defines the binary signal that will be used as the control signal to
move the switchgear unit to the “Closed” position.
Note: Only signals that are defined in the DEVxx function groups can be
selected.
[spacer] DEV01: Block cmd ope n 218 120
P632/EN M/R-a5-B // P632‑312‑660 7-193

P632 7 Settings
Parameter Address
[spacer]
Select whether open commands for the switchgear unit shall be blocked.
[spacer] DEV01: Block cmd clos e 218 160
[spacer]
Select whether close commands for the switchgear unit shall be blocked.
[spacer] DEV01: Oper.count .l imit 218 211
Blocked 1 65000
Blocked 1 65000
Blocked 1 65000
[spacer]
Setting a limit value for the number of switching commands for the respective
switchgear unit.
[spacer] DEV01: Inp. as g. e nd Ope n 210 015
[spacer]
This setting defines the binary signal that will be used to terminate the “Open”
command.
[spacer] DEV01: Inp. as g. e nd Close 210 016
[spacer]
This setting defines the binary signal that will be used to terminate the “Close”
command.
7-194 P632/EN M/R-a5-B // P632‑312‑660

7 Settings P632
Parameter Address
[spacer] DEV01: Open w/o s tat. int e rl 210 025
0: No Fig. 3-198, (p. 3-240)
0: No
0: No
[spacer]
This setting specifies whether switching to “Open” position is permitted without
a check by the station interlock function.
[spacer] DEV01: Clos e w/ o stat . int . 210 026
0: No Fig. 3-198, (p. 3-240)
0: No
0: No
[spacer]
This setting specifies whether switching to “Closed” position is permitted
without a check by the station interlock function.
[spacer] DEV01: Fct.as sig.BI wS I open 210 039
[spacer]
This setting defines which output will issue the “Open” enable to the interlocking
logic when there is “bay interlock with substation interlock”.
Note: The interlock conditions for bay interlock with station interlock are
included in the bay type definitions (see “List of Bay Types” in the Appendix).
If the interlock condition is to be modified, this is possible by modifying the
corresponding Boolean equation in the interlocking logic or by defining a new
interlocking logic equation. Only in the latter case is it necessary to change the
function assignment.
[spacer] DEV01: Fct.as sig.BI wS I clos 210 040
P632/EN M/R-a5-B // P632‑312‑660 7-195

P632 7 Settings
Parameter Address
[spacer]
This setting defines which output will issue the “Close” enable to the interlocking
logic when there is “bay interlock with substation interlock”.
Note: The interlock conditions for bay interlock with station interlock are
[spacer] DEV01: Fct.as g.BI w/ o S I op 210 041
[spacer]
This setting defines which output will issue the “Open” enable to the interlocking
logic when there is “bay interlock without substation interlock”.
Note: The interlock conditions for bay interlock without station interlock are
[spacer] DEV01: Fct.as g.BI w/ o S I c l 210 042
[spacer]
This setting defines which output will issue the “Close” enable to the interlocking
logic when there is “bay interlock without substation interlock”.
Note: The interlock conditions for bay interlock without station interlock are
7-196 P632/EN M/R-a5-B // P632‑312‑660

7 Settings P632
Parameter Address
Interlocking logic ILOCK: Cycle t int erl.che ck 221 104
Blocked 0.1 10.0 s
[spacer]
The interlock conditions are also transmitted together with reporting in the
“phase 2” of the IEC 61850 communication protocol. Therefore it is a
requirement that these interlock conditions are cyclically checked and not, as
with software versions that still implement “phase 1”, only with the request for a
switching operation.
This parameter sets the cycle time, after which a check of the interlock
conditions is carried out.
As additional processor capacity must be provided for each of these checks it
must be ensured that a favorable compromise is found for the cycle time setting
value. On the one hand it is desirable to select a cycle time value which is as
short as possible so that changes in the interlock conditions are updated without
any notable delays, but on the other hand this cycle time value should not be so
short that the P632 will be under too much strain. As the CPU load of the P632 is
dependent on the total number of function groups having been configured it is
not possible to suggest a generally acceptable cycle time value.
[spacer] ILOCK: R se t ILOC K violati on 221 123
Blocked 1 10 s Fig. 3-193, (p. 3-232)
[spacer]
The interlock violation signal (221 018) M AIN: Interlock equ. viol . will be
automatically reset after the time period set here. (The default value Blocked
disables the automatic reset.)
[spacer] ILOCK: Fct.assignm. outp.0 1 250 000
P632/EN M/R-a5-B // P632‑312‑660 7-197

P632 7 Settings
Parameter Address
[spacer] ILOCK: Fct.assig nm. outp.1 0 250 009
7-198 P632/EN M/R-a5-B // P632‑312‑660

7 Settings P632
Parameter Address
[spacer]
Definition of the interlock conditions.
P632/EN M/R-a5-B // P632‑312‑660 7-199

P632 7 Settings
7-200 P632/EN M/R-a5-B // P632‑312‑660

P632
8 Information and Control Functions
8.1 Operation
The P632 generates a large number of signals, processes binary input signals,
and acquires measured data during fault-free operation of the protected object
as well as fault-related data. A number of counters are available for statistical
purposes. This information can be read out from the integrated local control
panel or via the operating program.
All this information can be found in the “Operation” and “Events” folders in the
menu tree.
Note
Detailed information about all parameters, including complete selection tables and
IEC 60870‑5‑103 protocol properties, are separately available as a set of interlinked
PDF files for user-friendly navigation, packed in one ZIP archive named
DataModelExplorer_P632_en_P01.zip.
A list of the Logical Nodes that have been implemented for the IEC 61850 protocol
can be found in a separate document.
P632/EN M/R-a5-B // P632‑312‑660 8-1

P632 8 Information and Control Functions
8.1.1 Cyclic Values
8.1.1.1 Me as ur ed Op erating D at a
Parameter Address
Measured data input MEASI: Curr e nt IDC

004 134
Not measured 0.00 24.00 mA Fig. 3-33, (p. 3-53)
[spacer]
Display of the input current.
[spacer] MEASI: Curr e nt IDC p.u. 004 135
Not measured 0.00 1.20 IDC,nom Fig. 3-33, (p. 3-53)
[spacer]
Display of the input current referred to IDC,nom.
[spacer] MEASI: Curr . IDC,lin. p.u. 004 136
Not measured 0.00 1.20 IDC,nom Fig. 3-33, (p. 3-53)
[spacer]
Display of the linearized input current referred to IDC,nom.
[spacer] MEASI: S caled value IDC, lin 004 180
Not measured -32000 32000 Fig. 3-34, (p. 3-54)
[spacer]
Display of the scaled linearized value.
[spacer] MEASI: T emp eratur e 004 133
Not measured -40.0 215.0 °C Fig. 3-35, (p. 3-55)
[spacer]
Display of the temperature measured at the “PT 100” temperature input on the
analog p/c board.
[spacer] MEASI: T emp eratur e p.u. 004 221
Not measured -0.40 2.15 100°C Fig. 3-35, (p. 3-55)
[spacer]
Display of the temperature measured at the “PT 100” temperature input on the
analog p/c board referred to 100°C.
[spacer] MEASI: T emp eratur e Tmax 004 233
Not measured -40.0 215.0 °C Fig. 3-35, (p. 3-55)
[spacer]
Display of the maximum temperature measured at the “PT 100” temperature
input on the analog p/c board.
8-2 P632/EN M/R-a5-B // P632‑312‑660

8 Information and Control Functions P632
Parameter Address
Measured data MEASO: Curr ent A- 1 005 100
output
0.00 0.00 20.00 mA Fig. 3-43, (p. 3-69)
[spacer] MEASO: Curr ent A- 2 005 099
0.00 0.00 20.00 mA
[spacer]
Display of the current on the analog measured data output (A1: channel 1; A2:
channel 2).
P632/EN M/R-a5-B // P632‑312‑660 8-3

Parameter Address
Main function MAIN: Date 003 090
1997-01-01 1997-01 2098-11 dd.mm.yy Fig. 3-72, (p. 3-101)

-01 -08
[spacer]
Date display. The date can also be set here. The centuries are not displayed.
The supported dates range from January 1st, 1997, until November 7th, 2098.
[spacer] MAIN: Tim e of day 003 091
00:00:00 00:00:00 24:00:00 hh:mm:ss Fig. 3-72, (p. 3-101)
[spacer]
Display of the time of day. The time can also be set here.
[spacer] MAIN: Tim e s witch ing 003 095
0: Standard time Fig. 3-72, (p. 3-101)
[spacer]
Setting for standard time or daylight saving time.
This setting is necessary in order to avoid misinterpretation of the times
assigned to signals and event data that can be read out through the PC or
[spacer] MAIN: Fre que ncy f 004 040
Not measured 40.00 70.00 Hz Fig. 3-54, (p. 3-85)
[spacer]
Display of system frequency.
[spacer] MAIN: Curr. IP,m ax,a prim. 005 101
Not measured 0 65000 A Fig. 3-51, (p. 3-83)
[spacer]
Display of the maximum phase current as a primary quantity, end a.
[spacer] MAIN: IP,max p rim.,delay a 005 162
[spacer]
Display of the delayed maximum current of end a as a primary quantity.
[spacer] MAIN: IP,max p rim.st ore d a 005 161
[spacer]
Display of the delayed stored maximum phase current of end a as a primary
quantity.
[spacer] MAIN: Curr. IP,m ax,b pri m. 005 102
Not measured 0 65000 A
[spacer]
Display of the maximum phase current as a primary quantity, end b.
[spacer] MAIN: IP,max p rim.,delay b 006 162
[spacer]
Display of the delayed maximum current of end b as a primary quantity.
8-4 P632/EN M/R-a5-B // P632‑312‑660

Parameter Address
[spacer] MAIN: IP,max p rim.st ore d b 006 161
[spacer]
Display of the delayed stored maximum phase current of end b as a primary
quantity.
[spacer] MAIN: Curr. IP,min,a pr im. 005 104
[spacer]
Display of the minimum phase current of end a as a primary quantity.
[spacer] MAIN: Curr. IP,min,b pr im. 005 105
[spacer]
Display of the minimum phase current of end b as a primary quantity.
[spacer] MAIN: Current IA,a prim. 005 021
[spacer]
Display of phase current A, end a, as a primary quantity.
[spacer] MAIN: Current IB,a pr im. 006 021
[spacer]
Display of phase current B as a primary quantity, end a.
[spacer] MAIN: Current IC,a prim. 007 021
[spacer]
Display of phase current C as a primary quantity, end a.
[spacer] MAIN: Current IA,b pri m. 005 022
[spacer]
Display of phase current A, end b, as a primary quantity.
[spacer] MAIN: Current IB,b pr im. 006 022
[spacer]
Display of phase current B as a primary quantity, end b.
[spacer] MAIN: Current IC,b pri m. 007 022
[spacer]
Display of phase current C as a primary quantity, end b.
[spacer] MAIN: Current Ine g a pr im. 005 125
[spacer] MAIN: Current Ine g b pr im. 005 129
[spacer]
Display of the negative-sequence current of the respective end as a primary
quantity.
P632/EN M/R-a5-B // P632‑312‑660 8-5

Parameter Address
[spacer] MAIN: Current Ipos a prim. 005 127
[spacer] MAIN: Current Ipos b pr im. 005 134
[spacer]
Display of the positive-sequence current of the respective end as a primary
quantity.
[spacer] MAIN: Current IN,a pri m. 005 121
[spacer] MAIN: Current IN,b pri m. 005 122
[spacer]
Display of the residual current calculated by the P632 from the sum of the phase
currents (of the respective end) as a primary quantity.
[spacer] MAIN: Current IY,a pr im. 005 131
[spacer] MAIN: Current IY,b pr im. 005 132
[spacer]
Display of the current value as a primary quantity measured by the P632 at the
T14, T24 or T34 transformers.
[spacer] MAIN: Voltage V prim. 005 018
Not measured 0.0 2500.0 kV Fig. 3-53, (p. 3-85)
[spacer]
Display of the voltage measured by the P632, as a primary quantity.
[spacer] MAIN: Curr. IP,m ax,a p.u. 005 111
Not measured 0.000 25.000 Inom Fig. 3-51, (p. 3-83)
[spacer] MAIN: Curr. IP,m ax,b p.u. 005 112
Not measured 0.000 25.000 Inom
[spacer]
Display of the maximum phase current (of the respective end), referred to Inom.
[spacer] MAIN: IP,max p .u.,delay a 005 163
[spacer] MAIN: IP,max p .u.,delay b 006 163
[spacer]
Display of the delayed maximum phase current (of the respective end a)
referred to Inom.
[spacer] MAIN: IP,max p .u.,st or ed a 005 160
8-6 P632/EN M/R-a5-B // P632‑312‑660

Parameter Address
[spacer] MAIN: IP,max p .u.,st or ed b 006 160
[spacer]
Display of the delayed stored maximum phase current (for the respective end),
referred to Inom.
[spacer] MAIN: Curr. IP,min,a p. u. 005 107
[spacer] MAIN: Curr. IP,min,b p.u. 005 108
[spacer]
Display of the minimum phase current (for the respective end) as referred to
Inom.
[spacer] MAIN: Current IA,a p.u. 005 031
[spacer] MAIN: Current IB,a p.u. 006 031
[spacer] MAIN: Current IC,a p.u. 007 031
[spacer] MAIN: Current IA,b p.u. 005 032
[spacer] MAIN: Current IB,b p.u. 006 032
[spacer] MAIN: Current IC,b p.u. 007 032
[spacer]
Display of phase current A/B/C for the respective end, referred to In.
[spacer] MAIN: Current Ine g a p.u. 005 126
[spacer] MAIN: Current Ine g b p.u. 005 130
[spacer]
Display of the negative-sequence current of the respective end, referred to Inom.
[spacer] MAIN: Current Ipos a p.u. 005 128
[spacer] MAIN: Current Ipos b p.u. 005 135
[spacer]
Display of the positive-sequence current (for the respective end), referred to
Inom.
[spacer] MAIN: Current IN,a p.u. 005 141
P632/EN M/R-a5-B // P632‑312‑660 8-7

Parameter Address
[spacer] MAIN: Current IN,b p.u. 005 142
[spacer]
Display of the residual current calculated by the P632 from the sum of the phase
currents of the respective end, referred to Inom.
[spacer] MAIN: Current IY,a p.u. 005 151
[spacer] MAIN: Current IY,b p.u. 005 152
[spacer]
Display of the current value as a quantity referred to Inom measured by the P632
at the T14, T24 or T34 transformers.
[spacer] MAIN: Voltage V p.u. 005 019
Not measured 0.000 25.000 Vnom Fig. 3-53, (p. 3-85)
[spacer]
Display of the voltage measured by the P632, referred to Vnom.
[spacer] MAIN: Angle phi AB , end a 005 089
Not measured -180.0 180.0 ° Fig. 3-55, (p. 3-86)
[spacer]
Display of the phase shift between A-B, end a.
[spacer] MAIN: Angle phi BC, end a 006 089
[spacer]
Display of the phase shift between B-C, end a.
[spacer] MAIN: Angle phi CA, e nd a 007 089
[spacer]
Display of the phase shift between C-A, end a.
[spacer] MAIN: Angle phi AB , end b 005 092
[spacer]
Display of the phase shift between A-B, end b.
[spacer] MAIN: Angle phi BC, end b 006 092
[spacer]
Display of the phase shift between B-C, end b.
[spacer] MAIN: Angle phi CA, e nd b 007 092
[spacer]
Display of the phase shift between C-A, end b.
[spacer] MAIN: Angle phi A, e nd a- b 005 090
[spacer]
Display of the phase shift between ends a and b for phase A.
8-8 P632/EN M/R-a5-B // P632‑312‑660

Parameter Address
[spacer] MAIN: Angle phi B, end a- b 006 090
[spacer]
Display of the phase shift between ends a and b for phase B.
[spacer] MAIN: Angle phi C, e nd a-b 007 090
[spacer]
Display of the phase shift between ends a and b for phase C.
[spacer] MAIN: Angle phi NY , end a 005 077
[spacer] MAIN: Angle phi NY , end b 005 078
[spacer]
Display of the phase displacement between the residual current calculated by
the P632 from the three phase currents and the current measured at the T14,
T24 or T34 transformer.
P632/EN M/R-a5-B // P632‑312‑660 8-9

Parameter Address
Differential protec‐ DIFF: Dif f. curre nt 1 005 080
tion
Not measured 0.000 40.000 Iref Fig. 3-105, (p. 3-143)
[spacer]
Display of differential current, measuring system 1, referred to Iref.
[spacer] DIFF: R e strain. curr ent 1 005 081
[spacer]
Display of restraining current, measuring system 1, referred to Iref.
[spacer] DIFF: Dif f. curre nt 2 006 080
[spacer]
[spacer]
[spacer] DIFF: Dif f. curre nt 3 007 080
[spacer]
Display of the differential current for measuring system 1, 2 or 3, respectively,
referred to Iref.
[spacer]
Display of the restraining current for measuring system 1, 2 or 3, respectively,
referred to Iref.
Parameter Address
Ground differential REF_1: Diff. current , RE F _1 008 080
protection
[spacer] REF_2: Diff. current , RE F _2 008 070
Not measured 0.00 20.00 Iref
[spacer]
Display of the differential current referred to Iref.
[spacer] REF_1: Res train.curr.,RE F_1 008 081
[spacer] REF_2: Res train.curr.,RE F_2 008 071
Not measured 0.00 20.00 Iref
[spacer]
Display of the restraining current referred to Iref.
8-10 P632/EN M/R-a5-B // P632‑312‑660

Parameter Address
Thermal overload THRM 1: S tat us r eplic a, TH1 004 150
protection
Not measured -25000 25000 % Fig. 3-139, (p. 3-181)
[spacer]
Display of the buffer content of the thermal overload protection function.
[spacer] THRM 1: Object te mpe rat .,TH1 004 151
Not measured -40 300 °C Fig. 3-139, (p. 3-181)
[spacer]
Display of the temperature of the protected object as determined by function
THRM1.
[spacer] THRM 1: Coolant t emp. TH1 004 154
[spacer]
Display of the coolant temperature of the protected object.
Depending on the setting at THRM1: Se le ct C TA PS x for coolant
temperature acquisition, one of the following values will be displayed:
● THR M1: S e le ct C TA P Sx = Default temp. value: Display of the set
temperature value.
● T HR M1: S ele ct CT A PS x = From PT100: Display of the temperature
measured by the resistance thermometer.
● THRM 1: Se le ct C TA P Sx = From 20 mA input: Display of the
temperature measured via the 20 mA input.
[spacer] THRM 1: Pre-tr ip t . le ft ,T H1 004 153
Not measured 0.0 1000.0 min Fig. 3-139, (p. 3-181)
[spacer]
Display of the time remaining before the thermal overload protection function
THRM1 will reach the tripping threshold.
[spacer] THRM 1: S tat . re pl., p. u.T H1 004 204
Not measured -25.00 25.00 Fig. 3-139, (p. 3-181)
[spacer]
Display of the buffer content of the thermal overload protection function THRM1
referred to a buffer content of 100%.
[spacer] THRM 1: Object te mp. p.u. 1 004 205
[spacer]
Display of the temperature of the protected object referred to 100°C.
[spacer] THRM 1: Coolant t emp. p.u. 1 004 206
[spacer]
Display of the coolant temperature of the protected object referred to 100°C.
P632/EN M/R-a5-B // P632‑312‑660 8-11

Parameter Address
[spacer] THRM 1: Tem p. offs e t re pl. 1 004 170
[spacer]
Display of the additional reserve if the coolant temperature is taken into
account. This display is relevant if the coolant temperature has been set to a
value below the maximum permissible coolant temperature or, in other words, if
the thermal model has been shifted downwards.
If, on the other hand, the coolant temperature and the maximum permissible
coolant temperature have been set to the same value, then the coolant
temperature is not taken into account and the characteristic is a function of the
current only. The additional reserve amounts to 0 in this case.
Parameter Address
Overfluxing protec‐ V/f : Excitation V/f p.u. 004 220
tion
[spacer]
Display of the V/f ratio, as a quantity referred to Vnom/fnom.
[spacer] V/f : S t at us replica in % 004 222
Not measured 0 100 % Fig. 3-154, (p. 3-195)
[spacer]
Display of the buffer content in % of the overfluxing protection function.
[spacer] V/f : S t at us replica p. u. 004 223
[spacer]
Display of the buffer content as a quantity referred to 100% of the buffer
content of the overfluxing protection function.
Parameter Address
Binary counts COUNT : Count 1 217 100
0 0 65535 Fig. 3-211, (p. 3-260)
[spacer] COUNT : Count 2 217 080
0 0 65535
0 0 65535
0 0 65535
[spacer]
Display of the updated count.
Note: The count value can be set here (Preload-Function).
8-12 P632/EN M/R-a5-B // P632‑312‑660

8.1.1.2 Physical St ate Sign als
Parameter Address
Generic Object GOOSE: Input 1 st ate 106 200
Orientated
Substation Events
0: 0
[spacer] GOOSE: Input 2 st ate 106 201
0: 0
0: 0
0: 0
0: 0
0: 0
0: 0
0: 0
0: 0
[spacer] GOOSE: Input 10 st at e 106 209
0: 0
0: 0
0: 0
0: 0
0: 0
0: 0
0: 0
0: 0
P632/EN M/R-a5-B // P632‑312‑660 8-13

Parameter Address
0: 0
0: 0
0: 0
0: 0
0: 0
0: 0
0: 0
0: 0
0: 0
0: 0
0: 0
0: 0
0: 0
0: 0
0: 0
0: 0
0: 0
0: 0
0: 0
8-14 P632/EN M/R-a5-B // P632‑312‑660

Parameter Address
0: 0
0: 0
0: 0
0: 0
0: 0
0: 0
0: 0
0: 0
0: 0
0: 0
0: 0
0: 0
0: 0
0: 0
0: 0
0: 0
0: 0
0: 0
0: 0
P632/EN M/R-a5-B // P632‑312‑660 8-15

Parameter Address
0: 0
0: 0
0: 0
0: 0
0: 0
0: 0
0: 0
0: 0
0: 0
0: 0
0: 0
0: 0
0: 0
0: 0
0: 0
0: 0
0: 0
0: 0
0: 0
8-16 P632/EN M/R-a5-B // P632‑312‑660

Parameter Address
0: 0
0: 0
0: 0
0: 0
0: 0
0: 0
0: 0
0: 0
0: 0
0: 0
0: 0
0: 0
0: 0
0: 0
0: 0
0: 0
0: 0
0: 0
0: 0
P632/EN M/R-a5-B // P632‑312‑660 8-17

Parameter Address
0: 0
0: 0
0: 0
0: 0
0: 0
0: 0
[spacer] GOOSE: Input 100 stat e 112 167
0: 0
0: 0
0: 0
0: 0
0: 0
0: 0
0: 0
0: 0
0: 0
0: 0
0: 0
0: 0
0: 0
8-18 P632/EN M/R-a5-B // P632‑312‑660

Parameter Address
[spacer] GOOSE: Input 11 3 stat e 112 180
0: 0
0: 0
0: 0
0: 0
0: 0
0: 0
0: 0
0: 0
0: 0
0: 0
0: 0
0: 0
0: 0
0: 0
0: 0
0: 0
[spacer]
Display of the virtual binary GOOSE input state.
P632/EN M/R-a5-B // P632‑312‑660 8-19

Parameter Address
Configurable func‐ F_KEY: St ate F1 080 122
tion keys
0: "Off"
[spacer] F_KEY: St ate F2 080 123
0: "Off"
0: "Off"
0: "Off"
0: "Off"
0: "Off"
[spacer]
The state of the function keys is displayed as follows:
● Without function: No functions are assigned to the function key.
● "Off": The function key is in the “Off” position.
● "On": The function key is in the “On” position.
8-20 P632/EN M/R-a5-B // P632‑312‑660

Parameter Address
Binary input INP: State U 701 152 108
0: "Low"
[spacer] INP: State U 702 152 111
0: "Low"
0: "Low"
0: "Low"
0: "Low"
0: "Low"
0: "Low"
0: "Low"
0: "Low"
0: "Low"
0: "Low"
0: "Low"
0: "Low"
0: "Low"
0: "Low"
0: "Low"
0: "Low"
0: "Low"
0: "Low"
P632/EN M/R-a5-B // P632‑312‑660 8-21

Parameter Address
0: "Low"
0: "Low"
0: "Low"
0: "Low"
0: "Low"
0: "Low"
0: "Low"
0: "Low"
0: "Low"
0: "Low"
0: "Low"
0: "Low"
0: "Low"
0: "Low"
0: "Low"
0: "Low"
0: "Low"
0: "Low"
0: "Low"
8-22 P632/EN M/R-a5-B // P632‑312‑660

Parameter Address
[spacer] INP: State U 100 5 152 174
0: "Low"
0: "Low"
0: "Low"
0: "Low"
0: "Low"
0: "Low"
0: "Low"
0: "Low"
0: "Low"
0: "Low"
0: "Low"
0: "Low"
0: "Low"
0: "Low"
0: "Low"
0: "Low"
0: "Low"
P632/EN M/R-a5-B // P632‑312‑660 8-23

Parameter Address
0: "Low"
[spacer]
The state of the binary signal inputs is displayed as follows:
● Without function: No functions are assigned to the binary signal input.
● "Low": Not energized.
● "High": Energized.
This display appears regardless of the setting for the binary signal input mode.
8-24 P632/EN M/R-a5-B // P632‑312‑660

Parameter Address
Binary and analog OUTP: St ate K 701 150 144
output
0: Inactive
[spacer] OUTP: St ate K 702 150 147
0: Inactive
0: Inactive
0: Inactive
0: Inactive
0: Inactive
0: Inactive
0: Inactive
0: Inactive
0: Inactive
0: Inactive
0: Inactive
0: Inactive
0: Inactive
0: Inactive
0: Inactive
0: Inactive
0: Inactive
P632/EN M/R-a5-B // P632‑312‑660 8-25

Parameter Address
0: Inactive
0: Inactive
0: Inactive
0: Inactive
0: Inactive
0: Inactive
[spacer] OUTP: St ate K 100 1 150 216
0: Inactive
0: Inactive
0: Inactive
0: Inactive
0: Inactive
0: Inactive
0: Inactive
0: Inactive
0: Inactive
0: Inactive
0: Inactive
0: Inactive
0: Inactive
8-26 P632/EN M/R-a5-B // P632‑312‑660

Parameter Address
0: Inactive
0: Inactive
0: Inactive
0: Inactive
0: Inactive
0: Inactive
0: Inactive
0: Inactive
0: Inactive
0: Inactive
0: Inactive
0: Inactive
0: Inactive
0: Inactive
0: Inactive
[spacer]
The state of the output relays is displayed as follows:
● Without function: No functions are assigned to the output relay.
● Inactive: The output relay is not energized.
● Active: The output relay is energized.
This display appears regardless of the operating mode set for the output relay.
P632/EN M/R-a5-B // P632‑312‑660 8-27

Parameter Address
LED indicators LED: S tat e H 1 g reen 085 180
1: Active
[spacer] LED: S tat e H 2 yell. 085 000
0: Inactive
[spacer] LED: S tat e H 3 yell. 085 003
0: Inactive
[spacer] LED: S tat e H 4 red 085 006
0: Inactive
0: Inactive
0: Inactive
0: Inactive
0: Inactive
0: Inactive
[spacer] LED: S tat e H10 red 085 024
0: Inactive
0: Inactive
0: Inactive
0: Inactive
0: Inactive
0: Inactive
0: Inactive
[spacer] LED: S tat e H17 red. 085 181
0: Inactive
0: Inactive
0: Inactive
8-28 P632/EN M/R-a5-B // P632‑312‑660

Parameter Address
[spacer] LED: S tat e H20 re d 085 136
0: Inactive
0: Inactive
0: Inactive
0: Inactive
[spacer] LED: S tat e H 4 green 085 056
0: Inactive
0: Inactive
0: Inactive
0: Inactive
0: Inactive
0: Inactive
[spacer] LED: S tat e H10 gr e en 085 074
0: Inactive
0: Inactive
0: Inactive
0: Inactive
0: Inactive
0: Inactive
0: Inactive
0: Inactive
0: Inactive
P632/EN M/R-a5-B // P632‑312‑660 8-29

Parameter Address
0: Inactive
0: Inactive
0: Inactive
0: Inactive
[spacer]
The state of the LED indicators is displayed as follows:
● Inactive: The LED indicator is not energized.
● Active: The LED indicator is energized.
8-30 P632/EN M/R-a5-B // P632‑312‑660

8.1.1.3 Logic St ate S ignals
Parameter Address
Cyber Security CS: HM I pincode changed 180 100
0: No
[spacer]
The signal shows the PIN code of HMI is changed.
[spacer] CS: COMM pas s w. change 180 101
0: No
[spacer]
The signal shows the password of communication interface is changed.
[spacer] CS: HM I pincode invalid 180 102
0: No
[spacer]
The signal shows the PIN code via HMI is invalid.
[spacer] CS: COMM pas s w. inv alid 180 103
0: No
[spacer]
The signal shows the password via communication interface is invalid.
[spacer] CS: re set tok en ge ne rat e 180 104
0: No
[spacer]
The signal shows the reset token is generated.
[spacer] CS: RBAC re s et s uc ce ss 180 105
0: No
[spacer]
Display when the RBAC reset is successful.
[spacer] CS: RBAC re s et failed 180 106
0: No
[spacer]
Display when the RBAC reset is failed.
[spacer] CS: Us e r01 block e d 180 107
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
P632/EN M/R-a5-B // P632‑312‑660 8-31

Parameter Address
[spacer] CS: Us e r07 blocke d 180 113
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
[spacer]
The signal shows the user is blocked.
[spacer] CS: HM I logged in 180 122
0: No
[spacer]
The signal shows the user is logged in via HMI.
[spacer] CS: COMMS logge d in 180 123
0: No
[spacer]
The signal shows the user is logged in via communication interface.
8-32 P632/EN M/R-a5-B // P632‑312‑660

Parameter Address
Local control panel LOC: Ed it mode 080 111
0: No
[spacer]
Signal that the protection unit is in edit mode. As a standard this signal is linked
to LED: Fct.as sig. H1 7 r ed.
[spacer] LOC: Tr ig. m enu jmp 1 E XT 030 230
0: No
[spacer]
Signal that menu jump list 1 is being triggered. (See the corresponding setting
at LOC: Fct. menu jmp lis t 1.)
[spacer] LOC: Tr ig. m enu jmp 2 E XT 030 231
0: No
[spacer]
Signal that menu jump list 2 is being triggered. (See the corresponding setting
at LOC: Fct. menu jmp lis t 2.)
[spacer] LOC: Illum ination on EX T 037 101
1: Yes
[spacer]
This signal shows that the backlighting for the front panel LCD is switched on.
[spacer] LOC: Loc.acc.bl ock .act iv e 221 005
0: No Fig. 3-8, (p. 3-12)
[spacer] LOC: Re m.acc.block. act ive 221 004
0: No Fig. 3-8, (p. 3-12)
P632/EN M/R-a5-B // P632‑312‑660 8-33

Parameter Address
“Logical” COMM 1: Com m and bloc k. E X T 003 173
communication
interface 1
0: No
[spacer] COMM 1: Sig./ meas. block EX T 037 074
0: No
[spacer] COMM 1: Com m and bloc king 003 174
0: No Fig. 3-10, (p. 3-16)
[spacer] COMM 1: Sig./ meas.v al.block. 037 075
0: No Fig. 3-11, (p. 3-17)

Fig. 3-12, (p. 3-18)
Fig. 3-13, (p. 3-19)
[spacer] COMM 1: IEC 870-5-10 3 003 219
0: No
[spacer] COMM 1: IEC 870-5-10 1 003 218
0: No
[spacer] COMM 1: IEC 870-5,IL S 003 221
0: No
[spacer] COMM 1: MODB US 003 223
0: No
[spacer] COMM 1: DNP3 003 230
0: No
[spacer] COMM 1: COUR IER 103 041
0: No
8-34 P632/EN M/R-a5-B // P632‑312‑660

Parameter Address
IEC 61850 IEC: Multip le ctr l le ve l 221 124
Communication
0: No
[spacer]
Display when control from multiple levels is allowed, i.e. (225 208) L OC: Fc t.
ass ig n. L/R k e y is set to R & L <-> L, and relay is in 'R&L' mode.
[spacer] IEC: Port A/ B blocke d 104 075
0: No
[spacer]
Display when Port A for SEB or Port A&B for REB is blocked.
[spacer] IEC: Port C block ed 104 076
0: No
[spacer]
Display when Port C is blocked.
[spacer] IEC: Com m . link fault y 105 180
0: No Fig. 3-20, (p. 3-28)
[spacer]
Display when an Ethernet module is not operational, i.e. if the MAC address is
missing or there is a non-plausible parameter setting.
[spacer] IEC: Control res e rv at io n 221 082
0: No
[spacer]
Display when a client has made a reservation to control an external device
(“select” for control by control mode “select before operate”).
[spacer] IEC: Control b lock e d 221 126
0: No Fig. 3-20, (p. 3-28)
[spacer]
Display when control via communication is blocked, i.e. (221 125) IEC: Ctrl
blocke d us er is set to Yes.
P632/EN M/R-a5-B // P632‑312‑660 8-35

Parameter Address
Generic Object GOOSE: Ext .De v01 posit ion 109 000
Orientated
Substation Events
0: Interm. pos.
[spacer] GOOSE: Ext .De v02 posit ion 109 005
0: Interm. pos.
0: Interm. pos.
0: Interm. pos.
0: Interm. pos.
0: Interm. pos.
0: Interm. pos.
0: Interm. pos.
0: Interm. pos.
0: Interm. pos.
0: Interm. pos.
0: Interm. pos.
0: Interm. pos.
0: Interm. pos.
0: Interm. pos.
0: Interm. pos.
0: Interm. pos.
0: Interm. pos.
8-36 P632/EN M/R-a5-B // P632‑312‑660

Parameter Address
0: Interm. pos.
0: Interm. pos.
0: Interm. pos.
0: Interm. pos.
0: Interm. pos.
0: Interm. pos.
0: Interm. pos.
0: Interm. pos.
0: Interm. pos.
0: Interm. pos.
0: Interm. pos.
0: Interm. pos.
0: Interm. pos.
0: Interm. pos.
0: Interm. pos.
0: Interm. pos.
0: Interm. pos.
0: Interm. pos.
0: Interm. pos.
P632/EN M/R-a5-B // P632‑312‑660 8-37

Parameter Address
0: Interm. pos.
0: Interm. pos.
0: Interm. pos.
0: Interm. pos.
0: Interm. pos.
0: Interm. pos.
0: Interm. pos.
0: Interm. pos.
0: Interm. pos.
0: Interm. pos.
0: Interm. pos.
0: Interm. pos.
0: Interm. pos.
0: Interm. pos.
0: Interm. pos.
0: Interm. pos.
0: Interm. pos.
0: Interm. pos.
0: Interm. pos.
8-38 P632/EN M/R-a5-B // P632‑312‑660

Parameter Address
0: Interm. pos.
0: Interm. pos.
0: Interm. pos.
0: Interm. pos.
0: Interm. pos.
0: Interm. pos.
0: Interm. pos.
0: Interm. pos.
0: Interm. pos.
0: Interm. pos.
0: Interm. pos.
0: Interm. pos.
0: Interm. pos.
0: Interm. pos.
0: Interm. pos.
0: Interm. pos.
0: Interm. pos.
0: Interm. pos.
0: Interm. pos.
P632/EN M/R-a5-B // P632‑312‑660 8-39

Parameter Address
0: Interm. pos.
0: Interm. pos.
0: Interm. pos.
0: Interm. pos.
0: Interm. pos.
0: Interm. pos.
0: Interm. pos.
0: Interm. pos.
0: Interm. pos.
0: Interm. pos.
0: Interm. pos.
0: Interm. pos.
0: Interm. pos.
0: Interm. pos.
0: Interm. pos.
0: Interm. pos.
0: Interm. pos.
0: Interm. pos.
0: Interm. pos.
8-40 P632/EN M/R-a5-B // P632‑312‑660

Parameter Address
0: Interm. pos.
0: Interm. pos.
0: Interm. pos.
0: Interm. pos.
0: Interm. pos.
[spacer] GOOSE: Ext .De v100 positi on 114 012
0: Interm. pos.
0: Interm. pos.
0: Interm. pos.
0: Interm. pos.
0: Interm. pos.
0: Interm. pos.
0: Interm. pos.
0: Interm. pos.
0: Interm. pos.
0: Interm. pos.
0: Interm. pos.
0: Interm. pos.
0: Interm. pos.
0: Interm. pos.
P632/EN M/R-a5-B // P632‑312‑660 8-41

Parameter Address
0: Interm. pos.
0: Interm. pos.
0: Interm. pos.
0: Interm. pos.
0: Interm. pos.
0: Interm. pos.
0: Interm. pos.
0: Interm. pos.
0: Interm. pos.
0: Interm. pos.
0: Interm. pos.
0: Interm. pos.
0: Interm. pos.
0: Interm. pos.
0: Interm. pos.
[spacer]
State of the virtual two-pole GOOSE input, representing the state of an external
device.
[spacer] GOOSE: Ext .De v01 ope n 109 001
0: No
0: No
0: No
8-42 P632/EN M/R-a5-B // P632‑312‑660

Parameter Address
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
P632/EN M/R-a5-B // P632‑312‑660 8-43

Parameter Address
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
8-44 P632/EN M/R-a5-B // P632‑312‑660

Parameter Address
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
P632/EN M/R-a5-B // P632‑312‑660 8-45

Parameter Address
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
8-46 P632/EN M/R-a5-B // P632‑312‑660

Parameter Address
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
P632/EN M/R-a5-B // P632‑312‑660 8-47

Parameter Address
0: No
[spacer] GOOSE: Ext .De v100 open 114 013
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
8-48 P632/EN M/R-a5-B // P632‑312‑660

Parameter Address
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
[spacer]
Binary open state of the virtual two-pole GOOSE input, representing the state of
an external device.
[spacer] GOOSE: Ext .De v01 close d 109 002
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
P632/EN M/R-a5-B // P632‑312‑660 8-49

Parameter Address
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
8-50 P632/EN M/R-a5-B // P632‑312‑660

Parameter Address
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
P632/EN M/R-a5-B // P632‑312‑660 8-51

Parameter Address
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
8-52 P632/EN M/R-a5-B // P632‑312‑660

Parameter Address
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
P632/EN M/R-a5-B // P632‑312‑660 8-53

Parameter Address
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
[spacer] GOOSE: Ext .De v100 cl ose d 114 014
0: No
0: No
0: No
8-54 P632/EN M/R-a5-B // P632‑312‑660

Parameter Address
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
P632/EN M/R-a5-B // P632‑312‑660 8-55

Parameter Address
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
[spacer]
Binary closed state of the virtual two-pole GOOSE input, representing the state
of an external device.
[spacer] GOOSE: Ext .De v01 int erm.pos 109 003
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
8-56 P632/EN M/R-a5-B // P632‑312‑660

Parameter Address
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
P632/EN M/R-a5-B // P632‑312‑660 8-57

Parameter Address
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
8-58 P632/EN M/R-a5-B // P632‑312‑660

Parameter Address
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
P632/EN M/R-a5-B // P632‑312‑660 8-59

Parameter Address
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
8-60 P632/EN M/R-a5-B // P632‑312‑660

Parameter Address
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
[spacer] GOOSE: Ext .De v100 int e rm.po 114 015
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
P632/EN M/R-a5-B // P632‑312‑660 8-61

Parameter Address
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
8-62 P632/EN M/R-a5-B // P632‑312‑660

Parameter Address
0: No
0: No
0: No
[spacer]
Binary intermediate position state of the virtual two-pole GOOSE input,
representing the state of an external device.
[spacer] GOOSE: IE D01 link fault y 107 180
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
P632/EN M/R-a5-B // P632‑312‑660 8-63

Parameter Address
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
[spacer]
Display whether GOOSE receipt of the configured signal is faulty or not
available. To each GOOSE the GOOSE sending device will attach a validity
stamp, up to which a repetition of GOOSE will be carried out independent of a
change of state. Thus the protection and control unit monitors the time period at
which the next state signal must be received.
8-64 P632/EN M/R-a5-B // P632‑312‑660

Parameter Address
[spacer] GOOSE: Ext Dev01 link faul ty 107 216
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
P632/EN M/R-a5-B // P632‑312‑660 8-65

Parameter Address
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
[spacer]
Display when GOOSE receipt of the configured external device is faulty or not
available. To each GOOSE the GOOSE sending device will attach a validity
stamp, up to which a repetition of GOOSE will be carried out independent of a
change of state. Thus the unit monitors the time period at which the next state
signal must be received.
[spacer] GOOSE: IE D link f ault y 107 250
0: No
[spacer]
Display which appears as soon as receipt of at least one of the configured
GOOSEs is faulty or not available. To each GOOSE the GOOSE sending device
will attach a validity stamp, up to which a repetition of GOOSE will be carried out
independent of a change of state. Thus the unit monitors the time period at
which the next state signal must be received.
8-66 P632/EN M/R-a5-B // P632‑312‑660

Parameter Address
[spacer] GOOSE: IE D01-16 link ed 107 251
2:
2:
[spacer] GOOSE: Input 01 faul ty 111 100
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
P632/EN M/R-a5-B // P632‑312‑660 8-67

Parameter Address
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
8-68 P632/EN M/R-a5-B // P632‑312‑660

Parameter Address
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
P632/EN M/R-a5-B // P632‑312‑660 8-69

Parameter Address
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
8-70 P632/EN M/R-a5-B // P632‑312‑660

Parameter Address
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
P632/EN M/R-a5-B // P632‑312‑660 8-71

Parameter Address
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
[spacer] GOOSE: Input 100 fault y 111 199
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
8-72 P632/EN M/R-a5-B // P632‑312‑660

Parameter Address
[spacer] GOOSE: Input 11 3 fault y 111 212
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
2:
2:
2:
P632/EN M/R-a5-B // P632‑312‑660 8-73

Parameter Address
2:
[spacer] GOOSE: IE D97-112 link e d 112 204
2:
[spacer] GOOSE: IE D113-12 8 link e d 112 205
2:
[spacer] GOOSE: Or dRun01-1 6 link ed 107 248
2:
[spacer] GOOSE: Or dRun17-3 2 link ed 107 249
2:
[spacer] GOOSE: Uniqueness 1- 16 007 217
[spacer] GOOSE: Uniqueness 17-3 2 007 218
Parameter Address
IRIG‑B interface IRIGB: Enabled 023 201
0: No Fig. 3-27, (p. 3-45)
[spacer] IRIGB: S ynchron. re ady 023 202
0: No Fig. 3-27, (p. 3-45)
[spacer] IRIGB: EB R S ynchr on. r e ady 023 203
0: No Fig. 3-27, (p. 3-45)
Parameter Address
Measured data input MEASI: Re set Tm ax E X T

006 076
0: No
[spacer] MEASI: E nable d 035 008
0: No Fig. 3-30, (p. 3-50)

Fig. 3-38, (p. 3-59)
[spacer] MEASI: PT 100 fault y 040 190
0: No Fig. 3-35, (p. 3-55)
[spacer] MEASI: O ve rload 20 mA input 040 191
0: No Fig. 3-33, (p. 3-53)
[spacer] MEASI: O pe n circ. 2 0 mA inp. 040 192
0: No Fig. 3-33, (p. 3-53)
8-74 P632/EN M/R-a5-B // P632‑312‑660

Parameter Address
Binary and analog OUTP: Block outp.r el. EXT 040 014
output
0: No
[spacer] OUTP: Re s e t latch. E XT 040 015
0: No
[spacer] OUTP: Outp . relay s blocke d 021 015
1: Yes Fig. 3-36, (p. 3-57)
[spacer] OUTP: Latching res et 040 088
0: No Fig. 3-36, (p. 3-57)
P632/EN M/R-a5-B // P632‑312‑660 8-75

Parameter Address
Measured data MEASO: Enab led 037 102
output
0: No
[spacer] MEASO: Outp. e nabled E XT 036 085
1: Yes
[spacer] MEASO: Rese t output EX T 036 087
0: No
[spacer] MEASO: Output r ese t 037 117
0: No Fig. 3-40, (p. 3-60)
[spacer] MEASO: Valid BC D value 037 050
0: No Fig. 3-41, (p. 3-63)
[spacer] MEASO: 1-digit b it 0 (B C D) 037 051
0: No Fig. 3-41, (p. 3-63)
0: No Fig. 3-41, (p. 3-63)
0: No Fig. 3-41, (p. 3-63)
0: No Fig. 3-41, (p. 3-63)
[spacer] MEASO: 10-digit bit 0 (BC D) 037 055
0: No Fig. 3-41, (p. 3-63)
0: No Fig. 3-41, (p. 3-63)
0: No Fig. 3-41, (p. 3-63)
0: No Fig. 3-41, (p. 3-63)
[spacer] MEASO: 100-dig. bit 0 (BC D) 037 059
0: No Fig. 3-41, (p. 3-63)
[spacer] MEASO: 100-dig. bit 1 (BC D) 037 060
0: No Fig. 3-41, (p. 3-63)
[spacer] MEASO: Value A-1 valid 069 014
0: No Fig. 3-43, (p. 3-69)
[spacer] MEASO: Value A-1 out put 037 118
0: No Fig. 3-43, (p. 3-69)
[spacer] MEASO: Value A-2 valid 069 015
0: No
8-76 P632/EN M/R-a5-B // P632‑312‑660

Parameter Address
[spacer] MEASO: Value A- 2 out put 037 119
0: No
P632/EN M/R-a5-B // P632‑312‑660 8-77

Parameter Address
Main function MAIN: Enable prot ect . E XT 003 027
2: Not configured
[spacer] MAIN: Dis able prot ect . E XT 003 026
2: Not configured
[spacer] MAIN: General re s et E XT 005 255
0: No
[spacer] MAIN: Re s e t indicat. EX T 065 001
0: No
[spacer] MAIN: Group res et 1 E XT 005 209
0: No
[spacer] MAIN: Group res et 2 E XT 005 252
0: No
[spacer] MAIN: Re s e t latch.tr ip E X T 040 138
0: No
[spacer] MAIN: Re s e t c. cl/ t r. c E XT 005 210
0: No
[spacer] MAIN: Re s e t IP,max,s t . EXT 005 211
0: No
[spacer] MAIN: CB1 open 3 p EXT 031 028
0: No Fig. 3-64, (p. 3-95)
[spacer] MAIN: CB2 open 3 p EXT 031 046
0: No
[spacer] MAIN: CB1 clos ed 3p EX T 036 051
0: No Fig. 3-63, (p. 3-95)
[spacer] MAIN: CB2 clos ed 3p EX T 036 230
0: No
[spacer] MAIN: CB1 faulty E XT 221 086
0: No
[spacer] MAIN: Blocking 1 E X T 040 060
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
[spacer] MAIN: M.c.b. trip V EXT 004 061
0: No
8-78 P632/EN M/R-a5-B // P632‑312‑660

Parameter Address
[spacer] MAIN: Trip cm d. block . E XT 036 045
0: No
[spacer] MAIN: Man. trip cmd. E XT 037 018
0: No
[spacer] MAIN: Switch d yn.param.E X T 036 033
0: No
[spacer] MAIN: Tes t m ode EXT 037 070
0: No
[spacer] MAIN: Tim e s witc hing E X T 003 096
0: Standard time
[spacer] MAIN: Min-puls e c lock EXT 060 060
0: No
[spacer] MAIN: Healthy 060 001
1: Yes
[spacer]
Signal that the protection unit is operational. By default this signal is linked to
LED: F ct.ass ig. H 1 gre e n.
[spacer] MAIN: Tim e s yn chr oniz ed 009 109
0: No
[spacer] MAIN: Blocked/fault y 004 065
1: Yes Fig. 3-62, (p. 3-94)
[spacer] MAIN: Protect. not r e ady 004 060
1: Yes Fig. 3-62, (p. 3-94)
[spacer] MAIN: Tes t m ode 037 071
0: No Fig. 3-76, (p. 3-105)
[spacer] MAIN: Prot. ex t. e nable d 003 028
0: No Fig. 3-58, (p. 3-90)
[spacer] MAIN: Prot. ex t. dis able d 038 046
1: Yes Fig. 3-58, (p. 3-90)
[spacer] MAIN: Dynam . par am. act ive 040 090
0: No Fig. 3-59, (p. 3-91)
[spacer] MAIN: CB1 open 3 p 031 040
0: No
[spacer] MAIN: CB2 open 3 p 031 086
0: No
[spacer] MAIN: CB1 clos ed 3p 031 042
0: No
[spacer] MAIN: CB2 clos ed 3p 031 089
0: No
P632/EN M/R-a5-B // P632‑312‑660 8-79

Parameter Address
[spacer] MAIN: CB1 pos.sig. implaus 031 041
0: No
[spacer] MAIN: CB2 pos.sig. implaus 031 049
0: No
[spacer] MAIN: Trip cm d. block ed 021 013
1: Yes Fig. 3-69, (p. 3-99)
[spacer] MAIN: Latch. trip c. res et 040 139
0: No Fig. 3-69, (p. 3-99)
[spacer] MAIN: Gen. t rip command 1 036 071
0: No Fig. 3-69, (p. 3-99)

Fig. 3-139, (p. 3-181)
0: No
0: No
0: No
[spacer] MAIN: Gen. t rip signal 036 251
0: No Fig. 3-69, (p. 3-99)
[spacer] MAIN: Gen. t rip signal 1 036 005
0: No Fig. 3-69, (p. 3-99)
0: No
0: No
0: No
[spacer] MAIN: Manual trip s ignal 034 017
0: No Fig. 3-69, (p. 3-99)
[spacer] MAIN: Me as. circ.I fault y 036 155
0: No Fig. 3-66, (p. 3-97)

Fig. 3-165, (p. 3-203)
[spacer] MAIN: General star ting 036 000
0: No Fig. 3-67, (p. 3-97)
[spacer] MAIN: Trip s ig.REF 1 & RE F 2 036 174
0: No
0: No
8-80 P632/EN M/R-a5-B // P632‑312‑660

Parameter Address
0: No
[spacer] MAIN: Phase re v ersal activ 036 220
0: No Fig. 3-48, (p. 3-78)
[spacer] MAIN: CB failure 036 017
0: No Fig. 3-172, (p. 3-212)
[spacer] MAIN: Enable cont rol 221 058
1: Yes Fig. 3-192, (p. 3-231)
[spacer] MAIN: Bay interlock. act. 221 001
0: No Fig. 3-192, (p. 3-231)
[spacer] MAIN: Sub st. inte rl. act . 221 000
0: No Fig. 3-192, (p. 3-231)
[spacer] MAIN: Fct. b lock . 1 act iv e 221 015
0: No Fig. 3-60, (p. 3-92)
[spacer] MAIN: Fct. b lock . 2 act iv e 221 023
0: No Fig. 3-60, (p. 3-92)
[spacer] MAIN: Mon. mot. driv es t r . 221 056
0: No
[spacer] MAIN: Interlock e qu. viol. 221 018
0: No Fig. 3-193, (p. 3-232)
[spacer] MAIN: CB tr ip inte rnal 221 006
0: No
[spacer] MAIN: CB tr ipped 221 016
0: No
[spacer] MAIN: DEV op.time ex ce e de d 221 110
0: No
[spacer]
In the case of direct motor control by motor relay K200 this fault signal is issued
(as a group signal) when no positive position signal (status signal) has been
received from the external device after it has been issued a close command and
the set running time-delay has elapsed.
[spacer] MAIN: Chatt.s uppr . st arte d 221 121
0: No
[spacer]
Signal that the chatter suppression has started.
[spacer] MAIN: K200 fail. c md. e nd 221 108
0: No
[spacer]
In the case of direct motor control by motor relay K200 this signal is issued if the
K200 contacts have not reopened after the set monitoring time-delay has
elapsed.
P632/EN M/R-a5-B // P632‑312‑660 8-81

Parameter Address
[spacer] MAIN: K200 fail. c md.s t ar t 221 109
0: No
[spacer]
In the case of direct motor control by motor relay K200 this signal is issued if the
K200 contacts have not closed after the set monitoring time-delay has elapsed.
[spacer] MAIN: St artcm dt ime e xce e d. 221 112
0: No Fig. 3-201, (p. 3-245)
[spacer]
If the monitoring, set by D EV01 : St artC mdTime superv. (or
DEV02: S tartCm dTi me superv . etc.), is active then an exceeded timer is
flagged by this logic state signal.
[spacer] MAIN: Mult. sig . 1 act iv e 221 017
0: No Fig. 3-65, (p. 3-96)
[spacer] MAIN: Mult. sig . 1 s tore d 221 054
0: No Fig. 3-65, (p. 3-96)
[spacer] MAIN: Mult. sig . 2 act iv e 221 053
0: No Fig. 3-65, (p. 3-96)
[spacer] MAIN: Mult. sig . 2 s tore d 221 055
0: No Fig. 3-65, (p. 3-96)
[spacer] MAIN: Comm unication e rr or 221 019
1: Yes Fig. 3-71, (p. 3-100)
[spacer] MAIN: Cmd . f r. comm.inte r f 221 101
0: No Fig. 3-196, (p. 3-237)
[spacer] MAIN: Cmd . f r. electr .c trl 221 103
0: No
[spacer] MAIN: Comm and from HM I 221 102
0: No
[spacer] MAIN: Device se le ction key 006 001
0: No Fig. 3-196, (p. 3-237)
[spacer] MAIN: Device OPEN k e y 006 002
0: No Fig. 3-196, (p. 3-237)
[spacer] MAIN: Device CLOS E k e y 006 003
0: No Fig. 3-196, (p. 3-237)
[spacer] MAIN: Local/Re mo te ke y 006 004
0: No
[spacer] MAIN: Dumm y entry 004 129
0: No
[spacer] MAIN: Without func tion 060 000
0: No
8-82 P632/EN M/R-a5-B // P632‑312‑660

Parameter Address
[spacer] MAIN: Without func tion 061 000
0: No
Parameter Address
Parameter subset PSS: Control via user EX T 036 101
selection
0: No
[spacer] PSS: Activate PS 1 EX T 065 002
2: Not configured
2: Not configured
2: Not configured
2: Not configured
[spacer] PSS: Control via user 036 102
0: No Fig. 3-77, (p. 3-107)
[spacer] PSS: Ex t.s el.param.s ubse t 003 061
0: No param. subset sel Fig. 3-77, (p. 3-107)
[spacer] PSS: PS 1 activat ed ext . 036 094
0: No Fig. 3-77, (p. 3-107)
0: No Fig. 3-77, (p. 3-107)
0: No Fig. 3-77, (p. 3-107)
0: No Fig. 3-77, (p. 3-107)
[spacer] PSS: Actual p ar am. s ubs e t 003 062
1: Parameter subset 1 Fig. 3-77, (p. 3-107)
[spacer] PSS: PS 1 active 036 090
1: Yes Fig. 3-77, (p. 3-107)
0: No Fig. 3-77, (p. 3-107)
0: No Fig. 3-77, (p. 3-107)
0: No Fig. 3-77, (p. 3-107)
P632/EN M/R-a5-B // P632‑312‑660 8-83

Parameter Address
Self-monitoring SFMO N: W arning (LE D) 036 070
0: No Fig. 3-78, (p. 3-108)
[spacer] SFMO N: W arning (re lay ) 036 100
0: No Fig. 3-78, (p. 3-108)
[spacer] SFMO N: W arm restart e x ec. 041 202
0: No
[spacer] SFMO N: C old re star t exe c. 041 201
0: No
[spacer] SFMO N: C old re star t 093 024
0: No
[spacer] SFMO N: C old re st./ SW update 093 025
0: No
[spacer] SFMO N: B locking/ HW fail ure 090 019
0: No
[spacer] SFMO N: R elay Kxx faulty 041 200
0: No
[spacer] SFMO N: Hardware clock fai l. 093 040
0: No
[spacer] SFMO N: B at te ry failure 090 010
0: No
[spacer] SFMO N: I nvalid SW d.loade d 096 121
0: No
[spacer] SFMO N: +15V s upply faulty 093 081
0: No
0: No
[spacer] SFMO N: - 15V s upply faulty 093 080
0: No
[spacer] SFMO N: W rong m odule s lot 1 096 100
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
8-84 P632/EN M/R-a5-B // P632‑312‑660

Parameter Address
[spacer] SFMO N: W rong module s lot 6 096 105
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
[spacer] SFMO N: W rong module D ig.Bus 096 123
0: No
[spacer] SFMO N: W rong module HM I 096 124
0: No
[spacer] SFMO N: W rong module C omm 096 125
0: No
P632/EN M/R-a5-B // P632‑312‑660 8-85

Parameter Address
[spacer] SFMO N: W rong m odule Ana. Bus 096 126
0: No
[spacer] SFMO N: D e fe ct.module slot 1 097 000
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
[spacer] SFMO N: D e fe ct.module slot10 097 009
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
8-86 P632/EN M/R-a5-B // P632‑312‑660

Parameter Address
0: No
0: No
0: No
[spacer] SFMO N: M odule A DP R fault y 093 070
0: No
[spacer] SFMO N: M odule A RAM fault y 093 071
0: No
[spacer] SFMO N: M odule Y DP R fault y 093 110
0: No
[spacer] SFMO N: M odule Y RAM fault y 093 111
0: No
[spacer] SFMO N: E rror K 7 01 097 078
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
P632/EN M/R-a5-B // P632‑312‑660 8-87

Parameter Address
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
8-88 P632/EN M/R-a5-B // P632‑312‑660

Parameter Address
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
[spacer] SFMO N: U nd ef . ope r at. code 093 010
0: No
[spacer] SFMO N: Abnormal t erminat ion 093 030
0: No
[spacer] SFMO N: B ad arg. s ys t em call 093 031
0: No
[spacer] SFMO N: M ute x de adloc k 093 032
0: No
P632/EN M/R-a5-B // P632‑312‑660 8-89

Parameter Address
[spacer] SFMO N: I nvalid memory ref. 093 033
0: No
[spacer] SFMO N: U ne xpe ct e d e xc ept ion 093 034
0: No
[spacer] SFMO N: I nvalid ar ithm. op. 093 011
0: No
[spacer] SFMO N: U nd ef ined i nter rupt 093 012
0: No
[spacer] SFMO N: E x ce pt ion oper .s ys t . 093 013
0: No
[spacer] SFMO N: Pr ote ction f ailure 090 021
0: No
[spacer] SFMO N: C he ck s um error param 090 003
0: No
[spacer] SFMO N: C lock sync. e rror 093 041
0: No
[spacer] SFMO N: I nt e rm.volt. fail.RAM 093 026
0: No
[spacer] SFMO N: O ve rflow MT_RC 090 012
0: No Fig. 3-80, (p. 3-112)
[spacer] SFMO N: S em aph. M T_RC block . 093 015
0: No
[spacer] SFMO N: I nval. S W ve r s .comm. 093 075
0: No
[spacer] SFMO N: I nval. C onfig. I EC 093 079
0: No
[spacer] SFMO N: I nvalid SW ver s. Y 093 113
0: No
[spacer] SFMO N: T im e -out module Y 093 112
0: No
[spacer] SFMO N: M .c.b. trip V 098 000
0: No
[spacer] SFMO N: I ns ul. Alarm 1 098 091
0: No
0: No
0: No
8-90 P632/EN M/R-a5-B // P632‑312‑660

Parameter Address
[spacer] SFMO N: B uchholz Alarm 1 098 094
0: No
0: No
0: No
[spacer] SFMO N: M eas . cir c. I fault y 091 018
0: No Fig. 3-66, (p. 3-97)

Fig. 3-165, (p. 3-203)
[spacer] SFMO N: M eas . c. I fault y, a 091 026
0: No Fig. 3-164, (p. 3-203)
[spacer] SFMO N: M eas . c. I fault y, b 091 027
0: No
[spacer] SFMO N: I nvalid charact . V/f 091 011
0: No
[spacer] SFMO N: I nvalid SW ver s DHMI 093 145
0: No
[spacer] SFMO N: I nvalid confi g.TP Dx 093 160
0: No
[spacer] SFMO N: I nvalid scali ng BCD 093 124
0: No
[spacer] SFMO N: I nvalid scali ng A-1 093 114
0: No Fig. 3-43, (p. 3-69)
0: No
[spacer] SFMO N: I nvalid scali ng IDC 093 116
0: No Fig. 3-33, (p. 3-53)
[spacer] SFMO N: PT 100 open c ir cuit 098 024
0: No Fig. 3-35, (p. 3-55)
[spacer] SFMO N: O ve rload 20 mA input 098 025
0: No Fig. 3-33, (p. 3-53)
[spacer] SFMO N: O pe n circ. 20 mA inp. 098 026
0: No Fig. 3-33, (p. 3-53)
[spacer] SFMO N: S etting e rror f<> 098 028
0: No Fig. 3-147, (p. 3-189)
[spacer] SFMO N: I ref , a inval. range 091 007
0: No Fig. 3-94, (p. 3-131)
P632/EN M/R-a5-B // P632‑312‑660 8-91

Parameter Address
[spacer] SFMO N: I ref , b inval . range 091 008
0: No Fig. 3-94, (p. 3-131)
[spacer] SFMO N: M atching fail. e nd a 091 000
0: No Fig. 3-94, (p. 3-131)
[spacer] SFMO N: M atching fail. e nd b 091 001
0: No Fig. 3-94, (p. 3-131)
[spacer] SFMO N: R atio mtch.fact .inv . 091 004
0: No
[spacer] SFMO N: 2nd match.fac t. i nv. 091 006
0: No Fig. 3-94, (p. 3-131)
[spacer] SFMO N: I nv.range Ir e f REF _1 091 105
0: No Fig. 3-107, (p. 3-147)
[spacer] SFMO N: I nv.range Ir e f REF _2 091 115
0: No
[spacer] SFMO N: M atch.f. kam, N RE F_1 091 101
0: No Fig. 3-107, (p. 3-147)
[spacer] SFMO N: M atch.f. kam, Y RE F_1 091 102
0: No Fig. 3-107, (p. 3-147)
0: No
0: No
[spacer] SFMO N: R at.mtch.f.inv .R EF_1 091 103
0: No
0: No
[spacer] SFMO N: M in.m tch .f.inv.RE F_1 091 104
0: No Fig. 3-107, (p. 3-147)
0: No
[spacer] SFMO N: C T A error T HR M1 098 036
0: No Fig. 3-138, (p. 3-180)
[spacer] SFMO N: S etting e rror THRM1 098 038
0: No Fig. 3-139, (p. 3-181)
[spacer] SFMO N: I nv.inp.f.cloc k sy nc 093 120
0: No
[spacer] SFMO N: O utput 30 098 053
0: No
8-92 P632/EN M/R-a5-B // P632‑312‑660

Parameter Address
[spacer] SFMO N: O utput 30 ( t) 098 054
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
[spacer] SFMO N: C B 1 po s .s ig. implaus 098 124
0: No
0: No
[spacer] SFMO N: C B 1 f aul ty E XT 098 072
0: No
0: No
Parameter Address
Operating data OP_R C: Res e t record. EX T 005 213
recording
0: No Fig. 3-74, (p. 3-103)
Parameter Address
Monitoring signal MT _RC: Res et record. E XT 005 240
recording
0: No
P632/EN M/R-a5-B // P632‑312‑660 8-93

Parameter Address
Overload recording OL_RC: R e s et reco rd. EXT 005 241
0: No
[spacer] OL_RC: R e cord. in progr es s 035 003
0: No Fig. 3-83, (p. 3-115)
[spacer] OL_RC: Over l. me m. ove rfl ow 035 007
0: No Fig. 3-84, (p. 3-116)
Parameter Address
Fault recording FT_RC: Res et record. E XT 005 243
0: No
[spacer] FT_RC: Trigg er E X T 036 089
0: No
[spacer] FT_RC: Trigg er 037 076
0: No Fig. 3-90, (p. 3-125)
[spacer] FT_RC: Id > trigge re d 035 018
0: No
[spacer] FT_RC: IR > t r iggere d 035 019
0: No
[spacer] FT_RC: Record. in progre ss 035 000
0: No Fig. 3-90, (p. 3-125)
[spacer] FT_RC: Syst e m d is t urb. runn 035 004
0: No Fig. 3-90, (p. 3-125)
[spacer] FT_RC: Fault m em. ov e rf low 035 001
0: No Fig. 3-91, (p. 3-126)
[spacer] FT_RC: Faulty time t ag 035 002
0: No
8-94 P632/EN M/R-a5-B // P632‑312‑660

Parameter Address
Differential protec‐ DIFF: B locking EXT 003 163
tion
0: No Fig. 3-93, (p. 3-130)
[spacer] DIFF: E nable d 041 210
0: No Fig. 3-93, (p. 3-130)
[spacer] DIFF: S tar t ing 041 106
0: No
[spacer] DIFF: M eas .s yst em 1 t ri gg. 041 124
0: No Fig. 3-101, (p. 3-139)
0: No Fig. 3-101, (p. 3-139)
0: No Fig. 3-101, (p. 3-139)
[spacer] DIFF: Id>> t rigge red 041 221
0: No Fig. 3-101, (p. 3-139)
[spacer] DIFF: Id>>> t ri gge red 041 222
0: No Fig. 3-101, (p. 3-139)
[spacer] DIFF: Harm .block 1 t ri gg. 041 118
0: No Fig. 3-102, (p. 3-140)
0: No Fig. 3-102, (p. 3-140)
0: No Fig. 3-102, (p. 3-140)
[spacer] DIFF: O ve rflux .bl.1 t ri gg. 041 121
0: No Fig. 3-103, (p. 3-141)
0: No Fig. 3-103, (p. 3-141)
0: No Fig. 3-103, (p. 3-141)
[spacer] DIFF: S at.dis cr. 1 t rigg. 041 115
0: No Fig. 3-104, (p. 3-142)
0: No Fig. 3-104, (p. 3-142)
0: No Fig. 3-104, (p. 3-142)
[spacer] DIFF: T rip s ignal 041 075
0: No Fig. 3-101, (p. 3-139)
P632/EN M/R-a5-B // P632‑312‑660 8-95

Parameter Address
[spacer] DIFF: T rip s ignal 1 041 002
0: No Fig. 3-101, (p. 3-139)
0: No Fig. 3-101, (p. 3-139)
0: No Fig. 3-101, (p. 3-139)
Parameter Address
Ground differential REF_1: Blocking EX T 019 051
protection
0: No
[spacer] REF_1: Enable d 041 132
0: No Fig. 3-106, (p. 3-145)
[spacer] REF_1: Ready 019 054
0: No Fig. 3-106, (p. 3-145)
[spacer] REF_1: Trip sig nal 041 005
0: No Fig. 3-110, (p. 3-151)
Parameter Address
Ground differential REF_2: Blocking EX T 019 052
protection
0: No
[spacer] REF_2: Enable d 041 133
0: No
[spacer] REF_2: Ready 019 055
0: No
[spacer] REF_2: Trip sig nal 041 016
0: No
8-96 P632/EN M/R-a5-B // P632‑312‑660

Parameter Address
Definite-time over‐ DTOC1: Block. tI> EXT 035 120
current protection
0: No
[spacer] DTOC1: Block. tI>> EXT 035 121
0: No
[spacer] DTOC1: Block. tI>>> EXT 035 122
0: No
[spacer] DTOC1: Block. tIneg> E X T 036 141
0: No
[spacer] DTOC1: Block. tIneg>> E X T 036 142
0: No
[spacer] DTOC1: Block. tIneg>>> E X T 036 143
0: No
[spacer] DTOC1: Block. tIN> EXT 035 123
0: No
[spacer] DTOC1: Block. tIN>> EXT 035 124
0: No
[spacer] DTOC1: Block. tIN>>> EXT 035 125
0: No
[spacer] DTOC1: Enable d 035 102
0: No Fig. 3-114, (p. 3-156)
[spacer] DTOC1: Gene ral st arti ng 035 128
0: No Fig. 3-119, (p. 3-162)
[spacer] DTOC1: tGS elaps ed 035 129
0: No Fig. 3-119, (p. 3-162)
[spacer] DTOC1: S tarting A 035 104
0: No
[spacer] DTOC1: S tarting B 035 105
0: No
[spacer] DTOC1: S tarting C 035 106
0: No
[spacer] DTOC1: S tarting N 035 107
0: No
[spacer] DTOC1: S tarting I> 035 108
0: No
[spacer] DTOC1: S tarting I>> 035 109
0: No
P632/EN M/R-a5-B // P632‑312‑660 8-97

Parameter Address
[spacer] DTOC1: S tarting I>> > 035 110
0: No
[spacer] DTOC1: Trip signal tI> 035 114
0: No
[spacer] DTOC1: Trip signal tI>> 035 115
0: No
[spacer] DTOC1: Trip signal tI>>> 035 116
0: No
[spacer] DTOC1: S tarting Ine g 036 144
0: No Fig. 3-117, (p. 3-159)
[spacer] DTOC1: S tarting Ine g> 036 145
0: No Fig. 3-117, (p. 3-159)
[spacer] DTOC1: S tarting Ine g>> 036 146
0: No Fig. 3-117, (p. 3-159)
[spacer] DTOC1: S tarting Ine g>>> 036 147
0: No Fig. 3-117, (p. 3-159)
[spacer] DTOC1: tIneg> e lapse d 036 148
0: No Fig. 3-117, (p. 3-159)
[spacer] DTOC1: tIneg>> e laps ed 036 149
0: No Fig. 3-117, (p. 3-159)
[spacer] DTOC1: tIneg>>> e lapse d 036 150
0: No Fig. 3-117, (p. 3-159)
[spacer] DTOC1: Trip signal tIneg> 036 151
0: No Fig. 3-117, (p. 3-159)
[spacer] DTOC1: Trip signal tIneg>> 036 152
0: No Fig. 3-117, (p. 3-159)
[spacer] DTOC1: Trip signal tIneg>>> 036 153
0: No Fig. 3-117, (p. 3-159)
[spacer] DTOC1: S tarting IN> 035 111
0: No
[spacer] DTOC1: S tarting IN> > 035 112
0: No
[spacer] DTOC1: S tarting IN> >> 035 113
0: No
[spacer] DTOC1: tIN> e lapse d 035 117
0: No
[spacer] DTOC1: tIN>> e lapse d 035 118
0: No
8-98 P632/EN M/R-a5-B // P632‑312‑660

Parameter Address
[spacer] DTOC1: tIN>>> e laps e d 035 119
0: No
[spacer] DTOC1: Trip signal tIN> 035 126
0: No
[spacer] DTOC1: Trip signal tIN>> 035 130
0: No
[spacer] DTOC1: Trip signal tIN>>> 035 131
0: No
P632/EN M/R-a5-B // P632‑312‑660 8-99

Parameter Address
Definite-time over‐ DTOC2: Block. tI> EXT 035 150
current protection
0: No
[spacer] DTOC2: Block. tI>> EXT 035 151
0: No
[spacer] DTOC2: Block. tI>>> EXT 035 229
0: No
[spacer] DTOC2: Block. tIneg> E X T 036 161
0: No
[spacer] DTOC2: Block. tIneg>> E X T 036 162
0: No
[spacer] DTOC2: Block. tIneg>>> E X T 036 163
0: No
[spacer] DTOC2: Block. tIN> EXT 035 230
0: No
[spacer] DTOC2: Block. tIN>> EXT 035 231
0: No
[spacer] DTOC2: Block. tIN>>> EXT 035 232
0: No
[spacer] DTOC2: Enable d 035 132
0: No
[spacer] DTOC2: Gene ral st arti ng 035 234
0: No
[spacer] DTOC2: tGS elapsed 035 245
0: No
[spacer] DTOC2: S tarting A 035 134
0: No
[spacer] DTOC2: S tarting B 035 135
0: No
[spacer] DTOC2: S tarting C 035 141
0: No
[spacer] DTOC2: S tarting N 035 146
0: No
[spacer] DTOC2: S tarting I> 035 138
0: No
[spacer] DTOC2: S tarting I>> 035 139
0: No
8-100 P632/EN M/R-a5-B // P632‑312‑660

Parameter Address
[spacer] DTOC2: S tarting I>> > 035 149
0: No
[spacer] DTOC2: Trip signal tI> 035 144
0: No
[spacer] DTOC2: Trip signal tI>> 035 145
0: No
[spacer] DTOC2: Trip signal tI>>> 035 158
0: No
[spacer] DTOC2: S tarting Ine g 036 164
0: No
[spacer] DTOC2: S tarting Ine g> 036 165
0: No
[spacer] DTOC2: S tarting Ine g>> 036 166
0: No
[spacer] DTOC2: S tarting Ine g>>> 036 167
0: No
[spacer] DTOC2: tIneg> e lapse d 036 168
0: No
[spacer] DTOC2: tIneg>> e laps ed 036 169
0: No
[spacer] DTOC2: tIneg>>> e lapse d 036 170
0: No
[spacer] DTOC2: Trip signal tIneg> 036 171
0: No
[spacer] DTOC2: Trip signal tIneg>> 036 172
0: No
[spacer] DTOC2: Trip signal tIneg>>> 036 173
0: No
[spacer] DTOC2: S tarting IN> 035 152
0: No
[spacer] DTOC2: S tarting IN> > 035 153
0: No
[spacer] DTOC2: S tarting IN> >> 035 154
0: No
[spacer] DTOC2: tIN> e lapse d 035 159
0: No
[spacer] DTOC2: tIN>> e lapse d 035 225
0: No
P632/EN M/R-a5-B // P632‑312‑660 8-101

Parameter Address
[spacer] DTOC2: tIN>>> e laps e d 035 226
0: No
[spacer] DTOC2: Trip signal tIN> 035 233
0: No
[spacer] DTOC2: Trip signal tIN>> 035 246
0: No
[spacer] DTOC2: Trip signal tIN>>> 035 247
0: No
8-102 P632/EN M/R-a5-B // P632‑312‑660

Parameter Address
Inverse-time overcur‐ IDMT1: Block. tIre f,P> E X T

038 114
rent protection
0: No
[spacer] IDMT1: Block.tIre f,ne g> EXT 038 178
0: No
[spacer] IDMT1: Block. tIre f,N> E X T 038 124
0: No
[spacer] IDMT1: Enabled 038 125
0: No Fig. 3-122, (p. 3-164)
[spacer] IDMT1: Gener al s t ar ting 038 115
0: No Fig. 3-131, (p. 3-175)
[spacer] IDMT1: tGS e lapsed 038 116
0: No Fig. 3-131, (p. 3-175)
[spacer] IDMT1: Starting Ire f,P> 038 110
0: No Fig. 3-127, (p. 3-169)
[spacer] IDMT1: Starting Ire f,A> 038 117
0: No Fig. 3-127, (p. 3-169)
[spacer] IDMT1: Starting Ire f,B> 038 118
0: No Fig. 3-127, (p. 3-169)
[spacer] IDMT1: Starting Ire f,C> 038 119
0: No Fig. 3-127, (p. 3-169)
[spacer] IDMT1: tI r ef ,P> elapse d 038 111
0: No Fig. 3-127, (p. 3-169)
[spacer] IDMT1: Hold time P running 038 112
0: No Fig. 3-127, (p. 3-169)
[spacer] IDMT1: Me mory P cle ar 038 113
1: Yes Fig. 3-127, (p. 3-169)
[spacer] IDMT1: Starting Ire f,ne g> 038 173
0: No Fig. 3-128, (p. 3-171)
[spacer] IDMT1: tI r ef ,neg> e lapse d 038 174
0: No Fig. 3-128, (p. 3-171)
[spacer] IDMT1: Tr ip sig. t Ire f,ne g> 038 177
0: No Fig. 3-128, (p. 3-171)
[spacer] IDMT1: Hold time neg r unn. 038 175
0: No Fig. 3-128, (p. 3-171)
[spacer] IDMT1: Me mory ' neg' cle ar 038 176
1: Yes Fig. 3-128, (p. 3-171)
P632/EN M/R-a5-B // P632‑312‑660 8-103

Parameter Address
[spacer] IDMT1: Starting I re f,N> 038 120
0: No Fig. 3-129, (p. 3-172)
[spacer] IDMT1: tI r ef ,N> e lapse d 038 121
0: No Fig. 3-129, (p. 3-172)
[spacer] IDMT1: Tr ip signal t Iref,N> 038 126
0: No Fig. 3-129, (p. 3-172)
[spacer] IDMT1: Hold tim e N running 038 122
0: No Fig. 3-129, (p. 3-172)
[spacer] IDMT1: Me mory N cle ar 038 123
1: Yes Fig. 3-129, (p. 3-172)
8-104 P632/EN M/R-a5-B // P632‑312‑660

Parameter Address
Inverse-time overcur‐ IDMT2: Block. tIre f,P> E X T

038 134
rent protection
0: No
[spacer] IDMT2: Block.tIre f,ne g> EXT 038 188
0: No
[spacer] IDMT2: Block. tIre f,N> E X T 038 144
0: No
[spacer] IDMT2: Enabled 038 145
0: No
[spacer] IDMT2: Gener al s t ar ting 038 135
0: No
[spacer] IDMT2: tGS e lapsed 038 136
0: No
[spacer] IDMT2: Starting Ire f,P> 038 130
0: No
[spacer] IDMT2: Starting Ire f,A> 038 137
0: No
[spacer] IDMT2: Starting Ire f,B> 038 138
0: No
[spacer] IDMT2: Starting Ire f,C> 038 139
0: No
[spacer] IDMT2: tI r ef ,P> elapse d 038 131
0: No
[spacer] IDMT2: Hold time P running 038 132
0: No
[spacer] IDMT2: Me mory P cle ar 038 133
1: Yes
[spacer] IDMT2: Starting Ire f,ne g> 038 183
0: No
[spacer] IDMT2: tI r ef ,neg> e lapse d 038 184
0: No
[spacer] IDMT2: Tr ip sig. t Ire f,ne g> 038 187
0: No
[spacer] IDMT2: Hold time neg r unn. 038 185
0: No
[spacer] IDMT2: Me mory ' neg' cle ar 038 186
1: Yes
P632/EN M/R-a5-B // P632‑312‑660 8-105

Parameter Address
[spacer] IDMT2: Starting I re f,N> 038 140
0: No
[spacer] IDMT2: tI r ef ,N> e lapse d 038 141
0: No
[spacer] IDMT2: Tr ip signal t Iref,N> 038 146
0: No
[spacer] IDMT2: Hold tim e N running 038 142
0: No
[spacer] IDMT2: Me mory N cle ar 038 143
1: Yes
8-106 P632/EN M/R-a5-B // P632‑312‑660

Parameter Address
Thermal overload THRM 1: R ep lica bl ock E X T 039 150
protection
0: No
[spacer] THRM 1: CTA err or EX T 039 152
0: No
[spacer] THRM 1: R es e t re pli ca E XT 039 122
0: No
[spacer] THRM 1: Enable d 039 129
0: No Fig. 3-134, (p. 3-176)
[spacer] THRM 1: Not re ady 039 154
1: Yes Fig. 3-135, (p. 3-177)
[spacer] THRM 1: R es e t re pli ca 039 125
0: No Fig. 3-140, (p. 3-182)
[spacer] THRM 1: Buf fe r empt y 039 128
1: Yes
[spacer] THRM 1: CTA err or 039 127
0: No Fig. 3-138, (p. 3-180)
[spacer] THRM 1: S tartin g k*Ire f> 039 151
0: No Fig. 3-139, (p. 3-181)
[spacer] THRM 1: Within pr e- t ri p time 039 153
1: Yes Fig. 3-139, (p. 3-181)
[spacer] THRM 1: Warning 039 124
0: No Fig. 3-139, (p. 3-181)
[spacer] THRM 1: Trip signal 039 123
0: No Fig. 3-139, (p. 3-181)
[spacer] THRM 1: S et t ing er ror,block . 039 126
0: No Fig. 3-139, (p. 3-181)
P632/EN M/R-a5-B // P632‑312‑660 8-107

Parameter Address
Time-voltage protec‐ V<>: Blocking tV> E XT

041 068
tion
0: No
[spacer] V<>: Blocking tV>> E XT 041 069
0: No
[spacer] V<>: Blocking tV< E XT 041 070
0: No
[spacer] V<>: Blocking tV<< E XT 041 071
0: No
[spacer] V<>: Enable d 040 066
0: No Fig. 3-141, (p. 3-183)
[spacer] V<>: Ready 042 003
0: No Fig. 3-141, (p. 3-183)
[spacer] V<>: Not ready 042 004
0: No Fig. 3-141, (p. 3-183)
[spacer] V<>: Starting V> 041 030
0: No Fig. 3-142, (p. 3-184)
[spacer] V<>: Starting V>> 041 096
0: No Fig. 3-142, (p. 3-184)
[spacer] V<>: tV> elaps e d 041 034
0: No Fig. 3-142, (p. 3-184)
[spacer] V<>: tV>> elap se d 041 035
0: No Fig. 3-142, (p. 3-184)
[spacer] V<>: Starting V< 041 037
0: No Fig. 3-143, (p. 3-185)
[spacer] V<>: Starting V<< 041 099
0: No Fig. 3-143, (p. 3-185)
[spacer] V<>: tV< elaps e d 041 041
0: No Fig. 3-143, (p. 3-185)
[spacer] V<>: tV< elaps e d & Vmi n> 041 026
0: No Fig. 3-143, (p. 3-185)
[spacer] V<>: tV< elaps . transient 042 023
0: No Fig. 3-143, (p. 3-185)
[spacer] V<>: Fault V< 041 110
0: No Fig. 3-143, (p. 3-185)
[spacer] V<>: tV<< elap se d 041 042
0: No Fig. 3-143, (p. 3-185)
8-108 P632/EN M/R-a5-B // P632‑312‑660

Parameter Address
[spacer] V<>: tV<< elapse d & Vmi n> 041 066
0: No Fig. 3-143, (p. 3-185)
[spacer] V<>: tV<< elapse d t rans . 042 025
0: No Fig. 3-143, (p. 3-185)
[spacer] V<>: Fault V<< 041 112
0: No Fig. 3-143, (p. 3-185)
[spacer] V<>: tV</ << elaps . t rans . 042 007
0: No Fig. 3-143, (p. 3-185)
P632/EN M/R-a5-B // P632‑312‑660 8-109

Parameter Address
Over-/ f<> : R es e t me as.val. EXT 006 075
tection
0: No
[spacer] f<> : Blocking f1 E XT 042 103
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
[spacer] f<> : Enable d 042 100
0: No Fig. 3-144, (p. 3-186)
[spacer] f<> : R ead y 042 101
0: No Fig. 3-144, (p. 3-186)
[spacer] f<> : Not ready 042 140
0: No Fig. 3-144, (p. 3-186)
[spacer] f<> : Blocked b y V< 042 102
0: No Fig. 3-144, (p. 3-186)

Fig. 3-145, (p. 3-187)
[spacer] f<> : S tarting f1 042 107
0: No Fig. 3-147, (p. 3-189)
[spacer] f<> : S tarting f1/df1 042 108
0: No Fig. 3-147, (p. 3-189)
[spacer] f<> : De lta f1 t rigge red 042 109
0: No Fig. 3-147, (p. 3-189)
[spacer] f<> : De lta t1 e laps ed 042 110
0: No Fig. 3-147, (p. 3-189)
[spacer] f<> : Trip signal f1 042 111
0: No Fig. 3-147, (p. 3-189)
0: No
[spacer] f<> : S tarting f2/df2 042 116
0: No
[spacer] f<> : De lta f2 t rigge red 042 117
0: No
8-110 P632/EN M/R-a5-B // P632‑312‑660

Parameter Address
0: No
0: No
0: No
[spacer] f<> : S tarting f3 /df3 042 124
0: No
[spacer] f<> : De lta f3 t ri gge red 042 125
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
[spacer] f<> : S tarting f4 /df4 042 132
0: No
[spacer] f<> : De lta f4 t ri gge red 042 133
0: No
0: No
0: No
P632/EN M/R-a5-B // P632‑312‑660 8-111

Parameter Address
Overfluxing protec‐ V/f : Block. tV/ f> EX T 035 196
tion
0: No
[spacer] V/f : Block. replica EXT 035 197
0: No
[spacer] V/f : Block. tV/ f>> EX T 035 199
0: No
[spacer] V/f : R e set re plica EX T 035 182
0: No
[spacer] V/f : Enabled 041 229
0: No Fig. 3-148, (p. 3-191)
[spacer] V/f : R e set re plica 035 184
0: No Fig. 3-155, (p. 3-196)
[spacer] V/f : S t art ing V/f> 041 230
0: No Fig. 3-150, (p. 3-192)
[spacer] V/f : tV/f > elaps e d 041 231
0: No Fig. 3-150, (p. 3-192)
[spacer] V/f : S t art ing V/f(t) 041 232
0: No Fig. 3-154, (p. 3-195)
[spacer] V/f : T r ip s ignal t V/f(t ) 041 233
0: No Fig. 3-154, (p. 3-195)
[spacer] V/f : S t art ing V/f>> 041 234
0: No Fig. 3-151, (p. 3-192)
[spacer] V/f : tV/f >> e lap sed 041 235
0: No Fig. 3-151, (p. 3-192)
[spacer] V/f : Buff er em pty 041 236
1: Yes Fig. 3-154, (p. 3-195)
8-112 P632/EN M/R-a5-B // P632‑312‑660

Parameter Address
Current transformer CTS : Blocking EXT 036 160
supervision
0: No
[spacer] CTS : R e set lat ch. E X T 036 158
0: No
[spacer] CTS : Enable d 036 080
0: No Fig. 3-156, (p. 3-197)
[spacer] CTS : R e set lat ching 036 159
0: No
[spacer] CTS : Oper ate d (updati ng) 036 099
0: No Fig. 3-161, (p. 3-201)
[spacer] CTS : Oper ate d (latche d) 036 202
0: No Fig. 3-161, (p. 3-201)
[spacer] CTS : Idiff> (CTS)acti ve 036 203
0: No Fig. 3-161, (p. 3-201)
[spacer] CTS : Alarm end a (updat .) 036 081
0: No Fig. 3-162, (p. 3-201)
[spacer] CTS : Alarm end a (lat ch. ) 036 204
0: No Fig. 3-162, (p. 3-201)
[spacer] CTS : Alarm end a 036 205
0: No Fig. 3-162, (p. 3-201)
[spacer] CTS : Alarm end b (updat.) 036 082
0: No
[spacer] CTS : Alarm end b (l atch.) 036 206
0: No
[spacer] CTS : Alarm end b 036 207
0: No
P632/EN M/R-a5-B // P632‑312‑660 8-113

Parameter Address
Measuring-circuit MCM _1: Blocking E X T 036 213
monitoring
0: No
[spacer] MCM _1: Enable d 036 194
0: No Fig. 3-163, (p. 3-202)
[spacer] MCM _1: Meas . circ. I fault y 036 198
0: No Fig. 3-164, (p. 3-203)
[spacer] MCM _1: Starting 036 212
0: No Fig. 3-164, (p. 3-203)
Parameter Address
Measuring-circuit MCM _2: Blocking E X T 036 215
monitoring
0: No
[spacer] MCM _2: Enable d 036 195
0: No
[spacer] MCM _2: Meas . circ. I fault y 036 199
0: No
[spacer] MCM _2: Starting 036 214
0: No
8-114 P632/EN M/R-a5-B // P632‑312‑660

Parameter Address
Circuit breaker CBF_1: Enable EXT 038 041
failure protection
2: Not configured
[spacer] CBF_1: Disable EX T 038 042
2: Not configured
[spacer] CBF_1: Blocking E XT 038 058
0: No
[spacer] CBF_1: CB faulty EX T 038 234
0: No
[spacer] CBF_1: Start e nable EXT 038 209
1: Yes
[spacer] CBF_1: Start 3p EX T 038 205
0: No
[spacer] CBF_1: Starting t ri g. E X T 038 016
0: No
[spacer] CBF_1: Ext ./use r enabl ed 038 040
1: Yes Fig. 3-166, (p. 3-205)
[spacer] CBF_1: Enable d 040 055
0: No Fig. 3-166, (p. 3-205)
[spacer] CBF_1: Ready 038 009
0: No Fig. 3-167, (p. 3-206)
[spacer] CBF_1: Not re ady 040 025
1: Yes Fig. 3-167, (p. 3-206)
[spacer] CBF_1: Startup 3 p 038 211
0: No Fig. 3-170, (p. 3-209)

Fig. 3-171, (p. 3-211)
[spacer] CBF_1: Trip sig nal t1 038 215
0: No Fig. 3-172, (p. 3-212)
0: No Fig. 3-172, (p. 3-212)
[spacer] CBF_1: Trip command t 1 038 220
0: No Fig. 3-173, (p. 3-212)
0: No Fig. 3-173, (p. 3-212)
[spacer] CBF_1: CB failure 043 181
0: No
[spacer] CBF_1: Starting 038 021
0: No Fig. 3-174, (p. 3-213)
P632/EN M/R-a5-B // P632‑312‑660 8-115

Parameter Address
[spacer] CBF_1: Trip sig nal 040 026
0: No Fig. 3-174, (p. 3-213)
[spacer] CBF_1: CB pos . impl aus ible 038 210
0: No Fig. 3-169, (p. 3-208)
[spacer] CBF_1: Fault b ehind CB 038 225
0: No Fig. 3-175, (p. 3-213)
[spacer] CBF_1: CBs ync.s upe rv A ope n 038 227
0: No Fig. 3-176, (p. 3-214)
[spacer] CBF_1: CBs ync.s upe rv B ope n 038 228
0: No Fig. 3-176, (p. 3-214)
[spacer] CBF_1: CBs ync.s upe rv C open 038 229
0: No Fig. 3-176, (p. 3-214)
[spacer] CBF_1: TripS ig CBs ync.super 038 226
0: No Fig. 3-176, (p. 3-214)
[spacer] CBF_1: Current f low A 038 230
0: No Fig. 3-168, (p. 3-207)
[spacer] CBF_1: Current f low B 038 231
0: No Fig. 3-168, (p. 3-207)
[spacer] CBF_1: Current f low C 038 232
0: No Fig. 3-168, (p. 3-207)
[spacer] CBF_1: Current f low P hx 038 233
0: No Fig. 3-168, (p. 3-207)
[spacer] CBF_1: Current f low N 038 235
0: No Fig. 3-168, (p. 3-207)
[spacer]
Signal that the residual current is greater than the set value CBF_1: IN<.
8-116 P632/EN M/R-a5-B // P632‑312‑660

Parameter Address
Circuit breaker CBF_2: Enable EXT 043 070
failure protection
2: Not configured
[spacer] CBF_2: Disable EX T 043 071
2: Not configured
[spacer] CBF_2: Blocking E XT 043 072
0: No
[spacer] CBF_2: CB faulty EX T 043 177
0: No
[spacer] CBF_2: Start e nable EXT 043 085
1: Yes
[spacer] CBF_2: Start 3p EX T 043 084
0: No
[spacer] CBF_2: Starting t ri g. E X T 043 083
0: No
[spacer] CBF_2: Ext ./use r enabl ed 043 073
1: Yes
[spacer] CBF_2: Enable d 043 074
0: No
[spacer] CBF_2: Ready 043 076
0: No
[spacer] CBF_2: Not re ady 043 077
1: Yes
[spacer] CBF_2: Startup 3 p 043 087
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
[spacer] CBF_2: CB failure 043 182
0: No
[spacer] CBF_2: Starting 043 042
0: No
P632/EN M/R-a5-B // P632‑312‑660 8-117

Parameter Address
[spacer] CBF_2: Trip sig nal 043 046
0: No
[spacer] CBF_2: CB pos . impl aus ible 043 086
0: No
[spacer] CBF_2: Fault b ehind CB 043 092
0: No
[spacer] CBF_2: CBs ync.s upe rv A ope n 043 094
0: No
[spacer] CBF_2: CBs ync.s upe rv B ope n 043 095
0: No
[spacer] CBF_2: CBs ync.s upe rv C open 043 096
0: No
[spacer] CBF_2: TripS ig CBs ync.super 043 093
0: No
[spacer] CBF_2: Current f low A 043 164
0: No
[spacer] CBF_2: Current f low B 043 165
0: No
[spacer] CBF_2: Current f low C 043 166
0: No
[spacer] CBF_2: Current f low P hx 043 167
0: No
[spacer] CBF_2: Current f low N 043 185
0: No
8-118 P632/EN M/R-a5-B // P632‑312‑660

Parameter Address
Limit value LIMIT : Enabled 040 074
monitoring
0: No Fig. 3-177, (p. 3-216)
[spacer] LIMIT : St arting IDC ,lin> 040 180
0: No Fig. 3-177, (p. 3-216)
[spacer] LIMIT : St arting IDC ,lin>> 040 181
0: No Fig. 3-177, (p. 3-216)
[spacer] LIMIT : tIDC,lin> elaps ed 040 182
0: No Fig. 3-177, (p. 3-216)
[spacer] LIMIT : tIDC,lin>> elaps ed 040 183
0: No Fig. 3-177, (p. 3-216)
[spacer] LIMIT : St arting IDC ,lin< 040 184
0: No Fig. 3-177, (p. 3-216)
[spacer] LIMIT : St arting IDC ,lin<< 040 185
0: No Fig. 3-177, (p. 3-216)
[spacer] LIMIT : tIDC,lin< elaps ed 040 186
0: No Fig. 3-177, (p. 3-216)
[spacer] LIMIT : tIDC,lin<< elaps ed 040 187
0: No Fig. 3-177, (p. 3-216)
[spacer] LIMIT : St arting T > 040 170
0: No Fig. 3-178, (p. 3-217)
[spacer] LIMIT : St arting T >> 040 171
0: No Fig. 3-178, (p. 3-217)
[spacer] LIMIT : tT > elaps ed 040 172
0: No Fig. 3-178, (p. 3-217)
[spacer] LIMIT : tT >> elaps ed 040 173
0: No Fig. 3-178, (p. 3-217)
[spacer] LIMIT : St arting T < 040 174
0: No Fig. 3-178, (p. 3-217)
[spacer] LIMIT : St arting T << 040 175
0: No Fig. 3-178, (p. 3-217)
[spacer] LIMIT : tT < elaps ed 040 176
0: No Fig. 3-178, (p. 3-217)
[spacer] LIMIT : tT << elaps ed 040 177
0: No Fig. 3-178, (p. 3-217)
P632/EN M/R-a5-B // P632‑312‑660 8-119

Parameter Address
Limit value LIM_1: Enabled 040 123
monitoring
0: No Fig. 3-180, (p. 3-219)
[spacer] LIM_1: tI > e laps ed 040 122
0: No Fig. 3-180, (p. 3-219)
[spacer] LIM_1: tI >> elapsed 037 201
0: No Fig. 3-180, (p. 3-219)
[spacer] LIM_1: tI < e laps ed 037 202
0: No Fig. 3-180, (p. 3-219)
[spacer] LIM_1: tI << elapsed 037 203
0: No Fig. 3-180, (p. 3-219)
Parameter Address
Limit value LIM_2: Enabled 040 125
monitoring
0: No
[spacer] LIM_2: tI > e laps ed 040 124
0: No
[spacer] LIM_2: tI >> elapsed 038 201
0: No
[spacer] LIM_2: tI < e laps ed 038 202
0: No
[spacer] LIM_2: tI << elapsed 038 203
0: No
8-120 P632/EN M/R-a5-B // P632‑312‑660

Parameter Address
Transformer TR MON: Ins ul. Alarm 1 EX T 016 241
monitoring
0: No
[spacer] TR MON: B uchhol z Alarm 1 EX T 016 242
0: No
[spacer] TR MON: B uchhol z T ri p 1 E X T 016 243
0: No
[spacer] TR MON: Ins ul. Alarm 2 EX T 016 244
0: No
0: No
0: No
[spacer] TR MON: Ins ul. Alarm 3 EX T 016 247
0: No
0: No
0: No
[spacer] TR MON: Ins ul. Alarm 1 016 250
0: No Fig. 3-181, (p. 3-220)
[spacer] TR MON: B uchhol z Alarm 1 016 251
0: No Fig. 3-181, (p. 3-220)
[spacer] TR MON: B uchhol z T ri p 1 016 252
0: No Fig. 3-181, (p. 3-220)
0: No Fig. 3-181, (p. 3-220)
0: No Fig. 3-181, (p. 3-220)
0: No Fig. 3-181, (p. 3-220)
0: No Fig. 3-181, (p. 3-220)
0: No Fig. 3-181, (p. 3-220)
0: No Fig. 3-181, (p. 3-220)
P632/EN M/R-a5-B // P632‑312‑660 8-121

Parameter Address
Programmable Logic LOG_2: Enable d

011 138
0: No Fig. 3-184, (p. 3-224)
[spacer] LOG_2: Out put 1 052 032
0: No Fig. 3-184, (p. 3-224)
[spacer] LOG_2: Out put 1 (t ) 052 033
0: No Fig. 3-184, (p. 3-224)
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
8-122 P632/EN M/R-a5-B // P632‑312‑660

Parameter Address
Programmable Logic LOGIC: Input 01 EXT

034 000
0: No
[spacer] LOGIC: Input 02 EXT 034 001
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
P632/EN M/R-a5-B // P632‑312‑660 8-123

Parameter Address
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
8-124 P632/EN M/R-a5-B // P632‑312‑660

Parameter Address
0: No
0: No
[spacer] LOGIC: Se t 1 EXT 034 051
2: Not configured
2: Not configured
2: Not configured
2: Not configured
2: Not configured
2: Not configured
2: Not configured
2: Not configured
[spacer] LOGIC: Re s e t 1 E XT 034 059
2: Not configured
2: Not configured
2: Not configured
2: Not configured
2: Not configured
2: Not configured
2: Not configured
2: Not configured
[spacer] LOGIC: 1 has been s et 034 067
0: No Fig. 3-182, (p. 3-222)
P632/EN M/R-a5-B // P632‑312‑660 8-125

Parameter Address
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
[spacer] LOGIC: 1 se t e xternally 034 075
0: No Fig. 3-182, (p. 3-222)
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
[spacer] LOGIC: Enabled 034 046
0: No Fig. 3-183, (p. 3-223)
[spacer] LOGIC: Output 01 042 032
0: No Fig. 3-183, (p. 3-223)
[spacer] LOGIC: Output 01 (t) 042 033
0: No Fig. 3-183, (p. 3-223)
0: No
8-126 P632/EN M/R-a5-B // P632‑312‑660

Parameter Address
[spacer] LOGIC: Output 0 2 (t) 042 035
0: No
[spacer] LOGIC: Output 0 3 042 036
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
P632/EN M/R-a5-B // P632‑312‑660 8-127

Parameter Address
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
8-128 P632/EN M/R-a5-B // P632‑312‑660

Parameter Address
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
P632/EN M/R-a5-B // P632‑312‑660 8-129

Parameter Address
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
8-130 P632/EN M/R-a5-B // P632‑312‑660

Parameter Address
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
P632/EN M/R-a5-B // P632‑312‑660 8-131

Parameter Address
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
8-132 P632/EN M/R-a5-B // P632‑312‑660

Parameter Address
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
P632/EN M/R-a5-B // P632‑312‑660 8-133

Parameter Address
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
8-134 P632/EN M/R-a5-B // P632‑312‑660

Parameter Address
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
P632/EN M/R-a5-B // P632‑312‑660 8-135

Parameter Address
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
8-136 P632/EN M/R-a5-B // P632‑312‑660

Parameter Address
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
[spacer] LOGIC: Output10 0 047 070
0: No
[spacer] LOGIC: Output10 0 ( t ) 047 071
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
P632/EN M/R-a5-B // P632‑312‑660 8-137

Parameter Address
[spacer] LOGIC: Output107 047 084
0: No
[spacer] LOGIC: Output107 ( t ) 047 085
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
8-138 P632/EN M/R-a5-B // P632‑312‑660

Parameter Address
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
P632/EN M/R-a5-B // P632‑312‑660 8-139

Parameter Address
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
8-140 P632/EN M/R-a5-B // P632‑312‑660

Parameter Address
External device DEV01: Open s ignal E X T 210 030
0: No
[spacer] DEV01: Clos e d signal EXT 210 031
0: No
[spacer] DEV01: Control st at e 210 018
0: Intermediate pos. Fig. 3-195, (p. 3-235)

Fig. 3-201, (p. 3-245)
[spacer] DEV01: S witch. devi ce ope n 210 036
0: No Fig. 3-195, (p. 3-235)

Fig. 3-201, (p. 3-245)
[spacer] DEV01: S witch.dev ice c los ed 210 037
0: No Fig. 3-195, (p. 3-235)

Fig. 3-201, (p. 3-245)
[spacer] DEV01: De v. inte rm./flt .pos 210 038
0: No Fig. 3-195, (p. 3-235)

Fig. 3-201, (p. 3-245)
[spacer] DEV01: Open command 210 028
0: No Fig. 3-200, (p. 3-242)
[spacer] DEV01: Clos e command 210 029
0: No Fig. 3-200, (p. 3-242)
[spacer] DEV01: Open cmd. rece iv e d 218 000
0: No Fig. 3-196, (p. 3-237)
[spacer] DEV01: Clos e cmd. re ce ive d 218 001
0: No Fig. 3-196, (p. 3-237)
[spacer] DEV01: Warning op. count . 219 081
0: No
0: No
0: No
[spacer]
Warning that the number of switching commands has exceeded the set limit
value.
P632/EN M/R-a5-B // P632‑312‑660 8-141

Parameter Address
0: No
0: No
[spacer] DEV02: Control s tat e 210 068
[spacer] DEV02: S witch. d evi ce ope n 210 086
0: No
0: No
[spacer] DEV02: De v. interm./flt .pos 210 088
0: No
0: No
0: No
[spacer] DEV02: Open cm d. rece iv e d 218 002
0: No
0: No
8-142 P632/EN M/R-a5-B // P632‑312‑660

Parameter Address
0: No
0: No
[spacer] DEV03: Control st at e 210 118
[spacer] DEV03: S witch. devi ce ope n 210 136
0: No
0: No
[spacer] DEV03: De v. inte rm./flt .pos 210 138
0: No
0: No
0: No
[spacer] DEV03: Open cmd. rece iv e d 218 004
0: No
0: No
P632/EN M/R-a5-B // P632‑312‑660 8-143

Parameter Address
Single-pole signals SIG_1: S ignal S 00 1 EX T 226 004
0: No
[spacer] SIG_1: Logic s ignal S0 0 1 226 005
0: No Fig. 3-206, (p. 3-254)
[spacer] SIG_1: S ignal S 00 2 EX T 226 012
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
8-144 P632/EN M/R-a5-B // P632‑312‑660

Parameter Address
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
[spacer] SIG_1: S IG_DC 3 EXT 233 004
0: No
[spacer] SIG_1: Logic S IG_DC3 233 005
0: No
P632/EN M/R-a5-B // P632‑312‑660 8-145

Parameter Address
Single-pole CMD_1: Com mand C 0 01 200 001
commands
0: No Fig. 3-205, (p. 3-252)
[spacer] CMD_1: Com mand C 0 02 200 006
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
[spacer] CMD_1: CMD_DC3 202 011
0: No
8-146 P632/EN M/R-a5-B // P632‑312‑660

Parameter Address
Interlocking logic ILOCK: Output 1 250 032
0: No Fig. 3-204, (p. 3-250)
[spacer] ILOCK: Output 2 250 033
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
P632/EN M/R-a5-B // P632‑312‑660 8-147

Parameter Address
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
[spacer]
Output of the respective equation of the interlocking logic.
These logic state signals are transmitted with the request for a switching
operation, and cyclically (according to the setting ILO CK: Cycle t
inte rl.che ck).
8-148 P632/EN M/R-a5-B // P632‑312‑660

Parameter Address
Binary counts COUNT : Se t counte r 1 E X T 217 130
0: No
[spacer] COUNT : Se t counte r 2 E X T 217 085
0: No
0: No
0: No
[spacer] COUNT : Transmit count s E XT 217 009
0: No
[spacer] COUNT : Re s e t EX T 217 004
0: No
[spacer] COUNT : Enab led 217 001
0: No Fig. 3-211, (p. 3-260)
[spacer] COUNT : Transmit count s 217 010
0: No Fig. 3-211, (p. 3-260)
[spacer] COUNT : Re s e t 217 005
0: No Fig. 3-211, (p. 3-260)
[spacer] COUNT : Warnin g count 1 217 191
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
[spacer]
Warning that the counter value has exceeded the set limit value.
8.1.2 Control and Testing
Parameter Address
Local control panel LOC: Param . change enabl. 003 010
0: No
[spacer]
Setting the enable for changing values from the local control panel.
P632/EN M/R-a5-B // P632‑312‑660 8-149

Parameter Address
“Logical” COMM 1: Se l.s pont an.s ig.te st 003 180
communication
interface 1
[spacer]
Signal selection for testing purposes.
[spacer] COMM 1: Tes t s pont .s ig.s t ar t 003 184
[spacer]
Triggering of transmission of a selected signal as “starting”.
[spacer] COMM 1: Tes t s pont .s ig. end 003 186
[spacer]
Triggering of transmission of a selected signal as “ending”.
[spacer] COMM 1: Se l. pos . dev. tes t 221 105
0: Not assigned
[spacer]
Select a device DEVxx for testing the transmission of switchgear device position
in monitoring direction.
[spacer] COMM 1: Tes t p osition de v. 221 106
0: don't execute
[spacer]
Carry out a test to check the transmission of switchgear device position in
monitoring direction for the device selected at C OMM1: S el. pos .
dev.test.
Parameter Address
“Logical” COMM 2: Se l.s pont an.s ig.te st 103 180
communication
interface 2
[spacer]
Signal selection for testing purposes.
[spacer] COMM 2: Tes t s pont .s ig.s t ar t 103 184
[spacer]
Triggering of transmission of a selected signal as "starting".
[spacer] COMM 2: Tes t s pont .s ig. end 103 186
[spacer]
Triggering of transmission of a selected signal as "ending".
8-150 P632/EN M/R-a5-B // P632‑312‑660

Parameter Address
IEC 61850 IEC: Se l.s pontan.si g.t est 104 245
Communication
[spacer] IEC: Tes t sp ont.sig.s tar t 104 246
[spacer] IEC: Tes t sp ont.sig. end 104 247
[spacer] IEC: Se l. pos . DE V te st 104 248
0: Not assigned
[spacer] IEC: Tes t pos ition DEV 104 249
0: don't execute
Parameter Address
Measured data input MEASI: Re set Tmax US ER

003 045
0: don't execute
[spacer]
Resetting measured maximum temperatures Tmax and Tmax Tx (x=1...9) to
updated measured values.
Parameter Address
Binary and analog OUTP: Re s e t latch. US ER 021 009
output
[spacer]
Reset of latched output relays from the user interface.
[spacer] OUTP: Re lay assign. f.t e st 003 042
[spacer]
Selection of the relay to be tested.
[spacer] OUTP: Re lay te st 003 043
[spacer]
The relay selected for testing is triggered for the duration set at OUTP: H ol d -
time f or tes t.
[spacer] OUTP: Hold- tim e for t e st 003 044
1 1 10 s Fig. 3-37, (p. 3-58)
[spacer]
Setting for the time period for which the selected output relay is triggered for
functional testing.
P632/EN M/R-a5-B // P632‑312‑660 8-151

Parameter Address
Measured data MEASO: Rese t output USE R 037 116
output
[spacer]
Resetting the measured data output function.
8-152 P632/EN M/R-a5-B // P632‑312‑660

Parameter Address
Main function MAIN: General re s et USER 003 002
[spacer]
Reset of the following memories:
● All counters
● LED indicators
● Operating data memory
● All event memories
● Event counters
● Fault data
● Measured overload data
● Recorded fault values
[spacer] MAIN: Re s e t indicat. USE R 021 010
0: No Fig. 3-73, (p. 3-103)
[spacer]
Reset of the following displays:
● LED indicators
● Fault data
[spacer] MAIN: Rs e t .lat ch.t rip US ER 021 005
[spacer]
Reset of latched trip commands from the local control panel.
[spacer] MAIN: Re s e t c. cl/ t r. cUS ER 003 007
[spacer]
The counters for counting the close and trip commands are reset.
[spacer] MAIN: Re s e t IP,max,s t .USER 003 033
[spacer]
The values for the delayed stored maximum phase current are reset (for all
ends).
[spacer] MAIN: Group res e t 1 USER 005 253
[spacer] MAIN: Group res e t 2 USER 005 254
[spacer]
Group of resetting commands.
[spacer] MAIN: Man. trip cmd. US ER 003 040
[spacer]
A 100 ms trip command is issued from the local control panel.
Note: The command is only executed if the manual trip command has been
configured as trip command 1 or 2.
P632/EN M/R-a5-B // P632‑312‑660 8-153

Parameter Address
[spacer] MAIN: Sof t War m re st art 003 039
0: don't execute
[spacer]
A warm restart of the software is carried out. The device functions as it does
when the power supply is turned on, except that no hardware tests are carried
out.
[spacer] MAIN: Warm re star t 010 166
0: don't execute
[spacer]
A warm restart is carried out. The device functions as it does when the power
supply is turned on.
[spacer] MAIN: Sof t Cold re star t 000 085
0: don't execute
[spacer]
A cold restart of the software is carried out. This means that all settings and
recordings are cleared, but no tests of the hardware are carried out during the
restart. Parameter values used by the P632 after a cold restart have been
selected in such a manner that the P632 is blocked after a cold restart.
[spacer] MAIN: Cold rest art 009 254
0: don't execute
[spacer]
A cold restart is carried out. A cold restart means that all settings and recordings
are cleared. Parameter values used by the P632 after a cold restart have been
selected in such a manner that the P632 is blocked after a cold restart.
Parameter Address
Operating data OP_R C: Res e t record. USE R 100 001
recording
[spacer]
The operating data memory and the counter for operation signals are reset.
Parameter Address
Monitoring signal MT _RC: Res et record. USE R 003 008
recording
[spacer]
Reset of the monitoring signal memory.
8-154 P632/EN M/R-a5-B // P632‑312‑660

Parameter Address
Overload recording OL_RC: R e s et rec ord. US E R 100 003
[spacer]
Reset of the overload memory.
Parameter Address
Fault recording FT_RC: Trigg er US E R 003 041
[spacer]
Fault recording is enabled from the local control panel for 500 ms.
[spacer] FT_RC: Res et record. USE R 003 006
[spacer]
Reset of the following memories:
● LED indicators
● Fault memory
● Fault counter
● Fault data
● Recorded fault values
Parameter Address
Thermal overload THRM 1: R es e t re pli ca US ER 039 120
protection
[spacer]
Reset of the thermal replica of the thermal overload protection 1.
Parameter Address
Over-/ f<> : R es e t me as.val. US E R 003 080
tection
0: don't execute
[spacer]
Resetting the measured event values f<>: M ax. frequ. for
f> and f<>: Min. fre qu. for f<.
P632/EN M/R-a5-B // P632‑312‑660 8-155

Parameter Address
Overfluxing protec‐ V/f : R e set re plica USE R 035 183
tion
Parameter Address
Current transformer CTS : R e set lat ch. US E R 036 157
supervision
Parameter Address
Circuit breaker CBF_1: Enable USER 003 016
failure protection
[spacer]
Circuit breaker failure protection is enabled from the local control panel.
[spacer] CBF_1: Disable USE R 003 015
[spacer]
Circuit breaker failure protection is disabled from the local control panel.
Parameter Address
Circuit breaker CBF_2: Enable USER 003 124
failure protection
0: don't execute
[spacer] CBF_2: Disable USE R 003 123
0: don't execute
8-156 P632/EN M/R-a5-B // P632‑312‑660

Parameter Address
Programmable Logic LOGIC: Trigger 1

034 038
0: No Fig. 3-183, (p. 3-223)
[spacer] LOGIC: Trigger 2 034 039
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No Fig. 3-183, (p. 3-223)
[spacer]
Intervention in the logic at the appropriate point by a 100 ms pulse.
Parameter Address
Binary counts COUNT : Transmit count s USE R 217 008
[spacer]
Count transmission.
[spacer] COUNT : Re s e t USE R 217 003
[spacer]
Count reset.
8.1.3 Operating Data Recording
Parameter Address
Operating data OP_R C: Ope rat. data re cor d. 003 024
recording
0 0 1000 Fig. 3-79, (p. 3-111)
[spacer]
Point of entry into the operating data log.
P632/EN M/R-a5-B // P632‑312‑660 8-157

Parameter Address
Monitoring signal MT _RC: Mon. s ignal rec ord. 003 001
recording
0 0 30 Fig. 3-80, (p. 3-112)
[spacer]
Point of entry into the monitoring signal log.
8-158 P632/EN M/R-a5-B // P632‑312‑660

8.2 Events
8.2.1 Event Counters
Parameter Address
Main function MAIN: No. g ene ral s tart . 004 000
[spacer]
Number of general starting signals.
[spacer] MAIN: CB1 act. oper . cap. 221 087
1 1 99
[spacer]
Setting for the maximum number of CB operations for an ARC cycle (or for a
limited time period).
[spacer] MAIN: No. g en.t ri p cmds . 1 004 006
[spacer]
Number of general trip commands 1.
[spacer]
[spacer]
[spacer]
[spacer] MAIN: No. m otor dri ve op. 221 025
0: don't execute
[spacer]
Number of times external devices with direct motor control are activated during
the monitoring time.
Parameter Address
Operating data OP_R C: No. oper. data sig. 100 002
recording
0 0 1000 Fig. 3-79, (p. 3-111)
[spacer]
Number of signals stored in the operating data memory.
P632/EN M/R-a5-B // P632‑312‑660 8-159

Parameter Address
Monitoring signal MT _RC: No. m onit. signals 004 019
recording
0 0 30 Fig. 3-80, (p. 3-112)
[spacer]
Number of signals stored in the monitoring signal memory.
Parameter Address
Overload recording OL_RC: No. overload 004 101
0 0 9999 Fig. 3-83, (p. 3-115)
[spacer]
Number of overload events.
Parameter Address
Fault recording FT_RC: No. of f aults 004 020
0 0 9999 Fig. 3-90, (p. 3-125)
[spacer]
Number of faults.
[spacer] FT_RC: No. sys te m dis t urb. 004 010
0 0 9999 Fig. 3-90, (p. 3-125)
[spacer]
Number of system disturbances.
Parameter Address
Definite-time over‐ DTOC1: No. ge neral s tart . 009 150
current protection
[spacer] DTOC2: No. ge neral s tart . 009 160
0: don't execute
[spacer] IDMT1: No. gener al st art . 009 151
[spacer] IDMT2: No. gener al st art . 009 161
0: don't execute
[spacer]
Number of general starting signals.
8-160 P632/EN M/R-a5-B // P632‑312‑660

Parameter Address
External device DEV01: Operation counte r 210 043
0 0 65535
[spacer] DEV02: Operation counte r 210 093
0 0 65535
[spacer] DEV03: Operation counte r 210 143
0 0 65535
[spacer]
Number of switching operations made. It is also possible to manually set this
counter to any value from 0 to 65535.
[spacer] DEV01: De v. op. c apabi li ty 210 003
1 1 99
1 1 99
1 1 99
[spacer]
Number of remaining switching operations. It is also possible to manually set
this counter to any value from 1 to 99.
P632/EN M/R-a5-B // P632‑312‑660 8-161

8.2.2 Measured Event Data
Parameter Address
Overload data OL_DA: Ove rload dur ation 004 102
acquisition
Not measured 0.0 6500.0 s Fig. 3-81, (p. 3-113)
[spacer]
Duration of the overload event.
[spacer] OL_DA: S tatus TH RM1 replica 004 155
Not measured 0 250 % Fig. 3-82, (p. 3-114)
[spacer]
Display of the buffer content of the thermal overload protection function THRM1
or THRM2, respectively.
[spacer] OL_DA: L oad curre nt T HRM 1 004 159
[spacer]
Display of the load current used by the thermal overload protection function to
calculate the tripping time.
[spacer] OL_DA: Ob ject t emp. THRM1 004 156
[spacer]
Display of the temperature of the protected object as determined by function
THRM1 or THRM2, respectively.
[spacer] OL_DA: C oolant temp.THRM1 004 157
[spacer] OL_DA: C oolant temp.THRM2 004 187
[spacer]
Display of the coolant temperature of the protected object.
Depending on the setting at THRM1: Se le ct C TA PS x for coolant
temperature acquisition, one of the following values will be displayed:
● THR M1: S e le ct C TA P Sx = Default temp. value: Display of the set
temperature value.
● T HR M1: S elect CT A PS x = From PT100: Display of the temperature
measured by the resistance thermometer.
● THRM 1: Se le ct C TA P Sx = From 20 mA input: Display of the
temperature measured via the 20 mA input.
[spacer] OL_DA: Pre - trip t .le ft THR M1 004 158
Not measured 0.0 1000.0 min Fig. 3-82, (p. 3-114)
[spacer]
THRM1 or THRM2, respectively, will reach the tripping threshold.
8-162 P632/EN M/R-a5-B // P632‑312‑660

Parameter Address
[spacer] OL_DA: Of fs et THRM1 re plica 004 191
[spacer]
Display of the additional reserve if the coolant temperature is taken into
account. This display is relevant if the coolant temperature has been set to a
value below the maximum permissible coolant temperature or, in other words, if
the thermal model has been shifted downwards.
If, on the other hand, the coolant temperature and the maximum permissible
coolant temperature have been set to the same value, then the coolant
temperature is not taken into account and the characteristic is a function of the
current only. The additional reserve amounts to 0 in this case.
[spacer] OL_DA: S tatus THRM2 replica 004 185
Not measured 0 250 %
[spacer]
Display of the buffer content of the thermal overload protection function, THRM1
or THRM2.
[spacer] OL_DA: L oad curre nt T HRM 2 004 189
[spacer]
Display of the load current used by the thermal overload protection function,
THRM1 or THRM2, respectively, to calculate the tripping time.
[spacer] OL_DA: Ob ject t emp. THRM2 004 186
[spacer]
Display of the temperature of the protected object.
[spacer] OL_DA: Pre - trip t .le ft THR M2 004 188
Not measured 0.0 1000.0 min
[spacer]
will reach the trip threshold.
P632/EN M/R-a5-B // P632‑312‑660 8-163

Parameter Address
Fault data FT_DA: Fault d uration 008 010
acquisition
[spacer]
Display of the fault duration.
[spacer] FT_DA: Running t ime 004 021
[spacer]
Display of the running time.
[spacer] FT_DA: Fault d et er m. wi th 004 198
0: No fault Fig. 3-86, (p. 3-120)
[spacer]
This display indicates when the fault data were stored.
[spacer] FT_DA: Run tim e t o meas . 004 199
[spacer]
Display of the fault data acquisition time from the onset of the fault.
[spacer] FT_DA: Fault curr. P,A prim 010 199
[spacer] FT_DA: Fault curr. P,B prim 013 175
[spacer]
Display of the fault current as a primary quantity.
[spacer] FT_DA: Fault curr. N,A pr im 010 216
[spacer] FT_DA: Fault curr. N,B pr im 013 176
[spacer]
Display of the ground fault current as a primary quantity.
[spacer] FT_DA: Fault curr.IP, a p.u. 025 086
[spacer] FT_DA: Fault curr.IP, b p.u. 026 086
[spacer]
Display of the maximum phase current of the respective end at the data
acquisition time, referred to Inom.
[spacer] FT_DA: Fault curr.IN,a p.u. 025 087
[spacer] FT_DA: Fault curr.IN,b p.u. 026 087
[spacer]
Display of the residual current of the respective end, calculated by the P632 at
the data acquisition time, referred to Inom.
8-164 P632/EN M/R-a5-B // P632‑312‑660

Parameter Address
[spacer] FT_DA: Fault curr.IY,a p.u. 025 088
[spacer] FT_DA: Fault curr.IY,b p. u. 026 088
[spacer]
Display of the current value as a quantity referred to Inom measured by the P632
at the T14, T24 or T34 transformers and at the time at which acquisition of fault
data takes place.
[spacer] FT_DA: Diff. curre nt 1 005 082
[spacer]
[spacer] FT_DA: Diff.current 1 (2*f0) 005 084
[spacer]
Display of the differential current, measuring system 2, referred to Iref.
[spacer]
Display of the differential current, measuring system 3, referred to Iref.
[spacer] FT_DA: Re strain. cur re nt 1 005 083
[spacer]
[spacer]
[spacer]
Display of second harmonic in differential current, measuring system 2, referred
to Iref.
[spacer]
Display of the fifth harmonic component of the differential current, measuring
system 1, referred to Iref.
[spacer]
P632/EN M/R-a5-B // P632‑312‑660 8-165

Parameter Address
[spacer]
Display of the differential current for measuring system 1, 2 or 3, respectively,
referred to Iref.
[spacer]
Display of the second harmonic component of the differential current for
measuring system 1, 2 or 3, respectively, referred to Iref.
[spacer]
Display of the fifth harmonic component of the differential current for measuring
system 1, 2 or 3, respectively, referred to Iref.
[spacer]
Display of the restraining current for measuring system 1, 2 or 3, respectively,
referred to Iref.
[spacer] FT_DA: Diff. curre nt R EF_1 025 082
[spacer] FT_DA: Diff. curre nt R EF_2 026 082
[spacer]
Display of the differential current, determined by the ground differential
protection function (REF_1, REF_2 or REF_3, respectively), referred to Iref.
[spacer] FT_DA: Re strain.curr. RE F _1 025 083
[spacer] FT_DA: Re strain.curr. RE F _2 026 083
[spacer]
Display of the restraining current, determined by the ground differential
protection function (REF_1, REF_2 or REF_3, respectively), referred to Iref.
8-166 P632/EN M/R-a5-B // P632‑312‑660

Parameter Address
Over-/ f<> : M ax. frequ. for f> 005 002
tection
Not measured 12.00 70.00 Hz
[spacer]
Maximum frequency during an overfrequency condition.
[spacer] f<> : M in. frequ. for f< 005 001
Not measured 12.00 70.00 Hz
[spacer]
Minimum frequency during an underfrequency condition.
8.2.3 Event Recording
Parameter Address
Overload recording OL_RC: Over load re cor ding 1 033 020
0 0 9999 Fig. 3-84, (p. 3-116)
[spacer] OL_RC: Over load re cor ding 2 033 021
0 0 9999
0 0 9999
0 0 9999
0 0 9999
0 0 9999
0 0 9999
0 0 9999
[spacer]
Point of entry into the overload log.
P632/EN M/R-a5-B // P632‑312‑660 8-167

Parameter Address
Fault recording FT_RC: Fault recor ding 1 003 000
0 0 9999
[spacer] FT_RC: Fault recor ding 2 033 001
0 0 9999
0 0 9999
0 0 9999
0 0 9999
0 0 9999
0 0 9999
0 0 9999
[spacer]
Point of entry into the fault log.
8-168 P632/EN M/R-a5-B // P632‑312‑660

P632
9 IEC 61850 Settings via IED Configurator

This chapter lists all IEC 61850-specific settings, that are carried out with the
configuration tool “IED Configurator”.
The sequence in which the settings are listed and described in this chapter
corresponds to their sequence in the menu tree of the “IED Configurator”.
However, only those setting parameters are described that are mandatory for
establishing the IEC 61850 communication.
Further setting parameters are listed in the “Settings” chapter under the function
groups IEC and GOOSE. A list of all available Logical Nodes can be found in a
separate document.
P632/EN M/R-a5-B // P632‑312‑660 9-1

P632 9 IEC 61850 Settings via IED Configurator
9.1 Manage IED

The menu item “Manage IED” allows for establishing a connection between the
“IED Configurator” and the device.
The P632 features two memory “banks” one of which includes the active setting
parameters. The other memory bank is used with the configuration procedure for
parameters via “IED Configurator” or operating program.
Toggling between active and inactive memory bank is carried out either by
executing the parameter IEC: Switch Config. Bank or via “IED Configurator”
(after the connection has been established) by pressing the “Switch Banks”
button.
Parameter
Active Bank SCL File ID
Name of the configuration bank currently valid. Setting is carried out with the
IED Configurator, after a connection with the device has been established (via
menu item “Manage IED”).
SCL File Version
Version number of the configuration bank currently valid. Setting is carried out
with the IED Configurator, after a connection with the device has been
established (via menu item “Manage IED”).
Parameter
Inactive Bank SCL File ID
Name of the inactive configuration bank. Setting is carried out with the IED
Configurator, after a connection with the device has been established (via menu
item “Manage IED”).
SCL File Version
Version number of the inactive configuration bank. Setting is carried out with
the IED Configurator, after a connection with the device has been established
(via menu item “Manage IED”).
9-2 P632/EN M/R-a5-B // P632‑312‑660

9 IEC 61850 Settings via IED Configurator P632
9.2 IED Details

The category “IED Details” contains several settings that characterize the device
as well as the SCL file, which identifies the IEC 61850 configuration.
Parameter Default Value
SCL Details SCL File ID PX 632
Identification of the .MCL configuration file. If required, this preset value may be
modified by, for example, entering a bay name.
SCL File Version 250.2.01
Specific value to identify the IEC 61850 data model and configuration.
If required, this preset value may be modified by, for example, identifying the
revision states during engineering.
Parameter Address
IED Details Name 104 057
Explicitly assigned device name for the function in the system (IED); is part of
the Logical Device Name.
Important note: According to the IEC standard the name must consist of only
letters (A..Z, a..z), digits (0..9) and underscore characters (_), and the name
must start with a letter. Note that a non-standard name causes problems with
the IEC 61850 communication.
Parameter
Template Details ICD Template
SCL Schema Version
Description
Type
Configuration Revision
Supported Models
The values listed in the column “Template Details” only provide information.
They are preset and cannot be modified.
P632/EN M/R-a5-B // P632‑312‑660 9-3

9.3 Communications
The category “Communications” contains the general network-related settings.
Connected Sub- Connected Sub-Network NONE

Network
Optional name available to identify the Ethernet network.
Access Point AP1
Part of the communications control; preset, cannot be modified.
Parameter Default Value Address
Address IP Address 0.0.0.0 104 001

Configuration
Assigned IP address of the P632 for the server function in the system.
SubNet Mask 0.0.0.0 104 005
The subnet mask defines which part of the IP address is addressed by the sub-
network and which part by the device that is logged-on to the network.
Gateway Address 0.0.0.0 104 011
This parameter shows the IPv4 address of the network gateway for
General Media
Configuration
Network hardware provided as fiber optics (“Fibre”) or twisted pair copper wires
(“Copper”).
TCP Keepalive 5 seconds
Communication monitoring at TCP level.
Database Lock Timeout 2 minutes
Return time period for setting procedures that have commenced. (The default
value above is in seconds. The IED Configurator, however, displays converts this
to minutes.)
9-4 P632/EN M/R-a5-B // P632‑312‑660

9.4 SNTP
The category “SNTP” contains the clock synchronization settings.
9.4.1 General Config
Client Operation Poll Rate (seconds) 64
Polling interval for clock synchronization.
Accepted Stratum Level All levels (0 - 15)
Quality criterion to accept an SNTP server for clock synchronization; preset,

cannot be modified.
9.4.2 External Server 1

Settings for the primary clock synchronization server.
Note that all values except IP Address and the “Use Anycast” button are usually
disabled and may be accepted only when imported from an XML configuration
file.
External Server IP Address 0.0.0.0 104 202

Parameters
IP address of the preferred server used for clock synchronization.

Clicking the “Use Anycast” button in the IED Configurator changes the value
such that any server in the local network is appointed to provide clock
synchronization.
9.4.3 External Server 2

Settings for the backup clock synchronization server.
Note that all values except IP Address and the “Use Anycast” button are usually
disabled and may be accepted only when imported from an XML configuration
file.
External Server IP Address 0.0.0.0 104 210

Parameters
IP address of the backup server used for clock synchronization.

Clicking the “Use Anycast” button in the IED Configurator changes the value
such that any server in the local network is appointed to provide clock
synchronization.
P632/EN M/R-a5-B // P632‑312‑660 9-5

9.5 Dataset Definitions
Parameter
Dataset Definitions Name
Explicitly (and uniquely) assigned name for the dataset.
Location
Saving datasets at System/LLN0 is compulsory.
Contents
Content (data objects, data attributes) of a dataset.

The “GOOSE Capacity” display allows for checking the length of a dataset for
less than 1500 bytes to permit transmission in GOOSE messages.
Note: It is not possible to read the IEC configuration back from the P632 if the
“Dataset” sizes exceed the GOOSE size limit significantly. Too large a dataset
can spoil IEC61850 communication. Hence, the dataset size limit of 100% of the
9-6 P632/EN M/R-a5-B // P632‑312‑660

9.6 GOOSE Publishing
9.6.1 System/LLN0
Network Parameters Multicast MAC Address 01-0C-CD-01-00-00
Virtual MAC address that the sending device provides as the destination; preset.
Application ID (hex) 0000
Explicitly (and uniquely) assigned ID-number of the GOOSE.
VLAN Identifier (hex) 0
ID-number of the virtual LAN with which the GOOSE is sent; preset.
VLAN Priority 4
Priority with which the GOOSE is sent in the virtual LAN; preset.
Repeat Message Minimum Cycle Time 10 ms

Transmission
Parameters
First send repetition of the GOOSE occurring after the set time period; preset.
Maximum Cycle Time 1s
Continuous send repetition of the GOOSE occurring after the set time period;
preset.
Increment 900
Specification factor for the transition of time intervals for GOOSE send
repetitions from the first to the continuous repetition.
P632/EN M/R-a5-B // P632‑312‑660 9-7

Message Data GOOSE Identifier TEMPLATESystem/

Parameters LLN0$GO$gcb01
GOOSE ID consisting of the Device Name and the GOOSE Control Block.
Dataset Reference
Name of the dataset assigned to the GOOSE.
Configuration Revision 1
Revision status of the configuration.
9-8 P632/EN M/R-a5-B // P632‑312‑660

9.7 GOOSE Subscribing
9.7.1 Mapped Inputs
Source Network Multicast MAC Address 01-0C-CD-01-00-00

Parameters
Virtual MAC address used as a receive filter; preset.
ID-number of the GOOSE.
P632/EN M/R-a5-B // P632‑312‑660 9-9

GOOSE Source Source Path

Parameters
Information data attribute in the transmitting device.
GOOSE Identifier
ID of the GOOSE in the transmitting device.
Dataset Reference
Name of the dataset assigned to the GOOSE in the transmitting device.
Configuration revision status of the transmitting device.
Data Obj Index 1
Position index of the data object within the GOOSE.
Data Obj Type Unknown
Structure of the data object; possible settings:

● Unknown
● Boolean (logical value)
● Int8 (Integer, with 8 digits)
● UInt8 (Positive integer, with 8 digits)
● Float (Floating-point number)
● BStr2 (Binary state, with 2 digits)
● SPS (Single-pole signal)
● DPS (Two-pole signal)
Quality Obj Index 1
Distance of the quality descriptor to the data object if not preset. The quality of
the received information is to be tested if such has been configured.
9-10 P632/EN M/R-a5-B // P632‑312‑660

Destination Evaluation Expression Equal to

Parameters
Criteria to check the received information content by comparing it with a set

integer value; the parameter is not supported in the device.
● Equal to (Compared to: equal)
● Not equal to (Compared to: unequal)
● Greater than (Compared to: greater)
● Less than (Compared to: less)
● Pass through (Do not compare)
Default Input Value False
Default value for the information in case GOOSE receipt has failed.
● False – not set
● True – set
● Last Known Value – retain last value received
● Double Point: intermediate (00) – switching device in intermediate position
● Double Point: Off (01) – switching device open
● Double Point: On (10) – switching device closed
● Double Point: Bad state (11) – switching device in intermediate position
Invalidity Quality bits
Quality criterion, which is to be tested.

● Invalid / Questionable: Invalid / questionable
● Source: Information source is faulty
● Relay test: Sending device is set to test mode
● OperatorBlocked: Blocked by operator
and
● Overflow: Measured value has exceeded its capacity
● OutofRange: Measured value has exceeded its range
● BadReference: Referenced value is faulty
● Oscillatory: Value is volatile
● Failure: Faulty
● OldData: Information is out-of-date
● Inconsistent: Information is unreliable
● Inaccurate: Information is inaccurate
P632/EN M/R-a5-B // P632‑312‑660 9-11

9.8 Report Control Blocks
9.8.1 System/LLN0
Report Parameters Report Type
Report type:
● Unbuffered (updating)
● Buffered (saving)
Report ID TEMPLATESystem/
LLN0$RP
$urcbA, ...,
TEMPLATESystem/
LLN0$RP
$urcbP, ...,
TEMPLATESystem/
LLN0$BR
$brcbA, ...,
TEMPLATESystem/
LLN0$BR$brcbH
Report ID consisting of the Device Name and the Report Control Block.
Dataset Reference
Name of the dataset assigned to the report.
Revision status of the configuration.
9-12 P632/EN M/R-a5-B // P632‑312‑660

9.9 Controls
9.9.1 Control Objects
Control Object ctlModel sbo-with-

Parameters enhanced-security
To control external devices the following operating modes can be set:

● Status only (manually operated switching device)
● Direct control with enhanced security (direct command issue with
extended monitoring of command effecting)
● SBO (Select before operate) with enhanced security (switching device
selection procedure with extended monitoring of command effecting)
sboTimeout 120000
Return time period after selection without issuing a command.
9.9.2 Uniqueness of Control
Source Network Multicast MAC Address 01-0C-CD-01-00-00

Parameters
Virtual MAC address used as a receive filter; preset.
ID-number of the GOOSE.
P632/EN M/R-a5-B // P632‑312‑660 9-13

GOOSE Source Source Path

Parameters
Information data attribute in the transmitting device.
GOOSE Identifier
ID of the GOOSE in the transmitting device.
Dataset Reference
Name of the dataset assigned to the GOOSE in the transmitting device.
Configuration revision status of the transmitting device.
Data Obj Index 1
Position index of the data object within the GOOSE.
Default Input Value True
Default value for the information in case GOOSE receipt has failed:
● False – not set
● True – set
● Last Known Value – retain last value received
● Double Point: intermediate (00) – switching device in intermediate position
● Double Point: Off (01) – switching device open
● Double Point: On (10) – switching device closed
● Double Point: Bad state (11) – switching device in intermediate position
9-14 P632/EN M/R-a5-B // P632‑312‑660

9.10 Measurements
Parameter
Scaling Unit Multiplier
Multiplication factor; not supported.
Parameter
Range configuration Scaled Measurement Range: Min
Scaled Measurement Range: Max
Lower / Upper measuring range limit value; not supported.
Deadband Deadband 10000

Configuration
Multiplier for the smallest display value of the measured value. In order to have
the current measured value sent when it has changed from the value last sent
the result of the set dead band value multiplied by the smallest display value
must exceed the smallest display value.
P632/EN M/R-a5-B // P632‑312‑660 9-15

9.11 Configurable Data Attributes
9.11.1 System/LLN0
Parameter
Mod.measCyc Value
Transmission of measured values: Time interval in seconds between two dead

band evaluations.
Parameter
Mod.enCyc Value
Cyclic transmission of measured values without dead band check: Time interval
in seconds between transmissions of two energy count values.
Parameter
Mod.comtrade Value
Transmission of COMTRADE fault files formatted either as ASCII or binary files.
Parameter
Mod.distExtr Value
Cancelling fault transmission or including it in the configuration.
9-16 P632/EN M/R-a5-B // P632‑312‑660

P632
10 Commissioning
10.1 Safety Instructions
DANGER
⚫ When installing and connecting the device the warning notices at the
beginning of Chapter “Installation and Connection” (Chapter 5) must be
observed.
injury.
DANGER
area.
in operation.
must be employed.
injury.
P632/EN M/R-a5-B // P632‑312‑660 10-1

P632 10 Commissioning
DANGER
⚫ The device must be reliably grounded to meet protective equipment
grounding requirements.
⚫ The surface-mounted case is grounded using the bolt and nut,
appropriately marked, as the ground connection. The flush-mounted case
must be grounded in the area of the rear sidepieces at the location
provided. The bracket is marked with the protective ground symbol: .
The cross-section of the ground conductor must conform to applicable
national standards. A minimum cross section of 2.5 mm² (≤ AWG12) is
required.
⚫ In addition, a protective ground connection at the terminal contact on the
power supply module (identified by the letters “PE” on the terminal
connection diagram) is also required for proper operation of the device.
The cross-section of this ground conductor must also conform to applicable
national standards. A minimum cross section of 1.5 mm² (US: AWG14 or
thicker) is required.
⚫ If a detachable HMI is installed, a further protective conductor (ground/
earth) of at least 1.5 mm² (US: AWG14 or thicker) must be connected to
the DHMI protective conductor terminal to link the DHMI and the main
relay case; these must be located within the same substation.
⚫ All grounding connections must be low-inductance, i.e. it must be kept as
short as possible.
⚫ The protective conductor (earth) must always be connected to the
protective grounding conductor terminal in order to guarantee the safety
given by this setup.
injury.
DANGER
⚫ Application of analog signals to the measuring inputs must be in
compliance with the maximum permissible rating of the measuring inputs
(see “Technical Data”, Chapter 2).
terminals.
injury.
10-2 P632/EN M/R-a5-B // P632‑312‑660

10 Commissioning P632
DANGER
injury.
DANGER
⚫ When increased-safety machinery is located in a hazardous area the
device must always be installed outside of this hazardous area to protect
this equipment.
injury.
DANGER
⚫ The PC interface is not designed as a permanent connection.
Consequently, the female connector does not have the extra insulation
from circuits connected to the system that is required per IEC/EN
60255-27. Therefore DO NOT leave any permanent cable connection on
the PC interface connector at the HMI front panel.
injury.
DANGER
⚫ Do not connect or disconnect the RS 485 or fiber-optic interface when the
supply voltage for the device is under power and in operation.
injury.
P632/EN M/R-a5-B // P632‑312‑660 10-3

WARNING
HAZARD OF UNINTENDED EQUIPMENT OPERATION
⚫ When using the programmable logic (function group LOGIC), the user must
carry out a functional type test to conform to the requirements of the
relevant protection/control application.
⚫ In particular, it is necessary to verify that the requirements for the
implementation of logic linking (by setting) as well as the time
performance during device startup, during operation and when there is a
fault (device blocking) are fulfilled.
10-4 P632/EN M/R-a5-B // P632‑312‑660

10.2 Commissioning Tests
10.2.1 Preparation
After the P632 has been installed and connected as described in Chapter 5, (p. 5-
1), the commissioning procedure can begin.
Before turning on the power supply voltage, the following items must be checked
again:
● Is the device connected to the protective ground at the specified location?
● Does the nominal voltage of the battery agree with the nominal auxiliary
voltage of the device?
● Are the current and voltage transformer connections, grounding, and phase
sequences correct?
After the wiring work is completed, check the system to make sure it is properly
isolated. The conditions given in IEC/EN 60255-27 must be satisfied.
Once all checks have been made, the power supply voltage may be turned on.
After voltage has been applied, the device starts up. During startup, various
startup tests are carried out (see Section 3.15, (p. 3-108)). The LED indicators for
HEALTHY (H1) and OUT OF SERVICE (H2) will light up. After approximately 15 s,
the P632 is ready for operation. By default (factory setting) or after a cold restart,
the device type “P632” and the time are displayed on the first line of the LCD
after the device has started up. If a bay type has already been selected this bay
will then be shown as a single-pole display.
Once the change enabling command has been issued (see Section 6.13.3, (p. 6-
23)), all settings can be entered. The procedure for entering settings from the
integrated local control panel is described in Section 6.13.4, (p. 6-26).
First the type of bay wanted is to be set at M A I N : T y p e o f b a y, Par/Conf menu

branch. When the automatic assignment has been enabled at M A I N : A u t o -
a s s i g n m e n t I / O then selecting the type of bay will automatically configure binary
signal inputs and output relays according to the definitions corresponding to the
bay type.
After pressing the ENTER key to confirm the setting parameter M A I N : T y p e o f
b a y the signal Bay initialization is displayed on the LCD for a time duration of 20 s.
The LED indicator labeled EDIT MODE will light up. A control action is not possible
during this time period.
If either the PC interface or the communication interface will be used for setting
the P632 and reading out event records, then the following settings must first be
made from the integrated local control panel.
Par/DvID menu branch:

● D VIC E: De vice pas sword 1
● DV IC E: Devi ce pass word 2
P632/EN M/R-a5-B // P632‑312‑660 10-5

Par/Conf menu branch:

● PC : Bay add ress
● PC : De vice addr e ss
● PC : Bau d rat e
● PC : Pari ty b it
● COMM1: Fu nct ion grou p COMM1
● C O MM 1: General e nable USER
● COMM1: Name of man uf actu rer
● CO MM1: Line idle s tat e
● CO MM1: Baud r ate
● COMM1: Pari ty bit
● C OM M1: Commun icat. protocol
● C OM M1: Octe t comm. addres s
● CO MM1: Oct et addres s A SDU
● C OMM2: Fun ction group COMM2
● COMM2: Ge ne ral e nabl e U SER
● C OMM2: Nam e of m anu factur e r
● COMM2: Line idl e s tate
● COMM2: Baud rate
● COMM2: Parity bit
● COMM2: Octet comm. addres s
● COMM2: Oct et addre ss ASDU
Par/Func/Glob menu branch:

● PC: C omm and blockin g
● PC : Sig./me as.val .block.
● C OM M1: Command block. USER
● CO MM1: Sig./me as .block.USE R
● COMM2: Command bl ock. USER
● COMM2: Sig./me as.block. USER
Instructions on these settings are given in Chapters “Settings” and “Information
and Control Functions”.
The settings given above apply to the IEC 60870-5-103 communication protocol. If
another protocol is being used for the communication interface, additional settings
may be necessary. See Chapter “Settings” for further details.
After the settings have been made, the following checks should be carried out
again before the blocking is cancelled:
10-6 P632/EN M/R-a5-B // P632‑312‑660

● Is the correct bay type configured?

● Does the function assignment of the binary signal inputs agree with the
terminal connection diagram?
● Has the correct operating mode been selected for the binary signal inputs?
● Does the function assignment of the output relays agree with the terminal
connection diagram?
● Has the correct operating mode been selected for the output relays?
● Are the interlocking conditions and the external interlock inputs correctly
configured?
● Have all settings been made correctly?
Now blocking can be cleared as follows (Par/Func/Glob menu branch):
● OUTP: Ou tp.rel .block USER = Yes
● MA IN : D e v ice on-l in e = Yes (= on)
10.2.2 Cyber Security Commission

For Easergy MiCOM 30 without Cyber Security, password is managed and
modified through HMI and Easergy Studio only, as previous password
management.
For device with Cyber Security, access to some parts of the menu is only possible
with an user authentification after "Log in" with an user name and password. The
user should "Log out" after operation (see Section 3.3.1, (p. 3-4)).
The Security Administration Tool (SAT) is used to access to security functions
rights with the security administration role (by default). It provides:
● User accounts setting.
● Rights and roles management.
● Rights and roles administration.
User accounts setting button gives access to user informations and

authentification tools: you can manage login (user name and password and
arrow password), login attempts, inactivity time etc.).
P632/EN M/R-a5-B // P632‑312‑660 10-7

You can associate (add or remove) role(s) to an user account:
You can edit rights (associated Element To Secure (ETS)) for each role:
You can edit Elements To Secure (ETS) by editing permissions, objects and
rights:
10-8 P632/EN M/R-a5-B // P632‑312‑660

Set “Network Device List…” to select file to send to the device.
Please, refer to the “Security Administration Tool ” for complete information about
security administration tool.
10.2.3 Testing
When testing trip or close commands configured to standard outputs, the CB must
not be mechanically locked, so that its auxiliary 52a/b contact could operate and
break the DC current. If the CB has to stay locked, tripping or closing circuit has to
be opened by terminal disconnection or test switch. Otherwise there is a high risk
of damaging the P632 output contact.
By using the signals and displays generated by the P632, it is possible to

determine whether the P632 is correctly set and properly interconnected with the
station. Signals are signaled by output relays and LED indicators and entered into
the event memory. In addition, the signals can be checked by selecting the
appropriate signal in the menu tree.
If the user does not wish the circuit breaker to operate during protection testing,
the trip commands can be blocked through MAI N: Trip cmd. block. USER
(Par/Func/Glob menu branch) or an appropriately configured binary signal input.
If circuit breaker testing is desired, it is possible to issue a trip command for
100 ms through MAI N: Man . tr ip cmd. USER (Oper/CtrlTest menu branch) or
an appropriately configured binary signal input. Selection of the trip command
from the integrated local control panel is password-protected (see
Section 6.13.8, (p. 6-34)).
The manual trip command is not executed unless the manual trip is included in the
selection of possible functions to effect a trip (in the configuration of trip
commands).
If the P632 is connected at substation control level, the user is advised to

activate the test mode via MA IN : Tes t mode USE R (Par/Func/Glob menu
branch) or an appropriately configured binary signal input. The telegrams are
then identified accordingly (reason for transmission: test mode).
10.2.4 Checking the Binary Signal Inputs

By selecting the corresponding state signal (Oper/Cycl/Phys menu branch), it is
possible to determine whether the input signal that is present is recognized
correctly by the device. The values displayed have the following meanings:
● "Low": Not energized.
● "High": Energized.
● Without function: No functions are assigned to the binary signal input.
This display appears regardless of the binary signal input mode selected.
P632/EN M/R-a5-B // P632‑312‑660 10-9

10.2.5 Checking the Output Relays

It is possible to trigger the output relays for a settable time period for test
purposes (time setting at OU TP : H ol d-tim e for test in Oper/CtrlTest menu
branch). First select the output relay to be tested (OUTP: Relay assign.
f.t est, Oper/CtrlTest menu branch).
Test triggering then occurs via OUTP: Re l ay tes t (Oper/CtrlTest menu branch).
It is password-protected (see Section 6.13.8, (p. 6-34)).
DANGER
⚫ Before starting the test, open any triggering circuits for external devices so
that no inadvertent switching operations will take place.
injury.
10.2.6 Checking the Protection Function

Four parameter subsets are stored in the P632, one of which is activated. Before
checking the protective function, the user should determine which parameter
subset is activated. The active parameter subset is displayed at PSS: Actua l
p ara m. sub set (Oper/Cycl/Log menu branch).
10.2.6.1 Checking Differential Protection

For single-side feed, the fault current characteristic crosses the first knee of the
tripping characteristic of the P632 so that the basic threshold value is always
checked.
The current I to which the P632 responds for single-side feed is calculated as
follows:
I diff > ⋅ I nom,z
I =
kam,z
● z: transformer end (a, b)

● Idiff>: set operate value
● Inom,z: nominal current of the P632 for transformer end a, b
● kam,z: amplitude-matching factor of transformer end a, b
For single-side one-phase or two-phase feed, a vector group-matching factor in
accordance with the set vector group ID needs to be taken into account in
addition to the amplitude-matching factor. The vector group-matching factors are
given in the tables below and the threshold current is calculated as follows:
I diff > ⋅ I nom,z
I ≥
kam,z ⋅ ks, y,z

● Inom,z: nominal current of the P632 for transformer end a, b
● ks,y,z: vector group-matching factor (see tables below)
The differential and restraining currents formed by the P632 are displayed as
measured operating data. They aid in assessing whether the connection of the
10-10 P632/EN M/R-a5-B // P632‑312‑660

P632 to the system current transformers and the setting of the vector group ID
are correct. The tables below give the factors ks which serve to calculate the
differential current for single-side feed. The display of differential and restraining
currents is prevented, however, if they fall below minimum thresholds that can
be set by the user.
Id,y = kam,z·ks,y,z·Itest,x
● x: phase A, B or C
● measuring system 1, 2 or 3
● Id,y: differential current as displayed
● ks,y,z: vector group-matching factor (see tables below)
● Itest,x: test current phase A, B or C
In evaluating the test results, one should be aware that the P632 will trip as
follows, if a value of Idiff>> or Idiff>>> is exceeded.
● Idiff>> exceeded: Trip regardless of the inrush and overfluxing restraint;
● Idiff>>> exceeded: Trip regardless of the restraining current and regardless
of all other restraints.
Transformer end a b
Vector group ID 0=1 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11

2
DIFF: Diff. cur re nt 1 0.67 0.67 0.58 0.33 0.00 0.33 0.58 0.67 0.58 0.33 0.00 0.33 0.58
Tab. 10-1: Factors for single-side, one-phase feed in phase A, zero sequence-filtered.
Transformer end a b
Vector group ID 0=1 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11

2
Tab. 10-2: Factors for single-side, two-phase, phase-opposition feed in phases B to C, zero sequence-
filtered.
P632/EN M/R-a5-B // P632‑312‑660 10-11

Transformer end a b
Vector group ID 0=12 2 4 6 8 10
DIFF: Diff. cur rent 1 1.00 1.00 0.00 0.00 1.00 0.00 0.00
Tab. 10-3: Factors for single-side, one-phase feed in phase A, not zero sequence-filtered.
Transformer end a b
Vector group ID 0=12 2 4 6 8 10
Tab. 10-4: Factors for single-side, two-phase, phase-opposition feed in phases B to C, not zero
sequence-filtered.
The connection of the phase currents can be checked using the phase angles
provided as measured operating data by the P632.
If the phase currents are connected correctly and there is an ideal balanced load
on the transformer, the phase angles between the phase currents of any one
transformer end are displayed as follows:
Phase sequence A–B–C

● φAB,z = φBC,z = φCA,z = 120°
Phase sequence A–C–B

● φAB,z = φBC,z = φCA,z = −120°
This is not influenced by the set value of the function parameter for the phase
sequence.
The phase angle between the phase currents of two transformer ends for a
particular phase is a function of the vector group of the transformer. This phase
angle should be displayed as follows:
10-12 P632/EN M/R-a5-B // P632‑312‑660

Vector group
0 = 12 φx,A–z = ±180°
1 φx,A–z = −150°
2 φx,A–z = −120°
3 φx,A–z = −90°
4 φx,A–z = −60°
5 φx,A–z = −30°
6 φx,A–z = 0°
7 φx,A–z = 30°
8 φx,A–z = 60°
9 φx,A–z = 90°
10 φx,A–z = 120°
11 φx,A–z = 150°
This is not influenced by the set value of the function parameter for the phase
sequence. Changing the setting for the connection scheme of an involved series
transformer, on the other hand, will change the measured operating data value
by ±180°.
10.2.6.2 Checking Ground Differential Protection

The current I to which the P632 responds for single-side feed, neutral-point side,
is calculated as follows:
I diff > ⋅ I nom
I ≥
kam,z

● Inom: nominal current of the P632
There will be no trip for single-side, single-pole, phase-side feed.
The differential and restraining currents formed by the P632 are displayed. The
display of differential and restraining currents is prevented, however, if they fall
below minimum thresholds that can be set by the user.
10.2.7 Checking Control Functions

If the P632 has been ordered with control functions it should be noted for checks
that the local control panel on the P632 does not feature specific keys for
switching functions. If at this point mention of e.g. a “selection key” is made,
then this would be a function key to which a specific function has been assigned
– in this example MAIN: Devi ce se l ecti on ke y (see Section 6.9.2, (p. 6-13)).
P632/EN M/R-a5-B // P632‑312‑660 10-13

10.2.7.1 Local/Remote Selection

Controlling switchgear units may be carried out from keys on the local control
panel, remotely via the communication interface or through appropriately
configured binary signal inputs. The control site – Local or Remote – is selected
by the L/R key on the local control panel or by an appropriately configured binary
signal input. The L/R key has no effect when a binary signal input has been
configured. Using the L/R key on the local control panel to switch from “Remote”
to “Local” is only possible after the “Password L/R” was entered (see
Chapter “Local Control Panel” for further information). The Bay Panel display will
show which control site has been selected.
10.2.7.2 Local Control

The switchgear unit to be controlled is selected by pressing the selection key on
the local control panel, and pressing the “Open” or “Close” key will generate a
switching request. When control is carried out with binary signal inputs the
respective binary signal input is to be triggered.
10.2.7.3 Remote Control

Remote control of switchgear units may be carried out via the communication
interface or with appropriately configured binary signal inputs.
10.2.7.4 Switchgear Unit Cannot Be Controlled

Should a switchgear unit refuse to be controlled, then this may be due to the
following reasons:
● General enable for switch commands has not been set.
(Configuration at MAI N: Inp.asg. ct rl.e nabl., Par/Func/Glob menu
branch)
● Interlocking has operated.
(Check at MAI N: Inte rl ock e qu. vi ol., Oper/Cycl/Log menu branch).
Which interlock(s) is(are) activated may be checked at:
● Bay interlock (BI): MA IN: Bay i nte rlock. ac t., Oper/Cycl/Log menu
branch
● Substation interlock (SI): MA IN: Subs t. inte rl. act., Oper/Cycl/Log menu
branch
● With control set to “Local”:
It is possible to deactivate the interlock through an appropriately
(Configuration at MA IN: In p.as g.in te rl .dea ct, Par/Func/Glob menu
branch)
A substation interlock is only effective when a communication link exists from the
communication interface to the substation control level. If the communication link
is disrupted then the device switches automatically to bay interlock (BI) without
substation interlock (SI). Whether or not a communication error is present can be
checked at M A I N : C o m m u n i c a t i o n e r r o r (Oper/Cycl/Log menu branch).
The substation interlock (SI) can be deactivated selectively for any switchgear unit
and in any control direction – “Open” or “Close”. (Check – e.g. for DEV01 – at
D E V 0 1 : O p e n w / o s t a t . i n t e r l or D E V 0 1 : C l o s e w / o s t a t . i n t . (Par/Func/
Cont menu branch).
10.2.8 Completing Commissioning

Before the P632 is released for operation, the user should make sure that the
following steps have been taken:
10-14 P632/EN M/R-a5-B // P632‑312‑660

● All memories have been reset.

(Reset at MAIN: Ge ne ral re se t U SER (password-protected) and
MT_RC : Reset r e cor d. USER, both in Oper/CtrlTest menu branch.)
● Blocking of output relays has been cancelled.
(OUTP: Outp.rel. bl ock USER, Par/Func/Glob menu branch, setting No.)
● Blocking of the trip command has been cancelled.
(MAIN : Trip cmd. bl ock. USE R, Par/Func/Glob menu branch, setting No.)
● The device is on-line.
(MAIN : De vi ce on -lin e, Par/Func/Glob menu branch, setting Yes (= on).)
● The correct control point – Local or Remote – has been activated.
● The required interlock equations have been activated.
After completion of commissioning, only the green LED indicator signaling
“HEALTHY” (H1) should be on.
P632/EN M/R-a5-B // P632‑312‑660 10-15

10-16 P632/EN M/R-a5-B // P632‑312‑660

P632
11 Troubleshooting
This chapter describes problems that might be encountered, their causes, and
possible methods for eliminating them. It is intended as a general orientation
only, and in cases of doubt it is better to return the P632 to the manufacturer.
Please follow the packaging instructions in Section 5.1, (p. 5-4) when returning
equipment to the manufacturer.
DANGER
⚫ Before checking further, disconnect the P632 from the power supply.
⚫ Switch off all the power supplies in connection to the equipment to isolate
the device.
injury.
The following instructions apply to surface-mounted cases:
WARNING
Problem
● Lines of text are not displayed on the local control panel.
o Check to see whether there is supply voltage at the device connection
points.
o Check to see whether the magnitude of the auxiliary voltage is correct.
The P632 is protected against damage resulting from polarity reversal.
● The P632 issues an “Alarm” signal on LED H 3.
o Identify the specific problem by reading out the monitoring signal
memory (see Section 6.13.6.2, (p. 6-31)). The table below lists possible
monitoring or warning indication (provided that a configuration setting
has been entered at SFMON: Fct. ass ign. warning), the faulty area,
the P632's response, and the mode of the output relay configured for
“Warning” and “Blocked/faulty”.
P632/EN M/R-a5-B // P632‑312‑660 11-1

P632 11 Troubleshooting
Key
● –: No reaction and/or no output relay triggered.
● Yes: The corresponding output relay is triggered.
● Updating: The output relay configured for 'Warning' starts only if the
monitoring signal is still present.
Parameter Address
Self-monitoring SFMO N: F ct . as s ign. war ning 021 030
[spacer] SFMO N: M on.s ig. re t enti on 021 018
11-2 P632/EN M/R-a5-B // P632‑312‑660

11 Troubleshooting P632
Parameter Address
Self-monitoring SFMO N: W arning (LE D) 036 070
[spacer]
Warning configured for LED H3.
[spacer] SFMO N: W arning (re lay ) 036 100
[spacer]
Warning configured for an output relay.
[spacer] SFMO N: W arm re start e x ec. 041 202
[spacer]
A warm restart has been carried out.
[spacer] SFMO N: C old re star t exe c. 041 201
[spacer]
A cold restart has been carried out.
[spacer] SFMO N: C old re star t 093 024
[spacer]
A cold restart has been carried out on account of a checksum error in the
memory (NOVRAM).
1st device reaction: Warm restart
2nd device reaction: Device blocking
“Warning” output relay: Yes
“Blocked/faulty” output relay: Yes
[spacer] SFMO N: C old re st./ SW update 093 025
[spacer]
A cold restart has been carried out following a software update.
[spacer] SFMO N: B lockin g/ HW fail ure 090 019
[spacer]
Supplementary warning that this device is blocked.
“Warning” output relay: Updating
“Blocked/faulty” output relay: –
[spacer] SFMO N: R elay Kxx faulty 041 200
[spacer]
Multiple signal: output relay defective.
Device reaction: –
'Warning' output relay: Updating
'Blocked/faulty' output relay: Yes
[spacer] SFMO N: Hardware clock fai l. 093 040
[spacer]
The hardware clock has failed.
P632/EN M/R-a5-B // P632‑312‑660 11-3

Parameter Address
[spacer] SFMO N: B at te ry failure 090 010
[spacer]
Battery voltage too low. Replace battery.
[spacer] SFMO N: I nvalid SW d.loade d 096 121
[spacer]
Wrong or invalid software has been downloaded.
[spacer]
The +15 V internal supply voltage has dropped below a minimum value.
[spacer]
The +24 V internal supply voltage has dropped below a minimum value.
[spacer] SFMO N: - 15V s upply faulty 093 080
[spacer]
The −15 V internal supply voltage has dropped below a minimum value.
11-4 P632/EN M/R-a5-B // P632‑312‑660

Parameter Address
[spacer]
Module in wrong slot.
[spacer] SFMO N: W rong module D ig.Bus 096 123
[spacer]
The device has been fitted with a wrong digital bus. Since this is checked using
the module variant number this signal can also occur after a firmware upgrade
to a version that is not compatible with the hardware.
[spacer] SFMO N: W rong module HM I 096 124
[spacer]
The device has been fitted with a wrong HMI. Since this is checked using the
module variant number this signal can also occur after a firmware upgrade to a
version that is not compatible with the hardware.
P632/EN M/R-a5-B // P632‑312‑660 11-5

Parameter Address
[spacer] SFMO N: W rong m odul e Comm 096 125
[spacer]
The device has been fitted with a wrong communication module. Since this is
checked using the module variant number this signal can also occur after a
firmware upgrade to a version that is not compatible with the hardware.
[spacer] SFMO N: W rong m odule Ana. Bus 096 126
[spacer]
The device has been fitted with a wrong analog bus. Since this is checked using
the module variant number this signal can also occur after a firmware upgrade
to a version that is not compatible with the hardware.
11-6 P632/EN M/R-a5-B // P632‑312‑660

Parameter Address
[spacer]
Defective module in slot x.
[spacer] SFMO N: M odule A DP R fault y 093 070
[spacer]
Dual-Port-RAM fault on communication module A. This fault is only detected
during device startup.
[spacer] SFMO N: M odule A RAM fault y 093 071
[spacer]
RAM fault on communication module A.
[spacer] SFMO N: M odule Y DP R fault y 093 110
[spacer]
The checksum feature of analog I/O module Y has detected a fault in the data
transmission of the Dual-Port-RAM.
[spacer] SFMO N: M odule Y RAM fault y 093 111
[spacer]
Fault in the program or data memory of the analog I/O module.
P632/EN M/R-a5-B // P632‑312‑660 11-7

Parameter Address
11-8 P632/EN M/R-a5-B // P632‑312‑660

Parameter Address
[spacer]
Output relay K xxx defective.
[spacer] SFMO N: U nd ef . ope r at. code 093 010
[spacer]
Undefined operation code.
[spacer] SFMO N: Abnormal t erminat ion 093 030
[spacer]
The application has been terminated in an unexpected way. If this error occurs
during a (re-)start of the device then this message is displayed and the device is
blocked.
[spacer] SFMO N: B ad arg. s ys t em call 093 031
[spacer]
Invalid parameter when calling a function of the operating system. If this error
occurs during a (re-)start of the device then this message is displayed and the
device is blocked.
[spacer] SFMO N: M ute x de adloc k 093 032
[spacer]
Software threads are locked from each other by mutex. If this error occurs
during a (re-)start of the device then this message is displayed and the device is
blocked.
P632/EN M/R-a5-B // P632‑312‑660 11-9

Parameter Address
[spacer] SFMO N: I nvalid memory re f. 093 033
[spacer]
Attempt to access an invalid memory segment. If this error occurs during a
(re-)start of the device then this message is displayed and the device is blocked.
[spacer] SFMO N: U ne xpe ct e d e xc ept ion 093 034
[spacer]
Miscellaneous error message from the processor or operating system. If this
error occurs during a (re-)start of the device then this message is displayed and
the device is blocked.
[spacer] SFMO N: I nvalid ar ithm. op. 093 011
[spacer]
Invalid arithmetic operation.
[spacer] SFMO N: U nd ef ined i nter rupt 093 012
[spacer]
Undefined interrupt.
[spacer] SFMO N: E x ce pt ion oper .s ys t . 093 013
[spacer]
Interrupt of the operating system.
[spacer] SFMO N: Pr ote ction f ailure 090 021
[spacer]
Watchdog is monitoring the periodic start of protection routines. It has detected
an error.
11-10 P632/EN M/R-a5-B // P632‑312‑660

Parameter Address
[spacer] SFMO N: C he ck s um error param 090 003
[spacer]
A checksum error involving the parameters in the memory (NOVRAM) has been
detected.
[spacer] SFMO N: C lock sync. e rror 093 041
[spacer]
In 10 consecutive clock synchronization telegrams, the difference between the
time of day given in the telegram and that of the hardware clock is greater than
10 ms.
[spacer] SFMO N: I nt e rm.volt. fail.RAM 093 026
[spacer]
Faulty test pattern in the RAM. This can occur, for example, if the processor
module or the power supply module is removed from the bus module (digital).
This fault is only detected during device startup. After the fault is detected, the
software initializes the RAM. This means that all records are deleted.
[spacer] SFMO N: O ve rflow MT_RC 090 012
[spacer]
Last entry in the monitoring signal memory in the event of overflow.
[spacer] SFMO N: S em aph. M T_RC block . 093 015
[spacer]
Software overloaded.
[spacer] SFMO N: I nval. SW ve r s .comm. 093 075
[spacer]
Incorrect or invalid communication software has been downloaded.
P632/EN M/R-a5-B // P632‑312‑660 11-11

Parameter Address
[spacer] SFMO N: I nval. C onfig. I E C 093 079
[spacer]
Invalid parameters in the IEC configuration.
[spacer] SFMO N: I nvalid SW ver s. Y 093 113
[spacer]
Incorrect or invalid software for analog I/O module Y has been downloaded.
[spacer] SFMO N: T im e -out module Y 093 112
[spacer]
Watchdog is monitoring the periodic status signal of the analog I/O module Y. It
has detected an error.
[spacer] SFMO N: M .c.b. trip V 098 000
[spacer]
The line-side voltage transformer m.c.b. has tripped.
Device reaction: Blocking of the short-circuit direction determination.
[spacer]
The transformer monitoring has received/detected a Buchholz/insulation fault.
[spacer] SFMO N: M eas . cir c. I fault y 091 018
[spacer]
The measuring-circuit monitoring function has detected a fault in the current-
measuring circuits. (See functions MCMON and CTS, measuringcircuit monitoring
multiple signal.)
[spacer] SFMO N: M eas . c. I fault y, a 091 026
11-12 P632/EN M/R-a5-B // P632‑312‑660

Parameter Address
[spacer] SFMO N: M eas . c. I fault y, b 091 027
[spacer]
The measuring-circuit monitoring function, associated with the respective end,
has detected a fault in the current-measuring circuits. (See functions MCMON
and CTS, monitoring of measuring circuits.)
[spacer] SFMO N: I nvalid charact . V/f 091 011
[spacer]
An invalid characteristic has been set for the overfluxing protection.
Device reaction: Protection is blocked.
[spacer] SFMO N: I nvalid SW ver s DHMI 093 145
[spacer]
Incorrect or invalid software was loaded to operate the detachable display
(DHMI).
[spacer] SFMO N: I nvalid confi g.TP Dx 093 160
[spacer]
An invalid assignment of switchgear units has been made for TPD1: TPD1
Dis connector and TP D1 : TP D1 gr ound. s wit ch.
Device reaction: Blocking of the Three Position Drive.
[spacer] SFMO N: I nvalid scali ng BCD 093 124
[spacer]
An invalid characteristic has been set for the BCD output channel of analog I/O
module Y.
Device reaction: Depends on type of fault detected.
[spacer]
An invalid characteristic has been set for one of the analog output channels of
analog I/O module Y.
P632/EN M/R-a5-B // P632‑312‑660 11-13

Parameter Address
[spacer] SFMO N: I nvalid scaling IDC 093 116
[spacer]
An invalid characteristic has been set for the analog input channel of analog I/O
module Y.
[spacer] SFMO N: PT 100 open c ir cuit 098 024
[spacer]
The P632 has detected an open circuit in the connection of the resistance
thermometer “PT100” to the analog I/O module Y.
[spacer] SFMO N: O ve rload 20 mA input 098 025
[spacer]
The 20 mA input of analog I/O module Y is overloaded.
[spacer] SFMO N: O pe n circ. 20 mA inp. 098 026
[spacer]
The P632 has detected an open circuit in the connection of the 20 mA input.
[spacer] SFMO N: S etting e rror f<> 098 028
[spacer]
The over-/underfrequency protection function has been set for “overfrequency”
monitoring (based on the settings for operate value and nominal frequency).
This setting is not valid in the f w. Delta f/Delta t operating mode.
Device reaction: Blocking of the over-/under frequency protection function
[spacer] SFMO N: I ref , a inval. range 091 007
[spacer] SFMO N: I ref , b inval . range 091 008
[spacer]
The reference current determined by the P632 for differential protection is not
within the permissible range.
[spacer] SFMO N: M atching fail. e nd a 091 000
11-14 P632/EN M/R-a5-B // P632‑312‑660

Parameter Address
[spacer] SFMO N: M atching fail. e nd b 091 001
[spacer]
The calculated amplitude matching factor of the differential protection function
is above the permissible range.
[spacer] SFMO N: R atio mtch.fact .inv . 091 004
[spacer]
The ratio of the amplitude matching factors for differential protection is not
within the permissible range.
[spacer] SFMO N: 2nd mat ch.fac t. i nv. 091 006
[spacer]
The second highest amplitude matching factor for differential protection is
smaller than permitted.
[spacer] SFMO N: I nv.ran ge Ir e f REF _1 091 105
[spacer] SFMO N: I nv.ran ge Ir e f REF _2 091 115
[spacer]
The reference current determined by the P632 for ground differential protection
is not within the permissible range.
[spacer]
The calculated amplitude matching factor of the ground differential protection
function is above the permissible range.
P632/EN M/R-a5-B // P632‑312‑660 11-15

Parameter Address
[spacer] SFMO N: R at.mtch.f.inv. RE F _2 091 113
[spacer]
The ratio of the amplitude matching factors of the differential protection function
is not within the permissible range.
[spacer]
The lowest amplitude matching factor of the differential protection function is
lower than permitted.
[spacer] SFMO N: C T A error T HR M1 098 036
[spacer]
Faulty coolant temperature acquisition.
[spacer] SFMO N: S etting e rror THRM1 098 038
[spacer]
The maximum permissible object temperature and the maximum permissible
coolant temperature have been set to the same value. This setting is not valid.
[spacer] SFMO N: I nv.inp.f.cloc k sy nc 093 120
[spacer]
The function was configured to a binary signal input on the analog I/O module Y.
Such a configuration is not permitted for this function.
[spacer]
These LOGIC outputs can be included in the list of warning signals by selection
at S FMON: Fct. ass ign. warning. The warning signals are also recorded
in the monitoring signal memory.
11-16 P632/EN M/R-a5-B // P632‑312‑660

Parameter Address
[spacer]
The plausibility logic was triggered during the acquisition of the circuit breaker's
(CB) status signals.
[spacer]
The external input CBF _1: C B fault y E X T has become active.
P632/EN M/R-a5-B // P632‑312‑660 11-17

11-18 P632/EN M/R-a5-B // P632‑312‑660

P632
12 Maintenance
DANGER
or later version) and appropriate Chapter5, Chapter 10, Chapter 11,
injury.
The P632 is a low-maintenance device. The components used in the units are
selected to meet exacting requirements. Recalibration is not necessary.
P632/EN M/R-a5-B // P632‑312‑660 12-1

P632 12 Maintenance
12.1 Maintenance Procedures in the Power Supply Area

Replacement of the power supply module must be carried out by trained
personnel, and the power supply voltage must be turned off while the work is
being performed.
DANGER
⚫ Always disconnect the device from the auxiliary power supply, before
removing any hardware module.
⚫ Switch off all the power supplies in connection to the equipment to isolate
the device, before removing any hardware module.
injury.
DANGER
injury.
The following instructions apply to surface-mounted cases:
WARNING
In general, the electronic components used for the device family Easergy MiCOM
30 are designed for a long service life.
For the power supply, however, dimensioning requirements dictate the use of
electrolytic capacitors that are subject to increased wear and tear. The useful life
of these capacitors depends on their temperature and thus on the components
fitted in the device, the load conditions, device location and environmental
conditions.
The internal voltage levels are cyclically checked by the P30 self-monitoring
functions. In case the voltage levels deviate from their specified values a warning
message will be issued or, for persistent problems, the device will be set to a
safe condition (blocking). Hence, there is no imperative need to replace the
power supply module after a pre-defined period of time. However, should you
12-2 P632/EN M/R-a5-B // P632‑312‑660

12 Maintenance P632
need to guarantee a high availability of the device then we recommend

preventive replacement of the power supply module after a period of 8 to 10
years.
Moreover, the power supply module of the P632 is equipped with a lithium
battery for non-volatile storage of fault data and for keeping the internal clock
running in the event of failure of the auxiliary power supply. The useful life of the
lithium battery depends on the auxiliary power supply of the device.
● If the P632 is continuously connected to the auxiliary power supply, then
there is no discharging of the battery, and the battery will thus not be
depleted during its service life.
● Should the P632 be disconnected from the auxiliary power supply for
several years, then the battery capacity would decrease.
During normal operation, the battery voltage is monitored. If the voltage falls
below a pre-defined threshold, a warning message will be issued and the battery
has to be replaced.
After the maintenance procedures described above have been completed, new
commissioning tests as described in Section 10.2, (p. 10-5) must be carried out.
P632/EN M/R-a5-B // P632‑312‑660 12-3

P632 12 Maintenance
12.2 Routine Functional Testing

The P632 is used as a safety device and must therefore be routinely injection
tested for proper operation. The first functional tests should be carried out
approximately 6 to 12 months after commissioning. Functional tests should be
performed at intervals of 2 to 3 years – 4 years at the maximum.
The P632 incorporates in its system a very extensive self-monitoring function for
hardware and software. The internal structure guarantees, for example, that
communication within the processor system will be checked on a continuing
basis.
Nonetheless, there are a number of subfunctions that cannot be checked by the
self-monitoring feature without injection testing from the device terminals. The
respective device-specific properties and settings must be observed in such
cases.
In particular, none of the control and signaling circuits that are run to the device
from the outside are checked by the self-monitoring function.
12-4 P632/EN M/R-a5-B // P632‑312‑660

12 Maintenance P632
12.3 Analog Input Circuits

The analog inputs are fed through an analog preprocessing feature (anti-aliasing
filtering) to a common analog-to-digital converter. In conjunction with the self-
monitoring function, the CT/VT supervision function that is available for the
device’s general functions can detect deviations in many cases. However, it is
still necessary to test from the device terminals in order to make sure that the
analog measuring circuits are functioning correctly.
The best way to carry out a static test of the analog input circuits is to check the
primary measured operating data using the operating data measurement
function or to use a suitable testing instrument. A “small” measured value (such
as the nominal current in the current path) and a “large” measured value (such
as the nominal voltage in the voltage path) should be used to check the
measuring range of the A/D converter. This makes it possible to check the entire
dynamic range.
The accuracy of operating data measurement is <1%. An important factor in
evaluating device performance is long-term performance based on comparison
with previous measurements.
In addition, a dynamic test can be used to check transmission performance and
the phase relation of the current transformers and the anti-aliasing filter. This
can best be done by measuring the trigger point of the first zone when there is a
two-phase ungrounded fault. For this test, the value of the short-circuit current
should be such that a loop voltage of approximately 2 V is obtained at the
device's terminals with the set impedance. Furthermore, a suitable testing
instrument that correctly replicates the two-phase ungrounded fault should be
used for this purpose.
This dynamic test is not absolutely necessary, since it only checks the stability of
a few passive components. Based on reliability analysis, the statistical
expectation is that only one component in 10 years in 1000 devices will be
outside the tolerance range.
Additional analog testing of such factors as the impedance characteristic or the
starting characteristic is not necessary, in our opinion, since information
processing is completely digital and is based on the measured analog current
and voltage values. Proper operation was checked in conjunction with type
testing.
P632/EN M/R-a5-B // P632‑312‑660 12-5

P632 12 Maintenance
12.4 Binary Opto Inputs

The binary inputs are not checked by the self-monitoring function. However, a
testing function is integrated into the software so that the trigger state of each
input can be read out (Oper/Cycl/Phys menu branch). This check should be
performed for each input being used and can be done, if necessary, without
disconnecting any device wiring.
12-6 P632/EN M/R-a5-B // P632‑312‑660

12 Maintenance P632
12.5 Binary Outputs

With respect to binary outputs, the integrated self-monitoring function includes
even two-phase triggering of the relay coils of all the relays. There is no
monitoring function for the external contact circuit. In this case, the all-or-nothing
relays must be triggered by way of device functions or integrated test functions.
For these testing purposes, triggering of the output circuits is integrated into the
software through a special control function (Oper/CtrlTest menu branch).
DANGER
⚫ Before starting the test, open any triggering circuits for external devices so
that no inadvertent switching operations will take place.
injury.
P632/EN M/R-a5-B // P632‑312‑660 12-7

P632 12 Maintenance
12.6 Serial Interfaces

The integrated self-monitoring function for the PC or communication interface
also includes the communication module. The complete communication system,
including connecting link and fiber-optic module (if applicable), is always totally
monitored as long as a link is established through the control program or the
communication protocol.
12-8 P632/EN M/R-a5-B // P632‑312‑660

P632
13 Storage
Devices must be stored in a dry and clean environment. A temperature range of
-25°C to +70°C (-13°F to +158°F) must be maintained during storage (see
chapter entitled “Technical Data”). The relative humidity must be controlled so
that neither condensation nor ice formation will result.
If the units are stored without being connected to auxiliary voltage, then the
electrolytic capacitors in the power supply area need to be recharged every
4 years. Recharge the capacitors by connecting auxiliary voltage to the P632 for
approximately 10 minutes.
If the units are stored during a longer time, the battery of the power supply
module is used for the continuous buffering of the event data in the working
memory of the processor module. Therefore the battery is permanently required
and discharges over time. In order to avoid this continuous discharge, it is
recommended to remove the power supply module from the mounting rack
during long storage periods. The contents of the event memory should be
previously read out and stored separately!
WARNING
⚫ Do not sustain exposure to high humidity during storage, the value shall
not exceed 75% relative humidity.
⚫ Once the device has been unpacked, it is recommended to energize it
within the three following months.
⚫ The device has to be energized at least once in 4 years, if it is not in
permanent operation.
⚫ Where electrical equipment is being installed, sufficient time should be
allowed for acclimatization to the ambient temperature of the environment
before energization.
Failure to follow these instructions can result in equipment damage,
unintended equipment operation or reduction of equipment lifetime.
P632/EN M/R-a5-B // P632‑312‑660 13-1

P632 13 Storage
13-2 P632/EN M/R-a5-B // P632‑312‑660

P632
14 Accessories and Spare Parts

The P632 is supplied with standard labeling for the LED indicators. LED indicators
that are not already configured and labeled can be labeled using the label strips
supplied. Affix the label strips to the front of the unit at the appropriate location.
The label strips can be filled in using a “Stabilo” brand pen containing water-
resistant ink (Type OH Pen 196 PS).
Description Order No.
Cable bushings 88512‑4‑0337414‑301
Resistor 200 Ω 255.002.696
84 TE frame 88512‑4‑9650723‑301
Operating program for Windows On request (Easergy Studio)
P632/EN M/R-a5-B // P632‑312‑660 14-1

P632 14 Accessories and Spare Parts
14-2 P632/EN M/R-a5-B // P632‑312‑660

P632
15 Order Information
Basic Configuration Variants
Order information MiCOM P632

18 character cortec 1234 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12, 13 14 15 16 17 18
Two Winding Transformer Differential Protection P632- 9 0 1 -312 -4xx -660 -7xx - -46x -9x x - -8xx
Basic device:
Basic device 40TE, pin-terminal connection, 3 -413
Basic device 84TE, ring-terminal connection, 8 -414
basic complement with 4 binary inputs, 8 output relays
and 6 function keys
Mounting option and display:

Surface-mounted, local control panel with text display 3
Flush-mounted, local control panel with text display 4
Surface-mounted, with detachable HMI 7
Flush-mounted,with detachable HMI 9
Current transformer:
2)
Inom = 1 A / 5 A (T11...T14 / T21...24) 9
Voltage transformer:
Vnom = 50 ... 130 V (1-pole) 1
Additional binary I/O options:

Without 0
With 1 binary module (add. 6 binary inputs and 8 output relays) 1
With 1 binary module (add. 6 binary inputs and 6 output relays (2-pole)) 5
for the control of up to 3 switchgear units
Power supply and additional binary I/O options:

VA , nom = 24 … 60 VDC E
VA,nom = 60 ... 250 VDC / 100 ... 230 VAC F
VA,nom = 24 ... 60 VDC and 6 output relays G
VA,nom = 60 ... 250 VDC / 100 ... 230 VAC and 6 output relays H
VA , nom = 24 … 60 VDC and 6 binary inputs and 3 output relays J
VA,nom = 60 ... 250 VDC / 100 ... 230 VAC K
and 6 binary inputs and 3 output relays
VA , nom = 24 … 60 VDC and 4 high break contacts L
VA,nom = 60 ... 250 VDC / 100 ... 230 VAC and 4 high break contacts M
Further Options

Further add. options:

Without 0
With analog module 2
With binary module (add. 24 binary inputs) 4
Switching threshold on binary inputs:

Standard variant with switching threshold at 65% of 24 VDC (VA,min) Without order extension No.
8)
Special variant with switching threshold at 65% of 127 VDC (VA,nom) -461
8)
8)
8)
P632/EN M/R-a5-B // P632‑312‑660 15-1

P632 15 Order Information
Communication Options

With communication / information interface:

Without Without order extension No.
Protocol can be switched between: -92
IEC 60870-5-101/-103, Modbus, DNP3, Courier
and IRIG-B input for clock synchronization
and 2nd interface (RS485, IEC 60870-5-103)
For connection to wire, RS485, isolated 1
For connection to plastic fiber, FSMA connector 2
For connection to glass fiber, ST connector 4
Ethernet Board 2, Protocol IEC 61850 Ed. 1 or 2 (switchable)

without Cyber Security compatibility -97
with Cyber Security compatibility -99
Single connection, wire RJ45 1

Single connection, glass fiber LC 2
and 2nd 100 Mbit/s Ethernet service interface, wire RJ45
Redundant connection, wire RJ45, HSR/PRP (switchable) 3

Redundant connection, glass fiber LC, HSR/ PRP (switchable) 4
Language:
4)
English (German) Without order extension No.
4)
Px40 English (German) Not yet available - on request -800
4)
German (English) -801
4)
French (English) Not yet available - on request -802
4)
Spanish (English) Not yet available - on request -803
4)
Polish (English) Not yet available - on request -804
4) 7)
Russian (English) Not yet available - on request -805
Key
2) Switching via parameter, default setting is underlined!
4) Second included language in brackets.
7) Hardware option, supports Cyrillic letters instead of special West European
characters.
8) Standard variant recommended if higher pickup threshold not explicitly required
by the application.
Information about Ordering Options

Language version
In order to display the Russian data model, the corresponding order extension
number (‑805) must be added upon ordering so that the hardware option
supporting Cyrillic characters is integrated. With this ordering option, reference
menu texts (English) will be available for display. However, other Western
European languages containing extra characters will not be fully supported.
Consequently, selecting the “Russian / English” ordering option means that it will
not be possible to download Western European data models into the device.
Binary Inputs' Switching Threshold
15-2 P632/EN M/R-a5-B // P632‑312‑660

15 Order Information P632
The standard version of binary signal inputs (opto-couplers) is recommended in

most applications, as these inputs operate with any voltage from 18 V. Special
versions with higher pick-up/drop-off thresholds (see also “Technical Data”,
Chapter 2, (p. 2-1)) are provided for applications where a higher switching
threshold is expressly required.
P632/EN M/R-a5-B // P632‑312‑660 15-3

P632 15 Order Information
15-4 P632/EN M/R-a5-B // P632‑312‑660

© 2017 Schneider Electric. All rights reserved.
Schneider Electric
35 rue Joseph Monier
92506 Rueil-Malmaison
FRANCE
Phone: +33 (0) 1 41 29 70 00
Fax: +33 (0) 1 41 29 71 00
www.schneider-electric.com
Publishing: Schneider Electric
Publication: P632/EN M/R-a5-B Volume 1 07/2017

P632 EN M R-a5-B 312 660 Volume 1 PDF

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

P632 EN M R-a5-B 312 660 Volume 1 PDF

Uploaded by

Document Information

Original Title

Copyright

Available Formats

Share this document

Share or Embed Document

Sharing Options

Did you find this document useful?

Is this content inappropriate?

Copyright:

Available Formats

P632 EN M R-a5-B 312 660 Volume 1 PDF

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

Easergy MiCOM P632

Transformer Differential Protection Device

Version P632 -312 -413/414 -660

When electrical equipment is in operation, dangerous voltage will be present in

In case of usage of the equipment with DHMI*:

* DHMI = Detachable Human Machine Interface

1 Application and Scope ........................................................................................ 1-1

2 Technical Data .................................................................................................... 2-1

P632/EN M/R-a5-B // P632‑312‑660 1

2.11 Recording Functions ................................................................................................. 2-21

2 P632/EN M/R-a5-B // P632‑312‑660

3.13.4 Operating Data Measurement ..................................................................................................................... 3-80

P632/EN M/R-a5-B // P632‑312‑660 3

3.22.9 Saturation Discriminator ............................................................................................................................3-142

3.29 Overfluxing Protection (Function Group V/f) ........................................................... 3-191

4 P632/EN M/R-a5-B // P632‑312‑660

3.30.2 Blocking CTS ..............................................................................................................................................3-197

P632/EN M/R-a5-B // P632‑312‑660 5

4.2.1 Dimensional Drawings for the 40 TE Case .....................................................................................................4-4

5 Installation and Connection ................................................................................ 5-1

6 Local Control (HMI) ............................................................................................. 6-1

6 P632/EN M/R-a5-B // P632‑312‑660

6.13.7 Resetting ..................................................................................................................................................... 6-33

8 Information and Control Functions ......................................................................8-1

9 IEC 61850 Settings via IED Configurator .............................................................9-1

10 Commissioning ................................................................................................. 10-1

P632/EN M/R-a5-B // P632‑312‑660 7

10.2.8 Completing Commissioning ....................................................................................................................... 10-14

11 Troubleshooting ................................................................................................ 11-1

12 Maintenance ..................................................................................................... 12-1

13 Storage ............................................................................................................. 13-1

14 Accessories and Spare Parts ............................................................................. 14-1

15 Order Information ............................................................................................. 15-1

A1 Function Groups ............................................................................................... A1-1

A2 Internal Signals .................................................................................................A2-1

A4 Telecontrol Interfaces ....................................................................................... A4-1

A5 List of Bay Types .............................................................................................. A5-1

A6 P632 Version History ........................................................................................ A6-1

8 P632/EN M/R-a5-B // P632‑312‑660

1 Application and Scope

1.1 Overview - P632

Fig. 1-1: P632 in an 84 TE sized case.

Fig. 1-2: P632 in a 40 TE sized case.

The P632 provides high-speed three-system differential protection using a triple-

P632/EN M/R-a5-B // P632‑312‑660 1-1

Phase swapping allows motor / generator protection applications with enlarged

1-2 P632/EN M/R-a5-B // P632‑312‑660

Control and Communication 16S 16S 16E CLK Recording and

Optional Always available

Fig. 1-3: Function diagram.

For a list of all available function groups see the Appendix.

P632/EN M/R-a5-B // P632‑312‑660 1-3

1.2 Including Function Groups in the Configuration

1-4 P632/EN M/R-a5-B // P632‑312‑660

1.3 Overview of Function Groups - Part 1

✓ = Standard; (✓) = Ordering option.

ANSI IEC 61850 Function group P632

87T PhsPDIF1 DIFF Differential protection, phase selective 2 wind.

PHAR1 Inrush stabilization (functionality that is part of the ✓